• Author / Uploaded
• JavierVera

• Categories
• Instalación (Programas informáticos)
• Diseño asistido por computadora
• Interfaz de línea de comandos
• Directorio (Informática)
• Software del sistema

Citation preview

Before beginning

Page 1

General conditions for the software usage license 1/ Purpose Metrologic Group develops software applications and proposes them to its customers. These applications are standard software packages that may be complemented by options and/or special add-ons. The list of software that Metrologic Group proposes is given on the front side of this contract. The programs are identified by their references, and are called the "software" in the rest of this contract.

2/ Propriety / Right of Usage 2.1 The software is an intellectual work protected in France by the law of 11 March 1957 concerning artistic and literary propriety and modified by the law of 3 July 1985. According to this law, the customer has only a right to use the software personally, unalienable and without exclusivity. 2.2 The site where the software is installed and the number of licenses are indicated on the purchase contract. This contract needs to be amended before the software can be installed in a different site. Moreover, the number of licenses for a given software delimits the number of users that may execute the software at the same time. At any time, the customer may take new licenses for the use of the software by signing a new contract. 2.3 In consequence, the user agrees not to: a) pass an agreement or convention, whatever the terms, that will have for effect the use of the software by or for a third party, even without charge; b) uncompile or unassemble all or part of the software; c) make a partial or complete copy of the software or its documentation in any form whatsoever. The only copy allowed is a backup or archive copy made by the customer. Such copies are submitted to the same clause as the original software described in this contract. 2.4 Installation of the software(s) requires the use of an access code, a hardware key (dongle) or any system delivered by Metrologic Group in order to control the use of the software license. Important : in the case the hardware key (dongle), is lost, the replacement cost will be equivalent to the license and its options price.

3/ Delivery 3.1 The software is supplied on a computer support such as CD-ROM or any other support that may be read by the machine. The software reproduces the original version as it exists at Metrologic Group. The software is supplied with documentation in one exemplar. 3.2 The software delivery address and the schedule for delivery are mentioned on the front side of this contract. 3.3 The customer installs the software by following the instructions given in the documents. However, if the customer wants Metrologic Group to do this installation, the customer will be charged for the resulting additional costs. All operations in relation to the Metrologic Group hardware or electronics as well as the Metrologic Group machine compensation files shall be performed by Metrologic Group personnel, or by personnel expressly agreed by Metrologic Group.

4/ Guaranty Metrologic Group guaranties to the customer that the supplied software version comprises all the functions described in the user documents supplied to the customer. State of the art and technical limitations make it

Page 2

impossible to assert that the software is free of defects of conception or operation. Thus, for all the software mentioned in the contract, Metrologic Group accords a follow-up period of 3 months free of charge. The content and modalities of this service are described below. 4.1 Content: In the scope of this guaranty, Metrologic Group will fix any reproducible functional non-conformities that might appear when running the software. The term "non-conformity" means operation that is not in conformity with the specifications as described in the user documents supplied along with the software. 4.2 Modalities of execution: Metrologic Group, its Dealers or OEM's reselling the product will reply to telephone calls for any such non-conformities from 9 to 17 hours, Monday to Friday, exclusive of holidays and other days not worked. If there is an immediate solution, the appropriate procedure will be communicated to the customer by telephone. If there is no immediate solution, Metrologic Group will do its best to identify and qualify the non-conformity as soon as possible after receiving the telephone call, and to provide the customer with a solution allowing the customer to obtain the desired result. The customer must give a written description of the non-conformity as noted in using the software, and this either by mail or fax. Any additional expenses for intervention of Metrologic Group on the customer's site, and having for origin bad-handling or error in using the software, will be charged to the customer according to the conditions in application at Metrologic Group the day of the intervention. It will be the same for intervention of Metrologic Group due to a customer's error in handling the equipment and/or associated software, whether or not these were sold by Metrologic Group and whether or not they are maintained by Metrologic Group. 4.3 Limits of guaranty: The software maintenance service is ensured only if the software is used appropriately according to its destination and on adapted equipment. In no case will Metrologic Group' guaranty apply to software that has been modified without its consent or used on equipment and/or basic software that is not adapted. It is the same if the customer decides to use the software on a different site and/or with a configuration different from that initially foreseen. 4.4 In the framework of a maintenance contract, according to the guaranty, the customer may continue to use the technical assistance by telephone for correction of the non-conformities described in 4.2

5/ Duration 5.1 The license(s) for use of the software, the object of this contract, are granted for an unlimited period. However, in case on nonpayment or of partial payment of the licenses for using the software, or in case of the customer's non-respect of any of the other obligations for the right to use the software, non-withstanding any legal action for damage and interest, Metrologic Group may revoke the customer's right to use the software without any prior notice. Such a revocation results in the obligation for the customer to stop using the software immediately, and to return the software with all its supports, including documentation and any partial or total copies the customer may have made.

6/ Price / Payment 6.1 The right to use the software that is the purpose of this contract is granted to the customer in exchange of the payment of its price in a time period indicated on the front side of this contract.

7/ Responsibility 7.1 The customer acknowledges that he has been fully informed of the software's technical specifications and operating conditions, and he uses it under his entire responsibility. It is his responsibility to implement the appropriate operating methods and to avoid any damageable consequences that might result from use of the software. 7.2 Metrologic Group is in no way responsible for direct or indirect damage that may result from the use of the software included in this contract. In particular, the parties agree that in no case will Metrologic Group be liable to reparation for financial or commercial loss the customer suffer.

Page 3

7.3 However, if for any reason whatsoever Metrologic Group' responsibility is engaged for the execution of this contract, the possible corresponding reparation at its charge cannot exceed the reimbursement of the usage license(s) that are the purpose of this contract.

8/Disagreement 8.1 The present contract is submitted to French laws by explicit agreement and this contract represents the totality of the obligations agreed upon by Metrologic Group and the customer concerning maintenance of the software that is the purpose of this contract. For any disagreement concerning the interpretation of this contract, the parties agree to concert to find a amicable solution before engaging any legal action. If no amicable solution can be found, the Grenoble courts have explicit jurisdiction, even if there are more than one defenders or appeal of guaranty.

9/ Special conditions 9.1 The present contract may not be ceded. It annuls, replaces if relevant, any other letter or prior agreement relative to the same purpose. It can be modified only by an additional agreement. 9.2 The present set of clauses replace any others that may be mentioned on the customer's commands for the purpose of the present contract. 9.3 In the case that one clause in the present contract is declared contrary to the law, or in any other way made unexecutable, then this clause will be modified or deleted without annulling the entire contract.

Page 4

How to use this guide

Page 5

User Guide Overview   

This guide is intended to help beginner users starting out with the software and to answer advanced users' specific questions. This documentation is available in .pdf format, thus allowing all or part of the guide to be printed. The Online help may also be accessed while using the software, either via the ? menu or by pressing the F1 key to obtain a description of the current function.

Composition The Online help window contains two tabs: The Search tab, allowing you to perform a search using key words and displays all sections in the guide containing the relevant term. The Contents tab, showing all sections in the guide. These are as follows: 

  

Before beginning, containing: - A presentation of the license contract, the present User Guide, and the software (windows and menus) - A description of the software installation/update/uninstallation and configuration procedures Menus, detailing the menus in the order in which they are displayed in the software user window. This makes navigation between the guide and the application simpler. Special features, describing certain hardware, laser system and poly-articulated arm features for example. Appendices, containing a detailed description of how certain options function.

Page 6

Typographical conventions Boldface > 

...

Software menus, submenus, and function titles are shown in boldface. Example: Menu File > New Working Session This symbol indicates the following step in a path. Example: Start > Programs > Metrolog XG Steps in a procedure.

Underlined in Indicates a hypertext link. Hypertext links take the user to the page in the blue manual on which the relevant function is described. Indicates a note. Indicates an example. Indicates a warning. Indicates an explanation of how a function is used in program mode. When the mouse cursor takes this form when rolled over an image, this indicates a clickable area. Clicking in this area takes the user to the section in which the selected field is described.

Page 7

Software: introduction There are a number of software variants depending on the version installed and options purchased: Simplified geometry, Geometry with 3D View, Surface, Full. If certain features cannot be accessed, check the options purchased in the menu ? > About this Program.

Page 8

Windows: introduction Feature Bar

Result Window

Menu Bar

3D View

Toolbar

Status Bar

Feature Database

DRO

Page 9

Menus

Page 10

File

New Working Session to open a new session. Open Working Session to open a previously saved session. Open Previous Working Session to open the last session used. Save Working Session to save the changes made to an existing session. Save Working Session As to name and save a new session. Delete Working Session to delete a session and the corresponding files. Import to import data in formats other than the software. Export to save the data for an inspection (control) performed -in different file formats. Data Import Wizard to create specific import formats to match user file formats. Edit Informations used to enter information about the work session, traceability information for example. Import informations to import file information from a *.DAT file. Print Report to print work session information for checking/control (in text, graphic or customized mode). Wizard report offers a Wizard to help you create reports.

Page 11

Statistics for statistical processing of a series of measurements. The sub-menu allows you to select Current Control or Statistical Results mode. Archive Current Control allows the current control to be included in the statistical results. Recall an Archived Control used to select one of the controls used for statistical processing. Export Archived Controls to create a text file of the selected controls. Delete All Measured Values used to delete all measured feature values while conserving their theoretical values. Results used to assign certain characteristics to results before printing the inspection (control) report. For example, reverse the deviation sign of features whose nominal X, Y, Z or angular dimension is negative. Recover Automated Backup used to recover a session if the system is subject to a power cut or software crash. Send to used to send a working session by e-mail in HTML format. Publish to publish a session on a Web site. Quit to exit the software.

Page 12

Preferences

This menu is used to mage the software display settings. Open used to open a previously saved desktop configuration. Open Previous to open the last configuration used. Save to save the changes made to an existing configuration. Save As to name and save a new configuration. Change User to change user during a session. Edit Users to manage existing users and create new users. Change Password to change the current user's password. Edit Rules to program (in Visual Basic) feature measurement, definition or construction rules that will then be associated with a user. Lock Windows prevents windows being moved or window size changed.

Page 13

Enable Sound Effects used to enable/disable sound effects for system events, for example during probing. Enable Highlighting, used to identify the current feature by a specific highlighting color (default yellow). Automated Backup to select backup frequency for the current working session. Units to manage the units used for the current session: Millimeters, Inches, Decimal Degrees, Degrees DMS, Grads are the units of measurement (linear dimensions and angles) used when working in the software. Celsius / Fahrenheit to select the units in which temperatures are expressed. Pressure used to choose the unit of pressure in the event of connection with a laser. Form Fault / Standard Deviation to select between form fault type or standard deviation type display in the results window. I J K / Projected Angle to select between display of unitary i, j, k vectors or projected angles on the alignment axes (for the plane, cone, cylinder, and line features), in the results window. ISO, ASME/ANSI to select the Standard to be applied for geometrical tolerance evaluation. Precision to define the number of decimal places (digits after the decimal point) (1 to 6) for linear dimensions and angles. Statistical Units to select the value to be used in statistics, Standard Deviation or Variance. Material Position Symbols used to specify deviation direction. These replace the + or sign of the deviation. Advanced Parameters used to modify the software setup parameters. Language to select the language used in the current work session.

Page 14

CMM

Set-up CNC Parameters used to configure the speed parameters (probing, high and low) and distance parameters (approach, search, and retract) of the CNC. Reset Scales used to reset the scales and/or set reference marks. High Speed This feature allows switchover between high and low speed modes. In program mode, a line showing the new speed is added. The symbol in front of the function (menu item) indicates that high speed mode is enabled. Positioning/Probing used to move the CMM to a given position. Gasket scan used to freely determine the probing path for scanning, in particular to scan a gasket. Use Joysticks in PCS used to move the CMM in accordance with the active alignment axes. Clearance Planes used to configure the function allowing clearance points and/or adjustable head positions to be automatically generated in automatic feature measurement mode to create a program. Expansion/Shrinking used to assign an expansion or shrinking parameter to the measurement (molding). Leapfrog Realignment used to continue workpiece measurement when the workpiece or measuring equipment has been moved. Workpiece Temperature Compensation used to set the compensation of the workpiece to be inspected

Page 15

according to the material used and room temperature. Rotary Table Move to change rotary table orientation. Calibrate Rotary Table to calibrate a rotary table by taking measurements at different angular positions. Activate to render a rotary table operational. Set-up to adjust the speed of rotation of a rotary table according to its maximum speed. Probe/Stylus Changers Activate changer activates the changer(s) and allows specific commands to be sent. Set-up Calibration used to select tool or stylus changer calibration and enter certain settings. Define Slot to assign a slot to a probes file. Store Probe in Slot to place the current probe in its slot. Edit information to modify current probe slot information. Compensation File Information allows you to view the information contained in the file MT23.dat for 23-parameter compensation. Build / Inspect allows real-time display of the deviation between the probe and a list of features and/or a list of CAD entities (Laser system). Station Management used to manage the different stations used in a work session (Laser system).

Page 16

Probes

New File of Probes to create a new set of probes. Open to open a previously saved probes file. Open Previous to open the last probes file used. Save to save the changes made to an existing probes file. Save As to name and save a new probes file. Export Probes List to export the list of probes in the current file and also its characteristics. Edit Informations to add information, traceability information for example, on the current set of probes. Print Probes List to print the list of probes in the current file and also its characteristics. DefineProbe to assign a name and adjustable head position to the probe. Select to select an existing probe as current probe. Calibrate to initialize the current probe on the calibration sphere. Calibrate Cylindrical to calibrate the probe cylinder/shaft. Qualify Probe Head to initialize automatic calibration.

Page 17

Quick Qualification of the Motorized Head for faster initialization of automatic calibration. Add head to display the adjustable head settings in the 3D View. Automated Calibration to perform automated calibration of several preselected adjustable head positions. Unlock / Lock head to unlock then lock again of the measurement head. Locate Calibration Sphere to define a new reference sphere. Locate probes to locate a probes file on a reference sphere. This means that the offsets of the probes in this file are matched to the machine's reference sphere(s). Memorize MASTER sphere used to position the Master sphere with respect to the machine's reference marks/CMM scales to allow compensation to be used correctly. Browse Probes Database to open the database in the Probes tab.

Page 18

CAD

Browse CAD Database used to open the CAD file management window. New CAD file to create a new CAD file in the software format. Open CAD File or Open Previous CAD File to display the part drawing defined in a CAD file that has already been converted to the software format. Import CAD Files used to convert one or more standard format (VDA, SET, UNI) or native format (Catia, UG Parasolid, ) CAD files to the software format. Close CAD File to close all CAD files opened during the session. Delete CAD Files used to delete CAD files in the software format and the associated files. Show Surfaces to display surface type CAD features in the graphic view. Show Curves to display curve type CAD features in the graphic view. Show Points to display point type CAD features in the graphic view. Show Tolerances to display geometrical and dimensional tolerances and reference features in the graphic view. Show Alignments to display alignment type CAD features in the graphic view. Show Meshes to display meshes type CAD features in the graphic view. Orientation mode to display the direction of CAD normals in the open CAD file(s). Advanced Parameters used to modify tolerance character font in the graphic view.

Page 19

Features

Define Feature to enter the nominal values of the features to be measured. These features will be shown on-screen. Measure Feature to probe the features, either automatically or manually. Construct Feature used, on the basis of probed and/or constructed features, to build constructions such as intersections, parallel items, etc. Evaluate used to calculate angles, distances, geometrical tolerances and obtain alignment information. Duplicate to copy information from one feature to another. Reverse Orientation to change feature orientation. Filter to filter measurement points according to specific criteria. Extract Nominal used to search for the coordinates of points in a CAD file and use these to define features. Apply boundaries used to apply boundaries to a feature using one or more planes. This applies to the line, cylinder, cone, and plane features. Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points used to recalculate all surface points by automatically re-evaluating them on all the CAD surfaces according to orientation and proximity criteria. Update Features Nominals to correct a feature's nominal values in accordance with the changes made to the CAD file. Send to TWIN System allows the features measured to be transmitted from one machine to another in Twin mode.

Page 20

Receive from TWIN System allows the features measured to be received from a machine by another in Twin mode. Color Coding used to give additional visual information (color) on feature deviation with respect to its tolerance zone. Set-Up Default Parameters used, for each type of feature, to configure: printing, the minimum number of probing operations required to measure the feature, the default tolerance values, etc. Feature Calculation Mode used to determine surface point N.D. sign display rule. Browse Features Database to manage a list of all the features used in the work session. Manual measurement assistant enables making measurements/acquisitions, one after the other, on the features defined beforehand in the work session.

Page 21

Cloud of points ("Point cloud")

Import allows clouds of points in different formats to be imported. Acquisition allows a cloud of points to be acquired. Export allows a cloud of points or its mesh to be exported in different formats. Filtering allows clouds of points to be edited and modified. Delete all used to delete all clouds of points in the working session. Mesh used to construct a mesh based on the clouds of points. Auto-fit used to automatically create an alignment on the cloud of points so as to have the cloud match the associated CAD model. Quick-Fit used to create an alignment on the cloud of points so as to have the cloud match the associated CAD model by using a small number of points. Best-Fit allows best positioning (best-fit) of a cloud of points on the CAD model. Fit on retrieved features allows best-fit of the current alignment using the features retrieved from the cloud of points. Evaluate Surface Mapping allows the deviations between clouds of points and the corresponding CAD surfaces to be viewed by applying colors to them.

For more information, see Points cloud.

Page 22

Alignment

This menu is used to create/manage the different types of alignment. The software offers eight types of alignment :One point, Model, Geometrical, On 3 Center Points, On Plane & 2 points, On 6 Surface Points, On Reference Features, and Best Fit.

Open used to retrieve a previously saved alignment. Open Previous to retrieve the alignment opened when the software was last used. Save to save the changes made to an existing alignment. Delete to delete one or more alignments from the work session. Activate to select one of the existing alignments. Associate To CAD Alignment to associate/dissociate the CAD alignment with the active alignment. Properties displays the properties of all the alignments used in the work session. One point used to create an alignment orientated in accordance with the existing alignment and centered on the current probe position or on a probing point. Model Consists in probing 6 points on the reference surfaces to create an isostatic reference. Geometrical Consists in using previously measured features to perform the alignment calculation.

Page 23

On 3 Center Points Consists in using three features corresponding to three points (spheres, circles or points, etc.), whose theoretical positions are known, to create an alignment. On Plane & 2 points used to create an alignment from a plane and two points. On 6 Surface Points used to create an alignment by probing six pre-selected points in the CAD file. On Reference Features used to create an alignment by using reference features that block one or more degrees of freedom. The software matches the theoretical coordinates and the real coordinates. Best Fit used to create an alignment with minimum RMS deviation of the selected features. Degrees of freedom may also be set for use in the calculation. Station Orientation used to express the positions of the different stations with respect to a reference station (Laser system). Delete Station Orientation used to cancel station orientation with respect to one another (Laser system). Send to TWIN System allows an alignment to be transmitted from one machine to another in Twin mode. Receive from TWIN System allows an alignment to be received from a machine by another in Twin mode. Browse Alignment Database used to open the database in the Alignment tab.

Page 24

Program

This menu is used to create the measurement programs. New to create a new program in the software language or DMIS language. Open and Open Previous to edit an existing program. Close to close the current program. Save and Save As to save the program in Teach-in mode. Delete to delete a program. Import to create programs from groups of points. Export to create programs to the DMIS standard and in ASCII format. Edit Informations used to enter program-specific information. Print to print the commands saved in the program. Insert opens the following sub-menu:

Page 25

Activate Manual Mode to switch CMM movement mode to manual during program execution. Activate CNC Mode to switch CMM movement mode to automatic during program execution. Activate Low/High Speed to add a command line indicating a speed change. Synchro. with TWIN System to synchronize execution of programs on two CMMs in Twin mode. Subcall Program used to execute a program in another program. If-Then-Else Statement to insert a condition in a program that allows different command lines to be executed depending on the result previously obtained in the program. Insert operator instructions used to insert a text or graphic message to help the operator with program execution. Program Mode opens the following sub-menu: Run to launch the program. Stop and Restart are used to stop the program running and then restart it from the same place. Teach-In to switch to program Teach-in mode. Insert Off-Line allows Teach-in mode to be used without the CMM being moved. Options opens the following sub-menu: Reduce Window to minimize the programming window (displayed in icon form). Enable Path Display allows movement paths to be viewed in the 3D View. Lock Manual Mode prevents switchover to automatic mode in a program. Automated Probe Selection allows the software probes and probes defined in DMIS language to be matched. Prepare Limited CAD File allows the software to select, from the CAD file, the only part to be used by the program. DMIS v4.0 / DMIS v5.0 used to select the DMIS standard. Add auto retract instruction used to add via points before and after each point measured. DMIS refresh parameters used to configure the quick refresh button. Remote Control used to open and run a program from another station ( Twin mode). Mirror Entire Program used to automatically create a mirror program of the current program. Recover Automated Backup used to recover a program if the system is subject to a power cut or software crash. Convert hit-points to geometrical points converts hit-points for a feature into definition and/or measurement lines. List used probes displays a list of the probes used in a program and the number of times they have been activated. Program Wizard to open the program creation wizard.

Page 26

Modules

Assembly optimization used for optimum positioning of at least two assemblies with dynamic tolerance zone constraints. Distance/Angle Quick Evaluation used to calculate a distance or angle without using measured features, by clicking the CAD file Section Tools used to manipulate sections once they have been measured. It is thus possible to compensate for ball radius when scanning, prolong a section using another section, or even trim sections to a precise dimension. Real time export enables the last feature measured to be exported on completing each measurement.

Page 27

3D View

Display Options used to configure the types of features shown and set their display parameters. Color mapping allows a color gradient showing deviation to be displayed. Stickers used to configure and display stickers. Grids to display alignment grids.

Page 28

View to create and display views. Predefined View to display standard views (Right, Top, etc.). Zoom to recenter the view on a selected area. Mouse mode enables the actions associated with mouse buttons to be set up by selecting a mode from Default, Fixed Z axis, CimStation or CAD. Rendering to configure object display in the 3D View (Solid, Wireframe, Colors, etc.). Maximize/Restore View to display the 3D View full-page or restore it to its previous size. Maximize or Restore Active Split View in split 3D View mode, allows the active sub-view to be maximized or the split view to be restored. Split opens the following sub-menu: Split divides the graphic view into 4 parts, the split point is selected with the cursor. Split Automatically splits the graphic view into 4 equal parts. Split Vertically vertically divides the graphic view into 2 equal parts. Split Horizontally horizontally divides the graphic view into 2 equal parts. Delete Split switches the active sub-view to be the only view. Apply Display Options to All Views allows, when the 3D View is split, to apply all modified display options to the non-active sub-views (feature names, family color, etc.). Manual Probing Assistance used to enable visual and/or audio assistance in finding the features to be probed. Detail Feature to create a detailed view of the current feature and display additional visual information. Create BMP, WMF, Jpeg File to create a graphic file from the 3D View, this graphic can then be included in a document.

Page 29

Windows

This menu is used to select the windows and toolbars to be displayed on screen. A window is selected when the button symbol at the start of the line is depressed. 3D View this is the graphic view. It enables workpieces, measurements, probe movements, etc. to be viewed. Alignment view used to view CAD file alignment orientation, even if this is not displayed in the the 3D View due to a zoom operation or the position of the workpiece. DRO window showing current probe position or the results for the last feature measured. Histogram allows distribution of feature measurements with respect to the required tolerances to be viewed. Results shows the result or statistics for a feature and allows certain parameters to be modified. Toolbar used to show or hide the Toolbar. Create a New Toolbar allows different user-specific customized toolbars to be created. Feature Bar used to show or hide the Feature Bar. Status Bar used to show or hide the Status Bar. DRO Settings used to configure DRO window display. Show/Hide Windows used to select whether the DRO, Results and 3D View windows are to be displayed or not. Arrange Windows arranges open windows so that thay are all displayed in the software window. Docking Parameter Preferences to configure window docking on the left or right and whether or not blank bars are to be displayed. Switch the 3D view from/to Metrolog XG (Silma XG) switches the 3D View between two window positions stored in the software.

Page 30

Help

Index to access the content summary of the Online help. Search to search the Online help by key-word. Receive All Product Informations allows online registration (see Installation) to receive regular product update information. Report a Software Problem to send an e-mail message containing information on a problem encountered to the Hotline. About this Program to view software information: version, serial number, configuration, etc.

Page 31

Reference standards The following reference standards are used by the software for calculation and tolerancing. NF EN 20286-1 and ISO 286-1 /(December 93) /classification index: E 02-100-1: this standard describes the tolerance and adjustment (limits and fits) system and gives the calculated values of the fundamental tolerances and corresponding fundamental deviations. NF EN 20286-2 and ISO 286-2 /(December 93) /classification index: E 02-100-2: this standard describes the tolerance and adjustment (limits and fits) system for holes and shafts. NF EN 22768-1 and ISO 2768-1 /(November 93) /classification index: E 02-350-1: This standard describes the tolerance system for linear and angular dimensions without individual tolerance indications. NF EN 22768-2 and ISO 2768-2 /(November 93) /classification index: E 02-350-2: This standard describes the tolerance system for features without individual tolerance indications. ISO 1101: This standard gives the principles for symbols and indications in technical drawings for tolerancing of form, orientation, location and run-out and sets the required geometrical definitions. ISO 5458: This standard completes standard ISO 1101 on location (positional) tolerancing. ISO 2692: This standard completes standard ISO 1101 on the maximum material principle. ISO 2692 amendment 1: This standard completes standard ISO 1101 on the minimum material principle. NF ISO 1660 /(May 89)/classification index E 04-556: This standard covers dimensioning and tolerancing of profiles. DIN 16 901 /(1982): This standard deals with the tolerances and acceptance conditions of linear dimensions for plastic moldings. ASME Y14.5M (1994) : geometrical tolerancing american standard.

Page 32

Installing the software - Open the Windows Explorer. - Insert the software installation CD-ROM in the drive. - Using the Windows Explorer, select the drive containing the CD-ROM. - Start installation by selecting the file Setup.exe. - Follow the instructions given by the InstallShield Wizard installation wizard When the installation procedure is launched, the first window displayed allows installation language to be selected:

- Select the desired language and click Next. When the InstallShield installation wizard is ready, the software license agreement is displayed. It is possible to print then using Print button :

Page 33

- To continue installation, you must accept terms of the license agreement, otherwise the Next button will remain grayed out. A window allowing the different operations that may be performed to be selected is then displayed:

The following different windows will then be displayed according to the operations selected:

Page 34

Install files

- In this window, specify the destination folder in which installation is to be performed. By default, installation will be performed to the folder C:\Program Files\Metrologic Group\Metrolog XG. - To modify this, click Browse and select a Windows folder from the window displayed. - When the desired destination folder has been selected, click Next to continue installation. - In the following window, select the different components to be installed. A detailed description of the component to be installed may be obtained in the right part of the window by selecting the line (the line is then highlighted) corresponding to the component to be installed.

Page 35

- Confirm your choices by clicking Next.

You are then asked to enter the software administrator name and password (if any). By default, the initial user is assigned administrator status, thus granting him/her subsequent user management access. Once the software has been installed, administrators may be added and/or passwords modified. Click Next to continue installation.

Page 36

Enter licensing information (install license code)

Complete the different fields in the Identification window and click OK. The Security.exe window is then displayed with the following message:

The information contained in this window cannot be modified. It simply allows the user to make sure that the key (dongle) and license numbers are correct.

Page 37

Click OK. The following message is displayed:

Click OK to continue installation.

Installation then starts, a progress bar shows status:

Page 38

When installation is complete, the following window is displayed:

- If you choose to register to receive documentation, the following form must be completed:

Page 39

Installation is now complete. The software is ready to be used. For simpler access, shortcuts are automatically created on the desktop and in the Windows Start menu.

Note: Installing a key code At initial installation, the software protection key must be programmed. To do this, first install the driver so that the software can access the key. These drivers are available in the Drivers sub-directory of the software installation directory. HASP key: The driver (hdd32.exe) is located in the directory HASP version 4.98. If the key was not detected with this driver (-1 error at software startup), install the driver provided in the directory Hasp version 4.95. RAINBOW key: The driver (SSD5411-32bit.exe) is located in the directory NT-Sentinel. Select the Windows Start menu > Programs > Metrolog XG (or Silma XG) > Protection, click WebRead to display the programming code, then click Program. The key is now programmed and ready for use with the software.

Page 40

Updating an existing version An existing version of the software may be updated. To do this, run installation:

Select the desired language and click Next. The Wizard will detect any version of the software already installed on the workstation. It then offers to update this version or to install the update in a different folder:

Page 41

If you choose to update the selected product, the following page offers several options:

If you select Modify, existing components may be added and/or removed and updated from this window:

Page 42

If Repair is selected, setup will update (reinstall) all files currently installed on the workstation. The update (reinstall) process is shown by the progress bar displayed in the following window:

When the update is complete, the following window is displayed:

Page 43

For more information on the options available in this window, refer to the Installation and Setup Assistant pages. If Remove is selected, all currently installed components are removed. Uninstallation process status is shown by the progress bar displayed in the following window:

Page 44

If you choose to install a new copy, the standard installation procedure is followed.

Page 45

Uninstalling the software There are two possible methods of uninstalling the software: - Run software installation, select product update, then select Remove. The uninstallation process is shown by the following progress bar:

- In the Windows Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel > Add/Remove programs. The following window is displayed:

Page 46

Click Modify/Remove, the InstallShield Wizard opens:

Page 47

To uninstall, click Remove. Uninstallation process status is shown by the following progress bar:

Page 48

Launch options Run a program from a command line A program may be run from a DOS command line or a shortcut. This function is available in Silma XG and in Metrolog XG. The software execution files are:  

Metrolog XG -> MtXG.exe Silma XG -> SilmaXG.exe

Convention: In the remainder of this explanation, the applications are named *XG.exe. The syntax is as follows: 

Installation directory\*XG.exe Program directory\Program_name.extension

If the program name includes spaces, the syntax is: 

Installation directory\*XG.exe "Program directory\Program name.extension"

Program name may be:  

an XG program: extension *.gm2 a DMIS program: extension *.dmi or *.dms

If the file extension is not recognized, the software starts in standard mode. When the file specified in the command line does not exist, the following error is displayed in the software:

When the program is located in the same directory as the application, it is not necessary to specify the name of the directory.

Example: The MtXG.exe software application and the demogeom.gm2 program are located in the default installation directory: The line inserted in the DOS command is:

Example: The SilmaXG.exe software application and the Demo_dmis.dmi program are located in two different directories. The line inserted in the shortcut is:

Page 49

Notes: 

When the program is run, the following dialog boxes are not displayed:

- Execution start window - Probe statistics window - Window to save the constellation (set) of modified probes - Window to save the modified working session - Execution end window 

When program execution is finished, the software closes. If an error occurred during execution, the software remains open.

Page 50

Operator mode Operator mode is a simplified software mode. By default, it contains the main software functions and is partially configurable. To access this mode, an administrator must have created an operator profile. The operator then accesses this by logging on with the appropriate ID and password.

Note: There are two ways of configuring the operator interface. 

Via the Preferences > Edit Users menu in the software.

See Edit Users. 

Via the Setup Assistant

See Setup Assistant.

The user interface is shown below:

. The functions linked with the F1 to F6 keys of the keyboard are fixed. The six actions determined by these keys are:

Page 51



F1: This function allows the user interface to be exited. The following confirmation message is displayed:

 

F2: Thus function allows reference marks to be taken. F3: This function is used to load a probes file. The following window is displayed:

It is opened at the directory specified in the operator mode preferences. 

F4: This function is used to automatically calibrate the probe.

Note: The probe may be calibrated manually. To do this, simply modify a parameter in the XG_CONFIG.ini configuration file, located in the software installation directory. In the [USER] section: MODEOPERATEURCALIBAUTO=1: default value, the F4 key performs the automatic calibration command. MODEOPERATEURCALIBAUTO=0: the F4 key first opens the probe activation window. Once the desired probe has been activated, the manual calibration window is displayed. When the calibration is complete, the operator interface is re-displayed. 

F5: This function runs the active program. In the bottom part of the operator interface, the folder is open at the directory specified in the operator mode preferences.

Double-click the desired program to run it. After the program is interrupted, certain functions become available: Run, Run step by step, Start from and Close in the program toolbar.

The Close command, represented by the 

icon, returns the user to the operator interface.

F6: This function is used to change user. It is only accessible if the operator mode preferences were selected via the menu Preferences > Edit Users and not from the Setup Assistant.

The functions of keys F7 to F12 on the keyboard may be configured in the operator mode preferences.

Customizing operator mode

Page 52

There are several parameters that may be modified to customize operator mode. 

Modify the title

In the file XG_USER.ini, section [USER]: MODEOPERATEURTITRE=title: allows a title (name) to be assigned to operator mode. The software logo is then displayed in a smaller size on the left. The specified title must fit on one line. 

Assign customized icons

a different icon may be assigned to each program. To do this, place a BMP type icon (preferably 32x32 pixels) with the same name as the desired program in the same directory as the program.

Example: Customizing the operator interface:  

Title changed to Probes Calibration The icon corresponding to the Demogeom.gm2 program has been changed.

Summary of the functions available in the menus when accessed in standard mode: Menu 3D View > Predefined View > Right, Front, Top, Bottom, Back, Left, Iso. Menu 3D View > Zoom > Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Full View, Zoom On Probe.

Page 53

Files to be saved to restore a configuration Given below is the list of files to be saved to restore a configuration known by the software. File

Description

*.ini

Parameter files

MT23.dat

Compensation file

twin.mat

File: Twin alignment

getstyl.dat

File: Stylus changer

putstyl.dat

File: Stylus changer

refstyl.dat

File: Stylus changer

getprob.dat

File: Probe changer

putprob.dat

File: Probe changer

casier.dat

File: Slot changer

license.dat material.dat Usertol.dat

Flexlm local licence Temperature coefficients Customized tolerances

*.xte

Generic accessories

users.usr *.cfg

User management Machine configuration

Location Installation directory Installation directory /USERS/ LOCALDIR Installation directory LOCALDIR Installation directory LOCALDIR Installation directory LOCALDIR Installation directory LOCALDIR Installation directory LOCALDIR Installation directory LOCALDIR Installation directory LOCALDIR Installation directory LOCALDIR Customized user directory Installation directory Installation directory Installation directory /DATA/ (created by the user) Installation directory Installation directory

Page 54

Setup Assistant When installation is complete, you are asked if you want to open the Setup Assistant. This may also be accessed via the file MTXGcfg.exe in the software installation folder, or via the menu Start > Programs > Metrolog XG > Setup Assistant. The Setup Assistant allows you to set up the connection with the CMM, specify tools and peripheral devices, select geometrical compensation mode, and select the graphic engine.

Password entry and configuration import

This window allows you to enter user name and password. This is required to view or modify the software configuration.

Note: Only users having administrator privileges are allowed to modify the set-up parameters. If the Read only mode box is checked, any user can view the set-up parameters but any modifications made will not be saved.

enables several connections using Metrolog XG to be set up (e.g. for multi-tracker operation).

Page 55

Notes:  

If this box is checked when launching Metrolog, a window will appear, enabling the user to select the connections he/she wishes to see available. If a user no longer wishes to work in Multiple connections mode and unchecks the box, this will cause the following message to be displayed:

An OK response will display the Setup assistant in the conventional manner. When installing a new version of the software in a new folder, the configuration of a previous version may be imported directly. To do this, enter user name and password in the Setup Assistant in order to display the button. When this button is clicked, a Windows Explorer window allowing the installation folder for the previous version of the software to be specified is displayed. All set-up parameters that can be modified in the Setup Assistant are then copied from the old version to the new version. This means you do not need to go through the Setup Assistant entering the settings manually. The settings may, however, be viewed or modified in the following pages.

Choice of type of user interface and graphic engine

Page 56

This page is used to configure the type of interface that the user connected will have when using the software: Standard interface: starts in user mode and gives access to all software features. Operator interface: starts the software without user mode and gives restricted access that allows calibration to performed and programs executed from selected files. For more information on this window, see the explanation on operator mode preferences in Edit users. This page is also used to select one of two graphic engines. Click one of the following two buttons to select the DIRECTX or OpenGL graphic engine:

Multiple connections If this box is checked, the following page will be displayed:

Page 57

By right-clicking the window, the connections desired by the user can be added in this context menu.

Right-clicking an existing connection will display this context menu enabling the selected connection to be renamed or deleted.

Once the various connections have been created, click Next to set up the selected connection. Starting Metrolog with the Multiple connections mode active will display a specific window:

Page 58

by checking or unchecking the boxes, selects which connections will be accessible in Metrolog once it has started.

selects the default connection to be used on start-up. stops the choice of connection from being displayed when Metrolog starts up. To restore it, Mterolog needs to be started up while holding down the

button.

confirms the window and starts Metrolog.

Hardware connection

Page 59

This window allows you to select the different hardware components of machine installation. The first part is used to select the type of controller and type of link used for communication with the controller. The following part is used to select the type of head used and the type of link used to communicate with this head. If the controller allows, communication with a console may be selected. See CMM Detector.

If this box is unchecked (deselected), default operation is enabled, i.e. The software will only require scales to be reset at CNC startup if necessary (for example at initial CMM startup). If this box is checked (selected), the software will obligatorily require the scales to be reset at each startup, whatever the configuration. When this box is checked, Off-line mode is enabled but the communication parameter settings are not lost. When this box is checked, it is possible to add an optical sensor. is displayed when the CMM selected is:    

Leica laser tracker Laser API III Laser API via driver DI Laser FARO

Page 60

It is used to enable the workpiece temperature sensor.

Connection to an optical sensor

Select the optical sensor type in the drop-down list. Then, select the TCPIP Address, the Port number and the calibration file location according to the sensor type selected.

Connection to another computer

Page 61

This window is used to configure a connection (Twin or Perceval) with another computer.

CMM and measuring head axis orientation

Page 62

This window is used to select the CMM and head orientation axes.

Controller properties

Page 63

It is possible to chose to display a warning message before the head starts moving. The tool and stylus changer settings are available from this window. The other options available in this window are enabled only when the measurement system selected allows: - The following temperature sensor for parts to be configured:       

B3CLC and Leitz LK Driver 4.2 Mitutoyo direct Zeiss C98 Zeiss C99 Zeiss C98 UDP HSS Generic CMM

- The following rotary table to be managed:        

B3CLC and Leitz Tutor SIP Wenzel WPC2010 Zeiss C98 Zeiss C99 Zeiss C98 UDP HSS Generic CMM

To access the options for the temperature compensation via the unit, check the last option of this window.

Page 64

External temperature compensation via box

This window is used to set the temperature acquisition unit and specify the temperature compensation of the workpiece. It is possible to add, change or delete sensors in the list from the list context menu.

Compensation settings

Page 65

This window is used to select the type of compensation applied on the CMM.

Notes: 

Graphical engine choice

The graphical engine choice depends on the PC's hardware configuration (such as the graphics card) and on the CAD models that have to be processed by the software. To determine the most suitable processor to use: - Choose one of the two graphical engines from the setup assistant. - Run the software. - Open a typical CAD file that you would usually use. - Select the rendering display mode generally used (solid or wireframe). - Hold down the keys + simultaneously and click on zoom in the 3D View toolbar. The workpiece will begin to revolve on the screen. - As the workpiece stop revolving, the software displays the selected graphical engine refresh per second:

Page 66

- Repeat this procedure with the second graphical engine without changing the 3D View size. - Compare the results and choose the graphical engine that gives the best results (DirectX in the example above). 

Features name are always displayed in white in teh 3DView when using DirectX graphical engine, eventhought it is modified.



In Multiple connections mode, the to the connection identification window.

button is replaced by

which reverts

Page 67

Multiplex Using the Setup Assistant, the Multiplex function allowing several machines to be simultaneously controlled via a TCP-IP connection may be configured in the software. To do this, configure the stations in Twin mode with TCP-IP connection, select one station to act as the Localhost on which Twinserver.exe will be run, the other stations being connected to the Twinserver.

Note: During configuration in Twin mode (two machines only), the following procedure must be followed (for stations 1 and 2 only).

Example: Localhost on station 1

Station 2 connected to the Twinserver on station 1

Station 3 connected to the Twinserver on station 1

Start Twinserver.exe on the Localhost station, then start the software on all the other stations. The following message is then displayed:

Page 68

This message shows the number of stations connected to the Twinserver and thus the number of Multiplex stations (three in this example).

On each of the stations connected to the multiplex connection, an additional drop-down list is displayed in the Toolbar:

Add the names of the CNCs of all the stations that may receive items in this list on the different stations that are to transmit data:

The CNC selected from the drop-down list will be the CMM to which the data from this station will be sent.

A CNC name must have been previously assigned to each of the stations that is to receive data via the menu CMM > Set-up CNC Parameters :

Page 69

In program: An additional line is displayed for the station to which the features are sent:

In a DMIS program, the names of the machines entered in the CNC Settings window are the names that will be used for the CRSLCT/CR() command. This is used to define the machine on which the program will be run.

Page 70

Using CMM Detector This function allows automatic CMM detection to be performed. It is accessed via the Setup Assistant:

Click the button. The window displayed allows automatic CMM detection to be performed on the different computer ports:

used to perform automatic detection with the default detection parameters. used to exit CMM Detector without saving the parameters detected.

Page 71

used to preset the type of CMM connected to the computer. The following window is displayed:

Click

to preset the CMM-computer connection parameters. The following window is displayed:

Page 72

Once the parameters have been selected, click this button to close the window and save the communication parameters. Click this button to cancel any changes made and close the window. On return to the main window, the button is no longer grayed out and allows the CMM to be detected while taking the preset parameters into account. When the CMM is detected, the button is no longer grayed out. This button allows the parameters of the connection with the CMM to be saved and CMM Detector to be closed.

Notes: CMM Detector does not detect the type of head installed on the CMM or the console. These must be defined in the Setup Assistant.

Page 73

Environment variables in Metrolog XG and Silma XG

There are two types of environment variables in Metrolog XG and Silma XG:  

System environment variables User environment variables

Page 74

System environment variable Creation and modification of the variables Open the System Properties windows (Right click on My computer > Properties), then click on the tab : Advanced:

Click on this button to open the modification window:

Page 75

Click on this button to add a new variable, then enter its name and file's path in the variable value box:

Click on this button to modify a variable, then change its name and file's path.

Click on this button to apply all the modification.

Page 76

User environment variable Variables for all .Ini files The following variables can be configured by the user.

Note: All along this documentation the parameter “MT2” is used, if you use SILMA XG in stead of Metrolog XG just replace this parameter with a new one : “SILMA” (i.e : MT2_LOCALDIR becomes MT2_SILMADIR when using Silma XG). If you use Metrolog XG and Silma XG on the same computer both parameters could be used without any problems.

Three environment variables are available to change the files localisation: MT2_LOCALDIR : specify all the .ini files and Casier.dat, getstyl.dat, putstyl.dat, getprob.dat, putprob.dat, Refstyl.dat file ‘s path if both following variables are not defined. MT2_USERDIR : specify the users .ini file ‘s path (user.ini, userUI.ini, metropass.ini and metropassUI.ini). MT2_CFGDIR : specify the configuration file ‘s path.ini : XG_CONFIG.ini, XG_DME.ini, MT23.dat,Casier.dat, getstyl.dat, putstyl.dat, getprob.dat, putprob.dat, Material.dat, Twin.dat, ME532.cfg, Sharpe.ini, Cosdat1.bin. If these files are not in this specific folder Metrolog XG will try to find it in the main folder.

The following files are not concerned by the environment variables, they have always to be in the Metrolog XG installation folder : user.usr, usertol.dat, getstyl.dat, putstyl.dat, getprob.dat, putprob.dat.

Rules of Priorities : MT2_USERDIR and MT2_CFGDIR have the priorities on MT2_LOCALDIR. 

If only MT2_LOCALDIR is specified :

XG_CONFIG and XG_DME will be written directly in the MT2_LOCALDIR folder. The Users .ini will be located in MT2_LOCALDIR\USERS\. 

If MT2_LOCALDIR and MT2_USERDIR are specified :

XG_CONFIG and XG_DME will be written directly in the MT2_LOCALDIR folder. The .ini will be located in MT2_USERDIR. 

If MT2_LOCALDIR and MT2_CFGDIR are specified :

XG_CONFIG and XG_DME will be written directly in the MT2_CFGDIR folder. The configuration .ini will be located in MT2_LOCALDIR\USERS\. 

If the three are specified :

XG_CONFIG and XG_DME will be written directly in the MT2_CFGDIR folder. The Users .ini will be located in MT2_USERDIR. 

If no variable is specified

XG_CONFIG and XG_DME will be written directly in the Metrolog XG installation folder. The Users .ini will be located in the same folder than the mt2xg.exe file \USERS\ .

Page 77

General variables 

MT2_Macro

This variable defines the program file ‘s path called when you try to import a working session from « xx.txt,.Prd,.Fra » files. Metrolog XG will load, if necessary, some predefine program from the specific folder of the environment variable. 

MT2_Temp

This variable defines the automatic backup file ‘s path if no file ‘s path is specified these files : $$AUTO.elt, $$AUTO.plp, $$AUTO.rep, $$AUTO.vue, $$AUTO.wif, $$AUTO.wk2 will be written in the Metrologic installation folder. This variable defines the file’s path for the CAD temp too. If the CAD is opened from a server, and that in the XG_config.ini the line : use_cache=1 is added in the [systeme] part, Metrolog XG will create a subdirectory called \CACHE in the directory specified by the variable. 

MT2_Usertype

- If this variable value is : OP the operator level is activated. - If this variable value is : PGM the conceptor level is activated. - If this value is not defined the classic mode is activated. In order to take into account this parameter, it is necessary to edit the XG_CONFIG.INI file and to modify it as bellow: - Open XG_CONFIG.INI. - In the section [SYSTEME]. - Add the following line Os_User=1. - Close and save. - Restart Metrolog XG. If the MT2_Usertype operator variable is equal to OP, Metrolog XG starts on operator mode. If it is equal to PGM, Metrolog XG starts on programmer mode. And then, if it doesn't exist, Metrolog XG starts on standard mode. 

SILMA_Datadir

This variable defines the file ‘s path of the DATA folder, used with Silma XG, if no file ‘s path is specified these files will be called from the subdirectory \DATA\ in the Silma XG installation folder.

Note: For Debug mode, a path is defined in the XG_CONFIG ini file, SYSTEM section: DEBUG_PATH = C:\TEMP. To modify this path, an environment variable named DEBUG_PATH may be created and the desired path assigned to it. When this environment variable exists, the debug file uses the specified path and not the path defined in the ini file.

Page 78

Menus

Page 79

File A working session contains all the information about the aspects of the control performed: nominal data, probing points, associating elements to families, creating view and labelling angles, etc... Thus, a working session in the software format (*.wk2) is linked to 5 or 7 other files, the extensions of which are listed below: In control mode, 5 files are created: *.wk2 *.elt *.rep *.vue *.wif

Saving work; contains the path of the CAD Database of elements used while carrying out the work List and parameters of alignments used while carrying out the work List of views (orientation, associated labels) Informations on traceability contained in "Edit information"

In statistics mode, an additional 2 files are added: *.xst

Index of the different statistical controls

*.sta

Saving of statistical controls

Page 80

New working session This function of the File menu allows you to start a new working session. All user features, alignments and views will then be eliminated and the CAD files will be closed. The current probe file remains active and the machine settings remain unchanged. However, the program will detect whether the working session has been modified since it was last saved (additional features or less features, etc...) and a dialogue box will appear to allow you to save your current working session.

allows you to archive the working session for a statistical control at a later stage. Click on this button, so that the changes of the working session previously opened will be saved in this working session. If the working session has not been saved before, the Save a Working Session window will appear. By clicking on this button, your changes will be lost and a new working session will become available. When clicking on this button, the New working session will be cancelled.

In program: This function can be learned in a program. The following line appears:

Page 81

Open, Open previous This function allows you to open an existing working session previously saved with the Save As function. The following window will appear:

When the working session is open, the current alignment from your last saving of this working session will then be activated. If the work contains surface features and the CAD file of the controlled item is not in the same folder as that of the working session, or if the working session has not been saved with the CAD file open, the following message will appear:

Page 82

By clicking on this button, you can open the necessary CAD file. You are then well advised to save your working session again. The CAD file will then be associated to the working session. By clicking on this button, the working session will be open, but you can make no changes to any surface points, since the CAD file is not open.

Note: Associativity When a feature of a working session has been associated to a CAD and that CAD has then been modified, the following message will appear when re-opening the working session:

Click on this button, so that the definitions of the relevant feature(s) will be updated according to the changes to the CAD file. Click on this button to preserve the definitions of the features before any changes of the CAD file.

Click on this button to open the working session file selected. Click on this button to quit the window, without modifications taken into account.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 83

Save, Save as These functions allow you to save the current working session. Features, views and associated alignments are captured when the document is saved and the paths of the CAD files used are memorised.

Save This function is accessible: - via the File menu -

via the toolbar, by clicking on this button.

The function Save allows you to save the current working session by allocating a name and a folder to it if the work is saved for the first time or to save the changes made in this file. The 'Save a Working Session' window looks like this:

Select the folder to which the working session should be saved and choose a filename. The file will be a *.wk2-file.

Page 84

Save as The function Save as allows you to save the current working session under another name. Then the Save window will pop up as above, allowing you to modify the name and the path of the current file.

Note: When saving a work session, if the CAD files are found either in the same directory or in a sub-directory of the work session, the paths of these files are saved as relative paths. When a work session is re-opened, the CAD files are automatically loaded, and the relative paths automatically converted into absolute paths. This mode of operation can be disabled from the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters, Config tab, section CAD_FILE: RELATIVE_PATH=1; the paths are saved as relative paths, under the conditions specified above. RELATIVE_PATH=0; the paths are saved as absolute paths, under the conditions specified above.

Click on this button to save the working session. Click on this button to quit the window, without saving the current working session.

In program: This function can be learned in a program. The following line appears:

Page 85

Delete This function allows you to delete a working session that you have previously saved as well as all the files related to that session. The following window will appear:

Select the file that should be deleted from the list. Click on this button to delete the selected file. Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.

Page 86

Importing files This function allows you to convert a file into the software format. These are normally text files created in measuring software, digitizing, CAD or optical systems.

In program: Certain imports can be learned in a program. Each import matches with a different line of program:

For more information on an error occurring during program execution, see Error management.

Note: It is possible to force the normal on the X-axis of the geometric points if the normal is null. To do this, it is required to enable the following parameter in the CPREFERPARAM section of the USER tab, in Tools > Advanced parameters: FORCENORMALZIFNULL. A summary of the different formats available with the features of each of them is given in the table below. Import format PNT

Actual values Geometrical points and surface points

PRD OVE SOL CSV INS DMO DES, DAT, OUT, SET Point files: TXT, ASC, XYZ

Nominal values -

Specific to Renault Geometrical points

Geometrical points Specific to BMW

-

All features Specific to Skoda

All features Geometrical points and surface points Geometrical points and surface points

All features -

Page 87

Import from PNT file format (*.pnt)

This function allows you to convert a PNT points file into the software format. This type of file is generally created by measuring software, digitising or C.A.D. tools. These are text files which may contain several groups of points. *.pnt-files containing points are presented as follows:

In the File menu click on Import. The following window will appear:

Page 88

In the "Types of files" line choose *.pnt-format and select the .pnt-file to be imported. The following window will appear:

Page 89

This window allows you to select those points which should be imported. These points can be converted into geometrical points or surface points. Their conversion into surface points is only possible if a CAD file is open. At conversion to geometrical points, the information on ball diameter and the probing retraction coordinates are not used. Only the point ball center coordinates are imported. Hence, the defined part of the point is not created.

Example: The following file is imported:

Conversion is performed into geometrical points, so only the part shown in a red box is used to create point PNT1:

If the selected points are to be converted to surface points, the projection feature can be specified from among all the surface point types available in the software:

A material thickness can be specified for each type of surface point.

and/or an offset

Page 90

or a gap

or an angle

or a radius

allows you to rename the points before importing them. You can then rename the points either one by one:

or to rename a selection of points.

Page 91

allows you to access the Tolerancing Selection window of the points to be imported. The tick boxes indicate which component of the feature should be toleranced and, if applicable, the tolerance value:

allows you to select the alignment in which the conversion is to be made. The default alignment is the alignment which is active in the working session.

allows you to specify, if necessary, the name of the family in which the conversion is to be made. The default family is that of the feature which is active in the working session if that session is not empty.

Page 92

allows you to change the path of the file without having to teach the program line in again when importing a *.pnt-file into a program.

Once the selection has been made and the parameters have been set, click on this button and the points will appear in the working session.

allows you to close the window. The file will not be imported.

Page 93

Import from Text format (*.txt ; *.prd ; *.fra)

Text-files in *.prd-format, which have a particular syntax, have been specifically developed for Renault. Importing *.prd-files enables you to generate a program with a specific structure quickly.

Page 94

Import from BMWMess format (*.sol)

This text-file format, which contains a particular syntax, has been developed for BMW. Importing in this format is done in conjunction with another BMW-specific software tool.

Page 95

Import from CSV (*.csv) and INS (*.ins) formats

In the file File menu click on Import. The following window will pop up:

Choose *.csv or *.ins format in the "Files of type" line and select the file you wish to import. Once imported, these features are defined and can be used directly in the software. The list of imported features appears in the database, with the names of those contained in the file.

Import CSV This format allows you to import the names of features as well as their characteristics into an editable file via Excel. Here is an example of a file in CSV-format:

Page 96

Import INS This text-file format, which contains a particular syntax, has been developed by SKODA. This format allows you to import goemetrical points to measure and distances to evaluate, with comments and tolerances associated. Here is an example of a file in INS-format:

Page 97

In program: It is also possible to define all the features of these files directly in a program. To do this, you only need to open a new software program. All the features of the working session will automatically be there:

Page 98

Page 99

Import from DMIS format ( *.dmo)

This fonction enables users to convert a DMO file into a software file. This conversion can handle most of the DMIS 4 instructions. The picture below shows a typical *.dmo file:

In the File menu, click on Import. The following window pops up:

Page 100

Choose *.dmo extension for the file type, and select the *.dmo file to import. Click on Open, and then features from the DMO file are converted into the software format. These features are then recorded in the Feature database.

Page 101

Page 102

Import from DAT, DES, SET and OUT format

The purpose of this function is to allow a set of points in *.dat, *.des, *.set or *.out format to be imported. These file types are in a document format that can be edited in Notepad. They contain the name of the point features and their characteristics (X,Y,Z coordinates). Example of a file that can be imported :

Such imports allow geometrical and surface points to be defined. This function is accessed via the menu File > Import. Select the file to be imported and file format in the following window :

Page 103

Once the file has been selected, the following window is displayed :

The following information must be entered in this window :

used to enter the ball diameter of the probe used to measure the imported points. This diameter will be used for the compensation calculation. The drop-down menu is used to retrieve a previously entered ball diameter. to enable use of material orientation for compensation calculation.

Page 104

this section is used to enter reference point coordinates. This point will allow a pseudo probing vector to be created, enabling compensation to be calculated with the desired orientation. used to reverse the orientation of the vector created between the reference point and the imported point. This reversal will change compensation orientation.

Note: If the case is not checked (selected), the items allowing compensation to be configured will be grayed out (shaded).

This button is used to cancel all changes and to cancel file import. When all the settings have been entered, click

. The PNT import window is displayed :

Page 105

Page 106

Import from point files (*.txt, *.asc, *.xyz)

This function is used to convert a point file *.txt, *.asc or *.xyz in the software format. The *.txt files containing the points are as follows: Coordinates in XYZ

Name of the point

IJK normal

Four different formats can be detected and imported as follows:    

XYZ: each point is assigned a name by default (1, 2, 3, ...) and a normal of coordinates I=0, J=0 and K=1. XYZ IJK: each point is assigned a name by default (1, 2, 3, ...). Name XYZ: each point is assigned a normal of coordinates I=0, J=0, K=1. Name XYZ IJK: all data is entered (see example above).

The separator may be a space, a comma, a semilcolon or a tab. In the File menu click on Import. The following window will appear:

Page 107

In the "Types of files" line choose *.txt, *.asc, *.xyz format and select the .pnt-file to be imported. The following window will appear:

Page 108

This window allows you to select those points which should be imported. See Importing PNT files (*.pnt) for the description of this window.

Page 109

Export This function allows you to export printable features from the current working session to formats that can be used in different software programs. The following window will appear:

The Format field allows you to select the preferred export format from the pull-down list.

For further details, please refer to the section describing the different formats.

allows you to enter the path and the name of the file to be exported.

allows you to choose from the tree structure the folder in which the file you want to export should be

Page 110

saved.

allows you to add a comment at the beginning of the file. This header can be anything: either a simple comment or the name of a variable entered in the Edit information window accessed from the File menu. In this case, the variable must be written as follows: $?variable?, in order to obtain the value allocated to the variable in the header. In the example, it should be $?PART? in order to get 25A135 in the header of the exported file:

In addition, there are special commands which allow you: $D to indicate the current date $T to indicate the current time

Note: It is possible to prevent the $$ characters at the start of the header lines in the export file from being displayed. To do this, add the syntax $> in front of the comment or the variable called in the Header field of the export file. For example, if the comment $>$?PART? is entered in the header, the header of the export file will be 25A135 instead of $$ 25A135.

Once the work in the file has been exported, you can automatically run an external program. This function is generally used for reprocessing the exported file and for transferring it to an external system for statistical analysis. The name of the program must be entered in this field:

Page 111

If parameters for running the program are required, these should be indicated in this field: .

used to export only printable features. used to display advanced export configuration. The export window is then as shown below:

This mode allows the features to be exported to be selected, whether they are printable or not. Used to remove a feature from the list of features to be exported. Used to open the Feature Database to select the features to be exported. Allows the selected features to be moved to obtain a specific export order (sequence).

Page 112

Opens the Properties window for the selected features and enables the dimension to be exported to be chosen:

The only results that can be exported are: DIM1, DIM2, E.F., X (XoY), Y (YoZ), Z (ZoX). The other fields in this window are grayed out. Used to modify the expression alignment. The name of the expression alignment then appears in the list of features, in the proper column. Restores the original properties of the selected features.

Note: The elements whose properties have been changed are shown in blue on the list of features in the Export results window. The color will revert to black if feature properties have been restored.

Click on this button to export the file. Click on this button to close the window. The file will not be exported.

Notes: 

You can also set the settings of the export path of the file with the function Edit information in the File menu. .

To do this, you must specify a variable, such as " EXPORT = c:\temp\fichier.txt " in the User Data field. When exporting the work, right-click in the Filename field. Then the following menu will pop up:

Page 113

Choose from the list of variables that which corresponds to the name of the file to be exported and to its path.



If several similar working sessions are exported, the filename of the exported file can be automatically incremented, e.g.: file1.txt, file2.txt, etc...

This is possible, because the $ sign can be added at the end of the filename when entering it in the Filename field. You only need to put: c:\temp\fichier$.txt. Thus, when exporting the first working session, the file " file1.txt " will be created. When exporting the second working session, the file " file2.txt " will be created etc. If one $ sign is used, the count will automatically run from 1 to 9. If two $ signs are used, the count will automatically run from 1 to 99 etc. etc 

To use an automatic incrementing mode, you must edit the file XG_USER.ini (containing the set-up parameters for the software), which is located in the installation folder of the software.

Add the following lines which do not exist by default: [EXPORT] Mode=0 or Mode= 1 The 2 incrementing modes for exporting files work as follows: Mode=0 If a file (for instance TEST1.TXT) is deleted, it will automatically be replaced when the next file is exported. The next file of the type TEST$ which is exported will thus be called TEST1.TXT again. Mode=1 If a file (for instance TEST1.TXT) is deleted, the deleted file will not be replaced. The numbering of the files will continue to increase after the last file that has been created. Hence, the next file of the type TEST$ which is exported will then be called TEST2.TXT. 

The table below shows a summary of the various export formats available with the characteristics of each one.

Export format

Measured values

Nominal values

ASCII

All features

All features

All features except Text/Value All features with a center. All features

All features except Text/Value

DMIS IGES IGES GEOM VDAFS

Comments

No feature No feature

Geometrical points and No feature surface points

Page 114

PNT

All features with a center.

No feature

QUARTZ

All features

All features

FI Measurement

Specific to Renault

FI Measurement V2

Specific to Renault

QUANTUM

Specific to PSA

Demerite Pareto

Specific to PSA, it exports out-of-tolerance features

HTML

All features

Probing

All features except Text/Value and Tolerances

No feature

Probing deviations

All features

No feature

ASCII [CAD POS] No feature Mess

All features

All features except Text/Value

All features

All features

Excel

All features

All features

MM3

All features

ASCII Leica Howmet TSV

The diameter of the probe enables the software to compensate features on being imported. Numeric values of tolerances are not exported, just their types, the same applies to Text/Value and Alignment information. Probe diameter is exported. Used by John Deere

Specific to BMW

DML

QSTAT

The diameter of the probe enables the software to compensate features on being imported. Used for imports in the Quartz software

Alignments are exported

Enables a customized header to be used Values measured and defined in accordance All features All features with the chosen option are exported in 1 or 2 files Geometrical points and Geometrical points and Exports weather station surface points surface points information Deviation of the first No feature No feature value of features only All features

Specific to Nissan

The current export unit may be changed with the advanced parameter m_bExpImpInCurrentUnit. M_BEXPIMPINCURRENTUNIT = 0; the unit is the millimeter regardless of the current unit. M_BEXPIMPINCURRENTUNIT = 1; the current unit is used. The exports not concerned by this parameter are: HOWMET, IGES (geometry), VDAFS, MM3, Demerite Pareto.

Page 115

Note: During exports to ASCII or Howmet format, for example during export of values, the number of decimal points in numbers without units can be modified. For this purpose, modify a parameter in the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters, section CPREFERPARAM: M_SZFORMNOUNIT = 0,000000; 6 figures after the decimal point (default value)

Gimmick: DOS commands can be used to concatenate several text type export files. The batch syntax to be used is as follows: type chemin_fichier_à_exporter >> chemin_fichier_concaténation. For example, to convert the ASC.txt ASCII format export files into a CONCAT.txt file, create the following batch:

Then fill in the export window as follows:

In program:

Page 116

All of the following exports can be learned in a program. A different program line will be corresponding to each item that has been exported:

Page 117

Export to ASCII format

This format is proposed to save the results of a measuring session and their comments in a format which can be read with a spreadsheet (with the ";" used as a separator). This type of format exports the nominal and measured values of all the database features. Here is an example of a file in ASCII-format:

Page 118

Export to DMIS format

This format allows to export data from all the nominal and/or measured features, except for Text / value and Alignment info features. An example of a file in DMIS format is show below:

Page 119

Export to IGES format

This format allows you to export measured X, Y, Z data of all features that can be classed as points (geometrical point, circle, arc, sphere, surface point, rectangle, slot, hexagone, ellipse) and sections. If there are families within the working session, groups of the same name will be created when the working session is exported. Here is an example of a file in IGES format:

Page 120

Export to IGES (geometry) format

This format allows you to export the geometry of features as IGES geometrical entities. 2D features are exported as curves and 3D features as surface. Here is an example of a file in IGES (geometry) format:

Page 121

Export to VDAFS format

This format allows you to export X,Y, Z data as well as values of the normal of measured features, such as geometrical points and surface points. Here is an example of a file in VDAFS format:

Page 122

Export to PNT format

This format allows you to export measured X, Y, Z data of all features that can be classed as points (geometrical point, circle, arc, sphere, surface point, rectangle, slot, hexagon, ellipse). Here is an example of a file in PNT format:

The first number, in example no. "10", indicates the number of exported features. The second number, in this case "0.000", indicates the diameter of the ball used for the measurement of exported features. Finally, each feature is defined by two lines, the first one corresponding to the measured value of the feature, while the second one enables the software to apply the necessary compensation when importing this type of file.

Page 123

Export to QUARTZ format

This format is used for the reprocessing of data via the QUARTZ statistics software. It allows you to export nominal and/or measured valued from all database features. Here is an example of a file in QUARTZ format:

Page 124

Export to FI Mesure / FI Mesure V2 format

This format, which has been developed for Renault, is a text-file format with a specific syntax. Exporting in this format is done in conjunction with additional Renault software tools.

Page 125

Export to QUANTUM format

This format is used by P.S.A for its statistics software. This is a text-file format which has a particular syntax containing measured values, without denominating the features.

Page 126

Export to Demerite Pareto format

This format, which has been specifically developed for P.S.A., can only be used for exporting features outside tolerance. A "note" in the form as an asterisk will be allocated according to the extent of the deviation measured.

Page 127

Export to HTML format

This format allows you to export the values of all database features as well as graphic views that have been saved. The HTML-pages thus obtained can be opened with Internet Explorer (V4.0 or higher).

This field allows you to go directly to the results of your chosen features:

This field allows you to display your chosen view:

Page 128

Page 129

Export to Probings format

This format allows you to export from all measured elements, except for Text / value and Alignment info features. Here is an example of a file in Probings format:

The first number under "Raw", in this case "6", indicates the number of probing points for the feature placed underneath it. The second number, in this case "2.990", indicates the diameter of the ball used during measuring. Finally, each point is defined by two lines, the first of which corresponds to the measured value of the feature, while the second allows the software to apply the necessary compensation while importing this type of file.

Page 130

Export to Probe Deviation format

This format allows you to export probing points from all database features. It also shows the constructions and tolerances.

Warning: For features such as tolerances only one comment line is created, indicating, for instance, that a flatness on a diagram is required. There are no numerical values. The same goes for Text/value or Alignment info features.

Here is an example of a file in Probe Deviation format:

These lines for defining probing points are expressed as follows: 2

2.990

number ball of probing diameter points

-5.828

-0.002

-77.412

0.998

-0.065

0.000

X

Y

Z

I

J

K

0.001 Deviation from the calculate d feature

Page 131

Export to ASCII [CAD POS] format

This file format, which has been specifically developed for John Deere, allows to associate stickers on the features when imported into the company's software. Only specified features are exported, except for Text / value features.

Page 132

Export to BMW Mess format

This text-file format, which has a particular syntax, has been developed for BMW. Exporting in this format is done in conjunction with another software program only used by BMW.

Page 133

Export to DML format

The DML format is a standard format for structured data exchange, based on XML format. This format allows you to export: - nominal values, measured values, deviations and tolerances of features, - geometrical tolerances, - alignments. Here is an example of a file in DML format:

Page 134

Export to EXCEL format

This format allows you to export the entire results of nominal and/or measured features from a document in Excel via a macro. This Excel macro, which can be edited, allows you to reformat the exported data.

Stage 1: Installing the Excel export module.

Install XgOfficeSetup.msi which can be found in the folder ..\XgOffice from the software installation CD.

Double-click on this file to launch the installation. The following window will appear:

Click on Next.

Page 135

Select installation folder and specify user, then click on Next.

Click on Close.

Page 136

Stage 2: Setting the parameters for the Excel export module

Open the file XlStarter.ini which can be found in the software installation folder. - Specify the path of the Excel file which contains the macro to be used for exporting, using XlsPattern parameters. - Specify the name of the macro which will be used for exporting, using MacroName parameters.

Stage 3: Using the Excel export module

Using the Excel export module File > Export menu. - Select the Excel export format. - Specify path and destination filename. Click on Export.

Here is an example of a file in Excel format:

Page 137

Page 138

Export to MM3 format

File export in *.MM3 format allows a file to be created using a special header, created according to user needs. To do this, a parameter in the XG_USER.ini file must be modified. This parameter is used to inform the software which header file to be used: [CEXEEXPORTERTRAVAIL] M_SMM3NOMFICHIERENTETE=C:\Header.txt

Example: header file used for export in *.MM3 format:

There is no specific formal format to be used when creating the header file, except that system variables must be enclosed in { and } brackets. At export, the header file will be inserted "as is" in the file created. Only the system variables will be replaced with their values. There are two specific variables for this type of export. The JOBDATE and JOBTIME variables are automatically completed and allow the date and time of the export to be shown in the header. When exporting, the user is requested to enter the other variables in the following window :

The MM3 file created has the following format :

Page 139

Note: Comments may be exported using the Text/Value features. To do this, define a printable Text/Value feature of None Action type with a first result line that is not printable.

Page 140

Export to QStat format

A software work session file can be exported in QStat software format (*.DFQ). To do this, select Qstat export format in the following file export window:

Two parameters allow the Qstat export procedure to be configured. In the XG_USER.ini file, in the [Dmo2Qstat] section, configure the following settings (the default setting is 1): 



OneFileOut: if set to 0, a *.DFX file containing the measured values and a *.DFD file containing the nominal values will be created. If set to 1, a single *.DFQ file containing both the nominal and the measured information will be created. CreateLogFile: if set to 1, a *.LOG file containing a report on execution of the Qstat export will be created.

Notes: This type of export can be performed via the following DMIS command: CALL/EXTERN,SYS,'C:\Metrologic Group\Metrolog XG\dmo2qstat.exe',ATTACH,'C:\EXAMPLE.DMO','C:\EXAMPLE','0','C:\EXAMPLE.LOG' Description of the syntax used:     

C:\Metrologic Group\Metrolog XG\dmo2qstat.exe: specifies the access path to be used for conversion. ATTACH: allows export of the *.DMO file created by the DMIS program at the end of program execution. C:\EXAMPLE.DMO: specifies the *.DMO file to be exported. C:\EXAMPLE: shows the name of the file(s) to be created. 0 or 1: if set to 0, a *.DFX file containing the measured values and a *.DFD file containing the nominal values will be created. If set to 1, a single *.DFQ file containing both the nominal and the measured information will be created.

Page 141



C:\EXAMPLE.LOG: specifies whether or not an export *.LOG file is to be created. If this parameter is not entered, a *.LOG file will not be created.

Page 142

Export in Leica ASCII format

This format is offered to save the results and comments for a measurement session in a format that can be read in a spreadsheet program (the separator is the ";" character). This type of format is used to export the defined and measured (nominal and actual) values of geometrical points and surface points. The values exported are: - The defined and measured (nominal and actual) values of the point - The nominal and actual values of the normal - Family name - Tolerances - ID of the reflector used for the measurement - RMS - Temperature - Pressure - Humidity - The date and time the points were selected An example of a file in Leica ASCII format is show below:

Page 143

Howmet Export

This format is used to export deviation and tolerances of the first value (or dimension) of all printable features. This is an example of a file in Howmet format, where the ND of the surface points is being exported:

Certain variables require to be present in order to perform this export: The following variables are to be included in the working session information, which can be accessed from Working Session > Edit Information: - HOWMET_SERIAL is to contain a maximum of 14 characters. - HOWMET_OF is to contain a maximum of 8 characters. - HOWMET_NO_ACTIVITE is to contain a maximum of 14 characters. 

Note: The "." and "_" characters may be used in the HOWMET_SERIAL variable. The following variable is to be included in the program information, which can be accessed from Program > Edit Information: HOWMET_GROUP is to take the following form: - 1 letter - 5 alphanumeric characters - 1 space or alphanumeric type character - 3 alphanumeric characters 

Page 144

Export in TSV format

Files in *.tsv format have a special syntax, developed for the Nissan company.

Page 145

Data Import Wizard

This function is used to create specific import formats to match user file formats. The formats thus created can be used in the same way as any other existing default software format.

Page 146

Define new format

A new data import format is defined from an example file in which a certain number of rules must be described - that will be used when this format is imported. The import rules are defined in three steps: - File organisation : definition of the useful part of the file, - Data organisation: description of the data contained in the file, - Features association: correspondence between the data contained in the file and the data required to generate feature (geometrical point, circle…). Note: Only files that can be edited in a notepad can be used in the Data Import Wizard. Binary files cannot be used.

Select the file to be imported in the window that appears when this function is selected :

Each Wizard window is divided into two parts: - the upper part, used to define the parameters, - the lower part, that displays configuration incidents in real time.

Page 147

File organisation

Page 148

This window is used to define all the parts that are not to be included in the following step. Three are three types of zones to be excluded (they are shown in blue in the file preview): - File head, - End of file, - One or more lines/strings mixed with the data. 

File head

Used to limit the file header by specifying a set number of lines. In this case, empty strings can be ignored. Used to delimit the file header by using a key word from the file. 

End of file Used to define the end of the file by specifying a set number of lines. In

Page 149

this case, empty strings can be ignored. Used to define the end of the file by using a key word from the file. 

Ignore

It is also possible to ignore lines starting by, including, or ending by a key word or a specific character via the corresponding fields. Empty strings may also be ignored. To add a term, enter it in the appropriate field, then click this button. To remove a term, select it in the list, then click this button. 

File preview

The different functions that can be accessed from the file preview window context menu are (x being the character string selected in the preview):

The fields in the upper part of the window are automatically completed when the context menu is used.

Note: Please bear in mind that the Data Import Wizard is case sensitive (upper and lower cases letters are considered as different) for term search in the file to be imported.

Data organisation

Page 150

This window is used to describe the data contained in the file. Only the useful parts of the file are displayed. This step allows the elements to be described in number of lines and/or number of data items per line. An element contained in the file has the following obligatory characteristics: - A start, - An end, - Data, - A correspondence (or not) with a software element (a transformation matrix contained in the file does not generate elements but may be used for element creation). A file may contain several types of entity that necessarily differ by a key word.



Data splitting

There are two methods of defining data separation into columns:

Page 151

- By using a specific character as data separator.

The separator may be a tab, a comma, a dot comma (semicolon) or a space. Check (select) the corresponding box to select the desired separator. If the final box is selected, a user-specified character (defined via the Define as separator option of the context menu) will be used as separator. If a separator used several successive times is used, a column will be created for each separator character found. Several columns will thus be empty and therefore of no use. Select this option in order to avoid taking adjoining separators into account. Select this option in order to maintain the separation between data items. This may be desirable in certain cases in order to remain close to the initial file. - By using a column number. However, the columns must be previously defined in the Wizard. To do this, create the column separators by clicking in the position indicator. Then select and move them. A separator may also be positioned by placing the cursor at the desired location and selecting the Insert a column option from the context menu.

To delete a column indicator, right-click it and select Delete from the context menu.



Define character for merging cells

If certain items of information must not be "cut" by a separator, the Define character for merging cells box must be used. This function also allows a specific character in a given item of information to be deleted. When a box contains a merge character, the text in the box is displayed in pink.

Example: The selected merge character is ". The boxes containing this character are displayed in pink:

Page 152

The box in line 1 and column 4 will return the value PLANE BASE OF PART and not "PLANE BASE OF PART".



Data arrangement

After determining how the data is to be separated, information on the start and end of the elements must now be entered. To do this, a list of arrangement rules allows the different rules created to be viewed:

To create a data arrangement rule, you may use: - the existing default rule by double-clicking it to edit it.

-

this button, that allows a rule to be added.

- a term selected from the file display, then selecting the Define as element start option from the context menu. A data arrangement rule is created in the following window:

Page 153

This window is used to specify: - the starting key word of the element. - the short name of the rule (used in the following step). - a unique column. This allows the column in which the starting key word or ending key word is to be searched for to be specified. If this function is not used, the entire file is searched. - the ending of the element (fixed number of lines, key word or constant column, i.e. while the value given in this column remains constant). This key word may be selected directly from the file preview by highlighting it, then selecting Define as element ending from the context menu. - creation of inspection data. This function specifies if the element to be imported is a geometrical element. If not, the element may be a coefficient or any other value that can be used at export.

To create a rule, the following must be given at minimum: - A starting key word. - An ending.

A data arrangement rule is edited by: - Double-clicking the rule to be modified. - Editing each of the fields accessible in the list of data arrangement rules. This button is used to display the rule editor window. This window is identical to the window for rule creation, except that the Starting key word field is not accessible. This button is used to access the following menu, used to edit the ending of the element:

used to delete the selected rule.

Page 154

and directions.

are used to search for the following selected data arrangement rule in the up or down

The different functions that can be accessed from the file preview context menu are:

or

- Define as separator: used to create separators delimiting columns. This command can only be accessed when data separation is by one or more specific characters. - Define x as element start: used to define the highlighted term as element start indicator. - Define x as element ending: used to define the highlighted term as element ending indicator. - Check only in column x: allows the column in which the starting key word or ending key word is to be searched for to be specified. If this function is not used, the entire file is searched. - Element ending on column value change x: used to determine the ending of an element on a value change in column x. - Insert a column: used to insert a column separator. This command can only be accessed when data separation is by column numbers. - Find automatically elements start from column x: allows data arrangement rules to be automatically created by referring to the selected column. - Define character for merging cells: used to avoid splitting information containing the character defined as merge character.

Once data separation has been performed, you can see how the file to be imported is split up in the lower part of the window:

Page 155

Features association

Page 156

This window is used to associate the previously defined entities with software elements, whether this be the defined and/or measured (nominal and/or actual) part. This step involves describing how the data in the file is organized so that the software can then import this file format automatically. File entities must be defined for each type of element. To do this:

Select the type of element to be defined from the drop-down list. Different types of elements may be defined for a single export format. The elements available are Circle, Cylinder, Line, Plane, Surface point, Geometrical point and Sphere.

Page 157

Determine the type of condition to be applied: - None: No specific condition will be applied. - Equal: The defined element will not be imported if the equal condition is met (true). - Contain: The defined element will not be imported if it contains the character string specified in the field.

Examples: 

means that if the box in line 3 and column 2 belonging to the rule named NA has the character string 702, then the element for which this condition is true will not be imported.



means that the element will only be imported if the character string IMPORT is present in the element.

Allocate the "boxes" of the file to be imported to each of the fields allowing the element to be defined. To perform this allocation: - Select the "box" to be allocated in the above window by directly clicking in it. A data entry field is displayed. - Select the value to be used in the import file preview by clicking it. The import file value name will be automatically entered in the "box" in the description window . The syntax used to name the value used is simple. It comprises the short name used in the previous step to define a data arrangement rule, the number of the line of the selected value and the number of the column of the selected value. VAL allows the numerical value of the data item to be obtained (as opposed to its value as a character string). - Repeat these operations as many times as required to fully define the required information. These steps are to be performed for each type of element to be imported. By default, the Wizard offers an automatic name as element name. In the example, corresponds to the automatic name given to a point, the prefix being PT. However, this default prefix may be modified using the button. This opens a window allowing the default name of the element to be modified:

Page 158

If no orientation is to be specified, for geometrical points for example, 0 must be entered in the I, J and K "boxes". The Data Import Wizard will then be displayed in similar manner to that shown below, once all the fields have been completed:

Page 159

Saving the import format Click this button to finish defining the import rules. The Wizard then offers to save the import format created:

Page 160

In this window, specify: - The name of the format created (displayed in the file import window). - A comment on this file format. This will be displayed when this import format is edited. Click this button again. The Wizard then offers to import the file used to create this import format:

The import format created can now be directly accessed from the file import window like any format available in the software by default:

Page 161

The import format is saved in the directory IDPRules, located in the software installation directory. If an environment variable is used, the import format is saved in the directory LocaldirIDPRules, located at the same level as the Localdir directory of the software.

Page 162

Edit existing format

An existing file import format may be modified. Only user-created formats may be modified. When this function is called, a window is displayed listing all the import formats created:

The formats created are listed with their name, extension and any comments. used to delete the selected import format. closes the window without applying any changes made. to move to the next step in the selected import format editing process. The following window is then displayed:

Page 163

This window is used to edit the File organisation parameters, as described in defining a new format.

Click this button to display the following step in the editing process:

Page 164

This window is used to edit the Data organisation parameters, as described in defining a new format.

Click this button to display the following step in the editing process:

Page 165

This window is used to edit the Elements association parameters, as described in defining a new format.

allows advanced editing of the import format currently being modified:

Page 166

A user-created import format may thus be edited directly from its code. The language used is the DMIS language.

Note: Any modification of the rule in advanced mode renders it unusable by the Wizard and it can then only be displayed and edited in advanced editing mode.

Page 167

Edit information This function allows you to view traceability information related to the work in progress and to add further informations if necessary. The Edit information window looks like this:

There are two categories of data:

System Data The system informations cannot be modified by the user, since they pick up the entire informations linked to the current working session.

Example: A_CAD_FILE: name and saving path of the CAD file related to the work A_CAD_DATE: date of the working session WORK_VERSION: version of the software in which the work was created

User Data: The user informations are created and edited by the user. They must take the form "variable=value", as in the example above.

Page 168

These variables can be used in 4 different ways: - as informations to be viewed - as values when exporting work: where the variables appear in the header of the exported file - as variables when teaching in or operating a program - as values when printing the report

Click on this button to save the informations entered Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.

In program: This function can be learned in a program. The following line appears:

Page 169

Import information

This function is used to import file information from a *.DAT file. When this function is selected, the following window is displayed:

Select the *.DAT fto import the information contained in this file into the current working session file information. The *.DAT file must have the following type of format:

Once this file has been imported, *.DAT file variables may be displayed in the working session information:

Page 170

Note: These variables may be retrieved in a Text/Value of mathematical expression type by using the WORKINFO function. See Operators and functions for the calculator.

In program: This function can be learned in a program. The following line appears:

Page 171

Print Report Once Once you have performed the control of an item, you can print the results. You can either print them in the form of a table of results or a view defined in the software, containing precise informations. It should be noted that when the statistics mode is activated, the printed results will be the statistical results. Otherwise, it will be the results of the current control.

The Report window To print a report, select Print Report from the File menu or click on window will appear:

in the toolbar. The following

By clicking on this button, you can choose the available printer or default printer by ticking the corresponding box and you can also define its properties. Tick this box to select the printer which is set up as a default printer. By ticking this box you can save a report to be printed in .pdf-format. If the box is ticked, the following window will appear, enabling you to choose the access path and the filename:

Page 172

You cannot create a PDF-file unless Acrobat Writer or the shareware PDF995 Printer Driver is installed. If neither of these are installed, a software message will invite you to download the PDF995 Printer Driver. allows you to specify the path and the filename of the *.pdf -file created. The name of the *.pdf-file may contain $-signs, so that the count of the filename automatically increases as you print. The path and/or the filename may be the software user variables. Then choose the orientation of the pages to be printed. You may choose Default, Portrait or Landscape. Then specify the number of copies of the report. allows you to print a report by sorting the features of the work to be printed by family Print by family.

allows you to specify a maximum number of features to be printed per page. This is, above all, useful when printing graphics reports with stickers: limiting the number of features, and thus stickers, will make the printout more legible. ticking this box allows you to print a report more quickly, although it will be of slightly lesser quality. This may be useful when printing a table of results where the accuracy of the printout is not absolutely vital. allows you to print to a 'Black & White' printer. In that case, the colours Red and Green of the stickers will be Black and White.

allows you to select a graphics report.

allows you to select a text report.

Page 173

allows you to select a a combined report.

allows you to select a a split-views report.

allows you to select a a customized report.

allows you to access the Print editor by opening the report template selected above in order to modify it. allows you to access the Print editor by opening a new template in order to create a customized report. allows you to access the Wizard report. allows you to print the report, once the parameters have been specified in this window. allows you to do a print preview with the parameters specified in this window. allows you to close the print window.

used to display advanced print configuration. The print window is then as shown below:

Page 174

This mode is used to print a selection of features, as well as to modify the printing properties of these features (printing properties or expression alignment).

Used to open the Feature Database to select the features to be printed.

Used to remove a feature from the list of features to be printed.

Used to move the features selected in order to have a specific printing order. Used to open the Properties window of features selected and to choose the dimension that should be printed:

Page 175

The only results that can be exported are: DIM1, DIM2, E.F., X (XoY), Y (YoZ), Z (ZoX). The other fields of this window are grayed. Used to modify the expression alignment. The name of the expression alignment then appears in the list of features, in the proper column. Used to restore the original properties of the features selected.

Note: Features whose properties were modified appear in blue in the list of features of the print windeow. In case the feature properties were restored, the color returns to black.

Operating principle of reports Reports, no matter what type, always consist of two pages: - The first page can be used as a front page. When printing, the data contained in this page will appear on the front page only. - The second page is to be used as the formatting to be applied to all other pages. The data contained in this page will appear on all the following pages.

Note: In order to display a table on all the pages of the report, you must insert it in the two pages.

In program: This function can be learned in a program. The following line appears:

Page 176

Report types

The software distinguishes between 5 main types of reports: the graphics report, the text report, the combined report, the split-view report, the customized report.

Graphics report This is a report which only contains a graphics view, which is either the current view of the working session or a view which has been pre-defined by the user. A template for this type of report, called GRAPH.DEF, can be found in the tree structure of the program.

This button in the print window also allows you to access it. The graphics report is structured as follows: - an area for variables to be entered when launching the print - a histogram of the entire features of the working session - a graphics view

Text report This is a report format which only contains a table of results of those features of the working session to be printed. A template for this type of report, called TEXT.DEF, can be found in the tree structure of the program.

This button in the print window also allows you to access it.

Page 177

The text report is structured as follows: - an area for variables to be entered when launching the print - a table of results with the following data for each feature: its reference, its nominal values, its measured values (actuals), the higher and lower tolerances, the deviations from these tolerances for each of th its dimensions and an indication of the tendency (a graphic if the dimension is within the tolerance, a value if the dimension is outside the tolerance) - in addition, a small view is inserted above to illustrate the report

Combined report This is a report which contains a graphics view and a table of results of those features of the working session to be printed. A template for this type of report, called MIXTE.DEF, can be found in the tree structure of the program.

This button in the print window also allows you to access it. This combined report is structured as follows: - a graphics view in the first half of the first page

Page 178

- a table of results in the second half of the first page and on all the following pages - an area for variables to be entered when launching the print

Split-view report This is a report format which contains All user-defined views in the working session. The purpose of this

Page 179

type of report is to be able to print All user-defined views automatically in one program. A template for this type of report, called allviews.def, can be found in the tree structure of the program.

This button in the print window also allows you to access it. The split-view report is structured as follows: - an area for variables to be entered when launching the print - a 'split-view'-type graphics view

This button in the toolbar allows you to include several 'split-view' views on one page. Once the view has been inserted into the page, right-click to access the Properties window and select the option All user-defined views in the View field.



Split-views, only on the first page of the report

If the 'split-view'-type views are only included on the first page, all the objects around them will be repeated in the following pages, automatically created. Several 'split-view'-type views can be included in the first page. In this case, each view created in the working session will be printed on each view of the report, as in the example below:

Example: 4 'split-view'-type views

Page 180

In this example, all the following pages will be printed in the same way, with 4 views per page:

Page 181



Split-views, only on the second page of the report

The behaviour remains the same, only that the first page serves as a title page containing the title.

Example: - The first page is a title page - The second page contains 2 split-views

Page 182



Split-views on both pages

By inserting 'split-view'-type views on both pages, you can obtain a title page which contains both a title and one or more of the user-defined views, as well as a second page which contains the remainder of the user-defined views.

Example: - The first page contains the title, an image and a 'split-view'-type view. - The second page contains 1 split-view.

Page 183

In this example, All user-defined views will be printed at a rate of 1 per page.

Customized report The 4 types of reports presented above are just examples and can, of course, be edited and modified. You may also create your own report entirely on your own, using the Print editor.

Page 184

Print Editor

The report editor may be accessed: - via the Print window:

Click on this button to edit the selected report. Click on this button to create a new report.

- via the Report Wizard, by selecting the Print report option in the final window.

Toolbars The Print Editor has two types of toolbars: - a Windows-type toolbar

Page 185

- a software-specific toolbar:

Display a grid on the pages being created to facilitate the alignment of the object(s) inserted. Display page margins of the report and modify them if necessary. Zoom up or down the view of the report. Insert a table of results into the report Insert a graphics view of the program into the report. Insert an image in *.bmp, *.emf or *.wmf-format into the report, for example the company logo. Insert a histogram of a feature.

Page 186

Insert a text box Insert one or more pre-defined or customized variables.

Insert a circle, a rectangle or a straight line.

Insert a legend.

Right, left, top and bottom alignment of selected objects

Re-dimension selected objects according to the height or width of the object last selected. Centre an object vertically or horizontally in relation to the page or to the object last selected, if this is the case.

Notes: 



If you want to insert an object, click on one of the above icons. The mouse cursor will change. Then click on the insertion point of the object and draw a window with the cursor in which the object will be inserted. If you want to select several features in order to align them or, for instance, change their font, click on the first object, then hold the objects in the report.

key of the keyboard down at the same time as clicking the other



To check the actual dimensions of an object, just select it with your mouse and read the information displayed in the bottom right-hand corner of the graphics window.



You will also see the current cursor position at the bottom of this window. When an object contained in the report is selected, it may be positioned accurately by using the arrow keys (for minor adjustments) or the arrow keys + SHIFT (for quicker adjustments).

Context-sensitive menu By right-clicking on one of the objects, you will open up a context-sensitive menu which enables you to access the Properties of that object and either choose Bring To Front or Send To plan, according to whether you want to position it as First or Second in relation to the other objects:

The Properties function of the context-sensitive menu enables you to access a feature display control window:

Page 187

This window contains a viewing area and different buttons which you can use for setting the display of the feature.

This field (which is not available for View, Image, Histogram and Line objects) allows you to choose the colour of the filling of the object or to tick the checkbox to make it transparent.

In this field you can choose the colour of the border. The horizontal button allows you to adjust its thickness.

The context-sensitive menu related to the lines enables you to modify the type of line to create arrows.

This field (which is not available for Circle and Line objects) enables you to choose

Page 188

in the same way the colour and thickness of the shading. You may also choose the type of arrow from the pull-down menu:

Click on this button to save your changes. Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.

Insert table When the icon for inserting a table is activated, the mouse cursor will change and allow you to decide where you want to place the table and you can also adjust its size. Once the table has been inserted, yu can set its parameters either by double-clicking on it or by right-clicking and choosing Properties from the context-sensitive menu. Then the following window will appear:

Page 189

In the Features section: Use this button to display in the table only those features of the working session to be printed. Use this button to select those features to be printed even if they cannot be printed in the database. When choosing this mode, the database window will pop up:

Select the features to be printed, then confirm. A list of these features will be displayed in the Features section.

The Filter Features section allows you to filter features according to the value of the deviation in relation to the tolerance. This gives you the option to print only those features that are within the tolerance zone, or, you can do the opposite, i.e. only print those features that are outside the tolerance zone, or you can combine these different filters.

Page 190

The Column section enables you to work on the table columns. Click on this button to create a new column. Enter its title in the field provided and tick the box to show the title in the table. Select the value of this new column from the list. In order not to split two columns, select one of them and remove the tick from this box. Use these buttons to modify the column width. To relocate a column, select it and drag it with your mouse to the location of your choice. or

These buttons can be used for navigating from one column to another. To delete a column, select it and click on this button.

Click on this button to save your changes. Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved. Use this button to modify the table font: choose the character font, size, style and perhaps the colour. Use this button to access the Advanced Parameters of the display of results via the following window:

Use this field to modify the number of figures displayed for the actual and nominal

Page 191

values of the feature. Use this pull-down menu to modify the precision for the actual and nominal values of the feature. Use this field to modify the number of figures displayed for deviations and tolerances. Use this pull-down menu to modify the precision for deviations and tolerances. Tick this box to arrange the geometrical tolerances. Click on this button to save your changes. Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.

Insert a view When the icon for inserting a view is activated, the mouse cursor will change and allow you to decide where you want to place the view. The view inserted by default is the current view. You can modify the view and set its parameters by double-clicking on it or by right-clicking and choosing Properties from the context-sensitive menu. Then the following window will pop up:

Select the view to be displayed in this field: the current view of the working session or one of the views saved by the operator. The selection Family View is applied when Printing by family The selection All user-defined views is applied when choosing a multi-view report It is possible to display the view's name in the top left hand corner of the view when printing a report.

Page 192

When the view is displayed, you can add a lighter or darker frame marking the border of the view as well as a shading round this frame.

You can also specify the scale of the view. If you enter 0, the view will be printed without scale factor. In the case of a combined report, with a graphics view and a table of results on the same page, the software may allocate stickers automatically to the view, i. e. the stickers created in the view will correspond to the features contained in the table on each page. To choose this option, you only need to tick this box. For this operating mode, you will need a table of results and a view for which you will have set as a parameter the option Auto Stickers each page of the report. To do this, the current view must not contain any stickers and the type of stickers you wish to apply to the report must be defined in the 3D View > Stickers. Tick this box to stick stickers without gap. In the following example, the stickers correspond to the features appearing in the table:

Page 193

The view inserted may be edited. To do this, right-click the view and select Edit view from the context menu. The 3D View is then displayed, containing the selected view. Its display parameters may then be configured (stickers added, colors changed, zooms, etc.). Indeed, all functions in the 3D View menu and the 3D View Toolbar are available. The following window is also displayed:

Page 194

Click this button to cancel the changes made and exit view edit mode. Click this button to confirm the changes made and exit view edit mode. The view is then modified both in the report and in the software.

Note: This function is not available for All user-defined views and View by family type views.

Insert a histogram When the icon for inserting a histogram is activated, the mouse pointer will change and allow you to decide where you want to place the histogram. You can modify the histogram and set its parameters by double-clicking on it or by right-clicking and choosing Properties from the context-sensitive menu. Then the following window will pop up:

Choose the type of histogram to be displayed from: Automatic: the histogram will show all the values of all the toleranced features of the current working session. All features: the histogram will show all the values of all the toleranced features of the current working session. Selection: the histogram will only show the toleranced features selected from the Histogram window Current feature: the histogram will show all the measured values of the current feature.

When a histogram is displayed, you can add a lighter or darker frame marking its border as well as a shading round this frame.

Page 195

Move the cursor to modify the display of the histogram. The different display options are contained in the Histogram page

Insert a text box When the icon for inserting a text box is activated, the mouse cursor will change and allow you to decide where you want to place the text box. The text inserted by default is called "Text". You can modify it either by double-clicking on it or by right-clicking and choosing Properties from the context-sensitive menu. Then the following window will appear, showing the first tab ("Text").

In the Text field you can enter the text to be displayed. When you click on the second tab, you will get the following page:

Page 196

Select the font, style, size and colour of the inserted text if you like.

Insert a variable When the icon for inserting a variable is activated, the following window will appear:

Page 197

From the list select the type of variable to be displayed. Tick this box to display the legend to the variable on the report. If you do not want the legend to be displayed, do not tick this box. In the following field, you can modify the legend to this variable if you like. Specific variables: IT-P: number of features whose deviation is included in a given percentage of the tolerance. The features used for calculation are printable features in the work session. MI-P1: number of features (in %) whose deviation is in the tolerance. MI-P2: number of features (in %) whose deviation is out of tolerance but included in an interval which is lower than twice the tolerance. MI-P3: number of features (in %) whose deviation is higher than twice the tolerance. The following variables: Upper tolerance, Lower tolerance, Max. error, Min. error and Mean error require creation of a results table, in order to be displayed. The values of the variables displayed then depend on the features present in the table. Finally, there is one more type of variable: the operator variables. These are customized variables whose value is required from the operator at the time of printing. From the list of variable types, choose Operator variable.

Page 198

Enter the name of the variable in the Name field. Tick this box to display the legend to the variable on the report. If you do not want the legend to be displayed, do not tick this box. In the following field you can enter the value of this variable. When printing the report, the following window will appear:

Enter the value of the variable. On the report it will show like this:

Note: available operator variables (list of default variables in the software) CAD_DATE PROGRAM_DATE

Date when the CAD file was created Date when the program was created

Page 199

PROGRAM_MODIF PROGRAM_VERSION PROGRAM_EXEC_USER PROGRAM_EXEC_DATE

Date when the program was modified Software version in which the program was created Name of operator having executed the program Date when program was executed

PROGRAM_MATIERE

Material of the temperature-compensated item in the program

PROBE_FILE PROBE_DATE PROBE_MODIF WORK_DATE WORK_FILE

Probe file Date when probe file was created Date when probe file was modified Date when work was saved Work file Material of the temperature-compensated item in the working session Dilatation coefficient of the material of the temperature-compensated item in the working session Temperature of the item in the working session User who has saved the work Software version in which the work was created Version of Windows operating system Graphics engine selected from the set-up wizard Software version Name of printer used Print in rapid mode (or not)

WORK_MATIERE WORK_COEFMAT WORK_TEMPERATURE WORK_USER WORK_VERSION SYS_OS_VERSION SYS_GRAPH_ENGINE SYS_MT2_VERSION SYS_PRINTER_NAME SYS_PRINTER_RAPID

Insert a legend - When Color Coding is enabled, inserts a legend which represents tolerance zones and associated colors:

Page 200

- When Color Coding is disabled, inserts a legend which represents colors associated to features in tolerance, in critical zone or out of tolerance:

Page 201

Page 202

Print by family

When printing a report, you can sort the features of the working session according to their families. This allows you, for instance, to obtain a particular view for each family and to print it with a table of results containing the features of this family.

To do this, you will have to perform three stages: create report prepare working session and set print parameters.

Create report Create a report, using the Print Editor, inserting: - A Header: with variables, operator variables if necessary, company logo etc...

Page 203

You will also have pre-defined variables, such as Name of active family and Comment on active family, which allow you to display the name of the printed family and perhaps also a comment on this family automatically. These variables are available in the list of variables of the Print Editor:

Page 204

- A graphical view Select Family view from the list of views: You can also automatically put stickers on features of the graphical view by ticking this box. See Print Editor.

Page 205

- A table of results:

Prepare working session - Allocate a family name to each feature to be printed: either when defining the feature or when measuring it, or via the database in order to include the feature(s) in one family.

Note: Those families that are not associated to views will not be printed. Those families that are not associated to views will not be printed In this instance, this is the case for the following: CURVE_SURFACE and RIGHT_PLANE, as there is no view carrying these names.

- Create one view per family: Give it the same name as the family. This function is not compulsory in the case of a report with text only and no graphics.

Note: Those views that are not associated to families will not be printed. Here, this is the case for CONE_DETAIL, CYL_DETAIL and DEFAULT_VIEW views, as there are no views with these names.

Page 206

- Comment associated to each family: In the data on the working session, add variables with the same name as the families and enter a comment as a value of the variable (under Edit Informations). This comment will then become visible in the report if the report was created using the associated variables.

Set print parameters Print your report by ticking this box in the Print Properties window:

Page 207

Here are the first three pages of the report thus printed with the work file demo_color_map.wk2 and the report file (SortFamily.def) which can be found in the installation folder of the program.

Page 208

Page 209

Page 210

Note: In this example, the report is made up of a graphics part and another part which contains a table of results. But you can also use the same procedure if you want to create a graphics only report (= without a

Page 211

table of results) or a text only report (= without graphics).

Page 212

Statistical report

You can print the statistical results in a report. A report of this type, which is called Textstat.def, can be found in the tree structure of the program. To do this: - activate the Statistics mode (see Statistical Results), - select the command Print Report from the File menu,

-

click on this icon to insert a table of results into the report.

Insert a table of statistical results into a report When the icon for inserting a table is activated, the cursor of the mouse will change and allow you to decide on the location and the size of the table. Once the table has been inserted, you can set its parameters by double-clicking on it or by right-clicking and selecting Properties from the pull-down menu. Then the following window will appear:

You can select all the values available in this pull-down menu. Among these values, those specific to the Statistics mode are:

Page 213

Capability (Cp), Machine Capability (Cpk), Deviation , Range , Mean (median error rate), Tendency and Variance.

Example 1: Table of results containing statistical values:



Lines

- The first line indicates: the name of the feature (LEFTCIR), the type of feature and the mode (Statistical Circle), and the details of the archived controls:

- On the following lines you will see the dimensions selected in the Results window. In this example: diameter, ray, X, Y and Z.



columns

The different statistical values chosen appear in a column. In the Tendency column you will see the film of measurements, representing the situation of archived measurements in comparison to the nominal value as well as the positive and negative tolerance limits.

Example 2: Statistical values of type Deviation : Deviation : This value allows to display the difference between the nominal value of a feature and its value defined by archived control. Hence, you need to create as many columns for the value Deviation as controls to be displayed.

Page 214

Hence, when selecting this value from the pull-down list, an additional field will appear in the Results window, to the right of the list of values. This field allows you to enter the number of the control to be displayed. In the example below, number 1 corresponds to the first archived control.

Note: The value 0 allows you to display the result of the deviation or measurement observed during the last control. This may, above all, be of interest if a number of controls have been archived and the user only wants to display the last one. Hence, it is not necessary to count them.

The following table of results contains the deviations observed during the first 4 archived control:

Example 3: Statistical values of type Measured :

Page 215

Measured : This value allows you to display the results of measurements of features by way of archived control. Hence, you need to create as many columns for the value Measured as controls to be displayed. The following table of results contains the measurements archived during controls 2, 3 and 6:

For further details on this window, please refer to the Print editor page.

Page 216

Wizard report This option offers a Wizard to help you create reports. The Wizard comprises a series of windows that guide you through the report creation process. The window is shown below:

Step 1: Select the type of report

Page 217

Select report type from: Graphical report alone, Test report alone or Mixed report. Click this button to go to the following step.

Step 2: Page layout

Page 218

Select document orientation, Portrait or Landscape, by checking (selecting) the corresponding box. For a Graphical report alone or Mixed report, select the view to be inserted from Current view, one of the saved views (selected from the drop-down list) or All user-defined views (Multi-view report). Select whether or not view name is to be displayed by checking (selecting) the relevant box. Check this box to apply a scale factor to the view and then enter the value of the factor in the adjacent field. Select whether or not page numbers are to be displayed by checking (selecting) the relevant box. Click this button to go to the following step. For a Graphical report alone, go to step 4. For a Text report alone or a Mixed report, go to step 3.

Step 3: Result table management

Page 219

Select result table type from: - Standard: the table will contain the following values:

- Condensed: the table will contain the following values:

- Standard with statistic: the table will contain the following values:

Select whether or not the columns are to be modified by checking (selecting) the corresponding box. Select the number of features to be displayed per page from the drop-down list.

Page 220

Click this button to go to the following step.

If the Modify columns option was selected, the following window is displayed:

For more information on this window, see the Insert table section on the Report Editor page. Click this button to go to the following step.

Step 4: Families and stickers

Page 221

Enable or disable Sort by family by checking (selecting) the corresponding box. Select whether or not family name is to be inserted by checking (selecting) the relevant box. Select whether or not family comment is to be inserted by checking (selecting) the relevant box. Print the views according to families or only the selected view. For a mixed report, sticker position may be selected from: Use current positions, Around the view and Around the view and glued. Click this button to go to the following step.

When Around the view or Around the view and glued sticker positioning is selected, the following window is displayed:

Page 222

This window has two tabs allowing sticker Rows / Columns and Appearance to be modified.

Step 5: End of the Wizard

Page 223

Select whether or not to display a logo by checking (selecting) the corresponding box. Select the number of copies to be printed from the drop-down list. Finally, select the action to be performed after exiting the Wizard (when the

button is pressed):

- Back to print dialog: the print window will be displayed. - Preview before printing: a preview of the report configured according to the selected parameters will be displayed. - Print report: the report configured according to the selected parameters will be directly printed. - Report edit: The Report Editor will be displayed, containing the report configured with the Wizard. Whatever the selected option, the save window is first displayed to allow the configured report to be saved.

The following buttons are displayed in the different windows of the Wizard: To return to the previous step. To go to the next step. To close the Wizard without saving any changes made. To display this help page.

Page 224

Statistics This section explains the different functions of the Statistics menu.

An example illustrating all the functions is also available.

Page 225

Archive current control

This function enables you to save the results of several controls carried out on one item in a working session. The characteristics of all the measurements are thus stored in one working session in order to calculate statistics on the feature measurement results. To activate this function, select Statistics > Archive current control.

Then the Edit Informations window of the File menu will pop up, allowing you to add traceability informations about the control, just before archiving it. Then click on this button in order to archive the control in the working session. If the working session has not been saved yet, the program will ask you to save it by bringing up the Save a Working Session window.

When archiving a control, 2 files will be added to the already existing work files: one which contains the data of the Edit Informations window (*.xst), while the other one contains statistical data (*.sta).

In program: This function can be learned in a program.

Page 226

The following line appears:

Page 227

Statistical results

Statistics mode This function enables you to calculate statistics on the measurement results of the features stored in the archived controls of the working session. When choosing this function, the Statistics mode will be activated and no actions on any of the features will be possible (definitions, measurements, etc...). In the Statistics menu click on Statistical results. Alternatively click on the

icon in the toolbar.

If one of the controls have been archived, the following window will pop up:

By clicking this button you can select all the controls of this working session. You can also select from this list some specific controls only, by using the cursor and the key of your keyboard. The number of controls selected in comparison with the total number of controls will be displayed in this window.

enables you to destroy the selected archived control(s) permanently; you will get a message to confirm the destruction of all archived controls.

Then click on this button to activate the Statistics mode.

Page 228

Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.

If a feature exists in the selected controls but not in the current control, the following message will appear and there will not be any calculation of statistics for this feature:

By clicking on this button, you will get a list of those feature(s) missing from the current control:

When clicking on this button, the Statistics mode will be activated.

enables you to validate the window in order to move on to the next stage.

For each feature of the working session, the statistics will be displayed in the Results window:

Page 229

The stickers available for each feature will be modified according to this new statistical data. See Example

Statistical values The following calculated statistical values can be fully integrated in the table of results of a statistical report : 

Mean

The mean is calculated according to the following formula, Xibeing a characteristic measurement (for example, the diameter of a circle) and n being the number of measurements:

Example: 10 measurements of a circle of a diameter of 20 0.3 Meas. Meas. 1 2

Meas. 3

Meas. 4

Meas. 5

Meas. 6

Meas. 7

Meas. 8

Meas. 9

Meas.1 0

20.2

20.2

19.9

19.8

19.7

20.05

19.8

19.8

20.1



20.3

Range

The range is calculated according to the following formula, Xibeing a characteristic measurement (for example, the diameter of a circle): W = Max {Xi} - Min {Xi}

Example: 10 measurements of a circle of a diameter of 20 0.3 Meas. Meas. 1 2

Meas. 3

Meas. 4

Meas. 5

Meas. 6

Meas. 7

Meas. 8

Meas. 9

Meas.1 0

20.2

20.2

19.9

19.8

19.7

20.05

19.8

19.8

20.1

20.3

W = 20.3 - 19.7 = 0.6



Standard deviation

This function evaluates the standard deviation of a population, based on a sample of this population, according to the following formula, Xibeing a characteristic measurement (for example, the diameter of a circle):

Page 230

Do not mix  0 the overall production deviation up with  i the instantaneous production deviation.

Example: 10 measurements of a circle of a diameter of 20 0.3 Meas. Meas. 1 2

Meas. 3

Meas. 4

Meas. 5

Meas. 6

Meas. 7

Meas. 8

Meas. 9

Meas.1 0

20.2

20.2

19.9

19.8

19.7

20.05

19.8

19.8

20.1



20.3

Variance

This function estimates the variance of a population, based on a sample of this population, according to the following formula, Xi being a characteristic measurement (for example, the diameter of a circle):

Example: 10 measurements of a circle of a diameter of 20 0.3 Meas. Meas. 1 2

Meas. 3

Meas. 4

Meas. 5

Meas. 6

Meas. 7

Meas. 8

Meas.9 Meas.1 0

20.2

20.2

19.9

19.8

19.7

20.05

19.8

19.8

20.3

20.1

Note: The Results window of the statistics either shows the standard deviation or the variance. To select either one or the other, choose Preferences >Units.



Cp (Capability)

The capability is calculated according to the following formula:

+

+

Warning: Do not mix Tol up with ls (upper tolerance limit) ( ls =Xtheoretical + Tol )

+

Example : 10 measurements of a circle of a diameter of 200.3 (a diameter of 200.3 results in Tol Tol = 0.6)

Page 231

Meas. Meas. 1 2

Meas. 3

Meas. 4

Meas. 5

Meas. 6

Meas. 7

Meas. 8

Meas.9 Meas.1 0

20.2

20.2

19.9

19.8

19.7

20.05

19.8

19.8



20.3

20.1

Cpk (machine capability)

There are three cases for the calculation of Cpk: 

Bilateral tolerancing (for all features, except tolerancing):

The machine capability is calculated according to the following formula, with Xi= X theoretical:

Example: 10 measurements of a circle of a diameter of 20 0.3 Meas. Meas. 1 2

Meas. 3

Meas. 4

Meas. 5

Meas. 6

Meas. 7

Meas. 8

Meas.9 Meas.1 0

20.2

20.2

19.9

19.8

19.7

20.05

19.8

19.8



20.3

20.1

Standard-limit tolerancing, upper limit (case of geometrical tolerances):

The machine capability is calculated according to the following formula, with Xi= X theoretical:



Standard-limit tolerancing, lower limit:

The machine capability is calculated according to the following formula, with Xi= X theoretical:

Page 232

Recall an archived control

In order to be able to make use of this function, you must have a statistics archive open. This function enables you to view a specific archived control, without calculating any statistics. This is similar to recalling a working session. When selecting Recall an archived control from the Statistics menu, the following window will appear, displaying the list of archived controls (.wk2 - file):

For each archived control the window will show: - on the left-hand side of the window, date and time of archiving. - on the right-hand side of the window, when one of the controls is selected, the system data (name of working session, date of control, etc...) and the user data entered when archiving the control.

Once the control is open, the measurement results can be viewed, as for a working session. You can also modify the control and archive it again.

Click on this button to open the selected control (previously saved measurements).

Click on this button to close the window. No archived controls will be recalled.

Page 233

Export archived controls

This function enables you to export the entire statistical controls stored in the archive (file .wk2). A text-file ( *.txt) will be created for use in other statistical data-processing programs or spreadsheets. This is the window of the function:

Click on this button to select the access path to the target file in the tree structure. Click on this button once you have chosen the export path. Use this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved. The export file is a text-file, separated by the separator defined in the Separator field in the regional options (";" by default in Windows). See Control Panel > Regional and language Settings..

Note: The results are presented in columns, as illustrated in the example.

Page 234

Example

In the File menu, select New Working Session in order to delete the database features and alignments. Construct a new alignment and define a circle feature called CIRC1 in this alignment, defining the tolerances. Measure this feature. In the File menu, select Archive current control. In Edit Informations specify the name of the operator, the name of the item and the number of the measurement. Click on this button and then save your working session under the name: demo.wk2. The information stored is the first measurement value for CIRC1, saved on 29-10-2004, at 12:22:21.

Remeasure the circle. The measured value will be different. In the File menu, select Archive current control. In the Edit Informations window the name of the operator previously entered as well as the name of the item and the number of the measurement will be called up. Indicate the number of measurement no. 2. Then click on this button. The information stored is the second value of the measurement for CIRC1, archived on 29-10-2004 at 12:26:08:

Page 235

Do the same for a third measurement of CIRC1:

The Results window looks as follows: (normal mode) :

Page 236

You can now calculate the statistics on feature CIRC1, based on the features previously archived. In the Statistics menu, select Statistical Results. The following window will pop up:

The 3 controls previously carried out will be listed. Select all the controls. Then click on this button. Then the Results window will change, so that it shows the different statistical values calculated by the program for the feature CIRC1 (Mean, Nominal, Tolerance, Range, Deviation type, Cp and Cpk). This icon indicates that the Statistics mode is activated.

Page 237

The stickers available for each feature will be modified according to this new statistical data:

Normal Mode

Page 238

Statistics Mode

A control may be viewed on its own, without any calculation of statistics. To do this, select Recall an archived control from the Statistics menu and in the following window you can choose the control to be viewed. Any additional information entered when archiving the control archive control is shown in the right-hand part of the window (operator, item and measurement):

Page 239

Once the controls have been archived, you can export them in *.txt-format, so that you will also be able to use them in other statistical data-processing programs. Select Export statistical controls from the Statistics menu specify the export path and then click on

:

Once it has been saved, you can edit the text file in a spreadsheet, for example: This will then look like that:

Page 240

Note: This file does not contain statistical results (Cp, Cpk, Range, etc.), but archived controls (measured values (actuals), deviations etc.). To export statistical results you must use the Export function which you can choose from the File menu.

Page 241

Delete measured values This function allows you to delete the measured values (actuals) of the features of the working session only, so that you can retain the definitions for a new series of measurements. When this function is selected, the following confirmation message will appear:

Click on this button to delete the measured values. The window will be closed and the change will be made immediately. Click on this button to close the window. Your measured values will not be deleted.

In program: This function can be learned in a program. The following line appears:

Page 242

Invert Deviation This function allows you to invert the sign of the deviation and the tendency of all X, Y, Z or angular values of features whose nominal X, Y, Z or angular values are negative.

Example: By default, the sign of the deviations depends on the orientation of the alignment. For example, deviations in Y are greater than 0 when they have the same orientation as the Y-axis; they are below 0 when they are in the opposite direction. When the inversion of deviations is applied to Y, for instance, for the control of a car body, the deviations are then greater than 0 when they go towards the outside and below 0 when they go towards the inside.

Example 2: Deviation on a geometrical point The point POIN1 is defined (nominal) and measured (actual) as follows:

There is a deviation of 1mm on X. Check (select) the line Invert deviation on -X in the menu File > Results. The result window is then displayed as shown below:

Page 243

There is a now a deviation of -1mm on X.

Page 244

Automated backup This function enables you to recover the last context of your working session (probe file, alignments, features) that was auto-saved. The automated backup is performed in a file called $$AUTO.wk2 as well as in the 5 associated files. For further details, please refer to Automated backup The automated-backup frequency can be set with the function Automated backup which you can choose from Preferences menu.

Page 245

Send to This function allows you to send a software working session by email. This enables a person to view results without having to install the program on his computer. The working session is first exported to HTML format (a table of results, all the views saved and the current view); then the files resulting from the export will be attached in an email where you need to enter the recipient and the subject. In the example below, the system Outlook is being used:

In program: This function can be learned in a program. The following line appears:

Page 246

Publish This function enables you to publish a software working session on a website. Select Publish from the File menu and a website publication wizard will pop up.

Once the wizard has been set up, and provided that you are entitled to write on the server, your work can be sent to a website.

Page 247

Quit This function allows you to quit the software. Before closing, the software will detect whether any changes have been made. Hence, the following warning messages may appear, allowing you to save your changes, if any:

Click on this button to save the changes made and quit the software. Click on this button to quit the software without your changes being saved. Click on this button to cancel the command for closing and come back to the software.

Page 248

Preferences

Page 249

Open, Open previous configuration These functions are used to open working configurations in the software. Open is used to open a configuration saved in a file. The following window is displayed:

Click this button to open the selected configuration file. Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.

The configuration files (*.cfg) contain information relating to: - the size and position of the windows - the units - the default parameters (of the features) - the open windows - the display parameters of the 3D view window (colors, font, name of the features, etc.) - the display parameters of the DRO window

Open Previous is used to display the previous configurations used and saved, making it easier to load them:

Page 250

Page 251

Save, Save as These functions are used to save a specific working configuration. The position of the windows, their sizes, the units used and the default parameters of the features are taken into account when saving.

Save Save is used to save the current configuration assigning it a name and a directory, if it is being saved for the first time, or to save the changes made in this same file. The save window is shown below:

Select the save directory and name the file. The file will be a *.cfg file.

Save as Save as is used to save the current configuration under a different name. The save window shown above then opens, and is used to modify the name and the path of the current file.

Click this button to save the configuration. Click this button to exit the window without saving the configuration.

Page 252

Change user Changes the current user, without having to restart the application. The following window appears, and is used to enter the user name and password:

Click this button to validate the information entered. Click this button to exit the window without changing the user.

Page 253

Edit users Only one user, with administrator rights, can access user management, using the Preferences > Edit users menu. The following window appears:

This button can only be accessed through the Users and Rules tabs. It is used to create a new user or a new rule. This button can only be accessed through the Users and Rules tabs. It is used to delete the selected user or rule. This button can only be accessed through the Users and Rules tabs. It is used to edit the selected user or rule. This button is used to save the changes made in all tabs of the window. This button is used to exit the window without applying any changes made.

Users tab 

Adding a user adds a user to the list. The following window is then displayed:

Page 254

Enter the user name. Assign the user a password. Confirm this password. Specify the software user level from the following options: Administrator: Highest user level in the software. Users with administrator rights have access to all features. Programmer: Intermediate user level in the software. Users with programmer rights have access to all features except for user management. Operator: Minimum user level in the software. Users with operator rights have limited access to the software features, specified by the administrator(s). In this drop-down list, you can select one of the rules available in the Rules tab in order to assign it to the new user. This button gives access to additional parameters: The window is displayed as follows for users at Administrator or Programmer level:

Page 255

Checking this box is used to associate probe files with the user. Manually enter the probe file access path or search for it in the tree structure. Checking this box is used to associate configuration files with the user. The user configuration will be forced to the one specified in the file. Manually enter the configuration file access path or search for it in the tree structure.

The window is displayed as follows for users at Operator level:

Page 256

Checking this box is used to associate probe files with the user. Manually enter the probe file access path or search for it in the tree structure. Checking this box is used to associate configuration files with the user. The user configuration will be forced to the one specified in the file. Manually enter the configuration file access path or search for it in the tree structure.

These fields are used to specify the access paths to the probe and program files authorized for operator-level users. For the programs, this is the start of the tree structure.

Note: A filter may be applied to the program directory to display only certain types of program. The syntax is as follows: Directory_name|*.extension| For example, the program directory may be displayed as follows: C:\Program Files\Metrologic Group\Program|*.gm2|. Only GM2 type programs will then be displayed in operator mode.

Page 257

In this part of the window you can assign specific functions to the keys F7 to F12 on the keyboard. The probe and configuration files will be loaded automatically when the software starts up or on a change of user.

This button is used to save the changes made in all tabs of the window. This button is used to exit the window without applying any changes made.



Modifying a user modifies the parameters of a user previously selected in the list.

The following window is then displayed:

Level tab The Level tab is used to display the hierarchy of the users as follows:

Page 258

This hierarchy can be modified by selecting a user and sliding them to the required hierarchy level. The level can also be modified for each user in the Users tab.

Rules tab In this tab, each user can be assigned a software user rule.

Note: Each user can only be assigned one rule at a time. The rules tab is shown below:

Page 259

The rules will be used to manage and/or control information entered in the fields of the definition, measurement and automatic measurement windows, according to the working procedures established and translated in the form of scripts. Microsoft Visual Basic is then used by the software to run these scripts. This is why MS script control needs to be installed in order to use the scripts. However, these scripts are text files with the extension *.xgs, which can be edited using any text editor. The following is an example:

Click this button to create a new rule. The following window appears, and is used to configure a user rule by specifying general information (name, description, bitmap, etc.) and associating it with control scripts in .xgs format:

Page 260

Enter the name of the rule.

Enter a description if required.

Enter the name of the creator of the rule if required. By default, the name of the connected user appears in this field.

If necessary, choose an icon to associate with this rule. This will appear next to its name in the Rules tab.

Definition, measurement and/or automatic measurement rules can be associated for each feature. To do this, click in the box corresponding to the feature and the required action. Then click

.

The following window then appears, and is used to search in the tree structure for the script to be applied:

Page 261

Click this button to accept the changes made to the rule. This rule then appears in the window and can be assigned to users. To do this, drag and drop the user to the required rule.

Note: Rules can also be assigned using the Users tab.

When the software is started, the rules associated with the connected user will be automatically activated. In the software status bar, the user name will appear in red if rules are associated with this user.

Page 262

When a rule is applied to a window, the title bar of the window appears in red instead of the usual blue:

Disabling user operations The user management window is used to disable user operations. To do this: Uncheck this box. click this button to confirm. From this point on, the Change user, Edit users and Change password functions are no longer accessible: they will be grayed out in the Preferences menu. To re-enable user operations, you need to delete the hidden file users.mod, saved in the software installation directory. The functions will again be accessible next time you log on to the software.

Page 263

Change password The following window is used to change the password of the current user:

Enter the current password, then enter the new password twice.

Then click this button to confirm the new password. closes the window without applying any changes made.

Page 264

Edit rules The software has a script editor, accessible through the Preferences > Edit rules menu, which is used to debug the *.xgs format files.

Notes:   

The connected user must have administrator rights in order to access this function. MS Script control must be installed in order to use this function. The syntax of the files in *.xgs format corresponds to the Microsoft Visual Basic Script standard.

The window used to edit or debug a script is as follows:

The buttons bar Opens an existing *.xgs file. Saves the current *.xgs file. Saves the current file under a different name. Changes to debug mode. Resumes running after a breakpoint. This button is grayed out if the script is not paused on a breakpoint. Stops the debug mode. This button is grayed out if the program is not in debug mode. Positions or deletes the breakpoints. Runs the current instruction, entering inside the invoked functions if necessary, as long as they are present in the *.xgs file. This button is grayed out if the script is not paused on a breakpoint. Runs the current instruction, without entering inside the invoked functions. This

Page 265

button is grayed out if the script is not paused on a breakpoint. Runs the current instruction, and exits the current function to move up to the calling instruction. This button is grayed out if the script is not paused on a breakpoint. Displays a variable when the script is paused on a breakpoint. This button is grayed out if the script is not paused on a breakpoint. Exits the script editor.

Symbols of the script editor Breakpoint. Next line to be run. Line with an error detected by the script engine when running.

Displaying a variable Position the breakpoint(s).

Start the Debug phase. Load the software window relating to the script to be debugged. When the script stops running on a breakpoint, the content of a variable can be displayed by carrying out the following steps: Select the variable:

Click this button. The following window is displayed:

Page 266

Variable name Value

Run with error No script analysis is carried out by the software. The only syntax analysis carried out takes place when running the Microsoft VBScript engine. As a result, only the errors on the lines run are taken into account. Error messages all take the following form:

If you answer Yes, the debugger appears, loads the script file and highlights the line containing the error, giving a specific icon associated with a run error.

Page 267

Lock windows This function is used to lock any movement and modification of the size of the windows.

Page 268

Enable sound effects This function is used to choose whether or not sound effects will be used to indicate system events, such as probing, taking of reference marks, the end of the program and help in the measuring of edges. For this, check that the computer being used has a sound card and speakers. In the Windows task bar, select Start > Settings > Control panel.

Click this button. The following window is then displayed:

You can then associate a software event with a sound in Wav format. Click this button to apply the choices made.

Note: This sound configuration may not work directly after installing the software in Windows 2000. To resolve this problem, you need to use the Mt2wav.reg file by double-clicking on it. This is used to add sound events to the existing list.

Page 269

Enable highlighting This option is used to enable or disable highlighting of the active feature in the database and in the Results window, so as to make it easier to distinguish in the 3D view. The highlighting color, yellow by default, can be modified using the options of the 3D view. In the 3D view menu, select Rendering > Colors or click the

icon in the graphic view bar.

Page 270

Automated backup Used to enable or disable automated backup. The following window opens, and is used to give the saving frequency:

When this box is checked, the automated backup is active.

determines the saving frequency. validates the window, the first backup is then carried out. closes the window without applying any changes made.

The file $$AUTO.wk2 and its five associated files are saved: - either in the software installation directory - or in the directory designated by the environment variable If required, select the option Recover automated backup from the File menu.

Warning: The automated backup does not mean the user should no longer carry out regular backups in order to avoid losing information.

Page 271

Units This function is used to choose the units in which the following are given: measurement, angles, temperature, deviations, geometrical tolerances, statistics and the precision in reading numerical values. In the Preferences menu, a dot indicates the type of display used:

Page 272

Millimeters/Inches

Used to choose the measurement unit. The unit used is shown in the software Status bar, located in the lower part of the window. is shown if millimeters are chosen as the current unit. is shown if inches are chosen as the current unit.

Page 273

Decimal degrees/Degrees DMS/Grads

Used to choose the unit in which angles are given. The unit used can be seen in the software Status bar located in the lower part of the window. is shown if decimal degrees are chosen as the current unit. is shown if degrees DMS are chosen as the current unit. is shown if grads are chosen as the current unit.

Page 274

Celsius/Fahrenheit

Used to choose the unit in which the temperature is given. When the Workpiece temperature compensation is active, it is possible to see which compensation unit is used in the software Status bar: is shown if the compensation unit used is degrees Celsius. is shown if the compensation unit used is degrees Fahrenheit.

Page 275

Pressure

In the event of connection with a laser, this option is used to choose the unit of pressure. The unit used can be seen in the laser status bar:

Hectopascal (hPa)

Millibar (mb)

Millimeter of mercury (mmHg)

Inch of mercury (inHg)

Page 276

Form fault/Standard deviation

Used to choose between displaying the form fault and displaying the standard deviation in the Results window.

Form fault This is the sum of the distances of the points furthest from the calculated feature. Example: In the example of the line D below, the form fault F.F. = d1+ d2.

In the example below, a form fault (F.F.) of 0.010 mm appears on the last line of the Results window:

Standard deviation This is the average deviation between the probed points and the calculated feature. In the example below, a standard deviation (SDEV) of 0.004 mm appears on the last line of the Results window:

Page 277

IJK/Projected angle

Used to choose how the angles of the features will be given.

The IJK option is used to display in the Results window the components of the normal for the selected feature:

The Projected angle option is used to display in the Results window the angles formed by the normal of the selected feature with the axes of the alignment associated with the CAD:

Page 278

ISO, ASME

Used to choose the standards system used during the evaluation of the geometrical tolerances. For example, the calculation of the profile tolerance on the cone in the ASME (American) standard requires the prior definition of the cone, in order to apply a constraint on the opening angle during the calculation. For the ISO standard, however, this operation is not necessary since the calculation applies only to the measured feature. The choices between ASME+ or ISO+ are an extension of ASME or ISO standards, that consist in adding new calculation methods by modifying certain calculation methods. Note that the conformity of the standard cannot be perfectly complied with.

Page 279

Precision

Used to choose the precision when reading numerical values in the results window as well as in the stickers of the 3D view. You can then specify the number of digits after the decimal point (between 1 and 6) for the units of length (millimeters and inches) and for the angle units (decimal degrees and grads).

Warning: This function cannot be used to configure the precision display in the reports editor. In this case, this configuration takes place when inserting a results table.

Note: When a number greater (i.e. with more decimal places) than the current accuracy is entered or the accuracy is changed, the software displays a rounded number. However, the entire number is stored in memory and when you switch to a greater accuracy, the exact number entered is displayed.

Page 280

Statistical units

Used to choose between displaying the standard deviation or the deviation of the variance in the Results window in statistical mode. In the Preferences menu, a dot indicates the type of display used.

The standard deviation is the mean of the deviations between the probed points and the calculated feature. In the following example, the

icon indicates that the Results window is in statistical mode.

The standard deviation appears in the Std. D column:

The variance is the square of the standard deviation. In the following example, the

icon indicates that the Results window is in statistical mode.

The variance appears in the Var. column:

See also:

Statistical results.

Page 281

Material position symbols

Used to give symbols (letters) to show the direction of the deviations for a measurement. These symbols therefore replace the + or - sign for a deviation.

ISO standard To use the French standard, select the option F/B - I/O - H/L from the menu:

The convention in a vehicle alignment is as follows:

X axis: B: Back: the deviation is in X+ F: Front: the deviation is in XY axis: I: In: the deviation is inside the vehicle O: Out: the deviation is outside the vehicle Z axis: H: High: the deviation is in Z+ L: Low: the deviation is in Z-

In the following example, the SURF_PNT feature displays the deviations on the three axes:

In the Dev. column: F: 0.002 indicates a negative deviation of 0.002 mm on X. O: 0.020 indicates a deviation outside the vehicle of 0.020 mm on Y. H: 0.002 indicates a positive deviation of 0.002 mm on Z. In the following example, the SURF_PNT feature does not have any deviation:

Page 282

American standard To use the American standard, select the option F/A - I/O - H/L from the menu:

In this case, F means "Fore" and A means "Aft". Once the American standard has been selected, the Results window appears as follows:

Page 283

Use the type of coordinates of the nominal

Used to keep a type of coordinates through different actions: 

When measuring a feature in static mode, the probing / via point instructions are learned using the same coordinate system as that of the feature concerned.

Example: Measuring a circle defined in spherical coordinates. The tooltip on the program line allows the coordinate system to be checked:

The tooltips on the probing / via point program lines allow for checking that the coordinate system is kept:

Page 284



When constructing a feature, it i constructed using the same coordinate system as that of its reference features. Caution: source features must be at least defined. Example: Constructing a circle by projection.

The PLN1 and CIR1 features are defined and measured in a spherical coordinate system. The CIR2 circle is constructed as follows:

Page 285

Its coordinate system can be checked by opening the results window and its edit window:

Page 286

Important note: If the Use the type of coordionates of the nominal option is unchecked, the defaut coordinate system used is the cartesian system.

Page 287

Point representation This function allows the type of graphical representation to be used for the points database (geometrical or surface points) to be selected: cross or square.

Example

:

Cross representation

Square representation

Page 288

Advanced parameters (Managing INI files) This option is used to modify the INI files from the software, selecting the option Advanced Parameters option from the Preferences menu.

Warning: This option can only be accessed by administrators. The window is shown below:

The four tabs correspond to the four main INI files: metropass.ini (if the metropass user is connected) XG.DME.ini XG.CONFIG.ini metropassui.ini (if the metropass user is connected)

The columns correspond to the variables: Name, Section, Value and Description. These can be sorted in alphabetical order by clicking on the heading of the column.

The values which can be modified are displayed in black. To modify them, double-click on the value. Once

Page 289

modified, they appear in red:

Click this button to search for a value in the currently selected file. The search is carried out on the name and the section:

The result of the search is displayed in yellow:

To search for the next occurrence likely to correspond to the request, click the search button again.

INI files may be exported to a *.txt file. To do this, press the

key and click the

button.

Four files then appear in the software installation folder: - in the default file C:\Program Files\Metrologic Group\Metrolog XG\USERS: XG_CONFIG.txt and XG_DME.txt - in the default file C:\Program Files\Metrologic Group\Metrolog XG\USERS: username.txt and UIusername.txt.

Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made. Click this button to apply the changes made and close the window. The following message is displayed to inform you that the changes will only be applied when you restart the software:

When you accept the message, the software offers to restart immediately.

Page 290

Clicking shuts down the application after offering to save any changes made to the current working session, the probes file or the program, as appropriate. Clicking restarted.

closes the dialog box. The changes will only be applied when the software is

When the application has restarted, the changes are applied to the modified features.

Page 291

Default feature name

This function can be accessed via the menu Preferences > Advanced parameters. It is used to change the default names of all defined, constructed or measured features.

Click the

button to sort the variables by name.

Then search for lines starting with "PREFIX_". To change the default name of a feature, two variables must be modified: modifies the default name of the corresponding entity, in this case the circle feature. confirms whether or not the new default name is to be used. This variable can only have 0 or 1 as values. The column specifies which feature is affected by the variable concerned. For a circle, the following description is obtained: After locating the line corresponding to the feature whose default name is to be changed, double-click the empty cell in the

column to edit the field.

Page 292

Enter the new default feature name.

Confirm the change by clicking elsewhere in the window. The modified line is displayed in red to show that changes have been made.

Page 293

Repeat the operation for the line PREFIX_USE_xxx, used to enable the new default name. Enter a value of 1 to enable the change or 0 to disable it.

Example: Before:

After:

Page 294

Notes: 



If the value of the PREFIX_USE_xxx variable is 1 and no name has been entered in the PREFIX_xxx field, the software will assign "1" as default name, then "2" and continue like this each time a new entity is created. If the variable enabling the default name is set to 0, and no name has been entered in the default feature name field, the software will assign the name provided by default. For example, for a circle, the name will be CERC, even if the value of the variable is CERCLE.

Page 295

Feature name incrementation in the measurement windows

Feature names in measurement windows This function is accessed via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters. It is used to select the incremental naming mode for the next feature to be measured.

In the Advanced Parameters window, find the INCREMENTALNAMINGMODE parameter. When the value of this parameter is 0 (default mode), the software offers the first feature that has been defined but not measured when the measurement window is opened. When the value of this parameter is 1, the software proposes the name of the last feature measured incremented by 1.

Examples: for a point, with INCREMENTALNAMINGMODE = 1    

If there is no existing point, the software proposes POIN1 when the measurement window is opened. If POIN1 has already been measured, the software proposes POIN2 when the measurement window is opened. If POIN1 and POIN2 have already been measured and the current measurement is for POIN5, the software proposes POIN6 when the measurement window is next opened. If POIN2 has already been measured and the current measurement is for POIN1, the software proposes POIN3 when the measurement window is next opened.

Page 296



If POIN1 and POIN6 have already been measured and the current measurement is for POIN2, the software proposes POIN3 and not POIN7 when the measurement window is next opened. This is because the last feature measured was POIN2, thus incremental naming mode operates as follows: POIN2 + 1 = POIN3

Feature names in other windows Parameter FORMATTED: When the value of this parameter is 1 (default mode), the software increments the name of features according to the following method considering any 0 placed before the number of the feature.

Example: If point POIN001 is measured, the next proposed point is POIN002.

When the value of this parameter is 0, the software ignores all 0.

Example: If point POIN001 is measured, the next proposed point is POIN2. This parameter applies to:      

the names of features (including any type of surface point) the names of alignments the names of probes the names of calibration spheres the names of views the names of stations

Note: Use of the The

key on the keyboard

key can be pressed to increment or decrement the name proposed in the drop-down list.

If POIN1 is selected, press + the up arrow to increment feature name. The software then proposes POIN2, even if this point has not been defined. If POIN3 is selected, press + the down arrow to decrement feature name. The software then proposes POIN2, even if this point has not been defined.

Page 297

Configuring languages in the software The language of the software can be changed in the software, without having to close the application or install the software in all the required languages. Simply select the required language from the Preferences > Language menu:

The language is changed immediately, in all the windows of the software, even if a definition, measurement or construction window is open. The next time the setup assistant is opened, the selected language for the software will be enabled. The online help is opened in the current language of the software. However, if the online help in this language has not been installed (component to be selected during installation of the software), by default the help file will be in English, if this help has been installed.

Note: The software can easily be translated into a specific language, using a resources graphics editor (texts). To do this, please contact your resales agent.

Page 298

CMM The options available in this menu are used to configure the CMM and its associated components (rotary table and probe/stylus changers).

Page 299

Set-up CNC Parameters This option is used to modify and configure the default parameters of the CNC. The window is shown below:

Carriage

This field is used to declare a CNC on the workstation and send this information to the station(s) connected in Twin mode when a DMIS program is run.

Distances Distance of the theoretical point at which the CMM slows down and switches to probing mode. Distance after the theoretical point during which the CMM is ready for probing.

Page 300

Distance to which the CMM retracts after probing, along the normal to the point probed. The nominal probe deflection value to be maintained by the CMM during continuous scanning may be entered.

Continuous Parameter Measurement: Deflection adaptative movement (servo deflection) gives enhanced measurement accuracy. Deflection is determined by the type of workpiece measured and desired probing speed. This is due to the fact that, when a workpiece with major variations is measured, it is preferable to plan for greater deflection in order to limit loss of contact between the probe and workpiece during measurement, all the more so if probing speed is high. Optical sensor The sensor position changes according to the variation of height of the workpiece measured. If this option is selected, the optical center of the sensor is automatically positioned at the maximum point of the scanline measured. In case of loss of material, the movement continues to the theoretical direction. This mode is automatically disabled during calibration. Hence theoretical calibration trajectories are not affected. Scanning (continuous) probe When a scanning probe is detected, a new section is created in the file XG_CONFIG.INI: [Mesure_Auto] Enfoncement_Max=0.5 Enfoncement_Min=0.02 These parameters give a deflection interval for measurement. When probing operations are performed outside this interval, they are not used for calculation of the feature.

Page 301

(a): probing operations used for feature calculation. (b): probing operations eliminated from feature calculation.

Note: For surface points, if certain probing operations are outside the validation interval, they are eliminated and the corresponding surface points are not created.

CNC protocol determines whether the approach and retraction distances can be handled separately. If not, the line allowing retraction distance to be entered will not be available. Retraction distance will then be equal to approach distance. According to CNC type, there are thus two possible cases: CNC that does not handle Retract distance

CNC that handles Retract distance

Page 302

When an automatic measurement is made in continuous and cont. no retraction mode, this perce,tage goves the number of valid points needed to accept the measurement. If the number of valid points is less than the percentage given, a warning message appears at the end of the measurement sequence.

Round Corners and These spheres allow paths to be optimized by applying a curve to each change of direction. This allows jerks at changes of direction to be avoided, such jerks being damageable to correct CNC operation.

The path shown as a dashed red line is the path obtained if clearance sphere diameter is 0. The path shown as a green curve is the path taken by the CNC when clearance sphere diameter is 12. Note: Only a sphere around a clearance point can be configured.

Warning: Near an edge, an incorrectly calculated clearance sphere may result in a probe collision.

Page 303

Speed Probing, low, and high speeds may be configured in the CNC Settings window. Such configuration may be performed in two ways:

-

By directly entering the desired values in the corresponding fields.

Note: Scanning speed is the speed of movement of the CMM used for continuous (scanning) feature measurement (on a Metrologic group CNC). This applies to measurement by scanning, point scanning, Scanning Gasket.

-

By clicking this button to open the following window:

There is a cursor for each type of speed. Adjust the cursor to set a percentage of the CNC's speed capabilities. True speed is shown below each column.

Warning: Probing speed must not exceed 25 mm/s, otherwise the probe may be damaged and inconsistent measurement deviations produced.

Accept When you have configured the different distances and speeds, click this button to apply your

Page 304

changes. This button is reserved for specific use of LK controllers. When the user is connected to a CNC, this button may be used to refer to the controller values and retrieve the maximum perrmissible speed and movement values.

Close Click this button to close the CNC Settings window.

In program: When the CNC is configured, the following lines are added to the program:

Page 305

Reset Scales This function is used to reset CMM alignment. The window is shown below:

CMM alignment may be reset in different ways:

Manually, at the desired location Move the CMM to the desired location, then click the buttons corresponding to each axis ( ;

;

) to reset the CMM.

Manually, at the origin of the scales Move the CMM in the three axes. When it passes the reference marks on the scales, the corresponding axis is reset. The taking of the reference marks is accompanied by an audio signal (beep) if sounds effects are enabled.

Automatically, for a CNC When this button is clicked, the CMM automatically searches for its reference marks and resets its scales.

Note: The offset values, in the right part of the window, have no influence o this button.

Page 306

By using offsets The fields in the right part of the window represent the offset values on the respective CMM axes. Thus, a CMM zero can be configured in lthe software even if it is not at the physical zero of the CMM. The offset values to be indicated are valid in the CMM alignment. As above, it is possible to click on the buttons corresponding to the (

;

;

;

) axes in order to initialize the counters. The position display window then shows the position entered in t he offset values.

Note: This function is not accessible when using a 23-parameter compensation.

to close the window (any changes made are saved).

Notes: 

This function can be used in a program.

The following line is displayed:



An additional field is displayed for CMMs with a rotary table, allowing rotary table position to be reset:

Page 307

High Speed This feature allows switchover between high and low speed modes. The symbol in front of the function (menu item) indicates that high speed mode is enabled.

In program: a line showing the speed mode used is added: or

Note: Both the high and low speed values may be configured using the Set-up CNC Parameters function.

Page 308

Positioning/Probing This function is used to position the CMM in order to probe a point and also to create a via point in a program. It may be accessed: - Via the CMM menu, by clicking Positioning/Probing

- By using the - Via the

key

icon located in the toolbar

Warning: This function may only be accessed if a probe has already been calibrated.

The following window is then displayed:

Page 309

Goto

used to select the desired operation: in this example, CMM positioning.

the via point icon is displayed.

Probe

used to select the desired operation: in this example, probing of a precise point.

the probe icon is displayed.

Position

used to select the type of coordinates.

used to specify the coordinates of a point by entering them in the fields. To obtain a value from the other two values, complete two of the three fields, then click the button corresponding to the field with the unknown value:

Page 310

If a CAD file is used, this option allows you to click on the different types of CAD entities to obtain the desired point. The value obtained is the value for the nominal (theoretical) point on the CAD model offset in relation to the normal of the approach vector. It is likely that the surface clicked will not be the desired surface as surfaces are often superimposed. In this case, use the buttons to move the point to the nearest surfaces (see the diagram below). The first surface offered is the nearest surface.

Page 311

means that the move will be made relative to the absolute (real) dimensions of the alignment. means that the move will be made relative to the absolute (real) dimensions of the alignment plus the deviation between the actual and nominal values of the feature in each axis. The features selected as reference features must thus be defined (nominals) and measured (actuals) so that they are displayed in the list of selectable features.

means that the move will be performed relative to current probe position.

Example: Probing relative to a plane During Teach-in, define and measure plane P1. Then define and measure circle C1, Relative (R) to plane P1. At execution, the software measures plane P2 and obtains a deviation that it includes to measure circle C2. If measurement teach-in is performed in Absolute (A) mode, the deviation is not used:

Normal Vector This function is only available when the window is in the Probe position. It is used to modify the normal probing vector.

Select the approach vector values in the I, J and K fields. These are positive in the direction of the alignment axes. used to invert the normal vector.

CNC Distances

Page 312

The above fields are used to modify the values of the approach, search, and retract distances. By default, these distances are those shown in the Set-up CNC Parameters window. For a via point, the approach value is used to offset a point on the CAD file by this value, along the normal vector. This allows via points to be created offline using the CAD file.

Example: Approach distance Enter a value of 5 in the Approach field. Click a point on the CAD model. Then click this button to validate the point and apply the parameters entered. The software will then offset the point by 5mm in the direction of the normal vector:

Page 313

Nominal / Use CNC This function is used to: - Take or validate a point by simulating CMM movement. This operation is displayed when a program is created. - Add a line in a program without moving the CMM. This operation is displayed when a program is created.

This function is used to: - If the software is running while connected to a CMM, really position the CMM or probe at the specified coordinates. This operation is displayed when a program is created. - If the software is running offline, to position the CMM or to move the probe on the screen to the specified coordinates. This operation is displayed when a program is created.

Notes: 

In position: These two actions only function if the software is ready for (awaiting) probing. Otherwise, an error message is displayed informing the user that they are not ready for probing. The counter showing the number of points probed in the measurement windows is incremented for each point probed (theoretical (nominal) or real (actual) probing).



In position: These two actions function, even if the software is not ready for (not awaiting) probing. This allows command lines to be added in a program without having to perform multiple operations. The counter showing the number of points probed in the measurement windows is incremented for each point probed. If a CAD file is used, there is a shortcut allowing via points to be directly created in a program. Click



the CAD model while holding the

key depressed.

Page 314

Close closes the window without applying any changes made.

Note: Variables may be entered in the fields. Right-click the CMM Positioning/Probing window, a pop-up (context) menu is displayed:

A list of variables is available either by configuring variables via Edit Information in the File menu, or existing features in the database allow the probe to be positioned at the coordinates of the selected entity. In the following example, the CMM will be positioned in the X axis, at the coordinates of point POIN1.

In program: 

This function corresponds to via point teach-in. This type of point may be inserted inside or outside a measurement group.

The following line is then displayed:



This function corresponds to probing point teach-in. It is only meaningful if used in a measurement group.

The following line is then displayed:

Page 315

Gasket scan This function is used to freely determine the probing path for scanning, in particular to scan a gasket. Open the Gasket scan window to configure measurement by scanning and also the Measuring plane window that will then allow the measurement to be made. The window is shown below:

Select the type of point clicked from Surface, Edge, Curve or Point.

Note: The first point clicked determines the plane of the Gasket. In Curve mode, the first point is projected on the CAD model. This field is only available in Edge mode. It allows an offset to be entered with respect to the selected edge. The number of points remaining to be clicked to define the current path is displayed in this field (cannot be edited).

Page 316

Different types of path definition are available. These may be combined to scan the plane.

Corner mode polyline

The path is generated by clicking the corners of a polyline. When Angular mode is selected, the lines are connected end to end:

Page 317

When Radius mode is selected, a circular path is created between each linear path. Radius value is entered in the adjacent field.

If the previous path is an arc, Tangent mode creates a line tangential to the circle and passing through the point clicked:

Two point mode polyline

Page 318

The path is generated by clicking the polyline lines at two points. The path passes through the intersection of these two lines. When Angular mode is selected, the path is generated as follows:

When Radius mode is selected, a circular path is created between each linear path. Radius value is entered in the adjacent field.

Page 319

Arc

The path is generated by clicking three points on a circle (two in tangent mode):

Page 320

When Angular mode is selected, the arcs are connected as follows:

When Radius mode is selected, the circle is connected to the previous path by an arc. Radius value is entered in the adjacent field.

Tangent mode creates an arc tangential to the circle and passing through the point clicked. Arc radius value is entered in the adjacent field.

Page 321

Arc-line-arc

The path is generated by connecting the last arc to the new arc (clicked at three points) by a line tangential to the two arcs:

Page 322

used to delete the last path or last point clicked if the path has not been generated.

used to delete all paths.

used to delete the selected path in order to add new paths.

Example: Using the insert funtion The following paths have been generated:

Page 323

To improve the line plotted around the hole, path 8 is selected. It is then displayed highlighted in the Gasket scan window and in pink in the 3D View.

The insert function is enabled by clicking the

Paths 2 to 7 are deleted by clicking the

button.

button the appropriate number of times:

Page 324

The Arc method is selected to re-define the line around the hole:

Page 325

Finally, reclick the

button to close the path with a line:

Page 326

Notes: 

When the insert function is enabled, the of the insertion.



Click the

button is used to delete the last path located in front

button again after making the desired insertions, the path is closed with a line.

used to split the path into two paths. Click the location where the split is to be made. A point is added at the location clicked in the 3D View.

used to select a path in the 3D View.

A list of the paths generated is displayed in the center of the window, showing the type and dimensions of each path:

Page 327

The lower part of the window is used to determine measurement step and the approach and retract distances.

Click this button to exit the window without performing scanning. The paths generated will not be saved. Click this button to launch measurement by Gasket scan via the measurement window.

In program mode: When this function is learned in a program, the following lines are added:

The Gasket Contouring line can be edited. Double-clicking it opens the Gasket scan window, allowing the paths to be modified if necessary.

Warning: The Gasket scan window is independent. It may therefore be used without the measurement window being open. In this case, the probing path will be generated, but the plane will not be measured.

Page 328

Define security position This function is used to define (configure) a security position. The measurement system (CMM) can then be set to this position in a program. The following window is displayed:

Select the desired type of coordinates from: Cartesian, Spherical, Cylindrical X, Cylindrical Y, or Cylindrical Z.

Allows security position coordinates to be manually entered.

Allows current probe position coordinates to be automatically entered. Click this button to confirm the settings entered. Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.

In program mode: This function may be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 329

Go to security position This function allows the measurement system (CMM) to be set to a security position previously defined via the Define security position function.

In program mode: This function may be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 330

Use Joysticks in PCS When this function is enabled, the relevant button in the CMM menu is shown depressed:

This function is only operational if a workpiece alignment has been created. It allows the CMM to move according to the axes of the workpiece alignment. This is useful when: - The software is connected to a CMM - A console is used to control the CMM - The alignment created in the working session is not aligned with the real axes of the CMM. In this case, the X, Y, Z joysticks of the console move according to the X, Y, Z axes of the alignment created.

Page 331

Clearance Planes This function is used for automatic management of via points and to activate probes according to the features to be measured.

The window is shown below:

This window is divided into two distinct sections: 

Clearance Plane:

Page 332

Enables the containing box to be enabled in Auto mode or in Manual mode. It shows a preview of the 3D View as well as displaying the planes selected. Sets the size and position of the containing box and displays the drawing of the box in 3D View. Auto.Probe Activation:



Automatically enables the probe relative to the feature or probing operations. Sets up an angular tolerance for enabled probes. Defines new probes.

Select / unselect planes In Auto or Manuel mode, all or just part of the planes that make up the containing box can be selected. Unselects all the alignments. Selects all the alignments.

Using the mouse in the 3D view preview of the window to select/unselect all planes: - Left-click: selects/unselects the plane which has been clicked. - Left-click +

: selects the plane which has been clicked only (the others are unselected).

- Left-click + - Left-click +

: selects all planes (the same as +

).

: unselects all planes (the same as

).

- Right-click and hold + moving the mouse: changes the orientation of the graphic view for the selection of planes

Examples: 

All planes selected



No plane selected

Page 333



Three planes selected

The name of the selected clearance planes is displayed to the right of the graphic view of the window. (e.g.: X-; Y-; Z+)

NoClearance Plane

Disables clearance plane(s).

Clearance Planes - Auto

Page 334

Used to enable clearance planes and determine their offset relative to features and/or the CAD model. The value of the margin defines the offset of all planes around the CAD model and/or of the features.

Clearance Planes - Manual

Activates clearance planes and manually determines the dimensions as well as the position of the containing box around the CAD model and/or of the features.

Page 335

When the probe is inside the configured clearance plane, the following warning message is displayed:

Move the probe, either with the joystick, if connected to a CMM, or by using the Positioning/Probing function.

Box Drawing Used to enable/disable display of a "container" box showing the clearance planes in the graphic view. This box is a cube surrounding the nominal/actual (defined/measured) features and the CAD model (if open).

Auto. Probe Activation the probe is not activated automatically. used to automatically activate the probes according to the orientation of the feature to be measured. used to automatically activate the probes according to the orientation of the probing points. For more information, see Managing Probes.

Parameters

Page 336

Used to configure the angular tolerance for probe selection and automatic activation. Used to enable/disable automatic definition of new probes.

to close the window (any changes made are saved).

Page 337

Managing Via Points

Via points are determined using clearance planes. Via point offset is the distance between the CAD model and the clearance plane.

Clearance Planes - Auto

Page 338

Used to enable clearance planes and determine their offset relative to features and/or the CAD model. The value of the margin defines the offset of all planes around the CAD model and/or of the features.

Clearance Planes - Manual

Activates clearance planes and manually determines the dimensions as well as the position of the containing box around the CAD model and/or of the features.

Page 339

When the probe is inside the configured clearance plane, the following warning message is displayed:

Move the probe, either with the joystick, if connected to a CMM, or by using the Positioning/Probing function.

Box Drawing Used to enable/disable display of a "container" box showing the clearance planes in the graphic view. This box is a cube surrounding the nominal/actual (defined/measured) features, irrespective of whether or not a CAD file is open. It includes the feature located at the greatest distance from the other features.

Auto. Probe Activation the probe is not activated automatically.

Parameters Used to configure the angular tolerance for probe selection and automatic activation. Used to enable/disable automatic definition of new probes.

Page 340

to close the window, any changes made are saved.

Example: After measuring feature CYL1, the software must measure surface points on the small inclined plane. To reach the next feature to be measured without a collision occurring, the software adds the required via points on the clearance planes. The probe, initially positioned over CYL1, skirts the upper clearance plane and creates a first via point on the edge. It then moves slightly down along the inclined plane to reach a second via point. The measurement approach is then started. Once the measurement has been made, a retraction distance equal to the offset between the container box and the feature is applied to create a third via point.

Note: If program Teach-in mode is being used, these three via points are added to the surface point measurement group.

Page 341

Managing Probes

Using clearance planes adjustable head position can be automatically managed according to the feature measured.

Clearance Planes - Auto

Page 342

Used to enable clearance planes and determine their offset relative to features and/or the CAD model. The value of the margin defines the offset of all planes around the CAD model and/or of the features.

Clearance Planes - Manual

Activates clearance planes and manually determines the dimensions as well as the position of the containing box around the CAD model and/or of the features.

Page 343

When the probe is inside the configured clearance plane, the following warning message is displayed:

Move the probe, either with the joystick, if connected to a CMM, or by using the Positioning/Probing function.

Box Drawing Used to enable/disable display of a box showing the clearance planes in the graphic view. This box is a cube surrounding the nominal/actual (defined/measured) features, irrespective of whether or not a CAD file is open. It includes the feature located at the greatest distance from the other features.

Auto. Probe Activation Three types of probe management are available:

-

the probe is not activated automatically.

-

: activates head positions so that the probe is aligned with the normal of the feature to be measured for Plane, Circle, Rectangle, etc. features, or with the axis for Cone, Cylinder and Line features.

Example: Measuring two planes

-

: activates head positions so that the probe is aligned with the normal to the points to

be probed.

Example: Measuring a section

Page 344

Note : When the option Relative to Probing is activated, all via points between each probing are removed. These via points are recalculated according to the clearance zone:

Page 345

If the adjustable head orientations required are present in the probes file, the software activates them. If not, the software defines them (the

box must be checked).

For the software to be able to automatically define a new head orientation, the orientation must be within the angular tolerance specified in the

field.

If the angular tolerance is too low, the following error message is displayed:

to continue with the current measurement with the active probe. to cancel the current measurement and modify angular tolerance, if required. When a new head orientation is activated, the following message is displayed:

to accept this head rotation. to refuse head rotation and use the active probe. to activate another, previously calibrated probe from the list. to cancel head rotation and cancel the current measurement.

Notes: Change of head orientation 

A small grey sphere appears in the 3D View on the display of an automatic probing path to indicate that there will be a warning message for a change of head orientation.

Page 346



During a change of orientation of the head, a safety zone is calculated above the clearance zone so that the probe remains out of the clearance box during the probe rotation. If the user decides to keep this change of orientation (probe automatically calculated or selection of another probe), the probe moves from the grey sphere to the center of this safety zone, performs the change of orientation, and returns to the grey sphere position to continue the measurement path.

Parameters Used to configure the angular tolerance for probe selection and automatic activation. Used to enable/disable automatic definition of new probes.

Click this button to close the window.

Page 347

Expansion/Shrinking This function may be used (for example) to:  

Make measurements on a mold using the CAD file for the corresponding workpiece (that is not to the same scale). Make measurements on a workpiece by applying a coefficient obtained from calculation of an Alignment by By Best-Fit (scale factor), or calculation of a distance (expansion coefficient for a reference standard, for example).

It also allows the same measurement program to be used for workpieces of identical shape but with different scale factors. When this function is selected, the following window is displayed:

Disabled This option is used to disable application of an expansion/shrinking coefficient. The coefficient is then implicitly assigned a value of 1.

Expansion / Shrinking percentage The X, Y and Z fields correspond to the expansion or shrinking percentage values to be applied in each axis. The fields may be assigned positive or negative values. If a null value is entered, no coefficient will be applied.

Page 348

Coefficient Used to directly enter a coefficient that will be applied to all axes when features are measured. This coefficient may also be obtained from the Alignment By Best-Fit calculation (=SCALE('REP4') for example) or a mathematical formula. Used to replace the existing coefficient with the new value entered or, if not checked (selected), to combine the two values in order to calculate a new coefficient.

Example: Expansion/Shrinking enabled with a coefficient of 1.02. A new coefficient value is entered (1.03). You may obtain either a new coefficient of 1.03 (by selecting the box), or a coefficient of 1.0506 (by deselecting the box).

Distance Used to select a Distance feature to obtain a new coefficient value: by selecting it from the drop-down list, or using the Browse Feature Database function. The calculated coefficient then corresponds to (nominal value of the distance)/(actual value).

Calculated coefficient Indicates the calculated coefficient.

Page 349

Alignment Used to specify the alignment in which the expansion or shrinking coefficients are to be used.

Used to apply the calculated coefficient both to future measurements and also to previously measured features.

Note: Only features that have really been probed will be affected by selecting this option. For example, constructed features (thus with no probing points) will not be affected by this choice and therefore not moved.

MEASURED FEATURES CONSTRUCTED FEATURES COEFFICIENT = 2

used to apply the configured expansion/shrinking coefficient.

Page 350

closes the window without applying any changes made.

Calculating expansion/shrinking Calculated dimension = Real dimension ± (Real dimension × coefficient (in %)) If a negative value is entered, shrinking is applied. If a positive value is entered, expansion is applied. Values displayed in the Results window:

With no expansion or shrinking: 90 10% expansion in the Z axis: 99 10% shrinking in the Z axis: 81

Example of use: The user has the CAD file for a workpiece and must check the corresponding mold. The workpiece to be inspected (the mold) is larger than the CAD model. The values measured on the mold must thus be "shrunk" to match the CAD model. This means a negative coefficient must be entered in the software Expansion/Shrinking window.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Create a new working session Select the Expansion/Shrinking option Enter the expansion or shrinking coefficients in the CMM alignment Click "Accept" to confirm. Calibrate a probe. Create an alignment.

Warning: Use of this function may give inconsistent results. For this reason, it should be activated before making any measurements.

Several indicators show that the Expansion/Shrinking function is enabled: The counter in the measurement window is displayed in red:

Page 351

Function disabled The

Function enabled

icon is displayed in the Status bar.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 352

Leapfrog Realignment The Leapfrog Realignment function is used to match measurements made in different alignments (coordinate systems). It is used for: - Measuring parts that have been moved. - Making measurements with a poly-articulated arm or laser when the workpiece is of larger size than can be handled by the measuring system. Moreover, the Mirror function allows inaccessible features to be measured using a reflection system on some types of laser CMMs.

Method to be applied for a part that has been moved:

To match the measurements made at position 1 with those made at position 2: - Create the alignment REP1 for the first workpiece position (this alignment may be different to the CAD

Page 353

alignment). - Make the desired measurements in this position. - Move the workpiece to position 2. - Create the alignment REP2, preferably using the same type of alignment and features to limit dispersion. However, a different type of alignment and features may be used. Although, in this case, the alignment position and orientation must be the same as those of alignment REP1 (with respect to the workpiece). - The CAD alignment may be activated. - Select the Leapfrog Realignment option from the CMM menu. The following window is displayed:

- Select measurement from REP2 (unpositioned alignment) to REP1 (alignment in position). -

Click this button to apply the settings entered.

- Measurements are now made with the Leapfrog Realignment function enabled. Thus, features measured in position 2 are automatically transferred to position 1. closes the window without applying any changes made.

Method to be applied for measurement with a poly-articulated arm or laser tracker: To match the measurements made with the arm in position 1 and those made with the arm in position 2: - Create the alignment REP1 with the arm in position 1. - Associate it to the CAD alignment, if a CAD file is used.

Page 354

- Make the desired measurements. - Move the arm to position 2. - Create the alignment REP2,, preferably using the same type of alignment as for alignment REP1 to limit dispersions.

- Select the Leapfrog Realignment option. - It is preferable to activate REP1. The following window is displayed:

Page 355

- Select measurement from REP2 (unpositioned alignment) to REP1 (alignment in position). -

Click this button to apply the settings entered.

- Measure the desired geometrical or surface features. The features measured in position 2 will thus automatically undergo the translations and rotations required to bring them to position 1. If making measurements at additional positions, the function must be disabled before the alignment for the following position is created. When the alignment has been created, reactivate the function and select measurement from REP3 (unpositioned alignment) to REP1 (alignment in position).

closes the window without applying any changes made.

Note: This function may also be used to measure workpieces of larger size than the CMM can handle. However, it should be noted that using this method will result in reduced measurement quality.

Method to be applied when measuring with a laser tracker and the Mirror function: To measure features that cannot be accessed with the laser tracker but that can be accessed with the mirror: - Perform direct measurement of a point feature. Preferably a target or a sphere: SPHE1 in the following example. - Measure the same feature using the mirror (measure the reflection). Assign it a different name. SPHE12 in the following example. - Select the Leapfrog Realignment option. The following window is displayed:

- Check (select) the Mirror box and select the features SPHE1 and SPHE2 from the drop-down list. The order of the features is not important as this function corresponds to a mirror symmetry. - Click Accept. - Inaccessible features may now be measured using the mirror.

Page 356

Important note: This function is automatically shutdown during a calibration.

In program: These functions may be programmed, the following lines are then added: Leapfrog Realignment only:

Mirror:

The two functions combined:

Function cancelled:

Page 357

Workpiece Temperature Compensation This function is used to compensate measurements by taking the temperature of the workpiece to be inspected into account. The window is shown below:

Note: The temperature given in this window may be given in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the temperature unit chosen.

Activate compensation If the box is checked (selected) and the temperature of the workpiece to be inspected is other than 20°C (68°F), the software compensates the measured values. The units used may be modified in the Preferences menu, by selecting Celsius, Fahrenheit.

Material

Page 358

To configure compensation, the material the workpiece to be inspected is made of must be selected from the drop-down menu (opened via the button). The field specifying the linear expansion coefficient is automatically completed. This list may also be manually completed by entering the name of the material and its expansion coefficient.

Example: Expansion coefficients for certain materials Type of material

Expansion coefficient (in µm/m/°C, equivalent to ppm/°C)

Mild steel Aluminum Silver Bronze Copper Tin Quartz Gold Nickel Nickel (grain) Nickel steel Porcelain Bismuth Magnesium Platinum Lead Tungsten Glass Zinc Cast iron Brass Molybdenum Cadmium Constantan Steatite Wolfram

12.0000000000 23.8000000000 19.7 17.5000000000 16.5000000000 23.0000000000 0.5000000000 14.2000000000 13.0000000000 18.0000000000 1.50000000000 4.00000000000 13.5000000000 23.0000000000 9.0000000000 29.0000000000 4.0000000000 9.0000000000 30.0000000000 10.50000000000 18.5000000000 5.20000000000 30.0000000000 15.2000000000 8.5000000000 4.50000000000

Temperature The value in the Temperature field must be entered manually. This is the temperature of the workpiece to be inspected. If this box is checked (selected), an automatic temperature reading may be used, however, in this case, an acquisition board must be used.

Alignment This field is used to specify the alignment to which the compensation is to be applied.

Page 359

Warning Check this box to display a warning message when the temperature varies by the deviation indicated in relation to the reference temperature, here ±5°. When the temperature is exceeded, it is displayed on a red background in the status bar. The frequency with which the temperature is monitored can be configured using a parameter. This is found in Advanced Parameters, CONFIG tab, TEMPERATURE section: UPDATE_TEMP_FREQ = time in milliseconds (by default 600,000). This warning can be activated without applying a temperature compensation. To do this, simply apply a null linear expansion coefficient.

After validating the window with this button, the show that temperature compensation is enabled.

icon is displayed in the Status bar to

In the measurement windows, the probed points counter is then displayed in red:

Without compensation

With compensation

Click this button to close the window without saving any changes made.

In program: This function can be used in a program. When compensation is enabled, the following line is displayed:

When compensation is disabled, the following line is displayed:

Page 360

Automated compensation

Real-time temperature compensation requires to create the MTXGTemp.ini file into the software directory and to modify its configuration file XG_CONFIG.ini. The file XGTemp2U.dll is already in the software directory.

MTXGTemp.ini file parameter setting In MTXGTemp.ini, define a mapping between logical sensor IDs (1 to n) and a physical channel on a PT104 box. Each PT104 box is connected to a serial port of the PC and can handle up to 4 temperature sensors. Use the following syntax : 

For resistance mode sensors:

The first number is the sensor ID, COM5 is the com port and the last number is the channel on the PT104 box (each PT104 has 4 channels, numbered 1 to 4). [SENSOR] 1=COM5,1 ... 

For tension mode sensors:

The first number is the sensor ID, COM1 is the com port and the last number is the channel on the PT104 box (each PT104 has 4 channels, numbered 1 to 4). Two more parameters have to be entered compared to resistance mode sensors, VOLT: Gain, Offset. [SENSOR] 4=COM1,4,VOLT:31.4,-11.1

The two modes can be mixed together, which means you can use at the same time both resistance and tension mode sensors. [SENSOR] 1=COM5,1 4=COM1,4,VOLT:31.4,-11.1

Define as well the electrical network frequency, in the [MAINS] section (for instance 50Htz in France, 60Htz in the United States). The syntax is as bellow : [MAINS] FREQ=… An offset value may also be entered for each sensor. The offset value must be expressed in degrees Celsius and may be either positive or negative. [SENSOR] 1=COM5,1, OFFSET:1.5

XG_CONFIG.ini file parameter setting

Page 361

In the XG_CONFIG.ini file, set-up the following parameters: [TEMPERATURE] PART_SENSORS=... X_SENSORS=... Y_SENSORS=... Z_SENSORS=... X_COEF=... Y_COEF=... Z_COEF=... REF_TEMP=… The ..._SENSORS parameters should define one or several sensor IDs. When more than one sensor ID is listed for one parameter, the software will use the mean temperature of the listed sensors.

It is necessary to fill in the 3 coefs X_COEF, Y_COEF and Z_COEF with the correct values for the particular machine. These coefficients should be given by the machine manufacturer. The coefs must be given in ppm (part per million), so the values should be roughly around 10.0... The REF_TEMP parameter equals the temperature when the technician has initially compensated the machine. Basically, this temperature is the reference temperature for the software, from which temperature compensation are applied to the machine axis. It means that for the REF_TEMP temperature, no compensation are applied to the machine axis. This parameter has to be set by hand directly in the XG_CONFIG.INI file.

Example : Settings for 7 temperature sensors connected on two PT104 boxes. There are two sensors per axis and one sensor for the workpiece. PT104#1 is connected on COM5 and PT104#2 on COM6.

Page 362

Compensation method All temperatures (part as well as machine axis) will be "latched" when you (or the part program) activate part temperature compensation. These memorized values will be used for compensation until you (or the part program) deactivate it (or activate it again). We must assume that temperature stays approx. constant while measuring one workpiece. Activate temperature compensation just before starting the measurement process of a workpiece and deactivate it as soon as measurement is complete. When measuring several workpieces on a palet, you may re-activate the temp. compensation in-between the different workpieces to adapt for slow shifts in temperature. Never change the temperature compensation within the measurement process of one single workpiece.

Page 363

Notes :  

Axis temperature compensations require an option in the software. Sensors have to be connected via the three wires mode, which is the only one supported by the software:

Page 364

Rotary Table The rotary table is a mechanical device allowing the orientation of a workpiece installed on a CMM to be changed. A change in orientation may be required to enable access to the features composing the measured workpiece. The calibration performed by the software allows the center of rotation and orientation of the rotary table to be determined, but DOES NOT COVER mechanical or software calibration of the rotary table.

Page 365

Move

This function allows the rotary table to be orientated at a given angle. Positioning is performed in the following window:

This field is used to set rotary table angle.

This part of the window is used to select Relative movement (with respect to the current position) or Absolute movement (with respect to 0).

Use the button to select the direction of rotation. Rotation may be performed in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction. If the Shortest Distance option is selected, the rotary table will turn in the direction allowing it to arrive the most quickly at the desired position.

Rotary table position is displayed in the DRO position window as a fourth axis:

Page 366

The parameters of this window may need to be modified for rotary table position to be visible.

Click this button to position the rotary table according to the parameters entered.

Closes the window without positioning the rotary table.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 367

Calibrate Rotary Table

This function allows the position and orientation of the axis of rotation of the rotary table to be determined. This calibration must be performed to allow rotary table compensation and thus the features measured in the active alignment to be computed whatever the position of the rotary table. Calibration is performed via the following window:

Calibration procedure - Check the rotary table is disabled (see the Activate menu). - Measure the same sphere with the rotary table in at least three different positions.

Page 368

- Open the calibration window. - Select the spheres measured by holding the Ctrl key down. The spheres must be displayed in increasing order of rotary table angle (in the above example, 0°, 45°, 90°,...), given that the table turns in the trignometric direction. -

If the spheres are not in the correct order, use the arrows to change their position in the list.

-

Click this button to start calibration.

The features resulting from rotary table calibration (circle, line and point) are then displayed in the database. Rotary table calibration is automatically saved by the software so that this procedure does not need to be performed at each startup.

closes the window without applying any changes made.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following lines are then added:

Page 369

Activate Rotary Table

This function is used to enable/disable rotary table compensation, i.e. to apply its angular coordinates. Rotary table compensation can be viewed in two ways: 

In the toolbar:

Rotary table enabled



Rotary table disabled

In the position display window:

Rotary table enabled

Rotary table disabled

Warning: When rotary table compensation is enabled, probe calibration cannot be performed as this may result in inconsistent results being obtained.

Note: When a tool calibration or change is performed, the rotary table is automatically disabled then re-enabled.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 370

Set-up Rotary Table

This function is used to configure the speed of rotation of the rotary table (in degrees per second) in the following window:

Click this button to configure rotary table speed according to the parameters entered.

Closes the window without configuring rotary table speed.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 371

Probe/Stylus Changers This function allows probe and stylus changers to be configured and used when a probe and/or stylus changer has been selected in the Setup Assistant.

Activate changer To enable or disable use of changers. The symbol at the start of the line is depressed when the changer(s) are activated.

Set-up Calibration Used to enter specific information on the current probe file. This information allows the changer(s) to be used correctly. It is displayed in the Edit information window of the Probes menu. The window differs according to the type of changer used:

or

Define Slot

Page 372

To associate a slot to the local alignment created. This information is entered in the window that is then displayed:

Store Probe in Slot Used to store the probe being used in the slot shown, without activating another one. When this option is selected, the following warning message is displayed before the machine moves:

Edit information Used to modify the name of the current slot. The edit window differs depending on the configuration being used in the software:

if a probe changer is used.

Page 373

if a stylus changer is used.

if both types of changers are used simultaneously.

Click this button to apply the changes made and close the window. Click this button to exit the window without saving the changes made.

Page 374

Probe Changers

The Renishaw ACR1 and ACR3 probe changers allow a probe to be changed during an automatic measuring program, without operator intervention. This is only possible if the probes and head are equipped with the autojoint connection and are perfectly aligned with each other. To check this alignment, measure four geometrical points (ball center, for example) on the upper part of the changer and check that they all have the same Z coordinate to +/- 0.01 mm. Then repeat the operation using points on the side of the changer to check its alignment in the X or Y axes (depending on changer orientation with respect to the axes of the machine) and check they have the same X or Y coordinates to +/- 0.01 mm.

Open the software Setup Assistant (XGSetupAssistant.exe) and check (select) the Probe changer box. Then select the probe changer used from the corresponding drop-down list, as shown below:

Page 375

To be able to use a probe changer, the software must know the orientation and position of each slot in the rack on the machine with respect to the probe connection. This calibration can only be performed if the machine's reference marks have been taken. It is then reloaded automatically each time reference marks are taken: it must therefore only be performed when probe changer position is changed. This operation is used to copy the files containing the pick-up and put-down paths for the selected changer(s) to the installation directory root: "getprob.dat" and "putprob.dat" for probe changers, "getstyl.dat" and "putstyl.dat" for stylus changers.

Page 376

ACR1 Tool Changer

Description The ACR1 is composed of two main parts: the probe rack and the control unit. 

The rack

The rack comprises eight probe storage slots, the calibration probe and the display LEDs. Each slot is equipped with a screwdriver allowing the probe connections to be locked and unlocked and a sliding flap. Flap position is used by the control unit to detect rack status. Four flap wedges are provided to hold the flaps open for certain phases of changer calibration. The calibration probe is used in certain changer calibration phases to determine the position of the probe connection with respect to the rack.



The ACC2 control unit

This manages rack operation (screwdriver control, probe switching, errors). Front panel LEDS display status and the Reset button is used in the event of errors or to change mode.



The display LEDs

Page 377

Probe changer status is shown by LEDs on the rack and control unit. The following table shows their functions. Two control unit LEDS are not mentioned: On/Off and Probe Status (current probe state, on (lit) if the probe is active).

Operation There are two operating modes: DATUM 1: allows the flaps to be opened without generating a probe change cycle, thus allowing slot position to be measured. Indicated on the rack by the Probe active and Change cycle LEDs coming on simultaneously and on the control unit by the Rack ready LED flashing. Transition to this mode is performed by pressing the Reset button on the control unit while maintaining one or more changer flaps open. This mode is exited either by closing the flaps (transition to DATUM 2 mode), or by pressing the Reset button with the flaps closed (transition to normal mode). DATUM 2: activates the calibration probe allowing probe connection measurement. Indicated on the rack by the Cycle error and Lock error LEDS coming on simultaneously and on the control unit by the Rack active LED flashing. Transition to this mode is performed by switching to DATUM 1 mode and closing the flaps. This mode is exited either by opening one or more flaps (transition to DATUM 1 mode), or by pressing the Reset button with the flaps closed (transition to normal mode).

Page 378

Note: Meaning of error messages: Rack not connected: the control unit is powered but the rack is not connected. Cycle time out (exceeded): ten seconds after the screwdriver command, the flaps were still not closed. Overtravel: the probe rack allows 7mm overtravel down and to the rear. An overtravel detector triggers an "overtravel" error of 0.5 to 1.5 mm.

Calibration Warning: It is important to make sure that the changer is correctly aligned with the machine axes. To do this, probe 4 ball center geometrical points on the plane above the changer and check that they are aligned in the Z axis to at least one tenth of a millimeter. If this is not the case, use the adjustment screw on the base of the changer to correct it. Follow the same procedure for the front face of the changer (X or Z axis depending on the machine used).

ACR1 tool change calibration is a three-step procedure: 

Configure probe changer alignment: used to define an alignment with the changer probe calibration ball as origin.

- Measure the top of the rack (points A, B, C, D) as a plane. - Measure the front of the rack (points E, F, G) as a line. - Measure the changer probe calibration ball as a sphere (dia. 8mm).

Warning: The triggering force of the probe on the head must be less than that of the rack probe.

Create a Geometrical alignment orientated according to the normal of the previously probed plane and line and with the ball center of the rack probe for origin, as shown in the diagram.



Configure probe connection position: calculate tool length to define the position of the probe connection.

Remove the probe from the head using the wrench.

Page 379

Switch to DATUM 2 calibration mode to activate the rack probe. To do this: - Maintain one or more flaps open, - Press the Reset button on the probe changer control unit, - Close all the flaps, - Check that the rack probe is active. Manually force probe ball diameter (8mm) by performing an artificial calibration of diameter 8 for the active probe. Probe a plane on the flat surface of the connection (points A, B, C, D). Measure the diameter of the connection (points E, F, G, H) as a circle by selecting the previously probed plane as projection feature. It is important that the machined part of the connection be correctly measured (if there is one).

Re-install the probe on the head using the wrench (do not forget to move 5° back). Evaluate the distance between the center of the circle and the center of the sphere by selecting the sphere as reference feature so that probe length has the correct sign.

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Set-up Calibration. The following window is displayed:

Page 380

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of changer of which the position is to be entered. Here, this is a Probe changer. As only a probe changer has been selected in the Setup Assistant, Stylus cannot be selected. The Probe Dimensions in the X, Y, and Z axes correspond to the components of the vector passing through the center of the circle and the center of the changer ball. used to select the distance feature corresponding to the calculated probe connection dimension from the Features database.

Warning: If a stylus changer is used jointly with the ACR1 changer, certain precautions must be taken when performing calibration. See the Using changers page.



Configure slot position: used to define the position of each slot. Notes:





The program calibration_acr1.GM2 ( default location in the folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\ACR1) may be used in place of the following procedure. All the following measurements must be performed with the same calibrated probe.

Re-install the probe using the wrench (do not forget to move 5 degrees back). Check that the adjustable head is in the position used for probe change operations. Switch to DATUM 1 calibration mode to activate the probe on the head and inhibit flap opening being taken into account. To do this: - Maintain the flaps of the slots to be calibrated open with the wedges, - Press the Reset button on the probe changer control unit, - Check that the probe on the head is active. Manually force ball diameter by performing an artificial calibration for the diameter calculated during the actual (real) calibration performed previously, or re-calibrate the probe.

Run the program calibration_acr1.GM2 and follow the instructions using the photos as a guide, or follow the instructions given below to calibrate the ACR1 changer manually:

Page 381

Probe the upper face of the connection as a plane (points A, B, C, D).

Probe the rounded part of the slot at approximately 3mm from the upper face as the arc of a circle (E, F, G, H), with the previous plane selected as projection feature.

Create a Geometrical alignment orientated according to the normal of the measured plane on the upper face and the line measured for rack alignment creation, with the center of the arc as origin.

Warning: The direction of the alignment axes must be as shown in the following diagram as the alignment will be used for the probe put-down (storage) and pick-up sequences. For more information, see the Advanced use page.

Page 382

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Define Slot. The following window is displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of changer to be configured. In the example, this is an "autochange" Probe changer slot. As only "Probes" has been selected in the Setup Assistant, Stylus cannot be selected. In the Reference field, enter a name to identify the slot being configured (it is advisable to use a name with a number showing slot position). In the Ref. Alignment field, select the previously created alignment. The Head Angles field is automatically completed. It shows angles A and B of the adjustable head used when the Define Slot window was opened.

Warning: Before this window is opened, adjustable head position must be the position that will be used for probe changes.

Repeat the Set-up Calibration operation for each slot used. Exit DATUM 1 calibration mode. To do this: - Close all the flaps, - Press the Reset button on the probe changer control unit, - Check that the probe on the head is active. The probe changer is now ready to be used.

Page 383

ACR3 Tool Changer

Description This changer has four probe storage slots. Each slot is equipped with a screwdriver to unlock and lock the probe connections and a sliding flap to protect the slot. Two flap wedges are provided to hold the flaps open for certain calibration phases. The probe connection is automatically locked and unlocked by a translational movement of the rack on its mounting base. This pick-up/put-down movement is automatically performed by the software.

Calibration Run the program calibration_acr3.GM2 (default location in the folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\ACR3) and follow the instructions using the photos as a guide, or follow the instructions given below to calibrate the ACR3 changer manually: Probe the upper face of the connection as a plane (points A, B, C, D).

Page 384

Probe the rounded part of the slot at approximately 3mm from the upper face as the arc of a circle (points E, F, G, H), with the previous plane selected as projection feature.

Create a Geometrical alignment orientated according to the normal of the plane measured on the upper face and a line measured along the changer with the arc as origin.

Warning: The direction of the alignment axes must be as shown in the following diagram as the alignment will be used for the probe put-down (storage) and pick-up sequences, for more information, see the Advanced use page.

Page 385

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Define Slot. The following window is displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of slot to be configured. In the example, this is an "autochange" Probe changer slot. As only a probe changer has been selected in the Setup Assistant, Stylus cannot be selected. In the Reference field, enter a name to identify the slot being configured (it is advisable to use a name with a number showing slot position). In the Ref. Alignment field, select the previously created alignment. The Head Angles field is automatically completed. It shows angles A and B of the adjustable head used when the Define Slot window is opened.

Warning: Before this window is opened, adjustable head position must be the position that will be used for probe changes.

Repeat the Define Slot operation for each slot used. The probe changer is now ready to be used.

Page 386

Zeiss probe changer - ST head

Description The Zeiss tool (probe) changer is used to change probes fitted on an ST head. This changer may be used with a Zeiss CNC or with an ME5007 CNC version XG 3.002 or higher. The controller must be version 2.35G.

Calibration To configure slot position, use the program Zeiss_ST_Changer.gm2 (located by default in the folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\Zeiss) and follow the instructions using the photos as a guide or follow the instructions given below to calibrate the changer manually. Probe a point Pt1, as shown in the following photo, with plane XY of the machine alignment as compensation feature (if the head is orientated in the Z- axis):

Page 387

Then probe point Pt2 as shown:

Evaluate the distance between these two points, while selecting point Pt1 as reference feature so that probe length has the correct sign.

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Set-up Calibration. The following window is displayed:

Page 388

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of changer of which the position is to be entered. Here, this is a Probe changer. As only a probe changer has been selected in the Setup Assistant, Stylus cannot be selected. used to select the distance feature (from the Feature Database) corresponding to the calculated dimension of the probe used for calibration.

Note: The X and Y values are not 0, they must be modified to obtain probe dimensions of type (0 ; 0 ; -Z).

Probe the upper face of the slot as a plane:

Page 389

Probe a line along the slot:

Probe the rounded part of the slot at approximately 3mm from the upper face as a circle with the previous plane selected as projection feature.

Page 390

Create a Geometrical alignment orientated according to the normal of the plane measured on the upper face and the line measured along the slot with the center of the circle as origin.

Warning: The direction of the alignment axes must be as shown in the previous diagram as the alignment will be used for the probe put-down (unloading) and pick-up (loading) sequences (for more information on these two sequences, see the Advanced use section). Repeat the plane, line and circle measurements and alignment creation procedure for each slot. In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Define Slot. The following window is displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of changer to be configured. In the example, this is an "autochange" Probe changer. As only a probe changer has been selected in the Setup Assistant, Stylus cannot be selected. In the Reference field, enter a name to identify the slot being configured (it is advisable to use a name with a number showing slot position). In the Ref. Alignment field, select the previously created alignment. The Head Angles field is automatically completed. It shows angles A and B of the adjustable head used when the Set-up Calibration window is opened.

Warning: Before opening this window, make sure adjustable head position is the position that will be used for probe changes.

Repeat the Define Slot operation for each slot used. The probe changer is now ready to be used.

Page 391

FCR25 Tool Changer

Description This changer has three storage slots in which the user can choose to store an SM25 module, a TM25 adaptor module allowing a TP20 module to be used, an SH25 continuous calibration stylus holder, or a TP20 module. This choice is made possible by the use of various accessories provided with the FCR25 changer. Use of this type of changer is somewhat particular. If the FCR25 is used alone, it may be used as both a tool changer and a stylus changer. In this case, an SM25 module, a TM25 adaptor module, a SH25 continuous calibration stylus holder and a TP20 module may all be changed. If the FCR25 is used with an ACR1 or ACR3 tool changer, it may only be used as a stylus changer. In this case, it may be used to change SM25 or TM25 modules fitted with SH25 calibration stylus holders or TP20 modules, or only to change SH25 calibration stylus holders. In the latter case, the SM25 module remains on the SP25 probe when it is stored in the ACR1 or ACR3 tool changer.

Calibration To configure slot position, use the program Calibration_SP25_rack_changer.GM2 (located by default in the folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\SP25-SM25) and follow the instructions using the photos as a guide.

Page 392

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Set-up Calibration. 

Probes changer

Enter the probe-stylus distance (Module unloading level - probe hit point) of the active calibrated probe as shown below:

Page 393



Stylus changer

When the FCR25 is used as a stylus changer, it is not necessary to modify the calibration settings. The window is shown below:

Edit Probes Information

If the FRC25 is used alone (both as a probe and stylus changer), a probes file must be assigned to each slot that is to receive probe balls (probe module + stylus or stylus only). The Edit Probes Information window should then be displayed as shown below: 

If there is a common probe module for several styluses, the Probe Slot Reference and Stylus Slot Reference fields are to be completed as follows:

Page 394

Probe Slot Reference corresponds to the module unloading slot. Stylus Slot Reference corresponds to the stylus unloading slot.



If there is a probe + stylus module assembly, the Probe Slot Reference and Stylus Slot Reference fields are to be completed as follows:

Page 395

Probe Slot Reference corresponds to the assembly unloading slot. Stylus Slot Reference must not be entered.



In all cases, the Probe (dimensions) part of the Edit Probes Information window must not be edited (the values must be left at zero). This is because the dimensions for the different modules are directly taken into account by the FCR25 changer calibration program.

Page 396

Stylus Changers

The Renishaw SCR200, MCR20 and SCP80 stylus changers allow a stylus to be changed during an automatic measuring program, without operator intervention. The SCR200 and MCR20 changers are composed of a single part, the stylus rack. On the SCP80, each part corresponds to a stylus position. The SCR200 is connected to a PI200 interface unit. Open the software Setup Assistant (XGSetupAssistant.exe) and check (select) the Stylus changer box. Then select the stylus changer to be used from the corresponding drop-down list, as shown below:

Calibration To be able to use a stylus changer, the software must know the orientation and position of each slot in the rack on the machine with respect to the probe connection. This calibration can only be performed if the machine's reference marks have been taken. It is then reloaded automatically each time reference marks are taken: it must therefore only be performed when stylus changer position is changed.

Page 397

FCR25 Tool Changer

Description This changer has three storage slots in which the user can choose to store an SM25 module, a TM25 adaptor module allowing a TP20 module to be used, an SH25 continuous calibration stylus holder, or a TP20 module. This choice is made possible by the use of various accessories provided with the FCR25 changer. Use of this type of changer is somewhat particular. If the FCR25 is used alone, it may be used as both a tool changer and a stylus changer. In this case, an SM25 module, a TM25 adaptor module, a SH25 continuous calibration stylus holder and a TP20 module may all be changed. If the FCR25 is used with an ACR1 or ACR3 tool changer, it may only be used as a stylus changer. In this case, it may be used to change SM25 or TM25 modules fitted with SH25 calibration stylus holders or TP20 modules, or only to change SH25 calibration stylus holders. In the latter case, the SM25 module remains on the SP25 probe when it is stored in the ACR1 or ACR3 tool changer.

Calibration To configure slot position, use the program Calibration_SP25_rack_changer.GM2 (located by default in the folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\SP25-SM25) and follow the instructions using the photos as a guide.

Page 398

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Set-up Calibration. 

Probes changer

Enter the probe-stylus distance (Module unloading level - probe hit point) of the active calibrated probe as shown below:

Page 399



Stylus changer

When the FCR25 is used as a stylus changer, it is not necessary to modify the calibration settings. The window is shown below:

Edit Probes Information

If the FRC25 is used alone (both as a probe and stylus changer), a probes file must be assigned to each slot that is to receive probe balls (probe module + stylus or stylus only). The Edit Probes Information window should then be displayed as shown below: 

If there is a common probe module for several styluses, the Probe Slot Reference and Stylus Slot Reference fields are to be completed as follows:

Page 400

Probe Slot Reference corresponds to the module unloading slot. Stylus Slot Reference corresponds to the stylus unloading slot.



If there is a probe + stylus module assembly, the Probe Slot Reference and Stylus Slot Reference fields are to be completed as follows:

Page 401

Probe Slot Reference corresponds to the assembly unloading slot. Stylus Slot Reference must not be entered.



In all cases, the Probe (dimensions) part of the Edit Probes Information window must not be edited (the values must be left at zero). This is because the dimensions for the different modules are directly taken into account by the FCR25 changer calibration program.

Page 402

MCR20 Stylus Changer

Description 

The rack

This rack has six stylus storage slots. Each slot has a sliding flap:



Stylus changer loading

It is recommended that the MCR20 slots be loaded using a CNC with the TP20 probe. This ensures correct stylus positioning and alignment when performing repeated stylus changes. To calibrate the probes, the styli must be correctly connected to the TP20. To do this, make sure the stylus is correctly assembled with the probe using the three alignment symbols shown below and located on the TP20 and its module:

Page 403

Calibration 

Configure stylus connection position

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Set-up Calibration. The following window is displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of changer of which the position is to be entered. Here, this is a Stylus changer. As only a stylus changer has been selected in the Setup Assistant, Probes cannot be selected. used to select the type of stylus used. The Stylus Length and Ball Diameter fields are automatically updated according to the type of stylus selected. Stylus length may also be manually entered.

Warning: This operation must be performed to be able to configure slot positions.



Configure slot position

To configure slot position, use the program Calibration_MCR20.GM2 (located by default in the folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\StylusChanger\Mcr20) and follow the instructions using the photos as a guide or follow the instructions given below to calibrate the SCR200 changer manually. Check that the adjustable head is in the position used for stylus change operations. Open and retain slot 1.

Page 404

Probe the upper face of the central block of the stylus changer as a plane (PL1).

Note: Renishaw recommends use of a PS35R stylus. If you do not have this stylus, the length of the stylus used must not exceed 20 mm and ball diameter 2 mm.

Measuring plane PL1 Construct a plane PL2 parallel to plane PL1 and located at a distance of -8.250. For the first slot, probe lines L1, L2 and L3, using the parallel plane as projection feature.

Page 405

Measuring line L1

Page 406

Measuring line L2

Measuring line L3

Page 407

Construct line L4, located at a distance of 8.250 from line L1 and passing through plane PL2. Construct the median line L5 between L2 and L3. Construct the intersection point Pt1 between lines L4 and L5. Create a Geometrical alignment orientated according to the normal of plane PL1 measured on the upper face, with line L4 as direction and the point of intersection of lines L4 and L5 as origin.

Warning: The direction of the alignment axes must be as shown in the following diagram as the alignment will be used for the stylus put-down (storage) and pick-up sequences. For more information, see the Advanced Use page.

Close slot 1.

Construct the geometrical alignments REP2, REP3, REP4, REP5 and REP6, for slots 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, by performing a translation of 30, 60, 90, 120 and 150 mm on alignment REP1 in the Y+ axis. In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Define Slot. The following window is displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of slot to be configured. Here, this is an "autochange" Stylus Changer. As only a stylus changer has been selected in the Setup Assistant,

Page 408

Probes cannot be selected. In the Reference field, enter a name to identify the slot being configured (it is advisable to use a name with a number showing slot position). In the Ref. Alignment field, select the previously created alignment. The Head Angles field is automatically completed. It shows angles A and B of the adjustable head used when the Set-up Calibration window is opened.

Warning: Before this window is opened, adjustable head position must be the position that will be used for stylus changes.

Repeat the Set-up Calibration operation for each slot used. The stylus changer is now ready to be used.

Page 409

SCP80 Stylus Changer

Description 

The rack

An SCP80 rack has a single storage slot. Several SCP80s must therefore be used in order to be able to perform stylus pickup/putdown operations. Each slot has a sliding flap:



Stylus changer loading

SCP80 stlus changers may be manually loaded. Unlike on the MCR20 and SCR200 changers, styli are positioned using guide rails, thus avoiding any risk of incorrect stylus orientation.

Calibration To configure slot position, use the program Calibration SCP80.GM2 (located by default in the folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\StylusChanger\Scp80) and follow the instructions using the photos as a guide.

Page 410

SCR200 Stylus Changer

Description 

The rack

The rack has six stylus storage slots and display LEDs. Each slot has a sliding flap:



The Pi200 control unit

The control unit controls operation of the TP200 probe and stylus rack.



Stylus changer loading

It is recommended that the SCR200 slots be loaded using a CNC with the TP200 probe. This will ensure correct stylus positioning and alignment when performing repeated stylus changes. To calibrate the probes, the styli must be correctly connected to the TP200. To do this, make sure the stylus is correctly assembled with the probe using the three alignment symbols shown below and located on the TP20 and its module:

Page 411

Check the probe has been correctly reset by pressing the button located on the PI200 interface unit.



Display LEDs

The LEDSs on the rack show stylus changer status. The following table shows their functions:

The SCR200 has two operating modes, Mode A and Mode B. These two modes are selected using a switch located under the block composing the central part of the stylus changer.

Warning: The SCR200 must be disconnected to select a change of mode. When it is reconnected, the SCR200 performs a test procedure and switches to the selected mode. 

Mode A

Place the switch to the left. It is recommended that stylus changes always be performed in this mode (this mode will be used for stylus change operations). In this mode, the probe can only be deactivated by a stylus change, by moving the probe in front of a sensor located on the central block. This operation activates the infra-red detection system that, in turn, deactivates and resets the probe during a stylus change cycle.

Page 412



Mode B

Place the switch to the left. In this mode, the infra-red detection system is always active. Any object traversing the infra-red beam will result in the probe being deactivated. Accidental beam cutoff (by the operator's fingers, for example) will result in a collision. Thos mode is not recommended for stylus change cycles. However, it may be used by loading the SCR200 slots with the TP200 probe.

Power on: the stylus changer performs a ten-second test procedure (the Power and Status LEDs flash) to check correct operation.

Calibration 

Configure stylus connection position

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Set-up Calibration. The following window is displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of changer of which the position is to be entered. Here, this is a Stylus changer. As only a stylus changer has been selected in the Setup Assistant, Probes cannot be selected. used to select the type of stylus used. The Stylus Length and Ball Diameter fields are automatically updated according to the type of stylus selected. Stylus length may also be manually entered.

Warning: This operation must be performed to be able to configure slot positions.



Configure slot position

Page 413

To configure slot position, use the program Calibration_SCR200.GM2 (located by default in the folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\StylusChanger\Scr200) and follow the instructions using the photos as a guide or follow the instructions given below to calibrate the SCR200 changer manually. Check that the adjustable head is in the position used for stylus change operations. Open and retain slot 1. Probe the upper face of the central block of the stylus changer as a plane (PL1). The points probed around the name plate.

Note: Renishaw recommends use of a PS35R stylus. If this is not the case, make sure stylus length does not exceed 20 mm and ball diameter 2 mm.

Measuring plane PL1 Construct a plane parallel to the previously probed plane and located at a distance of - 6.150. For the first slot, probe lines L1, L2 and L3, using the previous plane as projection feature.

Page 414

Measuring line L1

Measuring line L2

Page 415

Measuring line L3 Construct line L4, located at a distance of 23.630 from line L1 and passing through the median plane. Construct the median line L5 between L2 and L3. Construct the intersection point Pt1 between lines L4 and L5. Create a Geometrical alignment REP1 orientated according to the normal of the plane measured on the upper face, with line L4 as direction and the point of intersection of lines L4 and L5 as origin.

Warning: The direction of the alignment axes must be as shown in the following diagram as the alignment will be used for the stylus put-down (storage) and pick-up sequences. For more information, see the Advanced Use page.

Close slot 1. Repeat the different steps for slot 6, by measuring lines L6 and L7 and constructing the median line L8, and point of intersection Pt2. Construct the geometrical alignment REP2. Construct the geometrical alignments REP2 and REP3 associated to slots 2 and 3, by performing a translation of 30 and 60 mm of alignment REP1 in the Y+ axis.

Page 416

Construct the geometrical alignments REP4 and REP5 associated to slots 4 and 5, by performing a translation of 30 and 60 mm of alignment REP6 in the Y+ axis.

In the CMM menu, select Probe/Stylus Changer(s) > Define Slot. The following window is displayed:

The two radio buttons at the top of this window are used to select the type of slot to be configured. Here, this is a Stylus Changer. As only a stylus changer has been selected in the Setup Assistant, Probes cannot be selected. In the Reference field, enter a name to identify the slot being configured (it is advisable to use a name with a number showing slot position). In the Ref. Alignment field, select the previously created alignment. The Head Angles field is automatically completed. It shows angles A and B of the adjustable head used when the Set-up Calibration window is opened.

Warning: Before this window is opened, adjustable head position must be the position that will be used for stylus changes.

Repeat the Define Slot operation for each slot used. The stylus changer is now ready to be used.

Page 417

SCR600 Stylus Changer

Description 

The rack

An SCR600 rack comprises four stylus storage slots. Each slot has a sliding flap:



Stylus changer loading

It is recommended that the SCR600 slots be loaded using a CNC with the SP600 probe. This will ensure correct stylus positioning and alignment when performing repeated stylus changes.

Calibration To configure slot position, use the program Calibration SCR600.gm2 (located by default in the folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\StylusChanger\Scr600) and follow the instructions using the photos as a guide.

Page 418

Using changers

Assigning a slot to a probes file Once a probe has been installed and calibrated, it must then be assigned a slot. To do this, from the Probes menu, select the Edit Informations option. The following window is displayed:

System Data: in this section, two variables show probe file creation date and the date on which the file was last modified. These variables are automatically updated and cannot be modified. User Data : user-defined variables are entered in this section, with the syntax name = value. Slot Reference used to select the slot in which the probe is to be stored. If a stylus changer is used, a specific field for styli will be displayed. Select the slot in which the probe is to be stored, then save the modified probes file. It is advisable to name the probes file to show the slot used (in the example, the probe will be in slot 1, the probes file could thus be saved under the name slot1.plp, for example).

Modifying the name of the current slot The name of the slot in which the probes file currently in use is to be stored can be changed at any time. To do this, select the menu CMM > Probe/Stylus Changers > Edit Informations or click slot name in the software status bar.

Page 419

The following window is then displayed:

Select the desired slot from the list of slots. Click this button to associate the probe in use with the selected slot. This association is only temporary. It is not saved in the probes file. To save it, see the previous paragraph. Click this button to exit the window without associating the probe to the selected slot.

Putdown and pickup To put down (unload) the probe currently installed in its assigned slot and pick up (load) the probe located in slot Y, perform the following procedure: Select Open from the Probes menu. The following warning message is displayed:

Click this button to cancel loading of the probes file. When this button is clicked, the following window is displayed:

Page 420

Select the desired probes file. The probe in use is stored in its slot. The corresponding probes file is closed so that the new probes file containing the desired probe can be opened. The probe is then loaded from its slot. The following window is displayed during probe putdown/pickup (unloading/loading):

Click this button to abort probe loading.

Wait until the unloading/loading sequence is complete. Select the position of the adjustable head to be used in the following window:

Page 421

Bear in mind that, in this probe or stylus unloading/loading sequence, the slot to which the probe or stylus is to be unloaded (stored) is specified in the the software status bar (see previous paragraph). However, the data used by the software to know in which slot a probes file is stored is shown in the Edit Informations window (displayed from the Probes menu).

Unloading without loading Select Probe/Stylus Changers > Store Probe in Slot from the CMM menu. The following window is displayed during probe putdown (unloading):

Click this button to abort probe unloading.

Wait until the probe unloading sequence is complete. The procedure is the same for both probes and styli.

Pickup (loading) This function is used when no probe is loaded and the user wants to use a probe that is stored in a probe or stylus changer. Select Open from the Probes menu.

Page 422

The following window is then displayed:

Select the desired probes file. The following window is displayed during probes file loading:

Click this button to abort probe loading.

Wait until the probe loading sequence is complete. Select the position of the adjustable head to be used in the following window:

Page 423

The procedure is the same for both probes and styli.

Simultaneous use of several changers The software allows simultaneous use of a stylus changer and a probe changer or two stylus changers or two probe changers. 

ACR1-ACR1 configuration

The different changers are calibrated as described in the relevant online help pages. But if two changers of the same type are used, the calibration program used for the second changer must be modified to avoid the slots created during the first calibration being overwritten. For this type of configuration, first calibrate the first ACR1 changer using the program calibration_acr1.GM2, (default location in the folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\ACR1), then calibrate the second ACR1 changer using the program calibration_acr1_n9-16.gm2, (default location in the folder C:\Program Files\MetrologicGroup\Metrolog XG\ToolsChanger\ACR1-ACR1).



ACR1 and SCR200 configuration

In the software, two separate lengths must be specified in order to calibrate the probe changer (length LO) and the stylus changer (length LS).

Page 424

Length LO is from the autojoint plane to the stylus attachment plane. Length LS is from the stylus attachment plane to ball center. These two values must be entered in the Set-up Probe Changer Calibration window, accessed via the menu CMM > Probe/Stylus Changers > Set-up Calibration.

In this example, the value to be entered in the probes file is D= (X=0, Y=0, Z=-100).

Page 425

If the probe is different to the probe used for calibration, the value to be entered in the probes file is the new LO value for the relevant probe. This value must be updated for each new probe used. With the probe used in the above example, the Edit Informations window for the probe is as shown below:

If the following probe configuration is used,

Page 426

the Edit Information window should be as shown below:

Page 427



Probe and stylus change operations

Each probes file has a corresponding stylus changer slot number and probe changer slot number. Hence, when a probes file is loaded, the probe changer slot and the stylus changer slot references are displayed in the status bar:

This is also the case in the Edit Information window opened via the Probes menu:

Page 428

The probe dimensions displayed at the bottom of the window are the sum of the probe and stylus dimensions.

Precautions of use Various problems may occur during probe loading operations. Most of these problems are caused by manual actions performed by the operator on the rack or probe and may easily be avoided. Following these rules will allow potential problems to be limited:

- Make sure the slot for the probe currently in use is empty (otherwise a collision will occur at unloading). - Make sure there is a probe present in the slot from which the probe is to be loaded (otherwise the machine will be in "open probe" configuration at the end of the cycle). - Make sure the probes are in their respective slots. To ensure this, it is advisable to always store the probes in the same slots, whatever the measurement program used. - If the machine is manually locked, fully tighten then move 5 degrees back, otherwise the following automatic unlocking operation will not be able to be performed (ACR1-ACR3). - After an error has occurred, check that the probe on the head is active. This is because incorrect acknowledgement may have deactivated the probe on the head and activated the probe in the rack (ACR1). - Make sure there are no obstacles between probe position and probe changer position.

Page 429

ACR1 error handling 

Probe stored in an occupied slot

A collision occurs between the two probes at the slot entry, this results in unlocking of the adjustable head. As the probe is still closed, movement can be performed using the joysticks. Lock the head from the console and clear it.



Probe loading attempted from an empty slot

The procedures runs correctly until exit from the slot. At this time, the probe changer validates the probe on the head. As there is no probe, the probe signal is activated. The CNC considers probing to have taken place and stops. As the probing point is located in the slot, the joysticks cannot be used to perform clearance. Hold the ACC2 Reset button depressed (probe inhibited), use the joysticks to clear it then, after making sure that all the flaps are closed, release the button and manually attach the probe specified in the Slot window.



Positioning problem

If positioning is incorrect (CNC incorrectly adjusted, incorrect calibration) or it the probe was incorrectly installed manually (without the 5 degree return), the machine forces slot entry, thus resulting in unlocking of the head, triggering of the probe changer safety device or a control error. As the cycle cannot be completed, the probe changer goes to error status after a ten-second interval, this preventing further movement. Press the ACC2 Reset button once, then clear the machine using the joysticks while holding the button depressed. If the error was an adjustable head error, lock it while requesting positioning.

In all cases, after acknowledging the error, check the following points:

- That the probe mounted on the head is indeed the probe from the slot displayed by the software in the slot window. If not, change it manually. - If the probe was manually installed, that the 5 degree return movement was performed. - That each probe is in the correct slot. - That all the flaps are closed. - The probe on the head is active.

Advanced use The files containing the probe loading/unloading sequences are: 

For probe changers

GETPROBE.DAT PUTPROBE.DAT Meaning of the header characters: Command $ T, "MOVE WITH PROBE OPENED", 1 P, 30.0, 0.0, 5.35 S, 5.0 C, "PAUSE", x C, "CHANGING ST HEAD 1"

Meaning The characters following this command are comments and are not taken into account. Enables to deactivate the probe while moving. The digits following this command specify the coordinates of the target position of a movement (position to be reached). This command indicates a movement speed change (Speed) to 5 mm/s. This command indicates a stoppage of x seconds. This command enables probe loading on ME 5007

Page 430

C, "CHANGING ST HEAD 0" C, "M07" C, "M08" C, "UNLOCK LOCK"

CNCs. This command enables probe unloading from ME 5007 CNCs. This command enables probe loading on Zeiss CNCs. This command enables probe unloading from Zeiss CNCs. This command enables unlocking then locking of the measurement head.

Example files: GETPROBE.DAT $ Probe loading sequence $ -X- -Y- -ZT, "MOVE WITH PROBE OPENED", 1 P, "" 30.0, 0.0, 5.35 S, 5.0 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 5.35 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, -1.85 C, "PAUSE", 0.3 : Stopped for 3 tenths of a second (to allow probe locking) P, "" 0.0, 0.0, -1.65 P, "" 30.0, 0.0, -1.65 or $ Zeiss ST probe loading $ -X- -Y- -ZP, "" 70.0, 0.0, 10.0 S, 30.0 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 10.0 S, 10.0 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 C, "M07" C, "PAUSE", 0.5 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 10.0 S, 30.0 P, "" 70.0, 0.0, 10.0 PUTPROBE.DAT $ Probe unloading sequence $ -X- -Y- -ZP, "" 30.0, 0.0, -1.65 S, 5.0 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, -1.65 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, -1.85 C, "PAUSE", 3.0 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 5.35 P, "" 30.0, 0.0, 5.35 or $ Zeiss ST probe unloading $ -X- -Y- -ZP, "" 70.0, 0.0, 10.0 S, 30.0 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 10.0 S, 10.0

Page 431

P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 C, "M08" C, "PAUSE", 0.5 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 10.0 S, 30.0 P, "" 70.0, 0.0, 10.0

For stylus changers



GETSTYL.DAT PUTSTYL.DAT Meaning of the header characters: Command $ T, "MOVE WITH PROBE OPENED", 1 P, 30.0, 0.0, 5.35 S, 5.0 C, "PAUSE", x D, "CASIER3" 21.0, 25.0, -10.0, 21.0, 10.0, -10.0, "CASIER1", "CASIER2","CASIER3", "CASIER4", "CASIER5", "CASIER6"

Meaning The characters following this command are comments and are not taken into account. Enables to deactivate the probe while moving. The digits following this command specify the coordinates of the target position of a movement (position to be reached). This command indicates a movement speed change (Speed) to 5 mm/s. This command indicates a stoppage of x seconds. Movement with respect to the alignment associated with slot 3. The coordinates of the target positions are then displayed. The slot names shown at the end of the command are the names of the slots concerned by these movements. The slot names must match the names configured by the user at stylus changer calibration.

Example files: GETSTYL.DAT $ Stylus loading sequence $ -X- -Y- -ZT, "MOVE WITH PROBE OPENED", 1 D, "CASIER3" 21.0, 25.0, -10.0, 21.0, 10.0, -10.0, "CASIER1", "CASIER2","CASIER3", "CASIER4", "CASIER5", "CASIER6" : P, "" 21.0, 0.0, 3.0 S, 5.0 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 3.0 C, "PAUSE", 0.3 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 P, "" 21.0, 0.0, 0.0 PUTSTYL.DAT $ Stylus unloading sequence $ -X- -Y- -ZD, "CASIER3" 21.0, 25.0, -10.0, 21.0, 10.0, -10.0, "CASIER1", "CASIER2", "CASIER3", "CASIER4", "CASIER5", "CASIER6" P, "" 21.0, 0.0, 0.0 S, 5.0 P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 C, "PAUSE", 0.5

Page 432

P, "" 0.0, 0.0, 3.0 P, "" 21.0, 0.0, 3.0

The file REFSTYL.DAT gives a list of Renishaw styli that can be fitted on a TP200 probe with the corresponding lengths and ball diameters. "PS29R", 10.0, 0.3 "PS10R", 10.0, 0.5 "PS31R", 10.0, 0.7 "PS9R", 10.0, 1.0 "PS24R", 10.0, 1.5



For all types of changers

It is possible to specify whether, after a probe or stylus change, the probe must return to the position occupied before the change or remain in the slot used. To do this, in the file XG_DME.INI, modify the variable PTEND in the section [CHANGEUR]. If PTEND = 0, the probe remains at the last slot used. If PTEND = 1, the probe returns to the position occupied before the probe file change.

Note: In a Metrologic + SP25 + TP200 CNC configuration, it is necessary to change the time-out parameter in the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters, DME tab, CHANGER section: M_DTEMPOREACTIVATION = 250.

Page 433

Compensation File Information This function is only available if 23-parameter compensation is enabled on the CMM. It allows the information contained in the compensation file, "MT23.dat", to be read.

This function allows the following information to be extracted from the MT23.dat file:        

Compensation file access path. Date and time of MT23.dat file creation. Date and time file was last modified. CMM brand/manufacturer. CMM model. Serial Number. Comments in the compensation file. CMM type.

The window containing this information is displayed as shown below:

Page 434

Probes This menu can be displayed in two different ways, depending on the CMM and/or head configuration used:

Reduced menu: for example in the case of a configuration with a poly-articulated arm type system.

Full menu: in the case of a digitally-controlled CMM with geometrical compensations.

Page 435

Page 436

Introduction Principle of calibration The aim of the calibration is to determine the diameter of the probe ball and the position of its center. In effect, when the CMM starts up, it retrieves the positions X, Y and Z of a point at the end of the measurement arm (without probe). If the reference marks are taken, they will mark the origins of these coordinates. The calibration should be used to locate probes with regard to others. Normally on 3D measurement CMMs, probing points are acquired when the ball of the probe comes into contact with the part. The probe opens a contact, and an electronic pulse is sent to the system. At this precise moment the system acquires the X, Y, Z coordinates.

Since these X, Y, Z coordinates are not those of the real contact point, the software must apply a translation, corresponding to the probe configuration. In addition, since the diameter of the ball is not nil, the software must also apply a correction to the value of the ball radius. It is the role of the calibration to determine this offset and this ball diameter. If using several probes, or an adjustable head, calibration allows you to find out the relative position of all the probes used. To perform calibration, the points must be taken on a calibration or reference sphere with its exact diameter known (calibrated if possible), taking care to distribute the points as uniformly as possible. The system knows the diameter of the reference sphere and, based on the coordinates of each probed point, it determines the diameter of the probe ball and its position in relation to the CMM.

Page 437

r: radius of the reference sphere R: ball center radius

The ball radius = (the radius of the ball centers - the radius of the reference sphere).

Note: For contact probes, the diameter of the ball will generally be smaller than the actual diameter, due to the bending of the shaft.

Adjustable heads These avoid the need for multiple sensors and are used to reach difficult areas. They are normally motorized and used on digitally-controlled CMMs, although some of these heads can be adjusted manually.

Page 438

Each time a probe is called with a head position other than the current position, the head moves automatically to the new position. When requesting a new position, remember to move the part out of the way. For each position used, a probe must be calibrated.

Recommendations Avoid excessively long shafts, excessive bending can affect the quality of the measurements. Check that the stylus is correctly screwed in. Avoid excessively "complicated" probe configurations. Avoid probing at a tangent to the part, normal probing is preferable. Take points widely spread around the reference sphere, at least five points are required for a calibration: four points on the equator, one point on the pole. Avoid probing below the equator, since the contact can be made in this case with the shaft. For a multiple sensor probe, check that the probe used is the defined probe; use the drawing as a reminder in the definition of the probe. Check the result, in particular that of the form fault.

Page 439

New file of probes This function can be accessed: - via the Probes menu - via the Probes database context menu. It is used to initialize a new probes file: the current probes file is then closed. However, the software detects whether the current probes file has been modified and if it has, a message suggests saving the probes list:

Clicking on this button closes the message without saving the probes list. Clicking this button opens the save window:

Once the probes list is saved, the Edit information window concerning the new probes file appears:

Page 440

Click this button after entering or modifying the User data if required.

Note: If no probes file has yet been opened and modified, the Edit information window shown above is opened directly. Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.

Note: With changer (probes or stylus), you have to store probe to a case.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 441

Open probes file, Open previous probes file Open probes file This function is used to load a probes file. It may be accessed either:

- via the Probes menu -

via the toolbar, by clicking this button

- via the Probes database context menu.

The Load Probes from a File window is shown below:

Click this button to open the probes file selected and close the window. Click this button to close the window without opening the probes file.

This checkbox is used to enter a number of days during which the probes file will be valid. The validity duration may be expressed as a decimal number.

Example: To render a probes file valid for half a day:

Page 442

If any of the probes in the file has a calibration date that is no longer valid, the following message is displayed whether the program is running or not. However, probes in this condition can still be used:

After selecting the *.plp file from the list, the following window appears:

The software then suggests Activating one of the probes.

Open previous probes file This function can be used to quickly reload a recently used probes file. If no validity date has been entered for the probes file to be opened, in the menu the probe loading line is displayed as follows:

If a validity date has been entered, however, the line is displayed as follows:

Notes: 

If a probes file is open, the software displays the following message:

Page 443

Clicking this button closes the message and the current set of probes remains active. Clicking this button displays the Load Probes from a File window. 

If the type of adjustable head selected in the setup assistant is not the same as the one with which the probes file to be opened was created, the following message appears:

Opens the probes file, bearing in mind that it is not suitable for the hardware configuration.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 444

Save a probes file, Save as These functions are used to save a set of probes. Their names, orientations, diameters, shaft diameters and calibration spheres are taken into account when saving.

Save a probes file This function can be accessed: - via the Probes menu -

by clicking this button on the Toolbar.

- via the Probes database context menu.

Save is used to save the probes file assigning it a name and a directory, if it is being saved for the first time, or to save the changes made in this same file. The save window is shown below:

Select the save directory and name the file. The file will be a *.plp file.

Notes:  

It is very practical to save the set of probes, especially when using an adjustable head with a lot of calibrated positions. This allows you to reuse calibrated positions later. If the probes file has already been saved, the software saves it automatically, without opening the save window.

Page 445

Warning: To reuse a saved set of probes, it is essential that this set has not been modified (mounted, remounted, different length of stylus, different ball diameter). Otherwise a new calibration will be necessary.

Save as Save as is used to save the current probes file under a different name. The save window shown above then opens, and is used to modify the name and the path of the current file.

Note: This is only relevant for a file which has already been saved. If saving for the first time, simply use the Save a probes file command.

Click this button to save the set of probes. Click this button to close the window without saving the set of probes.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 446

Print probes list This function is used to print a list of the probes contained in a file. It may be accessed: - via the Probes > Print probes list menu - via the Print button of the Activate a probe window - via the Probes database context menu. The Print window is shown below:

This window is used to configure print settings and start printing. Print layout is as follows:

Page 447

The columns printed correspond to the columns selected in the Activate a probe window. Right-clicking in this window displays the following menu, in which a marker indicates the selected columns:

Page 448

Note: if the print settings (Portrait/Landscape) mean you cannot print the number of columns selected, the following message appears:

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Warning: The configuration of the columns is stored in the program line. It is therefore no longer modifiable during program execution.

Page 449

Export probes list This function is used to export the list of the probes contained in a file in text format. It may be accessed: - via the Probes menu - via the Probes database context menu. The window is shown below:

Choose the target folder and the name of the exported file.

Click this button to save the probes list in the chosen export file and exit the window. Click this button to exit the window without exporting the probes list.

When the text file has been exported, it can be edited in an Excel editor, for example. It is then displayed as shown below:

Page 450

Page 451

Define probe This function is used to assign a name to the probe, to define a position (for an adjustable head), then to calibrate it. This function can be accessed: - via the Probes> Define menu -

by clicking this button on the Toolbar.

The definition window is shown below:

This field is used to give a name to the probe. With each new definition, the software attaches a number to the name given. If there is an adjustable head, the name given by default corresponds to the position of the head. or

These icons indicate whether or not the documented probe is calibrated. Field for entering the diameter of the probe.

Page 452

used to select the ball number for a star probe.

Note: The value of the diameter can be modified after calibration, and even forced at the moment of the definition.

This button is used to define a probe (by entering its name and orientation), to calibrate it artificially (by entering its nominal diameter) and to choose it as the current probe. The software then displays the following message:

By clicking on this button, the probe A45.0_B-37.5 is calibrated artificially and no logical link can be established with other probes. When the probe is activated, its name appears in the tool bar.

Warning: if the probe is defined with an adjustable head position and the CNC is connected to the software, the adjustable head positions itself when the probe is activated. To avoid disengaging, you therefore need to clear the adjustable head of all obstacles.

This button is used to artificially define a probe with the chosen position, but it is not activated. The warning message mentioned above is also displayed.

The drawing at the center of the window is interactive. It takes the positions specified by the operator, in the case of an adjustable head:

Page 453

The drawing may vary according to the choices made in the setup assistant during the installation:

These two fields indicate the angles of the adjustable head defined for this probe.

These buttons are used to give a new value to the angles. By clicking on a button, the angle increases or decreases according to the values allowed for the type of head.

Angles A and B take the minimum and maximum values allowed for the type of head connected. For heads with three angles, an additional field appears, used to define the angle C. It is also possible to define head angles by clicking in the 3D View. The angle values are calculated as a function of the entity clicked (feature, CAD, section, etc.). Certain conditions should be fulfilled in order to use this function off-line:  

The configuration of the measuring head, as well as its orientation, configured in the setup assistant, should correspond to those of the CMM. The CAD alignment in the work session should correspond to the alignment of the part in the CMM alignment.

The values proposed are rounded off as a function of the increment of each head. If the head is not indexed, the value proposed is the exact value, to the degree.

Example: Definition of angle by clicking on the right plane of the part.

Page 454

To use the probe, it must be calibrated by clicking on this button. The calibration window is then displayed.

closes the window.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 455

Activate This function is used to select one of the probes defined and/or calibrated as a current probe. It may be accessed: - via the Probes menu - via the Probes database context menu. The Activate a probe window is shown below:

The name of the probes file loaded is displayed at the top of the window, above the list of the probes making up this file.

Several status indications may appear in the list: Probe for which the shaft has actually been calibrated. Probe for which the ball has actually been calibrated. Probe for which the shaft is not calibrated. Probe for which the ball is not calibrated. Probe for which the ball is not calibrated but is used for qualification Probe for which the shaft has been artificially calibrated. Probe for which the ball has been artificially calibrated. Probe for which the ball has actually been calibrated and which has been used to qualify the adjustable head. Probe of a continuous measurement head for which the ball has been interpolated.

This line of the field is used to sort the probes by number, name, angles, ball or shaft diameters, and their form fault. It can be configured: the width of the columns can be increased or decreased using the mouse cursor.

Page 456

Additional columns can be displayed. To do this, right-click with the mouse in the probes list area. The following context menu appears:

Choose the new columns to be displayed and those to be hidden. Choosing Default settings will return to the initial column display.

Select the probe required from the Activate a probe window. The line is then highlighted.

activates the selected probe. This then becomes the current probe and its name appears in the toolbar

.

prints the list of probes. closes the window without applying any changes made.

Warning: if the probe is defined with an adjustable head position and the CNC is connected to the software, the adjustable head positions itself at the moment the probe is activated. To avoid disengaging, you therefore need to clear the adjustable head of all obstacles.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 457

For more information on an error occurring during program execution, see Error management.

Page 458

Calibrate This function is used to define the diameter of the ball and the position of the probes with regard to the reference sphere. It is therefore important to not move the sphere during the calibration of a set of probes. It may be accessed: - via the Probes menu - via the Probes database context menu

The calibration window is shown below: Manual calibration

Semi-automatic calibration

Name

Select the name of the probe to be calibrated in the drop-down list of defined probes.

Page 459

Manual calibration : when this box is unchecked, at least five points must be taken manually.

Semi-automatic calibration : when this box is checked, a first point must be taken manually. The following points are measured automatically by the CMM.

Number of points used to enter the number of points to be probed to validate a calibration, at least 5.

Maximum form fault used to enter the maximum form fault tolerated for the calibration: when this fault is exceeded, an error message appears giving the user the choice of retaining this calibration or repeating the calibration.

Automatic stop used to immediately calculate the calibration when the minimum number of probing points is reached.

Repeat used to move on to the calibration of the following probe, once the previous calibration has been validated. Warning, the adjustable head moves to take up its new position.

Auto. calibrate probe shaft used to carry out automatic calibration of the shaft (artificially) by entering a diameter. This is only possible if the adjustable head has been qualified.

Shaft diameter When the automatic calibration of the probe is activated (previous field), this field is accessible, and used to enter the nominal diameter of the shaft.

Page 460

This button appears when selecting a semi-automatic calibration, used to access the Calibration parameters:

Enter the automatic calibration parameters here: the approach, search and retract distances, the number of probing points and, if necessary, an offset of the probing area, according to the equator of the sphere. Then simply probe one point manually at the zenith of the calibration sphere. Three points are then probed in automatic mode, near to the first probed point. This provides an initial approximation of the calibration. Finally, the number of probings entered in the Calibration parameters window is carried out. Check this box to use the probing direction of the stylus to be calibrated. Check this box to generate a greater number of contouring calibration paths (head orientation, calibration sphere, ball diameter, calibration sphere diameter, etc.).

aborts the probe and exits the calibration.

Number of points probed.

validates the points measured for the calibration to be calculated.

Page 461

deletes the previous point, if for example the point was probed incorrectly.

Note: For a manual calibration, the points must be distributed over the surface of the sphere (at least on one half sphere). Probes at a tangent must be avoided.

Calibration parameters

Select the sphere on which the calibration is to be carried out, Master or local sphere. The diameter is displayed for indication purposes, but cannot be modified in this field.

When adding a probe to the existing field, at the moment of the calibration the following message will appear:

The button is used to cancel the calibration, so as to locate the probes file if necessary, before calibrating a new position. The button is used to inform the software that the position of the sphere is OK and that the calibration can be carried out without any problems.

Using a star probe A star probe is calibrated differently depending on whether it is fitted on:  

a fixed head: semi-automatic calibration can be used. The first probing points is then taken along the direction of the shaft of the stylus to be calibrated. an adjustable head: semi-automatic and automatic calibration can be used. For semi-automatic calibration, a number must be given to each probe ball. For automatic calibration, fill in the Ball No. field in the probe definition window.

Utilisation of disk probe

Page 462

A disk probe is calibrated as follows: 8 points should be probed around the equator of the calibration sphere: 4 points below the semi-thickness of the disk and 4 points above. The probe points should be equally distributed on each side of the sphere along two circular paths, in order to obtain a correct compensation of the shaft and a reliable calculation of the centre of the sphere:

Note: The toolbar button takes this status when the current probe is calibrated. This button, on the other hand, indicates that the current probe is not calibrated.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following lines are then added:

Page 463

Calibrate shaft Probing using the shaft of a probe or a cylindrical probe can be useful for features located on the edges of sheet metal, as shown in the following figure:

To be able to calibrate the shaft of a probe, the probe must first have been calibrated, or at least artificially calibrated. This function can be accessed: - via the Probes menu - via the Probes database context menu

In the probes file, the shaft appears as follows: when it is not calibrated when it is calibrated.

The shaft calibration window is shown below:

Page 464

Name Select the name of the probe for which the shaft is to be calibrated in the drop-down list of the defined probes.

Actual calibration

The calibration of a probe shaft involves using this shaft to measure two perpendicular edges, these two edges having been probed on at least points, at different heights. The points probed on each of the edges must describe a plane. The intersection of these two planes gives the direction of the shaft.

Page 465

Therefore, in the calibration window enter the maximum form fault accepted, indicate the number of points measured on edge 1, then on edge 2. Indicate the nominal diameter of the shaft, measured with slide calipers for example.

Nominal calibration

To use this function, the probe head must have been qualified, otherwise the out.

field is grayed

This function is used to automatically calibrate the probe shaft selected (from the drop-down list) without having to probe the two edges. It is the orientation of the head which is used. Simply enter the nominal diameter of the shaft in this field.

Click this button to calibrate the shaft of the probe. To calibrate more than one shaft consecutively, simply check this box.

Page 466

Maximum form fault used to enter the maximum form fault tolerated for the calibration: when this fault is exceeded an error message appears, giving the user the choice of retaining this calibration or repeating the calibration.

Number of points probed used to enter the number of points probed on edge 1. used to enter the number of points probed on edge 2.

Shaft diameter used to enter the nominal diameter of the shaft.

Automatic stop used to immediately calculate the calibration when the minimum number of probing points is reached.

Repeat used to move on to calibrate the shaft of the following probe, once the previous calibration has been validated.

aborts the probe and exits the calibration.

Number of points probed.

validates the points measured for the calibration to be calculated.

Page 467

deletes the previous point, if for example the point was probed incorrectly.

Warning: the calibration of the shaft in the software does not involve calculating the diameter of the probe shaft, but rather its direction. This is because it is the direction which is taken into account when calculating the features, when they are measured in shaft probing.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following lines are added:

Page 468

Automated calibration of the probe shaft This function is used to automatically calibrate the shaft of the probe(s) selected in the Probes database. It can be accessed via the Probes database context menu. The window is shown below:

Enter the diameter of the shaft in this field. validates the diameter entered. closes the window without applying any changes made.

Note: If the probe head has been qualified, automated calibration of the shaft is possible for all the head positions.

Page 469

Unlock / Lock head This function enables unlocking then locking of the measurement head. This function can be used after a change of tools or after a shock in order to re-position the head correctly..

In program mode: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 470

Qualify probe head This function is used to determine the position, the dimensions and the orientation of the probe head with regard to the CMM, in order to initialize the automated calibration function. This involves calculation carried out from probe head positions, some of which are enforced and already calibrated. On selecting this function, the following window appears:

The minimum number of positions to be used to be able to qualify the motorized head and angles is indicated in the upper part of the window. Depending on the head selected in the Setup Assistant or depending on the type of probe used, the number of positions may vary. This window is the same type as that of the Activate a probe function.

To qualify the probe head, simply check the boxes corresponding to the required probes:

This button is available if the minimum number of probes is respected and the angles

Page 471

A and B correspond to the requirements. If it remains grayed out, it means either that not enough probes have been selected, or that the selected head positions are not suitable. Clicking this button displays the following message if the head has been qualified correctly:

Otherwise, an error message appears, specifying that the head has not been qualified.

closes the window without applying any changes made.

Notes: 

When a head is modeled and at least one probe is calibrated, the head is qualilfied. Automatic calibration then becomes possible for the other modeling probes.



The Qualify Probe Head window can be left open as a reminder if: - when the window is opened, no probe appears in the list - the number of probes available or their angles cannot be used to qualify the head Therefore, the positions required remain visible while using a probe calibration and definition window. In the case of a head with an offset axis, five calibrated probes are required, with precise angles A and B, to qualify the probe head. The following window is then displayed:



In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 472

Page 473

Quick qualification of the motorized head The quick qualification of the motorized head (like the full qualification) is used to determine the position, the dimensions and the orientation of the head with regard to the CMM. This has the advantage of being quicker than the standard qualification. This qualification procedure is only possible if the motorized head is mounted according to the CMM axes (rotation axes A and B of the head parallel to the CMM axes), and if the parameters concerning this configuration have been entered correctly in the setup assistant. The qualification involves probing the zenith point of a reference sphere with the two head positions (A=0°,B=0°) and (A=90°,B=as chosen), having entered the rough diameter of the ball. Once the first point is probed in position (A=0°,B=0°), three additional points are probed in automatic mode, close to the first point. This provides an initial approximation of the calibration. The position of the head must then be changed to (A=90°,B=angle chosen). If the CNC is connected to the command console, the head will change position through the buttons intended for this purpose. Otherwise, two probes must first be calibrated artificially with the two head positions, and when the position is to be changed, simply activate the required probe in the toolbar. The probing procedure is the same as for the position (A=0°,B=0°), the zenith of the sphere must be probed again. On selecting this function, the following window appears:

Page 474

Uncheck this box if the length of the shaft is unknown. In this case, the quick qualification is carried out using the two head positions indicated at the top of the window. If the length of the probe shaft is known, the box can be checked so as to enter this length. In this case, the quick qualification is carried out only in position (A=0°,B=0°)

Enter the approximate diameter of the ball in this field.

Shows the ball number during a start configuration used to indicate the distance between head rotation center and ball center. Clicking this button displays the following window, used to configure the quick qualification options such as the approach, search and retract distances of the CNC, as well as the parameters of the calibration sphere:

aborts the probe and exits the calibration.

Number of points probed.

Page 475

Click this button to validate the points probed and proceed with the qualification of the motorized head.

deletes the previous point, if for example the point was probed incorrectly.

When the quick qualification has been carried out correctly, the following message appears:

Since the quick qualification is less accurate than the standard qualification (approximate determination of the shaft length, no precise alignment of the head with regard to the axes), it may be best to increase the approach and search distances used during the automated calibration.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following lines are then added:

Page 476

Create / Modify Measure Head Configuration It is possible to access the function via the Probes menu. It is used to display the configuration of the orientable head in the 3D View. It also gives access to the automatic calibration window of the probes without going through qualification, contents or not, of the orientable head. In fact, it is just necessary to load the probe file in which an orientable head configuration is recorded, then to calibrate a probe to gain access to automatic calibration.

Notes:  

 

If the configuration of the head is deleted, the probe file however preserves the same information pertaining to the qualified head. When a head configuration is loaded and a new probe file is opened, a message for preserving the configuration is displayed:

Only one configuration can be recorded in a probe file. The head display parameters can be modified via the 3D View > Rendering menu.

The window displays as below :

Page 477

It is composed of three areas: - The left area is a library of items from different manufacturers (a preview is displayed when an item is selected). - The central area lists the selected sub-assemblies. - The right-hand part displays the head and the probe configuration as its construction progresses.

Click the tab corresponding to the desired manufacturer. A head is composed of different sub-assemblies according to the manufacturer. A list of head sub-assemblies for the selected manufacturer allowing the head assembly to be configured is displayed. The selected item is displayed in the top window:

Click on this button to select an item, or double-click the item. When an item is selected, the scrolling menu automatically offers preset items suitable for adding to the previous sub-assembly. For example, when a PH10M/Renishaw head is selected, an autojoint sub-assembly item (extension or probe) is offered for selection. The various items selected are displayed in the central list. In the example below, the assembly is composed of a PH10M/Renishaw head, a PAA1/A-1051-0417 type extension, a TP2 type probe and a PS16R/A-5000-4160 type stylus:

Page 478

The angles of the head can be configured in order to best align the probe head. To do this, click the Settings function in the head context menu.

The following window is displayed:

Enter fixation (attachment) rotation (in degrees). This parameter allows head orientation on its attachment point to be modified. and Enter the rotation of the A and B axes, parallel to the CMM axes (in degrees). These parameters enable head movement to be viewed. Click this button to accept the head settings. Click this button to cancel any changes made.

Page 479

If the selected item does not match head configuration, select the item in the central area and click on this button. A preview of the assembly is displayed in the right part of the window. To access the Generic Accessory Editor. Used to open an existing head configuration. To save head configuration under a new name. To change background color. Used to re-center the head in the 3D View.

Used to exit the window without having loaded or modifed any head.

Used to exit the window by loading or by modifying the head in the 3D View.

Note:  

In the different previews, probe configuration may be moved in the same way as in the graphic view. The image may be re-centered by double-clicking. For a "Star probe" or "Elbow probe" configuration, the angles of the head may be set to position the probes at the desired angle.

Right-click on the name of the head (PH10M in the above example) and select Settings in the context menu. 

A red hemisphere represents the position of the stylus for a star configuration. Simply select one of the locations in the tree structure for its position to be visible in the 3D view in order to add the relevant stylus.

Page 480



This feature is available for optical sensors in the same way as for the adjustable heads.

Page 481

Generic accessory editor

This function is used to create libraries of customized accessories (styluses, extensions, etc.), that can be used when creating a head and that round out the standard libraries in the Head Creation Wizard. This function is accessed by clicking on this button

in the Add Head window.

The following window is displayed:

Libraries The Generic Accessory Editor thus allows customized libraries to be created in *.xte file format. These libraries are then saved either in the software's DATA folder or in the DATA_DIR if the station is operating with an environment variable. The libraries are managed from the Generic Accessory Editor:

Page 482

-

: file name and hence name of the active library in the editor.

-

: create a new library.

-

: open a library and activate it in the editor.

-

: save active library.

- List of accessories contained in the active library:

Opening a library

, allows a list of all available libraries to be accessed in the following window:

Page 483

This button is used to delete a library.

Adding accessories to a library To add accessories to a library, accessory type must be specified:

To complete the different characteristics and information for the selected accessory:

This button is used to add the accessory to the list in the active library:

Page 484

Using libraries in the Head Creation Wizard Libraries created in the Editor are directly displayed in the Head Creation Wizard in the form of additional accessory tabs, each representing the content of a library (i.e. an *.xte file):

Accessories

Different categories of accessories may be added

and, for each of these, different types

may be added. Accessories may be of two types: configurable generic accessories and customized accessories created directly by the user.

Configurable generic accessories For any configurable generic accessory (extension, stylus extension, stylus, accessory, etc.), simply select the type then enter the corresponding configuration settings:

Page 485

- the dimensional configuration of the accessory:

These configuration settings allow the dimensional characteristics of the accessory to be defined and its representation in the graphic view (ball and shaft material, etc.). - the functional configuration of the accessory:

Page 486

Definition of accessory name in the form in which it will be displayed in the library. Comment on the accessory.

Type of item (Auto-joint, M2 bolt, M3 bolt, etc.) on which the accessory can be mounted. Type of item (Auto-joint, M2 bolt, M3 bolt, etc.) that can be mounted on the accessory (for an extension). These configuration settings allow the assembly/mounting characteristics of the accessory to be defined.

Customized accessories Customized accessories directly created by the user may also be added to a library. , used to select an *.SU3 file representing the accessory:

This file must have been previously imported into the software from a supported CAD file. This CAD file will have been created in compliance with a certain number of rules allowing it to be connected with the other items and the probing areas to be defined. Curves and circles are used to do this, named as follows: - The name of the curve defining the entry connection point of the accessory must start with "INCON" (and may be followed by a number). - The names of the curves defining the probe balls or exit connection points of the accessory must start with "

Page 487

OUTCON" and must be followed by a number defining the name of the exit point.

- If a circle is used, its center must represent the most distant point of the connector in the direction of the shaft, and its orientation represent shaft direction.

- If a line (or a curve) is used, one of its ends must represent the most distant point of the connector in the direction of the shaft and its orientation represent shaft direction.

Page 488

Page 489

Automated calibration This function allows automated calibration of the probes. You can therefore calibrate a large number of measuring head positions automatically. It can only be accessed if the head has been qualified first (See Qualify probe head and Quick qualification of the motorized head). If the probes to be calibrated are defined, the software uses this definition for the automated calibration. If the probes to be calibrated are not defined, the software creates each probe assigning it a name made up of angles A and B (See Standard automated calibration). The probes can also be named using the Advanced automated calibration. When a head is modeled and at least one probe is calibrated, the head is qualified. Automatic calibration then becomes possible for the other modeling probes.

Standard automated calibration The Automated calibration window is shown below:

This window takes the form of a table with two entries, A and B being the possible angles for the probe head. When the cursor is moved, angles A and B corresponding to the box in which the mouse cursor is positioned appear in red.

You can also read the current position in this field. The red boxes indicate the positions which have already been calibrated, in particular those which have allowed qualification of the head.

Page 490

The brown boxes indicate expired positions. They only show up is the Nbr Days of Validity option has been checked on opening the probe file and the number of days of validity has been exceeded. To calibrate a position you must click on the corresponding gray box, this then becomes green and will be calibrated automatically. To select several positions in the table click the left mouse button and move the mouse to produce a window covering all the positions required.

The number of positions to be calibrated is displayed at the bottom left of the window.

Used to select the number of the ball. Select Laser if you are using an optical sensor. reselects all the positions which have already been calibrated in order to recalibrate them. selects all positions known as expired. cancels this operation. clicking this button displays the following window, used to configure the automated calibration options such as the approach, search and retract distances of the CNC, probe shaft calibration, as well as the parameters of the calibration sphere:

Page 491

exits the window without applying any changes made. After selecting the probes to be calibrated, click this button to begin the calibration. A message warning of obstacles between the current position of the probe and the position to be reached appears:

Click this button. The calibrations begin and the following window appears, showing in real time the result of the probe calibrations already carried out and the number remaining to be carried out:

Page 492

Clicking this button aborts the automated calibration and a confirmation message appears. However, the positions which have just been calibrated are retained. When the automated calibrations are completed, the software systematically proposes saving the probes in a file.

Advanced automated calibration It is possible to carry out automated calibration of the positions of the probe head which cannot be accessed through the standard positions grid, by indicating the exact positions required in a table. This positions file can be saved in text format (*.ini) and reused later. To do this, click this button in the automated calibration window, the following window will then appear:

Page 493

Enter the values of angles A and B, then the name of the probe. Then click this button to add this probe to the list of probes for automated calibration.

Page 494

modifies the information concerning a probe previously selected in the list. To change the calibration order for the probes, select the probe position to be moved and use the arrows on the right of the table. is used to save and name this positions file so as to be able to reuse it. A *.ini or *.txt file (as chosen) is then created. This file is shown below:

with the following characteristics: Value of angle A

Separator

Value of angle B

Separator

22.500°

;

0.000°

;

Name of the probe P1

opens a positions file.

Page 495

deletes a previously selected position. deletes the whole positions table. used to carry out automated calibration of the shaft (artificially) by entering a diameter. This is only possible if the probe head has been qualified. This field is used to enter the nominal diameter of the shaft. the calibration options must be configured using this button, then choose whether or not to carry out automated calibration for the shaft in each position. used to automatically begin the automated calibration, with the same warning messages as explained above. Likewise, when the calibrations are completed, the software systematically proposes saving the probes in a file. returns to the standard automated calibration page: the grid with all the probe head positions to be selected. exits the window without applying any changes made.

Note: If a quick qualification of the motorized head has been used to access the automated probe calibration and if the probes chosen for the automated calibration allow it, the probe head will be fully qualified.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 496

Locate probes This command is used to locate a probes file on a calibration sphere, meaning the offsets of the probes of this file are brought into line with the calibration sphere(s) of the CMM. This involves recalibrating one or more adjustable head positions on the reference sphere. The Locate probes window is shown below, similar to the Activate probes window:

Press this button after selecting one of the probes. In the next window, measure the sphere on which the location is required:

Page 497

This button becomes active after validation of the measurement and automatic closing of this window. When you click on this button, the following message is displayed:

prints the probes list. closes the window without applying any changes made.

Page 498

Note: The sphere can be measured using several probes rather than just the one. In this case, the result of the location is taken as an average.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following lines are then added:

Page 499

Locate calibration sphere This function is used to position another reference sphere (physical) on the table of the CMM to be measured. This is defined by its name, its diameter, its orientation and its X, Y, Z coordinates. This gives the advantage of being able to calibrate probe positions which cannot be accessed on the Master sphere. The location window is shown below:

For a straight sphere

For an inclined sphere

Page 500

used to enter the name of the calibration sphere or to select an existing sphere in the drop-down list. used to enter the diameter of the calibration sphere.

used to indicate the inclination angle of the shaft on which the sphere is positioned. used to enter the diameter of the shaft.

The components of the orientation vector are automatically displayed according to the angle A and the orientation parameters entered.

Note:

The fields I, J, K can only be edited if this box is checked.

and These buttons are used to configure the position of the calibration sphere with regard to the CMM axes, aiming to avoid any collision with the shaft of the sphere in automated calibration. When this box is checked the fields of the orientation vector components can be edited, in order to define a sphere orientated in the CMM volume.

closes the window without applying any changes made. Click this button when all the settings have been entered. The following window is displayed:

Page 501

Click this button after choosing one of the probes in the list. The following window is then displayed:

Measure the calibration sphere, in the same way as for a probe calibration (see Calibrate a probe) Once the measurement is completed, the sphere location window appears as shown below:

Page 502

Clicking this button displays the following message:

Note: The sphere can be measured using several probes rather than just the one. In this case, the result of the location is taken as an average.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following lines are then added:

Page 503

Memorize/Move Master sphere For CMMs which use 23-parameters compensation, the position of the Master sphere must be memorized with a probe which will be used as a reference probe. The aim of this procedure is to position the Master sphere with regard to the reference marks of the CMM and allows for correct use of the compensations. This procedure is to be carried out in the following cases: - on CMMs controlled by an ME5007 controller and using the software 23-parameter compensation (MT23.dat file), - on any CMM controlled by controllers other than the ME5007, but using the software compensations, - on CMMs controlled by controllers other than the ME5007 and for which controller-internal compensations are active (on Mitutoyo, B3CLC or Johanson controller, for example), - on CMMs controlled by controllers other than the ME5007 and which use the software external software compensations, such as Mora controllers, for example. First of all, the MT23.dat file must be located in the same directory as the software configuration files (*.ini files), and the compensations must be selected in the setup assistant. The memorization/moving of the Master sphere should then be carried out as follows: - start the software, - calibrate a probe in position A0.0,B0.0 on the Master sphere (see Calibrate a probe), - select the Memorize Master sphere function from the Probes menu. The following window is then displayed:

Enter the password providing access to the following window:

This window shows the diameter of the Master sphere. Enter the values in X, Y and Z corresponding to the lever arm of the reference probe (distance from the rotation axis of angle A, adjustable head to the probe ball center, these distances are given in mm in the CMM alignment).

Page 504

If the probe is vertical, the lever arm is X=0, Y=0, Z= -x:

If the probe is horizontal, the lever arm is X=0, Y= +x, Z=0:

Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made. Click this button to take into account the calibration parameters entered and close the window.

The following message confirms that the operation has been carried out correctly:

Once this procedure has been carried out, the compensations are correctly activated. You can then select Probes > New file of probes in order to create the required sets of probes.

Notes: 

 

Once the sphere memorization procedure is carried out, the Memorize Master sphere option in the Probes menu is replaced by Move Master sphere. For coherence in the use of compensations, it is therefore necessary to carry out this procedure again in full if a Master sphere is moved for any reason. This new procedure will reposition the Master sphere with regard to the reference marks of the CMM, and will also delete any previously declared local spheres. You will then need to locate (see Locate probes) and then automatically recalibrate (see Automated calibration) the existing probe files, but also relocate any local spheres (see Locate

Page 505

calibration sphere).

Page 506

Edit information This function is used to consult traceability information concerning the current probes file and to add information if required. The Edit information window is shown below:

The information is divided into two groups:

System data System data cannot be modified by the user. It covers all the information associated with the probes file. For example: PROBE_FILE: name and save path of the probes file PROBE_DATE: probes file creation date PROBE_MODIF: date of the last modification.

User data User data is created and may be modified by the user. It must be in "variable=value" format, as shown above. These variables can be used in four different ways: - as information to be consulted - as a value for exporting the working session: the variable(s) will appear in the header of the exported file - as variables when learning and running a program

Page 507

- as a value when printing reports

Click this button to validate the information entered. Click this button to exit the window without applying the changes made.

Page 508

Probes database This function allows all the probes contained in a file to be viewed in list format. It gives direct access to the Probes tab in the unified database:

All of the probes are included in a single category, entitled Probes. The active probe is displayed in bold in the list. The two icons appear in front of each probe, showing its state. The following is the list of the different icons, with the description of the corresponding states:

This button is used to activate the selected probe, the same as double-clicking on a probe.

Page 509

closes the window.

The Probes database window provides quick access to certain functions via context menus: Context menu for the Probes category

Context menu for one or more probes

Select All is used to select all the probes of the list. Invert Selection is used to select everything which is not highlighted. New File of Probes is used to initialize a new probes file. Open... is used to open a probes file. Save is used to save a set of probes. Save As... is used to save the current probes file under a different name. Edit Informations is used to consult the traceability information concerning the current probes file. Print Probes List is used to print the list of the probes present in a file. Export Probes List is used to export the list of the probes present in a file, in text format. Rename is used to rename the selected probe, entering the new name in the following window:

Duplicate is used to create either a probe with the same characteristics as the selected probe or a shaft type (cylindrical) probe, by assigning it another name and/or specific shaft features in the following window:

Page 510

Check (select) this checkbox to be able to create a cylindrical probe by assigning it a shaft diameter and offset. This type of probe can be used to program automatic measurement with a cylindrical probe. Used to enter actual shaft diameter. Used to apply a ball center offset to the shaft. This indicates probing height on the shaft.

Important note:   

The Cyl. Probe checkbox in the measurement windows must not be checked when a duplicated probe is used in shaft mode. Only probe name distinguishes a cylindrical probe from another probe. Be careful when measuring 3D geometrical features with a cylindrical probe.

Activate is used to select one of the probes defined and/or calibrated as the current probe. Calibrate is used to define the ball diameter and the position of the probes with regard to the reference sphere. Calibrate Cylindrical Probe is used to calibrate the shaft of the selected probe. Auto. calibration of probe shaft is used to automatically calibrate the shaft of the selected probe(s). Delete is used to delete the selected probe(s) in the Probes database.

Page 511

Calibration spheres database The Calibration spheres database can be opened from any

Select the

button opening the unified Database.

tab:

All of the spheres are included in a single category, entitled Calibration spheres. The Master sphere is displayed in bold in the list of the spheres.

The Calibration spheres database provides quick access to certain functions, using the context menus: Context menu for the Calibration spheres category

Context menu for one or more spheres

Page 512

Select All: used to select all the calibration spheres in the list. Invert Selection: used to reverse the selection, in other words to select all the spheres not highlighted in the list. Delete local spheres: used to delete the local calibration spheres (does not delete the Master sphere). Rename: used to rename a calibration sphere (impossible on the Master sphere or on a multiple selection). Delete: used to delete one or more calibration spheres.

Notes: 



If the user wishes to delete the Master sphere, a confirmation message is displayed. Deleting destroys the Master sphere and the local spheres, and the Master sphere definition window is opened to recreate it. In 23-parameter correction mode (geometrical compensation), a password is requested in order to be able to delete the Master sphere. The same applies for the Move Master sphere option. In this case, the user should memorize the new position of the Master sphere with the reference probe.

Properties: displays the properties of all the spheres used in the working session.

Page 513

Probe calibration with 23-parameter compensation The purpose of this page is to explain probe calibration management on a CMM with software compensation enabled.

Probe and Master sphere management To work on a compensated CMM, a fixed Master sphere must be used, this is assumed not to move. If for any reason it must be temporarily removed, the Master sphere must be replaced in exactly the same location to be reused. The initial probe calibration will determine the position of the Master sphere.

Important note: It is also absolutely necessary to Memorize the master sphere for correct use of the CMM compensations. It is sometimes necessary to use other sphere positions to calibrate certain specific probe orientations. In this case, one or more reference spheres must be created using the Locate calibration sphere function. To do this, a previously calibrated probe must be used. As many spheres as required may be calibrated. Thus, a system of reference spheres may be created, composed of a Master sphere and one or more local spheres.

Important note: The Move master sphere function must not be used on a local sphere.

If the Master sphere has been removed and cannot be returned to the same place, it must be memorized again with the Memorize Master sphere function. Then, all the files for existing probes must be re-calibrated, or at least reset (located) on the Master sphere, using the Locate probes function. All the local spheres must be deleted and then located again. For a TWIN machine, the Master sphere must be the same for both machines. Consequently, it is usually place in the median plane of the two machines, as shown below. On a TWIN machine, it is recommended to use a 3-sphere setup, as shown below. The Master sphere is the upper sphere and it thus useable by both machines, the other two spheres are the respective local spheres of the two machines.

Page 514

Example: Using probe calibration and sphere creation functions Memorize Master sphere Calibrate probe A0.0_B0.0. Use the X,Y,Z position values of the current probe to Memorize the Master sphere. Calibrate all the probes that can be calibrated on the Master sphere. Create a local sphere Use the Locate calibration sphere to create a local sphere with, for example, probe A0.0_B0.0.

Important note: Do not use the Memorize/MoveMaster sphere function at this stage. Then calibrate all the probes that cannot be calibrated on the Master sphere. Checking the results If, when measuring the Master sphere with a calibrated probe, the coordinates obtained are not close to 0,0,0, this means that probe calibration is not correct. In this case, the Locate probe file operation must be repeated. Use A0.0_B0.0 position to measure the Master sphere or the local sphere.

Important note: Specify the exact name of the sphere.

Page 515

CAD files A CAD file contains all relevant data on a CAD model. A CAD model is a mathematical model of the workpiece to be controlled (inspected). It is produced by converting a CAD file created in a third party software program. It represents the workpiece with its nominal dimensions and positions and may contain ISO tolerances. The software has its own specific format, .su3. This type of file is, in fact, composed of three files with the following extensions: *.su3 CAD data + Wireframe rendering *.sol3 Solid rendering, facets *.log A text file report on the conversion operation.

*.gear CAD entity linked to gears Notes:  

The .su3 file is the main file and must be present for the CAD file to be opened. If the .sol3 file is deleted, it is re-created when solid rendering mode is enabled.

Page 516

CAD Database This function is used to view a list of the CAD files open. The window is shown below. This is the CAD tab of the unified database. Features are shown in tree structure format:

used to select (from the drop-down list) the type of entities that may be selected by clicking in the 3D View:

Four types of entities may be selected from the drop-down list. Surface: surface entities (planes, warped shapes, etc.) 3D Curve: curves in 3D (or 2D) space Point: Point type CAD entities (X, Y, Z coordinates)

Page 517

Tolerance: ISO tolerances Alignment: Alignment entity Mesh: mesh entity Click these buttons to scroll through the different entities when there are several possibilities (superimposed entities).

Open CAD files are displayed in the Assembly category.The following are displayed in the tree structure: file name (preceded by the key that allows open CAD files to be differentiated), surfaces, curves, points, tolerances, alignments and, when appropriate, CAD file layers.

Example: In the following example, two CAD files have been opened.

The tree structure under the *.su3 file shows: - surfaces - curves - points - ISO tolerances - alignments - groups on CAD layers (notably the TOL group and groups 1 and 2). The software can show geometrical entity types and tolerances by an icon preceding their name, as shown in the following example:

used to save CAD display and color attributes in a program. This button is only available when a program is being saved.

Page 518

used to display the pop-up (context) menu for the line selected in the tree-structure. This menu can also be displayed by right-clicking one of the lines of the assembly tree structure. used to close the unified database.

Page 519

New CAD file This function is used to create a new CAD file (blank file) in .su3 format. Such files can subsequently be exported in IGES format (*.igs). The window is shown below:

Select the destination folder in the tree structure. A list of the existing CAD files is displayed in the window.

Enter the name of the new CAD file in this field.

Select file type (format) for the new CAD file.

used to specify the key used for the CAD file. The key is used to identify the CAD file. By default, the first CAD file opened or created is assigned the letter A, the second the letter B, and so on. Hence, when, for example, surface points are calculated, the surfaces used are assigned a reference composed of the key followed by the number of the surface (this avoids having to use the full name of the CAD file).

:

Page 520

Click this button to create the new CAD file. Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.

The new CAD file is displayed in the CAD database. It is composed of four empty layers (surfaces, curves, points, tolerances and alignments):

CAD features may then be added by creating entities from measured (actual) or defined (nominal) features. You may also insert one or more CAD files to obtain a single CAD file in .su3 format.

Page 521

Open CAD File, Open Previous CAD File Open CAD File This function is used to open one or more CAD files. The CAD files used by the software have the extension *.su3 and are created by converting files created in a CAD program (see Import CAD Files). The window is shown below:

Select the folder in which the CAD file(s) have been saved. A list of the existing CAD files is displayed in the window. By default, the type of CAD file to be opened is .su3 (the software CAD file format).

Page 522

Note: CAD files converted using an earlier version of the software may be opened. In this case, select *.su2 as file type for the file to be opened.

Select the CAD file to open from the list. It is then displayed highlighted.

The name of the selected CAD file is displayed in this field. If several CAD files have been selected using the Ctrl key, their names are displayed as shown below:

The format of the selected CAD file is displayed in this field.

The key is used to identify the CAD file. It is shown in the Results window, next to projection surface name. It is used to identify the CAD file used for projection, e.g. for surface point projection.

Note: If several CAD files are opened at the same time, keys starting with the same letters are followed by #file number. For example, if three files with A as key are opened, they will respectively have A#1; A#2; A#3 as key. If this box is checked, the CAD file will be opened in Read only mode. It cannot be modified. When a CAD file protected in this manner is opened, the following warning message is displayed:

allows a preview of CAD files to be obtained by clicking CAD file name. Only surface entities are displayed. If the CAD file includes curves, points or tolerances, these are not displayed.

used to display the CAD file preview in wireframe or solid rendering mode. If the

Page 523

CAD file has never been rendered in solid mode, the software will not display the preview in solid rendering mode.

used to display the CAD file with all its surfaces. If Faster is selected, the number of surfaces to be displayed will be restricted to the first 200 surfaces in the CAD model. The CAD file may be moved in the same way as in the graphic view. Left-click in the preview window to recenter the image.

Click this button to open the selected CAD file. Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.

Open CAD File, Open Previous CAD File This function is used to re-open a recently opened CAD file. A key is automatically assigned to the CAD file when this command is used. A list of the last 10 CAD files opened is displayed. The CAD files are numbered and listed from the most recently opened to the oldest:

In program: These functions can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

For more information on an error occurring during program execution, see Error management.

Page 524

Import CAD Files This function allows files created in a CAD program to be converted to .su3 format in order for them to be used by the software. The software allows the following file types to be converted: *.vda *.uni, *.per *.ige, *.igs, *.iges *.set *.xmt, *.x_t, *.x_b *.prt *.dlv, *.mod, *.exp, *.model *.catpart, *.cadproduct *.idi *.prt, *.asm

VDAFS files UNISURF files IGES files SET files PARASOLID files UNIGRAPHICS files CATIA files CATIA V5 files IDEAS files Pro/Engineer files

*.step, *.stp

STEP files

The window is shown below:

Page 525

Select the folder in which the CAD file(s) to be converted have been saved.

A list of files to be converted is displayed in the window. Select the CAD file to be converted from the list. It is then displayed highlighted.

The name of the selected CAD file is

Page 526

displayed in this field.

This field is used to specify which file types can be selected for conversion from among: VDA, UNISURF, IGES, SET, CATIA, etc.

Click this button or double-click the file name in the list to add the selected file to the list of files to be converted.

Check this box to perform multiple conversion. All the files displayed in the list will be added to the list of files to be converted.

The list of files to convert is displayed in this field. Several files may thus be included.

used to remove the selected file from the list of files to be converted.

used to create CAD file containing only part of the original (source) CAD file. The following window is then displayed:

Page 527

Two types of filters may be applied: - The first allows the layers to be converted (or not converted) to be defined. This obviously means you must know the names of the layers in the original CAD file (source file). Specify the layer name to be used for filtering. Click this button to add the selected layer to the list. Click this button to remove the selected layer from the list.

Specify whether the layers in the list are to be converted or not by selecting the corresponding option.

- The second type of filter allows a volume restriction to be specified by entering the volume limit coordinates (in the CAD alignment) in the following fields:

Note: Make sure volume restrictions signs are correct. If the values entered are inconsistent, the software displays the following error message:

Page 528

Click this button to apply the filter settings and return to the Import CAD files conversion window. Click this button to return to the conversion window without applying any changes made to the filter settings.

The destination file access path is displayed in this field. If you check (select) this box, target folder structure will be the same as the source folder structure. Click this button to specify or modify the destination folder of the file(s) to be converted and their names. The following window is then displayed:

Page 529

Select the destination folder for the CAD files to be converted. A list of existing CAD files is displayed. the key used for the CAD file may be renamed. The key is used to identify the CAD file. By default, the first CAD file opened or created is assigned the letter A, the second the letter B, and so on. Hence, when, for example, surface points are calculated, the surfaces used are assigned a reference composed of the key followed by the number of the surface.

: Note: If several CAD files are selected for simultaneous (multiple) conversion, folder name can be modified. The name of the .su3 file will be the same as that of the original file (for example, DEMO.vda will be converted to DEMO.su3). The keys used for the CAD files will all start with the same letters, followed by #file number. For example, if three files with A as key are converted, the three resulting files will respectively have A#1; A#2; A#3 as keys.

The name of the selected CAD file is shown in this field. File type (.su3) is displayed in this field.

Page 530

Click this button to apply the target (destination) file settings and return to the Import CAD files conversion window. Click this button to return to the conversion window without applying any changes made.

Click this button when all the conversion settings have been selected. The conversion is performed and the CAD file is displayed on the screen.

If the CAD file has been previously converted in the selected folder, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to replace the exisitng file. The window is closed and the modification made immediately. Click this button to close the window without replacing the existing file.

If a CAD file in CATIA format ( *.dlv; *.mod; *.exp; *.model) is converted, the following window is displayed:

Source file path is shown here.

Select the CAD file to be converted.

Page 531

Select the CATIA coordinate system to be used for the conversion. This coordinate system will be used as the coordinate system (CAD alignment) of the software format CAD file. Click this button to apply the CATIA conversion settings and return to the Import CAD files conversion window. Click this button to return to the conversion window without applying any changes made.

Note: The software recovers color data when converting CAD files from the IGES, CATIA, UNIGRAPHICS, and PARASOLID formats, as shown in the examples below:

Page 532

Click this button to close the conversion window without applying any changes made. Click this button to open this help page (Import CAD Files).

Notes: 



If a Catia V5 CAD model containing geometrical tolerances were created in inches, it is necessary to modify the import default settings in order to preserve units. In the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters, User tab : LinearUnitOfNonSemanticOrGeometricTolerances=2 (the default value is 1). CAD file assemblies from Catia V5 and ProE via toolkit can be imported directly. There are two import modes: the import can either be directly performed as a single *.su3 file, or in several *.su3 files that comply with the structure of the original assembly. To do this, the following variable must be modified via Preferences > Advanced Parameters, User tab: bSplittInGoFAssemblies = 0 (the default value is 1).

By default, the assembly is converted into several CAD files while conserving the structure:

Page 533

If the variable is modified, the assembly is fully converted to a single CAD file:

Page 534

Page 535

Close all CAD files This function allows all open CAD files to be closed. The files are then no longer displayed in either the CAD Database or in the software window. However, they are not deleted and you can select Open to recall them.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 536

Delete CAD files This function is used to delete (irreversible) CAD files converted to the software format (.su3). The window is shown below:

Select the folder in which the CAD file(s) to be deleted have been saved. A list of the existing CAD files is displayed in the window. By default, the type of CAD file to be opened is .su3, which corresponds to the software CAD file format.

Select the CAD file to be deleted from the list. It is then displayed highlighted.

The name of the selected CAD file is displayed in this field. If several CAD files have been selected using the Ctrl key, their names are displayed as shown below:

The format of the selected CAD file is displayed in this field.

Click this button to delete the selected CAD file(s).

Page 537

The following confirmation message is displayed:

Click this button to delete the CAD file (irreversible). Click this button to close the confirmation message window without deleting the selected CAD file(s) (to cancel the operation).

Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Page 538

Show Surfaces, Curves, Points, Tolerances, Alignments, Meshes These functions are used to show or hide surfaces, curves, points, tolerances, alignments and meshes in the graphic view. When one of these functions is selected, the corresponding button in the CAD menu is displayed depressed. This is the case for the Show Surfaces and Show Points functions in the example below:

The graphic view is thus modified according to the display options selected. These options may be combined:

Example 1: Show Surfaces

Example 2: Show Curves and Show Points

Page 539

Example 3: Show Surfaces and Show Curves

Page 540

Example 4: Show Tolerances

Example 5: Show Alignments

Page 541

Display Normal Orientation This function is accessible : - from the CAD menu > Orientation mode, - from the pop-up menu displayed on the CAD Database Assembly line. It is used to display the direction of CAD normals in the open CAD file(s). When this function is selected, CAD Database opens and the following window is displayed:

This window allows you to select the color that will be used to identify CAD surface orientation by applying this color to the negative part of the CAD surface.

Page 542

CAD model displayed without CAD normal orientation display.

CAD model displayed with CAD normal orientation display.

Notes:  

The CAD model must be displayed in solid rendering mode for surfaces with a negative normal to be displayed. No colors are displayed in wireframe mode. To disable this function, reselect it in the menu.

Invert Normal Orientation When normal orientation display mode is enabled, the orientation of a CAD surface normal may be reversed by clicking the surface while holding down the

key.

The direction of a CAD surface normal may also be applied to the entire CAD model by clicking a surface while holding down the

and

keys.

If the CAD file cannot be modified (old file format or file in read-only mode), an error message indicates that

Page 543

the operation cannot be performed:

Page 544

Advanced Parameters This function is used to set the text display for tolerances. The window is shown below:

Click this button to modify the character font. A list of Windows fonts is then displayed in the following window:

Select the Font, Style and Size of the text. Click this button to apply the changes made and return to the Advanced Parameters window. Click this button to return to the Advanced Parameters window without applying any changes made.

Page 545

used to modify the left/right margins.

used to modify the top/bottom margins.

Example: Tolerance display

1 2 3

Left/Right margins Top/Bottom margins Font size

Tessellation The window is shown below:

Page 546

Check (select) this box to conserve the default parameters. Check this box to personalize tassellation of the CAD model. The window is displayed as shown below:

Move the slider to the left or right for enhanced tessellation quality or performance. Check (select) this box to apply the changes to the open CAD models.

Click this button to apply the changes made and close the window. Click this button to close the window without applying changes. Click this button to apply the new parameters without closing the window. This allows you to view the results in the graphic window and perform further adjustments if required without having to re-open the Advanced Parameters window.

Page 547

Context (pop-up) menus Context menus are displayed from the CAD Database:

-

By clicking this button.

- By right-clicking one of the lines in the tree structure.

The different context (pop-up) menus that may be displayed, depending on the line selected, are shown below:

If Assembly is selected, this menu, containing the same functions as the general CAD menu is displayed:

Page 548

This menu is displayed when a CAD File is selected:

This menu is displayed when a category of entities is selected:

Page 549

This menu is displayed when an entity is selected:

This menu is displayed when an alignment entity is selected:

Page 550

This menu is displayed when a layer is selected:

This menu is displayed when a category of entities in a layer is selected:

Page 551

This menu is displayed when an entity in a layer is selected:

The pages describing the functions of the Assembly context menu are the same as those for the general menu. The functions available in the other context menus are described in the following pages, independently of the context menu in which they appear.

Page 552

Close

This function is accessed from a CAD file line. Unlike the Close all CAD files function in the general menu, it allows only the selected CAD file to be closed. Once closed, the CAD file is no longer displayed in either the CAD Database or in the software window. However, it is not deleted and selecting the Open function results in it being re-displayed.

Page 553

Rename the key

This function is accessed from a CAD file line. It allows the key for the selected CAD file to be renamed. The key is used to identify the CAD file. By default, the first CAD file opened or created is assigned the letter A, the second the letter B, and so on. Hence, when, for example, surface points are calculated, the surfaces used are assigned a reference composed of the key followed by the number of the surface.

Example:

Note: If the name selected to rename the key is already in use, the following message is displayed:

Page 554

Insert

This function is accessed from a CAD file line. It allows one or more CAD files to be inserted in the selected file. When this function is selected, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to open the Import CAD files (conversion) window. The CAD files to be imported may then be converted to .su3 format so that they can be inserted in the selected CAD file. Click this button to close the message window without inserting a file.

Page 555

Transform

This function is accessed from the line corresponding to a CAD file or layer. The window is shown below:

used to perform a Mirror transformation. used to perform a Rotation transformation. used to perform a Translation transformation.

A list of set transformations is displayed in the window. used to remove the selected transformation from the list. used to modify the selected transformation by accessing the corresponding window. These buttons are used to change the order of the selected transformation in the list (move it up or down).

Warning: The order of the transformations is important. The transformations are performed in the order shown in the list.

Page 556

Specify the file to which the changes are to be saved. By default, the software offers to name the new .su3 file with the same name as the original file preceded by the prefix "M_". used to save only the transformed image in the original file. The original image will then be lost. allows both images (the original image and the transformed image) to be saved in the same file.

Click this button after configuring all the selected settings to perform the transformation operation on the CAD model. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Page 557

Mirror

The Mirror function may be applied to a complete CAD model or to certain layers of a CAD model. When the Mirror function is selected, the following window is displayed:

Select mirror axis, for example the X axis gives plane YoZ as mirror plane. Click this button to confirm the selected axis. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Example: The right CAD model is the X axis mirror copy of the left CAD model, which remains displayed as the Original file with copy option has been enabled:

Page 558

Rotation

The Rotation function may be applied to a complete CAD model or to certain layers of a CAD model. When the Rotation function is selected, the following window is displayed:

Enter the coordinates of the center of rotation.

Define the angles of rotation around the relevant axis. Click this button to perform the set rotation. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Example: In this example, the center of rotation is the origin of the alignment with coordinates X=0, Y=0, Z=0. Rotation angle around the Z axis is 120°.

Page 559

Page 560

Translation

The Translation function may be applied to a complete CAD model or to certain layers of a CAD model. When the Translation function is selected, the following window is displayed:

Specify the translation values for the relevant alignment axes. Click this button to perform the set translation. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Example: In this example, the translation is performed in the X axis with a negative value:

Page 561

Create entities

This function may be accessed from the line corresponding to a CAD file or group/layer. It is used to create CAD entities to be added to the selected CAD file. The different creation methods are described in the following pages.

Page 562

Create Entities From Features

When this option is selected, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to display the Create by features window shown below. Click this button to close the message window without creating any entity.

Surfaces may be created from nominal or actual features. Click the radio button corresponding to your desired choice.

Page 563

Circles and arcs may be designated as surfaces or curves. Click the radio button corresponding to your desired choice. The display obtained depends on the options selected, an example display is shown below: - As surface:

The circle is defined

The CAD entity is created

The circle is solid rendered

- As curve: (the circle will remain in wireframe mode)

The circle is defined

The CAD entity is created

The circle is solid rendered

When surfaces are created using a cone or cylinder, the end surfaces may be created. Check this box to do this.

Example:

Cone defined

Cone not closed (no end surfaces) with solid rendering

Cone closed (with end surfaces) with solid rendering

Use this button to select the features to be used to create surfaces.

Page 564

The Feature Database opens:

Select the features from which the surfaces are to be created. Click this button to add the selected feature to the Create by features window. If you click this button, the Feature Database remains open, but the

button is disabled.

Click this button to add the surface or curve created to the CAD File. Click this button to close the window.

Note: CAD entities may be created from all features except toruses.

Page 565

Create Entities From Sections

When this option is selected, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to display the Create Reference Surface from Section window shown below. Click this button to close the message window without creating any entity.

Select the section from which the entity is to be created.

Select the type of entity to be created. To create a Surface entity, the section must be defined and measured. Otherwise, the following message is displayed when creation is attempted:

Page 566

Click this button to close the message window and return to the Create Reference Surface from Section window.

To create a Curve entity, the selected section must have been defined or measured. Select one of these two options by selecting the corresponding radio button:

These buttons are not available when creating a Surface entity.

Enter the width of the surface to be created.

Click this button to add the surface or curve created to the CAD file or the current layer and display it on screen.

Click this button to close the creation window.

Example: Creating a CAD curve from a section measured with the software Step 1: Measure a section

Page 567

Step 2: Open a new CAD file/model or use an existing one.

Step 3: In the CAD Database, right-click the relevant CAD model and select Create Entities > From Sections.

Step 4: In the CAD entity creation window, select the following options :

Page 568

The curve (*.su3 format) is created in the CAD file from the measured section. This curve is displayed in the CAD Database and named SECT1:

Step 5: IGES export The CAD model resulting from the add curves operation may then be exported in IGES format.

Step 6: Displaying the result obtained. - Open a New Working Session. - Open the CAD file created in the previous step. The CAD file is displayed and is composed of the curve created by measuring a section:

Page 569

Note: When a CAD curve is created from a section, the section is automatically smoothed, even if the Smooth sections option is not selected in the Display Options of the 3D View menu.

Page 570

Create Entities By Intersection

When this option is selected, the following window is displayed:

used to define the type of entities that can be selected by clicking the CAD model. Select one of the five types from the drop-down list:

. used to move between entities when several may be selected (superimposed entities). Click this button to obtain and, if required, modify the coordinates of the point clicked. The following window is then displayed:

Page 571

When the coordinates of the point have been viewed and, if required, modified, click this button to return to the intersection window.

used to select the CAD file in which the curves are to be created. The drop-down list shows all CAD files currently open in the software:

When this button is clicked, the following window is displayed:

A new CAD file may then be created by entering a new name in the Filename field.

Select the layer on which the curves are to be created from the drop-down list. If this box is checked, only the layer created will be displayed when the curves are created. The other layers in the CAD file will be hidden. If this box is checked, the calculation performed may be refined in certain

Page 572

specific cases. This box is not checked by default as calculation time is longer when this option is selected.

There are three ways of defining the cutting plane: used to determine the origin of the cutting plane by clicking the CAD model:

used to select one of the planes of the active alignment or a measured plane to determine the cutting plane:

-

from the drop-down list. in the database.

Page 573

used to determine the orientation and dimensions of the cutting plane by three clicks in the CAD model:

The progress bar in the upper part of the window allows the click sequence to be viewed.

Whatever the methiod used, the rotation, translation and plane limit values may be modified to obtain the

Page 574

cutting plane intersecting the CAD model as desired.

used to modify the rotation values: - By entering them in the fields, -

or by using the arrows to increase or decrease the values.

used to modify the translation values: - By entering them in the fields, -

or by using the arrows to increase or decrease the values.

The translation and rotation values may also be modified using these buttons. Hold the button corresponding to the desired rotation or translation down while moving the mouse cursor up (to increase the value) or down (to decrease the value). Checking this box means the cutting plane is no longer displayed, but the preview of the result of the intersection of the infinite plane with the CAD model is conserved:

Page 575

used to modify the plane limit values: - By entering them in the fields, -

or by using the arrows to increase or decrease the values.

These values may also be modified by holding this button down while moving the mouse cursor up (to increase the value) or down (to decrease the value). and

are used to capture the end limit positions of the probe as cutting plane limits.

When all the parameters have been entered, click this button to create the intersection. Click this button to close the intersection window.

Example: Creating an Edge type entity

Page 576

Entity created and displayed with the rest of the CAD model:

Layer visible only:

Page 577

Page 578

Create Entities By Extension

The window is shown below:

Select the CAD file in which the extension is to be created.

Select the group/layer in which the extension is to be created.

Enter the desired length of the extension. To create a surface 10 mm long by extension, click two points on the same surface of the CAD model. used to enter the desired offset. Check (select) this box to center the surface created on each side of the edge of the selected CAD surface. Check (select) this box to define a portion on which the surface must be extended.

Examples: Selecting two points to determine extension length:

Page 579

Extension length 10 mm:

10 mm extension centered on edge:

Page 580

10mm offset:

This mode allows the contour of a surface to be selected by clicking the CAD model. Extension is then performed all around this surface.

Example: Extending the surface around a hole

Page 581

Using the selected CAD surface, the surface created by extension may be defined according to a given angle or axis: Enter the desired angle, if required.

Example: With an angle of 30°

Select the desired axis, if required.

Example: The Z axis

Page 582

used to invert the surface created. used to delete the last surface created. used to close the Creation window.

Page 583

Create Entities From Mesh

When this function is selected, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to display the Create Reference Surface from Mesh window shown below. Click this button to close the message window without creating any entity.

Check this box to delete the mesh after having created the CAD entities. Then, they no longer appear in the Points Cloud Database.

Page 584

The meshes constructed are displayed in the list.

Click this button to display the meshes available in the Points Cloud Database.

Used to delete a mesh from the selection. Click on this button to create the CAD entities.

Example: Points cloud

Mesh

CAD

Page 585

Page 586

Create Entities From Alignments

This function is used to create alignments in the digital definition from alignments created during the work session. When this function is selected, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to display the Create Reference Surface from Section window shown below. Click this button to close the message window without creating any entity.

Use this button to select the alignments to be used to create CAD entities. The Alignment Database opens:

Page 587

Select the alignments from which the entities are to be created. Click this button to add the selected alignment to the Create by alignments window. By clicking this button, the Alignment Database remains open, but the

button is disabled.

CClick this button to add the selected alignment the the digital definition. Click this button to close the window.

Page 588

New / Rename / Delete Layer

New Layer This function is accessed from a CAD file line. It is used to create a new layer of CAD entities. The new layer is immediately displayed in the CAD database tree structure, as shown below:

Each layer is composed of four categories of entities: Surfaces, Curves, Points and Tolerances.

Rename Layer This function allows the selected layer to be renamed. The corresponding line may be edited. Enter the new name and click the Enter key to confirm.

Delete Layer

Page 589

This function allows the selected layer to be deleted from the CAD file. The following message is displayed:

Click this button to delete the layer from the CAD file. Click this button to cancel the operation and keep the layer in the CAD file.

Page 590

Edit information

This function is accessed from a CAD file line. It is used to edit traceability information for the selected CAD file. The window is shown below:

The data is divided into two classes:

System Data System data cannot be modified by the user, it includes all current CAD file data and, when appropriate, program data.

Example: CAD_FILE : name and save path of the CAD file used in the work session. CAD_DATE : date and time of the work session. CAD_GMT : date and time of CAD file conversion according to the time zone.

User Data User data is created and may be modified by the user. It must be in "variable=value" format, as shown above. These variables may be used:

Page 591

- As information to be consulted - As variables when learning and running a program

Click this button to save the data entered. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Page 592

Change color

This function may be accessed from all the context menus except that obtained by right-clicking the Assembly line. It is may be used to change the color of the CAD model, groups of surfaces, curves, points and tolerances, CAD groups/layers and CAD entities. The window is shown below:

allows one of the Basic colors available to be selected by clicking in the desired box.

Page 593

allows the color to be personalized if the desired color is not available in the Basic colors. Move the cursor until the desired hue is obtained.

used to lighten or darken the selected hue by moving the cursor.

the Personalized colors are displayed in these boxes.

preview allowing the selected color to be viewed.

these fields allow the parameters for the desired color to be entered.

to restore the default color settings. used to apply the color to the selected CAD database line without closing the window. used to apply the color to the selected CAD database line and close the window.

Page 594

closes the window without applying any changes made. to add the color displayed in the preview to the Personalized colors.

The selected color will be applied differently depending on the context menu used to call up the function: - CAD File: the selected color will be applied to all features in this CAD file. - Surface, curve, point or tolerance category: the selected color will be applied to all entities (surfaces, curves, points or tolerances) in the selected category. - CAD Group/Layer: the selected color will be applied to all features in the group/layer. - CAD Entity: the selected color will be applied to the selected entity.

Page 595

Save attributes

This function is accessed from a CAD file line. It allows CAD file display and color attributes to be saved in the software .su3 file. When the CAD file is next opened, the display and color attributes will then be the same as when the file was last saved.

This button, accessed from the CAD Database, is used to save CAD file display and color attributes in a program. This button is only available when a program is being saved.

Page 596

CAD Transparency

This function may be accessed from all the context menus except that obtained by right-clicking the Assembly line and those associated to tolerance entities.. It allows the degree of transparency of the surfaces of a CAD model to be set. The window is shown below:

This box must be checked (selected) for the transparency slider to be available. When checked, the window is displayed as shown below:

Move the slider to the left for greater transparency or to the right for less transparency. Click this button to apply the changes and close the window.

Example: CAD model with modified transparency:

Page 597

Page 598

New layer by color

This function is used to create a new layer of CAD entities of the same color. This layer is immediately displayed in the CAD Database tree structure.

When this function is called from an entity line (for example, SURFACE-0#10), a layer with the color of this entity is created, including all entities of the same color, classified by type :

When this function is called from an entity type line (for example, Surfaces), as many layers are created as there are different colors of entities within this type. Entities of the same color are displayed in each layer, classified by type:

Page 599

When this function is called from a CAD file line (for example, A=Demo3.su3), as many layers are created as there are different colors of entities of all types (Surfaces, Curves, Points, Tolerances, Alignments) in the CAD Database. Entities of the same color are displayed in each layer, classified by type:

Page 600

Note: Creating layers by color does not modify the appearance of the CAD model in the 3D View.

Page 601

Visible / Hidden / Inactive / Visible only

These functions may be accessed from the line corresponding to a CAD file or layer. They are used to change the display attributes of the selected CAD file or layer.

Visible This function allows the CAD model or layer selected in the graphic view to be displayed. When a layer is visible, its name is preceded by a lit lightbulb symbol in the CAD Database.

Inactive This function can only be accessed from the line corresponding to a layer. It allows CAD entities in the layer to be rendered inactive. Surface points, for example, will not be projected on such surfaces. In the graphic view, inactive features are shown in the color selected for inactive CAD features (3D View > Rendering > Colors). When a CAD layer is inactive, its name is preceded by an unlit lightbulb symbol in the CAD Database.

Hidden This function allows the CAD model or layer selected in the graphic view to be hidden. When a layer is hidden, its name is preceded by a crossed out lightbulb symbol in the CAD Database. When a CAD model is hidden, the corresponding icon in the CAD Database is crossed out.

Visible only This function can only be accessed from the line corresponding to a layer. It is used to display only the selected layer in the graphic view. The other layers and entities that are not on this layer are automatically hidden. Their corresponding icons in the CAD database are crossed out.

Note: Keyboard shortcuts Visible only + CTRL: displays the selected group only and render the other groups or entities inactive.

Page 602

Visible only + SHIFT + CTRL: displays the selected group and renders the other groups or entities visible. Visible only + SHIFT: reverses the visibility (hidden only)

Page 603

Save As

This function is accessed from a CAD file line. It allows the selected CAD file to be saved under a different name. The window is shown below:

Select the folder in which the selected CAD file is to be saved. A list of existing CAD files is displayed in the window. Enter the name of the new CAD file in this field.

CAD file format is displayed in this field. Click this button to save the CAD file. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Page 604

Properties

This function may be accessed from all the context menus except that obtained by right-clicking the Assembly line. It is used to obtain information on the line selected in the CAD database. The CAD file properties window is as shown below:

In the above example, CAD file properties include the number of CAD entities in the CAD file and the various files used by the software to read it.

The geometrical entities properties window is as shown below:

Page 605

Delete

This function is used to delete an entity, surface contained in a layer, or entity contained in a layer from the CAD file according to the line selected in the CAD database. When this function is selected from the line corresponding to an entity, the following message is displayed:

When this function is selected from the line corresponding to an entity contained in a layer or surface contained in a layer, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to delete the entity or surface. Click this button to cancel the operation and keep the entity or surface.

Page 606

Cut / Copy / Paste / Paste highlighted entities

These functions may be accessed from the different context menus, except those obtained by right-clicking the Assembly and CAD File lines.

Copy This function is used to duplicate an entity or entity category in order to paste the copy in a group/layer.

Cut This function is used to cut a group or part of a group/layer in order to move (paste) it to another group/layer. The name of the group/layer on which the cut operation is being performed is shown by a scissor symbol in the CAD database, until the paste operation is performed.

Paste This function is used to place previously copied entities, entity categories or groups/layers in the desired location in the CAD database tree structure.

Paste highlighted entities This function allows entities displayed highlighted in the graphic view to be included in the selected group/layer. It is thus possible to directly select in the graphic view the entity or entities to be pasted. This avoids having to search for their name and location in the database.

Note: to select several entities in the graphic view, hold the Ctrl key down.

Page 607

Invert normal

This function may be accessed from the line corresponding to an entity. It is used to invert the normal of axial features. The surface is displayed highlighted in the 3D View and the normal of this entity is then shown. When a cylinder, cone or line CAD entity is selected, the normal is displayed. It can then be inverted by selecting the Invert normal function in the context menu.

Example: Inverting the normal of a cylinder

Page 608

Evaluate Surface Mapping

This function is accessed from an entity line or from an entity group. It evaluates surface mapping of the entity selected. The Surface Mapping window then opens.

Page 609

Define, Measure, Retrieve / Define, Measure, Retrieve like

These functions may be accessed from the line corresponding to an entity. They are used to define, measure or retrieve the entities contained in the CAD file.

Define Feature This function is used to define the selected entity using the data contained in the CAD file. The entities defined are then immediately displayed in the Feature Database, classified according to the type of feature to which they correspond.

Define and Measure a feature / Define and Retrieve a feature This function is used to access the measure / retrieve function of the entity selected, directly after it has been defined. The Automatic measure / retrieve window corresponding to the type of feature is then displayed.

Note: When defining a Point feature, the definition normal assigned by the software may be modified. Two keyboard shortcuts are available to do this: 

+ Define, Define and Measure or Define and Retrieve is used to search for the normal of the nearest surface in the point's CAD file.



+ + Define, Define and Measure or Define and Retrieve is used to search for the normal of the nearest surface in all open CAD files.

Define and Measure a feature as / Define and Retrieve a feature like This function is used to define and measure / retrieve the selected entity by assimilating it to a feature. If the selected feature is not sufficiently similar to the entity, the following message is displayed:

If the selected feature is sufficiently similar to the entity, the definition is created.

Page 610

Define and measure feature like This function is used to define and measure the selected entity by assimilating it to a feature. If the selected feature is not sufficiently similar to the entity, the following message is displayed:

If the selected feature is sufficiently similar to the entity, the definition is created and the Automatic measure / retrieve window corresponding to the type of feature is displayed.

Note: A cylinder/cone CAD entity can be defined, measured / retrieved as a circle. Thus this circle is defined at the base of the entity with a normal along the cylinder/cone axis.

Page 611

Define Geometrical Alignment

This function is used to automatically create a geometrical alignment using an Alignment entity belonging to the CAD model. This means the user does not have to manually enter translation and rotation values to create a geometrical alignment. The alignment created has the same name as the Alignment entity of the CAD model.

Alignment entity of the CAD model

Alignment created using this Alignment entity

The translations and rotations applied at creation of this alignment are expressed in the active alignment. If several Alignment entities are simultaneously used to create several geometrical alignments in one operation, all these alignments will be expressed in the active alignment when they are created.

Note: The geometrical alignment created is automatically enabled (activated).

In program mode: These functions can be used in a program. The following lines are then added:

Page 612

Page 613

Features

Page 614

Define Feature

Page 615

Define and tolerance Feature

Define Feature This function is used to enter the nominal dimensions, positions and orientations of a feature. This function can be accessed: - Via the menu Features > Define Feature

-

Via this icon in the Feature bar, then selecting the type of feature to be defined (circle, line, etc.).

The feature definition window (Defining Circle, etc.) displays the definition tab (nominal values) shown in the following screenshot.

, as

This varies slightly according to the feature selected. For more information, see the pages describing how each feature is defined.

Name

Page 616

shows the type of feature to be constructed, a circle in this example.

reminder that the window is in definition mode. when the definition window is opened, the software offers a default feature name, composed of feature type and an incremental number. For example, CIRC1 when the first circle feature is defined. This name may be modified by the user. Enter the name of the feature to be created in this field, or select an existing feature from the drop-down list. This button is used to select a feature from the Feature database.

Note: The default name may be configured via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters > Default feature name.

Family The feature may be assigned a family by entering family name in this field or selecting an existing family from the drop-down list. If the name entered does not correspond to an existing family, the family is created.

Alignment by default, feature alignment is the CAD alignment. Uncheck (deselect) this box to select a different alignment from the drop-down list:

Note: For this checkbox to be always checked when a definition window is opened, whatever the active alignment, enable the CADALIGN advanced parameter in the CELEMENT section, USER tab. CADALIGN = 0 by default, the alignment offered is the active alignment. CADALIGN = 1 the alignment offered is always the CAD alignment.

Important note: When a distance is evaluated, if an alignment other than the CAD alignment is selected, the distance is projected in the selected alignment.

Coordinate system select the desired type of coordinates from: Cartesian, Spherical, Cylindrical X, Cylindrical Y, or Cylindrical Z.

Page 617

Cartesian coordinates

Spherical coordinates A and I are expressed in the selected units (e.g. degrees)

Cylindrical coordinates, X, Y, or Z Cylindrical Z in this example.

check this box to copy the nominal values of the feature to the actual values.

Dimension Feature dimensions are: diameter for a circle, height and diameter for a cylinder, length and width for a rectangle, etc.

Center or Base coordinates

Enter the values for the center of the feature in the corresponding fields. This may also be done by selecting a feature with the same center: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function. allows, for example, a circle to be offset along its normal to include a thickness. Clicking the button

Page 618

displays the following window:

Enter thickness. The position of the center is then re-calculated to include the thickness. Offset direction is given by the normal: if thickness > 0, offset is in the direction of the feature normal, if thickness < 0, offset is in reverse direction to the normal.

Before offset according to the normal

After offset according to the normal

Normal

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields. This may also be done by selecting a feature with the same orientation: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function. used to reverse the orientation, once a feature has been selected.

Measurement path used to select measurement path from Inner, Outer or Automatic. The measurement path selected may affect feature compensation direction at measurement.

Example: Measuring a circle

Page 619

Inner path

Outer path

CAD Nominal These arrows are used to change projection surface (if using a CAD file based definition).

When you have completed all the fields, click this button to define the feature (and to continue defining other features if required). This button is only available if there is a calibrated probe. It is used to define a feature and gives direct access to the automatic measurement window. closes the window without applying any changes made. In this case, the feature is not defined.

Notes: 

A feature may be defined by clicking the CAD model of the workpiece. The center coordinates, normal vector and dimension(s) are displayed in the definition window. Then, simply click .

If a field is not completed, the feature will only be partially defined. It will be displayed in the Feature Database, but will not have a graphic representation. 

When defining a feature by clicking the CAD, the selected CAD entity may not match the type of the feature (e.g. when defining a circle feature by clicking an ellipse entity). Then the form fault of the curve selected to define the feature is tested. If this is greater than the maximum form fault, a warning message is displayed:

Page 620

The maximum form fault value can be configured via le menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters, USER tab, CMTDEFINITIONPAGE section: FWARNINGFORMFAULT = 0.5 by default. When the form fault cannot be calculated, the following message is displayed:

It may also be displayed when using arrows to switch from a solution to another.

Tolerancing position Position tolerances may be applied to a feature. This function is accessed from the definition window, opened to display the

tab:.

Page 621

A higher and lower tolerance may be applied to each of the feature center coordinates, displayed in the corresponding fields. If one of the boxes is unchecked (deselected), the tolerances for this coordinate will not be applied. All the tolerance values may be modified, as may the default values (via the Set-Up Default Parameters menu option). If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance:

Tolerancing dimensions Dimensional tolerances may be applied to a feature.

Page 622

This function is accessed from the definition window, opened to display the

tab:.

Higher and lower tolerances may be applied to feature dimensions. If this box is unchecked, the tolerances for this dimension will not be applied. Tolerance values may be modified, either by entering the values in the corresponding fields, or by selecting the tolerance from the drop-down list. The default values offered may be modified via the Set-Up Default Parameters menu option. If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance: Select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list. The list contains the applicable ISO tolerance for shafts or bores. For example, H7 corresponds to a bore (hole) and h7 to a shaft.

Note: A personalized list of tolerances may be created. To do this, open the "usertol.dat" file located in the software installation folder. Tolerances may then be added to the tolerances already contained in this file or the existing tolerances deleted or modified. The new tolerances are then available in the drop-down list.

Example: Adding a tolerance for diameters varying from 0.013 to 0.750mm. [ToleranceName] (0.0130.750) 0.125

-100

400.0

Page 623

0.250

-100

500.0

0.500

-100

600.0

0.750

-100

800.0

For example, if the diameter is between 0.125mm and 0.250mm, the tolerance applied is -0.1/+0.5.

Dynamic Link to CAD This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with the defined feature. It is accessed via the definition window, opened to display the

tab:

If this box is checked, the link between the feature definition and the CAD file is fully dynamic. Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at file conversion to *.su3 format. This function can be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Page 624

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 625

Define Point

Page 626

Define Point

To define a (geometrical) Point feature, select Point via the menu Features > Define Feature or click in the Feature Bar in definition mode

.

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Point features are:

Enter the coordinates of the point in the X, Y, and Z fields (if Cartesian coordinates are being used)

Page 627

The

button is used to display the following dialog box: 

Option X is available if the Y and Z coordinates are entered. The X coordinate is calculated by intersection between the (X) line of dimension (Y,Z) and the CAO model. The same applies to options Y and Z by rotation.



Option XY is available if the Z coordinate is entered. Then the X and Y coordinates are calculated by intersection between the XY plane of dimension Z and all curves of the CAO model (the first curve detected is used).



Option XYZ is available if the X, Y and Z coordinates are entered. Then the coordinates are updated by projection of the (X,Y,Z) point onto the CAO model.

Then enter the values I, J, K for the normal vector.

In program: If you are using a DMIS program, the following procedure must be used to create an egdept entity: Check this box, then enter:

the coordinates of the point,

its normal vector,

and the orientation of the corresponding surface.

Page 628

Note: When the box

is checked:



A left click on the CAD defines a point on an edge.



A left click on the CAD, with the

key held pressed, defines a point that will not be on an edge.

Page 629

Tolerance

Position Tolerance To assign position tolerance values to a Point feature, select Point via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

,

,

. :

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the point have been entered in the definition window, they are displayed here.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 630

Dimension Tolerance To assign dimension tolerance values to a Point feature, select Point via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

. :

The dimensional tolerance of a geometrical point is applied to the Normal Deviation (ND).

Enter the upper and lower ND tolerance values in these fields. This box is automatically checked when tolerances values are entered in order to apply them. Uncheck (deselect) the box if you do not want to apply the tolerances. Select the axis in which Normal Deviation will be calculated from the drop-down list: - Auto: distance between the nominal and actual points according to the surface normal:

Page 631

- X, Y or Z Axis: distance between the nominal point and actual point according to the axis selected in the active alignment:

Page 632

- 3D: distance between the nominal point and real actual point (space):

Page 633

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 634

Define Line

Page 635

Define Line

To define a Line feature, select Line via the menu Features > Define or click definition mode

in the Feature Bar in

.

The definition window has two tabs, each corresponding to a method for defining a line.

Method A

The fields common to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Line features are:

Page 636

Enter the coordinates of the start point in the X, Y, and Z fields (if Cartesian coordinates are being used)

Enter the coordinates for the end point of the line.

Enter the coordinates of the normal to the projection plane. If the coordinates of the normal are entered, the latter is displayed in the 3D View:

Method B

Page 637

Manual Definition

Enter the coordinates for the start point of the line.

Enter the direction of the line.

Enter the length of the line. These coordinates may need not be entered. This value may

Page 638

need not be entered.

Enter the coordinates of the normal to the projection plane. These coordinates may need not be entered. If the coordinates of the normal are entered, the latter is displayed in the 3D View:

Defition by clicking in 3D View The line can be completely defined by a single click on the CAD in the 3D View, the projection plane being the plane on which clicking is performed. The line can also be defined by specific points: Hold the key depressed and click once on the CAD to fill in the start point and the normal to the projection plane, and a second time to fill in the end point.

Page 639

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature. It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 640

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at import.

Page 641

Define Circle

Page 642

Define Circle

To define a Circle feature, select Circle via the menu Features > Define Feature or click Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

.

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Circle features are:

Enter the diameter of the circle

Page 643

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.

Definition of a circle by clicking a cone or cylinder. A circle can be defined using the angular properties of a cone or using an offset with respect to a cylinder. After opening the circle definition window, keep the key depressed and click one of the two 3D features concerned. The circle is calculated according to the selected position:

A positive or negative offset can be added by clicking the button. If the reference feature is a cone, the diameter and middle of the circle are calculated again; if it is a cylinder, only the middle is calculated again:

Page 644

Page 645

Tolerance

Position Tolerance To assign position tolerance values to a Circle feature, select Circle via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

,

,

. :

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the circle have been entered in the definition window, they are displayed here.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 646

Dimension Tolerance To assign dimension tolerance values to a Circle feature, select Circle via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

. :

The dimensional tolerance for a circle is applied to the diameter. The diameter entered in the definition tab is displayed here. It may be modified in this field.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for the diameter. or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list. This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to apply the tolerances.

Page 647

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 648

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature. It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 649

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at import.

Page 650

Define Arc

Page 651

Define Arc

To define an Arc feature, select Arc via the menu Features > Define Feature or click Bar in definition mode

in the Feature

.

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Arc features are:

Enter arc diameter.

Page 652

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.

Enter the coordinates for the start point of the arc: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Enter the coordinates for the end point of the arc.

Page 653

Tolerance

Position Tolerance To assign position tolerance values to an Arc feature, select Arc via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

.

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

,

,

:

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the arc have been entered in the definition window, they are displayed here.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 654

Dimension Tolerance To assign dimension tolerance values to an Arc feature, select Arc via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

.

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

:

The dimensional tolerance for an arc is applied to the diameter. The diameter entered in the definition tab is displayed here. It may be modified in this field.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for the diameter or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list. This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to apply the tolerances.

Page 655

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign or value is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 656

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature. It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 657

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at import.

Page 658

Define Plane

Page 659

Define Plane

To define a Plane feature, select Plane via the menu Features > Define Feature or click Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

.

The definition window has two tabs, each corresponding to a method for defining a plane.

Method A

Page 660

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Plane features are:

Enter the coordinates of a geometrical point on the plane in the X, Y, and Z fields (if Cartesian coordinates are being used)

Then enter the values I, J, K for the normal vector.

Boundary

The plane may be bounded by entering the lengths to be projected on each axis in the corresponding fields. For a plane with a Z normal, for example, the projected lengths to be entered are on the X and Y axes.

Page 661

Method B

The feature may be defined by a single click on the CAD model. The software then searches for the selected entity and calculates all the points composing this feature, thus giving a perfect description of plane bounding. The coordinates of the points are displayed in the window:

Page 662

to select a feature from those available in the drop-down list. to select a feature using the Browse Database function.

to delete the selected point. to move to the previous or next point in the list.

A point may be added to the list by entering its coordinates in the corresponding fields and clicking the

button.

The points clicked in the CAD model bound the defined plane. At each click, the coordinates of the point are displayed in the window:

Page 663

to select a feature from those available in the drop-down list. to select a feature using the Browse Database function.

to delete the selected point. to move to the previous or next point in the list.

A point may be added to the list by entering its coordinates in the corresponding fields and clicking the

button.

This function enables you to define a plane using the contour of a previously measured (or even uniquely defined) plane. If a defined and measured plane is used (nominal and actual values), the theoretical values (nominals) of the plane are retrieved. Select a plane from those available: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 664

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Boundary point coordinates are displayed as shown below:

Note: The coordinates retrieved by this method are grayed out (shaded), as are the three coordinate fields allowing points to be added to the list. To modify or add points,

mode must be selected.

Page 665

Defining a compound (composed) plane

When using CAD models on which the planes to be measured are composed of several surfaces that are distant from each other, you can define and measure a single, identical plane. When plane definition is performed by clicking a CAD model, a single surface is selected:

This may be composed of several CAD surfaces. To define this type of plane, hold down the

key and click the other surfaces composing the plane:

Page 666

In the last tab in the Defining Plane window, the CAD surfaces contained in the compound plane are then all used in Dynamic Link to CAD mode, if this function is enabled.

Page 667

When the plane has been defined, all the surfaces composing it will be taken into account to create its automatic measurement trajectory:

Page 668

Page 669

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature. It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 670

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at import.

Page 671

Define Sphere

Page 672

Define Sphere

To define a Sphere feature, select Sphere via the menu Features > Define Feature or click Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

.

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Sphere features are:

Enter sphere diameter.

Page 673

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Page 674

Tolerance

Position Tolerance To assign position tolerance values to a Sphere feature, select Sphere via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

,

,

. :

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the sphere have been entered in the definition window, they are displayed here.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 675

Dimension Tolerance To assign dimension tolerance values to a Sphere feature, select Sphere via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

. :

The dimensional tolerance for a sphere is applied to the diameter. The diameter entered in the definition tab is displayed here. It may be modified in this field. The feature is then defined with the new diameter.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for the diameter or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list. This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to apply the tolerances.

Page 676

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 677

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature. It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 678

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at import.

Page 679

Define Cylinder

Page 680

Define Cylinder

To define a Cylinder feature, select Cylinder via the menu Features > Define Feature or click the Feature Bar in definition mode

in

.

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Cylinder features are:

Enter cylinder height. The origin of this distance is the base of the cylinder. If height is positive, the orientation will be the same as that of the normal. If height is negative, the orientation will be the opposite to that of the normal. Enter the diameter of the cylinder

Page 681

Enter the three coordinates for the center of the base in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the approximate axis in the corresponding fields.

Page 682

Tolerance

Dimension Tolerance To assign dimension tolerance values to a Cylinder feature, select Cylinder via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

. :

The dimensional tolerance for a cylinder is applied to the diameter. The diameter entered in the definition tab is displayed here. It may be modified in this field.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for the diameter. or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list. This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to apply the tolerances.

Page 683

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 684

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature. It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 685

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at import.

Page 686

Define Cone

Page 687

Define Cone

To define a Cone feature, select Cone via the menu Features > Define Feature or click Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

.

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Cone features are:

Enter cone angle. Enter cone height. Height is measured using the base as origin. If height is positive, the direction will be the same as that of the normal. If height is negative, the direction will be the opposite to that of the normal.

Page 688

Enter the diameter of the base of the cone.

Enter the three coordinates for the center of the base in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the approximate axis in the corresponding fields.

Page 689

Tolerance

Dimension Tolerance To assign dimension tolerance values to a Cone feature, select Cone via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

.

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

:

The dimensional tolerance for a cone is applied to the angle. The angle entered in the definition tab is displayed here. It may be modified in this field.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for the angle. or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list. This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to apply the tolerances.

Page 690

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 691

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature. It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 692

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at import.

Page 693

Define Torus

Page 694

Define

To define a Torus feature, select Torus via the menu Features > Define Feature or click Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

.

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Torus features are:

Enter the A and B diameters of the torus.

Page 695

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal in the corresponding fields.

Page 696

Tolerance

Position Tolerance To assign position tolerance values to a Torus feature, select Torus via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

,

,

. :

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the torus have been entered in the definition window, they are displayed here.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 697

Dimension Tolerance To assign dimension tolerance values to a Torus feature, select Torus via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

. :

and The dimensional tolerance for a torus is applied to the diameters. The A and B diameters entered in the definition tab are displayed here. They may be modified in these fields.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each diameter. or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list. This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to apply the tolerances.

Page 698

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 699

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature. It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 700

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at import.

Page 701

Define Rectangle

Page 702

Define

To define a Rectangle feature, select Rectangle via the menu Features > Define Feature or click the Feature Bar in definition mode

in

.

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

Page 703

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Rectangle features are:

et

Enter the length and width of the rectangle.

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the orientation vector in the corresponding fields.

Page 704

Tolerance

Position Tolerance To assign position tolerance values to a Rectangle feature, select Rectangle via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

,

,

. :

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the rectangle have been entered in the definition window, they are displayed here.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 705

Dimension Tolerance To assign position dimension values to a Rectangle feature, select Rectangle via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

. :

and The dimension tolerance of a rectangle is applied to the length and/or width. Length and width are entered in the definition tab displayed here. They may be modified in these fields.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each dimension. or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list. This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to apply the tolerances.

Page 706

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign or value is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 707

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature. It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 708

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at import.

Page 709

Define Slot

Page 710

Define

To define a Slot feature, select Slot via the menu Features > Define Feature or click Bar in definition mode

in the Feature

.

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

Page 711

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Slot features are:

et

Enter the length and width of the slot.

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the orientation vector in the corresponding fields.

Page 712

Tolerance

Position Tolerance To assign position tolerance values to a Slot feature, select Slot via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

.

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

,

,

:

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the slot have been entered in the definition window, they are displayed here. These values may be modified.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 713

Dimension Tolerance To assign dimension tolerance values to a Slot feature, select Slot via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

. :

and The dimension tolerance of a slot is applied to the length and/or width. Length and width are entered in the definition tab displayed here. They may be modified in these fields.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each dimension. or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list. This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to apply the tolerances.

Page 714

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign or value is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 715

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature. It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 716

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at import.

Page 717

Define Hexagon

Page 718

Define

To define a Hexagon feature, select Hexagon via the menu Features > Define Feature or click the Feature Bar in definition mode

in

.

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Hexagon features are:

Enter the dimension of the hexagon.

Page 719

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the orientation vector in the corresponding fields.

Page 720

Tolerance

Position Tolerance To assign position tolerance values to a Hexagon feature, select Hexagon via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

,

,

. :

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the hexagon have been entered in the definition window, they are displayed here. These values may be modified.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 721

Dimension Tolerance To assign dimension tolerance values to a Hexagon feature, select Hexagon via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

. :

The dimensional tolerance for a hexagon is applied to the dimension. The dimension entered in the definition tab is displayed here. It may be modified in this field.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for the dimension. or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list. This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to apply the tolerances.

Page 722

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 723

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature. It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 724

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at import.

Page 725

Define Ellipse

Page 726

Define Ellipse

To define an Ellipse feature, select Ellipse via the menu Features > Define Feature or click Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

.

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Ellipse features are:

Enter the A and B diameters of the ellipse.

Page 727

Enter the three center coordinates in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the normal vector in the corresponding fields.

Enter the values for the orientation vector in the corresponding fields.

Page 728

Tolerance

Position Tolerance To assign position tolerance values to an Ellipse feature, select Ellipse via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

,

,

. :

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the coordinates to be toleranced.

When the X, Y and Z coordinates (in the case of Cartesian coordinates) of the ellipse have been entered in the definition window, they are displayed here. These values may be modified.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these coordinates.

Page 729

Dimension Tolerance To assign dimension tolerance values to an Ellipse feature, select Ellipse via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

. :

and The dimensional tolerance for an ellipse is applied to the diameters. The diameters entered in the definition tab are displayed here. They may be modified in these fields.

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each diameter. or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list. This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to apply the tolerances.

Page 730

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 731

Dynamic Link to CAD

This function allows a CAD entity to be linked with a defined (nominal) feature. It is accessed via the Define window, opened to display the window:

tab. For example, with the Defining Circle

Check this box to enable the function. The link between the defined feature (nominal) and CAD file will then be totally dynamic. Thus, if the diameter of the circle is modified in its native file, its definition (nominal) will be modified in the working session and/or in a program and measured according to the change made.

By default the projection surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. However, when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model (shown highlighted) until the desired surface is reached.

Page 732

This function can then be used to create fully dynamic programs based on the CAD file.

Note: Surface names in the native CAD file must not be changed as the correct surfaces would not then be found at import.

Page 733

Define Surface Point

Page 734

General

Page 735

Types of Surface Points

Surface points are features linked with the CAD surface of a CAD model, often used to determine the defects of any types of workpieces. Surface point type may be selected from the following drop-down list in the surface point definition and measurement windows:

The software automatically offers different surface point names according to the type of projection selected: Type of projection

Name

On a surface On an edge with ball On an edge with shaft On a flush edge On a gap On a flange On a curve On a 3D curve on a 3D curve without ball compensation On a round edge (with ball and with shaft) No Trim Scribe line

SRF BRD BRT AFF JEU FLR CRB CRB CRB SRT SSR SCL

Surface Surface type surface points are used to quantify a defect normal to the surface of the part.

Edge Edge type surface points are used to quantify a defect, not normal to the surface, as is the case for Surface type surface points, but at a tangent to the surface.

Flush This mode is identical to Surface type surface point measurement. The name Flush is used as, generally, measurement is performed on a workpiece other than that of the CAD model. This may be, for example, measurement of a tool whereas only the CAD model of the workpiece produced by the tool is available. This is performed in such manner as to obtain the value corresponding to the flushness between the workpiece and tool.

Gap Gap type surface point measurement is similar to an Edge type surface point measurement, in which probing direction and, consequently, ball radius compensation, is performed in the other direction.

Page 736

Flange Flange measurements are used for highly accurate measurement of a point at the edge of a piece of sheet metal that is not folded at right angles, the angle between the edge of the metal sheet and the rest of the workpiece being known (workpieces before swaging).

Curve Curve type surface points have the same function as Edge type surface points. The difference being that the measured points are projected onto a curve type CAD entity and not a surface type CAD entity. 3D Curve type surface points are used, among other things, to measure pipes. This is because these points allow (via material thickness) pipe pitch line (neutral axis) to be checked. It is also possible to use 3D curve without ball compensation type surface points which are identical to the 3D curve but without taking into account the radius of the ball being used when measuring these points.

Round Edge Round Edge measurements are used for highly accurate measurement of a point on the edge of a piece of sheet metal that has been swaged.

No Trim No Trim type surface points allow, in certain specific cases, workpieces presenting slight variations in respect to hollow areas to be checked using the same CAD model.

Scribe line Scribe line type surface points are used to give a lateral defect according to a dimension line (CAD curve).

Page 737

Selecting the definition surface

When a surface point is defined by clicking the CAD model, the definition window is displayed as shown below:

Name of the CAD surface selected when defining the surface point. This button is used to switch projection mode to automatic mode. In this case, the software attempts to project the measured (actual) surface point according to its own projection criteria (see Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points), independently of the previously selected surface. These buttons in the definition window are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model until the desired surface is reached. This is because when several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may be on a surface other than the desired surface, as shown below:

Page 738

The selected CAD entity is shown highlighted in the 3D View and in the CAD Database.

Page 739

Projection and Search Distance

Once the measurement has been made, the point may be projected onto different CAD entities (Surface or Curve) using different types of projection. This choice is made in the surface feature measurement window:

Different types of projection are available from the drop-down list:      

Standard (Surface, Edge or Curve) Flush Gap Flange Round Edge Scribe line

In addition, the Edge and Round Edge projection modes may be used with a cylindrical probe (shaft) measurement.

Search Distance From a measurement point (ball center coordinate), the software searches for a theoretical (nominal) point on the nearest surface(s) using a projection mode. If there are several solutions, the theoretical point offered by default will be the point for which the deviation vector is the closest to the probing point approach vector.

Note: By default, the search distance is calculated from probe ball radius. Thus, if different ball diameters are used, this does not affect the search distance. Search distance calculation mode may be modified via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters, User tab. When the parameter iSearchDistanceMode is set to 1, the search distance is calculated from probe ball center. When set to 2, the search distance is calculated from probe ball radius as shown in the following diagram:

Page 740

P1: Measured (actual) workpiece P2: Nominal workpiece D1: Search distance calculated from ball center D2 : Search distance calculated from ball radius

Any point outside the search area is excluded and, if no there is theoretical point in this area, the following message is displayed:

The reasons for which deviation cannot be calculated may be:   

Search distance is too small. The current alignment in which the software gives the points does not match workpiece CAD alignment (the first step in measurement is to create this current alignment). Workpiece CAD alignment does not correspond to the workpiece (right-hand workpiece with left-hand workpiece CAD alignment for example).

For further information, see Set up default parameters.

Page 741

Thickness and Offset

Thickness The thickness of a surface point may be specified at definition, measurement or modification. To know whether or not use of a material thickness is required, you need to know the position of the material with respect to the CAD model and with respect to the probing direction of the surface points. There are three possible cases:

Case 1: Thickness must be a positive value as the workpiece is encountered before the CAD model.

Case 2: No thickness as the workpiece is encountered at the same time as the CAD model.

Case 3: Thickness must be a negative value as the CAD model is encountered before the workpiece.

Offset

Page 742

An offset may be applied to an Edge type surface point. This offset represents a surplus or lack of material at the edge of the surface and not according to the CAD surface normal, as is the case for thickness:

In addition, a thickness may be applied to the edge point reference feature (if automatic edge point measurement mode is used), when the the reference feature is measured during this automatic measurement. This thickness may be entered when the edge point is defined or in the edge point measurement window before automatic measurement is enabled.

Warning: This thickness is not applied for edge point calculation. It allows the measurement path of the edge point(s) to be generated according to the reference feature used:

Page 743

Using Reference Features

For Edge, Gap, Flange, Curve or Round Edge surface points, an additional field in the definition window is used to specify the reference feature:

. This reference feature allows any position/orientation error of the area probed to be taken into account.

Example: Measuring an edge point 

Without reference feature:

If no reference is used, i.e. if AUTO is selected from the drop-down list, the measured pont is projected perpendicular to the CAD surface.



With reference feature (measured plane):

However, if a reference feature is used (here, the plane), the measured point will first be projected onto the

Page 744

previously measured plane, then onto the CAD surface. This allows the position error of the measured workpiece to be taken into account.

Page 745

Lock Nominal Surface Points

When a surface point is defined (nominal value) and then measured (actual value), its nominal position is modified. This is because Mthe software automatically re-projects (re-evaluates) the measured point on the most appropriate projection surface. See Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points If you do not want surface point nominal position to be automatically modified, you must set the Lock Surface Point property accordingly. This property is accessed from the Feature Database, by clicking after selecting a surface point. The following window is displayed:

If this box is checked, the nominal coordinates of the surface point are locked and will not change during measurement. ND will be calculated using the normal of the nominal point:

Page 746

In program: This property may be selected in a program, in a line defining a surface point.

If the Lock Surface Point property is not used, the measured surface point will be re-projected on the CAD model and its nominal value thus modified. See the page Surface Point Results, ND, and Signs.

Page 747

Define and tolerance Surface Point

Define Feature To define a Surface Point feature, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Define Feature or click in the Feature Bar in definition mode

.

The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Surface Point features are:

Select the type of surface point to be defined from the drop-down list.

Manual Definition

Page 748

Enter the coordinates of the surface point in the X, Y, and Z fields. If only two of the three coordinates are entered, the X, Y, or Z buttons may be used to obtain the missing coordinate from the other two. Click the button for the empty field to have the software search for the best solution.

The

button is used to display the following dialog box:

.



Option X is available if the Y and Z coordinates are entered. The X coordinate is calculated by intersection between the (X) line of dimension (Y,Z) and the CAO model. The same applies to options Y and Z by rotation.



Option XY is available if the Z coordinate is entered. Then the X and Y coordinates are calculated by intersection between the XY plane of dimension Z and all curves of the CAO model (the first curve detected is used). For the surface point, the projection surface is the nearest CAO entity from the intersection point.



Option XYZ is available if the X, Y and Z coordinates are entered. Then the coordinates are updated by projection of the (X,Y,Z) point onto the CAO model.

Then enter the I, J, K values for the normal vector.

CAD Definition A feature may be defined by a single click on the CAD model. The software then searches for the selected entity. The name of the projection surface is displayed in this field. By default, the software offers the nearest surface. A surface point can also be defined on a curve. To do so, press the key and click the CAO model. The software then searches for the nearest curve from the selected position. The associated surface and the curve are then displayed highlighted:

Page 749

The normal of the surface point is determined by the highlighted surface.

used to switch surface point projection to AUTO mode. This authorizes the software to select the projection surfaces to be used according to the priority criteria described in the Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points function.

Thickness Check this box to apply a thickness. The thickness may be selected from the drop-down list or entered in the field. For more information, see the Thickness and Offset page.

Reference Feature (container) For Edge, Gap, Flange, Curve or Round Edge surface points, there is an additional area allowing a reference feature (container) to be determined:

Select the reference feature from the drop-down list or from the database by clicking

. An offset value may be entered for Edge or Curve surface points.

A gap value may be entered for Gap type surface points. In this case, the nominal gap represents the nominal value of the ND and is never zero. A flange angle value may be entered for Flange type surface points. An edge radius value may be entered for Round Edge type surface points.

Page 750

Tolerance 

Position Tolerance (Coordinates Tolerances)

To assign position tolerance values to a Surface Point feature, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Define Featureor click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

.

In the window displayed, click the Coordinates Tolerances tab

:

For further details, see the Define (and tolerance) feature page.



Dimension Tolerance

To assign dimension tolerance values to a Surface Point feature, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in define mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

.

:

Page 751

The dimensional tolerance of a surface point is applied to the Normal Deviation (ND). For further details, see the Define (and tolerance) feature page.

Page 752

Define Section

A section is a set of interconnected surface or geometrical points. A section allows the real profile of a workpiece to be viewed. Even if no CAD file is open, you can define, tolerance, and specify the projection plane for the points of a section in order to measure it manually.

Page 753

Define Section

To define a Section feature, select Section via the menu Features > Define Feature or click Feature Bar in definition mode

in the

.

The window has two tabs, each corresponding to a method for defining a section.

Method A

The common fields to all definition windows are described on the Define and tolerance Feature page. The specific fields used to define Plane features are: The cutting plane, displayed in red in the 3D View, is parallel to one of the predefined planes in the definition alignment. Selected the desired predefined plane from the drop-down list. This field is used to specify the offset distance of the cutting plane.

Page 754

Check this box for the angle of inclination of the section to be kept when the defined point is clicked and enter the value of the angle in the adjacent field. Click this button to modify the axis of rotation of the cutting plane.

Specify the limits of the cutting plane :

and

are used to capture current probe position to determine the limits of the section.

Select this box to determine the coordinates of the start point of the section in the corresponding fields. You may also do this by clicking the desired point on the CAD model or by using the buttons. If only two of the three coordinates are entered, these buttons may be used to obtain the missing coordinate from the other two (only if using a CAD model). Click the button for the empty field for the software to search for the best solution. When a start point is selected, the cutting plane is displayed at the specified position in the 3D View and the intersection between the cutting plane and the CAD model is displayed in red on the CAD model. Select this box to determine the coordinates of the end point of the section in the same way as for the start point. Click this button to specify the direction of departure for the section (section start direction):

Page 755

With the button in the position

With the button in the position

select the type of point to be used to define the start and end points for section definition from: - Surface: the start point of section definition will directly be the point clicked on a CAD surface. - Edge: the start point of section definition will be the edge point identified by clicking. If the key is held down while clicking, the edge point - that is to become the start point of the section - will be the intersection of the edge with the cutting plane whose dimension is defined in "Cutting Plane".

Page 756

Note: In edge mode, increasing or decreasing the cutting plane dimension value using the arrows allows the section start point to be moved along the edge (in as far as this is possible). To achieve this, the cutting plane must not be at too great a tangent to the edge to be followed (an audio signal is emitted when the following edge point cannot be found. The start point is then the previous point, simply moved along the axis of the cutting plane. It is no longer located on the edge).

This option allows a new cutting plane to be determined each time a new section is defined. If this option is unchecked, the cutting plane used is that used when defining the first section.

Example: Sections SECT1 and SECT2 are defined in the same cutting plane, XY, with the same dimension in the Z axis, -5.000 In this case, uncheck the New box when defining section SECT2. The cutting plane will then automatically be the same as that used for section SECT1.

Page 757

If this box is checked, the software defines the section using a new algorithm. This function is commonly used for automobile bodywork CAD models. With the new algorithm, it is no longer the facets that are used, but the CAD (mathematical) model that is directly used.

Page 758

Without Optimize

With Optimize

Notes: In offline simulation mode, a form fault may be displayed. This is because, to reduce processing time, the facets of the CAD model are used instead of the CAD surfaces when defining a section. This is also the case for solid rendering. The section and probing path points are defined on the facets. There is thus a slight difference between the points to be probed and the CAD model. This has no consequences on real measurements as the points probed on the workpiece are projected onto the CAD surfaces to obtain the correctly calculated form fault (ND):

However, when offline measurements are made, probing is simulated on the workpiece but performed on the

Page 759

facets. However, the software projects the probing points onto the CAD surfaces. There is thus a form fault in simulation mode:

Method B This method is used to define a section from a 3D curve.

Page 760

The name of the selected curve is displayed in this field. A curve is selected by clicking in the 3D View. The curve found closest to the location clicked is then added to the drop-down list of Curves. Several curves may be selected by holding the are successively added to the drop-down list.

key down while clicking. The curves clicked

Note: When a section is defined from curves, the order of the parts of the section corresponds to the order of the curves in the drop-down list. This order (sequence) is important when measurement is performed.

used to delete the selected curve. When this box is checked (selected), any change made (direction of the curve, deletion, calculation mode of the normals, direction of the normals) is applied to all the curves. This box must be checked (selected) before any changes are made. The change(s) will not be applied unless validated (confirmed) by clicking the Close button. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible curves indicated by the click in the CAD model until the desired surface is reached. used to reverse (invert) the direction of the selected curve.

Page 761

The normals may be calculated by several different methods: Auto: only valid if the selected curve is flat enough. The calculated normals are then in the plane of the curve. Reference: used to specify a reference plane or axis by selecting it from the adjacent drop-down list. If a plane is selected, the calculated normals are in this plane. If an axis is selected, the calculated normals have the same direction as this axis. Surface: only valid when a CAD file is open. The calculated normals are the surface normals. used to reverse the direction of the normals.

Without reversing the direction of the normals

With the direction of the normals reversed

Page 762

Tolerance

To assign dimension tolerance values to a Section feature, select Section via the menu Features > Define Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in definition mode

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

. :

Enter the higher and lower tolerance values in these fields. This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered. Uncheck it if you do not want to apply the tolerances.

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 763

Define Surface

Page 764

Define Surface

To define a Surface feature, select Surface in the Features > Define menu. The advantage of a Surface feature is that it allows a path to be generated on the desired surface(s) and measure it/them on the fly with an arm or laser tracker. Moreover, a single feature is created for an entire surface (or set of surfaces), whatever the number of probing points measured. The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

:

The fields common to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to define Surface features are: Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface.

Click the 3D View or CAD Database to define the desired surface(s).

Page 765

Used to delete the selected surface(s) from the list. Used to display the CAD Database. Used to change the projection surface after clicking in the 3D View. Used to change the order of surfaces in the list. This changes the probing strategy proposed during measurement. This changes the probing strategy proposed during the automatic measurement.

Page 766

Tolerance

To assign dimensional tolerance values to a Surface feature, select Surface via the Features > Define Feature menu. In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

:

The dimensional tolerance of a surface is applied to the Min / Max. For further details, see the Define (and tolerance) feature page.

Page 767

Measure Feature

Page 768

Measurement overview

Measuring a feature consists in probing points on the workpiece to be inspected. This requires a calibrated probe to be active in the software. The type of feature (circle, line, plane, etc.) to be measured (probed) must then be specified. Measurement can then be performed. To represent the feature as best possible, the points probed must be uniformly distributed over the feature. The software then calculates the feature as best as possible by passing via the probing points and using one of the measurement algorithms available. If the feature was measured with more points than the minimum number required, the software calculates a form fault that is the sum of the distances of the two points at the greatest distance from the calculated feature.

Example: In the example of line D below, the form fault FF = d1+ d2.

Plane measurement tests (surfaces varying between 100x100 and 300x300 for cast and machined parts) allow a figure for the number of points required to be as close as possible to the actual (real) form fault to be ascertained (between two and three times the minimum number of points, i.e. between 6 and 9 points in this example).

Note: A feature may be measured with probes of different diameter, provided they have all been calibrated.

Page 769

Constraints

Measurement or construction constraints allow certain conditions to be imposed on feature calculation.

Examples:  

When measuring a circle, its position may be calculated after setting its diameter (or vice versa). When measuring a plane, its orientation may be set, perpendicular to another plane for example.

p : Probed Points C1: Circle calculated with a diameter constraint of 40mm C2: Circle calculated without constraint C3: Circle calculated with a radius constraint of 12.5 mm

p: Probed Points P1: Plane 1 measured P2: Plane 2 measured without constraint P3 : Plane 2 measured with a "perpendicular to" constraint in relation to Plane 1

Click this button in a feature measurement or construction window, the following window is displayed :

Page 770

Criterion Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the feature in this field. The criteria available are Least Square, Tchebychev and, depending on the features, Inscribed and Circumscribed: For

Least Square

Inscribed

Circumscrib Tchebychev ed

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Page 771

Inscribed Circle Constructs the circle with the largest diameter passing at least by 3 points with all points outside. The points' deviations in relation to the inscribed circle are positive or nil.

Least square circle

Inscribed circle

Circumscribed Circle Constructs the circle with the smallest diameter passing at least by 3 points with all points inside. The points' deviations in relation to the circumscribed circle are positive or nil.

Least square circle Circumscribed circle

Dimension Then select whether or not a dimension constraint is to be applied to the feature. If so, specify which dimension(s), by checking the corresponding box(es). Dim1 and Dim2, for example, respectively represent the large and small diameters of an ellipse.

Position

Page 772

When the feature has been defined, a position constraint, i.e. the coordinates of the center of the feature, may be added.

Orientation A final constraint may be applied, the orientation constraint, i.e. constrain the feature to be parallel, perpendicular or angled (the angle is entered to give an inclination) to a reference feature selected from the drop-down list.

Click this button to apply the properties and close the window. Closes the window without applying any changes made.

Note:  The constraints available are: Featur Criterion Dim1 Dim2 e type Least Square 2D Tchebychev Least Square 3D Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev X Inscribed Circumscrib ed Least Square Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev X Inscribed Circumscrib ed Least Square Tchebychev X Inscribed Circumscrib ed Least X Square Tchebychev

Position

Parallel to

Perpendicul Angled at ar to

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

Page 773

Least Square Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev 

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

If constraints that are not available for the feature are selected, the following warning message is displayed at feature evaluation:

For feature measurement, this message is displayed when the measurement is validated, after the constraints have been selected. Clicking

allows the constraints applied to be modified by clicking

again.

Page 774

Measure Feature

This function can be accessed: - Via the menu Features > Measure Feature -

Via this icon in the Feature bar, then selecting the type of feature to be defined (circle, line, etc.).

The feature measurement window is displayed as shown below, but varies slightly according to the feature selected:

Page 775

Name Shows the type of feature to be measured, a line in this example. Reminder that the window is in measurement mode. Enter the name of the feature to be measured in this field or select an existing feature from the drop-down list. This button is used to select a feature from the Feature database.

Notes:  

The default name may be configured via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters > Default feature name Incrementation mode may be configured via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters > Feature name incrementation in the measurement windows

Family

Page 776

The feature may be assigned a family by entering family name in the field or selecting an existing family from the drop-down list.

Number of points Minimum number of points to be probed for the software to be able to calculate the feature. This number may differ according to feature type and may be modified: either on a one-off basis via this field, or systematically for a type of feature in the Default Parameters.

Note: When a feature is measured, if the minimum number of points is not reached, the button allowing you to confirm (accept) the measurement is not available.

Auto. Stop Stops the measurement once the minimum number of points to be probed has been reached. Allows the measurement to be automatically validated (accepted) after the last point has been probed.

Repeat Used to measure the following feature immediately after validating (accepting) the current measurement.

Tangent Outside Material This option allows the measured feature to be translated (best fit to measured points) so that it passes via the probed point at the greatest distance from the material (part).

Example: Cylinder measured with the Tangent Outside Material option

Page 777

: Probing points of the measured cylinder C1: Cylinder calculated with the Least Square method C2: Cylinder calculated with the Tangent Outside Material method

Example: Plane (or line) measured with the Tangent Outside Material option

: Probing points of the measured plane (or line) P1: Plane (or line) calculated with the Least Square method P2: Plane or line calculated with the Tangent Outside Material method

Auto projection plane This checkbox allows a projection plane to be measured before measuring a 2D feature (Line, Circle, Arc, Rectangle, Slot, Hexagon, Ellipse). The first probing points are to be taken on the plane, the following points on the feature. used to determine the number of points to be probed for the projection plane. used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane.

Cyl. Probe

Page 778

Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First calibrate the cylindrical probe. This method is often used to inspect bodywork parts.

Notes: This option is only available for the line, circle, arc, rectangle, slot, hexagon, and ellipse features. This type of probing is not compatible with the automatic measurement methods. Probing must be manually performed.

 

Constraints This button is used to apply position, orientation or dimensional constraints to the feature by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page..

Stop

Used to interrupt measurement and close the window.

Probed points counter

The counter is incremented as points are progressively probed. In program mode, it decreases (counts down).

OK

To validate the measurement. The feature is then added to the Feature Database and the result of the measurement performed is displayed in the Results window.

Delete

To delete the last point probed without canceling the measurement.

Page 779

Automatic measurement

Used to access automatic measurement if the feature has already been defined, or feature definition if not.

Projection Plane

The projection plane determines the plane in which all probing points will be projected for calculation of line, circle, arc, rectangle, slot, hexagon, or ellipse features.

Example: Measuring a circle

Several projection modes are available, varying according to the type of feature: Plane (plane type features): the ball centers of the probing points are projected in the selected plane, the circle is then calculated (in this plane) with ball radius compensation according to probing direction.

Page 780

1st Probing Point: This method is only available if a CAD file is open. When measuring the circle, the first point is probed on the projection surface. The point thus probed determines the height of the projection plane and the surface orientation (via the CAD file) determines its orientation.

Auto: the feature is not projected. The feature's points must be probed at the same height to avoid too great a form fault.

Page 781

Nominal: if the feature has been defined, the measured feature will be projected on the nominal plane.

Approximate Axis

used to enter an approximate axis for cylinder and cone features. The approximate axis allows calculation of the measured feature to be initialized. Several approximate axes are available: AUTO: the feature is not corrected. The first two points must be probed according to the generator (distance/pitch length) of the cylinder or cone, then the following points probed according to circles at different heights on the cylinder or cone to avoid too great a form fault. NOMINAL: the direction of the defined (nominal) cylinder or cone will be used as approximate direction for calculation of the measured (actual) cylinder or cone. Axis (features equivalent to axes: line, plane, cylinder, cone): the orientation of the axis of the selected feature (in the active alignment) will be used as approximate direction for calculation of the measured (actual) cylinder or cone.

Page 782

Plane (plane type features): the orientation of the axis of the selected feature (in the active alignment) will be used as approximate direction for calculation of the measured (actual) cylinder or cone.

Edge Probing Assistance / Thickness

provides probing assistance for measurement of 2D features (lines, circles, etc.) and edge type surface points. The assistance is presented in two forms, that may be complementary: 

Visual assistance: probe color changes: green when the probe is in the probing area, red when the probe is outside the probing area.



Audio assistance: the tone changes as the probe moves: a high-pitched (sharp) sound is emitted when the probe is in the probing area, a low-pitched (bass) sound when the probe is outside the probing area. Note:





For audio assistance (probing sound) to be enabled, the Enable Sound Effects function must have been previously selected via the Preferences menu and Sound probing assistant enabled in the menu 3D View > Manual Probing Assistance. This function is only available if the selected projection feature is not Nominal, Auto or 1st Probing .

Click this button to enable the function and enter the value of the depth to which the feature will be probed. This defines an authorized probing area. The button remains depressed while the function is enabled.

The Thickness field is available when the Cyl. Probe option is enabled. It allows a material thickness (corresponding to an offset along the normal) to be applied to the feature.

Accept

Page 783

This button is available when a parameter field has been modified (family entered or the minimum number of points changed, for example). If the button becomes available, it must be clicked before the feature can be measured.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following lines are added:

For more information on an error occurring during program execution, see Error management.

Page 784

Automatic feature measurement

This function can be accessed: - Via the menu Features > Measure Feature -

Via this icon in the Feature bar, then selecting the type of feature to be defined (circle, line, etc.).

The measurement window is displayed, click

.

The automatic measurement window is displayed in this form, but varies depending on the feature and method of measurement selected:

Probing Strategy

Page 785

Click the icon corresponding to the desired automatic measurement method (probing strategy).

CAD clicks These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model until the desired surface is reached, as shown in the following diagram:

used to invert the last point clicked normal.

used to delete the last point clicked on the CAD model.

Manages the probing depth as a function of the feature selected.

Page 786

A violet alignment is displayed in the 3D View window, used to position the measurement path. It is this alignment that can be changed when selecting a feature in the Ref box. If the selection is Auto, it is the alignment of the feature that will serve as the reference feature. Otherwise, the path will be generated by the alignment of the feature selected.

Important note: This alignment will generate the measurement path only, no additional alignment is created. The scrolling list displays the planes that could serve as reference feature for the alignment. The alignment is calculated as follows: 



When the feature measured is a straight line: the origin of the alignment corresponds to the projection of the base point of the straight line on the plane; the orientation of the alignment corresponds to that of the plane selected. When the feature measured is a circle, an arc, a cylinder, a cone, a rectangle, an oblong, a hexagon or an ellipse: the origin of the alignment corresponds ot the intersection of the normal line of the feature with the plane selected; the orientation of the alignment corresponds to the normal line of the plane.

If it is impossible to calculate the alignment, the following message appears:

Example: The CIR2 circle is defined by a CAD click on the top plane. By selecting the PLN2 plane as reference alignment for the depth, the path proposed is af follows:

Page 787

Probing Mode Used to select probing mode from: - Static: This allow probing points to be learned individually in the program lines. If the feature's nominal is modified (diameter, for example), it is difficult to modify the measurement. - Dynamic: This allows probing paths to be learned (instead of probing points). Thus, if the feature's nominal is modified, the path is adapted to the new definition of the feature (smaller or larger diameter than during learning). - Contouring: this is identical to dynamic mode except the probing is performed in contouring (scanning) mode, i.e. the probe is not retracted between each point probed. This is, of course, only possible if the probe and CNC allow it (scanning probe and CNC that handles this type of probe).

Page 788

- Cont. no retraction: this is identical to contouring mode, except the probe does not leave the material/part, even when probing path changes. This is, of course, only possible if the probe and CNC allow it (scanning probe and CNC that handles this type of probe).

Page 789

Notes:   

Choice of one of these modes is significant during learning of automatic measurement in program mode. With dynamic probing, neither an automatic projection plane nor probing relative to another feature can be chosen. With static probing for 2D features, a previously measured feature (plane, line or point) may be selected in order to make a measurement relative to this feature. The advantage of relative measurement is to offset the probing points (of the circle in the example) by the value of the deviation between the nominal and actual (measured) values of the relative feature :

allows the defined feature to be used as a model to create a path. If a feature is re-measured, the path will be created according to the nominal and not the actual value.

For Point, Line and Plane features, you must specify whether probing direction is reversed or not

with respect to the normal of the point.

Fore Circle, Arc, Sphere, Cylinder, Cone, Rectangle, Slot, Hexagon, Ellipse features, you must specify if probing path is inside

or outside

the feature.

CNC Distances

The bottom part of the window shows the CNC distance parameters, i.e. the Approach, Search and Retract distances. These may be configured independently.

Page 790

Checking this box allows two via points or clearance points to be inserted during feature measurement: one located before the first probing point and the other after the last probing point. The advantage of this is in program learning mode as it is then no longer necessary to manually define all the approach and clearance points.

Adjusting CNC distances Adjustment is only available for circles, cylinders, arcs and spheres. When the window is opened, CNC distance adjustment is automatically offered by the software that checks whether the distances may be the default distances or must be adapted. This adjustment takes account of the dimensions of the feature and the dimensions of the probe:  

If Default distance < (Nominal feature radius - Probe radius) Then CNC distance = Default distance If Default distance > (Nominal feature radius - Probe radius) Then CNC distance = = (Nominal feature radius - Probe radius)

The values are then entered in the fields and may be modified if required.

This button allows the CNC distances to be adjusted so as to return to the center of the feature between each probing point. The adjustment is performed: - on the search distance for tree type features. - on the approach distance and retract distance for hole type features. 

For inside measurements Approach and Retract are adjusted to the center of the circle. The fields are grayed out and the values calculated.



For outside measurement Find is adjusted to the center of the circle. The field is grayed out and the value calculated.

Page 791



Approach, find and retract distances are adjusted when executing the measuring line for dynamic or continuous measurement learned in the program. The three fields are grayed out while the program line is being modified and their values will be calculated according to with the the specified feature.

Automatic measurement settings An automatic measurement window is displayed as shown below:

Page 792

The following settings are memorized between measurements:

The following setting depends on probe position:

Page 793

The following setting depends on the feature to be measured, probing mode is dynamic if there is a link with the geometry.

used to launch automatic measurement. At the end of the measurement, the window is automatically validated. closes the window without applying any changes made.

Notes:  

If the automatic measurement to be performed is measurement of a defined (nominal) feature, check that the CNC can reach the probing area without any risk of collision. This window also allows access to automatic measurement customization.

In program: When an automatic measurement is learned in a program, the following lines are added: 

Measurement in Static mode: the coordinates of the probing points are stored



Measurement in Dynamic mode: the measurement paths are stored

Page 794



Measurement in Contouring mode: the contouring paths and dynamic path changes are stored



Measurement in Cont. no retraction mode: the contouring paths are stored

Page 795

Page 796

Additional information on automatic measurement in dynamic mode

Dynamic probing mode is selected in the Automatic Measurement window. Changes in the dimensions and/or height of a feature (a cylinder, for example) and its position are applied for automatic measurement in dynamic mode.

Example: The following diagrams show the types of modifications that can be performed on the nominal values and that will be applied to automatic measurement in dynamic mode when paths are generated. The nominal values of the cylinder have been modified in diameter, height, and position.

Page 797

Each path may be re-calculated according to the feature nominals. For the cylinder, the last path may be re-calculated so that it is located at the same distance from the base of the cylinder as in Teach-in mode. The same is true for the intermediate paths. The paths are distributed uniformly according to the new feature. Teach-in mode

Execution with new nominal values

Page 798

During automatic measurement in dynamic mode, by default the measurements learned in program mode are configured to re-calculate the positions of the paths according to the dimensions used when the feature was defined. To disable this option, the dynamic line and dynamic circle measurement lines must be edited in order to deselect the

box.

Measuring plane

Page 799

Automatic measurement in dynamic mode may also be used to adapt the probing path to the new form of plane definition. The points are re-calculated in two ways: 

Automatic linear measurement (density or step method)

Example: Definition of PLANE1 and automatic measurement path in dynamic mode during program learning:

Modification of the definition of PLANE1:

or



Automatic circular measurement

The barycenter of the limits of the plane (in 3 or 4 points) is determined as is the smallest distance between the barycenter and the sides of the plane. This distance corresponds to the outer diameter of the contouring of circle (De). The inner diameter (Di) is determined by the following calculation, where: DiA, inner diameter learned and DeA, outer diameter learned.

Dynamic via points

Page 800

An automatic measurement in dynamic mode allows not only the probing points but also the via points (or lists of via points) to be adapted to the modifications made to the nominal values of a feature.

Notes:   

This type of via points can only be created by learning automatic feature measurements in dynamic and contouring mode (for scanning probes). Program lines cannot be copied/pasted. These via points may be calculated according to the measured (actual) part of the feature or the nominal part.

The entry and exit via points of the dynamic automatic measurement are displayed in Dynamic via point format and the five via points between each circle contouring have been transformed into a single line Dynamic via point list. The instruction lines Dynamic via point and Dynamic via point list may be edited by either by double-clicking the line in the program, or via the automatic measurement window by clicking

:

Page 801

Dynamic via point

Dynamic via point list

This is used to select use of either the nominal or evaluated part of the feature to re-calculate the position of the via point. The coordinates are re-calculated on the fly and displayed if a dynamic via point is being edited.

Note: If modifications are made then another method of automatic measurement selected, the modifications are lost.

Page 802

Contouring feature measurement

When measuring with a scanning probe, the software allows measurement to be performed in Contouring or Cont. no retraction (contouring without retraction) mode, as shown in the following windows:

Contouring (continuous/scanning) measurement is used to rapidly measure features with a large number of points. In addition, selecting Cont. no retraction as probing mode allows a measurement to be made with no via point between two measurement paths, as shown in the following example:

Page 803

The Deflection adaptative movement option of the Set-up CNC Parameters function allows the CNC to activate search and thus compensate for any defects of the part measured when selected:

The search distance is the distance over which the CNC will search for probing after the nominal point to start measurement in contouring mode. However, when measuring features with holes, deflection adaptative movement must be de-selected to disable search and thus avoid inadvertent probing. Contouring mode measurement is then performed relative to the nominal feature. The CNC Settings are then displayed in the measurement windows as shown below:

Contouring measurement mode may be used for the following features: circle, arc, rectangle, line, cylinder, cone, sphere, plane (methods 2 and 4), surface point (surface and edge type) and section (method 3).

For surface points, contouring probing mode is selected from the surface point measurement window by checking (selecting) the

box before activating automatic measurement.

This measurement mode is only available for surface and edge type surface points:

Page 804

Note: When measuring arcs or lines in continuous mode, the radius of the sensor ball is to be allowed for in generating the trajectory in order to prevent any collisions in certain cases at the start or finish of a measurement.

It is nevertheless possible to "completely" measure an arc or line by changing the value of the following variable in: Preferences > Advanced Parameters, User tab FULL_MEASURE=1 (default value is 0).

Page 805

Page 806

Customizing automatic measurement

This function allows several specific parameters of an automatic measurement path previously selected in the automatic measurement window to be modified.

To access automatic measurement customization, click this button in a feature's automatic measurement window.

The window is shown below:

Fig. 1: Static

Fig. 2: Dynamic circle probing

Page 807

Fig. 2b: Dynamic line probing

Fig. 3: Line and circle scanning

Used to delete one or more previously selected points.

Used to insert via points in the list of existing points by specifying the coordinates of the point in the CMM Positioning/Probing window displayed. It also allows another circle or line probing path to be inserted, depending on the feature measured. All these options are available only in static mode.

Used to switch to static probing mode when dynamic mode is selected, however, a switch in the reverse direction is not possible. The CNC Distances cannot be modified in this window. They must have been modified beforehand. Click this button to launch automatic measurement. At the end of the measurement, the window is automatically validated. closes the window without applying any changes made.

Page 808

Fig. 1 : If automatic circle measurement uses static probing mode, the customization window is displayed in this form with a list of the probing points. Each Via point or Probing Point can be edited and modified, either by double-clicking the relevant point, or by selecting it and clicking

.

The CMM Positioning/Probing window is then displayed to allow the probing (or via) point and/or approach vector coordinates to be modified:

Fig. 2: If automatic circle measurement uses dynamic probing mode, the customization window is displayed in this form with a list of the probing points. Fig. 2 b : For automatic measurement in dynamic probing mode of plane, cylinder, and cone features, automatic measurement may be defined using circular paths (cf. the circle in Fig 2) or linear paths, as shown in this window (Fig 2b) for a plane. Each Via point can be edited and modified, either by double-clicking the relevant point, or by selecting it and clicking

.

Page 809

A specific window for dynamic via points is then displayed, allowing these points to be modified:

Each Automatic circle probing and Automatic line probing command may be edited and modified, either by double-clicking the relevant command line, or selecting it and clicking

.

Page 810

For more information on automatic feature measurement/probing in dynamic mode, see the page Additional information on automatic measurement in dynamic mode.

Fig. 3: If automatic feature measurement uses Contouring (or Cont. no retraction) mode, the customization window is presented in this form with a list of circle or line measurement (probing) paths, or a combination of the two (as is the case for Cont. no retraction mode in the example in this document). Each Via Point may be edited and modified, either by double-clicking the relevant point, or by selecting it and clicking

. (Cf the section on Fig 2 and 2b, the specific window for dynamic via points).

Each Circle scanning and Line scanning command may be edited and modified, either by double-clicking the relevant command line, or selecting it and clicking

.

Page 811

Note: If modifications are made then another method of automatic measurement selected, the modifications are lost.

Page 812

Measure Point

Page 813

Manual measurement

To measure a (geometrical) Point feature, select Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Point features are:

Probing projection When the Allow Probing Projection function box is checked in the menu Features > Set default parameters, Geometrical point tab, the measurement window is displayed as follows:

Page 814

If this box is checked, the probing point is automatically projected on the projection feature selected. This projection will only work on planes.

Tangent Outside Material Checking this box allows the measured point to be translated (best fit to measured points) so that it passes via the probed point at the greatest distance from the material (part). This is only true if Compensation Feature is set to AUTO. For further details, see the Measure feature page.

Compensation Feature used to enter a reference feature for best-fit calculation of the measured feature. Several compensation modes are available: Auto: By probing a single point, probing direction determines the compensation direction. To use a compensation plane, at least 3 points must be probed. The software constructs a plane passing through the ball centers to calculate the compensation on the last point probed according to the normal of the plane. This may be useful when the surface probed is not absolutely flat. In this mode, the Tangent Outside Material function may be used.

Page 815

Space Point: This method uses a compensation plane. Three points minimum must be probed. The software constructs a plane passing through the ball centers to calculate the compensation on the last point probed according to the normal of the plane. This may be useful when the surface probed is not absolutely flat. In this mode, the Tangent Outside Material function may be used.

Note: In manual mode, this mode is equivalent to automatic compensation mode.

Page 816

Angle point: used to measure a point that is at the intersection of two planes. The measurement method is as follows:    

It is necessary to measure at lest 6 points distributed over two planes (half of the points for plane 1 (P1), and the other half for plane 2 (P2)). There must be an even number of points selected. Then the software calculates D2, the intersection line of the two planes. The normal of plane P2 is then projected on plane 1. The software then calculates the resulting line D1 passing through the barycenter B of P1. The angle point Pt is then defined by the intersection of the two lines D1 and D2.

Corner point: used to measure a point that is at the intersection of three planes. The measurement method is as follows:   

It is necessary to measure at lest 9 points distributed over three planes P1, P2 et P3. The number of points to be selected must be a multiple of 3. The software calculates D, the intersection line of plane P1 with plane P2. The angle point Pt is then defined by the intersection of the line D and plane P3.

Page 817

For more information on space, corner and angle points, see the related section.

Ball Center: There is no compensation.

This type of point may be directly sent to another computer connected via a serial link. Click the button.

Nominal: This is compensation according to the nominal point's normal.

Point (point type features): Compensation is in the direction of the axis passing through the point and the ball center. Application: measurement of a geometrical point on a sphere. The center of the sphere may be used as compensation feature.

Page 818

Line (line type features): Compensation is in the direction of the axis perpendicular to the line and passing through the ball center. Application: measurement of a geometrical point on a cylinder. Cylinder axis may be used as compensation feature.

Plane (plane type features): Compensation is in the direction of the normal of the selected plane and passing through the ball center. Any compensation is performed using probe ball radius. Application: measurement of a geometrical point on a plane. The plane or any other plane parallel to it may be used as compensation feature.

Page 819

Automatic measurement

To measure a (geometrical) Point feature automatically, select Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

.

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Point features are described below. Several automatic measurement methods are available:      

Preset automatic measurement Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Automatic measurement using the grid method Automatic measurement using the U V method Automatic measurement using the perimeter method Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 820

If the geometrical point has been defined, the window is displayed as shown below:



Preset automatic measurement

This method is used to automatically measure a point by generating a measurement (probing) path according to the nominal feature or the previous measurement.

Page 821

Example:

Note: If the compensation mode selected for the geometrical point is Auto, the automatic

Page 822

measurement window is slightly different:

The number of points to be measured (3 minimum) and radius may be selected. The points allowing Auto compensation will be probed around the nominal geometrical point (displayed in green) with, in the example, a radius of 5:

If the point has not been defined and a CAD model is open, the window is displayed as shown below:

Page 823



Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model

This method is only available if a CAD file is open. The window is shown below:

Page 824

Check (select) this box to create the nominal part of the measured point. Click the geometrical point to be measured on the CAD model:

Page 825

Calculation mode: Space point, corner point and angle point

The Space point, Angle point and Corner point calculation modes are used to measure particular geometrical points. Measurement can be manual, automatic or semi-automatic.

Semi-automatic mode The following icon is used to access the semi-automatic mode: . It is displayed in the manual measure window of the point, when the calculation mode selected is one of the three modes detailed in this section. 

Space point

The space point is calculated by measuring at least 3 points on the surface. The semi-automatic mode of the space point is used to probe only one point on the selected surface. The other points will be automatically measured.

Important note: It is required to configure the measurement before the first manual probing. To do this, click

.

The following window is displayed:

Page 826

The fields common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are described in the Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode section. Once the parameters are defined, click Accept to validate. Then manually measure a point on the selected surface. Automatic measurement is performed by taking into account all parameters previously defined.



Angle point

Page 827

The point on angle is calculated by measuring at least three points on each of the two surfaces forming an angle of around 90°. The semi-automatic mode is used to probe only one point on the first surface and another one on the second surface to obtain an angle point. The other points will be automatically measured.

Important note: It is required to configure the measurement before the first manual probing. To do this, click

.

The following window is displayed:

The fields common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are described in the Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode section. Once the parameters are defined, click Accept to validate. Then manually probe a first point on surface 1 and a second one on surface 2. Automatic measurement is performed by taking into account all parameters previously defined.

Note: The point measured is an edge-type geometrical point.



Corner point

Page 828

The corner point is calculated by measuring at least three points on each of the three surfaces forming a corner of a workpiece. The semi-automatic mode is used to probe only one point on each relevant surface. The other points will be automatically measured.

Important note: It is required to configure the measurement before the first manual probing. To do this, click

.

The following window is displayed:

Page 829

The fields common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are described in the Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode section. Specify an offset value between the edge of the surface and the center of the circle path. This offset is performed on the three relevant surfaces. The angles are defined with respect to the x-axis of the active alignement. Once the parameters are defined, click Accept to validate. Then manually probe a first point on surface 1 and a second one on surface 2 and a third one on surface 3. Automatic measurement is performed by taking into account all parameters previously defined.

Automatic mode 

Click

Space point

to change the measurement parameters.

The following window is displayed:

Page 830

The fields common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are described in the Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode section. Once the parameters are defined, click Accept to validate.

Note: The point selected on the CAD surface is the last point to be measured during the automatic measurement path. This is the compensated one.

Page 831



Click

Angle point

to change the measurement parameters.

The following window is displayed: Defined point

Point not defined

The fields common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are described in the Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode section. Check this option to specify the coordinates of the start point of the path. Click the desired point on the CAD model.

Page 832

Check this option to specify the coordinates of the end point of the path. Click the desired point on the CAD model.

Click this button to select the direction of the measurement path. The direction of the red arrow indicating the direction of the measurement path will then be reversed. Enter the number of points in this field. or

Enter measurement step value in this field.

Specify an offset value between the edge of the surface and the center of the circle path. This offset is performed on the two relevant surfaces. Specify the round edge value if required. This button is used to select the direction of the measurement path. This button is used to select the direction of the measurement normals.

Page 833

Click this button to validate the settings entered. The corresponding measurement/probing paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be calculated). Once the parameters are defined, click Accept to validate.



Click

Corner point

to change the measurement parameters.

The following window is displayed:

Page 834

The fields common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are described in the Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode section.

Select the surfaces to be used to define the corner point. Once the parameters are defined, click Accept to validate.

Page 835

Automatic mode and Semi-automatic mode The parameters that are common to the three measurement modes for automatic or semi-automatic measurement are as follows: Indicate the total number of points used for automatic mode.

Note: In semi-automatic mode, the point that is manually probed on each surface is the last point to be measured on the automatic measurement path of each of the surfaces. Indicate the radius of the generated circle. Specify the starting angle of the circle. Specify the total angle of the circle. The angles are defined with respect to the x-axis of the active alignement.

Page 836

Measure Line

Page 837

Manual measurement

To measure a Line feature, select Line via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click Feature bar in measurement mode

in the

.

The following window is displayed:

With Cyl. Probe

Without Cyl. Probe

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Line features are:

Tangent Outside Material This option allows the measured line to be translated (best fit to measured points) so that it passes via the probed point at the greatest distance from the material (part). For further details, see the Measure feature page.

Page 838

Cyl. Probe Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Constraints This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Page 839

Automatic measurement

To measure a Line feature automatically, select Line via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The measurement window is displayed. Click

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Line features are described below.

Two methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:   

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Preset automatic measurement Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 840

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically. The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select projection of the probing points on the CAD model, surface, or edge.

On the CAD model, left-click the points of the line to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 841

Preset automatic measurement This method is used to automatically measure a feature by generating a measurement (probing) path according to the nominal feature or the previous measurement and the projection feature.

Page 842

used to enter or select the desired probing depth relative to the projection plane. used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is that required to calculate the feature.

Example:

Page 843

Measure Circle

Page 844

Manual measurement

To measure a Circle feature, select Circle via the menu Features > Measure or click bar in measurement mode

in the Feature

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Circle features are:

Cyl. Probe Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Page 845

Constraints This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Page 846

Automatic measurement

To measure a Circle feature automatically, select Circle via the menu Features > Measure or click in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The measurement window is displayed, click

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Circle features are described below.

Three methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:   

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Preset automatic measurement Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 847

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically. The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select projection of the probing points on the CAD model, surface, or edge.

On the CAD model, left-click the points of the circle to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 848

Preset automatic measurement

Page 849

used to enter or select the desired probing depth. used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is that required to calculate the feature. and are used to adjust the circular path according to obstacles. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

The default path offered to measure the circle does not avoid the groove in the workpiece/part.

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the measurement path of the circle can be set to avoid the groove.

Checking this box allows automatic measurement of a projection plane before measuring the desired feature. A plane will be measured to the close surroundings of the feature and automatically used as projection feature. used to specify the number of measurement points for the projection plane. used to specify the offset (in millimeters) of the measurement points with respect to the edges of the feature to be measured. used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane, if required.

Page 850

Note: To measure a 2D feature, a projection plane must be used. This plane must be selected from the list of previously measured features.

Example:

Page 851

Measure Arc

Page 852

Manual measurement

To measure an Arc feature, select Arc via the menu Features > Measure or click in measurement mode

in the Feature bar

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Arc features are:

Cyl. Probe Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Page 853

Constraints This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page..

Page 854

Automatic measurement

To measure an Arc feature automatically, select Arc via the menu Features > Measure or click the Feature bar in measurement mode

in

.

The measurement window is displayed, click

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Arc features are described below.

Three methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:   

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Preset automatic measurement Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 855

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically. The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select the probing points directly on the selected surface or edge. On the CAD model, left-click the points of the arc to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 856

Preset automatic measurement This window is used to configure automatic measurement of a feature: it varies slightly according to the type of feature selected. Several preset automatic measurement methods may be available for the same type of feature.

Page 857

used to enter or select the desired probing depth. used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is that required to calculate the feature. used to invert the probing direction of the points on the arc. Checking this box allows automatic measurement of a projection plane before measuring the desired feature. A plane will be measured to the close surroundings of the feature and automatically used as projection feature.

Note: To measure a 2D feature, a projection plane must be used. This plane must be selected from the list of previously measured features. used to specify the number of measurement points for the projection plane. used to specify the offset (in millimeters) of the measurement points with respect to the edges of the feature to be measured. used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane, if required.

Example:

Page 858

Measure Plane

Page 859

Manual measurement

To measure a Plane feature, select Plane via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click Feature bar in measurement mode

in the

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Plane features are:

Tangent Outside Material Checking this box allows the measured plane to be translated (best fit to measured points) so that it passes via the probed point at the greatest distance from the material (part). For further details, see the Measure feature page.

Page 860

Constraints This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Note : Gasket Scan

This icon appears in case of the use of a continuous probe (SP25, SP80, SP600). It gives access to the Gasket Scan function.

Page 861

Automatic measurement

To measure a Plane feature automatically, select Plane via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The measurement window is displayed. Click

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Plane features are described below.

Several methods of automatic measurement (probing strategies) are available:     

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Preset automatic measurement using lines Preset automatic measurement using the CAD model Circular preset automatic measurement Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 862

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically. The window is shown below:

On the CAD model, left-click the points of the plane to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 863

Preset automatic measurement using lines This method is used to automatically measure a plane using linear measurement (probing) paths distributed over the plane.

Note: The fields that may be edited and the fields grayed out (unavailable) differ according to whether the Nbr pnts or Step boxes are checked. The window is shown below:

Page 864

Number of points method

Step method

used to enter the number of points to be uniformly probed on the plane used to determine the step (in millimeters) of the points distributed on the largest side of the plane to be measured. used to determine the step (in millimeters) of the points distributed on the other side of the plane. used to offset the automatic edge path of the feature. used to set the maximum number of points to be distributed on the plane. used to set point measurement (probing) step.

Example :

Page 865

Preset automatic measurement using the CAD model This method is used to automatically measure a plane wile taking account of the possible probing surface. This is particularly useful for surfaces with holes.

Note: The fields that may be edited and the fields grayed out (unavailable) differ according to whether the Step or Density boxes are checked. The window is shown below:

Page 866

Number of points method

Density method

used to determine the step (in millimeters) of the points distributed on the largest side of the plane to be measured. used to determine the step (in millimeters) of the points distributed on the other side of the plane. used to offset the automatic edge path of the feature. 2

used to enter the number of points to be probed per cm on the plane. used to give the rotation value (in degrees) of the automatic measurement path. used to select the step method. used to select the density method.

Example : Measurement path with a 30° rotation and 3 mm offset. The plane has been defined by clicking the CAD model, the automatic measurement path therefore avoids the holes:

Page 867

Circular preset automatic measurement This method is used to automatically measure a plane by taking its possible probing surface into account, whether the surface is circular or not. The window is shown below:

Page 868

For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example. This is done via the following fields: and are used to adjust the circular path depending on the obstacles encountered. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example. and

used to set the internal and external diameters of

the measurement path. used to determine the number of circular paths. used to determine the number of points per path. used to set an offset value (in millimeters) on the X axis of the active alignment. used to set an offset value (in millimeters) on the Y axis of the active alignment. This checkbox is used to eliminate measurement points located in holes in the CAD model.

Page 869

Example:

Page 870

Measure Sphere

Page 871

Manual measurement

To measure a Sphere feature, select Sphere via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click the Feature bar in measurement mode

in

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Sphere features are:

Constraints This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Page 872

Automatic measurement

To measure a Sphere feature automatically, select Sphere via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

.

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Sphere features are described below.

Several methods of automatic measurement (probing strategies) are available:    

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Preset automatic measurement by meridian Preset automatic measurement by cone distances Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 873

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically. The window is shown below:

Click the points of the sphere to be measured on the CAD model:

Page 874

Preset automatic measurement by meridian

Page 875

used to determine the horizontal and the vertical angles of the measurement path. Useful when the probe is not located above the zenith of the sphere:

Example:

Preset automatic measurement by cone distances

Page 876

used to determine the number of circular paths. used to determine the number of points per path. the number of probing points is automatically entered in this field and cannot be modified.

used to determine the horizontal and the vertical angles of the measurement path. Useful when the probe is not located above the zenith of the sphere:

Page 877

Example:

Page 878

Measure Cylinder

Page 879

Manual measurement

To measure a Cylinder feature, select Cylinder via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click in the Feature Bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Cylinder features are:

Tangent Outside Material This option allows the diameter of the cylinder measured to be modified by taking the compensated point at the greatest distance from the axis for the inner material and the closest point for the outer material. For further details, see the Measure feature page.

Page 880

Constraints This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Approximate axis

If you select the AUTO option in the "Approx. Axis" field, then the order of probing is important, since this direction is used to calculate the direction of the cylinder :

If you use a feature as approximate axis (for instance, the plane perpendicular to the cylinder axis), then the order of probing is not important.

Page 881

Automatic measurement

To measure a Cylinder feature automatically, select Cylinder via the menu Features > Measure or click in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The measurement window is displayed. Click

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Cylinder features are described below.

Several methods of automatic measurement (probing strategies) are available:     

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Circular automatic measurement (Circle probing) Axial automatic measurement (Axis probing) Helicoidal automatic measurement (Helix probing) Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 882

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically. The window is shown below:

On the CAD model, left-click the points of the cylinder to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 883

Automatic circular measurement (Circle probing)

Page 884

This method allows a cylinder to be automatically measured by generating several circle measurement (circular probing) paths at different heights on the nominal cylinder. used to determine the number of circular paths. used to set the depth of probing at the start. used to set the depth of probing at the end. used to determine the number of points per path. the number of probing points is automatically entered in this field and cannot be modified. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example. This is done via the following fields: used to define the position of the first point to be probed on the feature. By default, the position of this point is set according to current probe position (to minimize movements). used to define the position of the last point to be probed.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the The default path offered to measure the cylinder does measurement path of the cylinder can be set to avoid not avoid the groove in the workpiece/part. the groove.

Example:

Page 885

Axial circular measurement (Axis probing)

Page 886

This method allows a cone to be automatically measured by generating several linear measurement (line probing) paths distributed along the envelope of the nominal cone. used to determine the number of axial paths. used to set the depth of probing at the start. used to set the depth of probing at the end. used to determine the number of points per path. the number of probing points is automatically entered in this field and cannot be modified. For axial paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example. This is done via the following fields: used to define the position of the first point to be probed on the feature. By default, the position of this point is set according to current probe position (to minimize movements). used to define the position of the last point to be probed. For more information, see the example.

Example:

Helicoidal automatic measurement (Helix probing)

Page 887

This method is used to automatically measure a feature by generating a measurement (probing) path according to the nominal feature or the previous measurement. The measurement/probing path is a helix along the cylinder. used to set the depth of probing at the start. used to set the depth of probing at the end. used to determine the number of probing points. determines the fillet step (thread pitch) of the helicoidal path or select a diameter from the drop-down list. The corresponding fillet step is then automatically entered in the previous field. to select the direction of the helicoidal path (left or right).

Example:

Page 888

Page 889

Measure Cone

Page 890

Manual measurement

To measure a Cone feature, select Cone via the menu Features > Measure or click bar in measurement mode

in the Feature

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Cone features are:

Constraints This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Page 891

Approximate axis

If you select the AUTO option in the "Approx. Axis" field, then the order of probing is important. The first 3 points must be in a plane perpendicular to the axis, and then the next 3 points must be in another plane perpendicular to the axis. The line going through the two centers is used to calculate the cone axis :

If you use a feature as approximate axis (for instance, the plane perpendicular to the cone axis), then the order of probing is not important.

Page 892

Automatic measurement

To measure a Cone feature automatically, select Cone via the menu Features > Measure or click the Feature bar in measurement mode

in

.

The measurement window is displayed, click

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Cone features are described below.

Several methods of automatic measurement (probing strategies) are available:    

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Circular automatic measurement (Circle probing) Axial automatic measurement (Axis probing) Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 893

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically. The window is shown below:

On the CAD model, left-click the points of the cone to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 894

Automatic circular measurement (Circle probing)

Page 895

This method allows a cone to be automatically measured by generating several circle measurement (circular probing) paths at different heights on the nominal cone. used to determine the number of circular paths. used to set the depth of probing at the start. used to set the depth of probing at the end. used to determine the number of points per path. the number of probing points is automatically entered in this field and cannot be modified. and are used to adjust the circular path depending on the obstacles encountered. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

The default path offered to measure the cone does not avoid the groove in the workpiece/part.

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the measurement path of the cone can be set to avoid the groove.

Example:

Page 896

Measure with one path A cone may be measured with a single path. To do this, constraints must be used. In the cone measurement window, click the Constraints button. The parameters to be constrained are:  

the dimension Dim1, equivalent to cone opening angle. the orientation Parallel to one of the proposed planes.

Click Accept to confirm. In the automatic measurement window, select the number of paths:

Page 897

Select a single path.

Note: When manually probing the cone in one path, simply probe the points along a circular path.

Example: Constrain the cone as above and measure it with one path:

Axial circular measurement (Axis probing)

Page 898

This method allows a cone to be automatically measured by generating several linear measurement (line probing) paths distributed along the envelope of the nominal cone. used to determine the number of axial paths. used to set the depth of probing at the start. used to set the depth of probing at the end. used to determine the number of points per path. the number of probing points is automatically entered in this field and cannot be modified. For axial paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example. This is done via the following fields: used to define the position of the first point to be probed on the feature. By default, the position of this point is set according to current probe position (to minimize movements). used to define the position of the last point to be probed.

Page 899

For more information, see the example.

Example:

Page 900

Measure Torus

Page 901

Manual measurement

To measure a Torus feature, select Torus via the menu Features > Measure or click bar in measurement mode

in the Feature

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Torus features are:

Constraints Used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Page 902

Probing pattern The 9 points must define three distinct circles on the torus :

Page 903

Automatic measurement

To measure a Torus feature automatically, select Torus via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

.

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Torus features are described below.

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically.

Page 904

The window is shown below:

On the CAD model, left-click the points of the torus to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 905

Page 906

Measure Rectangle

Page 907

Manual measurement

To measure a Rectangle feature, select Rectangle via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Rectangle features are:

Cyl. Probe Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Constraints

Page 908

This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Projection plane When a projection plane other than 1st Point is chosen, the first two points must be traced over the same length:

Page 909

Automatic measurement

To measure a Rectangle feature automatically, select Rectangle via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

.

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Rectangle features are described below.

Two methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:   

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Preset automatic measurement Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 910

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically. The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select projection of the probing points on the CAD model, surface, or edge. On the CAD model, left-click the points of the rectangle to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 911

Preset automatic measurement

used to enter or select the desired probing depth. used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is that required to calculate the feature.

Page 912

and are used to adjust the circular path depending on the obstacles encountered. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

The default path offered to measure the rectangle does not avoid the groove in the workpiece/part.

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the measurement path of the rectangle can be set to avoid the groove.

Checking this box allows automatic measurement of a projection plane before measuring the desired feature. A plane will be measured to the close surroundings of the feature and automatically used as projection feature.

Note: To measure a 2D feature, a projection plane must be used. This plane must be selected from the list of previously measured features. used to specify the number of measurement points for the projection plane. used to specify the offset (in millimeters) of the measurement points with respect to the edges of the feature to be measured. used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane, if required.

Example:

Page 913

Page 914

Measure Slot

Page 915

Manual measurement

To measure a Slot feature, select Slot via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click Feature bar in measurement mode

in the

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Slot features are:

Cyl. Probe Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Page 916

Constraints This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Projection plane When a projection plane other than 1st Point is chosen, the points must be probed as follows:

Page 917

Automatic measurement

To measure a Slot feature automatically, select Slot via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The measurement window is displayed. Click

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Slot features are described below.

Two methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:   

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Preset automatic measurement Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 918

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically. The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select projection of the probing points on the CAD model, surface, or edge. On the CAD model, left-click the points of the slot to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 919

Preset automatic measurement

Page 920

used to enter or select the desired probing depth. used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is that required to calculate the feature. and are used to adjust the circular path depending on the obstacles encountered. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the The default path offered to measure the slot does not measurement path of the slot can be set to avoid the avoid the groove in the workpiece/part. groove.

Checking this box allows automatic measurement of a projection plane before measuring the desired feature. A plane will be measured to the close surroundings of the feature and automatically used as projection feature.

Note: To measure a 2D feature, a projection plane must be used. This plane must be selected from the list of previously measured features. used to specify the number of measurement points for the projection plane. used to specify the offset (in millimeters) of the measurement points with respect to the edges of the feature to be measured.

Page 921

used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane, if required.

Example:

Page 922

Measure Hexagon

Page 923

Manual measurement

To measure a Hexagon feature, select Hexagon via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Hexagon features are:

Cyl. Probe Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Page 924

Constraints This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Projection plane When a projection plane other than 1st Point is chosen, the first two points must be traced over the same side:

Page 925

Automatic measurement

To measure a Hexagon feature automatically, select Hexagon via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

.

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Hexagon features are described below.

Two methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:   

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Preset automatic measurement Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 926

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically. The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select the probing points directly on the selected surface or edge. On the CAD model, left-click the points of the hexagon to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 927

Preset automatic measurement

Page 928

used to enter or select the desired probing depth. used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is that required to calculate the feature. and are used to adjust the circular path depending on the obstacles encountered. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the The default path offered to measure the hexagon does measurement path of the hexagon can be set to avoid not avoid the groove in the workpiece/part. the groove.

Checking this box allows automatic measurement of a projection plane before measuring the desired feature. A plane will be measured to the close surroundings of the feature and automatically used as projection feature. used to specify the number of measurement points for the projection plane. used to specify the offset (in millimeters) of the measurement points with respect to the edges of the feature to be measured. used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane, if required.

Page 929

Note: To measure a 2D feature, a projection plane must be used. This plane must be selected from the list of previously measured features.

Example:

Page 930

Measure Ellipse

Page 931

Manual measurement

To measure an Ellipse feature, select Ellipse via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click the Feature bar in measurement mode

in

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Ellipse features are:

Cyl. Probe Check this box if the feature is to be measured with a cylindrical probe/probe shaft. First calibrate the cylindrical probe.

Page 932

Constraints This button is used to apply constraints to the feature, before measurement or just before validating measurement, by selecting the desired criteria. For more information, see the Constraints page.

Projection plane When a projection plane other than 1st Point is chosen, the first two points must be probed on the great axis and the two following points on the small axis:

Page 933

Automatic measurement

To measure an Ellipse feature automatically, select Ellipse via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

The measurement window is displayed. Click

.

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Ellipse features are described below.

Three methods of automatic measurement (two probing strategies) are available:   

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Preset automatic measurement Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 934

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model This method is only available if a CAD file is open. It allows a feature to be measured automatically by selecting each probing point manually. The path is generated automatically. The window is shown below:

If an Edge projection is selected, probing depth must be specified in this field.

Select the probing points directly on the selected surface or edge. On the CAD model, left-click the points of the ellipse to be measured while holding the

key down:

Page 935

Preset automatic measurement

Page 936

used to enter or select the desired probing depth. used to enter or select the number of points to be probed. The minimum value is that required to calculate the feature. and are used to adjust the circular path depending on the obstacles encountered. For circular paths, it may be necessary to measure a feature in a specific area, to avoid a hole for example.

Example: Starting Angle - Total Angle

The default path offered to measure the ellipse does not avoid the groove in the workpiece/part.

By adjusting the total and starting angles, the measurement path of the ellipse can be set to avoid the groove.

Checking this box allows automatic measurement of a projection plane before measuring the desired feature. A plane will be measured to the close surroundings of the feature and automatically used as projection feature. used to specify the number of measurement points for the projection plane. used to specify the offset (in millimeters) of the measurement points with respect to the edges of the feature to be measured. used to apply a material thickness to the projection plane, if required.

Note: To measure a 2D feature, a projection plane must be used. This plane must be selected from the

Page 937

list of previously measured features.

Example:

Page 938

Measure Surface Point

Page 939

Overview

To measure surface points in the software, the following conditions must be met: 

First, a CAD file (model) must be open. The CAD model is the nominal (mathematical) representation of the workpiece/part to be checked. It allows the nominal coordinates for a measurement point to be found automatically.



Secondly, there must be an active probe.



Lastly, the CAD file/model opened must be "matched" with the workpiece/part to be checked. To do this, you must create an alignment for the workpiece, then associate it to the CAD alignment.

Page 940

Types of Surface Points

Surface points are features linked with the CAD surface of a CAD model, often used to determine the defects of any types of workpieces. Surface point type may be selected from the following drop-down list in the surface point definition and measurement windows:

The software automatically offers different surface point names according to the type of projection selected: Type of projection

Name

On a surface On an edge with ball On an edge with shaft On a flush edge On a gap On a flange On a curve On a 3D curve on a 3D curve without ball compensation On a round edge (with ball and with shaft) No Trim Scribe line

SRF BRD BRT AFF JEU FLR CRB CRB CRB SRT SSR SCL

Surface Surface type surface points are used to quantify a defect normal to the surface of the part.

Edge Edge type surface points are used to quantify a defect, not normal to the surface, as is the case for Surface type surface points, but at a tangent to the surface.

Flush This mode is identical to Surface type surface point measurement. The name Flush is used as, generally, measurement is performed on a workpiece other than that of the CAD model. This may be, for example, measurement of a tool whereas only the CAD model of the workpiece produced by the tool is available. This is performed in such manner as to obtain the value corresponding to the flushness between the workpiece and tool.

Gap Gap type surface point measurement is similar to an Edge type surface point measurement, in which probing direction and, consequently, ball radius compensation, is performed in the other direction.

Page 941

Flange Flange measurements are used for highly accurate measurement of a point at the edge of a piece of sheet metal that is not folded at right angles, the angle between the edge of the metal sheet and the rest of the workpiece being known (workpieces before swaging).

Curve Curve type surface points have the same function as Edge type surface points. The difference being that the measured points are projected onto a curve type CAD entity and not a surface type CAD entity. 3D Curve type surface points are used, among other things, to measure pipes. This is because these points allow (via material thickness) pipe pitch line (neutral axis) to be checked. It is also possible to use 3D curve without ball compensation type surface points which are identical to the 3D curve but without taking into account the radius of the ball being used when measuring these points.

Round Edge Round Edge measurements are used for highly accurate measurement of a point on the edge of a piece of sheet metal that has been swaged.

No Trim No Trim type surface points allow, in certain specific cases, workpieces presenting slight variations in respect to hollow areas to be checked using the same CAD model.

Scribe line Scribe line type surface points are used to give a lateral defect according to a dimension line (CAD curve).

Page 942

Projection and Search Distance

Once the measurement has been made, the point may be projected onto different CAD entities (Surface or Curve) using different types of projection. This choice is made in the surface feature measurement window:

Different types of projection are available from the drop-down list:      

Standard (Surface, Edge or Curve) Flush Gap Flange Round Edge Scribe line

In addition, the Edge and Round Edge projection modes may be used with a cylindrical probe (shaft) measurement.

Search Distance From a measurement point (ball center coordinate), the software searches for a theoretical (nominal) point on the nearest surface(s) using a projection mode. If there are several solutions, the theoretical point offered by default will be the point for which the deviation vector is the closest to the probing point approach vector.

Note: By default, the search distance is calculated from probe ball radius. Thus, if different ball diameters are used, this does not affect the search distance. Search distance calculation mode may be modified via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters, User tab. When the parameter iSearchDistanceMode is set to 1, the search distance is calculated from probe ball center. When set to 2, the search distance is calculated from probe ball radius as shown in the following diagram:

Page 943

P1: Measured (actual) workpiece P2: Nominal workpiece D1: Search distance calculated from ball center D2 : Search distance calculated from ball radius

Any point outside the search area is excluded and, if no there is theoretical point in this area, the following message is displayed:

The reasons for which deviation cannot be calculated may be:   

Search distance is too small. The current alignment in which the software gives the points does not match workpiece CAD alignment (the first step in measurement is to create this current alignment). Workpiece CAD alignment does not correspond to the workpiece (right-hand workpiece with left-hand workpiece CAD alignment for example).

For further information, see Set up default parameters.

Page 944

Thickness and Offset

Thickness The thickness of a surface point may be specified at definition, measurement or modification. To know whether or not use of a material thickness is required, you need to know the position of the material with respect to the CAD model and with respect to the probing direction of the surface points. There are three possible cases:

Case 1: Thickness must be a positive value as the workpiece is encountered before the CAD model.

Case 2: No thickness as the workpiece is encountered at the same time as the CAD model.

Case 3: Thickness must be a negative value as the CAD model is encountered before the workpiece.

Offset

Page 945

An offset may be applied to an Edge type surface point. This offset represents a surplus or lack of material at the edge of the surface and not according to the CAD surface normal, as is the case for thickness:

In addition, a thickness may be applied to the edge point reference feature (if automatic edge point measurement mode is used), when the the reference feature is measured during this automatic measurement. This thickness may be entered when the edge point is defined or in the edge point measurement window before automatic measurement is enabled.

Warning: This thickness is not applied for edge point calculation. It allows the measurement path of the edge point(s) to be generated according to the reference feature used:

Page 946

Using Reference Features

For Edge, Gap, Flange, Curve or Round Edge surface points, an additional field in the definition window is used to specify the reference feature:

. This reference feature allows any position/orientation error of the area probed to be taken into account.

Example: Measuring an edge point 

Without reference feature:

If no reference is used, i.e. if AUTO is selected from the drop-down list, the measured pont is projected perpendicular to the CAD surface.



With reference feature (measured plane):

However, if a reference feature is used (here, the plane), the measured point will first be projected onto the

Page 947

previously measured plane, then onto the CAD surface. This allows the position error of the measured workpiece to be taken into account.

Page 948

Lock Nominal Surface Points

When a surface point is defined (nominal value) and then measured (actual value), its nominal position is modified. This is because Mthe software automatically re-projects (re-evaluates) the measured point on the most appropriate projection surface. See Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points If you do not want surface point nominal position to be automatically modified, you must set the Lock Surface Point property accordingly. This property is accessed from the Feature Database, by clicking after selecting a surface point. The following window is displayed:

If this box is checked, the nominal coordinates of the surface point are locked and will not change during measurement. ND will be calculated using the normal of the nominal point:

Page 949

In program: This property may be selected in a program, in a line defining a surface point.

If the Lock Surface Point property is not used, the measured surface point will be re-projected on the CAD model and its nominal value thus modified. See the page Surface Point Results, ND, and Signs.

Page 950

Surface Point Results, ND, and Signs

Surface Point Results Surface point measurement results are displayed in the Results window:

The cartesian values and Normal Deviation (ND) of the point, in relation to the projection surface, are shown in this window. Additional information such as the normal vector of the projected point and name of the projection surface is also displayed. The thickness used is also shown for Surface type surface points or equivalent (No Trim and Flush type points). If the surface points are Edge type surface points or equivalent (edge/x, y or z, curve, curve/x, y or z), the offset used is shown. This button is used to re-project/re-evaluate the selected surface point according to the same projection criteria as the Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points function.

Normal Deviation (ND) calculation The vector representing the normal deviation is composed of the vectors representing the form faults in each alignment axis, as shown below:

The software thus calculates ND deviation as follows:

After a previously defined surface point has been measured, its nominal coordinates are modified. The

Page 951

measured surface point is re-projected on the CAD model, thus modifying its nominal values, as shown in the following diagram:

See also Lock Surface Points.

Normal Deviation (ND) Sign Surface point result sign depends on the rule selected via the menu Features, Surface Point Sign Rule. The following window is displayed:

See also:

Material Position Symbols and Invert Deviation.

Page 952

Measure Surface Type Surface Point

To measure a Surface Point feature, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for measurement of Surface type surface points are:

Type Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Surface in this example.

Thickness

Page 953

Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.

Example: Without thickness

Example: With thickness

From the probing point (ball center point), the software finds the point with the best fit to the CAD model by projection, and its associated normal: this is the nominal point. The measured point is obtained by performing a translation according to the previous normal, from ball center, by a value equal to ball radius (possibly with thickness added).

Page 954

Search Distance used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point. The search distance may be permanently modified in the Default Settings window.

Scanning Used to measure surface points in scanning (continuous) mode. This is only possible with a compatible probe (SP600, SP25, SP80).

Surface Point Probing Assistance This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link connecting this point to the probe is displayed in the 3D View and point name is displayed in the measurement window. This function may only be used in manual measurement mode and not in program mode.

Page 955

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model

Click this button in the Surface Point measurement window.

Then click this button to select the "measurement by clicks with no previous definition" probing strategy:

Note: The arrows

are used to access other automatic measurement methods.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page.

This method is used to automatically measure one or more surface points by manually selecting each probing point. The path is generated automatically.

Page 956

Click the surface point to be measured on the CAD model. By holding the points may be selected during the same measuring phase:

key down, several surface

Page 957

Automatic measurement using the grid method

Click this button in the Surface Point or Point measurement window.

Then click this button to select the "grid" probing strategy.

Note: The arrows

are used to access other automatic measurement methods.

Different options are available depending on the tab selected:

First tab

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page.

Page 958

Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates for the origin of the grid.

Enter the I, J, K values giving grid normal vector orientation.

Enter the values corresponding to grid length in each axis.

Used to set a number of points or a step on each axis by checking (selecting) the corresponding box. The enter the desired number of points or desired step in the adjacent field. This button is used to reverse the direction of axes 1 and 2. The grid may be positioned by clicking the CAD model. To do this: - Select an initial point on the CAD model to set the origin of the grid. - Select a second point on the CAD model to set the length of the grid. - Select a third point on the CAD model to define the limit of the rectangular area.

Page 959

Click this button to validate the grid parameters entered in this tab. The corresponding measurement/probing paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be calculated).

Second tab

Enter the offset value to be applied to the grid relative to the measured surface. This button is used to reverse the direction of the measurement normals. Check this box to use a clearance plane. Two via points (located in the grid plane) are inserted between each pair of probing points This may be useful for complex warped surfaces as these paths allow collisions with the workpiece to be avoided.

Page 960

With Clearance Plane

Without Clearance Plane

Check this box for a section to be created with the measured points.

Checking this box means that probed points near edges will not be included in the measurement. The filtering is performed according to ball radius.

Page 961

With Remove points near edges

Without Remove points near edges

Click this button to validate the grid parameters entered in this tab. The corresponding measurement/probing paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be calculated).

Third tab

Page 962

This tab is used to refine the orientation of the grid axes and the intersection axis (projection on the surface).

Without axis modification

Page 963

With axis modification

Click this button to validate the grid parameters entered in this tab. The corresponding measurement/probing paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be calculated).

Page 964

Automatic measurement using the U V strategy

Click this button in the Surface Point or Point measurement window.

Then click this button to select the "UV" probing strategy. This strategy uses the U and V vectors of the CAD surfaces. These vectors are specific to the surfaces and cannot be modified.

Note: The arrows

are used to access other automatic measurement methods.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page.

Select the surface on which the surface points are to be measured by clicking the CAD model. Several surfaces may be selected by clicking them while holding the

key down.

Page 965

Enter the values for the start and end of the area to be measured according to the U and V vectors of the surface(s). This value is shown as a percentage of the lengths of the total area selected.

End U = 0.55

End U = 0.95

Enter the number of points to be used for measurement for each vector.

Select the main direction of measurement by checking (selecting) the desired box.

Page 966

U is the main axis

V is the main axis

This button is used to select the direction of the measurement normals.

Check this box to use a clearance plane. This may be particularly useful for complex warped surfaces. Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates and the I, J, and K values specifying its position and orientation in the relevant fields.

Check this box for a section to be created with the measured points.

Click this button to validate the settings entered. The corresponding measurement/probing paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be calculated).

Page 967

Automatic measurement using the perimeter method

Click this button in the Surface Point or Point measurement window:

Then click this button to select the "Perimeter" probing strategy. This measurement method (probing strategy) allows surface-type surface points to be measured according to the perimeter of the selected surfaces.

Note: The arrows

are used to access other automatic measurement methods.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page.

Check (select) this box to specify the coordinates of the start point of the path in the corresponding fields. The desired point may also be clicked on the CAD model.

Page 968

Check (select) this box to specify the coordinates of the end point of the path in the corresponding fields. The desired point may also be clicked on the CAD model.

Note: A path using several CAD surfaces may be generated. To do this, select the surfaces to be used by clicking them while holding the

key down.

Click this button to select the direction of the measurement path. The direction of the red start point

Page 969

arrow indicating the direction of the measurement path will then be reversed.

Used to set a number of points or a step by checking (selecting) the corresponding box. The enter the desired number of points or desired step in the adjacent field. Enter the desired offset. This offset corresponds to the distance between the edge of the surface and the probing points.

With a 5 mm offset

With a 1 mm offset

This button is used to select the direction of the measurement path.

Page 970

This button is used to select the direction of the measurement normals. Check this box to use a clearance plane. This may be particularly useful for complex warped surfaces. Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates and the I, J, and K values specifying its position and orientation in the relevant fields.

Check this box for a section to be created with the measured points. Click this button to validate the settings entered. The corresponding measurement/probing paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be calculated).

Page 971

Automatic measurement by Step / Number of points

Click this button in the Surface Point measurement window.

Then click this button to select Step probing strategy, or strategy.

Note: The arrows

to select Number of points probing

are used to access other automatic measurement methods.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page.

Select the number of probing points from the drop-down list. Four measurement methods are available, as for Automatic measurement by clikcing on the CAD model to measure edge type surface points.

Page 972

Enter measurement (probing) step value in this field. or

enter the number of points in this field.

Check (select) this box to specify the coordinates of the start point of the path. Click the desired point on the CAD model.

Check (select) this box to specify the coordinates of the end point of the path. Click the desired point on the CAD model.

The coordinates of the point clicked are shown in these fields.

Note: A path using several CAD surfaces may be generated. To do this, select the surfaces to be used

Page 973

by clicking them while holding the

key down.

Click this button to select the direction of the measurement path. The direction of the red arrow indicating the direction of the measurement path will then be reversed. This button reverses the start point with the end point. Check this box for a section to be created with the measured points. This button is used to select the direction of the measurement normals. used to validate the parameters used and display the measurement paths. This may require some processing time.

used to reset the window to its initial state.

Page 974

Measure No Trim Type Surface Point

To measure a No Trim type surface point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for measurement of No Trim type surface points are:

Type Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, No Trim in this example. This function allows, in certain specific cases, workpieces (parts) with slightly different hollow areas to be checked using the same CAD model.

Page 975

This type of surface point used to measure a surface-type surface point over a hollow area (groove, hole, cone) before this hollow area is machined in order to check the position of certain points of a workpiece currently being manufactured. Use of No Trim type surface points allows, according to the surface, the inner boundaries to be ignored. The surface points are then projected on the surface in question, wherever the points are taken on this surface.

Example: Measuring surface points

In the case of the open cone, the surface point is projected onto the inner envelope of the cone. It is not possible to measure a surface point located over the hole and project it on the upper surface. To measure such a point, it is not necessary to recreate a CAD model. Simply select the No Trim option for surface point measurement.

Example: No Trim surface point measurement

By enabling No Trim surface point measurement mode, it is now possible to measure a point located over a hollow area and project it on the upper face.

Page 976

Thickness Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.

Surface Point Probing Assistance This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement window.

Page 977

Measure Flush Type Surface Point

To measure a Flush type surface point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for measurement of Flush type surface points are:

Type Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Flush in this example. This mode is identical to Surface-type surface point measurement. Generally, the term "flush" is used when measurement is performed on a workpiece (part) other than the CAD model. This may be, for example, measurement of a tool whereas only the CAD model of the workpiece produced by the tool is available. The

Page 978

purpose of this measurement is to obtain the value corresponding to the flushness between the workpiece and tool.

Thickness Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.

Example: Without thickness

Example: With thickness

Surface Point Probing Assistance

Page 979

This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement window.

Page 980

Measure Edge Type Surface Point

To measure an Edge point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used to measure Edge Point features are:

Type Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Edge in this example.

Page 981

Example: Measuring the edge of a sheet metal panel

From the probing point (ball center point), the software finds the nearest surface edge point by projection: this is the nominal point. The "ball center" point is transferred to the defined (nominal) plane by the nominal point and the surface normal to the nominal point. The measured (actual) point is simply offset in the direction of the nominal point by the ball radius value (an offset may be included if required).

Example: Cut panel edge measurement (Edge /Z) The workpiece (part) is assumed to be cut at a 90° angle when the measurement point is transferred to the plane defined by the nominal point and the surface normal to the nominal point. If this is not the case, Edge/X, Edge/Y, or Edge/Z projection mode must be used.. X /Y /Z edge projections are used for highly accurate measurement of a point on the edge of a sheet metal panel that is not cut at a 90° angle. This projection mode is used when the panel is cut in the direction of one of the alignment axes.

Thickness Check this box to add a thickness to be applied to the reference feature of the Edge point.

Search Distance

Page 982

used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point. The search distance may be permanently modified in the Default Settings window.

Offset An Offset may be applied to an Edge type surface point by entering the desired offset value in this field.

Scanning Used to measure Edge points in scanning (continuous) mode. This is only possible with a compatible probe (SP600, SP25, SP80).

Surface Point Probing Assistance This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement window.

Edge Probing Assistance

Edge Probing Assistance provides probing assistance with measurement of 2D features (lines, circles, etc.) and edge type surface points.

Note: This function is only available if the feature selected for Edge Probing Assistance is not in Auto mode. For more information, see Measure Feature.

Page 983

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model

Click this button in the Surface Point measurement window.

Then click this button to select the "Measurement by clicking the CAD model" probing strategy, that may be used without prior definition. This method is used to automatically measure one or more edge type surface points by manually selecting each probing point. The path is generated automatically.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page.

Click the edge type surface point to be measured on the CAD model. By holding the several points may be selected during the same measuring phase:

key down,

Page 984

Select the number of probing points from the drop-down list. Four measurement methods/probing strategies are available according to the total number of points selected:

1 point If 1 point is selected, the measurement is performed without measuring the reference feature.

2 points If 2 points are selected, a surface point of the type "surface probed on the projection surface of the edge type surface point" is used as reference feature for measurement. This allows automatic compensation of height, relative measurement, for measurement of the edge type surface point:

Page 985

The name of the surface point used as reference feature is shown in this field. When measurement has been performed, the first point probed is named SRF_EDG1 and is shown in the feature database in the same way as EDG1.

3 points If 3 points are selected, a line probed on the projection surface of the edge type surface point is used as reference feature for measurement. This allows automatic compensation of height and orientation in one axis, relative measurement, for measurement of the edge type surface point:

The name of the line used as reference feature is shown in this field. Once measurement has been performed, the line used as reference for measurement of the edge type surface point is named LIN_EDG1 and is shown in the feature database in the same way as EDG1. Similarly,

Page 986

the projection plane for LIN_EDG1, passing through the two surface type surface points that define the normal to the CAD surface on which they are defined, is named PLN_LIN_EDG1.

4 points If 4 points are selected, a plane probed on the projection surface of the edge type surface point is used as reference feature. This allows automatic compensation of height and orientation in two axes, relative measurement, for measurement of the edge type surface point:

The name of the plane used as reference feature is shown in this field. When measurement has been performed, the plane probed is named PLN_EDG1 and is shown in the feature database in the same way as EDG1.

For measurement with 2, 3 and 4 points, when several edge type surface points are probed in the same measuring phase, the measurement frequency of the reference feature may be varied via this field.

Page 987

The reference feature is measured every 4 points

The reference feature is measured every 2 points

used to apply an offset between the measurements points of the reference feature and also with respect to the edge of the CAD surface.

Page 988

With a 2 mm offset

With a 4 mm offset

used to modify probing depth:

Page 989

4 mm depth

8 mm depth

used to delete the last point clicked on the CAD model.

Page 990

Automatic measurement by Step / Number of points

Click this button in the Surface Point measurement window.

Then click this button to select Step probing strategy, or strategy.

to select Number of points probing

Note: If an edge point was defined, only the measurement by number of surface points probing stragety is available:

Page 991

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page.

Select the number of probing points from the drop-down list. Four measurement methods (probing strategies) are available, as for Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model.

Enter measurement (probing) step value in this field. or

enter the number of points in this field.

Check (select) this box to specify the coordinates of the start point of the path. Click the desired point on the CAD model.

Page 992

Check (select) this box to specify the coordinates of the end point of the path. Click the desired point on the CAD model.

Note: A path using several CAD surfaces may be generated. To do this, select the surfaces to be used by clicking them while holding the

key down.

Click this button to select the direction of the measurement path. The direction of the red arrow indicating the direction of the measurement path will then be reversed. This button is used to select the direction of the measurement normals. used to validate the parameters used and display the measurement paths. This may require some processing time.

Page 993

used to reset the window to its initial state.

Page 994

Measure Gap Type Surface Point

To measure a Gap type surface point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for measurement of Gap type surface points are:

Type Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Gap in this example. Gap measurement is an edge type measurement, in which ball radius compensation is performed in the opposite direction.

Page 995

Nominal Gap A gap value may be entered for Gap type surface points. In this case, the nominal gap represents the nominal value of the ND and is never zero:

Surface Point Probing Assistance This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement window.

Edge Probing Assistance

Edge Probing Assistance provides probing assistance with measurement of 2D features (lines, circles, etc.) and Flange type surface points.

Note: This function is only available if the feature selected for Edge Probing Assistance is not in Auto mode. For more information, see Measure Feature.

Page 996

Measure Flange Type Surface Point

To measure a Flange type surface point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for measurement of Flange type surface points are:

Type Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Flange in this example. Flange measurements are used for highly accurate measurement of a point on the edge of a piece of sheet metal that is not folded at right angles, the angle between the edge of the metal sheet and the rest of the workpiece being known (workpieces before swaging).

Page 997

Thickness Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.

Example: Without thickness

Example: With thickness

The role of the reference feature in measurement of a Flange type surface point

The reference feature plays a major role in the calculation, it is used to quantify the height deviation (i.e. a

Page 998

deviation normal to the surface). For this, a plane or surface-type surface point must be selected in the Ref field:

DO NOT USE AN EDGE-TYPE surface point as the orientation of this type of point does not allow height deviation to be characterized: the edge-type surface point characterizes tangent deviation. The reference feature must be a plane or surface-type surface point feature. If the reference feature is a surface point, height deviation can be accounted for. However, if the reference feature is a plane, it allows both the height deviation and inclination deviation of the workpiece (part) relative to the CAD model to be accounted for. If there is no reference feature, height deviation is not accounted for and the ND calculation will be distorted,

whereas, if a reference feature is used, the ND is calculated correctly:

Page 999

If a surface-type surface point is used as reference feature, it may be assigned a thickness as follows: 

Without thickness;



With thickness;

Flange Angle An angle value may be entered for Flange type surface points.

Surface Point Probing Assistance This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement window.

Edge Probing Assistance

Page 1000

Edge Probing Assistance provides probing assistance with measurement of 2D features (lines, circles, etc.) and Flange type surface points.

Note: This function is only available if the feature selected for Edge Probing Assistance is not in Auto mode. For more information, see Measure Feature.

Page 1001

Automatic measurement by number of points

Click this button in the Surface Point measurement window. Automatic measurement is only available if the Flange type surface point has already been defined.

Then click this button to select the measurement by number of surface points probing strategy:

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page.

Select the number of probing points from the drop-down list. Four measurement methods (probing strategies) are available, as for Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model. used to apply an offset between the measurements points of the reference feature and also with respect to the edge of the CAD surface.

Page 1002

used to modify probing depth.

Page 1003

Measure Curve

To measure a Curve or 3D Curve feature, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature Bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for measurement of Curve or 3D Curve type surface points are:

Type Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Curve in this example. Curve type surface points have the same function as Edge type surface points. The difference being that the measured points are projected onto a curve type CAD entity and not a surface type CAD entity.

Page 1004

3D Curve type surface points are used, among other things, to measure pipes. This is because these points allow (via material thickness) pipe pitch line (neutral axis) to be checked. 3D Curve without ball compensation type surface points are identical to 3D Curve type surface points except that ball radius is not used when calculating the result. The last-named is therefore expressed relative to the ball center.

Thickness Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.

Search Distance used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point. The search distance may be permanently modified in the Default Settings window.

Offset An Offset may be applied to an Edge type surface point by entering the desired offset value in this field.

Surface Point Probing Assistance This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement window.

Edge Probing Assistance

Edge Probing Assistance provides probing assistance with measurement of 2D features (lines, circles, etc.) and Flange type surface points.

Note: This function is only available if the feature selected for Edge Probing Assistance is not in Auto mode. For more information, see Measure Feature.

Page 1005

Automatic measurement by number of points

Click this button in the Surface Point measurement window. Automatic measurement is only available if the Curve or 3D Curve type surface point has already been defined.

Then click this button to select the measurement by number of surface points probing strategy:

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page.

Select the number of probing points from the drop-down list. Four measurement methods (probing strategies) are available, as for Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model. used to apply an offset between the measurements points of the reference feature and also with respect to the edge of the CAD surface.

Page 1006

used to modify probing depth.

Page 1007

Measure Round Edge Type Surface Point

To measure a Round Edge type surface point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click

in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used to measure Round Edge features are:

Type Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Round Edge in this example.

Round Edge measurements are used for highly accurate measurement of a point on the edge of a piece of

Page 1008

sheet metal that has been swaged.

Search Distance used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point. The search distance may be permanently modified in the Default Settings window.

Surface Point Probing Assistance This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement window.

Round edge radius (Radius) Enter the nominal round edge radius value in this field.

Example: With a ball probe

Example: With a cylindrical probe

Page 1009

The role of the reference feature in measurement of a Round Edge type surface point The reference feature plays a major role in the calculation, it is used to quantify the height deviation (i.e. a deviation normal to the surface). For this, a plane or surface-type surface point must be selected in the Ref field:

DO NOT USE AN EDGE-TYPE surface point as the orientation of this type of point does not allow height deviation to be characterized: the edge-type surface point characterizes tangent deviation. The reference feature must be a plane or surface-type surface point feature. If the reference feature is a surface point, height deviation can be accounted for. However, if the reference feature is a plane, it allows both the height deviation and inclination deviation of the workpiece (part) relative to the CAD model to be accounted for. If the reference feature is a surface point, it cannot be used if it has a thickness. This is because the measured point is offset by the thickness and thus does not allow the correct height deviation to be entered.

The reference feature may be: - A plane - A surface point

Page 1010

The reference feature may be: - A plane - A surface point WITH NO thickness: For operation in standard mode* - A surface point WITH a thickness: For operation in a specific mode**

* Standard mode: thickness is applied to the measured value (default operation). In the USER.INI file: [XLIB] bApplyThicknessToNominal=0 ** Specific mode: thickness is applied to the nominal value. In the USER.INI file: [XLIB] bApplyThicknessToNominal =1

Page 1011

Measure Scribe line Type Surface Point

To measure a Scribe line point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click in the Feature bar in measurement mode

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for measurement of Scribe line type surface points are:

Type Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Scribe line in this example. Measuring a surface point in Scribe line mode consists in checking a defect equivalent to the defect checked by a surface point in edge mode (but there is no real edge). However, probing direction is the same as that of a surface type surface point.

Page 1012

Example:

A scribe line point is calculated by: - probing a point in the groove of a workpiece/part, - searching for the curve closest to ball center, - searching for the surface the closest to the curve, - projecting ball center on the surface found, - calculating the nominal deviation (ND) between the center ball point and the curve.

Search Distance used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point. The search distance may be permanently modified in the Default Settings window.

Surface Point Probing Assistance This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position, without following the order in which the surface points were defined. When enabled (button depressed), a red link is displayed in the 3D View connecting this point to the probe and point name is displayed in the measurement window. This function may only be used in manual measurement mode and not in program mode.

Page 1013

Measure Section

To measure a Section feature, select Section via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click the Feature bar in measurement mode

in

.

The following window is displayed:

With CAD model

Without CAD model

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The fields specific to Section measurement mode are:

Name This field is used to assign a name to the surface points belonging to the section to be created. An incremental default name is offered according to the type of surface point selected in the following field.

Probing Assistance

Page 1014

Click this button to enable the function and enter the authorized width of the probing band. The button is depressed when the function is enabled. The assistance is presented in two forms, that may be complementary:  

Visual assistance: probe color changes: green when the probe is in the probing area, red when the probe is outside the probing area. For more information details, see Measure Feature. Audio assistance: the tone changes as the probe moves: a low-pitched (bass) sound is emitted when the probe is in the probing area, a high-pitched (sharp) sound when the probe is outside the probing area. Notes:





For audio assistance (probing sound) to be enabled, the Enable Sound Effects function must have been previously selected via the Preferences menu and Sound probing assistant enabled in the menu 3D View > Manual Probing Assistance. This function is not available for measurement of a section that has not been defined.

The points must be probed in the probing band defined in the assistance:

The section passes through all the calculated surface points. The probing operations must be as regular as possible. In this case, it is advisable to probe the points in logical order so that the section remains readable.

Page 1015

Section measurement with a CAD model Select the type of point to be used to measure the section from the drop-down list. Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window. used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point. The search distance may be permanently modified in the Default Settings window.

Section measurement without a CAD model Every three probing operations, the software calculates the barycenter, compensated and corrected using the plane of the three probing operations, and changes this into a geometrical point:

After the first three probing operations have been performed, the software calculates a point for each each additional probing operation performed (using the last two probing operations for the previous mini-plane). The points are then calculated as follows:

Page 1016

The section passes through all the calculated points. In this case, it is not advisable to measure parts with major surface variations. The probing operations must be as regular as possible.

Page 1017

Automatic measurement of a section with a CAD

To measure a Section feature, select Section via the menu Features > Measure Feature or click the Feature bar in measurement mode

in

.

The measurement window is displayed. Click

.

The common fields to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Section features are described below.

Several automatic measurement (probing) strategies are available:    

Automatic measurement by number of points Automatic measurement by steps (Step probing) Automatic measurement by chordal error Customizing automatic measurement.

Page 1018

The following fields are common to all three measurement strategies:

Offsets used to enter an offset at each angular point: between the start of the nominal section and the first (start) probing point on the section. between the first and last points of each intermediate (middle) section part. between the end of the nominal section and the last (end) point on the section.

Automatic measurement by number of points

Page 1019

Enter the desired number of probing points (for example, 11 points):

This strategy is linked with the step strategy. This is due to the fact that, for a curve of given length, the number of points depends on the step and vice versa.

Automatic measurement by steps

Page 1020

Enter constant step value between probing points (for example, 5.1mm between each point):

If step value is null, the points that were used to define the section are used for measurement. This strategy is linked with the number of points strategy. This is due to the fact that, for a curve of given length, the step depends on the number of points and vice versa.

Automatic measurement by chordal error

Page 1021

This strategy allows the number of points probed on the parts of the workpiece with a strong curvature to be increased: the greater the curvature, the greater the number of points that will be probed in this area. Enter the chordal error value from which the number of probing points must be increased. The chordal error is the deviation between the last probing point and the line passing through the previous two probing points. If this calculated deviation is lower than the chordal error value entered in this field, scanning step is increased. If, on the contrary, this deviation is higher then the value entered, scanning step is decreased. Chordal error is greater than the probed deviation: search step is increased:

Calculated deviation = 0.08 mm

Page 1022

Chordal error is less than the probed deviation: search step is reduced:

Calculated deviation = 0.08 mm

Enter the maximum step value between two measurement points. The smaller the chordal error, the greater the number of points in non-linear areas. For a given chordal error, the number of points increases when the section is of curved shape.

Example: Chordal error = 0.25 mm

Example: Chordal error = 0.1 mm

Page 1023

Note: Automatic measurement of a previously measured section. The window will be displayed as shown below for automatic measurement of a previously measured section:

Only the CNC distances and direction of the probing normal (sign) can be modified to make the new measurement. Check this box to reverse the probing normal.

Page 1024

Measure Surface

Page 1025

Manual measurement

To measure a Surface feature, select Surface in the Features > Measure Feature menu.

Note: To access the measurement window, the Surface feature must have been defined beforehand. The following window is displayed:

The fields common to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The specific fields used for manual measurement of Surface features are: If this field is selected, no additional point is created when the surface is measured. When this option is selected, the Surface feature is evaluated from the surface point measurement. When this option is selected, the Surface feature is evaluated from the geometric point measurement. If this box is checked, the nominal coordinates of the surface point are locked and will not change during measurement. For more information, see the Lock Surface Point page. Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface. If the surface to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify

Page 1026

thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window. All surface points follow the behavior described in the following examples:

Example: Without thickness

Example: With thickness

From the probing point (ball center point), the software finds the point with the best fit to the CAD model by projection, and its associated normal: this is the nominal point. The measured point is obtained by performing a translation according to the previous normal, from ball center, by a value equal to ball radius (possibly with thickness added).

Page 1027

If this method is selected, the measurement is performed without probing point positioning constraint. Simply probe freely the points on the surface(s) to be measured. If this method is selected, the points to be manually measured are automatically distributed. This distribution is generated via automatic measurement paths. When this box is checked, click the automatic measurement button and select the desired trajectories generation mode:  

CAD click method UV method

When the trajectories are generated, it is possible to probe the points. This function is used to measure the surface point nearest to the current probe position. When this button is enabled, the numbers assigned to the probing points are maintained in the order of the trajectory, whatever the measurement order of the points.

If this method is selected, the measurement is performed in automatic mode. must be clicked to select the measurement method. When the surface has been measured, the extreme points are displayed in the 3D View. They are represented by two lines having the direction of the measured points and a length proportional to their form fault.

Page 1028

Automatic measurement

To measure a Surface feature automatically, select Surface in the Features > Measure menu.

The measurement window is displayed. Click

, then

.

The fields common to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page. The specific fields used for automatic measurement of Surface features are described below.

Several automatic measurement (probing) strategies are available:   

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model Automatic measurement using the UV method Customizing automatic measurement.

Automatic measurement by clicking the CAD model

Page 1029

The window is shown below:

Click the points used to measure the surface on the CAD model by holding the

key pressed:

Page 1030

Note: When the surface has been measured, the extreme points are displayed in the 3D View.

Page 1031

Automatic measurement using the U V method

Click this button in the Surface measurement window.

Then click this button to select the "UV" probing strategy. This strategy uses the U and V vectors of the surfaces selected during the definition process. These vectors are specific to the surfaces and cannot be modified.

The fields common to all automatic measurement windows are described on the Automatic feature measurement page.

First tab

Enter the values for the start and end of the area to be measured according

Page 1032

to the U and V vectors of the surface(s). This value is shown as a percentage of the lengths of the total area selected.

End U = 0.55

End U = 0.95

Enter the number of points to be used for measurement for each vector.

Select the main direction of measurement by checking (selecting) the desired box.

Page 1033

U is the main axis

V is the main axis

This button is used to select the direction of the measurement normals.

Surface names are listed here. Measurement parameters are applied to all surfaces with none or all are selected. To assign different parameters to different surfaces, it is required to select them one by one and set the measurement according to each surface.

Click this button to validate the settings entered. The corresponding measurement/probing paths are then displayed in the 3D View (it may take some time for these to be calculated).

Page 1034

Second tab

The second tab is used to configure a clearance plane. This may be particularly useful for complex warped surfaces. Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates and the I, J, and K values specifying its position and orientation in the relevant fields.

Page 1035

Scanning

Scanning allows a section to be created by automatically searching for CNC points. Scanning uses ball center points or compensated points depending on the mode selected. To make a measurement by scanning, select Scanning via the Features > Measure Feature > Section by scanning. The following window is displayed:

To measure using Linear scanning, measure the first two points in manual mode. To measure using Alternate scanning, measure the first three points in manual mode.

Note: Alternate scanning is not available for measuring with a continuous probe. If the compensated mode is selected, the geometric points will be compensated automatically during measurement.

Page 1036

Then click this button to access the automatic measurement window: 

For point to point measuring:



For continuous measuring:

Page 1037

The common fields to all measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. The fields specific to Scanning measurement mode are:

Compensation Strategy

Click this button to use the linear strategy without compensation, or this button linear strategy with compensation.

to use the

Cutting Plane Select the number of lines to be scanned and their offset (this may have a sign).

Select section cutting plane from the drop-down list. The cutting plane, displayed in red in the 3D View, is parallel to one of the predefined planes in the active alignment. This field is used to specify the distance on the axis not belonging to the plane:

Page 1038

Min and Max values may be entered to set cutting plane size. Thus, measurement and calculation will not go beyond the limits of the plane. The

and

buttons are used to capture the end limit positions of the probe as cutting plane limits.

Scanning stops when the cutting plane is exceeded or the first point scanned is returned to.

Scanning settings for point to point type measuring

Page 1039

used to enter initial scanning step value. used to enter search step value, due to variations in workpiece (part) shape or if scanning does not find the material/part. used to enter the step to be used if material continuity is found to be good. used to enter chordal error value. This allows the software to increase or decrease step value. The chordal error is the deviation between the last probing point and the line passing through the previous two probing points. If this calculated deviation is lower than the chordal error value entered in this field, scanning step is increased. If, on the contrary, this deviation is higher then the value entered, scanning step is decreased. Chordal error is greater than the probed deviation: search step is increased:

Calculated deviation = 0.08 mm

Chordal error is less than the probed deviation: search step is reduced:

Calculated deviation = 0.08 mm

used to configure CNC speed. used to configure search distance (that also corresponds to retraction at the moment of probing).

Page 1040

Scanning settings for continuous type measuring The common fields to both types of measurement (point to point and continuous) are described in the Scanning settings for continuous type measuring section. sets up the stop tolerance for a closed section measurement. In the example, the tolerance is represented by a sphere 10,000 in diameter centered on the first probing point.

Linear Scanning Measure the first two points manually to give scanning direction, then switch to automatic mode:

If the number of lines is 1, the Offset field is grayed out. The points calculated will be center-ball points and measurement will be performed as shown below:

If the number of lines is greater than 1, the scanning window is displayed as follows:

Page 1041

The Offset field can be edited. The software then displays the cutting planes corresponding to the number of lines selected before starting scanning. Positive or negative offset of the planes is performed with respect to the normal of the nominal cutting plane and according to the orientation of the active alignment:

Page 1042

Scanning is then performed as follows:

Note: If a scanning probe is used (SP600, SP25, SP80), scanning operates in slightly different manner. The points probed are automatically compensated.

If this button is clicked, the software uses the same type of path as before but the points are calculated differently. The points are calculated by triangulation between the different probing points. The probing points are then compensated and corrected using the plane formed by triangulation:

Page 1043

Alternate Scanning To perform alternate scanning, probe the first three points in manual mode, as shown in the diagram below, then switch to automatic mode:

The following window is displayed:

Page 1044

In this case, the Lines and Offset fields are disabled as alternate scanning is performed on a single line. This field is used to enter a value for the width of the alternate scanning measurement band:

Every three probing operations, the software calculates the barycenter, compensated and corrected using the

Page 1045

plane of the three probing operations, and changes this into a geometrical point:

After the first three probing operations have been performed, the software calculates a point for each each additional probing operation performed (using the last two probing operations for the previous mini-plane). The section passes through all the calculated points.

Page 1046

Construct Feature

Page 1047

Construct Feature

This function is used to create a feature from existing nominal and/or actual features using one of the following methods:

It may be accessed: - Via the menu Features > Construct Feature -

Via this icon in the Feature bar, then selecting the type of feature to be constructed (circle, line, etc.)

. The feature construction window is displayed as shown below, but varies slightly according to the feature selected:

Name

Page 1048

shows the type of feature to be constructed, a line in this example. reminder that the window is in construction mode. Enter the name for feature to be constructed in this field or select an existing feature from the drop-down list. This button is used to select a feature from the Feature database.

Note: The default name may be modified via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters > Default feature name.

Family The feature may be assigned a family by entering family name in this field or selecting an existing family from the drop-down list. If the name entered does not correspond to an existing family, the family is created.

Construction Type The different types of construction available are: Best fit through features: Features are selected from the Feature Database to calculate a feature passing through these points by best fit . construction of the feature by intersection of two features, selected from the drop-down lists or from the Feature Database. construction of the feature by projection of one feature onto another feature, by selecting them from the drop-down lists or from the Features Database. construction of the median feature between two features, selected from the drop-down lists or from the Feature Database. construction of the feature parallel to another feature and passing through a third feature (the distance from this latter feature may be specified), by selecting the features from the drop-down lists or from the Feature Database. construction of the feature perpendicular to another feature and passing through a third feature, by selecting the features from the drop-down lists or from the Feature Database. construction of the feature symmetrical to another feature, by selecting them from the drop-down lists or from the Features Database.

Page 1049

construction of the feature by offset using two or three points. construction of the feature from new criteria, by selecting feature calculation method (Tchebychev or Least Squares) and configuring the constraints to be applied to a previously measured feature. construction of a point on the axis of a cone with a given diameter. construction of a point by entering its coordinates, but not of its normal vector. construction of a point from the CAD file, i.e. by projection of a geometrical point (or feature that can be assimilated to a point) on a given CAD surface (or an edge, etc.). construction of the extreme point of the selected feature according to the desired search direction.

Description Brief description of the selected construction method.

Parameters

Construction parameter configuration: selected features, etc. Note: When selecting features from the Feature Database, it is possible to choose between axis and envelope for some features. For example, for the intersection of a line and cylinder: The cylinder may be considered to be a line another line (the axis of the cylinder). The cylinder may be considered as a cylinder and the envelope of the cylinder.

. There will be one intersection point, between a line and . There will be two intersection points, between a line

If there are two possible types of construction, the software offers one of them. The to access the other one.

button may be used

This button is used to select a feature from the Feature database. Multiple feature selection may be performed: - by clicking the desired features and holding the key on the keyboard

depressed

- by selecting the desired features in the 3D View.

Page 1050

The part concerning the features of the window is then presented as follows :

To delete the selection list, right-click on the group:

Note: A bubble help is displayed on the group in order to recall the features concerned.

Example: Two features A2 and A2 are selected in the first field. Two features B1 and B2 are selected in the second. In all, four features are created, as follows:    

1st feature constructed: from A1 and B1 2nd feature constructed: from A1 and B2 3rd feature constructed: from A2 and B1 4th feature constructed: from A2 and B2

Click this button to construct the feature. The feature is added to the Feature Database with nominal and/or actual values, depending on the features used to construct it.

Note: If construction cannot be performed (incomplete or incorrect data), this button is not available.

closes the window without applying any changes made.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1051

For more information on an error occurring during program execution, see Error management.

Page 1052

Constraints

Measurement or construction constraints allow certain conditions to be imposed on feature calculation.

Examples:  

When measuring a circle, its position may be calculated after setting its diameter (or vice versa). When measuring a plane, its orientation may be set, perpendicular to another plane for example.

p : Probed Points C1: Circle calculated with a diameter constraint of 40mm C2: Circle calculated without constraint C3: Circle calculated with a radius constraint of 12.5 mm

p: Probed Points P1: Plane 1 measured P2: Plane 2 measured without constraint P3 : Plane 2 measured with a "perpendicular to" constraint in relation to Plane 1

Click this button in a feature measurement or construction window, the following window is displayed :

Page 1053

Criterion Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the feature in this field. The criteria available are Least Square, Tchebychev and, depending on the features, Inscribed and Circumscribed: For

Least Square

Inscribed

Circumscrib Tchebychev ed

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Page 1054

Inscribed Circle Constructs the circle with the largest diameter passing at least by 3 points with all points outside. The points' deviations in relation to the inscribed circle are positive or nil.

Least square circle

Inscribed circle

Circumscribed Circle Constructs the circle with the smallest diameter passing at least by 3 points with all points inside. The points' deviations in relation to the circumscribed circle are positive or nil.

Least square circle Circumscribed circle

Dimension Then select whether or not a dimension constraint is to be applied to the feature. If so, specify which dimension(s), by checking the corresponding box(es). Dim1 and Dim2, for example, respectively represent the large and small diameters of an ellipse.

Position

Page 1055

When the feature has been defined, a position constraint, i.e. the coordinates of the center of the feature, may be added.

Orientation A final constraint may be applied, the orientation constraint, i.e. constrain the feature to be parallel, perpendicular or angled (the angle is entered to give an inclination) to a reference feature selected from the drop-down list.

Click this button to apply the properties and close the window. Closes the window without applying any changes made.

Note:  The constraints available are: Featur Criterion Dim1 Dim2 e type Least Square 2D Tchebychev Least Square 3D Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev X Inscribed Circumscrib ed Least Square Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev X Inscribed Circumscrib ed Least Square Tchebychev X Inscribed Circumscrib ed Least X Square Tchebychev

Position

Parallel to

Perpendicul Angled at ar to

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

Page 1056

Least Square Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev Least Square Tchebychev 

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

If constraints that are not available for the feature are selected, the following warning message is displayed at feature evaluation:

For feature measurement, this message is displayed when the measurement is validated, after the constraints have been selected. Clicking

allows the constraints applied to be modified by clicking

again.

Page 1057

Construct Point

To construct a (geometrical) Point, select Point via the menu Features > Construct or click Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Point features are: - Construct by intersection - Construct by projection onto, - Construct median from - Construct symmetrical to - Construct Point, axis, cone - Construct with 2 points and offset - Construct from nominal coordinates - Construct onto CAD - Construct by Extrem Point In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:

Page 1058

Type of construction Construct by intersection Construct by projection onto Construct median from Construct symmetrical to Construction of a point on the axis of a cone Construct by offset Construct from coordinates Construct using CAD Construct by extreme point

Access to multi selection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Page 1059

Construct by intersection

This function is used to construct a point by intersection between two features. To obtain a point constructed by intersection, select compatible types of features. The following table shows the maximum number of possible cases, with 1 for one solution, 2 for two solutions, and X indicating that intersection between the two features is not possible. Line / Cone (axis) Cylinder (axis)

Plane

Circle

Cone

Cylinder

Sphere

Line / Cone and Cylinder axis

1

1

2

2

2

2

Plane

1

X

2

1

1

X

Circle

2

2

2

2

2

2

Cone

2

1

2

2

2

2

Cylinder

2

1

2

2

2

2

Sphere

2

X

2

2

2

X

Select

type from the construction window:

Page 1060

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Intersection

Select the first intersection feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the second intersection feature.

Page 1061

The coordinates of the constructed point are displayed in these fields, that cannot be modified. When there are two possible solutions, this button may be used to switch between them.

Examples: Legends for the following diagrams: D, D1, D2: Lines Co: Cone Cyl: Cylinder C, C1, C2: Circles S: Sphere P : Plane Pt, Pt1, Pt2: Constructed points

Line / Line

Line / Cone (axis) Cone (axis) / Line

Line / Cone (envelope) Cone (envelope) / Line

Line / Circle Circle / Line

Line / Cylinder (axis) Cylinder (axis) / Line

Line / Cylinder (envelope) Cylinder (envelope) / Line

Page 1062

Plane / Cylinder (axis) Cylinder (axis) / Plane

Plane / Circle Circle / Plane

Plane / Cone (axis) Cone (axis) / Plane

Circle / Circle

Circle / Cone (axis) Cone (axis) / Circle

Circle / Cone (envelope) Cone (envelope) / Circle

Circle / Sphere Sphere / Circle

Circle / Cylinder (axis) Cylinder (axis) / Circle

Circle / Cylinder (envelope) Cylinder (envelope) / Circle

Cone / Sphere Sphere / Cone

Cone (axis) / Cylinder Cylinder / Cone (axis)

Cone (envelope) / Cylinder

Page 1063

Sphere / Line

Sphere / Cylinder (axis) Cylinder (axis) / Sphere

Page 1064

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct a point by projecting a reference point onto a plane or line. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature to be projected: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1065

Select the projection feature (plane or line).

The coordinates of the constructed point are displayed in these fields, that cannot be modified.

Projection of a point onto a plane

Pt1: Reference point P: Plane D: Line Pt: Constructed point

Projection of a point onto a line

Page 1066

Construct median from

This function is used to construct a median point corresponding to the central position of two two points. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Median

Select the first point to be used for construction: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1067

Select the second point to be used for construction.

The coordinates of the corresponding point are displayed in these fields, that cannot be modified.

Pt1 and Pt2: Reference points Pt: Constructed point

Median point of two points

Page 1068

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a point symmetrical to a reference point and in relation to a point, line, or plane. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1069

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

The coordinates of the corresponding point are displayed in these fields, that cannot be modified.

Symmetrical point in relation to a point

p: Reference point Ds: Line of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry Ps: Point of symmetry Pt: Constructed point Symmetrical point in relation to a line

Symmetrical point in relation to a plane

Page 1070

Construct Point, axis, cone

This function is used to create a point on the axis of a cone, at the level of the desired diameter. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Point / Cone Axis

Select the cone to be used for construction: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1071

Enter the diameter corresponding to the "level" at which the point is to be constructed.

The coordinates of the corresponding point are displayed in these fields, that cannot be modified.

Co: Reference cone D: Diameter Pt: Constructed point

Page 1072

Construct point with offset

This function is used to construct a point from a point and a plane or feature that can be assimilated to a point or a line, by specifying a distance. Select

mode in the construction window.

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Offset

Select the first point by choosing it from the drop-down list, or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1073

Select the second feature (planes and features that can be assimilated to a point or line) by choosing it from the drop-down list, or by using the Browse Database function.

Enter the distance at which the point is to be constructed.

Warning: The order in which the points used for construction are selected conditions the result.

Offset through a point When the second feature selected is a point: The software calculates a line, D, between the two reference points, Pt1 and Pt2. Point Pt is constructed on this line at the distance d entered, from point Pt2, in the direction Pt1-Pt2. The normal vector of point Pt is orientated according to direction Pt2-Pt1, whatever the orientation of the reference points.

Pt1 and Pt2: Reference points D: Line used for calculation d: Distance Pt: Constructed point

Point constructed with 2 points and offset

Offset through an axis When the second feature selected is a line, a cone or a cylinder: The new constructed point is located at the specified distance d along the axis of the selected feature. The normal vector of point Pt is oriented according to direction Pt-Pt1, whatever the orientation of the reference points.

Page 1074

Pt1 and C1: Reference feature d: Distance Pt: Constructed point

Point constructed by offset

Offset through a plane When the second feature selected is a plane: The new point constructed is located at the specified distance, d, in the direction of the normal of the selected plane. The normal vector of point Pt is oriented according to direction Pt-Pt1, whatever the orientation of the reference points.

Pt1 and P: Reference features n: Normal of the plane d: Distance Pt: Constructed point

Point constructed by offset through a plane

Notes:  

The line used for calculation is not created. If the point constructed has already been defined, the orientation of the normal vector is conserved. The calculated normal is not used.

Page 1075

Construct from nominal coordinates

This function is used to construct a geometrical point at specific coordinates in the the current (active) alignment. This point will not have a normal. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Coordinates

Enter the coordinates of the point to be constructed in the corresponding fields.

Page 1076

Construct onto CAD

This function is used to construct a point by projecting a point, center, or axis onto an entity in the open CAD file. Select

type from the construction window:

Depending on whether the construction feature is a point or an axis, it will be projected onto the CAD model (Fig.1), or constructed by intersection with the CAD model (Fig.2).

Fig.1: Projection onto the CAO model (the construction feature is a point)

Fig.2: Intersection with the CAO model (the construction feature is an axis)

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

CAD

Page 1077

Select the feature to be projected By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

In the case of projection onto the CAD model (Fig.1), several projection modes are available. This is not the case for intersection with the CAD model (Fig. 2).

Select the desired CAD entity from the drop-down list or click the button to perform an automatic search for the CAD entity. In this case, AUTO is displayed in the field instead of the list of available CAD entities. The software uses the search distance of a surface point to project the point. If there is no CAD entity in the search sphere, the point cannot be constructed.

A material thickness may be added by entering it in this field.

Page 1078

Construct by Extreme Point

This function is used to construct a point by using the extreme probed point according to a direction of a feature. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Point features are:

Extreme 1 Select the method to be used to search for the extreme point. Depending on the choice made, other information may be required: If one of these items is selected, no other information will be requested. The software searches for the extreme point in the chosen direction (X, Y or Z of the active alignment).

Page 1079

Specify the search direction for the extreme point by its vector: . Select the defined feature allowing extreme point search direction to be specified in the field:

. Select the measured feature allowing extreme point search direction to be specified in the field:

. Select the feature on which the extreme point is to be searched for: By selecting it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Constructed point

The coordinates of the constructed point are displayed in these fields, that cannot be modified. Constructing an extreme point gives two solutions for the same selected direction. The point to be constructed can thus be chosen from between two solutions (Min and Max).

Examples: Legends for the following diagrams: D: Direction Cyl: Cylinder Co: Cone Min, Max: Constructed points

Page 1080

Construction of an extreme point on a cylinder using the X axis of the alignment.

Construction of an extreme point on a cylinder using a specified direction.

Construction of an extreme point on a cylinder using the normal of a defined (nominal) or measured (actual) feature.

Page 1081

Construct Line

To construct a Line feature, select Line via the menu Features > Construct, or click Bar in construction mode

in the Feature

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Line features are: - Best fit through features - Construct by intersection - Construct by projection onto - Construct median from - Construct parallel to - Construct perpendicular to - Construct symmetrical to - Construct by offset - Construction from new criteria - Construct by axis In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction:

Page 1082

Type of construction Best fit through features Construct by intersection Construct by projection onto Construct median from Construct parallel to Construct perpendicular to Construct symmetrical to Construct by offset Construction from new criteria Construction by axis

Access to multi selection No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes

Page 1083

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a line passing through measured and/or constructed points. The line is projected onto a plane. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Select Features Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction. Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1084

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*]. To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Projection Plane used to select a reference plane: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

The different choices available are:

Page 1085

Auto: there is no projection. the line passing (best fit) between the points probed (line D1 in the example below) is used Nominal: if the line has been defined, the constructed feature will be projected on the nominal plane. Plane: the points are projected onto the plane, the line is calculated (best fit) from among the projected points (line D2 in the example below).

P1 and P2: Actual and/or nominal points P1' and P2': Projection of P1 and P2 on P P: Projection plane D1: Line space between P1 and P2 D2: Line passing through P1' and P2'

Note: If a plane is selected as projection feature and the points used have been measured at ball center, the following message is displayed (the message varies according to the axes concerned):

The type of ball compensation must be specified. This corresponds to ± ball radius according to the normal passing through the ball center and perpendicular to the feature: None: the points are projected onto the plane with no compensation. Auto: the points are projected onto the plane with ball radius compensation in the direction of probing or opposite to the direction of probing, in relation to the selected plane. Outward: the points are projected onto the plane and compensated by ball radius in the direction of probing. Inward: the points are projected onto the plane and compensated by ball radius in the opposite direction to probing.

Page 1086

Page 1087

Construct by intersection

This function is used to construct a line by intersection between two planes.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Intersection

Select the first intersection feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1088

Select the second intersection feature.

P1 and P2: Reference planes D: Constructed line

Intersection of two planes

Page 1089

Construction by projection onto

This function is used to construct a line by perpendicular projection of a previously measured (actual) or defined (nominal) reference line onto a plane. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1090

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

D1: Reference line P: Projection plane D: Constructed line

Projection of a line onto a plane

Page 1091

Construct median from

This function is used to construct a line composed of all the points located at equal distance from the two selected lines. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Median

Specify the first symmetry feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1092

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Specify the second symmetry feature.

D1 and D2: Reference lines D: Constructed line

Median line of two lines

Note: The orientation of the constructed line depends on the order in which the reference lines are selected.

D1 selected, then D2. D has the same orientation as D1.

D2 selected, then D1. D has the same orientation as D2.

Page 1093

Construct parallel to

This function is used ot construct a line with all points at equal distance from another line. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Parallel to

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1094

Select a second feature that the line to be constructed will pass through.

and/or a distance between the line to be constructed and the reference line.

Line parallel to a line passing through a plane

D1: Reference line P: Projection plane Pt: Via point D2: Line from intermediate calculation projection of D1 on P d: Distance D: Constructed line Line parallel to a line in a plane, at a distance d

Line parallel to a line passing through a point

Page 1095

Construct perpendicular to

This function is used to construct a line orientated at 90° in relation to a given feature. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Perpendicular to

Select the reference line or plane: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1096

Select the point that the line to be constructed will pass through.

Select the projection plane.

Line perpendicular to a line, passing through a point and D1: Reference line in a plane P: Reference plane Pt: Via point D: Constructed line

Line perpendicular to a plane and passing through a point

Page 1097

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a line symmetrical to a reference line in relation to (against) another line, a point, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1098

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical line in relation to a point

D1: Reference line Ps: Point of symmetry Ds: Line of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry D: Constructed line Symmetrical line in relation to a point

Symmetrical line in relation to a plane

Page 1099

Construct by offset

This function is used to construct an offset line from two features that can be assimilated to points, projected onto a plane and passing through the first feature. To calculate the offset, the direction of the plane must be known (represented here by Vp). Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Offset

Select the projection plane:

Page 1100

By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the first point.

Select the second point.

Specify the direction (+ or -) and the value of the offset between the second point and the plane.

Example: to create line D from P1, then P2, a positive or negative offset of P2 is required :

P1 and P2: Reference points P: Projection plane d > 0: Positive offset d < 0: Negative offset D: Constructed line

Select the projection plane, P in this example.

Select the first point, here P1.

Select the second point, here P2. or specify the direction, positive (+) or negative (-) and the value of the offset between the second point and the plane, 10 in the example.

Page 1101

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a line by applying a constraint calculation method different to that used for the measured (actual) line. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1102

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev or Least Squares.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

: Probed points of the actual (measured) line D1 : Reference line D : Line calculated without constraints D ' : Line calculated with "parallel to" constraint in relation to D1 D '' : Line calculated with "perpendicular to" constraint in relation to D1

Page 1103

Construct by axis

This function is used to construct a line using the axes of a feature: the large axis, the small axis or the normal, that can be accessed depending on the type of feature. Select

mode in the construction window:

The fields common to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Line features are:

Axis

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1104

Select the reference axis among the Large axis, the Small axis and the Normal.

Note: The length of the line results from the axes of the reference feature. When this length cannot be calculated (e.g. for normals), the default length of the line is 100mm.

RECT1: Reference feature DRTE1: Constructed line

Line constructed using the small axis of a rectangle

Table of possible cases 

Axes available depending on the features: Feature

Possible options

Rectangle

large small norm axis axis al

Slot

large small norm axis axis al

Ellipse

large small norm axis axis al

Hexagon

large axis

/

norm al

Circle

/

/

norm al

Arc

/

/

norm al

Geometrical point

/

/

norm al

Surface point

/

/

norm al

Plane

/

/

norm al

Page 1105

Construct Circle

To construct a Circle feature, select Circle via the menu Features > Construct, or click Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Circle features are: - Best fit through features - Construct by intersection - Construct by projection onto - Construct symmetrical to - Construction from new criteria In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction: Type of construction Best fit through features Construct by inersection Construct by projection onto

Access to milti selection No Yes Yes

Page 1106

Construct symmetriucal to Construction from new criteria

Yes No

Page 1107

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a circle passing through measured and/or constructed features. The circle is projected onto a plane. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Circle features are:

Select Features Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction. Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1108

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*]. To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order, to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1109

Construct by intersection

This function is used to construct a circle by intersection between a plane and cylinder, sphere or cone or between two spheres. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Circle features are:

Intersection

Select the first intersection feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1110

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the second intersection feature:

Intersection of a cylinder and a plane

Cyl: Reference cylinder S: Reference sphere Co: Reference cone P: Intersection plane C: Constructed circle

Intersection of a sphere and a plane

Intersection of a cone and a plane

In the case of intersection between a cylinder and a plane, the software calculates the point of intersection between the axis of the cylinder and the plane. This point is used as the center of the constructed circle, for which the diameter is that of the cylinder and normal that of the plane. In the case of intersection between a cone and a plane, the software calculates the point of intersection between the axis of the cone and the plane. This point is used as the center of the constructed circle, for which the diameter is that of the cone and normal that of the plane.

Page 1111

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct a circle by perpendicular projection of a previously measured reference circle onto a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Circle features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1112

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

C1: Reference circle P: Projection plane C: Constructed circle

Projection of a circle onto a plane

Page 1113

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a circle symmetrical to a reference circle in relation to a point, line, or plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Circle features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1114

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical circle in relation to a point

C1: Reference circle Ps: Point of symmetry Ds: Line of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry C: Constructed circle

Symmetrical circle in relation to a line

Symmetrical circle in relation to a plane

Page 1115

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a circle by applying new calculation constraints to a previously measured reference circle. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Circle features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1116

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev , Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1117

Construct Arc

To construct an Arc feature, select Arc via the menu Features > Construct, or click Bar in construction mode

in the Feature

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Arc features are: - Best fit through features - Construct by projection onto - Construct symmetrical to - Construction from new criteria In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction: Type of construction

Access to multi selection

Best fit through features

No

Construct by projection onto

Yes

Page 1118

Construct symmetrical to Construction from new criteria

Yes No

Page 1119

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct an arc passing through measured and/or constructed features. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Arc features are:

Select Features Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction. Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1120

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*]. To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order, to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1121

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct an arc by perpendicular projection of a previously measured arc onto a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Arc features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1122

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

A1: Reference arc P: Projection plane A: Constructed Arc

Projection of an arc onto a plane

Page 1123

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct an arc symmetrical to a reference arc in relation to (against) a line, a point, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Arc features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1124

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical arc in relation to a point

A1: Reference arc Ps: Point of symmetry Ds: Line of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry A: Constructed Arc

Symmetrical arc in relation to a line

Symmetrical arc in relation to a plane

Page 1125

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct an arc by applying constraints to a previously measured reference arc. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Arc features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1126

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev , Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1127

Construct Plane

To construct a Plane feature, select Plane via the menu Features > Construct, or click Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Plane features are: - Best fit through features - Construct median from - Construct parallel to - Construct perpendicular to - Construct symmetrical to - Construct by offset - Construction from new criteria In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction: Type of construction Bes fit through features

Access to multi selection No

Page 1128

Construct median from Construct parallel to Construct perpendicular to Construct symmetrical to Construct by offset Construction from new criteria

Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

Page 1129

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a plane passing through measured and/or constructed features. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Select Features Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction. Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1130

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*]. To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order to change the orientation of the normal of the plane.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1131

Construct median from

This function is used to construct a plane corresponding to the central position of two other planes. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Median

Select the first reference plane: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1132

Select the second reference plane.

P1 and P2: Reference planes P: Constructed plane

Median plane of two planes

Page 1133

Construct parallel to

This feature is used to construct a plane parallel to a reference plane and either passing through another feature or at a given distance from the reference plane. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Parallel to

Select the reference plane: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1134

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the via point in the parallel plane.

enter a positive or negative offset between the reference plane and the plane to be constructed.

Plane parallel to a plane at a distance of D

P1: Reference plane Pt: Via point D: Distance between the planes P: Constructed plane

Plane parallel to a plane passing through a point

Page 1135

Construct perpendicular to

This function is used to construct a plane perpendicular to a reference plane or point and passing through a point or line.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Perpendicular to

Select the reference plane: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1136

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the via point or line on the perpendicular plane.

Plane perpendicular to a plane passing through a line

P: Reference plane Pt: Via point D: Via line P: Constructed plane

Plane perpendicular to a line passing through a point

Page 1137

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a plane symmetrical to a reference plane in relation to another plane, line, or point.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference plane: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1138

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical plane in relation to a point

P1: Reference plane Ds: Line of symmetry Ps: Point of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry P: Constructed plane Symmetrical plane in relation to a line

Symmetrical plane in relation to a plane

Page 1139

Construct by offset

This function is used to construct an offset plane from three features that can be assimilated to measured points, and passing through the first feature. The direction of the normal of the plane depends on probing direction (clockwise or counterclockwise). The orthonormal direction rule is applied. Offset may therefore be positive or negative according to the direction of the normal. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Offset

Page 1140

Select the first point: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the second point.

Specify the direction (+ or -) and the value of the offset between the first point and the second point.

Select the third point.

Specify the direction (+ or -) and the value of the offset between the second and third points.

Example:

Page 1141

For planes P1 and P2, the points are selected in the following order: Pt2, Pt3, Pt1. The two planes therefore pass through point Pt2 (the first point selected). A sphere is determined around points Pt3 and Pt1 with the absolute value of the distance entered as radius.

Page 1142

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a plane by applying constraints to a previously measured reference plane. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Plane features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1143

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev , Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1144

Construct Sphere

To construct a Sphere feature, select Sphere via the menu Features > Construct, or click Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Sphere features are: - Best fit through features - Construct symmetrical to - Construction from new criteria In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction: Type of construction Best fit through features Construct symmetrical to Construction from new criteria

Access to multi selection No Yes No

Page 1145

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a sphere passing through measured and/or constructed features.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Sphere features are:

Select Features Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction. Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1146

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*]. To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1147

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a sphere symmetrical to a reference sphere in relation to a plane, line, or point. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Sphere features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference sphere: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1148

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical sphere in relation to a point

S1: Reference sphere Ps: Point of symmetry Ds: Line of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry S: Constructed sphere Symmetrical sphere in relation to a line

Symmetrical sphere in relation to a plane

Page 1149

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a sphere by applying new constraints to a previously measured reference sphere. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Sphere features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1150

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev , Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1151

Construct Cylinder

To construct a Cylinder feature, select Cylinder via the menu Features > Construct, or click Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Cylinder features are: - Best fit through features - Construct symmetrical to - Construction from new criteria In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction: Type of construction Best fit through features Construct symmetrical to Construction from new criteria

Access to multi selection No Yes No

Page 1152

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a cylinder passing through measured and/or constructed features. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Cylinder features are:

Select Features Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction. Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1153

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*]. To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order to change cylinder axis orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1154

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a cylinder symmetrical to a reference cylinder in relation to (against) a line, a point, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Cylinder features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1155

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical cylinder in relation to a point

CY1: Reference cylinder Ps: Point of symmetry Ds: Line of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry CY: Symmetrical cylinder

Symmetrical cylinder in relation to a line

Symmetrical cylinder in relation to a plane

Page 1156

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a cylinder by applying constraints to a previously measured reference cylinder. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Cylinder features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1157

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev, Least Square, Inscribed , or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1158

Construct Cone

To construct a Cone feature, select Cone via the menu Features > Construct, or click Bar in construction mode

in the Feature

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Cone features are: - Best fit through features - Construct symmetrical to - Construction from new criteria In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction: Type of construction Best fit through features Construct symmetrical to Construction from new criteria

Access to multi selection No Yes No

Page 1159

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a cone passing through measured and/or defined (actual or nominal) features. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Cone features are:

Select Features Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database. Only features that can be assimilated to points are displayed.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction.

Page 1160

Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*]. To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order to change cone axis orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1161

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a cone symmetrical to a reference cone in relation to (against) a point, a line, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Cone features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1162

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical cone in relation to a point

CO1: Reference cone Ps: Point of symmetry Ds: Line of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry Co: Constructed cone

Symmetrical cone in relation to a line

Symmetrical cone in relation to a plane

Page 1163

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a cone by applying constraints to a previously measured reference cone. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Cone features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1164

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev , Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1165

Construct Torus

To construct a Torus feature, select Torus via the menu Features > Construct, or click Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Torus features are: - Best fit through features - Construct symmetrical to - Construction from new criteria In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction: Type of construction Best fit through features Construct symmetrical to Construction from new criteria

Access to multi selection No Yes No

Page 1166

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a torus passing through measured and/or constructed features. The torus is projected onto a plane. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Torus features are:

Select Features Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction. Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1167

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*]. To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order to reverse the orientation of the normal of the torus.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1168

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a torus symmetrical to a reference torus in relation to a line, point, or plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Torus features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1169

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical torus in relation to a point

T1: Reference torus Ps: Point of symmetry Ds: Line of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry T: Constructed torus Symmetrical torus in relation to a line

Symmetrical torus in relation to a plane

Page 1170

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a torus by applying constraints to a previously measured reference torus. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Torus features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1171

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev , Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1172

Construct Rectangle

To construct a Rectangle feature, select Rectangle via the menu Features > Construct, or click the Feature Bar in construction mode

in

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Rectangle features are: - Best fit through features - Construct by projection onto - Construct symmetrical to - Construction from new criteria In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction: Type of construction Best fit through features Construct by projection onto Construct symmetrical to Construction from new criteria

Access to multi selection No Yes Yes No

Page 1173

Page 1174

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a rectangle passing through measured and/or constructed features. The rectangle is projected onto a plane. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Rectangle features are:

Select Features Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction. Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1175

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*]. To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order, to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1176

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct a rectangle by perpendicular projection of a previously measured reference rectangle onto a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Rectangle features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1177

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

R1: Reference rectangle P: Projection plane R: Constructed rectangle

Projection of a rectangle onto a plane

Page 1178

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a rectangle symmetrical to a reference rectangle in relation to (against) a line, a point, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Rectangle features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1179

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical rectangle in relation to a point

R1: Reference rectangle Ps: Point of symmetry Ds: Line of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry R: Constructed rectangle Symmetrical rectangle in relation to a line

Symmetrical rectangle in relation to a plane

Page 1180

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a rectangle by applying constraints to a previously measured reference rectangle. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Rectangle features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1181

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev , Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1182

Construct Slot

To construct a Slot feature, select Slot via the menu Features > Construct, or click Bar in construction mode

in the Feature

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Slot features are: - Best fit through features - Construct by projection onto - Construct symmetrical to - Construction from new criteria In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction: Type of construction Best fit through features Construct by projection onto Construct symmetrical to Construction from new criteria

Access to multi selection No Yes Yes No

Page 1183

Page 1184

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a slot passing through measured and/or constructed features. The slot is projected onto a plane. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Slot features are:

Select Features Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction. Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1185

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*]. To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order, to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1186

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct a slot by perpendicular projection of a previously measured reference slot onto a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Slot features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1187

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

O1: Reference slot P: Projection plane O: Constructed slot

Slot projected onto a plane

Page 1188

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a slot symmetrical to a reference slot in relation to (against) a line, a point, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1189

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical slot in relation to a point

O1: Reference slot Ps: Point of symmetry Ds: Line of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry O: Constructed slot Symmetrical slot in relation to a line

Symmetrical slot in relation to a plane

Page 1190

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a slot by applying constraints to a previously measured reference slot. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Slot features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list Or by using the Browse Database function.

Page 1191

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev , Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1192

Construct Hexagon

To construct a Hexagon feature, select Hexagon via the menu Features > Construct, or click Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Hexagon features are: - Best fit through features - Construct by projection onto - Construct symmetrical to - Construction from new criteria In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction: Type of construction Best fit through features Construct by projection onto Construct symmetrical to

Access to multi selection No Yes Yes

Page 1193

Construction from new criteria

No

Page 1194

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct a hexagon passing through measured and/or constructed features. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Hexagon features are:

Select Features Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction. Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1195

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*]. To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order, to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1196

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct a hexagon by projection perpendicular to a previously measured reference hexagon onto a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Hexagon features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1197

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

H1: Reference hexagon P: Projection plane H: Constructed hexagon

Projection of a hexagone onto a plan

Page 1198

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct a hexagon symmetrical to a reference hexagon in relation to (against) a line, a point, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Hexagon features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1199

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical hexagon in relation to a point

Symmetrical hexagon in relation to a line

H1: Reference hexagon Ps: Point of symmetry Ds: Line of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry H: Constructed hexagon

Symmetrical hexagon in relation to a plane

Page 1200

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct a hexagon by applying new calculation constraints to a previously measured reference hexagon. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Hexagon features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1201

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev , Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1202

Construct Ellipse

To construct an Ellipse feature, select Ellipse via the menu Features > Construct, or click Feature Bar in construction mode

in the

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Ellipse features are: - Best fit through features - Construct by intersection - Construct by projection onto - Construct symmetrical to - Construction from new criteria In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction: Type of construction Best fit through features Construct by inersection Construct by projection onto

Access to milti selection No Yes Yes

Page 1203

Construct symmetrical to Construction from new criteria

Yes No

Page 1204

Best fit through features

This function is used to construct an ellipse passing through measured and/or constructed features. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Ellipse features are:

Select Features Click this button to select the features from the Feature Database.

This box allows the probing points of the selected features to be used for construction. Select the desired feature from the Database, it is displayed in the construction window:

Page 1205

[*] means that all probing points are used. The syntax is as follows: NOMELEMENT:[*]. To only select some probing points of the feature, double click the feature. Enter [m,n] instead of [*] where m and n mean: use the probing points from number m to number n (m must be less than n):

used to change feature order, to change line orientation.

used to delete the feature selected from the list.

Page 1206

Construct by intersection

This function is used to construct an ellipse by intersection between a plane, a cylinder, or a cone and a plane, a cylinder, or a cone. The ellipse obtained is constructed by intersection by the axis of the cylinder or cone with the plane. Feature diameter at the intersection is transferred to the larger diameter of the ellipse. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Ellipse features are:

Intersection

Select the first intersection feature.

Page 1207

Select the second intersection feature:

Intersection of a cone and a plane Co Reference cone Cyl: Reference cylinder P: Intersection plane E: Constructed ellipse

Intersection of a cylinder and a plane

Notes:  

The intersection of a plane with a cone does not always give an ellipse; a parabola or hyperbola may be obtained. If the intersection plane is perpendicular to the axis of the cylinder or cone, the smaller diameter of the ellipse will be equal to its larger diameter (it will be a circle).

Page 1208

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct an ellipse by perpendicular projection of a previously measured reference ellipse or circle onto a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Ellipse features are:

Projection

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1209

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the projection plane.

Projection of an ellipse onto a plane

E1: Reference ellipse C: Reference circle P: Projection plane E: Constructed ellipse

Projection of a circle onto a plane

Page 1210

Construct symmetrical to

This function is used to construct an ellipse symmetrical to a reference ellipse in relation to (against) a line, a point, or a plane.

Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Ellipse features are:

Symmetrical

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1211

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the symmetry feature:

Symmetrical ellipse in relation to a point

E1: Reference ellipse Ps: Point of symmetry Ds: Line of symmetry Pls: Plane of symmetry E: Constructed ellipse Symmetrical ellipse in relation to a line

Symmetrical ellipse in relation to a plane

Page 1212

Construction from new criteria

This function is used to construct an ellipse by applying new calculation constraints to a previously measured reference ellipse. Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Ellipse features are:

Identification

Select the reference feature: By choosing it from the drop-down list

Page 1213

Or by using the Browse Database function.

Select the constraint criterion to be applied to the reference feature among: Tchebychev , Least Square, Inscribed or Circumscribed.

Configure the constraints to be applied to the reference feature.

Page 1214

Construct Surface Point

To construct a Surface Point, select Surface Point via the menu Features > Construct or click the Feature Bar in construction mode

in

.

The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The types of construction available for Surface Point features are: - Construct by intersection - Construct by projection onto In certain constsruction methods, several features can be selected when configuring the construction: Type of construction Construct by intersection Construct by projection onto

Access to multi seslection Yes Yes

Page 1215

Construct by intersection

This function is used to construct a surface point by intersection of an axis or line with a surface in the CAD model (CAD surface). Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Surface Point features are:

Intersection

Select the axis or line to be used for construction: Select the surface to be used for construction. Click this button for automatic projection of the surface point according to the priority criteria described

Page 1216

on the Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points page.

This field may be used to add a material thickness to the surface point created.

L: Reference line S: CAD surface SRF: Constructed point

Intersection of a line with a surface

Page 1217

Construct by projection onto

This function is used to construct a surface point by projecting a reference point on a CAD surface: Select

type from the construction window:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The specific fields used to construct Surface Point features are:

Projection

Select the projection feature:

Select projection mode from the drop-down list.

Page 1218

Depending on the projection mode selected above, select the surface, edge, curve, or direction to be used for construction. Click this button for automatic re-evaluation of the surface point according to the priority criteria described on the Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points page.

This field may be used to add a material thickness to the surface point created.

Pt: Reference point S: CAD surface SRF: Constructed point

Projection of a point onto a surface

Note: The software may not be able to find a solution, in this case, check that the search distance used for projection is sufficient.

Page 1219

Construct Section

To construct a Section, select Section via the menu Features > Construct or click in construction mode

in the Feature Bar

.

A section may be constructed using defined (nominal) points or measured (actual) points. The following window is displayed:

The common fields to all construction windows are described on the Construct Feature page. The fields specific to Section features are:

Construction Type A list of existing points that may be used for construction is shown in the top part of the window. Select the desired points. Multiple selection may be performed:

Page 1220

- By clicking the desired points while holding the Shift key down (for adjacent points) - By clicking the desired points while holding the Ctrl key down (for points that are not adjacent) Click this button to confirm your selection. The selected points are then displayed in the bottom part of the window as a list of points composing the section:

used to remove the selected point(s) from the list. used to move the selected point up or down in the list.

Tolerances

The section may be toleranced by entering the Higher and Lower tolerance values in these fields. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 1221

Evaluate Feature Evaluating a feature consists in calculating the features corresponding to the dimensions of a plan: Distance, Angle, Geometrical Tolerance, Text/Value, Alignment Information.

Page 1222

Evaluate Distance

Page 1223

Evaluate Distance

To evaluate a distance, select Evaluate > Distance via the Features menu or click bar.

in the Feature

The window is shown below:

The common fields to all evaluation windows are described on the Define and tolerance Feature page. The specific fields used to evaluate Distance features are:

Feature / Ref. Feature

and

Select the features between which

distance is to be evaluated from the drop-down list or from the Feature Database by clicking also click the desired feature in the 3D View.

. You may

Check (select) this box to use the nominal part of the feature to evaluate the distance, and not its actual part.

Page 1224

3D Distances / Projected Distances There are several possible cases: 

The features are defined and measured (nominals and actuals)

The 3D Distances and Projected Distances fields show the nominal values of the 3D and projected distances, calculated from the nominal feature values. These values may, however, be modified.

Example: PNT1

PNT2

Distance evaluated

Page 1225

The features are only measured



The 3D Distances and Projected Distances fields show the actual values of the 3D and projected distances, calculated from the actual feature values. These values are also used as nominal values to evaluate the distance. They may thus be modified by entering the nominal values of the distances.

Example: POIN1

POIN2

Distance evaluated

Page 1226

One feature is defined and measured and one feature is only measured



The 3D Distances and Projected Distances fields show the actual values for the 3D and projected distances, calculated from the nominal values for the defined and measured feature and actual values for the feature that is only measured. These values may, however, be modified.

Example: POIN1

POIN2

Distance evaluated

Page 1227

Click this button to exit the window without evaluating the distance. Click this button to launch the distance calculation. The result of evaluating the distance between the two features is then displayed in the Results window.

Note: When a surface point is measured, the nominal values are re-calculated and cannot be identical to those in Teach-in mode. For the software to use the new nominal values for evaluation, the values in the 3D Distances and Projected Distances fields must be deleted and nothing noted in their place.

Example:

Surface point 1 during learning (Teach-in mode)

Surface point 2 during learning (Teach-in mode)

Distance evaluation during learning: the software calculates the nominal values according to the surface points.

Surface point 1 during execution: the nominal values are different.

Surface point 2 during execution: the nominal values are different.

Page 1228

Distance evaluation during execution without deleting the values in the fields: the software conserves the same nominal values as during learning Distance evaluation during execution with the values in the fields deleted: the software re-calculates the nominal values according to those of the new surface points.

Distance Point / Point

Pt1 : Reference feature Pt2 : Feature to be checked d1 : 3D Distance between P1 and P2 d2 : Projected Distances between Pt1 and Pt2

Distance Point / Line

D : Reference feature Pt1 : Feature to be checked Pt1*: Orthogonal projection of Pt1 on D d1 : 3D Distance between Pt1 and Pt1* d2 : Projected Distances between Pt1 and Pt1*

Distance Point / Plane

Page 1229

P : Reference feature Pt1 : Feature to be checked Pt1*: Orthogonal projection of Pt1 on P d1 : 3D Distance between Pt1 and Pt1* d2 : Projected Distances between Pt1 and¨Pt1*

Distance Plane / Plane 

Method 1 (by default)

P1 : Reference feature P2 : Feature to check (measured or construct by Bestfit)

* probing points of the feature to be checked d1 : Maximum distance between P1 and P2 d2 : Minimum distance between P1 and P2



Method 2 (barycenter)

Another calculation method may be used for the distance between planes. This method consists in projecting the barycenter of each plane perpendicularly and calculating the mean of the two distances. To do this, open the Advanced Parameters window via the Preferences menu. In the Config tab, search for Distance name in the OPT_CALCUL section and enter 1 as value.

P1 : Plane 1 P2 : Plane 2 A : barycenter of P1 B : barycenter of P2 d1 : Projection of point A on P2 d2 : Projection of point B on P1 Distance D = (d1+d2)/2

Note: The Plane / Plane distances are not symmetrical, i.e. the result for the distance between feature 1 and feature 2 is different to the result for the distance between feature 2 and feature 1.

Distance Line / Plane

Page 1230

The nominal part of the distance is calculated vectorially. The software calculates the distances between the ends of the line and their projections on the reference plane. The value given for d1 (=d2) is then equal to the mean of the two previously calculated distances. The evaluated part of the distance is calculated from the group of points used to model the line. The software calculates the distances between the points composing the line to be inspected and the reference plane. The results obtained are then d1 = maximum distance and d2 = minimum distance (the distances are signed).

P : Reference feature D : Feature to be checked (measured or construct by Bestfit) d1 = Maximum distance between D1 and D2 d2 = Minimum distance between D1 and D2

Note: The software cannot calculate the Plane / Line distance

Distance Line / Line

D1 : Line 1 D2 : Line 2 A : center of the segment of D1 B : center of the segment of D2 d1 = Distance from point A to line D2 d2 = Distance from point B to line D1 Distance D = (d1+d2)/2

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

In a program, when the distance between two surface points is evaluated, the software conserves the nominal values entered during learning, this may give an incorrect deviation result.

Page 1231

Tolerance

To assign dimensional tolerance values to a distance, select Evaluate > Distance via the Features menu or click

in the Feature bar.

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

:

, , , Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the distances (3D distances, projected distances) to be toleranced.

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these distances.

or select the desired ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.

Notes: 

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that

Page 1232



they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 1233

Evaluate Angle

Page 1234

Evaluate Angle

To evaluate an angle, select Evaluate > Angle via the Features menu or click

in the Feature bar.

The window is shown below:

The common fields to all evaluation windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to evaluate Angle features are:

Feature / Ref. Feature

and

Select the features between which

angle is to be evaluated from the drop-down list or from the Feature Database by clicking also click the desired feature in the 3D View.

. You may

Check (select) this box to use the nominal part of the feature to evaluate the angle, and not its actual part.

Page 1235

3D Angle / Projected Angles The

button is used to display the complementary angle to the result displayed.

There are several possible cases: The features are defined and measured (nominals and actuals)



The 3D Angle and Projected Angles fields show the nominal values of the 3D and projected angles, calculated from the nominal feature values. These values may, however, be modified.

Example: Plan1

Plan2

Angle evaluated

Page 1236

The features are only measured



The 3D Angle and Projected Angles fields show the actual values of the 3D and projected angles, calculated from the actual feature values. These values are also used as nominal values to evaluate the angle. They may thus be modified by entering the nominal values of the angles.

Example: Plan1

Plan2

Page 1237

Angle evaluated

One feature is defined and measured and one feature is only measured



The 3D Angle and Projected Angles fields show the actual values for the 3D and projected angles, calculated from the nominal values for the defined and measured feature and actual values for the feature that is only measured.

Example: Plan 1

Plan 2

Page 1238

Angle evaluated

Click this button to exit the window without evaluating angle. Click this button to run the angle calculation. The result of evaluating the angle between the two features is then displayed in the Results window.

The angles given by the software are calculated as follows: 3D Angles: Angle is always positive, irrespective of feature orientation. Projected Angles: Feature orientation affects the sign of the angle.

Example 1: Projected Angles

Page 1239

- if D1 is a reference feature, angle a is negative, - if D2 is a reference feature, angle a is positive.

D1: line 1 D2: line 2 d1 : projection of D1 in plane XY d2: projection of D2 in plane XY a: projected angle XoY between D1 and D2

Example 2: Projected Angles The orientation of one of the features is changed. D1 has the same orientation, but the orientation of D2 is reversed. - if D1 is a reference feature, angle a is positive, - if D2 is a reference feature, angle a is negative.

D1: line 1 D2: line 2 d1 : projection of D1 in plane XY d2: projection of D2 in plane XY a: projected angle XoY between D1 and D2

Angle between lines

Page 1240

D1: line 1 D2: line 2 d1 : projection of D1 in plane XY d2: projection of D2 in plane XY A: 3D angle between D1 and D2 a: projected angle XoY between D1 and D2

Angle between planes

Page 1241

P1: plane 1 P2: plane 2 P3: plane 3, perpendicular to P1 and P2 D1: line of intersection between P1 and P3 D2 : line of intersection between P2 and P3 A: 3D angle between P1 and P2

Angle between a line and plane

P: plane D: line d : line D projected in plane P A: 3D angle between P and D

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1242

Page 1243

Tolerance

To assign dimensional tolerance values to an angle, select Evaluate > Angle via the Features menu or click

in the Feature bar.

In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

, , , angles) to be toleranced.

:

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the angles (3D angle, projected

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these angles.

Notes: 

If an incorrect sign or value is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance.

Page 1244



The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 1245

Geometrical Tolerances

There are two different graphic interfaces for evaluating tolerances. Standard mode

Advanced mode

Click on the image corresponding to your software configuration to access the adequate documentation.

Page 1246

Generalities

The principle of normalized tolerance is to tolerance separately each of the featureary surfaces (plane, cylinder, cone, etc.) making up the part's surface. This norm distinguishes three types of faults: - size faul - form fault - position and orientation fault, along with run-out fault. The dimensioning provides two means of giving tolerances to these faults: Dimension tolerance (represented as a dimension on a layout) and geometrical tolerance (represented as a tolerance frame). The first method defines a nominal (perfect) part shape, and the second defines the maximum deviations allowed for the actual part as compared to the perfect part (compatible with the part's function). For measurements made with 3D measuring machines, the notion of tolerance can be defined by the following question: "At what distance from the nominal model does the spread of actual points qualify the part as not being fit to fulfil its purpose?".

Types of tolerances The norm defines the following orientation tolerances: 

Form tolerances



Orientation tolerances



Position tolerances



Runout tolerances

Page 1247

Method of evaluation Orientation tolerances and position tolerances are calculated using three different methods, depending on the information available for the feature to be toleranced. 

Method 1: cloud of points

The first method uses a cloud of points for the feature to be toleranced. Of course, this method is possible only with measured features or with constructed features passing at these points. The cloud of points is always relative to the feature to be toleranced. Its associated mathematical feature is used for the reference feature.

Note: The cloud of points method is used especially for features where the cloud of points can serve as a model for the basic geometrical information (line and plane for instance). In these cases, it is used to calculate the feature (with one or more constraints). For other cases (cylinder or cone), the cloud of points is used only to delimit the feature.

Example: parallelism between two lines



Method 2: nominal

The second method use the nominal data for the feature to be toleranced. This method limits the feature for the tolerance calculation.



Method 3: vector length for the feature to be toleranced

The third method uses an operator-defined vector length for the feature to be toleranced. It is interresting to choose this method when the tolerance must be evaluated on a defined length or in the case of a projected tolerance. In the case of a plane, the length is taken on the greatest slope compared to the element of reference.

Notes: 

When possible, it is recommended to use the first and second methods, as they are closer to the

Page 1248



ISO 01 norm. You should remark that depending on the method used, the results obtained can be very different. These digital methods use mathematical constructions, vectorial calculation (especially the third method) and constrained association (especially the first method). The constrained association method takes into account the geometrical constraints of the tolerances (for example, the case of a plane parallel to a line) and finds the best possible feature complying to a rule of least square.

In program : When this function is learned in a program, the following line appears:

Page 1249

Minimum material L

Refer to the ISO 2692 norm, amendment 1: Requirement for minimum material. The requirement for minimum material, noted as a circled L, is quite like the maximum material. The difference is that you consider the least state of material instead of the greatest state of material. The deviation is minimum if the dimensions are at the minimum material and if the geometrical faults are most unfavorable.

Notes: 





If the dimensions of assembled parts differ from the minimum material, exceeding the specified tolerance is acceptable without affecting the assembly. This is the central principle of the minimum material requirement. If a part has a dimension between the minimum and the maximum material, the specified tolerance can be extended by the difference between the actual dimension and the minimum material dimension. The symbol is noted along side the tolerance dimension having a value that takes into account the limits of material for the features or features concerned. For the actual control, even though it would be possible to make a physical template corresponding to the virtual state of minimum material, it would be impossible to use. Only a computer procedure can check that the virtual state has not been exceeded.

Example: perpendicularity tolerance for a plug:

The plug's axis must be within a cylindrical zone perpendicular to the reference plane A. The diameter of the zone varies from 0.04 to 0.06, depending on whether the stamp's diameter is 15.98 (minimum material) or 16 (maximum material). The requirement for minimum material takes into account a condition for minimum thickness of the plug.

Page 1250

Maximum material M

See norm NFE 04-455, ISO 2692 The assembly of features depends on the combined effect of the geometrical and size errors of the parts to be jointed. Slack is minimum if the sizes are the maximum material and if the geometrical errors are the most disadvantageous. Slack is maximum if the sizes are the minimum material and if the geometrical errors are small.

Notes: 



If the sizes of assembled parts are far from the maximum material, then exceeding the specified tolerance is acceptable without effecting the assembly. This is the principle for the maximum material requirement. If the size of a part is between the minimum and maximum material, then the specified tolerance can be extended by the difference between the actual size and the size of maximum material. The symbol is shown next to a tolerance whose value was selected taking into account the maximum material limits for the feature(s) in question. Example: perpendicularity tolerance for a stamp

The stamp's axis is located in a cylindrical zone perpendicular to the reference plane A. The diameter of the zone ranges from 0.04 to 0.06 depending on whether the stamp's diameter is 16 (maximum material) or 15.98 (minimum material). The size of the cylindrical feature must be controlled separately to make sure that the size limits are not exceeded.

Page 1251

Stamp with maximum diameter (16,00), in contact with the gage.

Stamp with minimum diameter (15,98), in contact with the gage.

Effective perpendicularity tolerance:  0,04

Effective perpendicularity tolerance:  0,06

Page 1252

Evaluate Geometrical Tolerance

To evaluate a geometrical tolerance, select Evaluate from the Features menu or click bar.

in the Feature

The Geometrical Tolerance window for a feature is displayed as shown below, but varies slightly according to the feature selected:

Name shows the type of feature to be evaluated, here an inclination tolerance. When an evaluation window is opened, the software offers a default feature name, composed of feature type and an incremental number. For example INCL1, when the first inclination tolerance feature is defined. This name may be modified by the user. Enter the name of the feature to be created in this field, or select an existing feature from the drop-down list. This button is used to select a feature from the Feature database.

Page 1253

Note: The default name may be modified via the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters > Default feature name.

Family The feature may be assigned a family by entering family name in this field or selecting an existing family from the drop-down list.

Type The type of geometrical tolerance to be evaluated is represented by a symbol that is also shown on the drawing used by the metrologist. This symbol and the tolerance frame in which it is shown are interactive. Thus, a tolerance may be constructed directly from the drawing by clicking on certain parts of the frame. The frame is divided into three zones, each with a different cursor:

Click the first zone of the frame to define the type of tolerance to be evaluated:

The second zone of the frame is used (depending on the tolerance selected) to apply a Cylindrical tolerance zone, Projected tolerance zone, maximum material thickness (MMC), or minimum material thickness (LMC) to the feature toleranced:

Page 1254

ø: This symbol means that the tolerance zone is circular or cylindrical or spherical. The tolerance value will be equal to the diameter of the previous zones. : The projected tolerance zone allows an orientation or position tolerance to be applied, not to the feature toleranced itself, but to its extension outside the workpiece. : The maximum material requirement is used to define "boundary surfaces" called by the "virtual state" standard. The maximum material requirement, applied to the feature toleranced, allows the value of the geometrical tolerance to be increased, if the feature to be toleranced is not in its maximum material state. : The minimum material requirement is used to define "boundary surfaces" called by the "virtual state" standard. The minimum material requirement, applied to the feature toleranced, allows the value of the geometrical tolerance to be increased, if the feature to be toleranced is not in its minimum material state.

The last zone of the frame allows (depending on the tolerance) a maximum or a minimum material to be applied to the reference feature. Similarly, it specifies the reference(s) of the tolerances. None for form tolerances, a feature, for example, for the orientation tolerances, or even a complete reference system (A B C) for a location:

Parameters This section of the window varies according to the type of tolerance selected. For more information, refer to the pages describing each type of geometrical tolerance.

When you have completed the fields, click this button to launch the evaluation calculation. To close the window without applying any changes made.

Page 1255

Straightness tolerance

Straightness evaluates the form fault of a line. The software determines the straightness tolerance for a line by calculation of the distance between the two points orthogonally farthest from the line using the least squares method.

Note: Requesting the straightness of a line is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the line, and if these points are well distributed along the line.

Special case: straightness of an axis To determine the straightness of a cone or cylinder axis, the feature is divided into many independent circles at different heights and normal to the cone or cylinder axis and these circles are measured. A line is then constructed through the centers of the measured circles and the straightness is requested for this constructed line. Of course, the more circles and the better will be the straightness result.

The evaluation window of the straightness tolerance is as follows:

Page 1256

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the straightness tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database.

enables to select the calculation criteria. For more details, please see the page called Constraints on features. Type in the value of the straightness tolerance indicated on the drawing.

Quote the case corresponding to the tolerance area desired. The tolerance area depends on the tolerance type defined on the technical plan:

The tolerance area will equal the cylinder diameter in which you can find all points belonging to the line.

or the tolerance area will be limited by two parallel and coplanar lines. In that case, it is necessary to select a projection plane to calculate the straightness of a line.

Page 1257

Page 1258

Flatness tolerance

Flatness evaluates the form fault of a plane. The software determines the flatness tolerance for a plane by calculation of the distance between the two points orthogonally farthest from the plane using the least squares method.

Note: Requesting the flatness of a plane is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the plane, and if these points are well distributed its surface.

The evaluation window of the flatness tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the flatness tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:

Page 1259

by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database.

enables to select the calculation criteria. For more details, please see the page called Constraints on features. Type in the value of the flatness tolerance indicated on the drawing.

The zone of tolerance is limited by two parallel planes which include the toleranced plane.

Page 1260

Roundness tolerance

Roundness is used to esteem the form fault of a circle. The software determines the roundness tolerance for a circle by calculation of the distance between the two points orthogonally farthest from the circle using the least squares method.

Notes:  

Requesting the Roundness of a circle is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the circle, and if these points are well distributed on the circumference. Evaluating roundness of a circle in a cone is only meaningful if the cone was measured as a single path and subject to the following constraints: cone angle (Dim1)and cone direction (Parallel to).

The evaluation window of the roundness tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the roundness tolerance are as follows:

Page 1261

allows to select the feature to refer: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database.

enables to select the calculation criteria. For more details, please see the page called Constraints on features. Type in the value of the roundness tolerance indicated on the drawing.

The tolerance area is limited by two concentric and coplanar circles between which you can find all the probed points:

Example: For a cone The probed points are projected along the cone grade, onto the plane perpendicular to the cone axis and passing through their barycenter. These projected points, all located on the same plane, are used to calculated the tolerance.

Page 1262

Probing Points Projected probing points (used to calculate roundness) Projection plane

Page 1263

Cylindricity tolerance

Cylindricity is used to esteem the form fault of a cylinder.

Note: Requesting the Cylindricity of a cylinder is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the cylinder, and if these points are well distributed on the circumference and height.

The evaluation window of the cylindricity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the cylindricity tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer: by choosing it in the listbox,

Page 1264

or in the Features database.

enables to select the calculation criteria. For more details, please see the page called Constraints on features. Type in the value of the cylindricity tolerance indicated on the drawing.

The tolerance zone is limited by two coaxial cylinders which include the whole of the probed points:

Page 1265

Profile of line tolerance

The tolerance of a line profile is used to evaluate the form fault of a section. The software calculates the distance between the two points farthest from the defined section (perpendicular distance). The form tolerance is twice this distance divided into equal parts on each side of the defined section.

Note: Requesting the tolerance of a profile line is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the section, and if these points are well distributed over the section.

The evaluation window of the profile of line tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the profile of line tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:

Page 1266

by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database. Type in the value of the profile of line tolerance indicated on the drawing.

The tolerance area equals the diameter of the circle whos radius is the maximum distance between the measured section and the nominal section:

Page 1267

Profile of surface tolerance

The tolerance of a surface profile is used to evaluate the form fault of a cone, a sphere or any other form. The software calculates the distance of the point farthest from surface measured using the least squares method (perpendicular distance). The form tolerance is twice this distance divided into equal parts on each side of the defined least square surface.

Note: Requesting the tolerance of the surface profile for a cone, a sphere or any other surface is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the surface, cone or sphere, and if these points are well distributed over the feature.

The evaluation window of the profile of surface tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the profile of surface tolerance are as follows:

Page 1268

allows to select the feature to refer: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database.

enables to select the calculation criteria. For more details, please see the page called Constraints on features. Type in the value profile of surface tolerance indicated on the drawing.

Surface profile tolerance applied to a cone and to a sphere:

Page 1269

The software calculates a sphere from the measured points using the least squares method. Among the probed points, the software selects the point orthogonally farthest from the sphere surface. It then calculates a sphere centered on the original sphere and passing through this point. The tolerance zone is equal to twice the difference between the radii of two spheres.

The software calculates a cone from the measured points using the least squares method. Among the probed points, the software selects the point orthogonally farthest from the sphere surface. It then calculates a cone with the same angle and on the same axis as the original cone and passing through this point. The tolerance zone is equal to twice the difference between the radii of two cone bases.

For any other form To establish the tolerance: - surface points must be probed. These points are used to create a section, - the alignment is optimized for these points. The verification of the projection of the points onto the correct surface is taken into consideration, - a section is created using the previously measured points, - in the evaluation window, select the section that has been created as the toleranced feature.

Page 1270

Parallelism tolerance

There are several possible cases: - a line relative to a reference line, - a line relative to a reference surface, - a surface relative to a reference surface, - a surface relative to a reference line.

The evaluation window of the parallelism tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the parallelism tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:

Page 1271

by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database. If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

allows to select the reference feature: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database.

Type in the value of the parallelism tolerance indicated on the drawing.

For the features having an axis (line, cylinder, cone), it is possible to select the Tolerance Zone type specified by the plane. To do that, check the box corresponding to the correct tolerance zone. For instance, in the case of , a zone of a cylindrical or spherical or circular tolerance according to the feature to be toleranced is calculated. For parallelism between 2 features corresponding to lines (lines, cylinders, cones) the plane selected in the list represents the lines projection plane and not tolerance zone plane.

Select the calculation method: - Vectorial : The method using a length as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to a length entered by the operator. This method is useful when the tolerance must be calculated for a precise length or in the case of a projected tolerance:

Page 1272

- Cloud of points : This method uses points from the toleranced feature. These points are measured or constructed from other points so as to delimit a tolerance zone parallel to the reference feature:

- Nominal : The method using a defined limit as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to the nominal dimension of the feature to be toleranced. Of course, the toleranced feature must be defined:

Table of possible solutions for calculating parallelism

Page 1273

Page 1274

Perpendicularity

There are several possible cases: - a line relative to a reference line, - a line relative to a reference surface, - a surface relative to a reference surface, - a surface relative to a reference line.

The evaluation window of the perpendicularity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the perpendicularity tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:

Page 1275

by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database. If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

allows to select the reference feature: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database.

Type in the value of the perpendicularity tolerance indicated on the drawing.

For the features having an axis (line, cylinder, cone), check the box corresponding to the correct tolerance zone. The type of zone is determined by the tolerance on the drawing. For instance, in the case of , one calculates a zone of a cylindrical or spherical or circular tolerance according to the feature to be toleranced.

Select the calculation method: - Vectorial : The method using a length as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to a length entered by the operator. This method is useful when the tolerance must be calculated for a precise length or in the case of a projected tolerance. For a plane, the length is taken on the greatest slope relative to the reference feature.

Page 1276

- Cloud of points : The cloud of points method uses points from the toleranced feature. These points are measured or constructed from other points so as to delimit a tolerance zone perpendicular to the reference feature.

Page 1277

- Nominal : The method using a defined limit as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to the nominal size of the feature to be toleranced. Of course, the toleranced feature must be defined.

Page 1278

Table of possible solutions for calculating perpendicularity

Page 1279

Page 1280

Angularity tolerance

There are several possible cases: - a line relative to a reference line, - a line relative to a reference surface, - a surface relative to a reference surface, - a surface relative to a reference line.

The evaluation window of the angularity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the angularity tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:

Page 1281

by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database. If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

allows to select the reference feature: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database.

Type in the value of the inclination angle. It can be signed in order to define explicitly the tolerance zone, the calculation being the same as Angle calculation. Type in the value of the angularity tolerance indicated on the drawing.

For the features having an axis (line, cylinder, cone), check the box corresponding to the correct tolerance zone. The type of zone is determined by the tolerance on the drawing. For instance, in the case of , one calculates a zone of a cylindrical or spherical or circular tolerance according to the feature to be toleranced.

Select the calculation method: - Vectorial : The method using a length as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to a length entered by the operator. This method is useful when the tolerance must be calculated for a precise length or in the case of a projected tolerance. For a plane, the length is taken on the greatest slope relative to the reference feature.

Page 1282

- Cloud of points : This method uses points from the toleranced feature. These points are measured or constructed from other points so as to delimit a tolerance zone have a nominal angle i relative to the reference feature.

- Nominal : The method using a nominal limit as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to the nominal dimension of the feature to be toleranced. Of course, the toleranced feature must be defined.

Table of possible solutions for calculating angularity

Page 1283

Page 1284

True Position tolerance

There are several possible cases of position tolerance: - for a point, - for a line, - for a median plane or a plane surface. A position can be calculated either relative to a feature or to a an entire reference system.

The evaluation window of the true position tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the true position tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer:

Page 1285

by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database. If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

allows to select the reference feature: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database.

Enter the value corresponding to the distance between the toleranced feature and the reference feature. Type in the value of the true position tolerance indicated on the drawing. The type of zone is determined by the tolerance on the drawing. For instance, in the case of , one calculates a zone of a cylindrical or spherical or circular tolerance according to the feature to be toleranced.

Select the calculation method: - Vectorial : The method using a length as calculation feature obtains a tolerance over to a length entered by the operator. This method is useful when the tolerance must be calculated for a precise length or in the case of a projected tolerance. For example, for a cylinder, it is possible to enter a deviation over a Length of 35 mm Starting At 2 mm from zero of the reference point. The distance Starting At corresponds to the distance starting from the feature base until the plane of the alignment of definition to which the normal is closest to the orientation of the feature.

Page 1286

- Cloud of points : This method can be used only for the position of a line or a plane. The tolerance result is the distance between the point farthest from the measured plane or line and its symmetrical point relative to the nominal plane or line. This method is possible only if the features have been measured or constructed by passing through the points.

- Nominal : The method using a defined limit as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to the nominal dimension of the feature to be toleranced. Of course, the toleranced feature must be defined.

Table of possible solutions for calculating position tolerance

Page 1287

Page 1288

Page 1289

Multiple True Position tolerance

Multiple Location enables the positions of toleranced features with tolerances to be optimised, so as to minimise the deviation of the feature with the greatest deviation. The evaluation window of the multiple true position tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the multiple true position tolerance are as follows: Type in the value of the multiple true position tolerance indicated on the drawing. Click on this button to select in the features database the different features on which a tolerance has to be set.

Warning: All features have to be defined in the same alignment system.

Page 1290

enables to give a name to the alignment system which is the localization evaluation result.

enables to set up the desired moves (translations and rotations) in order to evaluate the localization.

It is possible, by quoting

or

to fix maximum or minimum material

onto the reference.

Results After evaluating the multiple location, the software creates:     

The resulting reference alignment obtained by optimizing the features' definition reference alignment. The result of the multiple location. The simple location of each of the features with tolerances. A copy of all toleranced features expressed in the resulting reference alignment. A reference alignment feature specifying the rotation and translation values of the created reference alignment, with the multiple location calculation.

In the Results window, the "Multiple location" feature will consist in the following feature(s):  

The value of the maximum deviation for the toleranced features The value of the gain connected with the maximum material on the reference when it has been selected.

Page 1291

Bidirectional multiple position tolerance

Bidirectional multiple position allows the positions of features with tolerances to be optimized to minimize the deviation between the measured points and theoretical points while taking two directions into account. When the bidirectional multiple position function is selected, the following window is displayed:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the bidirectionnal multiple position tolerance are as follows:

allows the name of the tolerance and its family to be specified.

shows the position symbol and allows a material maximum or minimum to be set for the features with tolerances or for the reference. The material maximum/minimum may be accessed by clicking the second and third boxes for the features when the features have been previously selected, and clicking the last box for the reference.

Page 1292

allows the features to be assigned a tolerance to be selected.

Warning: The features must all be defined in the same alignment. A material maximum or minimum may also be added to the features (by right-clicking the features). The T1 and T2 fields allow tolerance values in both directions to be entered. These two directions are determined by the feature definition alignment. Direction T1 is parallel to the X axis and direction T2 is parallel to the Y axis. Lastly, this window allows the optimized alignment resulting from the tolerance evaluation to be named. allows the tolerance zone to be expressed in polar coordinates. The orientation of the tolerance zone is then radial: Cartesian coordinate method

Measured point

Polar coordinate method

Defined point

In the above example, the measured point is within the tolerance in Cartesian coordinates, but outside the tolerance in polar coordinates.

allows the desired moves (translations and rotations) to evaluate the tolerance to be configured. As spherical position clauses are not supported, the three translations cannot be selected simultaneously. It is possible to select, at maximum, 1 rotation and 2 translations.

allows a material maximum or minimum to be set on the reference and also

Page 1293

allows the reference to be selected.

Using the results: Once bidirectional multiple position evaluation has been performed, the software creates: 

  

The result obtained for the position by giving the max. deviation on the first direction (t1) and the max. deviation on the second direction (t2). Max. deviations t1 and t2 do not necessarily originate from the same feature. If a material maximum or minimum was selected for the reference, the result of this multiple position also gives the material gain obtained on the reference. The simple position of each feature with a tolerance. A copy of each feature with a tolerance redefined in the result alignment. The result alignment obtained by optimizing the definition alignment, along with alignment information giving the translation and rotation values of this new alignment with respect to the previous alignment.

Page 1294

Composite Tolerance

There are two types of composite tolerance:

-

two standard multiple locations (positions),

or,

-

composite tolerance.

The two representations do not have the same significance (ASME Y14.5M-1994 standard).

The composite tolerance evaluation window is displayed as shown below:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerance evaluation windows are described on the Evaluate Geometrical Tolerance page.

Page 1295

The fields specific to composite tolerance are:

represents the composite tolerance symbol and allows you to select it.

used, when features are selected, to set a maximum or minimum thickness for the features to be toleranced.

used to open the Select Datums window.

allows the features to be assigned a tolerance to be selected.

Warning: The features must all be defined in the same alignment. A maximum or minimum material thickness may also be added to the features (by right-clicking the features).

PLTZF (Paterm Locating Tolerance Zone Framework) used to define the tolerance area of the first line. You may name it, enter the value of the tolerance area, and name the alignment to be created.

FRTZF (Feature Relative Tolerance Zone Framework) used to define the tolerance area of the second line. You may name it, enter the value of the tolerance area, and name the alignment to be created.

The Select Datums window is shown below:

Page 1296

Shows composite tolerance type and the values of the tolerance area.

used to select a feature as datum (reference) for the first line. The feature is automatically entered in the second line. The feature on the second line may be deleted by using the corresponding trash can symbol. According to the standard, the datum (reference) on the second line, if there is one, is necessarily the same as that on the first line. The selected feature may be deleted by using the trash can symbol for the first line. It will then be deleted from both lines. A maximum or minimum material thickness may be set for the second datum.

See also: Example 1, Example 2, Example 3, Example 4 and Example 5.

Page 1297

Example 1

Composite tolerance (ASME Y14.5M- 1994 standard) of the following type:

How is this geometrical tolerance read? In the box, there are two position symbols; this tolerance is therefore composed of two standard multiple positions:

and

How do I use the software to check this tolerance?



Step 1

Page 1298

Define and measure the three datum (reference) planes, A, B and C. Define and measure the 4 circles.

Warning: The 4 circles must be defined in the same alignment.



Step 2

Open the composite tolerance window and select Composite tolerance, two single:

Select the 4 circles and add the maximum material thickness.



Step 3

Enter the PLTZF and FRTZF. The PLTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Page 1299

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.8) and change alignment name or keep the original name. In this case, position is requested relative to the ABC alignment. Consequently there is no optimization. The FRTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.2) and change alignment name or keep the original name. In this case, the position is requested relative to the AB alignment (with A a Z normal plane and B an X normal plane). Consequently, the only degree of freedom that standard allows for calculation is translation in Y. 

Step 4

Enter the references (datums). Open the Select Datums window:

Complete the fields using the features A, B and C indicated on the part plane. In this example:

- Datum A = plane A - Datum B = plane B - Datum C = plane C In the first box, select the plane A feature. In the second box, select the plane B feature. In the third box, select the plane C feature. There is no datum in the second tolerance line, so the feature must be deleted using the trash can at the bottom.

Page 1300



Step 5

When tolerance is evaluated, the following features are created in the Feature Database:

LOCA_COMP1: composite tolerance result, specifying the two multiple positions. PLTZF1: multiple position result, corresponding to the first line. CERC_PLTZF and CERC-PLTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data in the first line. TOLREP1: alignment information, according to the data in the first line. FRTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the second line. CERC_FRTZF and CERC-FRTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data in the second line. TOLREP2: alignment information, according to the data in the second line.

The composite tolerance is in tolerance if the two multiple positions are in the tolerance.

Page 1301

Example 2

Composite tolerance (ASME Y14.5M- 1994 standard) of the following type:

How is this geometrical tolerance read? In the box, there is one position symbol, this tolerance is therefore a composite tolerance.

How do I use the software to check this tolerance?



Step 1

Define and measure the three datum (reference) planes, A, B and C. Define and measure the 4 circles.

Warning: The 4 circles must be defined in the same alignment.



Step 2

Open the composite tolerance window and select Composite tolerance, one composite:

Page 1302

Select the 4 circles and add the maximum material thickness.



Step 3

Enter the PLTZF and FRTZF. The PLTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.8) and change alignment name or keep the original name. In this case, position is requested relative to the ABC alignment. Consequently there is no optimization.

Page 1303

The FRTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.2) and change alignment name or keep the original name. In this case, the position is requested relative to the AB alignment (with A a Z normal plane and B an X normal plane). Consequently, the only degrees of freedom allowed by the calculation standard are translations in X and Y. In actual fact, given that it involves a composite tolerance, reference B sets orientation only and not position.



Step 4

Enter the composite tolerance datums. Open the Select Datums window:

Complete the fields using the features A, B and C indicated on the part plane. In this example:

- Datum A = plane A - Datum B = plane B - Datum C = plane C In the first box, select the plane A feature. In the second box, select the plane B feature. In the third box, select the plane C feature. There is no datum in the second line of the tolerance, so the feature must be deleted using the trash can at the bottom.



Step 5:

When tolerance is evaluated, the following features are created in the Feature Database:

Page 1304

LOCA_COMP1: composite tolerance result, specifying the two multiple positions. PLTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the first line. CERC_PLTZF and CERC-PLTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data in the first line. TOLREP1: alignment information, according to the data in the first line. FRTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the second line. CERC_FRTZF and CERC-FRTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data in the second line. TOLREP2: alignment information, according to the data in the second line.

The composite tolerance is in tolerance if the two multiple positions are in the tolerance.

Page 1305

Example 3

Composite tolerance (ASME Y14.5M- 1994 standard) of the following type:

How is this geometrical tolerance read? In the box, there are two position symbols; this tolerance is therefore composed of two standard multiple positions:

and

How do I use the software to check this tolerance?



Step 1

Page 1306

Define and measure the three datum (reference) planes, A, B and C. Define and measure the 4 circles.

Warning: The 4 circles must be defined in the same alignment.



Step 2

Open the composite tolerance window and select Composite tolerance, two single:

Select the 4 circles and add the maximum material thickness.



Step 3

Enter the PLTZF and FRTZF. The PLTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Page 1307

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.8) and change alignment name or keep the original name. In this case, position is requested relative to the ABC alignment. Consequently there is no optimization. The FRTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.2) and change alignment name or keep the original name. In this case, the position is requested relative to the AB alignment (with A a Z normal plane and B an Z normal circle). Consequently, the only degree of freedom that standard allows for calculation is translation in Z.



Step 4

Enter the references (datums). Open the Select Datums window:

Complete the fields using the features A, B and C indicated on the part plane. In this example:

- Datum A = plane A - Datum B = plane B - Datum C = plane C In the first box, select the plane A feature. In the second box, select the plane B feature. In the third box, select the plane C feature. There is no datum in the second tolerance line, so the feature must be deleted using the trash can at the bottom.

Page 1308



Step 5 :

When tolerance is evaluated, the following features are created in the Feature Database:

LOCA_COMP1: composite tolerance result, specifying the two multiple positions. PLTZF1: multiple position result, corresponding to the first line. CERC_PLTZF and CERC-PLTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data in the first line. TOLREP1: alignment information, according to the data in the first line. FRTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the second line. CERC_FRTZF and CERC-FRTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data in the second line. TOLREP2: alignment information, according to the data in the second line.

The composite tolerance is in tolerance if the two multiple positions are in the tolerance.

Page 1309

Example 4

Composite tolerance (ASME Y14.5M- 1994 standard) of the following type:

How is this geometrical tolerance read? In the box, there is one position symbol, this tolerance is therefore a composite tolerance.

How do I use the software to check this tolerance?



Step 1

Define and measure the 2 planes A and C (where C is a median plane) and the circle B. Define and measure the 4 circles.

Warning: The 4 circles must be defined in the same alignment.



Step 2

Open the composite tolerance window and select Composite tolerance, one composite:

Page 1310

Select the 4 circles and add the maximum material thickness.



Step 3

Enter the PLTZF and FRTZF. The PLTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.8) and change alignment name or keep the original name. In this case, position is requested relative to the ABC alignment. Consequently there is no optimization.

Page 1311

The FRTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.2) and change alignment name or keep the original name. In this case, the position is requested relative to the AB alignment (with A a Z normal plane and B an Z normal circle and C an X normal plane). Consequently, the only degrees of freedom allowed by the calculation standard are translations in X and Y. In actual fact, given that it involves a composite tolerance, reference C sets orientation only and not position.



Step 4

Enter the composite tolerance datums. Open the Select Datums window:

Complete the fields using the features A, B and C indicated on the part plane. In this example:

- Datum A = plane A - Datum B = circle B - Datum C = plane C In the first box, select the plane A feature. In the second box, select the circle B feature. In the third box, select the plane C feature.



Step 5:

When tolerance is evaluated, the following features are created in the Feature Database:

Page 1312

LOCA_COMP1: composite tolerance result, specifying the two multiple positions. PLTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the first line. CERC_PLTZF and CERC-PLTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data in the first line. TOLREP1: alignment information, according to the data in the first line. FRTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the second line. CERC_FRTZF and CERC-FRTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data in the second line. TOLREP2: alignment information, according to the data in the second line.

The composite tolerance is in tolerance if the two multiple positions are in the tolerance.

Page 1313

Example 5

Composite tolerance (ASME Y14.5M- 1994 standard) of the following type:

How is this geometrical tolerance read? In the box, there is one position symbol, this tolerance is therefore a composite tolerance.

How do I use the software to check this tolerance?



Step 1

Define and measure the 2 planes A and C (where C is a median plane) and the circle B. Define and measure the 4 circles.

Warning: The 4 circles must be defined in the same alignment.



Step 2

Open the composite tolerance window and select Composite tolerance, one composite:

Page 1314

Select the 4 circles and add the maximum material thickness.



Step 3

Enter the PLTZF and FRTZF. The PLTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.8) and change alignment name or keep the original name. In this case, position is requested relative to the ABC alignment. Consequently there is no optimization.

Page 1315

The FRTZF part corresponds to the following tolerance:

Enter a name or keep the original name, enter the tolerance value (in this example t=0.2) and change alignment name or keep the original name. In this case, the position is requested relative to the A alignment (with A a Z normal plane). Consequently, the only degrees of freedom allowed by the calculation standard are translations in X and Y and rotation around Z.



Step 4

Enter the composite tolerance datums. Open the Select Datums window:

Complete the fields using the features A, B and C indicated on the part plane. In this example:

- Datum A = plane A - Datum B = circle B - Datum C = plane C In the first box, select the plane A feature. In the second box, select the circle B feature. In the third box, select the plane C feature.



Step 5:

When tolerance is evaluated, the following features are created in the Feature Database:

Page 1316

LOCA_COMP1: composite tolerance result, specifying the two multiple positions. PLTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the first line. CERC_PLTZF and CERC-PLTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data in the first line. TOLREP1: alignment information, according to the data in the first line. FRTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the second line. CERC_FRTZF and CERC-FRTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data in the second line. TOLREP2: alignment information, according to the data in the second line.

The composite tolerance is in tolerance if the two multiple positions are in the tolerance.

Page 1317

Coaxiality / Concentricity tolerance

The software automatically distinguishes a concentricity from a coaxiality according to the features used for the calculation. If circle features are used, the software does concentricity tolerance automatically. Concentricity requires the presence of coplanar features. The circular tolerance zone is delimited by a circle having its center at the reference point. If two axial features are selected, the software does a coaxial tolerance automatically. The coaxial tolerance zone is delimited by a cylinder having its axis on the reference axis.

The evaluation window of the Coaxiality / Concentricity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the Coaxiality / Concentricity tolerance are as follows:

Page 1318

allows to select the feature to refer: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database. If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

allows to select the reference feature: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database.

Type in the value of the Coaxiality / Concentricity tolerance indicated on the drawing. The type of zone is determined by the tolerance on the drawing. For instance, in the case of , one calculates a zone of a cylindrical or spherical or circular tolerance according to the feature to be toleranced.

Select the calculation method: - Vectorial : The method using a length as calculation feature obtains a tolerance over a length entered by the operator. This method is useful when the tolerance must be calculated for a precise length or in the case of a projected tolerance. For example, for a cylinder you can enter a deviation over a Length of 35 mm Starting At 5 mm from the base. The distance Starting At corresponds to the distance starting from the feature base until the plane of the alignment of definition to which the normal is closest to the orientation of the feature.

Page 1319

- Cloud of points : The method using a cloud of points as calculation feature is the method which is closest to the norm. However, it can be used only for coaxial tolerance. The tolerance result is the distance between the point farthest from the measured line and its symmetrical point relative to the reference line. This method is possible only if the features have been measured or constructed by passing through the points

- Nominal : The method using a defined limit as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to the nominal dimension of the feature to be toleranced. Of course, the toleranced feature must be defined.

Table of possible solutions for calculating Coaxiality / Concentricity

Page 1320

Page 1321

Symmetry tolerance

The evaluation window of the symmetry tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the symmetry tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database. If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

Page 1322

allows to select the reference feature: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database.

Type in the value of the symmetry tolerance indicated on the drawing. The type of zone is determined by the tolerance on the drawing. For instance, in the case of , one calculates a zone of a cylindrical or spherical or circular tolerance according to the feature to be toleranced.

Select the calculation method: - Vectorial : The method using a length as calculation feature obtains a tolerance over a length entered by the operator. This method is useful when the tolerance must be calculated for a precise length or in the case of a projected tolerance. For example, for a cylinder, it is possible to enter a deviation over a Length of 35 mm Starting At 2 mm from the base. The distance Starting At corresponds to the distance starting from the feature base until the plane of the alignment of definition to which the normal is closest to the orientation of the feature.

- Cloud of points : The method using a cloud of points as calculation feature is the method which is closest to the norm. The tolerance result is the distance between the point farthest from the measured plane or line and its symmetrical point relative to the median reference plane or line. This method is possible only if the features have been measured or constructed by passing through the points

Page 1323

- Nominal : The method using a defined limit as calculation feature obtains a tolerance relative to the nominal dimension of the feature to be toleranced. Of course, the toleranced feature must be defined.

Table of possible solutions for calculating symmetry

Page 1324

Page 1325

Single Runout tolerance (or circular)

In the window allowing runout tolerance to be calculated, the software shows the type of runout calculated by means of radio buttons:   

circular axial runout for a plane, a cone circular radial runout for a circle, a cone circular conical runout for a cone.

Page 1326

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page.

Single axial runout tolerance (or circular axial) A plane may be selected as a toleranced feature to evaluate circular axial runout tolerance. Circular axial runout is used to evaluate the form fault of a plane, probed on a determined diameter. It is meaningless to request the circular axial runout of plane unless the plane has been measured with enough points and the points are correctly located. It is recommended to use the circular method, in which the center must closely coincide with the reference axis. The tolerance zone is limited by two planes distant from each other by the value of the tolerance t.

Circular runout

Feature Toleranced Ref. Feature

Page 1327

Single runout tolerance (or circular radial) Circular run-out evaluates the form fault of a circle centered on the reference axis. Evaluating circular run-out is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the circle and if these points are spread all around the circle. The tolerance zone is delimited by two circles having a difference of radius equal to the tolerance and having the reference axis as center.

Page 1328

Total Runout tolerance

There are three types of total run-out: Axial runout enables the runout defect of a plane to be evaluated during its rotation around the reference axis. The tolerance zone is the distance between the two planes perpendicular to the reference axis and containing the toleranced plane. Radial runout enables the runout defect of a cylinder to be evaluated during its rotation around the reference axis. The tolerance zone is the difference in the radii of the two cylinders containing the toleranced cylinder and coaxial with the reference axis. Conical runout enables the runout defect of a cone to be evaluated during its rotation around the reference axis. The tolerance zone is the normal distance to the surface of the cone between two cones coaxial with the reference axis.

The evaluation window of the total runout tolerance is as follows:

Page 1329

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the total runout tolerance are as follows:

allows to select the feature to refer: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database. If necessary, check one of the

or

boxes to activate the maximum material or the minimum material.

allows to select the reference feature: by choosing it in the listbox, or in the Features database.

Type in the value of the total runout tolerance indicated on the drawing.

Table of possible solutions for calculating a total runout

Page 1330

Evaluate Geometrical Tolerance

To evaluate a geometrical tolerance, select Evaluate from the Features menu or click bar.

in the Feature

The Geometrical Tolerance window for a feature is displayed as shown below, but varies slightly according to the feature selected:

The tabs are named as follows in the remainder of the explanation: General

Parameters

References

Standards

Degrees of freedom

Important note: The Parameters, References and/or Degrees of freedom tabs may be shown shaded (grayed out) for certain tolerances.

Name

Page 1331

shows the type of feature to be evaluated, here an inclination tolerance. When an evaluation window is opened, the software offers a default feature name, composed of feature type and an incremental number. For example INCL1, when the first inclination tolerance feature is defined. This name may be modified by the user. Enter the name of the feature to be created in this field, or select an existing feature from the drop-down list. This button is used to select a feature from the Feature database.

Note: The default name may be modified via the menu Settings > Advanced Parameters > Default feature name.

Family The feature may be assigned a family by entering family name in this field or selecting an existing family from the drop-down list.

Title block

The tolerance title block is progressively constructed as the information is entered in the window. Here, an inclination tolerance with a value of 0.100mm.

Example: Evaluation of a position tolerance of 0.150 mm with BACKPL and INCLCYL as reference features:

Note: Click on the areas of the title block to open the corresponding tag: Opening of the General tab. Opening of the Parameters tab. When it becomes possible to apply a maximum or minimum of material, the following window is displayed:

Page 1332

Opening of the References tab.

General Tab

Select the type of tolerances to be evaluated from the drop-down list.

Select the feature to be toleranced: in the Feature Database. in the CAD Database. by clicking on the desired feature in the 3D View.

Note: The features to be toleranced, selected from the Feature Database are displayed in black, those selected from the CAD Database are displayed in blue:

When displayed in blue, the features can be renamed by clicking on their name. Use this button to delete the feature from the selection.

Enter the dimension of the tolerance zone (directly or by using the arrows).

Note: For profile or surface tolerances, new parameters are displayed in the tab. Enter the offset value to be applied to the distribution of the tolerance. Click this button to use the unilateral criterion.

Page 1333

Parameters Tab

Modifiers : The maximum material requirement, applied to the feature toleranced, allows the value of the geometrical tolerance to be increased, if the feature to be toleranced is not in its maximum material state.. : The minimum material requirement, applied to the feature toleranced, allows the value of the geometrical tolerance to be increased, if the feature to be toleranced is not in its minimum material state..

Tolerance zone

Select the shape of the tolerance zone: cylindrical (axial), planar, spherical or surface. For cylindrical and spherical zones, the tolerance value will be equal to the diameter. For a planar zone, the tolerance value will be equal to the distance separating the two planes. Select the direction of the tolerance zone by clicking on this button.

Example: Planar tolerance zone Select a normal Z feature, for example, to define a tolerance zone delimited by 2 parallel planes at XY.

Page 1334

Example: Surface tolerance zone Select a Z direction feature. The tolerance zone is then contained within a normal Z plane.

Projected tolerance zone : The projected tolerance zone allows an orientation or position tolerance to be applied, not to the feature toleranced itself, but to its extension outside the workpiece. Enter the length of the projected tolerance zone: Enter the position of the projected tolerance zone.

Examples: Positioning tolerance on a cylinder:

Page 1335

References Tab

Page 1336

Select the tolerance reference feature(s) using the icon of the database

.

Click this button to use the partial references of the selected feature instead of its full measurement. The tolerance calculation takes into account the relevant plane and its partial references. Thus, the reference features are not then measured for calculating the tolerance, only the reference entities are taken into account. The partial references are geometric point type features. Then select the points in the Feature database.

Important note: The geometrical points used as specified reference must be defined on the CAD surface.

Example 1: Evaluation of a position tolerance with the partial references of planes A, B and C as reference features. The partial references are represented by the following symbol:

.

Page 1337

Example2: The specified references can also be located in offset planes to the reference plane. This is the case for A3 in the following example.

Example 3: The specified references can also be located in warped surfaces.

Page 1338

See example of use.

Use this button to delete the reference feature(s) from the selection.

Standards Tab

Page 1339

Used to select between the calculation mode, the ASME standard or the least square method. The tolerances impacted by this selection are tolerances for which a reference system exists. When the criterion selected is Standard, the calculation mode is as follows:  

For the cylinder feature: Minimum Circumscribed if tree structure and Minimum Inscribed if hole. For the plane feature (except median plane): Plane passing through the farthest 3 points.

This option is used to create additional results features when evaluating certain tolerances (Multiple position, Composite, Line profile, Surface profile, Coaxiality/Concentricity, Symmetry, Parallelism, Perpendicularity and Inclination) in addition to the default features:   

alignment information for the calibrated alignment features with tolerances in the calibrated alignment reference features in the calibrated alignment

Then, when the option is selected, the following features are created, in addition to the previous list of features:   

alignment information for the Nominal and Measured alignments if they are created during tolerance best-fit. single tolerances associated with each feature with tolerances during evaluation of a multiple position tolerance. multiple position tolerances and the features associated with FRTZF parts (first line of the title block) and PLTZF parts (second line of the title block) during composite tolerance evaluation. Note: The features created are not printable.

Page 1340

This field is filled in if the tolerance is defined by a CAD click. Uncheck the Associate box to deactivate the link between the toleranced feature and the CAD that was seslected from the Configuration > Units > Standard menu. Indicate the standard used to evaluate the tolerance.

Degrees of Freedom Tab This tab is only available when editing the position tolerance.

Important note: If the degrees of freedom are modified, the reference features are no longer complied with.

Indicates the calibrated alignment. Used to modify the calibrated alignment. The selection is made from the drop-down list of calibrated alignments. Check this box to access the degrees of freedom to be allowed. By default, the permissible degrees of freedom are those allowed by the reference features.

Indicates the expression alignment.

Page 1341

Check the boxes corresponding to the axes to be constrained in translation.

Check the boxes corresponding to the axes to be constrained in rotation. The left-hand part of the window is used to constrain the positions, the right-hand part is used to constrain optimizations between certain limits.

This button gives access to the tolerance evaluation options. The following window is displayed:

No measurement or retrieval is executed. If the features have already been evaluated, the tolerance is defined and evaluated, otherwise it is only defined. Used to measure the features during tolerance evaluation. If the features have already been measured, they are not measured again. Used to extract the features during tolerance evaluation, if they were not already evaluated. Check this box to re-evaluate the features that were already measured or retrieved. If the box is not checked, these features are not modified.

Once all the fields have been completed, click this button to launch tolerance calculation. Closes the window without applying any changes made.

Page 1342

Straightness tolerance

Straightness evaluates the form fault of a line. The software determines the straightness tolerance for a line by calculation of the distance between the two points orthogonally farthest from the line calculated by Tchebitchev.

Note: Requesting the straightness of a line is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the line, and if these points are well distributed along the line.

The evaluation window of the straightness tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page.

In the tab

, the tolerance zone can be selected from among others:

Page 1343

Select the tolerance zone of the features as desired, axial or surface. The tolerance zone depends on the tolerancing type requested on the dimensioning plane:

Note: When evaluating a straightness tolerance on a cylinder, generatrixes are virtually created from the probing points. A calculation is then executed to recover the deviation of each generatrix with respect to the nominal axis. The tolerance is then equal to the greatest deviation.

Page 1344

Flatness tolerance

Flatness evaluates the form fault of a plane. The software determines the flatness tolerance for a plane by calculation of the distance between the two points orthogonally farthest from the plane using Tchebytchev.

Note: Requesting the flatness of a plane is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the plane, and if these points are well distributed its surface.

The evaluation window of the flatness tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page.

The zone of tolerance is limited by two parallel planes which include the toleranced plane.

Page 1345

Page 1346

Roundness tolerance

Roundness is used to esteem the form fault of a circle. The software determines the roundness tolerance for a circle by calculation of the distance between the two points orthogonally farthest from the circle calculated by Tchebitchev.

Notes:  

Requesting the Roundness of a circle is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the circle, and if these points are well distributed on the circumference. Evaluating roundness of a circle in a cone is only meaningful if the cone was measured as a single path and subject to the following constraints: cone angle (Dim1)and cone direction (Parallel to).

The evaluation window of the roundness tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page.

Page 1347

The tolerance area is limited by two concentric and coplanar circles between which you can find all the probed points:

Note: When evaluating a roundness tolerance on a cylinder, circles along the contour of the cylinder are virtually created from probing points. A calcualtion is then executed to recover the deviation of each circle with respect to the nominal axis. The tolerance is then equal to the greatest deviation.

Example: For a cone The probed points are offset along the cone gradient, onto the plane perpendicular to the cone axis and passing through their barycenter. These projected points, all located on the same plane, are used to calculated the tolerance.

Probing Points Projected probing points (used to calculate roundness) Projection plane

Page 1348

Cylindricity tolerance

The cylindricity is used to evaluate the shape defect of a cylinder. The software determines the cylindricity tolerance of a cylilnder by calculating the distance separating the two orthogonally farthest points to the cylinder, calculated by Tchebitchev.

Note: Requesting the Cylindricity of a cylinder is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the cylinder, and if these points are well distributed on the circumference and height.

The evaluation window of the cylindricity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page.

The tolerance zone is limited by two coaxial cylinders which include the whole of the probed points:

Page 1349

Page 1350

Profile of line tolerance

The tolerance of a line profile is used to evaluate the form fault of a section. The software calculates the distance between the two points farthest from the defined section (perpendicular distance). The form tolerance is twice this distance divided into equal parts on each side of the defined section.

Note: Requesting the tolerance of a profile line is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the section, and if these points are well distributed over the section.

The evaluation window of the profile of line tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. Check this box to create a composite tolerance. The title block preview shows that it then is divided in two. Click this button to use the unilateral criterion. The tolerance then becomes negative.

Page 1351

Enter the offset value to be applied to the distribution of the tolerance. This offset is applied positively.

The tolerance area equals the diameter of the circle whos radius is the maximum distance between the measured section and the nominal section:

Page 1352

Profile of surface tolerance

The tolerance of a surface profile is used to evaluate the form fault of a cone, a sphere or any other form. The tolerance zone is the normal distance to the surface of the feature, the cone for example, between two cones coaxial with the reference axis.

Note: Requesting the tolerance of the surface profile for a cone, a sphere or any other surface is meaningful only if you have measured enough points on the surface, cone or sphere, and if these points are well distributed over the feature.

The evaluation window of the profile of surface tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page.

Selecting undefined features When the features to be toleranced are not defined, Surface features are recognized.

Page 1353

There are two ways of selecting such surfaces: by clicking in the 3D View and via the CAD Database. Each click on a CAD entity in the 3D View or each selection of a CAD entity in the database results in a Surface feature being displayed in the list of features to be toleranced. To assign several CAD surfaces in a single feature, hold the

key down while selecting them.

Example: To select two CAD entities in the 3D View: For two Surface features

For a single Surface feature

A tooltip (bubble help) shows you to which features the surfaces belong:

To add surfaces, select the feature to be modified from the list, then: - Hold

down and click the surface to be added in the 3D View or

- Hold

down and select the surfaces to be added in the Database.

Page 1354

Note: If no feature is selected in the list, the add surface operation is attributed to the last feature added to the list. To have the software recognize geometrical features (plane, cylinder, cone) instead of Surface features, modify the SurfaceProfileTolerancedFeaturesMode parameter in the USER tab, ToleranceAnalyse section. SurfaceProfileTolerancedFeaturesMode = 1, default mode, the CAD entities are recognized as Surface feature SurfaceProfileTolerancedFeaturesMode = 0, CAD entities are recognized as geometrical features.

Check this box to create a composite tolerance. The title block preview shows that it then is divided in two. Click this button to use the unilateral criterion. The tolerance then becomes negative.

Enter the offset value to be applied to the distribution of the tolerance. This offset is applied positively.

Page 1355

Surface profile tolerance applied to a cone and to a sphere:

The software calculates a sphere from the measured points. Among the probed points, the software selects the point orthogonally farthest from the sphere surface. It then calculates a sphere centered on the original sphere and passing through this point. The tolerance zone is equal to twice the difference between the radii of two spheres.

Page 1356

The software calculates a cone from the measured points. Among the probed points, the software selects the point orthogonally farthest from the sphere surface. It then calculates a cone with the same angle and on the same axis as the original cone and passing through this point. The tolerance zone is equal to twice the difference between the radii of two cone bases.

For any other form To establish the tolerance: - Surface points must be probed. These points are used to create a section, - A section is created using the previously measured points, - In the evaluation window, select the section that has been created as the toleranced feature.

Page 1357

Parallelism tolerance

The evaluation window of the parallelism tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The tolerance zones available in the second tab are cylindrical and flat surface. The points of the feature to be toleranced, previously measured or constructed from points, are used to delimit a tolerance zone parallel to the reference.

Page 1358

Table of possible solutions for calculating parallelism

Page 1359

Perpendicularity

The evaluation window of the perpendicularity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The tolerance zones available in the second tab are cylindrical and flat surface. The points of the feature to be toleranced, previously measured or constructed from points, are used to delimit a tolerance zone perpendicular to the feature.

Page 1360

Table of possible solutions for calculating perpendicularity

Page 1361

Page 1362

Angularity tolerance

The evaluation window of the angularity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The tolerance zones available in the second tab are cylindrical and flat surface.

The points of the feature to be toleranced, previously measured or constructed from points, are used to define an inclined tolerance zone of a theoretical angle i with respect to the reference feature.

Page 1363

Table of possible solutions for calculating angularity

Page 1364

True Position tolerance

A position can be calculated either relative to a feature or to a an entire reference system.

The evaluation window of the true position tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page.

Important note: For a line position tolerance  

When the toleranced feature is a measured 2D feature, the tolerance zone to be applied is a planar area. When the toleranced feature is a line constructed by optimization, the tolerance zone to be applied is a cylindrical zone.

Table of possible solutions for calculating position tolerance

Page 1365

Page 1366

Multiple True Position tolerance

Multiple Location enables the positions of toleranced features with tolerances to be optimised, so as to minimise the deviation of the feature with the greatest deviation. The evaluation window of the multiple true position tolerance is as follows. It can be accessed when several features (of the same type) are selected from the Database.

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the multiple true position tolerance are as follows: See Composite tolerance. See Bidirectional tolerance.

Results After evaluating the multiple location, the software creates: 

The resulting reference alignment obtained by optimizing the features' definition reference alignment.

Page 1367

   

The result of the multiple location. The simple location of each of the features with tolerances. A copy of all toleranced features expressed in the resulting reference alignment. A reference alignment feature specifying the rotation and translation values of the created reference alignment, with the multiple location calculation.

In the Results window, the "Multiple location" feature will consist in the following feature(s):  

The value of the maximum deviation for the toleranced features The value of the gain associated to the maximum/minimum of material on the reference.

Page 1368

Bidirectional multiple position tolerance

Bidirectional multiple position allows the positions of features with tolerances to be optimized to minimize the deviation between the measured points and theoretical points while taking two directions into account. When the bidirectional multiple position function is selected, the following window is displayed:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page. The specific fields to the bidirectionnal multiple position tolerance are as follows:

The features must all be defined in the same alignment. A material maximum or minimum may also be added to the features (by right-clicking the features). The T1 and T2 fields allow tolerance values in both directions to be entered. These two directions are determined by the feature definition alignment. Direction T1 is parallel to the X axis and direction T2 is parallel to the Y axis. General tab Check this box to create a bidirectional tolerance.

Page 1369

Assign the first value to the tolerance zone found on the first line and assign the second value to the tolerance on the second line. The first value corresponds to T1, the second to T2. The features must all be defined in the same alignment. It is also possible to add a maximum or minimum of material to the features. The T1 and T2 fields allow entry of tolerance values in both directions. These two directions are determined by the feature definition alignment. Direction T1 is parallel to the X axis and direction T2 is parallel to the Y axis. The tolerance zone is limited by a parallelipiped with section T1xT2 the axis of which is in the theoretically exact position of the line considerd, provided the tolerance is prescribed within two planes perpendicular with respect to each other.

Parameters tab

This tab allows the tolerance zone to be expressed in polar coordinates. The orientation of the tolerance zone is then radial:

Cartesian coordinate method

Polar coordinate method

Page 1370

Measured point

Defined point

In the above example, the measured point is within the tolerance in Cartesian coordinates, but outside the tolerance in polar coordinates.

References tab This tab is used to determine the reference system of the tolerance.

Using the results: Once bidirectional multiple position evaluation has been performed, the software creates: 

  

The result obtained for the position by giving the max. deviation on the first direction (t1) and the max. deviation on the second direction (t2). Max. deviations t1 and t2 do not necessarily originate from the same feature. If a material maximum or minimum was selected for the reference, the result of this multiple position also gives the material gain obtained on the reference. The simple position of each feature with a tolerance. A copy of each feature with a tolerance redefined in the result alignment. The result alignment obtained by optimizing the definition alignment, along with alignment information giving the translation and rotation values of this new alignment with respect to the previous alignment.

Page 1371

Composite Tolerance Composite multiple position allows the positions of features with tolerances to be optimized to minimize the deviation between the measured points and theoretical points while taking two reference systems into account. The composite tolerance evaluation window is displayed as shown below:

The fields common to all geometrical tolerance evaluation windows are described on the Evaluate Geometrical Tolerance page. The fields specific to composite tolerance are: General tab Check this box to create a composite tolerance.

Assign the first value to the tolerance zone found on the first line and assign the second value to the tolerance on the second line. References tab

Page 1372

When adding a reference, the window is then displayed as follows:

Check the boxes corresponding to the references to also assign them to the second tolerance zone.

Note: During composite tolerance evaluation, another tolerance cannot be selected by clicking in the 3D View. The

arrow should then be clicked to display the scrolling list of available tolerances.

See also: Example given below.

Page 1373

Example

Composite tolerance (ASME Y14.5M- 1994 standard) of the following type:

How is this geometrical tolerance read? In the box, there is one position symbol, this tolerance is therefore a composite tolerance.

How do I use the software to check this tolerance?



Step 1

Define and measure the three datum (reference) planes, A, B and C. Define and measure the 4 circles.



Step 2

Open the composite tolerance window and select Composite position tolerance:

Page 1374

Select the 4 circles.



Step 3

Enter the tolerance values (t1 = 0.8 and t2=0.2) in the General tab and add a material maximum in the Parameters tab (or by clicking in the title block).



Step 4

Enter the the composite tolerance datums. Complete the fields using the features A, B and C indicated on the part plane. In this example:

- datum A = plane A - datum B = plane B - datum C = plane C In the first box, select the plane A feature. In the second box, select the plane B feature. In the third box, select the plane C feature. In the Repeated datums part, check the boxes corresponding to the features with datums A and B.

Page 1375



Step 5:

When tolerance is evaluated, the following features are created in the Feature Database:

LOCA_COMP1: composite tolerance result, specifying the two multiple positions. PLTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the first line. CERC_PLTZF and CERC-PLTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data in the first line. TOLREP1: alignment information, according to the data in the first line. FRTZF1: result of the multiple position corresponding to the second line. CERC_FRTZF and CERC-FRTZF: for each circle, re-evaluated circle and single position according to the data in the second line.

Page 1376

TOLREP2: alignment information, according to the data in the second line.

The composite tolerance is in tolerance if the two multiple positions are in the tolerance.

Page 1377

Coaxiality / Concentricity tolerance

The software automatically distinguishes a concentricity from a coaxiality according to the features used for the calculation. If circle features are used, the software does concentricity tolerance automatically. Concentricity requires the presence of coplanar features. The circular or spherical tolerance zone is delimited by a circle or a sphere having its center at the reference point. If two axial features are selected, the software does a coaxial tolerance automatically. The coaxial tolerance zone is delimited by a cylinder having its axis on the reference axis.

The evaluation window of the Coaxiality / Concentricity tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page.

Page 1378

Table of possible solutions for calculating Coaxiality / Concentricity

Page 1379

Symmetry tolerance

The evaluation window of the symmetry tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a geometrical tolerance page.

Page 1380

Table of possible solutions for calculating symmetry

Page 1381

Single (or Circular) Runout Tolerance

There are three types of runout: axial, radial and conical. Runout type is automatically selected according to the feature to be toleranced:   

circular axial runout for a plane. circular radial runout for a circle. circular conical runout for a cone.

The fields common to all geometrical tolerance evaluation windows are described on the Evaluate Geometrical Tolerance page.

Single axial runout (or circular axial runout) tolerance The circular radial runout is used to evaluate the defect of a circle, taken on a planar surface, rotating around a reference axis. A plane should be selected as a toleranced feature to evaluate a circular axial runout tolerance. It is meaningless to request the circular axial runout of a plane unless the plane has been measured with enough points and the points are correctly distributed. When measuring the plane, it is recommended to use the circular method, in which the center must closely coincide with the reference axis. For each radial position, the tolerance zone is limited by two circumferences distant by t and located on the

Page 1382

measurement cylinder coaxial with the reference axis. Feature toleranced Circular runout Reference feature

Single radial (or circular) runout tolerance The circular radial runout is used to evaluate the defect of a circle, taken on a cylindrical surface, rotating around a reference axis. It is meaningless to request the circular radial runout of a circle unless the circle has been measured with enough points and the points are correctly distributed over the diameter. In each measurement plane, the tolerance zone is limited by 2 circles (whose radius difference is equal to the tolerance) covering the toleranced circle and whose axes are coincident with the reference axis.

Page 1383

Single conical (or circular conical) runout tolerance The circular radial runout is used to evaluate the defect of a circle, taken on a conical surface, rotating around a reference axis. In each measurement plane, the tolerance zone is limited by 2 circles (whose radius difference is equal to the tolerance) covering the toleranced cone and whose axes are coincident with the reference axis.

Important note: The cone can be toleranced only if it was measured with one path.

Page 1384

Page 1385

Total Runout tolerance

There are three types of total run-out: Axial runout enables the runout defect of a plane to be evaluated during its rotation around the reference axis. The tolerance zone is the distance between the two planes perpendicular to the reference axis and containing the toleranced plane. Radial runout enables the runout defect of a cylinder to be evaluated during its rotation around the reference axis. The tolerance zone is the difference in the radii of the two cylinders containing the toleranced cylinder and coaxial with the reference axis. Conical runout enables the runout defect of a cone to be evaluated during its rotation around the reference axis. The tolerance zone is the normal distance to the surface of the cone between two cones coaxial with the reference axis.

The evaluation window of the total runout tolerance is as follows:

The common fields to all geometrical tolerances evaluation windows are described in the Evaluate a

Page 1386

geometrical tolerance page.

Table of possible solutions for calculating a total runout

Page 1387

Example of tolerance evaluation using specified references

Hole position tolerance with the partial references (datum target) of planes A, B and C as reference features.

Step 1: Define plane 1 then define and measure specified references A1, A2 and A3.

Page 1388

Step 2: Define plane B then define and measure specified references B1 and B2.

Page 1389

Step 3: Define plane C then define and measure specified reference C1.

Page 1390

Step 4: Define and measure the HOLE cylinder.

Page 1391

Step 5: Enter information in the tolerance evaluation window as follows:

Page 1392

Apply specified references to planes A, B and C in the third tab of the window. Click Evaluate to evaluate the tolerance. The feature and alignment databases are then displayed as follows:

Page 1393

The 3D View is then displayed as follows:

Page 1394

Evaluate Text/Value

To evaluate a Text/Value feature, select Evaluate > Text/Value from the Features menu. This function is used to: - Create a variable in a program - Create selection lists (also creates variables) - Calculate values (that can be used as variables) - Display images in the 3D View. The window is shown below:

The common fields to all evaluation windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The fields specific to Text/Value features are:

Text This field is used to enter: - A comment, that may be displayed in a sticker, a report or a variable. For more information, see the None/Input Value page.

Page 1395

- A mathematical expression (formula). For more information, see the Mathematical Expression page. - A selection list (listbox/drop-down list)

This drop-down list allows an operator or function to be selected for a mathematical expression.

This drop-down list allows one of the following actions to be selected: None: Action used when creating Text features or certain variables. Input Value: Action used when creating Value features or certain variables. Sel. from listbox: Action used to create a listbox (drop-down list). Math. expression: Action used for the calculator function. Image: Action used to create an image in the 3D View. Report comment: Action used to insert a comment in a report.

Actual / Nominal Used to enter an actual value and/or a nominal value and to assign a tolerance to these values if required.

Click this button to create the Text/Value feature corresponding to the parameters entered. It is then displayed in the Feature Database. Click this button to exit the window without creating the Text/Value feature.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1396

None/Input Value

None To create a comment



A comment may be entered. This will be displayed in a sticker or report. To do this, delete the numerical values displayed in the Actual (by default, nothing should be displayed in this field) and Nominal fields, and select None from the Action drop-down list:

Example: Sticker:

Report:

Page 1397

In the report, you can remove the automatic comments inserted by the software (feature name, VAL1 for example and its type, Text/Value). To do this:  

The Text/Value feature must be printable, Its first result line (VAL) must be not printable.

The report will then be as shown below:



To create a variable

You can create a variable that can be used in the editable numerical fields in the define, measure, construct, and evaluate geometrical tolerance windows.

Example: Creating a DIAM variable, corresponding to a diameter of value 10

Page 1398

When the circle CIR1 is defined, the DIAM variable may be used to complete the Diameter field. Right-click the Diameter field and select Features Database from the pop-up (context) menu:

Page 1399

The following window is then displayed, allowing the DIAM variable to be selected as the value to be assigned to the diameter:

In program: When this function is used in Teach-in (learning) mode, the following line is added:

Variables created with the None action cannot be modified during program execution.

Input Value 

To create a variable

You can create a variable that can be used in the editable numerical fields of all the define, measure, construct, and evaluate geometrical tolerance windows in the same way as for the None action, described

Page 1400

above.

In program: When this function is used in Teach-in (learning) mode, the following line is added:

Variables created with the Input Value action may be modified during program execution (unlike variables created with the None action).



Entering a value measured with an external system

By selecting the Input Value action in the evaluate window, you can also create a Text/Value feature that allows a value measured with an external system (for example, a slide caliper) to be manually entered.

Page 1401

Select from listbox (creating a selection list)

A value may be assigned to a Text/Value feature according to the choice made in a list of options. This function is particularly useful in program mode. To create a selection list, select the Sel. from listbox action in the Evaluate Text/Value window:

The common fields to all evaluation windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.

Enter the list of values to be created in the Text field. To insert a carriage return (line break), press the Ctrl + Enter keys on the keyboard. Adding the $ character in front of a value allows the value to be matched to a question in the header of the Text/Value information window. Adding the & character in front of a value allows a letter on the keyboard to be used as a shortcut for selection from the list.

Example: To create a list of values with:

Page 1402

- A question in the header - The choices Yes and No - A keyboard shortcut for each choice The Evaluate Text/Value window must be configured as follows:

The list obtained is shown below:

The choice Yes is automatically selected by pressing the Y key on the keyboard. The choice No is automatically selected by pressing the N key on the keyboard. Click this button to close the window without answering the question.

Page 1403

Click this button to confirm the selected answer.

In program: To improve successive opening of selection lists when a program is running, these lists now grouped in a single window. Example of a program with three Text/Value evaluations:

When the program is run, the following window is displayed with the selection lists for the three features:

If the Text/Value instructions are cut by a masked line or stop point, the instructions will be displayed in several successive windows. The same is true for execution in step mode.

Note: To retrieve the value selected in the listbox, an If-Then-Else conditional statement must be used. The text/value is then of value 1 if the first choice is selected, value 2 if the second choice is selected, and so on.

Page 1404

Mathematical Expression (calculator function)

This function allows a mathematical expression (formula) to be calculated from actual values. To use the calculator function, select the Math. expression action in the Evaluate Text/Value window:

The common fields to all evaluation windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.

Enter the desired mathematical expression in the Text field: Feature measurement result (actual) values may be used to perform calculations (the diameter of a cylinder, for example). To do this: - Enter the expression (formula) manually using the following syntax: [feature_name->field], for example, to use the diameter of cylinder CYL1: [CYL1->DIAM]. - Or use the

button to select the feature and value from the following window:

Page 1405

This drop-down list allows an operator or the software calculation function to be selected. The operators and functions are described in the Appendix. allows the nominal value of the feature to be used instead of the measured (actual) value. The arrow is then doubled when the variable is written.

Example calculations Position X of CIRC1 - Position Y of CIRC2 : Nominal X position of CIRC1 - Nominal Y position of CIRC2 Maximum of the Normal Deviation (ND) of N surface points (SRF1,SRF2,...;SRFN) Cosine of position Y of CIRC1

[CIRC1->X]-[CIRC2->Y] [CERC1->X]-[CERC2->Y] MX([SRF1->ND],[SRF2->ND],...,[SRFN->ND]) COS([CIRC1->Y])

Warning: in this case, the mathematical expression is saved in the feature comment. The comment must not therefore be modified, in particular in program mode, as otherwise the mathematical expression will no longer be valid.

Page 1406

Creating an image in the 3D View

An image in *.BMP, *.JPEG or *.gif format may be assigned to a Text/Value feature. This function is used to display an image in the 3D View by means of the label associated with the Text/Value feature. To create an image associated with a Text/Value feature, select the Image action in the Evaluate Text/Value window:

The following window is then displayed:

Page 1407

Select the file to be used.

The Text/Value feature created does not have a value but contains the path to the image.

Example:

Page 1408

A sticker may be associated with this Text/Value feature, allowing the image to be displayed in the 3D View:

Page 1409

Page 1410

Report comment

A comment may be entered, which will show in a report. To create a comment, select the Report comment action in the Evaluate text / value window:

The common fields to all evaluation windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. Enter the comment to be created in the Text field. The comment may be on one or more lines as in the following example:

Page 1411

The report will then be as shown below:

Page 1412

Evaluate Alignment Info

Page 1413

Evaluate Alignment Info

To evaluate alignment information, select Evaluate > Alignment Info via the Features menu. This function is used to define the rotation and translation values for an alignment change by creating an Alignment Info feature in the Feature Database. The window is shown below:

The common fields to all evaluation windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to evaluate Alignment Info features are:

Alignment Information This drop-down list allows you to select the alignment for which you want to know the translation and rotation values with respect to the definition alignment.

Theoretical Translation / Rotation values The Tx, Ty, Tz, Rx, Ry, and Rz fields allow the nominal (theoretical) alignment change values to be entered.

Page 1414

The rotation and translation values are applied according to the mathematical conventions for alignment changes: first the rotations (Rx, then Ry, then Rz), followed by translations (Tx, Ty, Tz).

Evaluated Translation / Rotation values These fields indicate the calculated rotation/translation values existing between two alignments selected. They are not modifiable.

when you have completed the fields, click this button to launch the evaluation calculation. exits the window without applying any changes made.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is inserted:

Page 1415

Tolerance

To assign dimensional tolerance values to an Alignment Info feature, select Evaluate > Alignment Info via the Features menu. In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

, , be toleranced.

,

,

,

:

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the movements to

enter the higher and lower tolerance values for each of these movements.

Notes:  

If an incorrect sign or value is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify them, select the Set-Up

Page 1416

Default Parameters option from the Features menu.

Page 1417

Duplicate This function is used to make a copy of one or more features. This enables two features with identical nominal and actual values to be obtained (the name of each duplicated feature is different). This is used to obtain two types of results for a single measured feature, for example, the position of a circle in two separate alignments. Once the feature has been duplicated, it may be redefined. This function can be accessed: - From the Features > Duplicate menu - From the Feature database context menu. The window is shown below:

The software offers to duplicate the last feature displayed in the Features Database, whether an actual or a nominal.

Select the feature to be duplicated or select it from the database using the button. When several features are selected, this box is displayed as shown below:

A tooltip (bubble help) shows the user which features will be duplicated:

Select the type of feature to be produced from the drop-down list.

Enter a name for the duplicated feature or select a preset feature from the drop-down list.

Page 1418

If several features are selected, this field enables a common prefix to be applied to all the duplicated features. The default prefix supplied is DUPLICATE_. The duplicated feature may be assigned a family by entering family name in the field or selecting an existing family from the drop-down list.

When several features are selected and this field is empty, each duplicated feature will keep the same family as its source feature. - Click this button to duplicate the feature. Click this button to close the window.

Notes:  



A type of feature may be duplicated to give another type of feature, a circle may be duplicated as a geometrical point for example, if only the position of the feature and not its dimensions are wanted. Tolerances: When a feature is duplicated, its tolerance values are the same as those of the source (original) feature, if the feature has not been previously defined. Otherwise the parameters are those defined. This mode of operation is the same both in a working session and when a program is run. Printing parameters: When a feature is duplicated, its print settings are the same as those of the source (original) feature, if the feature has not been previously defined. Otherwise the parameters are those defined. This mode of operation is only valid for a working session.

In program: The print settings depend on the properties of the command line for the Duplicate function. When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1419

Reverse Orientation This function is used to change feature orientation. It may be useful to change orientation when defining a feature or simply to know feature orientation. The window is shown below:

The name of the feature selected in the list is displayed in this field.

The nominal values of the normal vector for the selected feature are displayed here.

The actual values of the normal vector for the selected feature are displayed here.

Page 1420

A list of nominal and/or actual features in the database is displayed here. Another feature in the list may be selected. In this case, the nominal and actual values of the normal vector are resultantly changed.

If this option is selected, the change in orientation is performed on the actual vector if the feature has been measured (is an actual feature), or nominal vector if the feature has only been defined (is a nominal feature).

If this option is selected, the change in orientation is performed on the actual vector and nominal vector.

Selecting this option allows only the nominal vector to be reversed.

Selecting this option allows only the actual vector to be reversed.

Click this button to reverse the orientation of the selected feature in the 3D View, in the Result, window, and in the window shown below:

Click this button to close the window.

Page 1421

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1422

Filter The Filter window offers two methods of filtering: Point Elimination and Gauss.

Point Elimination This function applies to all measured features. It is used to eliminate "dubious" and/or aberrant measurement points.

Select the feature to be filtered, either from the drop-down list or from the database by clicking

.

Select whether points are to be eliminated according to: Their form fault, by checking this box. Then enter the threshold for the maximum form fault beyond which points will not be accepted. Their standard deviation, by checking this box. The enter the standard deviation coefficient beyond which points will not be accepted. Click this button to re-calculate the feature according to the selected filter.

Page 1423

The software will successively devalidate the probing points at the greatest distance from the feature and re-calculate form fault from the remaining points. This operation will be continued as long as form fault or standard deviation remains unacceptable, but only until the minimum number of points required to calculate feature form fault is reached.

Click this button to remove any filters applied. All feature probing points are then rendered valid again.

Click this button to close the window.

Warning: When probing points in a section are eliminated, it is difficult to return to the original state as the points are removed from the section and not simply devalidated.

Gaussian filtering This function is used in order to eliminate certain defects observed at probing points which could be caused by the probing or by the part itself, depending on the type of filtering selected as well as the chosen wavelengths.

Select the feature to be corrected, either from the drop-down list or from the database by clicking

.

Page 1424

- Select the type of filtering desired. Select the cut-off wavelength λc,

or the cut-off frequency expressed in UPR (Undulations Per Revolution) for revolution shapes recommended by the ISO 3274 standard.

For LOW-PASS filter: This filter retains low-frequency undulations and therefore filters out high-frequency undulations due to measuring system noise and the roughness of the surface being measured:

For HIGH-PASS filter: This filter retains high-frequency undulations and therefore filters out low-frequency undulations due to shape defects in the feature being measured:

For BAND-PASS filter:

Page 1425

This filter retains undulations within a frequency range, it can therefore filter out high and low frequencies simultaneously.

Note: If the sampling of measurement points is insufficient relative to the cut-off wavelength for the chosen filter, then the following message will be displayed due to the limits imposed by Shannon's theorem being approached:

If this is the case, the feature will need to be measured again at increased point density.

Click this button to run the filter.

Click this button to remove any filters applied. All feature probing points are then rendered valid again. Click this button to close the window.

In program mode: 

The following line is inserted when this function is learned in a GM2 program:

Page 1426



The following syntax is required in order to use this function in a DMIS program:

GEOALG/CIRCLE,DEFALT,FILTER,CIRCULAR,BANDPASS,15,50,GAUSS MEAS/CIRCLE,F(CIR1),0 ... ENDMES

Page 1427

Extract Nominal Description

Example

Description of the function This function is used to calculate a nominal value from theoretical points selected by clicking on the CAD model in order to define a feature from the CAD model. The window is shown below:

Click this button to open the second part of the window:

This field is used to define the type of projection ("Click On") for the point clicked in the CAD model by selecting it from the drop-down list. The choices available are : Surface Edge Curve: curve with an associated surface below it (almost equivalent to an edge point) 3D Curve: curve with no associated surface 2D Geometrical Entity Point: if the CAD file allows, the nominal of a 2D geometrical feature may be selected (circle, arc, etc.) with a single click. 3D Geometrical Entity: if the CAD file allows, the nominal of a 3D geometrical feature may be selected (cylinder, cone, etc.) with a single click.

The name of the surface clicked is displayed in this field, which is displayed highlighted in the 3D View. If the surface is part of a layer in CAD file management, layer name is shown in this field.

Page 1428

These fields show the coordinates of the point clicked. The desired coordinates may also be directly entered in the fields. If only two of the three coordinates are entered, these buttons may be used to obtain the missing coordinate from the other two. Click the button for the empty field for the software search for the best solution.

These fields are for the normal vector to the surface clicked. This button is used to find the corresponding surface and its normal using the X, Y and Z coordinates entered.

The counter is incremented as clicks are progressively made on the CAD model.

When a point is clicked, the trash can is enabled. It may be used to delete the last point clicked. When several surfaces are superimposed in the 3D View, the point clicked may not be on the desired surface. By default the surface offered by the software is the nearest surface. These buttons are used to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model until the desired surface is reached, as shown in the following diagram.

Page 1429

This button is only available when a feature definition window is open. Click this button for the software to calculate the nominal of the type of feature to be defined. Clicking this button closes the Extract Nominal window, clicked points not used for calculation are lost.

Example of application Definition of a circle using the Extract Nominal function on the open CAD model shown below:

Open the Extract Nominal window from the Features menu. Open the circle feature definition window. Select projection type ("Click On") for the points clicked. In the example, this is Edge.

Page 1430

Click the points around the circle to be defined. The points are displayed with a violet marker and the clicked surface is shown highlighted (in yellow by default).

After clicking the first point, the Extract Nominal window is displayed as shown below:

The surface clicked is TRIMSURF, on layer 2 in the CAD file, the normal of this surface is indicated by the values I, J and K.

Page 1431

Once the minimum number of points required to calculate the feature is reached (3 points for the circle), click . The Defining Circle window is completed with the information obtained by clicking the CAD model.

Click

in the definition window. The circle is defined:

Page 1432

Apply boundaries This function is used to apply boundaries to a feature using one or more planes. It may be applied to the Line, Cylinder, Cone, and Plane features. The different ways in which boundaries may be applied to a feature are listed in the following table: Features to which boundaries are to be applied With 1 plane

Line

Cylinder

Cone

Plane

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

With 2 planes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

With 3 planes

No

No

No

Yes

With 3 planes or more

No

No

No

Yes in DMIS

The window is shown below:

Select the feature to be bounded, either from the drop-down list or from the database by clicking

.

Select the bounding plane(s), either from the drop-down list or from the database by clicking

.

When this box is not checked, the nominal values of the planes are used. Check the box to bound the feature using the actual (measured) values. In a GM2 program, this option is general, whereas in a DMIS program, the part of the plane to be used may be specified using the F or FA commands (and this for each plane). When this function is used, the part on the side of the normal of the plane(s) used

Page 1433

by the function is removed. For a cylinder or cone, the feature modified by the Apply boundaries function is cut to obtain the largest feature possible: Before the Apply boundaries function

After the Apply boundaries function

Note: This function may also be used to expand Cylinders, Cones, and Planes. Before the Apply boundaries function

After the Apply boundaries function

Page 1434

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1435

Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points When a surface point is measured, it is related to the projection surface, unless it is modified. It may therefore be necessary (after optimizing an alignment, for example) to automatically re-evaluate all the surface points so that the deviations and normal deviations are re-calculated in the optimized alignment. To do this, select the Re-evaluate Auto. All Surface Points function from the Features menu. A progress bar is displayed while the calculation is being performed. The time required to perform the calculation depends on the number of features in the database. Calculation may take several seconds. Only Surface Point features and the features linked with these Surface Points (sections and tolerances) are concerned. This function is used to change the CAD projection surface by allowing the software to find the best solution (in the metrological sense).

Warning: When the CAD alignment is changed, automatic re-evaluation is not performed: re-evaluation is performed on the projection surface of the surface point.

Operation The software proposes the best solution (in the metrological sense) and does not take account of any user-defined projection surface. The metrological criterion used by the software is not simply based on the ND. The surface retained may have a ND greater than another surface - that the software rejects as it is "aberrant" in the metrological sense. At projection: 

The surfaces outside a sphere centered on the probed point and with a radius equal to the search distance are rejected.

Page 1436

No surface will be used for projection as none of the surfaces is located in the search area.

Two surfaces are in the search area and may therefore be used for projection.



The surfaces retained are sorted according to the metrological criterion, that depends on projection type (surface, edge, etc.). This is referred to as "confidence". The software ensures the point has been probed in the correct orientation. There are four confidence levels: - Level 1: approach normal contained in an 90° cone (a 45° angle between the probing vector and the CAD surface, on both sides of the vector). - Level 2: the point is outside the projection surface while having an approach normal contained in a 90° cone. - Level 3: approach normal contained in a 90° cone and a 160° cone. - Level 4: the point is outside the projection surface while having an approach normal contained in a 90° cone and a 160° cone. - Level 5: approach normal contained in a cone of more than 160°. - Level 6: the point is outside the projection surface while having an approach normal contained in a

Page 1437

cone of more than 160°. Important note: In the case of points projected outside the surfaces (confidence levels 2, 4 and 6), the points is projected in the prolongation of the CAD surface, close to the real surface. Within each confidence level, the projection surfaces are classified according to calculated TM (from smallest to largest).

Note: On some measuring systems, arms and laser trackers, for example, it may be advantageous not to use the surface point approach normal to calculate surface points. To do this: - Open the Advanced Parameters window from the Preferences menu. - In the Config tab, modify the parameter bignoreprobingvector by changing it to 1.

Page 1438

Creating the TWIN alignment In order to be able to correctly measure in TWIN mode, it is important for both machines to have the same Machine alignment. To ensure this is so, an alignment is required on 3 evenly spaced spheres as far as possible apart on the machines' median plane (in most cases it will be the ZX plane).

Prerequisites        

Check on each of the two stations that there is no existing TWIN.mat alignment in the installation directory for the software. Take the two CNC start-up reference marks. Ensure the orientation of the machine axes is the same on both machines. The MASTER sphere needs to be memorized correctly on each of the two machines. Ensure the probes on both machines are calibrated to the same MASTER sphere (for both machines to have the same CMM alignment home position). The position of the MASTER sphere must never be changed. Ensure there is no work session in progress. Fit a reference sphere to the end of the MASTER arm, with its axis horizontal. Check the assembly for rigidity.

Method of creating the alignment Slave Arm

Calibrate a horizontal probe on the MASTER sphere.

Master Arm Calibrate a probe on the MASTER sphere, this probe to be of the same dimensions as the sphere once it has been fitted to the arm (the ball center - fastening point and sphere center - fastening point distances must be equal to 10mm). Once calibration is complete, a reference sphere needs to be fitted in lieu of the probe. Set the arm to position 1.

Page 1439

Create the PCS1 geometric alignment with the coordinates of position 1 as its origin.

Associate the alignment created to the CAD alignment. Measure sphere SHP1 manually. Re-measure SPH1 automatically at 9 points.

Create a PCS1 geometric alignment using sphere SPH1 as its origin.

Page 1440

Associate the alignment created to the CAD alignment. Activate PCS1.

Define sphere SPH1 in alignment PCS1 with coordinates (0,0,0).

Page 1441

Set the arm to position 2.

Set the arm above the sphere at position 2.

Define sphere SPH2 in alignment PCS1 with the coordinates showing on the Master arm.

Page 1442

Measure sphere SPH2 automatically at 9 points relative to its nominal.

Page 1443

Set the arm to position 3.

Set the arm above the sphere at position 3.

Define sphere SPH3 in alignment PCS1 with the coordinates showing on the Master arm.

Page 1444

Measure sphere SPH3 automatically at 9 points relative to its nominal.

Page 1445

More than 3 spheres can be measured in this way. All this needs is to follow the above method.

Create an alignment using the Optimize function and select the spheres measured previously.

Page 1446

The result of optimizing will then show in the window after being calculated. If this result is not as expected, additional spheres positioned in the same plane as the first three spheres used will need to be measured. Save this alignment as TWIN.MAT.

Using the TWIN alignment       

Copy the TWIN.mat file to the directory in which the .INI files for the software are located. Exit and restart the software at each of the stations. The MASTER sphere needs to be memorized on the arm again without changing the lever arm values. Redo the probe files on both machines. Re-enable the machine alignment and check that both machines have the same alignment. To do this, measure the MASTER sphere again with both arms. Both spheres measured should be zeroed. If for any reason this procedure has failed, ensure prior to repeating it that the TWIN.mat file has actually been deleted. There is no point in repeating this procedure so long as the geometrical properties of the machine have not been changed.

See also: Control.

Send / Receive features [Twin], Send / Receive alignment [Twin], Synchronize Twin, Remote

Page 1447

Update Features Nominals This function is available for features defined using a CAD file and for which the Associate Nominal function has been selected. When this option is selected, the software updates: - The nominal values of the relevant features - The tolerances associated with these features

Page 1448

Send to / Receive from TWIN System Several control (inspection) stations may inter-communicate in the framework of a Multiplex configuration. This is the case, for example, of a bodywork part of which the left side is inspected by one CMM and the right side by another CMM. The purpose of the Send to TWIN System and Receive from TWIN system functions is to collate, on the same station and in the same working session, the results for the features measured on the left and right.

Send to TWIN System Select this function on the sender station. The window is displayed as shown below:

Select the type of feature to be sent from the drop-down list. Select the feature to be sent from the drop-down list. Or click this button to perform selection from the feature database. Sends the specified part of the feature and the associated tolerances. The family and printability parameters of the feature being sent are also sent.

Note: This box does not concern surface point features, the actual of which is automatically projected if a CAD model is open. Click this button to send the selected feature. Click this button to exit the window without sending the feature.

Receive from TWIN System Select this function on the receiver station.

Page 1449

The window is shown below:

Select the type of feature to be received from the drop-down list. Select the feature to be received from the drop-down list. Click this button on the receiver station to receive the feature.

If automatic reception mode is enabled (box checked), several features may be successively received without having to click to receive each one of them. If the features received have not already been defined on the receiver station, they will have the same names as the features sent.

Click this button to exit the window without receiving the feature.

Notes:  

If surface points are sent, the corresponding CAD file must be open on the receiver station. The tolerances and print enabled/disable settings for received features on the receiver station are the default parameter settings of this station, unless the features have been predefined on this station, in which case the predefined parameters are used. If the nominal values of a feature are sent even though they are already specified at the receiving station, the nominal values will be updated with the data from the feature being sent.

In program: When these functions are learned in a program, the following lines are added:

Page 1450

Color Coding This function is used to give additional visual information on feature deviation with respect to its tolerance zone. The information is shown by a different color according to the tolerance zone in which the feature is located. The window is shown below:

Double-clicking opens the following window to modify the color of the selected zone:

Page 1451

Double-click in the field to modify the value of the selected marker.

Example: The tolerance for a feature is ± 1 In the Color Coding window, the markers are displayed as shown below:

- If the feature is out of tolerance by 0.7, it will be displayed in green. - If the feature is out of tolerance by 0.9, it will be displayed in yellow. - If the feature is out of tolerance by 1.1, it will be displayed in red. - If the feature is out of tolerance by -1.3, it will be displayed in violet.

Is used to add a new marker to this table. Marker position depends on the position of the

marker.

The different cases possible depending on marker position are: 

Markers inserted in the zone greater than 0% Before

After

Page 1452

In this case, the marker will be inserted above the selected zone and its color will be the same as that of the selected line.



Markers inserted in the zone less than 0% Before

After

Page 1453

In this case, the marker will be inserted below the selected zone and its color will be the same as that of the selected line. In all cases, the marker inserted takes the center value of the two values framing it as default value.

Deletes the selected marker: Before

After

Page 1454

Checking only Enable Color Coding enables color coding in the 3D View (feature border), stickers, the results table, the database, reports, and HTML export files. Checking both boxes enables color coding only in the 3D View, reports, and HTML export files. Checking Only in 3D View disables sticker color coding.

To save changes and use the new values as the default values when the software is restarted. Applies the default values saved by the user (or those provided by the software if no default values have been saved). used to apply the configured color coding. closes the window without applying any changes made.

This visual result is displayed in the following windows: The Results window:

Sticker:

The 3D View:

Page 1455

Features Database:

Page 1456

Results table when a report is printed:

Results table for an export in HTML format:

Page 1457

Notes: 

 

Feature color (shown by the color of sticker tolerance, the name of the feature in a report and HTML export, the border of the feature in the 3D View and Feature database) corresponds to the color of the line of the feature with the largest deviation as a percentage. Color mapping, the critical zone and family color have priority over color coding. Color coding is independent of the views. The settings will not be recalled when a view is recalled.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1458

Set-Up Default Parameters This function is used to specify all the default parameters displayed for each type of feature. The window is shown below:

Each tab corresponds to a type of feature (circle in the example), each with its own specific parameters.

This section is used to select the values to be displayed in the report by checking the corresponding boxes.

This section is used to specify the minimum number of probing points and maximum acceptable form fault, beyond which a message indicating that the maximum form fault has been exceeded is displayed. For surface point features, search distance for point projection is shown in this section as well as the proximity tolerance value.

Page 1459

This area enables the minimum number of probing points to be indicated,as well as the default material thickness for the projection plane measurement when manually or automatically measuring a feature of the following types: circle, arc, line, ellipse, slot, rectangle and hexagon.

This section is used to enter default dimension (radius, diameter, length, etc.) tolerance values or select an ISO tolerance from the drop-down list.

This section is used to enter the default position limit values. Check the boxes corresponding to the values to be toleranced. For section features, the default scanning parameters (initial step, maximum step, chordal error, etc.) are shown instead of position tolerances:

Click the Accept button to apply the parameters and close the window.

Notes:  

These parameters may be modified in occasional manner, whenever they are displayed in a definition or measurement window. These parameters may be saved in the .cfg configuration files. They are also saved for each user.

Specificity of geometrical point settings A supplementary option is added to the default settings of the geometrical point:

This option displays an additional setting in the measure window of the geometric point:

Page 1460

If this box is checked, the probing point is automatically projected on the compensation feature selected. This projection is only available on planes.

Configuring printability and tolerancing of points

Page 1461

This drop-down list enables printability and dimensional and positional tolerancing to be configured for each type of surface point. This button configures all surface point types with the same parameters. The parameters for the selected point are then applied to the other surface point types. allows the search distance value to be modified. allows the probing range tolerance value to be modified. The value represents the maximum distance accepted between the nominal value of a surface point and its actual value. Check (select) this box to activate a warning if the

Page 1462

software finds several projection surfaces when measuring. The number of surfaces found depends on the search distance configured. If several projection entities are found after probing, the following window is displayed:

Select the desired projection entity and click

.

Sorting of solutions according to probing direction (Surface Points tab) Check this box in order to modify the order of CAD solutions offered. The number of surfaces found depends on the Search Distance configured. Using this sort method, solutions are no longer given looking at the probing direction only then the value of the probing direction then the calculated True Magnitude. The solutions are then given by giving priority to looking at the order of the surfaces encountered at the time of probing, then at the aforementioned criteria.

Example: When the option is unchecked (deselected), surface point SRF1 is projected on the surface closest to the point.

Page 1463

When the option is checked (selected), surface point SRF1 is projected on the first surface encountered in the probing direction.

Notes: - This functionality is only taken into account for surface type surface points. - Only the order of the solutions is modified (the number of solutions and the values of each solution remain unchanged). - This type of sort is not suitable for solutions with a poor confidence level (i.e. with a normal for which the angle to the probing direction is large).

Page 1464

Sorting of solutions according to probing direction (Surface Mapping tab) Check this box to modify the projection surfaces of points proposed when evaluating a surface mapping. By default, this box is unchecked. The number of surfaces found depends on the Search Distance configured. Using this sort method, solutions are no longer given looking at the probing direction only then the value of the probing direction then the calculated True Magnitude. The solutions are then given by giving priority to looking at the order of the surfaces encountered at the time of probing, then at the aforementioned criteria.

Example:

If the box is not checked, the point is projected on Surface 2 since deviation 2 < deviation 1. If this box is checked, the point is projected on the first surface encountered according to the probing direction. In the example, it is projected on Surface 1.

Page 1465

Feature calculation mode The result sign of surface points depends on the rule selected via this function. When this function is selected, the following window is displayed. The details given in the window correspond to the selected mode.

Warning: The CAD mode impacts the Normal Deviation sign of surface points, and also the correction mode of the probe radius for all surface and geometric features.

Warning: The arrow representing the vector of a surface point in the graphical view does not depend on the sign of the normal deviation. The calculation mode can be modified from the properties window of the features.

3D (default) mode 

The surface point N.D. sign depends on the probing direction.

When this mode is used, the deviation sign displayed in the Results window (deviation between the probed point and its nominal position on the CAD model) is determined as follows:

Page 1466

The deviation is positive if there is excess material. The deviation is negative if there is a lack of material.

Warning: For a Gap measurement result, the opposite is true. Here, the probing direction is used to determine the deviation sign of the normal deviation, independently of the orientation of the definition alignment and the CAD surface. 

When the 3D mode is selected, the probe radius correction mode depends on the mode selected in Probe radius compensation mode.

Vehicle alignment mode 

The surface point N.D. sign depends on the vehicle alignment orientation.

When this mode is used, the definition alignment of the surface point determines the deviation sign of the normal deviation, independently of the probing direction and the orientation of the CAD surface. if the probing normal has several components along the definition alignment axes (vehicle alignment), the axis of the greatest component (absolute value) is used to determine the deviation sign.

Page 1467

The deviation will be positive if the vector representing surface point measurement deviation is positively orientated in relation to the definition alignment. The deviation will be negative if the vector representing surface point measurement deviation is negatively orientated in relation to the definition alignment. 

When the vehicle alignment mode is selected, the probe radius correction mode depends on the mode selected in Probe radius compensation mode.

CAD mode 

The surface point N.D. sign depends on the nearest CAD surface orientation.

When this mode is used, the projection surface orientation vector used to determine the deviation sign of the the normal deviation, independently of the probing direction and the orientation of the definition alignment.

Page 1468

The deviation will be positive if the vector representing the feature measurement deviation has the same orientation as that of the projection surface. The deviation will be negative if the vector representing the surface measurement deviation has the opposite orientation to that of the projection surface. To see projection surfaces orientation and eventually modify it, you must use the Display Normal Orientation function, accessed via the CAD menu or the CAD Database context menu.

Warning: The correction direction, with respect to CAD, is a parameter used when the feature is calculated and not when probing is performed. Therefore, the illustration of probings (blue balls) in the 3D View does not necessarily match the CAD correction direction. 

When the CAD mode is enabled, the correction direction of the probe radius is directly related to the CAD surface orientation for Geometrical point, Surface point and Plane type features. Example: Case of a surface point

Page 1469

In program mode: This function can be used in a program. The following lines are then added:

Page 1470

Browse Database The Feature Database may be opened directly from the Features menu or any the unified database. Then select the

button giving access to

tab.

This tab displays a list of all the features present in the working session.

The window is shown below: Expanded mode

Selection mode

Expanded mode This mode is called up via the menu Features > Browse Database. It allows all authorized actions to be performed on features. All the function buttons are enabled.

Selection mode This mode is called up from the define, measure and construct feature windows to select a feature according to the local restrictions. Selection mode only displays the relevant features and does not allow special

Page 1471

actions (delete, etc.) to be performed. The Select Feat. button is used to validate the selection and send it to the calling window (double-clicking a feature has the same effect).

Feature list Each feature is preceded by one or two icon symbols. The first shows feature type (plane, circle, etc.). The second shows whether or not the feature is printable. Click a feature in the list to select it. Several adjacent features may be selected by holding the left mouse button down and dragging the mouse. To select several features that are not adjacent, left-click the desired features while holding the Ctrl key down.

Note: To center a feature in the 3D View, hold the Alt key down and click on the desired feature in the Database.

Buttons

used to delete the selected feature(s). The following window is then displayed and allows the data to be deleted to be selected by checking the corresponding boxes:

used to rename the selected feature (cannot be used when multiple features are selected). The following window is then displayed, allowing the new name to be entered:

used to display the Properties of one or more features.

used to configure the tolerances of one or more features. The following window is then displayed (this

Page 1472

window varies according to the features selected):

used to assign a label to the selected feature(s). The Set-Up Type window is then displayed.

used to associate a family and/or alignment to one or more features. used to manually measure the selected feature(s). The corresponding measurement windows then open successively.

used to measure the selected feature(s). The corresponding measurement windows then open successively.

used to filter the features to be displayed in the Database. The following window is displayed:

Page 1473

In order not to display certain types of feature, click on their corresponding icons. Uncheck the boxes in order not to display the features according to their states: Defined only, Evaluated only, Defined and evaluated, Not printable or Printable.

used to select all features displayed.

to reverse the selection (i.e. to select all features not displayed highlighted in the list).

to perform a text search on the feature list. The window used to enter the text to be searched for is shown below:

Enter the text to be searched for in the field. Select this option to search for all terms containing the text.

Page 1474

Select this option to search for the exact text entered. Click this button to search for the text entered in the up direction (towards the top of the page). Click this button to search for the text entered in the down direction (towards the bottom of the page). Click this button to close the window.

Page 1475

Properties

This button in the Features Database allows the properties of one or more features to be displayed. Multiple selection is especially useful when you want to associate a comment to all the selected features or to modify the print settings. The window is displayed as shown below, but varies according to the properties of the features selected:

Select this option to render the feature(s) selected in the database printable.

Select this option to render the feature(s) selected in the database unprintable.

Select this option to apply the print settings configured for each type of feature (via the Set-up Default Parameters option).

Check the boxes corresponding to the dimensions to be shown in the report.

Allows calculation mode to be selected. used to enter maximum form fault. When this value is exceeded, a message is displayed allowing the user to decide whether or not to accept the relevant feature. This box may only be accessed if the feature properties are displayed from a program measurement line. If a form fault is entered and the box is checked (selected), the form fault value is only applied to the selected feature.

Note: Several features may be selected in the program to assign the same form fault to them.

Page 1476

This option is only used for surface point features. If this box is checked, the theoretical (nominal) coordinates of the surface point are locked and will not change during measurement. For more information, see the Lock Surface Point page.

The critical area threshold informs the metrologist when a dimension is at its tolerance limit. This threshold corresponds to a percentage of the tolerance. For example, for a tolerance of between -0.4 and +0.6 with a critical area of 50 %, the center of tolerance is +0.1. It may be said that the critical area is between -0.4 and -0.15 on one side and between +0.35 and +0.6 on the other:

In the Results window, the critical area is represented by two cursors located on the tendency indicator:

This area is used: - If a single feature is selected, to modify the comment assigned to the feature by default when it was defined, measured, or evaluated. - If multiple features are selected, to assign a comment to all the selected features.

Click this button to apply the properties and close the window. Closes the window without applying any changes made.

Page 1477

Modify Feature Family/Alignment

This function can be accessed:

-

Via this button from the Feature Database

- Or the Modify option in the context menu.

It used to associate a family and/or alignment to one or more features or to modify them. The window is shown below:

Check this box to modify a family or associate a family to the selected feature(s). You can now access the list of families created in the work session. Select an existing family from the drop-down list or enter a name in the field to create a new family.

Check this box to modify an alignment or associate an alignment to the selected feature(s). You can now access the list of alignments created in the work session. Select an existing alignment from the drop-down list. You can also select the alignment associated to the working session CAD File by checking this box. The name of the CAD alignment for the working session is then displayed shaded.

Click this button to apply the changes made and close the window.

Page 1478

Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.

Page 1479

Modify thickness

This function is used to modify, add or delete the material thickness of the surface features selected. The window is shown below:

The checkbox in this window shows three states corresponding to three different modes of operation: - When it is checked, as above, the material thickness value entered in the adjacent field will be applied to all the surface features selected. - When it is not checked, the material thickness values applied to the different surface features will all be deleted. - When it is grayed out, the material thickness value entered in the adjacent field will only be applied to the surface features which already have a material thickness.

Page 1480

Modify projection surface

This function may be accessed via the Modify function of the context menu of the Feature Database or the context menu of .gm2 programs. It allows the projection surface of the selected surface point(s) to be modified. The window is shown below:

Two methods of changing the projection surface are then available: - By clicking the

button to access the CAD Database:

Select the desired surface from the list. This button is used to save the CAD display and color attributes in a program. It is only available in Teach-in mode (i.e. when a program is being learned).

Page 1481

This button is used to display the CAD context menu. Click this button to display the selected surface in the Modify projection surface window. Click this button to return to the Modify projection surface window without applying any changes made in the CAD Database.

- By directly clicking on the CAD model to select the desired surface. When this mode is used, the arrows become available allowing you to scroll through the possible surfaces indicated by the click in the CAD model until the desired surface is reached, as shown in the following diagram:

Whatever the method used, the name of the selected surface is displayed in the window:

Page 1482

Click this button to close the window without modifying the surface. Click this button to confirm the surface modification. The name of the new projection surface is then displayed in the Results window for the relevant surface point(s).

Page 1483

Automatic measurement sequence

This function enables a selection of features to be measured automatically in Browse features database order.

Selecting There are two possible methods of making a selection: 

Selecting in 3D view: select an area containing the features to be measured while holding the key down.



Multiple selection in the Browse features database: features are selected by holding the key down then clicking the features to be measured in the list.

Measuring

Page 1484

There are two methods available to start up measurement of the selected features: 

The Measure function in the context menu.



The measurement shortcut button:

Measurements will then be taken in Browse features database order. The automatic measurement setting needs to be entered before the series of measurements on each type of feature.

Once the settings have been entered and accepted, a window lets you choose whether or not to keep the same settings for measuring all elements of the same type.

The automatic measurement sequence will commence once the message has been confirmed.

Page 1485

Context menus and keyboard shortcuts

Context (pop-up) menus The following context menus may be displayed, depending on the line in the Feature Database from which they are called up (by right-clicking): Features category Feature type category

One or more features

Select All: used to select all features displayed. Invert Selection: to reverse the selection (i.e. to select all features not displayed highlighted in the list). Select Features in Category: used to select only features in the same category as the feature clicked (circle, for example). This function is only available if several features are selected. Display: used to re-organize the features according to various modes:

Page 1486

All: Displays all the features in a single list. By Type: Organizes the features by type (plane, circle, etc.). Defined/Evaluated: Organizes the features in 4 categories: - Not Defined and Not Evaluated - Only Defined - Only Evaluated - Defined and Evaluated By Alignment: Organizes the features according to their definition alignment. By Family: Organizes the features by family. Printable: Organizes the features in 2 categories: Not Printable and Printable. Tolerance: Organizes the features in 3 categories: In tolerance, Out of tolerance and Not toleranced.

Page 1487

By Station: allows features to be sorted according to the station used for measurement with a laser tracker. Type Filter: used to enable/disable separate display of each type of feature. The Show All and Show None options allow filtering of all features to be enabled/disabled. Misc. Filter: used to select the features to be displayed by checking the corresponding options among: - Show Not Defined - Show Not Evaluated - Show Defined and Evaluated - Show Not Printable - Show Printable Sort: Irrespective of display mode, the user can elect to sort features by Chronological Sort, Alphabetical Sort, Alphabetical-Numerical Sort or User Sort. When User Sort is selected, two additional buttons are made available in the Feature Database, allowing feature order to be modified by moving features up or down:

Search/Find: to perform a text search on the feature list. The window used to enter the text to be searched for is shown below:

Enter the text to be searched for in the field. Select this option to search for all terms containing the text. Select this option to search for the exact text entered. Click this button to search for the text entered in the up direction (towards the top of the page). Click this button to search for the text entered in the down direction (towards the bottom of the page). Click this button to close the window.

Modify Feature: to access the Define window for the selected feature to modify previously entered parameters.

Page 1488

Rename: used to rename the selected feature (cannot be used when multiple features are selected). The following window is then displayed, allowing the new name to be entered:

 

Update Features Nominals: to update the nominal values of features. This function is available for features defined using a CAD file and for which the Associate Nominal function has been selected. Define from measured value: used to copy the measured values of a feature into the definition values.

Note: It is possible to force the normal on the X-axis of the geometric points if the normal is null. To do this, it is required to enable the following parameter in the CPREFERPARAM section of the USER tab, in Tools > Advanced parameters: FORCENORMALZIFNULL. Stickers: to associate a sticker to one or more features. The Set-Up Type window is then displayed. Measure Feature: used to manually measure the selected feature(s). The corresponding measurement windows then open successively. Measure automatically: used to automatically measure the selected feature(s). The corresponding measurement windows then open successively. Acquire Feature: used to acquire a feature by using an optical system. Retrieve Feature: used to retrieve a feature by using a group of points. Acquire & Retrieve Feature: used to acquire and retrieve the selected feature(s). The corresponding windows then open successively. Duplicate : used to duplicate a feature. Flip Orientation: used to reverse the orientation (measured (actual) and/or theoretical (nominal)) of one or more features. Send to TWIN System: used to transmit the measured (actual) values of the selected features. Modify: used to Modify thickness, Change tolerances, Modify projection surface, Modify the family and/or alignment with which the feature is associated. Convert probing hit-points to geometrical points: allows center ball probing hit-points of a feature to be converted into geometrical points. A _PNTx suffix is automatically attributed to the extracted features, in which x shows the number of the extracted feature. The new features are then displayed in the Database:

Page 1489

Note: The features created keep some characteristics of the source feature, such as printability and belonging to a family. Program: This function can be used in a program.

Delete: used to delete the selected feature(s). The following window is then displayed and allows the data to be deleted to be selected by checking the corresponding boxes:



Properties: used to display the properties of one or more features.

Keyboard shortcuts Ctrl - A: Select All

Page 1490

DEL: Delete F2: Rename

Page 1491

Manual measurement assistant This function enables making series of measurements/acquisitions on the features defined beforehand in the work session. This function can be accessed: - using the main toolbar button:

.

- via the Features > Manual measurement assistant menu.

If the active probe is a ball probe:   

Only the measurement window of the nearest feature to the probe is displayed. The projection plane or approximate axis is Nominal by default or the last plane measured for 2D features. The last measurement parameters are applied to the current measurement.

If the active probe is an optical sensor:   

The acquisition window is displayed: Click OK to complete acquisition and launch the retrieval process. Retrieval will be performed on the nearest feature to the probe when the acquisition starts. If the retrieval could not be completed, the retrieval window is displayed to change the parameters.

To get the measurement/acquisition progress status, the position display window indicates the number of remaining features to be measured/acquired and the number of features defined in the work session:

Example: The CIR1 circle is defined: With a hard probe

With an optical sensor

Page 1492

Notes:  

For 2D features, it is recommended to use this function with feature highlighting and the Red Helper Line, in the Manual probing assistance window. For 3D features, use only the feature highlighting. It is possible to change the order of features to be measured/acquired by changing an Advanced parameter in the Preferences > Advanced parameters menu, Config tab, MEASURE section:

ORDER_ON_NEAREST = 1: order of features based on the nearest with respect to the probe. ORDER_ON_NEAREST = 0: order of features based on the Feature Database.

Important note: With a multi-articulated arm+ Perceptron configuration, this feature is only available if the laser display is enabled (available in the DRO window). This type of DRO can be accessed by pressing F2 on the keyboard.

Page 1493

Point Cloud

Page 1494

Import, Import previous Import This function allows clouds of points in different formats to be imported. It is accessed via the Point Cloud menu or via the Cloud of Points Database. The following window is displayed:

Different formats of clouds of points may then be imported:  



*.pnt and *.txt These formats do not allow Scan and Scanline data to be conserved. *.ac This format allows all cloud of points data (Scans and Scanlines) to be conserved. The AC files saved in the rasterized mode are also supported. They basically come from Comet measureing systems. *.stl This format corresponds to the envelope (mesh) of a cloud of points. When imported, the cloud of points is re-created from the mesh. This format does not allow Scan and Scanline data to be conserved. Following this import, the cloud and mesh are displayed without it being necessary to use the Mesh function.

Note: When a points cloud is exported to STL format, this file does not contain all information on the cloud. In fact, the envelope is a sample of the points cloud. Thus, if the STL file is re-imported into the software, the points cloud is not the same as the points cloud measured.

Page 1495

Click this button to import the selected cloud of points and close the window. Click this button to exit the window without importing the cloud of points.

Import previous This function can be used to quickly re-import a recently used cloud of points file.

In program mode: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 1496

Acquisition - Measure a field (cloud) of points This function allows manual or automatic acquisition of a field (cloud/group) of points. Before using this function, you must calibrate an optical sensor. This function is accessed via the Point Cloud menu: The following window is displayed:

Used to move to the following acquisition after validating the current acquisition. Used to assign a color for each scan measured. If the box is not selected, all scans will be the same color.

Allows scans to be grouped in the same group in the Cloud of points database. Group name may be edited in the field.

Page 1497

Used to interrupt measurement and close the window.

The counter is incremented as acquisition progresses. In program mode, it decreases (counts down).

To validate the measurement. The feature is then added to the Feature database .

To delete the last scanline, without canceling the measurement.

Used to access automatic measurement.

Exclusion area This field can be used to select a plane that will determine the scan acquisition limit. Scans measured below the exclusion plane are not included in the acquisition.

This field can be used to apply an offset to the exclusion plane. The offset may be positive or negative.

Tip : To reverse the acquisition area, simply reverse the orientation of the exclusion plane.

Example: Without exclusion plane

Plane PLAN1 is the exclusion plane.

Used to select the minimum distance between two scanlines.

Page 1498

Used to select the minimum distance between the points of a scanline.

Note: The distance parameters are only complied with if CMM movement speed is appropriate (frequency for a laser). See also the following pages: Zoom, Manual probing assistance and Set-up CNC parameters.

Page 1499

Automatic acquisition of a cloud of points This function allows automatic acquisition of a field (cloud/group) of points. Before using this function, you must calibrate an optical sensor. This function is accessed via the Point Cloud > Acquisition menu.

The measurement window is displayed. Click

.

The automatic measurement window is displayed in this form, but varies depending on the method of measurement selected:

Probing Strategy

Click the icon corresponding to the desired automatic measurement method (probing strategy).

Page 1500

Automatic measurement by selecting points This method (strategy) allows scans to be measured automatically by manually selecting each point to be measured. The path is generated automatically. The window is shown below:

Used to select (from the drop-down list) the type of entity that may be selected by clicking in the 3D View:

Five types of entities may be selected from the drop-down list. Surface: surface entities (planes, warped shapes, etc.) Edge: edge type entities (tangent to the surfaces) Curve: curves in space (point orientation according to a surface) 3D curve: curves in space (point orientation according to the curve) Point: point type CAD entities (X, Y, Z coordinates)

Page 1501

Click these buttons to scroll through the different entities when there are several possibilities (for example, superimposed entities).

The coordinates of the points to be scanned must be entered in these fields: You can click the CAD model to complete these fields automatically, or enter the values directly in the fields. The X, Y and Z buttons above the fields allow the point to be projected on the CAD model.

The

button may be used to add the point to the list of points to be acquired.

Used to delete the selected point from the list.

Used to select a feature from the Feature database. All features that can be assimilated to points may be selected.

Allows current probe position to be used to define the coordinates of the point to be acquired.

Used to select the minimum distance between the points of a scanline. If the value is zero, all points reported by the measurment system will be taken into account Click this button to perform acquisition. The different scans are then added to the Cloud of points database. Closes the window without applying any changes made.

Automatic measurement by path

Page 1502

Used to select (from the drop-down list) the type of entity that may be selected by clicking in the 3D View:

Five types of entities may be selected from the drop-down list. Surface: surface entities (planes, warped shapes, etc.) Edge: edge type entities (tangent to the surfaces) Curve: curves in space (point orientation according to a surface) 3D curve: curves in space (point orientation according to the curve) Point: point type CAD entities (X, Y, Z coordinates)

Click these buttons to scroll through the different entities when there are several possibilities (for example, superimposed entities). The and buttons allow the selection to be activated by clicking in the 3D View for the start and end points of the path.

Page 1503

Used to select a feature from the Feature database.

Allows probe position to be used to define the coordinates of the point to be scanned.

The coordinates of the start and end points must be entered in these fields: The X, Y and Z buttons to the left of the fields allow the point to be projected on the CAD model. Can be used to move the CMM to the point entered in the fields. This button is available for the path start and end points.

Used to select the minimum distance between two scanlines.

Used to select the minimum distance between the points of a scanline.

Click this button to perform acquisition. The scan is then added to the Cloud of points database. Closes the window without applying any changes made.

Page 1504

Export This function allows a cloud of points or its envelope (mesh) to be exported in different formats. It is accessed via the Point Cloud menu or via the Cloud of Points Database. The following window is displayed:

The clouds of points may then be exported in different formats:    

*.pnt and *.txt These formats do not allow Scan and Scanline data to be conserved. *.ac This format allows all cloud of points data (Scans and Scanlines) to be conserved. *.psl This format allows a file compatible with the Polyworks software to be exported. *.stl ASCII and *.stl binary This format allows the the envelope (mesh) of a cloud of points to be exported, provided that this has been previously created with the Mesh function. Click this button to export the cloud of points and close the window. Click this button to exit the window without exporting the cloud of points.

Note: To export in *.pnt, *.txt, *.ac or *.psl format, the relevant extension for the desired export format

Page 1505

must be added.

In program mode: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 1506

Filtering This function allows clouds of points to be edited and modified in two ways: by deleting a zone of a cloud of points and by filtering points (point cloud simplification). It is accessed via the Point Cloud menu or via the Cloud of Points Database. The following window is displayed:

Deleting points To delete certain points from a cloud of points, the points must first be selected. The points of the points cloud are selected using the points cloud selection bar:

The selected points are then displayed in red:

Page 1507

Clicking

deletes the selected points:

Page 1508

allows a list of the different point deletion operations performed to be viewed. Each line in the list shows the number of remaining points and the percentage of points deleted after each deletion operation. used to validate the point deletion operation. allows the point deletion operation to be cancelled. The points are then displayed again in the cloud of points.

Note: Once the points have been deleted, they cannot be retrieved (the operation cannot be undone). They must therefore either be re-measured or re-imported.

Point cloud simplification (point filtering) As optical systems do not allow uniform clouds of points to be obtained, this can present problems for feature retrieval or export of these clouds of points. This function thus allows the cloud of points to be simplified by deleting a greater or smaller number of points according to certain criteria. A cloud of points may also be cleaned of certain aberrant points by using the Removing isolated clusters method. Four simplification (filtering) methods are then available: 

Uniform Sampling

This method divides the cloud of points into zones that are as uniform as possible and replaces each set of points contained in a cell by the point closest to the barycenter of each cell. The Spacing parameter reflects cell size.

Page 1509

This method also allows the curvature of the cloud of points to be taken into account. Cell size will be smaller at the locations where the curvature is greatest, thus allowing more points to be conserved in these zones.



Grid Sampling

Page 1510

This method divides the space into a uniform grid. In each cell of the grid, only the point closest to the barycenter of the points contained in the cell is conserved. The Spacing parameter corresponds to the width of the cells in the grid.

This method ensures a certain distribution of the points in space after simplification. Dense zones are simplified to contain the same number of points as less dense zones. However, it is extremely difficult to predict the number of cloud points after simplification. 

Random Sampling

Page 1511

The Percentage parameter sets the percentage of the number of initial points to be conserved. This method is rapid but does not guarantee anything as regards the density and distribution of points in the simplified cloud. Dense zones in the initial cloud (at locations where scanlines overlap, for example) will remain denser areas after simplification. The points are taken one by one in no specific order and randomly conserved or eliminated according to the set percentage.



Removing isolated clusters

This method allows aberrant points caused by part reflection to be removed.

Page 1512

The Cluster max width parameter corresponds to the maximum width of the clusters that are selected. By default, the value proposed is approximately 10% of the maximum width of the cluster. Minimum gap corresponds to the minimum distance required between two clusters of points for them to be considered as separate.

Once the filter calculation is complete, the

button must be clicked to remove the points.

Example: Effect of the Removing isolated clusters filter.

allows cloud points located at a hole boundary to be conserved. This avoids loss of information that may be used when retrieving features. Without "Keep Boundaries"

With "Keep Boundaries"

used to view the list of simplifications (filters) that will be applied to the clouds of points. Each line in the list shows the number of remaining points and the percentage of points deleted after each simplification operation.

Page 1513

used to launch a simplification (filtering) operation. The result will be displayed in the table in the simplification window and in the 3D View. used to delete the last simplification operation listed in the table in the simplification window. used to validate the simplification operations. allows the window to be closed without simplifying the clouds of points.

In program mode: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 1514

Delete All This function is used to delete all clouds of points in the working session. A warning message is displayed:

Used to delete all clouds of points in the working session. Allows deletion of the clouds of points to be cancelled.

In program mode: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Notes:  

The function may also be learned in DMIS. In Eagle Eye mode, the function can only be learned in DMIS.

Page 1515

Mesh This function is used to construct an envelope (mesh), a sort of "skin", based on the clouds of points. This mesh allows a cloud of points to be viewed in a different way. This function is accessed via the Point Cloud menu or via the Cloud of points database. The following window is displayed:

determines the sampling of the cloud of points prior to creation of the mesh, i.e. the number of points that will be used as mesh nodes. This number is expressed as a percentage of the total number of points. The algorithm simply takes a point every n points, in their order of arrival. If the information is available, it also keeps the points located at the edges of holes and of the part in addition to the other points. It is therefore finally possible that there are slightly more nodes than the percentage shown. determines the maximum size of the facets that will be finally conserved. The facets correspond to the maximum size of the edges of the triangles allowed. All triangles with at least one edge longer than this distance (expressed in mm) are deleted before display. This filter may be deactivated by deleting the value from the field or setting it to 0. allows the manner in which the mesh is created to be selected:  

If the option is checked (selected), a single mesh is created from all the cloud of points scans. If the option is unchecked (not selected), a mesh is created for each cloud of points scan. This method is faster but may result in holes in the mesh at the boundaries of each scan and the different meshes being superimposed.

Page 1516

launches construction of the mesh.

Note: It is highly advisable to edit (simplify) the cloud of points before constructing the mesh as the information contained in the cloud may be redundant and "noisy". This then results in increased processing times. Cloud of points

Mesh of the cloud of points

Page 1517

Once calculated, the mesh often remains "noisy", even after simplification. This is because the simplification (filtering) only allows the best points for mesh calculation to be selected, but does not move them, and the measurement noise partially remains. This error may be attenuated by smoothing the mesh after building it.

This part of the window may only be accessed if the mesh has been previously constructed or imported.

shows the total number of facets to be processed by the function.

used to determine the smoothing factor to be applied to the mesh. The greater the smoothing factor, the longer the processing time. Moreover, if the soothing factor is too high, topological problems (rotation of facets, aberrant orientations, etc.) may occur, notably at boundaries or in "noisy" zones.

Page 1518

used to perform smoothing again without edge smoothing this time. Due to this, execution is slowed and the result obtained may be less appreciable. This is due, among other things, to sensor noise. used to run the smoothing function.

.

Notes:

The function may be run several times successively. This allows progressive smoothing and it is not then necessary to directly run smoothing with a high smoothing factor requiring a long processing time.  The mesh may be returned to its initial state by repeating the mesh build operation. Before smoothing 

After smoothing

Page 1519

Notes:  



Mesh construction ("build") and smoothing cannot be saved in program mode. However, the mesh may be exported in STL format. One or more meshes may be calculated for a sub-part of the scans loaded. To do this, click the Mesh function in the context menu of a feature in the Cloud of Points Database. This displays the same environment calculation window, but the calculations will only be applied to the selected sub-part (either a single scan or a group of scans and its scanlines). When smoothing has been performed, the operation cannot be undone. If a smoothing is not correct, the mesh must be rebuilt and the smoothing operation repeated.

Page 1520

Auto-fit alignment This function allows a cloud of points to be automatically positioned on the CAD model. The software matches the barycenters of the cloud of points and the CAD model. Several positions are then tested to obtain the best match between the two. In most cases, this function is followed by creation of a best-fit alignment. The auto-fit function is accessed via the Point Cloud menu and the following window is displayed:

Alignment name is shown in this field. The first alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following alignments. The alignment may be assigned a new name by entering it in the field or another alignment selected from the drop-down list.

used to enter a thickness value that is applied to the points in the cloud of points.

Page 1521

To run the calculation, click this button once all the settings have been entered. The Mean Deviation and Root Mean Square deviation are then updated.

Note: When the button is clicked again, the calculation is reset to zero. The result is independent of current CAD model position. These values indicate the Mean Deviatiion and Root Mean Square deviation.

Allows the different software tests to match the CAD model and the cloud of points to be viewed.

Click this button to create the auto-fit alignment. Click this button to exit the window without creating the alignment.

Important note: This alignment requires a cloud of points with a barycenter roughly corresponding to that of the CAD model.

Example: Before creating the auto-fit alignment

After creating the auto-fit alignment

Note: Auto-fit alignment calculation time is optimized if the CAD model is displayed in solid rendering mode.

In program mode: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1522

Cloud Quick-Fit This function is used to create a quick-fit alignment on a cloud of points so as to have the cloud match the associated CAD model. The principle of this alignment is to have the points clicked on the CAD model coincide with the points clicked in the cloud of points. This alignment is called a "quick-fit" alignment as it is created using a small number of points. In most cases, it is followed by creation of a best-fit alignment. Quick-fit alignment is only available if a cloud of points and a CAD model are open in the working session. It is accessed via the Point Cloud menu and displays the following window:

When this window is opened, the 3D View is divided. The upper part is re-centered on the CAD model and the lower part on the point cloud:

Page 1523

used to enter the name of the alignment to be created used to add a thickness at the selected points.

Page 1524

used to select the points that will be used to create the quick-fit alignment. To select the points, you may:    

click a point on the CAD model then click a point in the cloud. click a point in the cloud then click a point on the CAD model. click all the points on the CAD model then do the same in the cloud. click all the points in the cloud then do the same on the CAD model.

At least 3 points must be clicked. To create an isostatic alignment, it is necessary to click 6 points ideally distributed on the part. The counters increment according to the number of points clicked. In the 3D View, each point selected is shown by a numbered colored sphere thus allowing the order of points to be selected and that have been selected in the cloud to be easily distinguished. In addition, a white arrow points to the next point to be selected in the cloud of points.

Page 1525

Click this button to delete the last point selected on the CAD model or in the cloud of points. Click this button to preview the quick-fit alignment to be created.Depending on their distribution, three points may suffice to actuate the preview. The 3D View remains divided but it then becomes possible to check the position of the CAD model with respect to the cloud of points in the lower window:

Page 1526

If the button is clicked again, the CAD model returns to its original position and is displayed in the upper view again. Click this button to create the quick-fit alignment by using the selected points. Click this button to close the window without creating a quick-fit alignment.

In program mode: This function can be used in a program.

Page 1527

The following lines are then added:

Page 1528

Cloud Best-fit This function allows best positioning (best-fit) of a cloud of points on the CAD model. Before using this function, an initial best-fit must be created using, for example, a quick-fit, in order to approximately match the cloud of points with the CAD model. The following window is displayed:

Best-fit alignment name is shown in this field. The first best-fit alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following best-fit alignments. The best-fit alignment may be assigned a new name by entering it in the field, or another best-fit alignment selected from the drop-down list.

used to select the number of points to be used for best-fit. This number may be expressed as a percentage of the total number of points in the cloud of points or as a set number. To obtain more reliable results, a large number of points must be selected, however, this results in increased processing times. This is because the deviations are calculated on the points used for the best-fit calculation. For example, if only 10% of the points in the cloud are used, an error of 2.31 mm means that, after the

Page 1529

best-fit calculation, these 10% are, on average, 2.31 mm from the CAD model, but the remaining 90% may be further away.

determines the search distance to project the points in the cloud of points on the CAD model. This value must correspond to the initial distance between the cloud of points and the CAD model before best-fit. The greater the search distance, the longer the processing time (calculation).

used to enter a thickness value that is applied to the points in the cloud of points.

The various checkboxes are used to select the rotations and translations allowed (a movement is allowed if the corresponding checkbox is checked). The numerical fields displayed allow the translation and rotation values calculated after best-fit of the alignment to be seen.

Click this button once all the settings have been entered. The translation and rotation values are updated along with the mean deviation values before and after best-fit calculation.

These values show the Mean Deviation and Mean Squared Deviation before and after best-fit calculation. Mean Deviation = (sum for i from 1 to n features of the absolute value of (actual position – nominal position)) /n

∑(actual position – nominal position)/n Mean Squared Deviation = square root of ((sum for i from 1 to n features of (actual position – nominal position)²) / n)

√(∑(actual position – nominal position)²/n )

Click this button to apply the best-fit. Click this button to exit the window without applying best-fit.

Page 1530

Example: Before best-fit

Result of best-fit

After best-fit

Page 1531

In program mode: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1532

Fit on retrieved features This function allows the best-fit alignment to be achieved using the features retrieved from the cloud of points. The alignment is created by a series of retrieval and best-fit operations This function is accessed via the Point Cloud menu: The following window is displayed:

Alignment name is shown in this field. The first alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following alignments. The alignment may be assigned a new name either by entering it in the field, or by selecting another alignment from the drop-down list.

Page 1533

This table displays the features that will be used to perform the best-fit alignment and their contribution direction constraints. The constraints are: AUTO X Y Z XY YZ ZX XYZ

Constraint direction is automatically determined according to the feature's contribution directions. The X coordinate of the feature is used in the calculation. The Y coordinate of the feature is used in the calculation. The Z coordinate of the feature is used in the calculation. The XY coordinates of the feature are used in the calculation. The YZ coordinates of the feature are used in the calculation. The ZX coordinates of the feature are used in the calculation. The XYZ coordinates of the feature are used in the calculation.

Contribution directions: Axes in which the alignment to be optimized can be translated or rotated. Features

Contribution directions XYZ

According to the normal, if there is one

XY or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane Y or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane XY or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane XY or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane XY or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane XY or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane XY or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane According to the normal As if there were two circles at the end As if there were two circles at the end As if there were two circles at the end As if there were three points with the normal on the plane XYZ

Page 1534

allows the feature database to be opened for feature selection.Only features that have at least been defined may be selected. All features used to create the alignment must be defined in the CAD alignment.

Note: Features may also be selected by clicking them directly in the 3D View.

used to delete the selected features from the list.

used to edit the retrieval properties of the selected feature(s). The following retrieval window is then displayed:

This window thus allows the retrieval properties that will be used for creation of the alignment to be modified. At the bottom of the window, the Direction field allows the contribution directions of the selected feature to be modified. In the case of a multiple selection:  

If all the features are of the same type, the retrieval parameters are displayed. If they are not the same type, only the contribution directions are accessible. If the features have different contribution directions, the contribution direction selection combo box is empty.

If features with different contribution directions are selected, the Direction field for contribution direction selection is empty. If it remains empty, the contribution directions of the different features edited are not

Page 1535

modified. Otherwise, they take the new value.

In program mode: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 1536

Retrieve This function is used to retrieve the nominal data of features, whether defined (nominal features) or not, by using a cloud of points as probing points. The types of features are: Surface and geometrical points, Circles, Section, Rectangle, Slot, Hexagon, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere and Plane. For more information on Flush and Gap feature retrieval, see Defining Flush and Gap. There are two retrieval methods:  

Case 1: the feature is not defined. This type of retrieval contains different models. Case 2: the feature is defined

Case 1: Feature not defined

Case 2: Feature defined

The following parameters are common to all the feature types: to select the feature to be retrieved.

Page 1537

to select the type of feature to be retrieved. to select the family of the feature to be retrieved.

used to enter a thickness, by clicking the

buttons or by entering it in the field.

used to select the height of the filter to be applied to avoid a maximum of noise around the feature to be retrieved, present, for example, when the signal suffers interference from reflections on the part. This functions as follows:   

An initial plane is calculated with all the points selected (manually or automatically). All points located at around the filtering height are removed. The retrieval is re-calculated.

Note: Changes made to retrieval parameter fields such as Bandwidth, Distance, or Height are directly displayed in the 3D View and in the diagram in the window. This option only appears for the features Plane, Sphere and Cylinder, whether these be defined or not. When this box is checked, all the points that are at more than 2.5 times the typical deviation are not taken into account in the feature retrieval calculation.

Retrieval of an undefined feature For all features, a Retrieve operation may be performed by selecting the probing points in the cloud by clicking in the 3D View. The points of the points cloud are selected using the points cloud selection bar:

Specific features of "click selection mode" "Click selection mode" only allows the following type of features to be retrieved: circle, hexagon, slot, rectangle, geometrical point and surface point.

Note: In the case of retrieval of a geometrical point or surface point, the dialog box is automatically validated after clicking in the 3D View. . When "click selection mode" is used, the points must be clicked by following the probing strategies for the selected features. For more information on probing strategies, see the pages on measuring the relevant features.

Example:

Page 1538

Point: 1 point

Circle: 3 points minimum

Hexagon: 4 points minimum

Slot: 5 points minimum

Rectangle: 5 points minimum

Page 1539

When a geometrical point or surface point is retrieved, the Retrieve window is displayed as shown below:

Radius of the retrieval cylinder displayed in the 3D View. If sticker mode is enabled during retrieval of these two features, a sticker is created and displayed in the 3D View at each point retrieved.

Note: It is possible to retrieve a particular point from a scanline, that would be impossible to directly measure with an optical sensor. When a a circle, hexagon, slot or rectangle feature is extracted by clicking the cloud, the Retrieve window is

Page 1540

displayed as shown below:

The number of points selected is displayed. used to determine the height of the retrieval zone. This parameter is displayed after the first point is clicked in the cloud.

used to delete the last point clicked.

Example: Retrieval of a circle Click selection mode

Free form mode

Page 1541

In this case, the Search settings have no effect. However, the Projection Plane settings for 2D features depend on the type of feature measured. 

Settings available for 2D features only (Circle, Rectangle, Slot, Hexagon):

Bandwidth and Clearance distance may be modified in order to select the points used to calculate the projection plane:

Bandwidth

Clearance distance 

Settings available for geometrical and surface points only:

Used to select one of the two type of points: Point or Edge Point.

The settings in this section are described in the table below.

Page 1542

Note: There is a special mode of the Retrieve function for use with a Zeiss machine with an Eagle Eye optical sensor. It allows the measured (actual) values of the same features as in standard mode to be calculated, but can only be programmed in DMIS mode. In this case, the Retrieve button simultaneously calculates the measured (actual) value of the selected feature and inserts the line in the DMIS program. To add the line only, switch to Off-line Programming mode via the menu Program > Mode > Insert Off-Line.

Retrieval of a defined feature When features are defined, the Retrieve function allows the features to be automatically calculated by performing retrieval in the cloud of points of probing points located around the feature. Such retrieval operations may be configured, the settings are described below.

Features

Settings

Description The geometrical or surface point is the result of the intersection between the normal line of the point defined and of the plane built from cloud points.

Surface and geometrical points

For edge points, the Single-line scanning box allows a single scan to be used to calculate the projection plane. Point orientation may be forced via the Direction drop-down menu. The Line width field corresponds to the length of the line calculated to define point orientation. This line is the barycenter of the selected points. The Clearance Distance field allows an exclusion zone relative to part boundary to be defined so as to exclude part edge defects for the projection plane calculation.

The plane is calculated using a parallelepipedic selection tool.

Plane

This parallelepiped is centered on the theoretical position of the plane. The length and width of this parallelepiped are equal to the theoretical (nominal) values minus the Distance value. Its height is 2xHeight.

Page 1543

The calculation is performed using a selection tool that takes the shape of the feature to be retrieved. This retrieval zone is centered on the theoretical (nominal) position of the features and its dimensions are the nominal dimensions of the features plus the Distance value. Circle, Slot, Hexagon, Rectangle

The height of the retrieval zone is 2xHeight. The projection plane calculation zone is a tube taking the shape of the feature to be retrieved centered on the measured (actual) position of the feature. The Bandwidth corresponds to the thickness of this tube. The Clearance Distance is used to exclude part edge defects from the projection plane calculation.

Cone, Cylinder

The feature calculation is performed using all points in the cloud of points contained in a retrieval zone taking the shape of the feature to be retrieved and of diameter equal to the theoretical (nominal) diameter +/Distance. Retrieval zone height is equal to theoretical (nominal) height –2xHeight.

Sphere

The sphere is calculated using all points in the cloud of points contained in a sphere centered on the theoretical sphere and of diameter equal to the theoretical diameter +/- Distance. The section is calculated using a parallelepipedic tool.

Section

This parallelepiped is centered on the theoretical position of the section. The length and width of this parallelepiped are equal to the theoretical (nominal) values plus the Dimensions value. Retrieval zone width is equal to 2xWidth. The Surface Points box is used to retrieve the section as surface type points and to force the minimum step between these points.

to retrieve the feature

Page 1544

closes the window without saving any changes made.

In program mode: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then added (for a sphere):

Page 1545

Point Retrieval

The software enables retrieval, from a scanline, of a particular point of this scanline. This function makes it possible to obtain points that it would be impossible to directly measure with an optical sensor. The point retrieval modes are as follows :         

Point Extrem point Mesh Edge point Blind edge Round edge Projected Rund edge Sharp Edge Enhanced edge

Extreme point

The point retrieved is located on the most extreme point of the scanline used, along the nominal direction of the point to be retrieved.

Mesh

Page 1546

The point retrieved is located on the mesh of the points cloud following projection of the nominal point along its nominal direction.

Blind edge

If the value of Spacing d1 is present, the software starts by reducing the scanline to the first space that is greater than d1. It does not actually delete the points but simply ignores them during calculation. It then calculates the edge point as the extreme projection point of all the points (not ignored) on a calculated line, excluding points that are closest to the Exclusion distance d2 from this edge point. This line also defines the actual vector of the point.

Round edge

Page 1547

If the value of Spacing d1 is present, reduction is executed (refer to receding edge). A straight line is then calculated from the first points of the scanline over a Line length d2. The edge point obtained is located on the first point having a radial distance, with the straight line, that is greater than the Search radius d3. The line also defines the actual vector of the point.

Rounded projected edge

Calculation is similar to a rounded edge, but the point obtained is projected on the straight line.

Page 1548

Dimpling

If the value of Spacing d1 is present, reduction is executed (refer to receding edge). An average line is calculated on the scanline by only preserving the Line length d3, along the orientation of the point to be retrieved. From this line, the software calculates two distinct straight lines by excluding the points that are closest to the Exclusion distance d2. The edge point is then calculated on the intersection of the two straight lines. Line 1 also defines the actual vector of the point.

Notes:  

The orientation of the point to be extracted determines the scanline travel direction to perform extractions. The way in which retrival is performed can be modified by changing the value of the following variable in: Preferences > Advanced parameters, tab DME:

Stacking = 10 (default value). This variable enables the number of points used during a retrieval to be averaged.

If Stacking = 10, a point is averaged every 10 points of the scanline, then used to perform extraction.

Page 1549

If Stacking = 4, a point is averaged every 4 points of the scanline, then used to perform extraction.

Page 1550

Evaluate Surface Mapping This function allows the deviations between clouds of points and the corresponding CAD surfaces to be viewed by applying colors to them. This function is accessed from the Points Cloud menu or from the context menu of the CAD Database. The following window is displayed:

Define The definition window is displayed, open at the definition tab

.

The fields common to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page. The specific fields used to evaluate Surface Mapping features are:

to select the number of points used to calculate the feature This choice is expressed as a percentage or as a number of points. The points are sorted in the entire cloud.

Page 1551

used to apply a thickness to the cloud of points. used to automatically update the Surface Mapping calculation results if new clouds of points are acquired.

Surface Mapping may be applied to:  

the entire CAD model. In this case, must be checked (selected). The list of surfaces used is then grayed out. the selected surfaces. In this case, the surfaces must be selected either by clicking them directly in the 3D View, or by opening the CAD Database with The selected points are then displayed in the list:

.

used to change the selected surfaces in the 3D View.

used to delete the surfaces displayed from the list. Used to select the search distance used to calculate surface mapping.

Tolerance In the window displayed, click the dimension tolerances tab

:

Page 1552

The dimensional tolerance of a geometrical point is applied to the Normal Deviation (ND).

Enter the upper and lower ND tolerance values in these fields. This box is automatically checked when tolerance values are entered in order to apply them. Uncheck (deselect) the box if you do not want to apply the tolerances.

Notes:   

If an incorrect sign is used when entering tolerances, a message is displayed informing the user that they must enter a higher tolerance that is indeed higher than the lower tolerance. The tolerance values offered in the window are the default values. To modify the default values, select the Set-Up Default Parameters option from the Features menu. It is possible to modify the projection surface of the points by selecting the function Set-Up Default Parameters in the menu Features.

Result After evaluation of a Surface Mapping feature, color mapping of the selected surface(s) is automatically displayed in the 3D View :

Page 1553

The results window then displays the Surface Mapping results.

    

MAX: maximum deviation between a point and the CAD surface(s) used for Surface Mapping MIN: minimum deviation between a point and the CAD surface(s) used for Surface Mapping IN: percentage of points in the tolerance OUT: percentage of points out of the tolerance F.F.: Form Fault

Calculation of Surface mapping takes account of the seach distance of surface points and depends on the Surface Point Sign Rule :  

CAD mode selected: the calculation takes the surface normal orientation into account. 3D or Vehicle alignment mode selected: the calculation takes the measured point probing direction into account.

When the Display point information button is enabled in the points cloud tool bar, information are displayed in the 3D View upon passage of the mouse over surface mapping:  

the deviation between the cloud point and the surface of the CAD file, the positon of the point in the active alignment.

Page 1554

Note: When a sticker is created on a Surface Mapping, two links are created. The first link points to the point with the minimum deviation of those used to compute the Surface Mapping and the second link points to the point with the maximum deviation. A single link is displayed if there is only one point with a deviation or if there is no deviation.

Click this button to evaluate the Surface Mapping. The following operations are then performed automatically:    

Display of the cloud of points is disabled Display of the sections is disabled The 3D View is displayed in wireframe mode The Color Mapping window is enabled and opens

Page 1555

Scale in Absolute mode Display in Point cloud mode The Color Mapping scale is computed These operations are not performed when a Surface Mapping evaluation is performed in a program. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

In program mode: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 1556

Defining Flush and Gap This new feature allows Flush and Gap values to be calculated from a cloud of points. This type of measurement is useful, for example, for checking for faults (defects) between a car door and chassis. The Flush and Gap feature uses the master and slave part concept. The master part is used as a reference for the feature and is used to define the Flush and Gap directions. The Flush and Gap values are projections of the distance between the master point and the slave point in the Flush and Gap directions.

The following window is displayed:

Page 1557

The fields common to all definition windows are described on the Define (and tolerance) Feature page.

Theoretical flush and gap values.

Master point coordinates.

Flush vector orientation.

Page 1558

Gap vector orientation.

used to define the feature. used to retrieve the feature closes the window.

Retrieving the Flush and Gap feature Retrieval is accessed via the menu Point Cloud > Retrieve. The following window is displayed:

Page 1559

Important note: Retrieval is only possible if the feature has already been defined or retrieved. used to select gap direction. If direction is Nominal, the theoretical direction is used. The other possible directions are the CAD alignment axes: X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+ and Z-.

The 4 following parameters are shown in the retrieval window when the corresponding field is clicked:

Search settings Retrieval is performed on a points cloud that can comprise several scanline parts. The points are selected via the rectangular box displayed in the 3D View. This distance makes it possible to modify the width of the box along the normal of the Flush and Gap plane.

This distance makes it possible to modify the dimensions of the box along the directions of the flush and gap.  

Length of the box along the Gap direction: exclusion distances + lengths of master and slave parts + nominal gap value + 2 times the search extent. Length of the box along the Flush direction: 2 times the search extent.

Master/Slave The exclusion offset represents the radius of the master and slave point exclusion zone.

This length represents the length of the flush and gap that are used for the retrieval calculation.

Page 1560

Diagram of Gap and Flush parameters

Calculating Flush and Gap The flush and gap values calculated are projections of the distance between the master point and the slave point in the flush and gap directions. Firstly, the algorithm subdivides the points cloud selected into 2 sub-clouds. An iterative method subdivides the space into boxes by grouping the points selected into these boxes. Their sizes are modified until 2 distinct clouds are obtained. The two clouds containing the greatest number of points then define the points of the Master part and of the Slave part. They are thus used for calculating the Gap and Flush. If separation results in a poor definition of the Master and Slave clouds, several solutions are possible:  

readjust the dimensions of the selection box displayed in the 3D View, filter the initial points cloud

To determine the extreme Master and Slave points, the points of the Master part (respectively of the Slave part) are projected on the straight line defined by the direction of the Gap to locate the projected point having the largest (respectively the smallest) abscissa.

Page 1561

Cloud of Points Database The Cloud of Points Database is accessed via the Point Cloud menu or the unified database, the

button. This opens the

tab must then be selected.

This tab displays a list of all the scans present in the working session. The window is shown below:

used to view the number of points in each cloud and each scan. used to re-measure the selected scan.

used to delete the selected scan(s).

Context menus

Page 1562

The Cloud of Points Database provides quick access to certain functions from the context menus:

From CLOUD

From the Cloud of Points root directory

From a scan

From several scans

Page 1563

From a group of scans

    

Edit points cloud: used to display the point cloud simplification window. Delete: deletes the selected scan, group of scans or cloud of points. Change color: used to change color. Activate : used to render visible ("show") a scan, group of scans or clouds of points. They may also be activated by clicking the icon of the line. Deactivate used to "hide" a scan, group of scans or clouds of points. They may also be deactivated by clicking the icon of the line.

The Activate/Deactivate functions can be learned in a program when they are applied to a group:

 

Group: used to group scans. Ungroup: used to ungroup scans.



Merge: used to merge several scans by selecting them with the or keys. The scan to which the function is applied will then contain all the previously selected scans. The following confirmation message is displayed before the operation is performed:

Example: To merge 4 scans Select the scans before performing the merge operation

After merging

Page 1564

   

Rename: used to rename a group of scans or cloud of points. Mesh: used to mesh a scan, group of scans or cloud of points. Import: used to import a cloud of points into the working session. Export: used to export a scan, group of scans or cloud of points.

is used to save the cloud display and color attributes in a program. This button is only available when a program is being saved. used to exit the Cloud of Points Database.

Page 1565

Alignments What is an alignment? An alignment, also called a (three-axis) reference system, is used for automatic CMM movement, result analysis, and to define features. It is a mathematical system that allows coordinates to be calculated. It is orthonormal and direct, i.e. the unit of measurement is the same in all three axes and the angle between axes (read trigonometrically) is 90°.

Example: The coordinates of point A are X=2, Y=1, Z=2

Predefined alignment features The features composing the alignment are called the Predefined Alignment Features. These are the three planes XoY, YoZ and ZoX, the X, Y, and Z axes, and the (coordinate) origin X=0, Y=0, Z=0.

Why create an alignment? If no alignment is created, the reference system is the CMM reference system.

Example:

C1 : Circle measured in the CMM alignment with coordinates X1 and Y1 C2 : Circle in the definition drawing with coordinates X2 and Y2 The measured circle will have positions X1, Y1, Z1 in the CMM reference system. These are unrelated to

Page 1566

positions X2, Y2 and Z2 in the definition drawing. The software allows an isostatic system to be created from the features probed. This must match the drawing specifications. In this example, the reference system created by workpiece measurement will directly give positions X2 and Y2.

Note: The reference system is indispensable for warped workpieces as no intersection can be found if the workpiece CAD alignment is not used. The CAD alignment is the alignment used to define the workpiece. In this case, the reference system will also be created by feature measurement.

Page 1567

Open/Open Previous Open This function is used to open an alignment saved to file. This is only useful if the reference marks are set and the workpiece has not been moved. This is because if CMM alignment is different each time, the matrices saved will also differ. Several alignments can be opened during the same work session. The window is shown below:

Select the file to open from the list. The alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following alignments. The alignment may be assigned a new name by entering it in the field, or another alignment selected from the drop-down list. When this box is checked, the name assigned to the alignment when it was saved is used.

Examples: The file EX1.MAT is based on the saved version of alignment EXAMPLE1:

Page 1568

The file EX2.MAT is based on the saved version of alignment EXAMPLE2:

Page 1569

used to search the file structure of the folder in which the alignment was saved. The name of the selected file is shown in this field. Another file may be selected by entering its name. File type is shown in this field. The software alignment files have the extension *.mat.

Click this button to activate the selected alignment. It is then displayed in the 3D View, in the Alignment Database and its name is displayed in the toolbar. Click this button to close the window without applying changes. Clicking this button displays this help page.

Open Previous

Page 1570

This function may be used to rapidly open a recently used alignment file. Select the alignment file to open from the list.

The alignment is activated. It is then displayed in the 3D Viewand in the Alignment Database and its name is displayed in the toolbar.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1571

Save This function is used to save an alignment in *.mat file format. The window is shown below:

Select the alignment to be saved from the drop-down list. The list displays all the alignments available in the current work session. used to search the file structure of the folder in which the alignment is to be saved. A list of the existing alignments in this folder is displayed. One of these may be selected in order to replace it. By default, the save name offered is that of the selected alignment. This may be modified by entering a new name in the field. File type is shown in this field. The software alignment files have the extension *.mat.

Page 1572

Click this button to save the file. Click this button to close the window without applying changes. Clicking this button displays this help page.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1573

Delete This function is used to delete one or more alignments. The window is shown below:

Select the alignment(s) to be deleted in the list. Click this button to exit the window without deleting an alignment. When this button is clicked, the following message is displayed:

Click this button to confirm deletion of the selected alignments. Click this button to close the confirmation message window without deleting any alignments (to cancel the operation).

Note: The current (active) alignment or an alignment associated to the CAD file cannot be deleted. If you attempt to do this, a message of the following type is displayed:

Page 1574

If you click this button, the active alignment or alignment associated to the CAD alignment is not deleted but any other alignments selected are deleted. If you click this button, only the alignments preceding the active alignment or alignment associated to the CAD alignment in the list are deleted. The active alignment or alignment associated to the CAD alignment and any alignments following it in the list are not deleted.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1575

Activate This function is used to select a work session alignment as current alignment. The window is shown below:

Select the alignment to be activated from the drop-down list. The list displays all the alignments available in the current work session. Click this button to activate the alignment. Its name is then displayed in the toolbar and in bold in the Alignment Database. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1576

Associate To CAD Alignment The CAD alignment is the alignment of the CAD file. When the software is started, the default CAD alignment is the CMM alignment. This function is used to associate/release an alignment other than the CMM alignment to/from the CAD alignment. It may be accessed: - Via the Alignment menu -

Via this icon in the toolbar.

Associate Warning: The alignment to be associated to the CAD alignment must be activated.

The window is shown below:

is used to select the CAD alignment with which the user-created alignment will be associated. This field is only available if at least one open CAD file has an alignment entity. Click this button to associate the selected alignment to the CAD alignment. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Once the alignment has been associated to the CAD alignment, its name is displayed in italics in the toolbar. This icon is displayed in front of alignment name in the Alignment Database.

Measured and constructed features are then associated to the features defined in the CAD alignment. The CAD alignment is the three-color alignment displayed in the 3D View, if the alignment is not associated

Page 1577

to the CAD alignment, it is displayed in mauve.

Example 1: Alignment not associated with the CAD alignment - The defined features are in the CAD alignment. This choice was made when they were defined. - The measured features are in the CMM alignment.

Example 2: Alignment associated to the CAD alignment The measured (actual) values and theoretical (nominal) values of all the features are in the same alignment:

Warning: When associating an alignment with CAD alignment, if several alignments are available, you need to select the CAD alignment matching with the one created on the part by the user. If the selected CAD

Page 1578

alignment is not the right one, all actual and nominal values will be in the same alignment but will not match the CAD model.

Release There are two ways of releasing the current alignment from the CAD alignment: - Associate another alignment -

Click this icon in the toolbar.

The following window is then displayed:

Click this button to release (dissociate) the selected alignment from the CAD alignment. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1579

Properties This function is used to display all the creation parameters of existing alignments in the work session. This is useful to check they have been correctly created or to access the alignment creation log. The window is shown below:

Select the alignment from the list on the left to display its properties in the right part of the window. Click this button to close the window.

Example: On 3 Center Points

Page 1580

Example: Plane 2 Points

Page 1581

One Point

Page 1582

Description

This function allows an alignment to be created from the current probe position or by offsetting the axes of a reference alignment. The window is shown below:

The alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following alignments. The alignment may be assigned a new name by entering it in the field, or another alignment selected from the drop-down list.

Current probe position

Click this button to set the alignment origin coordinates, these will be those of current probe position, if the probe has been calibrated.

Page 1583

Probed point A point may also be probed. In this case, the coordinates of the probing point are used.

Offset from the current position

These fields allow an alignment offset to be applied in the X, Y or Z axis of the CMM alignment. Enter a value for the corresponding axis and click the the X, Y or Z buttons to confirm. The X, Y and Z axis still represent the CMM alignment axes, whatever the reference alignment. The alignment created keeps the same axes as the reference alignment. The field is then grayed out (shaded) and the button inaccessible, a preview of the alignment is displayed in blue in the 3D View. This is updated (refreshed) each time one of the three buttons is clicked. The counter may then be incremented up to 3 points. When one of the axes is clicked, the position of the alignment created corresponds to the coordinate of the probe in the CMM alignment, Ccmm, from which the specified offset value, Coffset, is subtracted: Ccmm - Coffset = Ccreated_alignment (in the CMM alignment). If all three fields are not completed, the remaining coordinates are taken from the reference alignment.

Note: If none of the fields is completed, a click on each of the X, Y andZ buttons corresponds to an offset of 0. Thus, when the reference alignment is the CMM alignment, it suffices to click each of the three axes without entering any values to obtain an alignment according to current probe position.

Important note: None of the above three methods implies probe compensation if the ball has a diameter other than 0.

Select a reference alignment from the list of existing alignments. The orientation of the axes of the alignment created will then be the same as that of the alignment selected as reference alignment.

If the box is checked, and if a program is opened in Teach-in mode, this allows an operator instruction command line to be created in the program to inform the operator of the procedure to be followed to create the alignment by aligning one point.

Page 1584

used to close the window without creating the alignment.

used to validate the point(s) and activate the new alignment.

used to delete the last point. The temporary alignment in the 3D View is then updated.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following lines are added:

Page 1585

Example

The probe is placed in the center of the circle CENTERCIR :

Open the Aligning One Point window and configure it as shown:

Page 1586

Click this button to set the alignment origin coordinates, these will be those of current probe position. In this case, the alignment origin coordinates are approximately the same as those of the circle CENTERCIR.

Check this box to create an operator instruction command line in the program. This will inform the operator of the procedure to be followed to create the alignment by aligning one point.

The Aligning One Point window is then displayed:

Page 1587

Click this button to confirm the point and activate the new alignment.

Alignment REP2 will then be displayed in the graphic view in the center of the circle CENTERCIR :

Page 1588

The following lines are created in the program:

Page 1589

Model 3-2-1

Page 1590

Description

Model 3-2-1 type alignment consists in probing 6 points on reference surfaces to create an isostatic reference system.

Example: Selecting the points to be used to create the alignment The workpiece is placed on a model, as shown in the following figure:

The first three alignment points are selected on a first reference face. These block two rotations and a translation. The following two points are selected on a second face. These block the last rotation and a translation. The last point is taken on the third face and blocks the final translation.

The window is shown below:

Page 1591

The alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following alignments. The alignment may be assigned a new name by entering it in the field, or another alignment selected from the drop-down list.

Face 1 (Points 1-2-3) Select the orientation (X, Y or Z) of the face on which the first three points are to be probed from the drop-down list. Use this button to select the direction of the surface normal vector.

Example: When the normal vector of the surface probed has the same direction as the alignment axis to be created, the sign is + :

Page 1592

When the normal vector of the surface probed has the opposite direction to the alignment axis to be created, the sign is - :

used to enter the position (X, Y or Z) of the probed face in the alignment to be created.

Face 2 (Points 4-5) Select the orientation (X, Y or Z) of the face on which the following two points are to be probed. Use this button to select the direction of the surface normal vector. See the above example. used to enter the position (X, Y or Z) of the probed face in the alignment to be created.

Face 3 (Point 6)

Page 1593

used to enter the position (X, Y or Z) of the face on which the last point is probed (in the alignment to be created). It is not necessary to enter vector orientation and direction here as this information is deduced from the previous choices. This is possible as the software only uses direct orthonormal reference systems.

Then probe the six points starting with the three points on Face 1, then the two points on Face 2 and, finally, the point on Face 3. The counter is incremented as the probing operations are performed.

this button is enabled once all the points have been probed. It is used to activate the new alignment.

used to delete the last probed point.

used to close the window without creating the alignment.

In program: When this function is learned in a program (Teach-in), the following lines are added:

Page 1594

Example

The workpiece is placed on a model:

Points 1, 2 and 3 are probed on Face 1, the normal of this face (always outside material) indicates the Z+ direction. The face is located at Z=-30 of the alignment to be created. Points 4 and 5 are probed on Face 2, the normal of this face (always outside material) indicates the X+ direction. The face is located at X=130 of the alignment to be created. Point 6 is probed on Face 3. This face is located at Y=130 of the alignment to be created.

Open the Aligning Model 3-2-1 window and configure it as shown below:

Page 1595

Then probe the six points starting with the three points on Face 1, then the two points on Face 2 and, finally, the point on Face 3.

Use this button to confirm. The alignment is then displayed on the screen in the toolbar and in the Alignment Database.

Page 1596

Geometrical

Page 1597

Description

The principle of geometrical alignment consists in using previously measured features to create the alignment. To construct this type of alignment, you must have measured two features (plane, line, axis, or surface point) and a point or a sphere or three planes to be used as origin. The first feature will determine the primary axis and represent an orientation (X, Y or Z). The second feature will determine the secondary axis and represent another orientation (X, Y or Z). The point will represent the origin of the geometrical alignment. To create this alignment, you must specify: - A primary direction, either X, Y or Z - A secondary direction, either X, Y or Z - An origin.

Example: features to be used to construct a geometrical alignment:

The probed plane P1 is used as projection plane for the two probed lines, D1 and D2. Point PT1 is constructed from the intersection between D1 and D2. The geometrical alignment can be constructed using the two lines D1 and D2 and point PT1. With this type of alignment, translations or rotations may also be performed on the alignment to be created or on another, existing alignment.

The window is shown below:

Page 1598

The alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following alignments. The alignment may be assigned a new name by entering it in the field, or another alignment selected from the drop-down list.

Primary Direction Select the first feature: -

from the drop-down list

-

or using the Browse Feature Database function. The symbol corresponding to the type of feature selected is displayed to the left of its name.

Notes: 

Different types of features may be selected for the alignment axes and origin. cylinders, cones, lines and the direction of the normal vector of a plane or a surface point are considered to be axes and may be used to define a direction. Features with a center (point, circle, sphere, etc.) are considered to be points and may be used to define the origin (planes may also be used to define the origin by

Page 1599



their position). The directions of the active alignment may also be kept by using predefined features in the alignment such as, for example, the X axis. Generally, if the method by which the alignment is to be constructed is not expressly stated by the design office and the geometrical tolerances and dimensions do not specify the references, the primary direction is usually that of the best machined plane and/or widest plane possible or, in the case of a workpiece obtained by revolution around cylinder axis, if this is at least twice as long as the diameter of its base.

Once the feature has been selected, select the direction (X, Y or Z) that the alignment must set. Select the orientation of the primary direction. When the orientation of the selected feature is the same as the alignment axis to be created, the sign is +. When the orientation of the selected feature is the opposite of the alignment axis to be created, the sign is -.

Example: In the following diagram, line D1 is selected as Primary Direction for the sign is therefore

axis, the

:

Secondary Direction Select the second feature: -

from the drop-down list or using the Browse Feature Database function. The symbol corresponding to the type of feature selected is displayed to the left of its name.

Example: In the following diagram, line D2 is selected as Secondary Direction for the the sign is therefore

axis,

:

Page 1600

It is not necessary to give the third direction because the software automatically determines the final axis as it uses direct orthonormal alignments.

Origin Select the features that are to determine alignment origin in each axis. In the following diagram, point PT1 is used for all three axes:

The origin may be different for each axis. In this case, alignment origin will be located at the X, Y and Z coordinates of the points used for each axis:

Page 1601

The features used to construct the geometrical alignment are all evaluated (i.e. measured or constructed). In metrology, construction of an alignment using only defined features (nominals) is meaningless. The software does, however, allow an alignment to be constructed using nominals only and the following message is displayed to informs users of this:

Translation / Rotations

Enter the translation values to be used for the desired axis or axes.

Select translation and rotation operation sequence number from the drop-down list.

Page 1602

Enter the rotation values to be used for the desired axis or axes.

Notes:  

For rotations, angle sign is positive from X to Y, Y to Z and Z to X (in the direct direction). Variables may be used to set rotations and translations.

The list of variables may be configured in the menu File > Edit Informations or Program > Edit Informations. Right-click in the X, Y or Z field to display the following context menu:

Select the desired translation or rotation variable from the list of existing variables:

Features may also be used to set rotations and translations. 

The Features Database function allows features to be used:

Right-click in the X, Y or Z field to display the following context menu:

. Select Features Database. The following window is displayed:

allows the type of feature to be used to be selected. The drop-down list then displays the features of this type and the desired feature may be selected.

Page 1603

used for direct access to the Features Database to select the desired feature. used to select feature dimensions, e.g. diameter for a circle. In the following window, rotation in the X axis is configured with the measured diameter of the circle LEFCIR.

Click this button to confirm. Click this button to return to the Aligning Geometrically window without applying changes.

Note: When creating it, a preview can be seen in 3D View of the alignment that will be created (blue alignment). This preview will be updated at each change of value or feature.

CAD Nominal A geometrical alignment may be defined by selecting a CAD alignment entity directly in the 3D View. Alignment, Point and Surface CAD entities can be selected. Alignment CAD entity

Page 1604

After opening the geometrical alignment window, click an Alignment CAD entity then modify the proposed alignment if necessary using translations and rotations. Click the Create button. Then the geometrical alignment is in the same position as the Alignment CAD entity. Point CAD entity After opening the geometrical alignment window, click a Point CAD entity. Translation values are completed according to the position of the point while rotation values are null. Click the Create button. Then the geometrical alignment is in the same position as the selected Point CAD entity. Surface CAD entity After opening the geometrical alignment window, click a Surface CAD entity. Translation values are completed according to the selected position while rotation values are null. Click the Create button. Then the geometrical alignment is in the selected position on the Surface CAD entity. If there is any ambiguity concerning the alignment selected (alignments aligned or superimposed), the buttons allow the correct alignment to be selected.

Click this button to create the alignment. Its name is then displayed in the toolbar and the Alignment Database. Click this button to exit the window without creating the alignment.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1605

Normalized Alignment

Normalized alignment is a type of alignment created using a specific method. The purpose of this procedure is to create an alignment complying as closely as possible with the specifications of the ISO standard.

The standard states that to define an ABC reference system, the workpiece must be placed on a plane on the largest surface, here A, unless A is specified on the plane. Then slid in this plane to bring it into linear contact (two contact points minimum) with surface B, perpendicular to the first surface. Then, finally, slid on A and B to bring it into partial contact with a third surface, C, perpendicular to the first two (one contact point minimum).

Example:

To comply with the constraint given in the Standard on the perpendicularity of the three planes forming an alignment (reference system): 1) Measure plane A, corresponding to surface A, by checking Tangent Outside Material in the measurement window. The maximum number of points possible must be probed. Using these points, the software calculates the corresponding plane (by the least squares or Tchebychev method) and translates it to the point at the greatest distance from the material. Note that the Tchebychev criteria will minimize the form fault better than the least square method. 2) Measure plane B by checking Tangent Outside Material, taking the maximum number of points on surface B, with a constraint on perpendicularity to plane A. The software calculates plane B that it translates to the point at the greatest distance from the material. 3) Construct line D1 from the intersection of plane A with plane B. 4) Measure plane C by checking Tangent Outside Material, taking the maximum number of points on surface C, with a constraint on parallelism to line D1. The software calculates plane C perpendicular to plane A and plane B. 5) All the features required to construct a normalized alignment have now been constructed.

Page 1606

Select Aligning Geometrically:

Primary Direction Select plane A, corresponding to the Z axis, as shown in the above example.

Secondary Direction Select plane B, corresponding to the -Y axis, as shown in the above example.

Origin - In the X axis: Select plane C - In the Y axis: Select plane B - In the Z axis: Select plane A

Click this button to create the alignment.

Page 1607

The following alignment will be created:

Page 1608

Example

Example 1: Create the alignment REP1, as shown in the diagram below:

Before you create the alignment, you must: - Measure plane P1 - Measure the two lines D1 and D2 - Construct point PT1, the intersection of the two lines.

Then open the Aligning Geometrically window:

Page 1609

Primary Direction Select X as primary axis and line D1 as the feature setting this direction. The sign is positive as the orientation of the line is the same as that of the X axis.

Secondary Direction Select Y as secondary axis and line D2 as the feature setting this direction. The sign is positive as the orientation of the line is the same as that of the Y axis.

Origin Select point PT1 as the origin for all axes (X, Y and Z).

Page 1610

Click this button to create the alignment. Its name is then displayed in the toolbar and the Alignment Database.

Example 2: Create the alignment REP2 from alignment REP1, as shown in the following diagram:

Before creating REP2, alignment REP1 must have been created as described in Example 1.

Then open the Aligning Geometrically window:

Page 1611

To create alignment REP2, two translations and a rotation must be performed on alignment REP1.

Primary and Secondary Directions Given that alignment REP2 is constructed from alignment REP1, two of the axes in alignment REP1 must be selected from among: Z for the Z axis, Y for the Y axis and X for the X axis.

Origin The origin is that of alignment REP1, i.e. point PT1. This origin is the point of departure for the translations and the center of rotation.

Translations and rotations Select one of the two possible methods :

Page 1612

1) Create alignment REP2 by translation then rotation:

The translations are 45 on the X axis and 35 on the Y axis. Their sequence (order) number is 1. The rotation is -90 on the Z axis. Its sequence number is 2. The window should be configured as shown below:

2) Create alignment REP2 by rotation then translation:

The rotation is -90 on the Z axis. Its sequence number is 1. The translations are 45 on the Y axis and -35 on the X axis. Their sequence number is 2. The window should be configured as shown below:

Page 1613

Click this button to create the alignment. Its name is then displayed in the toolbar and the Alignment Database.

Page 1614

On 3 Center Points

Page 1615

Description

This type of alignment is based on measurement of three features (spheres or circles or points, etc.) corresponding to three points whose theoretical positions (nominal center points) in the alignment to be created are known. The software calculates the alignment so that the three features are as close to their theoretical positions (nominal center points) as possible in the alignment:

This type of alignment is usually used for inspection (control) setups. Depending on the accuracy of the reference setup after construction of the alignment, the real and theoretical (nominal) coordinates may differ slightly.

Note: Any deviation between the theoretical (nominal) and real (actual) values is distributed over the three features.

Warning: 

 

This type of alignment is always calculated, even if the theoretical coordinates have sign or decimal place errors. No warning message is displayed to inform the user of incorrect calculation and the alignment is then invalid. The three features must not be aligned as the accuracy of the alignment would then be incorrect. Calculation may then even be impossible. When points are used for the alignment calculation, these are usually constructed points. This is because the probing accuracy of a point does not allow the point to be used to construct an alignment.

Before creating the alignment, the three features must be defined and measured. They may also be defined in the alignment creation window. The window is shown below:

Page 1616

The alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following alignments. The alignment may be assigned a new name by entering it in the field or another alignment selected from the drop-down list.

The three areas Center Point #1, Center Point #2, Center Point #3 are used to define the three features to be used to construct the alignment.

In each area, select the feature to be used: - From the drop-down list -

Or from the Feature Database.

Page 1617

When the feature is selected, its coordinates are displayed in the Nominals field if the feature has already been defined. The coordinates may also be manually entered in the X, Y and Z fields.

Click this button to create the alignment. Its name is then displayed in the toolbar and the Alignment Database. Click this button to exit the window without creating the alignment.

In program: When this function is learned in a program (Teach-in), the following line is added:

Page 1618

Example

Constructing an alignment with three sphere features:

The coordinates of the sphere SPHE1 are: X=60, Y=-20, Z=-20. The coordinates of the sphere SPHE2 are: X=110, Y=110, Z=-20. The coordinates of the sphere SPHE3 are: X=-10, Y=110, Z=-20. Each sphere must be defined in the software with the theoretical (nominal) coordinates shown in the setup assembly. The sphere must then be measured.

Open the Aligning on 3 Center Points window:

Page 1619

Select the spheres in the Center Point #1, Center Point #2and Center Point #3 sections.

The nominal X, Y and Z values are automatically displayed in the corresponding fields if the features have already been defined. Otherwise, they must be manually entered in the fields.

Click this button to create the alignment. Its name is then displayed in the toolbar and the Alignment Database.

Page 1620

On Plane and 2 points

Page 1621

Description

This function is used to create an alignment using a plane and two points. The nominal and actual points may be Points, Circles, Spheres, Rectangles, Slots, Hexagons, Arcs, Toruses or Ellipses. For the alignment to be calculated, the two points must not be identical and must not be on a line perpendicular to the plane.

Example: Constructing an alignment by aligning on a plane and two points (Plane and 2 Points Alignment):

1: Nominal plane. 2 and 3: Nominal points (any feature equivalent to a point: point, circle, rectangle, etc.). 4: Actual plane. 5 and 6: Actual points (any feature equivalent to a point: point, circle, rectangle, etc.). The principle is to match the nominal and actual values of each feature. The plane will block two rotations and one translation.The first point will block two translations. The second point will block the last rotation.

Calculation methods

Page 1622

There are three alignment methods:

- Plane - Point 1 - Point 2:

P1 and P2: Nominal points P1' and P2': Actual points PL: Nominal plane PL': Actual plane.

When the alignment has been created: The actual plane is the same as the nominal plane. The actual point P1' and nominal point P1 are aligned perpendicularly to the two planes. The actual point P2' and nominal point P2 are positioned as best as possible by rotation around the axis P1 P1'.

- Point 1 - Plane - Point 2:

P1 and P2: Nominal points P1' and P2': Actual points PL: Nominal plane PL': Actual plane.

When the alignment has been created: The actual point P1' and nominal point P1 are identical. The actual plane PL' and nominal plane PL are parallel. The actual point P2' and nominal point P2 are positioned as best as possible by rotation around the perpendicular to the plane passing through P1 and P1'.

- Point 1 - Point 2- Plane:

Page 1623

P1 and P2: Nominal points P1' and P2': Actual points PL: Nominal plane PL': Actual plane.

When the alignment has been created: The actual point P1' and nominal point P1 are identical. The actual point P2' and nominal point P2 are positioned as best as possible on the line connecting the nominal and actual points. The actual plane PL' and nominal plane PL have a common perpendicular plane passing through the line defined by the actual and nominal points.

The window is shown below:

Page 1624

The alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following alignments. The alignment may be assigned a new name by entering it in the field, or another alignment selected from the drop-down list.

Plane Select the plane: - From the drop-down list -

or using the Browse Feature Database function.

Its name is then displayed in this field along with a symbol showing the type.

Page 1625

In the drop-down list next to plane name, select its alignment sequence (order) number with respect to the two points used to calculate the alignment.

The nominal coordinates of the plane and its normal vector are respectively displayed in the X, Y, Z and I, J, K fields, if the plane has been previously defined. They may also be manually entered.

Position #1 and Position #2 Select the two features equivalent to points for each of the two positions #1 and #2: - From the drop-down list -

Or using the Browse Feature Database function.

Its name is then displayed in this field along with a symbol showing the type.

The alignment sequence number of the two points is directly assigned by the software.

The nominal coordinates of the feature are displayed in the X, Y, Z field if the relevant feature has been previously defined. They may also be manually entered.

Click this button to create the alignment. Its name is then displayed in the toolbar and the Alignment Database. Click this button to exit the window without creating the alignment.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1626

Example

Creating an alignment by aligning on a plane and two points (Plane and 2 Points Alignment):

1: Plane PLAN1 2: Circle CERC1 3: Circle CERC2

Define and measure the plane and the two circles. Open the Aligning on Plane - 2 Points window:

Page 1627

The software automatically displays the last plane measured in the Plane area. For the Position #1 and Position #2 areas, the software automatically displays the last features (equivalent to points) measured. In each area, select the features to be used to construct the alignment.

The nominal values of the plane (corrdinates and nominal vector) and the two points (coordinates) are automatically displayed in the corresponding fields, if the features have been previously defined. Click this button to create the alignment. Its name is then displayed in the toolbar and the Alignment Database.

Page 1628

On 6 Surface Points

Page 1629

Description

This type of alignment is only available if a CAD file is open in the software. It is used to create the workpiece alignment by matching reference points, defined in the CAD file displayed on screen, and the same points probed on the workpiece.

The reference points must, in as far as this is possible, allow isostatic alignment, as is the case for points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 in the diagram below:

Six points must be selected to construct the alignment: - Three alignment points taken in one direction. These block two rotations and a translation. - Two points taken in a second direction. These block the last rotation and a translation.

Page 1630

- The last point is taken in a third direction and blocks the final translation. - The three directions must, in as far as this is possible, be perpendicular to each other.

The window is shown below:

The alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following alignments. The alignment may be asigned a new name by entering it in the field, or another alignment selected from the drop-down list.

The point to be defined is displayed in blue, Point 1 in the example. To define a point, you may: - Click the CAD file at the location where the point is to be defined. Enter two of the three coordinates, then click the button corresponding to the missing coordinate (Z in the following example). The software finds the best solution for the missing coordinate on the basis of the other two, using the CAD file:

Page 1631

When the first point has been defined, the window is as shown below:

The coordinates of the point defined, here Point 1, are displayed in the Reference Points area.

The name of the CAD Surface on which Point 1 is defined is displayed in this field. These buttons are used to change the projection surface and corresponding point. The first surface offered is the nearest surface, when the CAD file is clicked, the defined point may be located on a different

Page 1632

surface to that desired if there are overlapping surfaces. This box is used to enter a different part thickness for each defined point. This must be specified before the points are probed. This field is used to assign a family to the measured points by selecting an existing family from the drop-down list or by entering family name if a new family is created. Each point may belong to a different family. This field is used to select projection type. The available choices are: Surface, Edge or Curve.

Note: the 6 surface points composing the alignment may be of different projection types.

A cross in the Defined column shows that the point (here Point 1) has been defined. Projection type is shown in the Actual column. The following point (here Point 2) is now ready to be defined and therefore displayed in blue:

Note:  

To redefine a point, click in its box (its name is then displayed in blue) and modify its definition. This can be done during measurement. The selected points must be as widely spaced as possible on the workpiece to obtain an alignment that best represents workpiece spatial position.

When the six points have been defined, the window is ready for and awaiting measurement:

Page 1633

The point awaiting measurement is displayed in red (here Point 1). Probe the six points in the order in which they are defined and by approaching their representation in the CAD file as closely as possible:

Page 1634

A cross in the Actual column indicates that the point (here Point 1) has been measured and will be used to create the alignment:

to clear all window fields in order to reconfigure the alignment.

This button is used to save the definition of the 6 surface points in a file. This may be useful when the CAD file is re-opened as the points may be used to create a new alignment. When this button is clicked, the following window is displayed:

Page 1635

Select the save directory and name the file. The file will be an *.alg type file.

This button is used to open a previously saved file of reference points in order to use it to create a 6 surface point alignment. The following window is displayed:

When the file is opened, the definition of the 6 points is displayed in the alignment window.

Page 1636

This button is used to delete the measurement of the last point.

This button becomes available once all the points have been measured. It is used to create the alignment.

Click this button to exit the window without creating the alignment.

Note: When the alignment is created, the software may offer to re-probe certains points that are out of tolerance with respect to the points defined. The maximum deviation is defined by the probing range tolerances (these may be configured in the default surface point settings).

This button allows probing to be repeated in manual mode.

This button allows probing to be performed in automatic mode. The CMM then probes the surface point at the position previously defined in the window.

Warning: To avoid collisions, the probe must be correctly repositioned before this function is selected. Click this button if you want to ignore probing range tolerance error. Click this button if you want ot ignore all possible probing range errors.

When all the points have been measured and accepted, the software offers to associate the alignment created to the CAD alignment.

Page 1637

Click this button to associate the new alignment to the CAD alignment. Click this button if you do not want to associate the new alignment to the CAD alignment.

Notes:   

Probes may be changed (different adjustable head positions) while the six points are being measured. A missing probe may also be calibrated during measurement of the six alignment points. Calculation problems:

The software may not be able to calculate the alignment. The following message is then displayed:

There are several possible reasons for this: - The probed points do not correspond to the defined points. - Probing order does not match the order of the point definition. - Point position is not isostatic. - The distance between the reference points and the corresponding workpiece probe points is too large.

In program: When this function is learned in a program (Teach-in), the following lines are added:

Page 1638

Page 1639

Example

Open the Aligning on 6 Surface Points window:

Page 1640

Define the 6 surface points by clicking in the CAD file. When the 6 points have been defined, the window is displayed as shown below:

Page 1641

Then measure the 6 surface points in the order in which they are defined. When measurement has been performed, the window is displayed as follows:

Page 1642

Click this button to create the alignment.

The software then offers to associate the alignment created to the CAD alignment.

Click this button. The new alignment is associated to the CAD alignment. It then becomes active in the toolbar

.

Page 1643

On Reference Features

Page 1644

Description

This function is used to create an alignment using reference features to block one of more degrees of freedom. The software matches the theoretical coordinates and the real coordinates. There are 6 degrees of freedom to block: 3 translations and 3 rotations:

The features used as reference features may only be defined and measured (nominal and actual) features equivalent to a point (circle, sphere, etc... ) or planes. In the following diagram, 6 features, marked 1 to 6, are to be used as reference features, each blocking a degree of freedom: The points POIN1 (1), POIN2 (2) and POIN3 (3) block translation in the Z axis, rotation in the X axis and the second rotation in the Y axis. This leaves a rotation and two translations to block. The slot OBLO1 (4) and the circle CERC1 (5) block translation in the X axis and rotation in the Z axis. Slot OBLO2 (6) blocks the final translation in the Y axis.

The window is shown below:

Page 1645

The alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following alignments. The alignment may be assigned a new name by entering it in the field, or another alignment selected from the drop-down list.

For each line, select one of the features used to block the 6 degrees of freedom: Select the desired feature from the drop-down list. When the feature is selected, an icon showing its type (here a circle) is displayed at the start of the line, instead of the question mark.

Its defined (nominal) values are displayed in the corresponding fields, if the selected feature has been previously defined. Otherwise, the fields must be manually completed. Select the direction(s) that each feature is to block from the drop-down list.

This button is only available if the isostatic rules are complied with. It is used to create the alignment. When the alignment has been created, its name is displayed in the toolbar and in the Alignment Database . Click this button to exit the window without creating the alignment.

Page 1646

Notes:  





Features blocking several degrees of freedom may be used. In this case, six features are not required to construct the alignment. For more information, see the example. When selecting the directions blocked by the features, make sure you have the first direction three times, the second direction twice and the final direction once. In some cases, it may be impossible to calculate the alignment or the button may remain disabled (grayed out). This may be due to the fact that some fields indicating the nominal values of the features have not been completed. These fields are required to create the alignment, even if the feature used only blocks one direction. For example, if a circle is used to block direction X, it is necessary to also indicate the nominal values for the Y and X axes if there are known or then, the approximate values. When creating labels on features used to construct an alignment by reference features, the symbol representing the contribution of the feature in terms of degrees of freedom can be displayed in the label:

These symbols are only linked to the features used when creating the last alignmenet by created reference feature. For more explanation, see Sticker configuration.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following lines are added:

Page 1647

Example

Example 1: 3 features blocking the 6 degrees of freedom

Define and measure plane PLAN1, circle CERC2, and slot OBLO3. Open the Aligning on Reference Features window:

Page 1648

Select the 3 features PLAN1, CERC2 and OBLO3 from the drop-down list. Select the direction(s) that each feature is to block from the drop-down list.

The window should be displayed as shown below:

The plane PLAN1 blocks the workpiece in the Z direction, for one translation and two rotations. The circle CERC2 blocks the workpiece in the X and Y directions, for two translations. The slot OBLO3 blocks the workpiece in the Y direction, for the final rotation. The values displayed in the X, Y and Z fields of each feature are the values defined for each feature used. Click this button to create the alignment. When the alignment has been created, its name is displayed in the toolbar and in the Alignment Database.

Example 2:

Page 1649

Define and measure the three spheres SPHE1, SPHE2 and SPHE3.

Open the Aligning on Reference Features window:

Select the 3 features SPHE1, SPHE2 and SPHE3 from the drop-down list. Select the direction(s) that each feature is to block from the drop-down list.

The window should be displayed as shown below:

Page 1650

The sphere SPHE1 blocks the workpiece in the X Y Z directions, for all three translations. The sphere SPHE2 blocks the workpiece in the X and Z directions, for two rotations. The sphere SPHE3 blocks the workpiece in the X direction, for the final rotation. The values displayed in the X, Y and Z fields of each feature are the values defined for each feature used.

Click this button to create the alignment. When the alignment has been created, its name is displayed in the toolbar and in the Alignment Database.

Page 1651

Best Fit

Page 1652

Description

This function is used to optimize (best fit) an alignment using the nominal and actual values of the existing features in a file. The window is shown below:

Alignment name is shown in this field. The first alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following alignments. The alignment may be assigned a new name by entering it in the field, or another alignment selected from the drop-down list.

Source Alignment (alignment to be optimized) This is the alignment in which the deviations of the features to be optimized (best fit obtained) are expressed. This alignment is determined automatically as follows: - If the features used are not defined or are used without the Using nominal option, the alignment to be

Page 1653

optimized is the CMM alignment. - If features are used with the Using nominal option, the alignment to be optimized is the feature definition alignment.

Warning: If the features used for the best fit calculation are not all defined in the same alignment, the calculation cannot be performed.

Constraining Alignment This is the alignment in which the translations and rotations of the alignment to be optimized will be expressed.

Rotation / Translation The various checkboxes allow the rotations and translations allowed to be selected (a movement is allowed if the corresponding checkbox is checked). These movements are expressed in relation to the constraining alignment. The fields containing numerical values (0 when the window is opened) will be updated (for consultation) with the rotation and translation values calculated to obtain the best fit. Check this box to constrain (limit) authorized movements during best fit calculation, i.e. translations in the X, Y and Z axes and rotations in the X, Y and Z axes. For each movement, this type of display gives several options: means that movement in the X axis is not allowed. means that movement in the X axis is allowed and not limited (constrained). means that movement in the X axis is allowed and limited. Double-click the constraint (limit) values to modify them. They may then be edited in these fields: The default values are -1 and 1. It is then possible to change constraint (limit) values (-1 and 1 by default). If the field is empty, the movement will not be limited in the selected direction. The constraint values can be between -180° and +180°. If the value indicated is outside the limit, its angular equivalent is displayed. For example, if the value entered is 181°, the value displayed is -179°.

Scale When this box is checked (selected), an additional degree of freedom may be added that will be included in the best-fit calculation. In most cases, this scale factor may be considered as a workpiece expansion coefficient that must be taken into account when the workpiece is inspected. The scale factor thus calculated is expressed: - With respect to the CMM alignment if no Expansion/Shrinking coefficient has been previously calculated

Page 1654

- With respect to the alignment selected in Expansion/Shrinking if this is active. When this scale factor has been calculated and the alignment created, the Expansion/Shrinking coefficient for the current work session is updated. The Apply to measured features box may be used to apply the calculated coefficient, not only for future measurements but also to previously measured features. This option is also available in the Expansion/Shrinking window.

In program mode: When this command is learned in a program, the following lines are added:

Feature list This list contains the features used to calculate the best fit. By default, the list of features to be used is blank. Click this button to add a feature to the list by accessing the Feature Database:

When the features have been selected, click this button to display them in the Best-Fit window.

Page 1655

Add family Click this button to add a feature family. Example of use: when a program is run, the number of features used in a best-fit alignment is different to that recorded during learning (in Teach-in mode), e.g. scanning of an unknown form. A list of the families available in the work session is then displayed:

All the features contained in the selected family are then used to compute the best-fit. The families added can be displayed using the ? icon. :

Note: You cannot select features by using the database and "Add family" function in combination.

Configuring the constraints Once the features have been selected, the configuration window opens. This window allows the calculation constraints for each feature to be configured: Only one feature selected

A list of features selected

Page 1656

: When this box is enabled, the nominals (coordinates and definition alignment) will be retrieved from the nominal part of the feature. The nominal (defined) coordinates cannot be modified. If this box is unchecked, the coordinates must be manually entered in the boxes in the Best-Fit window provided for this purpose.

: Used to specify the feature direction constraint. The constraints are: AUTO X Y Z XY YZ ZX XYZ

Constraint direction is automatically determined according to the feature's contribution directions. The X coordinate of the feature is used in the calculation. The Y coordinate of the feature is used in the calculation. The Z coordinate of the feature is used in the calculation. The XY coordinates of the feature are used in the calculation. The YZ coordinates of the feature are used in the calculation. The ZX coordinates of the feature are used in the calculation. The XYZ coordinates of the feature are used in the calculation.

Contribution directions: Axes in which the alignment to be optimized can be translated or rotated. Features

Contribution directions XYZ

According to the normal, if there is one

XY or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane Y or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane XY or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane XY or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane XY or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane XY or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane

Page 1657

XY or YZ or ZX according to the projection plane According to the normal As if there were two circles at the end As if there were two circles at the end As if there were two circles at the end As if there were three points with the normal on the plane XYZ

used to specify the weight of the feature in best-fit calculation. There are two possible choices: - None:: all features will have the same weight in the calculation. - Tolerance range: The narrower the tolerance range, the greater the weight of the feature in the calculation. This also means that the features with the tightest tolerances will have the best fit.

Click this button to apply the changes. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

When the features have been selected and configured, the Aligning By Best-Fit window is displayed as shown below:

Page 1658

Note: To delete one or more features from the list, use the Del key on the keyboard or the Delete command in the context menu (this menu is displayed by right-clicking).

This box can be accessed if the feature list contains at least one surface point type feature. If it is checked, the best-fit calculation is performed in several iterations. The surface points (used for alignment by best fit) are re-projected in the new alignment at each iteration, thus allowing the best fit of the alignment to be obtained.

Click this button to export the best fit data (alignment names, rotation values, translation values, and mean deviation values before and after calculation) to a text file. The following window appears allowing to browse to the location of the destination file:

Page 1659

Example: text file containing best fit data:

When a laser tracker is connected, an additional option is displayed in the window: Based on Tracker accuracy This is intended to create a best-fit alignment by taking account of point measurement accuracy with respect to laser accuracy (manufacturer data). Several conditions must be satisfied to perform this type of calculation: - The features used must be geometrical points measured at "ball center".

Page 1660

- All points, without exception, must be weighted according to laser accuracy - No movement constraint must be applied. If at least one of the features selected for calculating alignment by best-fit is a geometrical point measured at "ball center" and the conditions listed above are not met, the following message is displayed:

and best-fit cannot be calculated.

Calculation is only possible if geometric or surface point features are selected. If this box is checked, the alignment calculation is oriented so as to all selected features are within the tolerance interval. All features used for best-fit must have a tolerance according to their contribution direction. If one of the points is out of tolerance, the following error message is displayed:

Important note: When using this parameter in a program, insert a conditional statement in order to take account of the case where the alignment cannot be calculated. When this box is checked, an additional result line is displayed:

This line indicates the number of features within the tolerance with respect to the total number of features, before and after best-fit.

Example: Before alignment calculation

Page 1661

Features PT1 to PT6 have a tolerance interval of between -0.003 mm and +0.003 mm. PT7 has a tolerance interval of between -0.001 mm and +0.001 mm. PT1, PT2, PT6 and PT7 are still outside of their respective tolerances.

After alignment calculation, with the Function of tolerances option unchecked

Only PT7 feature remains outside of its tolerance. Results:

After alignment calculation, with the Function of tolerances option checked

Page 1662

All features are within their tolerance intervals, even when their mean deviations are greater. Results:

Click this button when all the settings have been entered. The translation and rotation values are updated along with the mean deviation values before and after best-fit calculation.

Note: If this button is grayed out and there is a question mark (?) in the alignment name box, this means that the selected features are not all defined in the same alignment. The feature settings must therefore be modified to work in a single identical alignment.

Click this button to calculate the best-fit. Click this button to exit the window without calculating best-fit.

Results

These values show the Mean Deviation and Mean Squared Deviation before and after best-fit calculation.

Mean Deviation = (sum for i from 1 to n features of the absolute value of (actual position – nominal position)) /n

∑(actual position – nominal position)/n Page 1663

Mean Squared Deviation = square root of ((sum for i from 1 to n features of (actual position – nominal position)²) / n)

√(∑(actual position – nominal position)²/n )

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1664

Example 1

This example is based on best-fit of alignment PCS1 from the file demosurf.wk2 delivered with the software. To check the profile tolerance of section SECT2, the best-fit of alignment PCS1 must be calculated using the points composing section SECT2 (surface points SRF64 to SRF89):

Open the Aligning By Best-Fit window and complete it as shown below:

Page 1665

Click this button to access the Feature Database :

Page 1666

Select surface points SRF64 to SRF89 in the list of features. When the features have been selected, click this button to display them in the Aligning By Best-Fit window.

The Modify window is shown below:

Page 1667

Leave the parameters shown. Click this button.

The Aligning By Best-Fit window is then displayed as follows:

Page 1668

Authorize translations in the X and Z axes only (no surface point has a normal vector allowing translation in the Y axis to be set) and rotation in the Y axis:

Page 1669

Calculate best-fit by clicking this button. The window is then displayed as shown below:

Page 1670

Confirm creation of the alignment by clicking this button.

The following window opens, allowing you to associate the new alignment to the CAD alignment:

Click this button. The new alignment is associated to the CAD alignment and becomes active in the toolbar:

.

Page 1671

SECT2 before best-fit

SECT2 after best-fit

Note: Surface points with no initial alignment can be used (evaluated points). To do this, enter the nominal coordinates, i.e. the position and orientation (normal vector) of each point.

Page 1672

Example 2: Best-fit by Aligning on 3 Center Points

Measure and define three features, for example three spheres SPHE1, SPHE2 and SPHE3, respectively blocking XYZ, XZ and X.

Open the Aligning By Best-Fit window:

Page 1673

Click this button to access the Feature Database. Select the features SPHE1, SPHE2 and SPHE3. When the features have been selected, click this button to display them in the Aligning By Best-Fit window:

Page 1674

Click this button.

The Modify window is displayed as shown below:

Page 1675

Leave the parameters shown. Click this button.

Individually modify the direction parameters of the three spheres (by double-clicking the feature or by selecting Modify in the context menu displayed by right-clicking):

The Modify window corresponding to the selected feature is then displayed:

Page 1676

Configure the direction of sphere SPHE1 as XYZ. Click this button to apply the changes. Configure the direction of sphere SPHE2 as ZX. Configure the direction of sphere SPHE3 as X.

The features are now configured:

Page 1677

Authorize (i.e. do not limit) the 3 translations and 3 rotations. Calculate best-fit by clicking this button:

Page 1678

Confirm creation of the alignment by clicking this button.

The following window opens, allowing you to associate the new alignment to the CAD alignment:

Click this button. The new alignment is associated to the CAD alignment and becomes active in the toolbar:

.

Page 1679

Note: It is not essential to define the spheres. The nominal coordinates may be entered in the feature settings. To enter these coordinates, do not check (select) the Using nominal option and use the Modify window (opened by double-clicking the feature or by selecting Modify from the context menu) to enter the coordinates:

In this case, the coordinates of the features not using the nominal data are displayed in black in the list of features:

Page 1680

Example 3: Best-fit by Aligning on Reference Features

Measure and define three features, for example, a plane PLN1, a circle CIR2 and a slot SLOT3, respectively blocking ZZZ, XY and Y.

Open the Aligning By Best-Fit window:

Page 1681

Click this button to access the Feature Database : Select plane PLN1, circle CIR2 and slot SLOT3 in the feature list. When the features have been selected, click this button to display them in the Aligning By Best-Fit window:

Page 1682

The Modify window is displayed as shown below:

Leave the parameters shown.

Page 1683

Click this button.

Individually modify the direction parameters of the three features (by double-clicking the feature or by selecting Modify in the context menu displayed by right-clicking):

The Modify window corresponding to the selected feature is then displayed:

Page 1684

Configure the direction of the plane PLN1 as Z. Click this button to apply the changes. Configure the direction of the circle CIR2 as XY. Configure the direction of the slot SLOT3 as Y.

The features are now configured:

Page 1685

Authorize (i.e. do not limit) the 3 translations and 3 rotations. Calculate best-fit by clicking this button:

Page 1686

The following window opens, allowing you to associate the new alignment to the CAD alignment:

Click this button. The new alignment is associated to the CAD alignment and becomes active in the toolbar

.

Note: It is not essential to define the features. The nominal coordinates may be entered in the feature settings. To enter these coordinates, do not check (select) the Using nominal option and use the Modify

Page 1687

window (opened by double-clicking the feature or by selecting Modify from the context menu) to enter the coordinates:

In this case, the coordinates of the features not using the nominal data are displayed in black in the list of features:

Page 1688

Example 4: Using best-fit with scale

This concrete example of use of the Scale degree of freedom with best-fit alignment is a two-stage process:  

Establish the workpiece alignment and determine the coordinates of the reference points. Use the reference points for subsequent measurements.

Step 1: During initial workpiece measurement, the inspection alignment is created (in this example, based on the spheres via a geometrical alignment or alignment on 3 center points).

Once this alignment has been created, points are measured ("ball center" geometrical points, for example), distributed over the entire workpiece and at specific locations that can be repeated.

Page 1689

These measured points will then be used as a reference for subsequent inspections. The values of these points may be exported and then re-imported as theoretical reference points when new measurements are to be made. At this stage, reference point positioning repeatability may be checked. Once this check has been performed and this process accepted, these reference points will be used for subsequent measurements during workpiece life span.

Step 2: When one of these workpieces is to be inspected (possibly under different temperature conditions than those at reference point creation), measure these reference points and import for example the theoretical (nominal) data for them.

Page 1690

Create an alignment by selecting Alignment > Best Fit.

Page 1691

To do this: -

click this button to access the Feature Database,

- select the measured points from the list of features, -

Click this button to display them in the Aligning By Best-Fit window after selecting the correct parameters in the following window:

Page 1692

The Aligning By Best-Fit window is then displayed as shown below:

Authorize the 3 translations and 3 rotations, also check (select) the following boxes:

for a seventh degree of freedom to be used in the calculation and for the calculated coefficient to be applied to subsequent measurements - and also to all previously measured features (also see Expansion/Shrinking).

Click this button to calculate the best-fit:

Page 1693

The following window opens, allowing you to associate the new alignment to the CAD alignment:

Click this button. The new alignment is associated to the CAD alignment and becomes active in the toolbar

.

Page 1694

Note: The create alignment by best-fit process is based on the assumption of small movements. Thus, in some cases, for best-fit based on seven degrees of freedom, the calculation may result in a local best-fit solution and not a global solution. This means that: - Either the calculation cannot be performed :

- Or an incorrect scale factor is calculated (negative, for example). the following message is then displayed:

In this case, calculation does not continue and no result is displayed.

Page 1695

An intermediate alignment may then be used to obtain the desired solution. This alignment may be: - Either a geometrical alignment using a constructed line and one of the measured points

Page 1696

To arrive at:

Page 1697

And then creating the final alignment by best fit:

to obtain the desired result:

Page 1698

- Or a prior best-fit alignment that does not necessarily take all the degrees of freedom into account:

Page 1699

and that will give a result close to the desired result, to be followed by a new best-fit alignment for which all the degrees of freedom will be selected and that will allow the final result to be obtained:

Page 1700

.

Page 1701

Feature-based alignment

Page 1702

Description

The principle of feature-based alignment consists in using features that have been defined and measured together with partial references, in order to create this alignment. Building this alignment is based on the definition of selected features. The 3 selected features must then block any degrees of freedom to create the alignment position. A calculation is then performed to match the defined part with the measured part of the features. The calculation of this type of alignment applies the following calculation criteria: - Alignment calculated according to the least square method. - Perpendicularity constraints of the second and third feature with respect to previous one(s).

Example: features to be used to construct an alignment:

- Calculation of plane A as main reference with the least square method. - Calculation of plane B as second reference with the least square method and perpendicularly constrained to plane A. - Calculation of plane C as third reference with the least square method and perpendicularly constrained to plane A and B.

Important note: Therefore the alignment created complies with the above mentioned calculation criteria. However, note that the geometrical features measured for the creation of the alignment are calculated according to criteria defined in the measurement window. Therefore, regardless of the calculation criteria (least squares, Tchebytchev, inscribed...) and the constraints selected by the user, the alignment is always calculated with the least square method and perpendicularity constraints, from the probing points of these features.

It is then possible to construct the alignement based on features. The window is shown below:

Page 1703

The alignment is assigned a default name. This is then incremented for the following alignments. The alignment may be asigned a new name by entering it in the field, or another alignment selected from the drop-down list.

Select Features Select features: -

Using the Browse Feature Database function.

- By clicking directly in features in the 3D View It is possible to use a partial reference of the selected feature instead of its full measurement. Thus, the reference features are not measured for calculating the alignment, only the partial reference entities are taken into account. Partial references are geometric point type features. Once features have been selected, it is possible to delete them and select others, for example. The features selected are either defined, or both defined and measured. When they are only defined, the measurement window of the feature is displayed only once the alignment creation windows is validated.

Page 1704

Other settings Used to select the alignment to be created among the existing alignment entities in the CAD model, thus to apply the required theoretical translations and rotations to this alignment.

Used to associate the alignment to the CAD automatically after it is created. Do not check this option is the alignment entity selected above is not the CAD alignment.

This button gives access to the feature evaluation options. The following window is displayed:

No measurement or retrieval is executed. If the features have already been measured, the aligment is directly created. Used to measure the features during alignment creation. If the features have already been measured, they are not measured again. Used to extract the features during alignment creation, if they were not previously evaluated. Check this option to evaluate again the features that were already measured or retrieved. If the option is not checked, these features are not modified.

Note: To create this alignment, it is also possible to select only one or two surfaces.

Click this button to create the alignment. Its name is then displayed in the toolbar and the Alignment Database. Click this button to exit the window without creating the alignment.

In program mode: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 1705

Page 1706

Example

Example 1: Create the alignment ABC, as shown in the diagram below:

Open the Define Feature Based Alignment window and click the CAD model: - The surface corresponding to plane A - The surface corresponding to plane B - The surface corresponding to plane C

Page 1707

Select the default alignment corresponding to the CAD axis of the CAD model. Check this option to associate the alignment created to CAD. Then click

and select Measure:

Click this button to start the aligment evaluation: - Planes A, B and C are then defined and measured automatically, - The alignment is created, activated and associated to CAD.

Page 1708

Example 2: Create an alignment with the following features:

Open the Define Feature Based Alignment window and click the CAD model: - The surface corresponding to plane A - The surface corresponding to cylinder CYL1 - The surface corresponding to cylinder CYL2.

Page 1709

Select the alignment entity of the CAD model corresponding to the alignment to be created. Then click

Do not associate alignment to CAD.

and select Measure:

Click this button to start the aligment evaluation: - Features A, CYL1 and CYL2 are then defined and measured automatically, - The alignment is created and activated.

Page 1710

Creating the TWIN alignment In order to be able to correctly measure in TWIN mode, it is important for both machines to have the same Machine alignment. To ensure this is so, an alignment is required on 3 evenly spaced spheres as far as possible apart on the machines' median plane (in most cases it will be the ZX plane).

Prerequisites        

Check on each of the two stations that there is no existing TWIN.mat alignment in the installation directory for the software. Take the two CNC start-up reference marks. Ensure the orientation of the machine axes is the same on both machines. The MASTER sphere needs to be memorized correctly on each of the two machines. Ensure the probes on both machines are calibrated to the same MASTER sphere (for both machines to have the same CMM alignment home position). The position of the MASTER sphere must never be changed. Ensure there is no work session in progress. Fit a reference sphere to the end of the MASTER arm, with its axis horizontal. Check the assembly for rigidity.

Method of creating the alignment Slave Arm

Calibrate a horizontal probe on the MASTER sphere.

Master Arm Calibrate a probe on the MASTER sphere, this probe to be of the same dimensions as the sphere once it has been fitted to the arm (the ball center - fastening point and sphere center - fastening point distances must be equal to 10mm). Once calibration is complete, a reference sphere needs to be fitted in lieu of the probe. Set the arm to position 1.

Page 1711

Create the PCS1 geometric alignment with the coordinates of position 1 as its origin.

Associate the alignment created to the CAD alignment. Measure sphere SHP1 manually. Re-measure SPH1 automatically at 9 points.

Create a PCS1 geometric alignment using sphere SPH1 as its origin.

Page 1712

Associate the alignment created to the CAD alignment. Activate PCS1.

Define sphere SPH1 in alignment PCS1 with coordinates (0,0,0).

Page 1713

Set the arm to position 2.

Set the arm above the sphere at position 2.

Define sphere SPH2 in alignment PCS1 with the coordinates showing on the Master arm.

Page 1714

Measure sphere SPH2 automatically at 9 points relative to its nominal.

Page 1715

Set the arm to position 3.

Set the arm above the sphere at position 3.

Define sphere SPH3 in alignment PCS1 with the coordinates showing on the Master arm.

Page 1716

Measure sphere SPH3 automatically at 9 points relative to its nominal.

Page 1717

More than 3 spheres can be measured in this way. All this needs is to follow the above method.

Create an alignment using the Optimize function and select the spheres measured previously.

Page 1718

The result of optimizing will then show in the window after being calculated. If this result is not as expected, additional spheres positioned in the same plane as the first three spheres used will need to be measured. Save this alignment as TWIN.MAT.

Using the TWIN alignment       

Copy the TWIN.mat file to the directory in which the .INI files for the software are located. Exit and restart the software at each of the stations. The MASTER sphere needs to be memorized on the arm again without changing the lever arm values. Redo the probe files on both machines. Re-enable the machine alignment and check that both machines have the same alignment. To do this, measure the MASTER sphere again with both arms. Both spheres measured should be zeroed. If for any reason this procedure has failed, ensure prior to repeating it that the TWIN.mat file has actually been deleted. There is no point in repeating this procedure so long as the geometrical properties of the machine have not been changed.

See also: Control.

Send / Receive features [Twin], Send / Receive alignment [Twin], Synchronize Twin, Remote

Page 1719

Send to / Receive from TWIN System These functions are used to send and receive alignments from one computer to another and thus from one CMM to another.

Send to TWIN System

Select this function on the sender station. The window is shown below:

Select the alignment to be sent from the drop-down list or by entering its name in the field. Click this button to send the selected alignment. Click this button to exit the window without sending the alignment.

Receive from TWIN System Select this function on the receiver station. The window is shown below:

Page 1720

Select the alignment to be received from the drop-down list or by entering its name in the field. Click this button on the receiver station to receive the alignment.

If automatic reception mode is enabled (checkbox enabled), several alignments may be successively received without having to click to receive each one of them. Alignment name is then automatically the same as on the sender station.

Click this button to exit the window without receiving the alignment.

In program: When these functions are learned in a program, the following lines are added:

Page 1721

Browse Alignment Database This function allows all the alignments contained in a file to be viewed in list format. It gives direct access to the Alignments tab in the unified database:

The active alignment is displayed in bold in the list. The CAD alignment is displayed in italics and shown by a different icon.

This button is used to activate the alignment selected in the list, or the desired alignment may be double-clicked to activate it. This button is used to close the Browse Feature Database window.

Context (pop-up) Menus The Browse Feature Database window allows rapid access to certain functions via context menus: Context menu for the Alignments category

Context menu for one or more alignments

Page 1722

Select All: to select all the alignments. Invert Selection: to select all alignments not displayed highlighted. Open: to open an alignment file (.mat) Modify: Opens the Create window for the type of alignment selected (Point, Model, Geometrical, etc.) in order to change the original settings. Save: to save an alignment in .mat file format. Delete: to delete one or more alignments. Activate: to activate the selected alignment. Associate To CAD Alignment: to associate/release the selected alignment to/from the CAD alignment. Properties: to display the creation properties of the selected alignment. Send to TWIN System: allows the selected alignment to be sent in TWIN mode. Alignment Info: allows alignments to be compared.

Keyboard shortcuts There are a number of keyboard shortcuts for alignment functions: Ctrl - A: to select all the alignments. DEL: to delete one or more alignments. F5: to refresh alignment display.

Page 1723

Program The programs are used to reproduce a measurement sequence by saving the order of the measurements, constructions, alignment creations, etc. If CNC machines are used, the paths can be programmed and all the parts can be controlled in exactly the same way.

Page 1724

Program window The Program window opens when a new program is created or an existing program is opened.

Note: This window can be docked. For further details, see the Docking parameters page.

Metrolog XG programs (*.gm2) The Program window is as shown below for the Metrolog XG programs:

The program access path appears at the top left of the Program window: The access path is followed by the name of the program and its extension for the Metrolog XG programs: Demogeom.dm2 in this example.

Note: When creating a new program, before it is saved, the word Program appears in this field.

The following icons are available in the Metrolog XG and DMIS Program windows:

Page 1725

This button is used to duplicate a line or a block of lines of the program, in order to copy it in a group. The instructions selected remain in the program. This button is used to cut a line or a block of lines from the program. The instructions selected disappear from the program but can be pasted elsewhere using the paste button. This button is used to paste the previously copied or cut instructions in the required place. When a definition, measurement or construction line or block of lines is selected, this button is used to display the Feature properties concerned and to modify their print settings. This button is a shortcut to the Find and replace function of the context menu. This button is a shortcut to the Restore Deleted Lines function of the context menu. This button is used for the Reduce window function. This reduces the Program window to an icon in the Status bar. This button is used to switch between two window positions and sizes, stored in the sotware.

This button indicates the following: -

the Teach-in mode is disabled when it is grayed out,

-

the program is in Teach-in mode when it is flashing green

-

the program is in Insert Off-line mode when it is flashing red.

This button is used to activate the run mode.

This button is used to activate step by step running.

This button is used to interrupt the current action: Teach-in or running of the program.

This button is used to move the run cursor to the selected line in the program.

This button is a shortcut to the Insert operator instructions function.

This button is a shortcut to the Expand function of the context menu.

The trash can is used to delete the selected instruction(s) from the program. This operation can also be carried out using the Del key of the keyboard.

This button is used to Save the program.

Page 1726

This button is used to Close the Program window.

The instructions making up the program appear in the center of the window. The instructions can appear in the form of single lines, groups or sub-groups, open or closed:

To open or close a group or a sub-group: - use the button after selecting the required group or sub-group - or double-click on the group or sub-group - or use the Expand function of the context menu.

DMIS programs (*.dms or *.dmi) The Program window is as shown below for the DMIS programs:

Page 1727

The program access path appears at the top left of the Program window: The access path is followed by the name of the program and its extension.

The icons available in the DMIS Program window are the same as those for the Metrolog XG programs.

The instructions making up the program appear in the center of the window:

Page 1728

The DMIS program lines can be edited. To modify an instruction line, select the Edit function from the context menu, or double-click on the required line.

Different tabs can appear in the lower part of the window. These are created when running certain command lines. For example, the Output tab appears when running this type of command:

The Error tab appears by default and is used to display the syntax errors which occur during loading. In the above example, an error has been detected in line 251.

Page 1729

Program menu

Page 1730

New

This function is used to create a new control program file, in the software (*.gm2) or DMIS (*.dms or *.dmi) format. When this function is selected, the Program window opens automatically in Teach-in mode:

Metrolog XG / Silma XG program:

DMIS program:

Page 1731

Open, Open previous

Open a program This function is used to open a program previously saved using the Save as function. The window is shown below:

Select the file to be opened from the list. searches in the file structure for the directory in which the program has been saved. The name of the file selected appears in this field. Another file may be selected by entering its name.

The type of file appears in this field. The program files contain the extension *.gm2, *.dms or *.dmi (DMIS).

If this box is checked, the selected program can be run by clicking on the button.

Page 1732

If this box is not checked, the selected program can be opened by clicking on the button.

Click on this button to exit the window without running or opening the program. Click on this button to display this help page.

Note: Once the DMIS file type has been selected, a request can be made to analyze the DMIS program selected on opening it using the Verify Syntax function located at the bottom of the program opening dialog box:

See DMIS program context menu for further information.

Open previous This function is used to quickly reload a recently used program file. Select the program to open from the list:

Page 1733

The program window then opens, containing the selected program.

Page 1734

Close

This function can be accessed: - from the Program menu - from the Program window, by clicking on

.

When this function is selected, the program window closes, ending the editing or running of the program it contains.

Note: When this function is selected, if the program open has been modified, a message appears offering to save the changes:

saves the program. closes the program without saving the modifications. closes the message and leaves the program open.

Page 1735

Save/Save as

These functions are used to save the current program. They can be accessed: - from the Program menu - from the Program window, by clicking on

Save This functionis used to save the current program assigning it a name and a directory, if it is being saved for the first time, or to save the changes made in this same file. The save window is shown below:

Select the directory in which the file is to be saved. Give a name to the file.

Page 1736

Select the type of file: *.gm2 or DMIS (*.dms or *.dmi). Click on this button to exit the window without saving the program. Click on this button to display this help page. Click on this button to save the program.

The Edit information window then opens. If the program has already been saved, the changes are saved without the previous window being opened.

Save as This function is used to save the current program under a different name. The save window shown above then opens, and is used to modify the name and the path of the current file.

Page 1737

Delete

This function is used to delete one or more programs from a directory. The window is shown below:

Select the program file(s) to be deleted from the list. To select multiple files: - if the files are not adjacent, select the first file then, holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard, select the last file. - if the files are adjacent, select them all by holding down the Shift key of the keyboard.

searches in the file structure for the directory in which the program(s) has/have been saved. The name of the file(s) selected appears in this field.

The type of file appears in this field. The program files contain the extension *.gm2, *.dms or *.dmi (DMIS).

Click on this button to delete the selected program(s). Click on this button to exit the window without deleting any programs. Click on this button to display this help page.

Page 1738

Import

This function is used to convert a program file to the software format.

Page 1739

PNT file (*.pnt)

This function is used to generate a program including a series of commands (definition and measurement of surface points or geometrical points, creation of via points) from a *.pnt file. The *.pnt files containing the points are as follows:

Procedure for importing a PNT file to generate a *.gm2 program Select the Import function from the Program menu. The following window appears:

Page 1740

Click on this button at the top right of the window to select the PNT file to be imported. The following window appears:

Choose the format *.pnt as the file type and select the file which is to be imported. Then click on this button. The import window then contains the name of the file to be imported as well as the name of the *.gm2 program which is to be created:

Page 1741

This option is active when a program is already open. Check this box to insert the import into the program. Click on this button to exit the window without importing the file. Clicking on this button will open a window used to define the conversion options:

Clicking on this button, all the points contained in the *.pnt file will be imported into the *.gm2 program. Clicking on this button, it is possible to select the features to be imported. The following window is then displayed:

Page 1742

Click on this button to confirm the selection of the features. The Import parameters Details window is then modified as follows:

Conversion parameters

This part of the window is used to define the point measurement parameters. For further details, see the Set-up CNC parameters page.

The next part of the window is used to choose the type of points which are to be defined and measured in the

Page 1743

*.gm2 program created:

If the choice is based on the Surface points, you can specify the projection feature from the options Surface, Edge or Curve, and give a material thickness:

Used to import feature nominal and/or actual values. If at least one CAD file is open in the 3D View, the Generate part is displayed as follows:

By default, this box is not selected (is unchecked). When checked, a new choice is possible: indicates that the normal vectors of the features are generated according to the direction of the CAD surfaces.

Page 1744

indicates that the normal vectors of the features are generated according to the direction of the CAD surfaces and according to part orientation.

Importing the *.pnt file By clicking on this button in the Import parameters window or on in the Import parameters - details window, all of the points (in the first case) or the selected points (in the second case) are imported. An Edit information window then appears. A message then appears indicating that the conversion has been carried out correctly:

Click on this button to end the import process for the *.pnt file and return to the Program window. This contains the program which has just been generated from the *.pnt file:

Page 1745

VDAFS file (*.vda)

This function is used to generate a program including a series of commands (definition and measurement of surface points or geometrical points, creation of via points) from a VDAFS file. The normal value of each feature corresponds to the information relating to the normal for the feature in question, contained in the VDAFS file. A VDAFS file contains the X, Y, Z coordinates of the points (geometrical point, surface point) as well as the values of the normals relating to these points. The *.vda files are as shown below:

Procedure for importing a VDAFS file to generate a *.gm2 program Select the Import function from the Program menu. The following window appears:

Page 1746

Click on this button at the top right of the window to select the VDAFS file to be imported. The following window appears:

Choose the format *.vda as the file type and select the file which is to be imported. Then click on this button. The import window then contains the name of the file to be imported as well as the name of the *.gm2 program which is to be created:

Page 1747

This option is active when a program is already open. Check this box to insert the import into the program. Click on this button to exit the window without importing the file. Clicking on this button will open a window used to define the conversion options:

Clicking on this button, all the points contained in the *.vda file will be imported into the *.gm2 program. Clicking on this button, it is possible to select the features to be imported. The following window is then displayed:

Page 1748

Click on this button to confirm the selection of the features. The Import parameters Details window is then modified as follows:

Conversion parameters

This part of the window is used to define the point measurement parameters. For further details, see the Set-up CNC parameters page.

The next part of the window is used to choose the type of points which are to be defined and measured in the

Page 1749

*.gm2 program created:

If the choice is based on the Surface points, you can specify the projection feature from the options Surface, Edge or Curve, and give a material thickness:

Importing the *.vda file By clicking on this button in the Import parameters window or on in the Import parameters - details window, all of the points (in the first case) or the selected points (in the second case) are imported. An Edit information window then appears. A message then appears indicating that the conversion has been carried out correctly:

Click on this button to end the import process for the *.vda file and return to the Program window. This contains the program which has just been generated from the *.vda file.The surface points and the geometrical points will have as their respective normal values the corresponding information contained in the imported VDAFS file:

Page 1750

Page 1751

IGES file (*.igs, *.ige, *.iges)

This function is used to generate a program including a series of commands (definition and measurement of surface points or geometrical points, creation of via points) from an IGES file. An IGES file contains the X, Y, Z coordinates measured on features which can be assimilated into a point (geometrical point, circle, arc, sphere, surface point, rectangle, slot, hexagon, ellipse). The *.igs files containing the points are as follows:

Procedure for importing an IGES file to generate a *.gm2 program Select the Import function from the Program menu. The following window appears:

Page 1752

Click on this button at the top right of the window to select the IGES file to be imported. The following window appears:

Choose the format *.igs as the file type and select the file which is to be imported. Then click on this button. The import window then contains the name of the file to be imported as well as the name of the *.gm2 program which is to be created:

Page 1753

This option is active when a program is already open. Check this box to insert the import into the program. Click on this button to exit the window without importing the file. Clicking on this button will open a window used to define the conversion options:

Clicking on this button, all the points contained in the *.igs file will be imported into the *.gm2 program. Clicking on this button, it is possible to select the features to be imported. The following window is then displayed:

Page 1754

Click on this button to confirm the selection of the features to be imported. The Import parameters - Details window is then modified as follows:

Conversion parameters

This part of the window is used to define the point measurement parameters. For further details, see the Set-up CNC parameters page.

The next part of the window is used to choose the type of points which are to be defined and measured in the

Page 1755

*.gm2 program created:

If the choice is based on the Surface points, you can specify the projection feature from the options Surface, Edge or Curve, and give a material thickness:

Importing the *.igs file By clicking on this button in the Import parameters window or on in the Import parameters - details window, all of the points (in the first case) or the selected points (in the second case) are imported. An Edit information window then appears. A message then appears indicating that the conversion has been carried out correctly:

Click on this button to end the import process for the *.igs file and return to the Program window. This contains the program which has just been generated from the *.igs file:

Page 1756

Page 1757

MASTER file (*.src)

This function is used to generate a program in *.gm2 format from a program contained in a MASTER file (*.src). The *.src files are as shown below:

Procedure for importing a MASTER file to generate a *.gm2 program Select the Import function from the Program menu.

Page 1758

The following window appears:

Click on this button at the top right of the window to select the MASTER file to be imported. The following window appears:

Choose the format *.src as the file type and select the file which is to be imported. Then click on this button. The import window then contains the name of the file to be imported as well as the name of the *.gm2 program which is to be created:

Page 1759

Click on this button to exit the window without importing the file. Clicking on this button opens a progress window which cannot be edited:

Once the conversion has taken place, the Edit information window appears.

A message then appears indicating that the conversion has been carried out correctly:

Click on this button to end the import process for the *.src file and return to the Program window. This contains the program which has just been generated from the *.src file:

Page 1760

Page 1761

UMESS/UX file (*.uxa, *.uxb)

This function is used to generate a program in standardized DMIS format from a UMESS/UX program The *.uxa files are as shown below:

Procedure for importing a *.uxa or *.uxb file to generate a *.gm2 program Select the Import function from the Program menu. The following window appears:

Page 1762

Click on this button at the top right of the window to select the *.uxa or *.uxb file to be imported. The following window appears:

Choose the format *.uxa or .uxb as the file type and select the file which is to be imported. Then click on this button. The import window then contains the name of the file to be imported as well as the name of the *.gm2 program which is to be created:

Page 1763

Click on this button to exit the window without importing the file. Click on this button to import the file. A message then appears indicating that the conversion has been carried out correctly:

Click on this button to end the import process for the *.uxa file and return to the Program window. This contains the program which has just been generated from the *.uxa file:

Page 1764

Page 1765

PCDMIS file (*.rtf)

This function allows a program from PCDMIS (*.rtf) to be imported into the software, in standardized DMIS format. The *.rtf files are as shown below:

The commands supported for this type of import are as follows: Features AUTO/CIRCLE AUTO/EDGE POINT AUTO/ROUND SLOT

Constructions Alignments BF BF3D OFFSET ITERATE INTOF LEVEL

Tolerances Others 3D DISTANCE CHECK LOCATION OF COMMENT 2D DISTANCE DEPTH

AUTO/SPHERE

MID

TRUE

RECALL

FLY

Page 1766

AUTO/SQUARE SLOT CAST AUTO/SURFACE POINT PROJ AUTO/VECTOR POINT INT FEAT/CIRCLE FEAT/LINE FEAT/PLANE FEAT/POINT FEAT/SPHERE FEAT/SET FEAT/CYLINDER FEAT/SCAN GENERIC/POINT GENERIC/PLANE GENERIC/LINE

PIERCE

POSITION ROTATE 3D ANGLE LABEL ROTATE_CIRCLE FLATNESS MODE PERPENDICUL TRANS MOVE ARITY TRANS_OFFSET MOVESPEED PREHIT RETRACT TIP TOUCHSPEED LOOP

Procedure for importing a PCDMIS (*.rtf) file to generate a DMIS program Select the Import function from the Program menu. The following window appears:

Click on this button at the top right of the window to select the .rtf file to be imported. The following window appears:

Page 1767

Choose the format *.rtf as the file type and select the file which is to be imported. Then click on this button. The import window then contains the name of the file to be imported as well as the name of the DMIS program which is to be created:

Click on this button to exit the window without importing the file. Click on this button for the conversion to be carried out. A message then appears indicating that the conversion has been carried out correctly:

Page 1768

Click on this button to end the import process for the *.rtf file and return to the Program window. This contains the program which has just been generated:

Procedure for creating a PCDMIS (*.rtf) file from the PC-DMIS software In order to obtain an RTF file from PC-DMIS, do the following: - Open PC-DMIS in English with an active PRG file.

Page 1769

- Select File > Edit Window Print Setup.

Page 1770

- The following window is then displayed:

Check this box and fill out the file save path. Select the RTF printing format.

Page 1771

Enter some settings associated with obtaining this file. - Select File > Edit Window Print.

- The RTF file can then be used in another software package by importing it.

Page 1772

Import CimStation (*.dmi, *.dms) File

This function allows a DMIS program from CimStation to be imported into Metrolog XG in standardized DMIS format.

CimStation file import procedure

Click this button at the top right of the window to select the *.dmi or *.dms file to be imported. The following window is displayed:

Choose the format *.dmi or *.dms as the file type and select the file which is to be imported.

Page 1773

Then click this button. The import window then contains the name of the file to be imported as well as the name of the DMIS program which is to be created:

Click this button to exit the window without importing the file. Click this button to export the file.

Importing the *.dmi file A message then appears indicating that the conversion has been carried out correctly:

Click this button to end the import process for the *.dmi or *.dms file and return to the Program window. This contains the program which has just been generated from the CimStation file:

Page 1774

Page 1775

Holos File (*.nom, *.mess)

This function is used to import a Holos for Windows (*.nom) and Holos for Unix (*.mess) program.

Procedure for importing a Holos (*.nom, *.mess) file to generate a DMIS program Select the Import function from the Program menu. The following window appears:

Click this button at the top right of the window to select the *.nom or *.mess file to be imported. The following window is displayed:

Page 1776

Choose the *.nom or *.mess format in file type and select the file which is to be imported. Then click this button. The import window then contains the name of the file to be imported as well as the name of the DMIS program which is to be created:

Click this button to exit the window without importing the file. Click on this button for the conversion to be carried out. A window which enables a via point to be inserted before and after each measured point may be filled out in order to indicate the distance at which these points are located:

Page 1777

If distance is left at 0, there will be no via points. A message will appear on confirming this window, indicating that the import has taken place correctly, then:

Click this button to end the import process for the *.nom or *.mess file and return to the Program window. This contains the program which has just been generated:

Page 1778

DAT files (*.dat)

This function is used to generate a program including a series of commands (definition and measurement of surface points or geometrical points, creation of via points) from a *.dat file. The *.dat files containing the points are displayed as follows:

Procedure for importing a DAT file to generate a *.gm2 program Select the Import function from the Program menu. The following window opens:

Page 1779

Click on this button at the top right of the window to select the DAT file to be imported. The following window is displayed:

Choose the *.dat format as file type and select the file to be imported. Click this button. The import window then contains the name of the file to be imported as well as the name of the *.gm2 program which is to be created:

Page 1780

This option is active when a program is already open. Check this box to insert the import into the program. Click this button to exit the window without importing the file.

Clicking this button will open a window used to define the conversion options:

Clicking this button imports all the points contained in the *.pnt file into the *.gm2 program. If this buttin is clicked, the features to be imported may be selected. The following window is then displayed:

Page 1781

Click on this button to confirm the feature selection. The Import parameters - Details window is then modified as follows:

Conversion parameters

This part of the window is used to define the point measurement parameters. For further details, see the Set-up CNC parameters page.

The next part of the window is used to choose the type of points which are to be defined and measured in the

Page 1782

*.gm2 program created:

If the choice is based on the Surface points, you can specify the projection feature from the options Surface, Edge or Curve, and give a thickness:

Used to import feature nominal and/or actual values. If at least one CAD file is open, other options are available:

By default, this box is not selected (is unchecked). When checked, a new choice is possible: indicates that the normal vectors of the features are generated according to the

Page 1783

direction of the CAD surfaces. indicates that the normal vectors of the features are generated according to the direction of the CAD surfaces and according to part orientation.

Importing the *.dat file By clicking this button in the Import parameters window or in the Import parameters - details window, all of the points (in the first case) or the selected points (in the second case) are imported. An Edit information window is then displayed. A message then appears indicating that the conversion has been successfully completed:

Click on this button to end the import process for the *.dat file and return to the Program window. This contains the program which has just been generated from the *.dat file.

Page 1784

EBM files (*.ebm)

Text files in *.ebm format have a special syntax, developed by the PSA company. *.ebm file import allows a program with a specific structure to be quickly generated.

Page 1785

Export

This function is used to export a program in *gm2, *.dmi or *.dme format to one of the formats which can be used with other software. The window is shown below:

The Format field is used to select the required export format from the drop-down list. The following export formats are available: The software programs (*.gm2):

DMIS programs (*.dmi or *.dme):

DMIS (*.dmi or *.dms) ASCII (*.asc) Avail (*.avl) Cms (*.cmsl) Quindos (*.prc) Umess300 (*.um3) Umess UX (*.ux)

For further details, see the pages describing the different formats.

enters the path and the name of the file to be exported.

is used to choose the directory in the file structure in which to save the file to be exported.

The Header field is used to add a comment at the start of the exported file.

Page 1786

Click on this button to export the file. Click on this button to exit the window without exporting the file.

Page 1787

DMIS (*.dmi) export

This function is used to generate a DMIS (*.dmi) program from a program in the software format (*.gm2). The Functions supported by the DMIS interpreter page gives the commands which can be translated from a program in *.gm2 format.

Procedure for exporting a GM2 file to generate a DMIS program Open the program in the *.gm2 format required, then select the Export function from the Program menu. The following window appears:

Select the DMIS format, then click on the browse button to choose the save location and the name of the DMIS program which is to be created. The Header section of the window is used to enter a comment which will be visible in the header of the DMIS program. Click on this button to export the program.

Note: If a command used in the program in *.gm2 format cannot be translated, the line in which this command is used is announced as "not exported", as shown in the following image:

Page 1788

The DMIS program generated during the export can then be opened:

Page 1789

Export MITUTOYO ASCII (*.asc)

This function is used to generate an ASCII program (*.asc) from a program in the software (*.gm2).

Procedure for exporting a GM2 file to generate an ASCII program Open the program in the *.gm2 format required, then select the Export function from the Program menu. The following window appears:

Select the ASCII format, then click on the browse button to choose the save location and the name of the ASCII program which is to be created. The Header section of the window is used to enter a comment which will be visible in the header of the DMIS program. Click on this button to export the program.

Note: If a command used in the program in *.gm2 format cannot be translated, the line in which this command is used is announced as "not exported", as shown in the following image:

Page 1790

The ASCII program generated during the export can then be opened:

Page 1791

Export AVL CMS PRC UM3 UX

This function is used to generate a program in AVAIL (*.avl), CMS (*.cms), Quindos (*.prc), Umess300 (*.um3) or Umess UX (*.ux) from a program in DMIS format (*.dmi).

Procedure for exporting a DMIS file to generate an AVAIL (*.avl), CMS (*.cms), Quindos (*.prc), Umess300 (*.um3) or Umess UX (*.ux) program Open the DMIS program required, then select the Export function from the Program menu. The following window appears:

Select the program format which is to be generated by the export. Click on the browse button to select the save location and the name of the program which is to be created by the export. Click on this button to export the program. The following message appears to confirm the export:

Page 1792

Umess UX export settings A DMIS program export can be set up in Umess UX format. Select the Umess UX format in the Export Program window. The following window is displayed:

Click the

button to open the following window:

Page 1793

The and Zeiss:

button opens the probe cross-reference window between DMIS

Name: name of probe in DMIS program. Ball No.: refers to the ball number for the Zeiss probe. Ux Comb: refers to the combination number for the Zeiss probe.

Page 1794

Ux Config: refers to the configuration number for the Zeiss probe. Station Name: refers to the slot number for the Zeiss changer. Diameter: corresponds to Zeiss probe diameter. creates a new line in the list. modifies the active cell. deletes the current line. opens a previously created probe file. saves a list of probes created in .txt format. confirms the list created and closes the window. cancels create list and closes the window.

This field allows a file used as a correspondence (cross reference) table between software probe names and the probe names used in UMESS UX to be loaded. When the program is exported, probe names are modified according to what is displayed in the file loaded. forces generation of command 1713 to create part alignment from the control alignment.

creates Umess UX output designations for all ANSI and DIN geometric tolerances. The content of the designation name is determined by the choice made in the Tolerance output designations section.

determines the content of the Umess UX designation name. This name can be the DMIS tolerance name or the feature name. translates DMIS comment instructions into a Umess UX Ktext (ID 1679) report in the Umess UX format program. enables the start address for the first feature to be entered.

is the Umess UX address in the W-position folder which is called up if a DMIS datset/mcs report is used in the DMIS program in order to call up the machine coordinate system.

Page 1795

configures the header of the protocol at the start of the Umess UX program:   

Current: creates 7 empty lines and inserts them after the 10th line in the Umess UX program None: does not create a header From file: specifies a file to be used for the header. The file is inserted after the 10th line in the Umess UX program. creates a file in Q-Das format. inserts standard (default) points or space points.

Page 1796

Export MEASUREMAX, FLB BASIC, FLB FORTRAN (*.txt)

This function is used to generate a MEASUREMAX, FLB BASIC or FLB FORTRAN (*.txt) program from a program in DMIS format (*.dmi).

Procedure for exporting a DMIS file to generate a MEASUREMAX, FLB BASIC or FLB FORTRAN program Open the program in the *.dmi format required, then select the Export function from the Program menu. The following window appears:

Select the MEASUREMAX, FLB BASIC or FLB FORTRAN format, then click on the browse button to choose the save location and the name of the program which is to be created. Click on this button to export the program.

Notes: 

If an error message appears while exporting the program, the line will require to be corrected or disabled and the export rerun.



Certain export settings can also be modified by changing the value of the following variables in: Preferences > Advanced Parameters, User tab:

Page 1797

- add line numbers: FLBUSELINENUMBERS = 1 (default equals 0) - using SU rather than VT in PTMEAS instruction: FLBPTMEASTOVT = 0 (default equals 1).

Page 1798

Edit information

When saving for the first time, the Edit information window appears. This can be used to associate traceability information to the program. This information can then be edited at any time by selecting the Edit information function from the Program menu. The window is shown below:

This information is broken down into two categories:

System information System information cannot be modified by the user, it covers all the information associated with the current program.

Example: PROGRAM_VERSION: version of the software in which the program has been created. PROGRAM_FILE: save path for the program file. PROGRAM_DATE: date and time the program was created. PROGRAM_MODIF: date and time program was last modified.

User information

Page 1799

The user information is created and edited by the user. It should take the form "variable=value", as shown in the above example. These variables can be used in 4 different ways: - as information to be consulted - as a value when exporting the program: the variable(s) will appear in the header of the exported file - as variables during the teach-in and the running of a program - as a value when printing the report.

Click on this button to save the information entered. Click on this button to close the window without applying the changes made.

Page 1800

Print

This function is used to print the instruction lines of the program. The print window is shown below:

The header of the printed page contains: - the program file access path, - the date and time this file was created, - the date the file was last modified, - the measurement units (e.g.: millimeters) and angle units (e.g.: decimal degrees) active in the working session.

Print options When this option is selected, all the groups contained in the program are automatically opened out so that all the lines are printed. In the following example, all the lines of the DEFINITIONS group are printed, regardless of whether this group is open or closed in the Program window:

Page 1801

When this option is selected, the program is printed as it appears in the Program window. The lines contained in the closed groups will not be printed. In the following example, the lines contained in the DEFINITIONS group are not printed since this group is closed in the Program window:

Checking this box will print extended information. For example, the probing coordinates for the measurement lines, the theoretical values for the definition lines or the information concerning the current configuration. These appear in blue below the program lines concerned:

Page 1802

Print range Select this option to print all the content of the Program window (with the groups open or closed depending on the print options selected). Select this option to only print the lines highlighted in the Program window (with the groups open or closed depending on the print options selected).

Select this option to choose the pages to be printed, completing the adjacent fields. In this example, only pages 1 and 2 will be printed.

Print quality Select the required print quality from the drop-down list, between 72 and 4000 dpi (dots per inch).

Page 1803

Copies Indicate the number of copies to be printed, either manually by entering the value in the field, or using the arrows to increase or decrease the proposed value. This box can be accessed if the number of copies is a number other than 1. Check (select) the box to print the copies in collated form.

Click on this button to print the program with the print parameters chosen. Click on this button to exit the window without printing the program. Click on this button to access the advanced print configuration (Choice of printer, paper, orientation, etc.).

Page 1804

Insert

Page 1805

Activate manual mode

This function is used to insert a change to manual mode within a program in CNC mode. This can be of interest for delicate probes, or parts with considerable variations. Select the Activate manual mode function when the area to be probed in manual mode is reached. The following instruction then appears in the program:

Operator instructions can be attached to this command, informing the user of the change of mode and that the following measurement(s) is/are to be carried out manually. Continue to give the instructions, as in CNC mode, creating via points, with a view to deleting the instruction to change to manual mode later if required. To return to CNC mode, simply select the Activate CNC mode function.

Warning: When running the program, the machine moves directly from the last manual instruction to the starting point in CNC mode. It is therefore necessary to have a starting point which can be accessed directly in CNC mode.

Page 1806

Activate CNC mode

In a program, this function is used to automatically run all the following machine movements, taking the current coordinates of the probe as a starting point. The trajectories are given in the current alignment. The following window is displayed:

Check (select) the errors to be taken into account when running the program.

Note: If the Warnings box is checked, a message will be displayed in the following cases: - if the Automatic mode is not activated while scanning an unknown form - in case of an error while opening a CAO model - if a geometrical alignment is created with features only defined - if a geometrical alignment is created with two features of small angles

When this function is selected, the following instruction appears in the program:

Warning: When running the program, the machine moves directly from the last manual instruction to the starting point in CNC mode. It is therefore necessary to have a starting point which can be accessed directly in CNC mode.

Page 1807

Activate low speed/Activate high speed

These functions are used to move from one speed to the other when running a program. A line indicating the type of speed activated is inserted into the program:

or

Note : The values of these speeds can be configured using the Set-up CNC parameters function.

Page 1808

Synchronization with Twin System

This function is used to synchronize the running of programs from two machines in the context of a Twin configuration. This can be used to limit the risk of collisions in the same working area. In Twin mode, synchronizations may be named to make them easier to identify. This function is useful for long programs with several synchronizations.

Warning: This function is only available if a program is open in Teach-in mode.

The window is shown below:

If this radio button is selected, the synchronization will not be named. If this radio button is selected, an additional field appears, used to assign a name to the synchronization:

Click on this button to exit the window without carrying out the synchronization. Click on this button to validate the name entered and run the synchronization.

The software then waits for synchronization. This state can be viewed using the window below, along with the name assigned previously to the synchronization:

Page 1809

This window is automatically closed once the system has received a synchronization with the same name.

The following line is inserted into the program: - if a name has been assigned to the synchronization: - if the synchronization has not been named:

Note: For DMIS programs, the synchronization is also used to send and receive, on each of the systems, all the features of the working sessions.

Page 1810

Insert subcall program

If a program is long and complicated, it may be better to build it in "modules" so as to be able to modify it more easily later. To insert a subcall program, simply select the run line from the program which is to precede the subcall program and activate the Insert subcall program function from the Program > Insert menu. The following window is displayed, and is used to select the subcall program to be inserted:

Select the program file to be inserted from the list. searches in the file structure for the directory in which the program has been saved. The name of the file selected appears in this field. Another file may be selected by entering its name.

The type of file appears in this field. The program files have the extension *.gm2, *.dms or *.dmi (DMIS). Click on this button to exit the window without inserting a subcall program. Click on this button to display this help page.

Page 1811

Click on this button to insert the sub-program. The following type of line is then inserted in the program:

Substitution table When inserting a subcall program, a substitution table can be created between the subcall program and the program. This is used to replace a whole word or a substring which appears in the subcall program when it is run. This can be the name of a feature, for example, to avoid deleting this feature when running the subcall program. Click on this button to add a substitution table. The following fields then appear:

In the left-hand field, enter the text to be replaced in the subcall program. In the right-hand field, enter the replacement text. Choose whether to replace the whole word or a substring by selecting the corresponding radio button. By clicking on this button, the substitution table will not be created. Click on this button to create a substitution table. It then appears in the list:

By clicking on this button, an existing substitution table can be modified, after selecting it from the list. Click on this button to delete the substitution table selected in the list.

Example:

Page 1812

The subcall program is a measurement of a section, named SECT and consisting of the points POIN1, POIN2, POIN3, etc. In the program, the aim is to measure two sections, SECTA and SECTB. The section SECTA consists of the points PTA1, PTA2, etc. and the section SECTB consists of the points PTB1, PTB2, etc. The subcall program is therefore inserted a first time, in order to measure the section SECTA. The following two substitution tables then need to be created:

The substitution table obtained is as shown: When the Substring option is selected, the term appears in square brackets, like [POIN] in this example.

The subcall program is inserted a second time, in order to measure the SECTB section. The following two substitution tables then need to be created for the name of the section and the points which make it up:

The substitution table obtained is as shown: When the Substring option is selected, the term appears in square brackets, like [POIN] in this example.

Page 1813

Insert if-then-else statement

The if-then-else statement is used: - to run an instruction or a series of instructions according to the results obtained upstream in the program. - to use a single program to control two different parts. To insert an if-then-else statement, simply select the run line from the program which is to precede the statement and activate the Insert if-then-else statement function from the Program > Insert menu. The following window appears:

Either a condition or an error can be checked, depending on the line selected in the first field:

Check This option is used to determine whether the boolean condition to be tested is true. The condition can be single, in other words a comparison between two numerical values, or multiple as a combination of several conditions.



Single condition

Page 1814

This involves comparing two values using an operator. A value can be any digital value given by the user, or a characteristic dimension of a measured feature.

Click on this button in the Val. column on the left to determine the first value. The following window appears:

Select the type of feature, then the feature and then its dimension to be tested. If the box is checked (selected), the nominal value of the feature is used. Otherwise the actual value of the feature is used in the condition. This value can also be entered manually by clicking in this field and editing it. The syntax to enter a dimension relating to a feature is as follows: [feature_name->parameter]

Example: [cyl2->e.f.] designates the form fault of cylinder2. The possible parameters and their nomenclatures are as follows: Parameter

Nomenclature

diameter, radius diam, rad angle projected as xoy, yoz or zox respectively: xoy, yoz or zox distance of a plane compared to the source of dist the alignment where it is specified dimensions in cartesian or cylindrical x, y, z or r, a, i coordinates normal deviation nd length or width of a rectangle or a slot len, wid large or small diameter of an ellipse or a torus respectively: diaA, diaB angle, half-angle of a cone ang, 1/2ang side of a hexagon size distance evaluated d1, d2 angle evaluated 3D straightness strn flatness fltn cylindricality cyly roundness rndn parallelism para

Page 1815

perpendicularity gradient location coaxiality symmetry circular or total runout profile of a line or a surface

perp angr ptol coax symy trnt prfl

Click on this button in the Op. column to determine the operator for comparing the two values. The following menu appears:

These operators test the following respectively: equality, inequality, superiority, inferiority between two values, the deviation of a measurement compared to the tolerated deviation, or the critical deviation. For these last two operators, the comparison value is known since the definition, upstream of the program, of the features concerned. For the other four, the comparison value must be given in the second Val column.

Note: the logical operator can also be entered using the keyboard. The syntax must be identical to that of the menu (= ; != ; > ; etc.)

Click on this button in the Val. column on the right to determine the second value (to be selected from the list or to be entered manually in the field).

Example: A part is pierced with two symmetrical holes, the diameters of which are almost identical:

If the diameter of Hole 1 is greater than the diameter of Hole 2, the part must be turned over. Complete the window as follows:

Page 1816

Note: the Comment field is used to indicate the nature of the test carried out. This comment will appear in the program, on the last line of the if-then-else statement (line 29 in the example):

The program may follow different instructions depending on the result of the test: - If the condition is true, it is the "If" case which is processed. To insert instructions relating to the true condition, place the cursor on the "If" line: IF (condition)

Page 1817

CIR1.DIAM > CIR2.DIAM, line 25 in the example above. Insert the corresponding operator instruction: Part at the place: OK in the example. When running the program, the following message is then displayed:

- If the condition is false, it is the "Else" case which is processed, line 28 in the example above. To insert the instructions relating to the false condition, place the cursor on the "Else" line and insert the corresponding operator instruction. In this example, the following message is displayed:



Multiple condition

This involves associating several single conditions, inter-connecting them using a Boolean operator, by clicking on in the first Op. column. Two logical operators are then available:

Example of a multiple condition:

Page 1818

Warning: The AND operator takes priority over the Inclusive Or operator. The above condition is therefore read as follows: If ((CYL2->DIAM) In critical zone *) OR ((CERC1->DIAM) In critical zone) OR (((CERC1->DIAM) Out of tolerance) AND ((CYL1->DIAM) Out of tolerance)). If this condition is true, different cases can be specified and if-then-else statements inserted.

On error This condition is used to run one group of instructions if no error occurs and another group of instructions if an error is declared.

Example: This condition can be of interest when checking two almost identical parts, the only difference between the two being the presence or absence of a hole. The two parts can then be checked using the same program. Examples of errors causing the if-then-else statement to be run in the On error part: - Probing not found/not expected - Failure of the feature measurement - Failure of the feature construction - Failure of the surface point projection - etc.

To do this, complete the window as follows:

Page 1819

Probe the surface of the part in the possible position of the hole. If the hole does not exist, a first series of instructions is run: the Without hole.gm2 sub-program, in the following example. If a probing point is not found, the "Probing point not found" error occurs. This is the part with the hole. It is therefore the second series of instructions which is run: the With hole.gm2 sub-program, in the following example. The if-then-else statement can, for example, take the following form:

Page 1820

While ... This operator is used to run an operation loop while a condition is false.

Example: the user wishes to measure 10 identical parts in palettization. Instead of running the measurement program 10 times, moving each time to the next part, the user can run the program a single time, using a COMPTEUR (COUNTER) variable, a NBR PIECES (NO. OF PARTS) variable and a loop in which: - the part is measured - the machine positions itself to measure the next part - the COMPTEUR variable is increased by 1

Page 1821

Before the loop, the COMPTEUR variable is set to 0:

Create the NBR PIECES variable as follows:

Page 1822

When running the program, the number of parts to be measured is entered by the operator.

Insert an if-then-else statement in which the loop is carried out while the COMPTEUR variable is lower than the NBR PIECES variable, where NBR PIECES is the number of parts to be measured (10 in this case):

Page 1823

In this example, the Mesure de pièce.gm2 sub-program is inserted into the if-then-else statement. Each time the loop is run, the counter is increased by one unit, by increasing the COMPTEUR variable:

Page 1824

See also:

Advanced use, Hole search

Page 1825

Insert operator instructions

When you create a program, you can insert messages (in text, audio or graphic format) to inform the operator of a particular event. The window is shown below:

Picture Click on this icon to insert an image. The following window appears:

Page 1826

Select the file to be opened from the list. searches in the file structure for the directory in which the image has been saved. The name of the selected file appears in this field. Another file may be selected by entering its name. The type of file appears in this field. Image files have the extension *.bmp, *.gif or *.jpg. Click on this button to insert the selected image. Click on this button to exit the window without inserting the image.

Page 1827

Text Enter the text to be included in the operator instruction. For example, Central cylinder measurement. Please, move the probe. Click on this button to modify the appearance of the text. The following window is then displayed:

Page 1828

Choose the font, the style, the size and if necessary the color of the text. The operator instruction configuration window is then displayed as follows:

Page 1829

Sound Click on this icon to insert a sound. The following window appears:

Select the file to be opened from the list. searches in the file structure for the directory in which the sound has been saved. The name of the file selected appears in this field. Another file may be selected by entering its name. The type of file appears in this field. The sound files have the extension *.wav. Click on this button to exit the window without inserting the sound. Click on this button to insert the selected sound. The set up operator instructions window is then displayed as follows:

Page 1830

Click on this button to preview the operator instruction created:

Page 1831

and : During the test, these two buttons have the same effect, they are used to close the test window and return to the configuration window.

When this box is checked, the text entered appears in the instruction line as follows:

When this box is unchecked, the instruction line inserted into the program appears as follows:

Check this box for the program to stop when running and display the operator instruction:

Page 1832

The operator can then follow the displayed instruction, by moving the probe for example, and then decide to resume or abort the program. Click on this button to continue running the program. Click on this button to suspend the running of the program on this line.

When this box is unchecked, the program is not interrupted when the operator instruction is displayed. The following type of window appears, and auto-validates at the first probed point:

Page 1833

If no probing point is measured, click on this button to close the operator instruction and continue running the program. Click on this button once the configuration of the operator instruction has finished.

Note: In DMIS, the Operator instructions window is different, allowing only a comment to be entered:

Page 1834

Page 1835

Mode

Page 1836

Run

A program can be run continuously, or with breakpoints inserted during the run, or using the step by step method.

Continuous run A program can be run from any line. To do this, open the program to be run and select the required line in the Program window. This then appears highlighted in blue:

Then click on this button for the red indicator to join the selected line:

Page 1837

Note: If the program contains automatic movements, check that the machine can reach the starting position without any collisions.

Then click on the run button of the Program window or select the Run function from the Program > Mode menu.

The program starts running and the instructions and the probing points to be found appear on the screen. If the program is in manual mode, simply follow the probing instructions. If a problem arises during the running of the program, a message indicating the nature of the problem appears (probing point not found, etc.). It is then possible to abort or continue running. To resume running, the situation must be advanced (move the machine with the joysticks, for example). See the Errors management page.

Note: If there is a problem resuming running of the program (blockage, window grayed out, etc.), this means that a window is open and waiting (for a result, an operation or an abort). Return to the Program window once this window is closed.

Once the program has finished running, the following message appears if the software has not encountered any problems:

Page 1838

If errors have occurred during the running, the message will be of the following type:

This button is used to print the list of errors featured in More. This button is used to close the window without consulting any errors that there may be. Click on this button to see the details of the errors:

Breakpoints To create a localized breakpoint on a specific line being run, proceed as follows: Before running the program, place the cursor of the mouse on the line where the program is to stop running and right-click to bring up the context menu:

Page 1839

Choose the Breakpoint function from the context menu. A symbol then indicates a breakpoint on the line:

When the program is run, it will stop at this line. You must then click on the or select the Run function from the Program > Mode menu.

button to resume running

Step by step running To run the program step by step, proceed as follows: Place the red indicator on the start line:

Page 1840

Click on this button to run the program line by line.

Every line, it is possible to continue running step by step by clicking on the continuous running by clicking on the

button or to return to

button.

Warning: A block for a measurement (of a plane, for example) contains several instructions for movement and probing. Each probe corresponds to one action. Therefore, in step by step mode, you are advised to expand the blocks in order to follow the progress of the program action by action.

In program: Program execution may be temporarily suspended: - During a zoom, as long as the zoom buttons are held depressed in the toolbar of the 3D View or the left mouse button is held down, - During size adjustment, as long as the buttons are held depressed in the toolbar of the 3D View, - During a rotation or translation in the 3D View, as long as the mouse buttons are held down.

Page 1841

Stop/Restart

To interrupt a program being run, click on the function from the Program > Mode menu.

button of the Program window or select the Stop

To continue running a program from the point where it was stopped, click on the window or select the Restart function from the Program > Mode menu.

button of the Program

Note: It is possible to restart from another point in the program by moving the run cursor to the required position.

Page 1842

Teach-in/Insert off-line

These functions are used to integrate instructions into a program.

Teach-in This button of the Program window is greyed out when the teach-in mode is inactive. Simply click on it to enable teach-in mode or select the Teach-in function in the Program > Mode menu. The button then starts flashing green to indicate that the teach-in mode is active. All the actions carried out in the software (definition, measurement, creation of a view, probe activation, printing, etc.) are then saved in the program.

Simply click on this button to exit the teach-in mode in order to carry out operations in the software which will not be inserted into the program.

Note: When creating a new program, the Program window opens automatically in teach-in mode. However, a program is not automatically in teach-in mode when opened.

Insert off-line This mode is used to learn a program without using the measurement machine. To enable it, select the Insert off-line function from the Program > Mode menu. The button then starts flashing red to indicate that the insert off-line mode is active.

Fast teach-in This mode is only available offline and in teach-in mode. It enables measurement teach-in speed to be increased. The probing points do not cause the probe to move. The static, dynamic and continuous measurement modes are affected by this mechanism. Note: This mode is not available when a program is running.

Page 1843

Options

Page 1844

Reduce window

This function is used to reduce the Program window to an icon in the Status bar. It may be accessed: - from the Program > Options menu - from the Program window, by clicking on the

button.

This icon then appears in the Status bar. Simply click on the icon when you wish to restore the Program window.

Page 1845

Enable path display

This function is used to display the selected measurement path in red in the 3D view during Teach-in mode or on opening the program. The following window is displayed:

Activate this option to hide the measurement paths in the 3D View. Activate this option to only display the path of the selected feature.

Example: In the program, the measurement line of the PLAN1 plane is selected:

The Display selected feature path option is active. In the 3D View, the measurement path of the plane can be seen:

Page 1846

Activate this option to display: - the paths of all features selected in the program - part of the path of a feature

Example 1: In the program, the measurement lines of the PLAN1 and PLAN2 planes are selected:

The Display selection path option is active. In the 3D View, the measurement paths of the planes can be seen:

Page 1847

Example 2: In the program, part of the probing point lines of the PLAN2 feature is selected.

The Display selection path option is active. In the 3D View, the path corresponding to the selected lines can be seen:

Page 1848

Check this box to only display the probing points.

Example: The measurement line of the PLAN2 plane is selected:

Page 1849

Lock manual mode

This option is used to prevent a program from running in automatic mode. It will only be possible to run the program in manual mode.

Note: If the Lock CNC mode option is selected while the Lock Manual mode option is already checked in the menu, this option becomes unchecked. Similarly, if the Lock Manual mode option is selected while the Lock CNC mode option is laready checked in the menu, this option becomes unchecked.

Page 1850

Lock CNC mode

This option is used to run a program in automatic mode only. Instructions for switching to manual mode are ignored, the entire program is run in automatic mode. This function is not available when the software is connected to a CMM.

Note: If the Lock CNC mode option is selected while the Lock Manual mode option is already checked in the menu, this option becomes unchecked. Similarly, if the Lock Manual mode option is selected while the Lock CNC mode option is laready checked in the menu, this option becomes unchecked.

Page 1851

Automated probe selection

This function is used to match probes used in a DMIS program with those contained in the probe file opened in the working session. The software activates the nearest probe to the DMIS definition based on the diameter and the head angles.

Page 1852

Prepare limited CAD file

This function is used to reduce the CAD file used by limiting it to the part concerned by the program The software lists the surfaces of the CAD file on which the surface points are measured and does not display the others. A highly-specific order must be respected to use this function:

- Start the program by opening the CAD file. - Take the measurements required for the check on the part (surface points in particular). - Save the program once all the instructions are entered. - Still in Teach-in mode, select the Prepare limited CAD file function from the Program > Options menu. Note: No instruction line is created concerning the preparation of a limited CAD file.

- The limited CAD file is created but it still needs to be configured for opening. To do this, edit the Open a CAD file instruction line. - The following window is displayed, in which the Open restricted (only necessary entities) box must be checked:

- Save the program again.

Page 1853

When running, only the CAD surfaces used are displayed.

Example: Complete CAD file:

CAD file limited to the surfaces on which the surface points are measured:

Page 1854

Note: The information concerning the limited CAD file is saved in the program and not in the CAD files. The CAD files used remain intact and complete.

Page 1855

DMIS 4.0 and DMIS 5.0

May be used to select the DMIS standard used when learning section definition and measurement in a DMIS program. the syntax differs from the DMIS standard selected: DMIS v4.0

DMIS v5.0 :

Page 1856

Page 1857

Add auto retract instructions

This function allows via points to be added before and after each measured point to compensate for the inability of certain CNCs to use automatic retraction points.

Function deactivated

Function activated

Page 1858

Remote control

This function is used to open and run a program from a Master station on another station, said to be the Slave, when the Twin mode is used. On the Master station, select Remote control > Start remote program in the Program menu. The following window appears:

Enter the name of the program to be opened and run on the other station.

Notes:  



The file name should be followed by its extension (*.gm2, *.dms or *.dmi). The full path does not have to be entered. In this case, the software looks for the file in the last directory opened in the Open window (this directory is known in the file User.ini [CGammesFileDialog] m_sInitialPath). Paths can be entered such as c:\..., d:\..., f:\..., \\...

Click on this button for the order to start the program to be sent to the slave side. Click on this button to close the window once all the orders to start the program are sent.

On the Slave station, select Remote control > Wait for remote command in the Program menu. The waiting window of the program opens:

The program runs once it receives the command.

In program: When this command is used in program teach-in mode, the following line is inserted:

Page 1859

Page 1860

Mirror entire program

Creating a mirror program is used to automatically modify a program so as to run it on a symmetrical part.

Notes:    

The alignment used is the active alignment. If sub-programs and/or CAD files are present in a program to be converted, the software does not directly create the mirror program of the sub-programs and CAD files in question. If a probe head is installed, the mirror program can only be created if the radial rotation of the head is contained in a plane parallel to one of the machine axes. Open the program for which the mirror is required.

Select the Mirror entire program function from the Program menu. The following window appears:

Part Select the plane with regard to which the symmetry of the part is to be produced:

Page 1861

Probe head If a probe head is present, the head symmetry plane should be selected, taking into account the symmetry plane of the part:

Page 1862

By checking this box, it is possible not to modify the instructions relating to the probes (definitions and activations). No symmetrical head position will be calculated and offered. This box is only available in the DMIS program. It is used to rename the data contained in the program. Once the mirror program is created, the Find and Replace window is then displayed.

Click on this button to exit the window without creating the mirror program. Click on this button to create the mirror program.

Page 1863

Once the conversion has been carried out, a report appears:

In the above example, an error has been detected in line 4. This error indicates that the software is using a CAD file in the source program. The user therefore needs to think about creating the mirror CAD file. Most of the lines of the program are converted. It remains the user's task to modify the lines which refer to a file (loading of alignment, loading of probes list, opening of a CAD file) and the views. The conversion of a mirror program actually creates a new program, so as not to delete the original program. The program created in this way must therefore be saved.

Note: Only direct alignments are generated, this means that local alignment mirror results are approximations.

Example: In the following example, the mirror of the program can be seen on the activate probe line, the orientation of which is modified according to the parameters of the mirror :

Page 1864

Note: It is possible to create the mirror of just a selection of program lines. To do this, select the required lines in the Program window and right-click to display the context menu. Then select the Mirror selection function. The following window appears:

Page 1865

The operation is the same as the Mirror entire program operation.

Page 1866

Recover automatic backup

If the software closes without being backed up, this function allows you to recover the program in the state of the last Automated backup. This backup is carried out in the $$AUTO.gm2 or .dmi file. The backup frequency can be configured using the Automated backup function of the Configuration menu.

Page 1867

Convert hit-points to points statements

This function converts hit points for a feature into definition and/or measurement lines in a program. It is only available for arc, circle, cone, cylinder, line, plane and sphere type measured features. It is valid for both types of program: *.gm2 and *.dmi and is accessible only when a program window is open. The window is shown below:

selects the feature for which the hit points require to be converted either in the drop-down list or in the Features Database with

.

modifies the name of the points created. The prefix assigned by default is FEATURENAME_P. creates definition instructions for geometrical points. creates measurement instructions for geometrical points. Click this button to create the chosen instructions. Click this button to close the window.

Geometrical points are not created in the working session. Only definition and measurement instructions are inserted in a program. Feature names take the form: Name-of-chosen-feature_Px where x is a number. In the example below, the first hit point will be named THECONE_P1, the second will be named THECONE_P2, etc. Definition and measurement alignments:  

The geometrical point definition alignment is the feature definition alignment chosen for a *.gm2 program and the active alignment for a DMIS program. The geometrical point measurement alignment is the active alignment for the *.gm2 and DMIS programs.

Page 1868

Notes:  

It is not necessary to be in program learning to insert instruction lines. The lines will be inserted above the selection cursor (blue cursor).

Example: Select THECONE from the list of features and check both boxes in order to obtain the definition and measurement lines for the geometrical points to be created. The program will then appear as follows:

Page 1869

List used probes

This function is used to create the list of the probes used in the program. The window is shown below:

Click on this button to obtain detailed information on the use of the probes. The window is then as shown below:

In the above example, two probes are used: the probe P1 and the probe A90.0_B.75.2, each of which is activated once. Click on this button to return to the summary of the window.

Click on this button to print the list of the probes used.

Page 1870

Click on this button to exit the window after consultation.

Page 1871

Program wizard (Programming assistant)

This function provides assistance on creating complex control programs. This is traditional Windows-based assistance using a series of windows. The aim of this assistant is to modify a current control program using the content of a reference program. This function is used to create a database of programs which are frequently used or which have a complex structure. When creating a new program, it is then no longer necessary to recreate the equivalent program lines, then can simply be taken from this library. There are several ways of "mixing" two control programs: - Type 1: The reference program can encapsulate the whole of the current program. - Type 2: The reference program can encapsulate part of the current program. - Type 3: The reference program can be inserted into the current program.

Note: The difference between types 1 and 2 is set by the user, using the programming assistant. However, the difference between types 1 (or 2) and 3 is set when the reference program is created.

Page 1872

The reference program A reference program is a standard control program. It only has two specific features:  

It contains the set of the software commands giving the programming its "complexity". For example, this can be a set of interleaved loops. It can start with a Text/Value feature evaluation series which corresponds to the parameters which are to transit between the reference program and the current program during the "mixing" operation.

It can contain a specific program runner which symbolizes the future current program: . A program plug can be inserted in program teach-in mode, using the context menu > Add plug option.

Example: The following is an example of a type of reference program, based on two interweaved loops for which the number of repetitions is defined using parameters.

Note: The presence of the plug runner in the example program above indicates that this program corresponds to a type 1 or 2 user context.

Creating a reference program using the Wizard A reference program created using the Wizard can contain all the following data:   

A *.gm2 program. A list of parameters used during the mixing phase. A list of information to make things easier for future users of the programming assistant.

The *.gm2 program The *.gm2 program must be saved in the database of the assistant, which is in fact the ProgWiz folder of the software (it is however possible to add sub-folders in ProgWiz). The Windows environment variable mt2_wizdir can be added. This variable is used to define the position of the ProgWiz folder, other than in the software.

List of parameters

Page 1873

The list of parameters consists of all the Text/Value type features placed at the start of the program. When saving the program as a reference program, you need to determine which of these parameters can be modified by users of the assistant.

Information list In order to make the programming assistant more ergonomic, a more specific name and a short informative text can be assigned to the program and to each parameter.

Operating mode To add a program to the assistant, after having created the reference program in the software, simply use the Add to Wizard function from the context menu. The following window then appears:

This is used: - to associate a title and an informative text to the program itself. - to associate a picture to the program. The size of this picture should not exceed 130x160 pixels - to define the parameters which will be shown when using the assistant and to associate the titles, informative texts and default values to these parameters. The reference program then forms part of the Wizard and can be used through the generation assistant.

Page 1874

Using the Wizard assistant To start the assistant, select the Program wizard function from the Program menu or from the context menu. The assistant starts from the following home page:

Click on the Next button. The next page is used to choose the reference program to be used (a palettization, for example):

Page 1875

Choose the reference program to be used, then click on the Next button. The next page is specific to the program chosen. It is used to enter the values of the parameters associated with the reference program (the number of parts to be controlled or the offset between two parts, for example):

Page 1876

If a feature name must be configured, this button can be clicked to select the name of the desired feature in the Feature Database.

Example: The feature selected in the Database is LEFTCIR:

Once these values are entered, click on the Next button. The next page is specific to the program chosen. It only appears if a plug exists and is used to define the type of program which will be generated:

Page 1877

Checking or unchecking this box determines whether the program created will be a type 1 or type 2 program. Click on the Finish button.

Types of parameters In the Wizard, two different types of parameters can be used, digital values and character strings. The Text/Value type features can be used in the editable text fields, using a specific syntax for the latter: @"Name of the Text/Value feature"

Page 1878

Example of use The following example deals with a linear palettization problem on 2 axes:

Page 1879

Creating the reference program in the Wizard: This program contains the palettization structure (the loops, the variables, the alignment offsets, etc.) 

Write the reference program:



Add the program to the Wizard by selecting the Add to Wizard function from the context menu.

Page 1880

Check this box to enter the variable. Otherwise, the variable takes its default value. 

Save the program in the Wizard folder:

Page 1881

Creating the final program from the Wizard reference program: 

Write the current program for the measurement of a part:



Select the sequence to be integrated into the reference program:

Page 1882



Use of the Wizard:

- Introduction window

Page 1883

- Choice of the program

in the Wizard

-Enter the parameter values: - number of parts on the X axis - number of parts on the Y axis - offset on the X axis - offset on the Y axis

Page 1884

- Apply the reference program only to the selected lines

Final program obtained from the Wizard reference program:

Page 1885

Page 1886

Context menus The context menu can be viewed by right-clicking on one of the lines of the program. This menu varies depending on whether it is called up from a Metrolog XG / Silma XG or DMIS program.

Page 1887

Program context menus

The context menu can be viewed by right-clicking on one of the lines of the program. The menu is shown below:

Expand This function is used to obtain details on the selected line. - When a single instruction line is selected, its settings can be consulted and if necessary modified. A different window appears depending on the type of instruction selected. For example, in the case of a plane definition instruction line, it is the Modify plane window which appears. - When a group of instructions is selected, this button is used to open or close this group to determine whether or not the lines it contains are visible.

Cut This function is used to cut a line or a block of lines from the program. The instructions selected disappear from the program but can be pasted elsewhere, using the paste button.

Copy

Page 1888

This function is used to duplicate a line or a block of lines of the program, in order to copy it in a group. The instructions selected remain in the program.

Paste This function is used to paste the previously copied or cut instructions in the required place.

Find and Replace This function is used to carry out a search within the program. The following window appears:

Select the search criteria to be used from the following:

By title: Enter one or more terms which appear in the program line you are looking for. By statement type: Using the two drop-down lists select the combination of icons corresponding to the type of lines you are looking for. In the example above, the lines are plane definition type lines:

By reference: Enter the name of the feature, the alignment, the loop, the CAD model, etc. to search for. Checking the Replace by box, it is possible to replace the name with another, to be entered in the adjacent field. In the above example, the TOPPL plane is renamed PLAN. By checking the Upper case box, the replacement name automatically appears in upper case, even if it was

Page 1889

entered in lower case. The following radio buttons are used to choose whether to replace only the next occurrence of the term (Next only) or to replace it each time it appears (All). Checking this box produces a window indicating the context in which the term to be replaced appears, followed by a replacement confirmation message:

Click on this button to carry out the replacement and return to the search window. Click on this button to cancel the replacement and return to the search window. Click on this button to cancel the operation. Once the search criteria are configured, use the arrows to carry out the search, searching backwards or forwards through the program. Click on this button to close the search window and return to the Program window.

Restore deleted lines This function recreates a line or a group of lines previously deleted using Delete and Cut.

Warning: restoration will not take place if either of these actions is performed after having deleted lines.

Page 1890

Breakpoint This function is used to insert a breakpoint during the running.

Run To This function allows the program to be run from the red execution cursor to the blue selection cursor. Thus function is not available when the selected line precedes the execution cursor.

Go to the definition instruction of the active feature This function is used to move the blue cursor to the definition instruction of the active feature.

Example: The CERC1 feature is selected in the results window. After clicking the Go to the definition instruction of the active feature function, the corresponding program line is displayed as follows:

Disable/Re-enable This function is used to disable/re-enable a line selected in the program. A disabled line is not run, but is not deleted from the program. It can therefore be re-enabled the next time the program is run without needing to be recreated. Disabled lines appear as follows:

Properties When a definition, measurement or construction line or block of lines is selected, this button is used to display the Feature properties concerned and to modify them, in particular the print settings.

Make loop This function is used to repeat the selected instruction line(s). The following window appears, and can be used to assign a name to the loop and to determine the number of loops:

Page 1891

If this loop contains evaluations of features (definition, construction, measurement, creation of alignments, etc.), each running of the loop deletes the calculated values of the feature. To avoid this, you need to add the character $ at the end of the name of the feature for it to be incremented. Therefore, CERC$ gives CERC.1 on the first loop, CERC.2 on the second, etc. The following line is inserted into the program:

Notes:  

The number of loops can be configured with a variable. A counter showing the iterations is displayed in the bottom left-hand corner of the screen. It is shown below:

Make group This function is used to group selected lines, thereby organizing the program and making it easier to read. The following window appears, and is used to assign a name to the group to be created:

The following line is inserted into the program:

Mirror selection This function is used to create instructions symmetrical to those selected. For further details, see the Mirror entire program page.

Subcall program This function can also be accessed via the general menu. See the Subcall program page.

Page 1892

Insert If-Then-Else statement This function can also be accessed via the general menu. See the Insert If-Then-Else statement page.

Insert operator instructions This function can also be accessed via the general menu. See the Insert operator instructions page.

Add plug This function is used to insert a line in a reference program, in the position in which another program is to be called. For further details, see the Program wizard page.

Add to Wizard This function is used to add a program to the Wizard library. For further details, see the Program wizard page.

Program wizard This function can also be accessed via the general menu. For further details, see the Program wizard page.

Modify 

Set surface points to Auto

In program teach-in mode, it is possible that the surface points may have been defined or measured on a particular projection surface. However this projection surface will not necessarily be the same when running the program, for example when modifying the CAD, or the probes may be different to those carried out during the teach-in. By selecting this function, the software will automatically determine the projection surface to be used. This depends on the probing direction, the search distance and the normal deviation.



Normalize probing vectors

This function is used to modify the probing direction using different criteria. The following window appears:

Page 1893

When this box is checked, the nominal values of the features will be used instead of the measured values. To enable this function, the Adjust probing vectors box must also be checked. When this box is checked, the normal probing vectors are adjusted in relation to the defined or measured values, depending on whether the

box is checked or not.

When this box is checked, all the probing points of the measurement group can be projected on the surface of the feature of the working session with the same name as the measurement group. When this box is checked, all the retract points will be moved to the center of the feature. This applies for all features which have a center or an axis.



Modify CNC distances

This function is used to modify the approach, search and retract distances of the points contained in the selected instruction lines. This function can also be used on one or more feature measurement groups. The window is shown below:



Modify thickness



Modify tolerances

This function is used to modify, add or delete the dimension and/or position tolerance values of the selected feature(s), through the following window:

Page 1894

Check the boxes corresponding to the required tolerances and enter the minimum and maximum values of the tolerances in the adjacent fields. For further details on setting the tolerances, see the Define and set tolerance for a feature page.



Modify family/Alignment/Proj. feature

This function is used to modify, add or delete the family, the alignment and the projection feature of the selected feature(s). The window is shown below:

If using a laser (using station orientation), check this box to associate an "Orientation point" type family to the Geometrical point type feature selected. For further details on the family and/or alignment modification, see the Modify family/alignment page.

Page 1895

Check this box to modify or add the projection feature of the features contained in the selected program lines. Then choose the required projection feature in the adjacent drop-down list.

 

Modify projection surface Update geometrical tolerance

Page 1896

DMIS program context menu

The context menu can be viewed by right-clicking on one of the lines of the program. The menu is shown below:

The list of functions which appears at the top of the menu corresponds to the instructions configured using the Script Engine. The list of the DMIS functions supported by the software is available in the Appendix. In the DMIS program status bar, the Search / Replace function may be accessed via the following icon:

Find and Replace This function is used to carry out a search within the program. The following window appears:

Page 1897

Used to pre-select the elements to be modified: If All is selected, the Features, References, Alignments or Probes are searched for. If Features and References, Alignments or Probes is selected, select respectively from the drop-down list of the search field the feature/reference, the alignment or the probe to be searched for among those of the DMIS program, or enter its name manually. Select the search criteria to be used from the following:

Search statement reference: Used to replace only the references of the DMIS commands in the program. Search statement full text: Used to replace any text of the program. Text to search for.

Note: If the Search statement full text option is chosen, the Selection part of the window is grayed out.

Used to configure the replacement of the selected text:

Page 1898

There are several possible choices: Prefix: Addition of a prefix to the text or to the type of command searched for. Suffix: Addition of a suffix to the text or to the type of command searched for. First: Replacement of the first letter of the text searched for with the replacement text. Last: Replacement of the last letter of the text searched for with the replacement text. Position: Replacement of the letter located in position p (0 < p < 256) of the text searched for with the replacement text. To select the position p, an additional field appears in the window:

Replacement text. The radio buttons which follow are used to choose whether to replace only the next occurrence of the term ( Next only) or to replace it each time it appears (All). Checking this box produces a window indicating the context in which the term to be replaced appears, followed by a replacement confirmation message:

Click on this button to carry out the replacement and return to the search window. Click on this button to cancel the replacement and return to the search window.

Page 1899

Click on this button to cancel the operation. Once the search criteria are configured, use the arrows to carry out the search, searching backwards or forwards through the program. Click on this button to close the search window and return to the Program window.

Edit This function is used to modify the selected instruction line. It is also possible to edit a line by double-clicking on it. The line then appears as follows:

After modifying the text, click on

to validate the modifications or on

to cancel them.

It is also possible to insert new command lines. To do this, edit a line, then press Ctrl and Enter simultaneously on the keyboard. The new line is then inserted beneath the selected line:

For some DMIS commands, editing the command line opens a dialog window. Once the changes have been validated, the DMIS program line is updated with the new parameters. The commands that can be used are: PTMEAS, FEAT, MEAS, GOTO, CONST, DEVICE/STOR and GEOM/MODEL. It is also possible to modify the definition lines of the geometrical alignment. Editing a TRANS, ROTATE or DATSET command allows the parameters of a previously created alignment to be modified. If the measured features in the alignment.

box is checked (selected), validating the changes also updates the

Note: For the DATSET command, the dialog window only opens if the DATDEF command preceding it has been executed. Otherwise, it will be modifiable in standard manner.

Disable/Enable line(s) This function is used to enable/disable a line selected in the program. Disabling a line means not running it, without having to delete it from the program. It can therefore then be enabled the next time the program is run without needing to be recreated. Disabled lines appear as follows:

It is also possible to disable a line by editing it and inserting the characters $$ at the start of the line, or to enable it by deleting these characters.

Page 1900

Mirror selection This function is used to create instructions symmetrical to those selected. For further details, see the Mirror entire program page.

Duplicate This function duplicates a source feature by applying either translation or rotation to it in line with the customized mode in order to repeat a series of measurements. For further details, please refer to the DMIS program lines duplication page.

Generate tolerances This function is used to generate very wuickly customised OUTPUT lines. Tolerances are retrieved from the DMIS context. If the tolerance line has not been run, it is not available.

The left-hand column contains the list of defined and measured features. It is used to select one or more features. The right-hand column shows the DMIS tolerances that can be applied to the selected features.

This function is used to update the tolerances when performing modifications in the work session.

is used to create and run the OUTPUT line(s) in the program.

Page 1901

Feature / tolerance compatibility Feature cylinder cone plane line circle arc sphere ellipse rectangle and slot geometrical point surface point section

DIST PAR POS B LEL DIST PAR POS B LEL DIST PAR POS B LEL DIST PAR POS B LEL DIST COR POS B TOL DIST COR POS B TOL DIST COR POS B TOL DIST COR POS B TOL DIST COR POS B TOL DIST COR POS B TOL DIST COR B TOL

Compatible tolerances PER ANG ANG TRN SYM P LR LB OUT PER ANG ANG TRN SYM P LR LB OUT PER ANG ANG TRN CRN SYM P LR LB OUT OUT PER ANG ANG SYM P LR LB CRN OUT

DIA CON CYL RAD M CEN CTY CON PRO ANG CEN FS L PRO FLA FS T CON STR CEN GHT DIA CON CIRL RAD M CEN TY DIA CON RAD M CEN DIA PRO RAD M FS DIA RAD M dWI DTH PRO FS PRO FS PRO FS

The DISTB and ANGLB tolerances can only be applied if two features are selected.

Cut This function is used to cut a line or a block of lines from the program. The instructions selected disappear from the program but can be pasted elsewhere using the paste button.

Copy This function is used to duplicate a line or a block of lines of the program, in order to copy it in a group. The instructions selected remain in the program.

Paste This function is used to paste the previously copied or cut instructions in the required place.

Page 1902

Restore deleted lines This function recreates a line or a group of lines previously deleted using Delete and Cut.

Warning: restoration will not take place if either of these actions is performed after having deleted lines.

Breakpoint This function is used to insert a breakpoint during execution.

Run To This function allows the program to be run from the red execution cursor to the blue selection cursor. Thus function is not available when the selected line precedes the execution cursor.

Go to the definition instruction of the active feature This function is used to move the blue cursor to the definition instruction of the active feature.

Example: The CERC1 feature is selected in the results window. After clicking the Go to the definition instruction of the active feature function, the corresponding program line is displayed as follows:

Insert operator instructions This function can also be accessed via the general menu. See the Insert operator instructions page.

RMEAS This function applies to the 2D feature measurement lines. The following window appears:

Page 1903

None: Indicates that the Rmeas function is not enabled or is used to disable it. FA: carries out a measurement relative to another feature, to be chosen from the adjacent drop-down list. VECBLD: measures the plane which will be used to determine the relative measurement of the circle.

Error checking Show next error: This function is used to move down through the program to the next error. Show previous error: This function is used to move up through the program to the next error. Check program: This function is used to move through the program automatically to search for any errors which may be errors of syntax or a number of measurement lines that does not match the number of measurement points specified by the MEAS or RMEAS command. If an error is noted, it will be shown in the Error tab located under the program window. Double-clicking it will highlight the program in which the error has been noted.

Page 1904

Page 1905

DMIS program lines duplication

Duplication of DMIS program lines enables a source feature to be duplicated either from a selection of program lines or from a Features Database feature in order to repeat a series of measurements. Translation, rotation or a customized mode can be applied to this feature.

The Duplicate function can be accessed from the DMIS program window context menu. The window is as shown below:

Page 1906

selects the source feature (which is to be defined and measured) in the drop-down menu, from the Features Database or by selecting DMIS program lines for duplication. enables the duplication mode to be picked from Translation, Rotation or Customized. The duplication settings are to be entered according to the type of action selected: 

Translation number of features to be duplicated for each direction.

Enter in these fields the offset of the features based on each direction. It is also possible to apply a primary or secondary translation of the value of a distance between two features of the same type. To do this, first click in one of the translation fields. This counter then appears below the Action part of the window. Click on a first feature, this must be defined. The counter is incremented. Then click on a CAD entity to define the value of the translation to be applied.

Page 1907

Note: The values of the translation can be redefined by clicking again in the corresponding field.



Rotation number of features to be duplicated. rotation axis for duplication. alignment in which the duplication applies.

angle of rotation.



Customized

list of CAD entities on which the duplication will be applied. delete CAD entities.

Click this button to create the program lines. Click this button to close the window without creating any program lines.

Example of duplication by translation The aim is to create as series of measurements of features by translation along 2 axes in a DMIS program.

Page 1908

To do this, proceed as follows: - Define and measure the source feature - Open a new DMIS program window and select the Duplicate function in the context menu. - Define duplication settings.

- In the DMIS program, a series of feature definition lines has been created the name of which incorporates

Page 1909

the name of the source feature as a prefix and a reference to its position as a suffix:

Example of duplication by rotation The aim is to create as series of measurements of features by rotation around an axis in a DMIS program.

To do this, proceed as follows: - In a DMIS program, teach in the source feature definition and measurement and select the Duplicate function in the context menu. - Define duplication settings.

Page 1910

- The following series of feature measurements is then created in the DMIS program:

Page 1911

Example of customized duplication The objective is to create in a DMIS program, a series of feature measurements based on a source feature already measured applied to features selected by clicking CAD entities.

To do this, proceed as follows: - In a DMIS program, teach in the source feature definition and measurement and select the Duplicate function in the context menu. - Specify the duplication settings by selecting the CAD entities on which the measurements are to be reproduced by clicking on them in the 3D View.

Page 1912

- The following series of feature measurements is then created in the DMIS program:

Page 1913

DMIS Scripts

Page 1914

Using DMIS scripts

It is possible to configure the Context menu of the DMIS programs so as to include commands that the software cannot add for itself in a program, since the DMIS programming has more commands than the GM2 programming. Each function included in this context menu is used to automatically create DMIS command lines in the program currently being created or modified.

Configuring the context menu The DMIS program context menu is configured via the mtXGmacro.ini file, located in the the software installation directory:

The structure used is as follows:

Page 1915

Note: Several context menus can be nested. Macro files (*.txt files) can also be structured in sub-directories, for example, ..\macros\example\file.txt.

Using macros A macro file contains two different types of lines: instructions for the Script Engine and DMIS commands. The lines which start with the symbol # are instruction lines. They are used by the Script Engine and do not generate any DMIS command. The different instructions which can be used by the Script Engine are listed in the page Functions supported by the DMIS interpreter. The other lines are DMIS commands. They are placed in the program by the Script Engine which may, depending on the macro, use variables. The characters {} are added in order to use variables. For example, SNSLCT/SA(P{cnt+1}) could give SNSLCT/SA(2) in the DMIS program, if the variable cnt is 1. The Script Engine does not understand DMIS language and therefore cannot check the syntax created in a DMIS program. Its role is simply to implement a DMIS command sequence in a program. The DMIS commands are checked by the software once the lines have been created, like when opening a DMIS program. The macros called by the DMIS Script Engine are all saved in the macros directory located at the root of the the software installation directory. There are two types of macros: 

Macros containing a simple DMIS instruction (for example the macro wkplan/xyplan.txt):

File content:

Page 1916

In program: The following line is then displayed:



Macros containing a complex DMIS instruction (for example, the macro my_header.txt):

File content:

Window displayed when the macro is used:

In program: The following lines are then displayed:

Page 1917

For further information on the instructions that can be used by the DMIS Script Engine, see the page DMIS Script Engine instructions

Note: Lines inserted by the Script Engine can be run directly while learning the DMIS program. To do this the value of the following variable in Preferences > Advanced Parameters, User tab needs to be changed: M_BEXECUTESCRIPT=1

Page 1918

DMIS Script Engine instructions

Types The script engine supports 4 types of variables: integers, real numbers, vectors and character strings A vector is a trio of real values which represents a 3D point in cartesian coordinates. To specify constant values in a script file, the following rules must be respected:    

An integer should not contain a decimal point, nor should it contain a scientific notation A real number should contain a decimal point or use a mathematical symbol A character string should be placed in inverted commas A vector can only be specified with the predefined function VCART(or VECT) Examples:

12, -450,+078 12., -3.2,1E2,-0.5 "123", '456' VCART(0,0,1),vcart(12.3,0,-7.5)

are integers are real numbers are character strings are vectors

Instructions The script engine recognizes the following instructions:  #;comment Programming comments are signified by "#;" as the first two characters in a line.



#expression

This is the simplest instruction. It only allows the script engine to evaluate an expression. It is often used to define variables.

Example: #cnt=cnt+1



#IF expression



#ELSE



#ENDIF

High instruction level allowing the conditional running of lines in a script. The instruction#ELSEis optional.

Example: #IF tol_up=

Greater or equal

Set-up CNC Parameters menu.

Page 1942

Example of standard program

Page 1943

Advanced use

Page 1944

Working session global settings

In program Teach-in mode, when a New working session is created, two lines are inserted:

The first line corresponds to the creation of a new working session, and the second contains the settings for the working session. Double-clicking on the Working session global settings line brings up the following window:

This window is used to set the units to be used for the program or to Open a configuration.

Select the radio button corresponding to the measurement unit to be used in the program (millimeters or inches). Selecting Current will mean that the active units will be retained when the program is run. For example, if the software is configured in inches, the measurements will remain in inches when the program is run.

Select the radio button corresponding to the angle unit to be used in the program (decimal degrees, DMS degrees or grads). Selecting Current will mean that the active units will be retained when the program is run. For example, if the software is configured in DMS degrees, the measurements will remain in DMS degrees when the program is run.

Page 1945

Check the boxes corresponding to the axes or angles on which to reverse the deviations. There are three possible states for these boxes: - When the box is checked, the deviation will be reversed on the axis indicated. This is the case for the X axis in the above example. - When the box is not checked, the deviation will not be reversed on the axis indicated. This is the case for the Z axis in the above example. - When the box is grayed out, the reversal of the deviations will take place if it was active before the program was run and will not take place if it was not active before the program was run. This is the case for the Y axis in the above example.

Select the radio button corresponding to the standard to be used for evaluating tolerances in the program.

This part of the window is used to open a configuration file. When a configuration file is selected, the part concerning the units and angles cannot be accessed since these are contained in the software configuration files.

Click on this button to validate the parameters entered and return to the Program window. Click on this button to exit the window, without the changes made being taken into account.

Page 1946

Use of variables

Variables can be used in a large number of functions. This can be used in particular to create a unique configurable program, which can be used for a family of parts which are identical, but with differing dimensions.

Declaring a variable There are three ways to declare a variable:  

by selecting the Evaluate Text/Value function from the Features > Evaluate menu. by selecting the Edit information function from the File menu. In the User Data field, declare a variable in the form variable name=variable value. In the following example, the diameter of a feature is set, but can be modified each time the program is run:

Notes: 

It is possible not to enter a value after the equal sign ( = ). The variable will not be pre-completed when run. - by selecting the Edit information function from the Program menu. In the User Data field, declare a variable in the form variable name=variable value. In this case, the variables cannot be accessed on running the program but are stored in the *.gm2 or DMIS (*.dms or *.dmi) program file:

Page 1947



To only display some variables in the program, the // characters can be inserted before the name of the variable to keep it hidden. Example: Three variables are declared in the Edit Information window of the File menu:

Edit Information window

When the program is run

Using the variables The variables can be used in several functions: 

Feature definitions

A variable can be selected in the fields of the feature definition windows by right-clicking with the mouse on

Page 1948

the chosen field. The variables are insecable in the fields for entering the position values, the normal conditions (for the feature and the limit points), the dimensions, the angles and the tolerances (upper and lower):



Geometrical tolerances

The variables can be inserted into the theoretical angle, nominal position and tolerance values fields.



Construction of alignments

For the model alignment, the variables can be inserted into the fields X,Y and Z. Concerning the geometrical alignments, the variables can be inserted into the translation and rotation fields. For the alignments on 3 center points, on reference features and on optimization, the variables can be inserted into the theoretical coordinates fields for the features.



Number of loops

The variables can be inserted for the number of loops to be carried out in a program:

Page 1949



Export working session, save working session, probe file and alignments

The variables can be inserted for the file name in the save or export window. 

The full list of windows in which variables can be used is available in the Appendix.

Example of program using the variables In the following program, the check is carried out on a circle with a configurable diameter, which is present 6 times on a part, in accordance with the following diagram (view from above):

The following is an example of a program to check this type of part:

Page 1950

In the example, the alignment REP1 is centered on the first circle. Line 6: the Text/Value variable VAL1 is used to enter the source in X of the first circle compared to the alignment. In the example, the value to be entered is 0. Line 7: this VAL2 variable gives the pitch in X of the 3 circles (here, 25). Line 8: the Text/Value variable VAL3 is used to enter the source in Y of the first circle with regard to the alignment. In the example, the value to be entered is also 0. Line 9: VAL4 gives the pitch in Y of the 2 circles (here, 20). Line 10: the variables concerning the program are entered here. In the example, enter the diameter of the circle and the name of the working session to be saved:

Page 1951

Line 14: the circle is defined using variables evaluated previously (the $$ is used to increment the name of the circle each time the loop is run):

Page 1952

Line 25: the Text/Value VAL1 is re-evaluated: VAL1=VAL1+VAL2 so that the definition and the measurement of the following circle are increased by the value of the pitch. Line 27: at the start of the second loop, VAL1 is reset to 0 so as to be able to define the fourth circle as X=0. Line 28: the Text/Value VAL3 is re-evaluated: VAL3=VAL3+VAL4 in order to determine the Y dimension of the fourth circle. Line 30: save the working session under the name given at the start of the program by completing the WORK = field.

Notes: 



For the automatic measurements of features for which the definition depends on variables, select a dynamic probing mode. The changes to the values defined for a feature (due to the entry of variables) will then be applied to the measurement trajectory. There are two options for saving files using variables: either the variable contains the name of the working session, in which case the saving address is fixed and it is the name of the file which changes; or the variable contains the path for saving the working session, in which case the whole saving address changes.

In both cases, when saving the working session, the variable is entered in the same way:

The line inserted into the program appears as follows:



Several variables can be concatenated to introduce a specific saving path or a part number entered by the user. Example: Save a working session with the following access path: C:\Working sessions\p021\p001.wk2

The following variables must be created:  

PATH=C:\Working sessions\p021\ NBR=p001

Page 1953

When saving a working session, enter the addition of the two variables in the File name field:

The following line is then inserted into the program:

Page 1954

Hole search

The idea is to probe points until the hole is located. When a probing point is not found, the hole is located. Below is an example of the procedure and the program required when searching for a hole: The probe follows a circular path, centered on the theoretical position of the hole you are looking for. If the circular path is covered in full without the hole being detected, restart the procedure with a greater radius for the circle. To change the probing position on the circle, a rotation is carried out around the active alignment. The probing position thus remains the same in the active alignment. The search for the hole is carried out on two circular paths, respectively at a radius of 1 mm then 2 mm. This search contains ten points per path. Use the detection of the probing error in an If-Then-Else statement, configuring the window as follows: - in the Check part, save the hole search sequence. - in the On error part, enter the hole measurement sequence. Therefore, when the probing position is inside the hole, the Probing not found error appears, and all that remains is to measure it.

Step 1: Define a POINTEST point, the position of which is the theoretical center of the circle to be found. The following line is inserted into the program:

Step 2: Create a LOCAL alignment centered on this point:

Page 1955

Note: PLAN1 is the plane on which the hole is defined. The following lines are inserted into the program:

Step 3: Insert an If-Then-Else statement, choosing the condition On error. The following lines are inserted into the program:

Step 4:

Page 1956

Create a LOCALFIND alignment in the same way as the LOCAL alignment. This alignment will be used when the hole has been found:

The following line is inserted into the program:

Do not activate this alignment. To do this, delete the line Activate alignment LOCALFIND in the program.

Step 5: In the Check part of the If-Then-Else statement, measure the POINTEST point in the position (0,0,0). The following lines are inserted into the program:

Step 6:

Page 1957

Create a LOCALFIND alignment, the position of which is located on the search path. This path, in the example, is a circle with a radius 1. This alignment will be used when the hole has been found:

The following line is inserted into the program:

Do not activate this alignment. To do this, delete the line Activate alignment LOCALFIND in the program.

Step 7: Measure POINTEST in the position (0, 0, 0). The following lines are inserted into the program:

Step 8:

Page 1958

Rotate the LOCAL alignment by (360°/number of points on the circle). This rotation of 36°, looped 10 times in the program, is used to create a circular search path, in this case 360°/10=36°.

The following lines are inserted into the program:

Step 9: Select lines 11 to 16 to loop them once for each point on the search circle, in this case 10. The following lines are inserted into the program:

Page 1959

Step 10: Repeat steps 5 to 9, using a radius of 2 mm.

Step 11: In the On error part of the If-Then-Else statement, activate the LOCALFIND alignment for which the source is on the hole.

Warning: for the probing of the hole, the approach distance should be 0 and the search distance should be larger than the diameter of the hole.

The program obtained is as follows:

Page 1960

Page 1961

Palettization

When several identical operations are to be carried out on one or more parts distributed regularly, it may be worth using the Copy and Paste functions of the Program window or the Loop function of the context menu. This involves integrating an alignment relating to the current alignment into the command block, with this related alignment containing the offset values:

Find the start of the program with the machine:

Then select the following instructions:

Reproduce them as many times as required using the Copy/Paste or Loop functions.

Page 1962

Notes:  

The name of the features may need to be changed if it is not followed by the character $, which is used to automatically increase the names. The parameters and the names of the alignments can be changed.

See also:

Advanced use, Use of variables

Page 1963

External commands This function allows the software to control an external peripheral. To use this feature, proceed as follows:  

Create a dynamic management library for this peripheral and place it in the the software installation directory. Add configuration and command parameters to the XG_CONFIG.INI file. Example:



Modified XG_CONFIG.ini file

[EXTDLL1] FILE=ExtDLLTest.dll,Test DLL of Metrologic F1=Return the entry value multiply by 2,Value : F2=Display "Fonction numéro 2", F3=Display "La valeur: X.XXXXX",Value : F4=Start Notepad, The section must be named [EXTDLLx], where x is the number of the peripheral (it should start at 1 and be numbered consecutively through to 9). The first parameter is FILE. This contains the name of the dll, a comma and the name which will appear in the software Modules menu. The following parameters are the functions. These take the name Fx, where x is the function number (it should start at 1 and be numbered consecutively through to 9). This parameter contains the title of the function, a comma and its parameter.



Additional menu created

Once the XG_CONFIG.INI file is configured, the Modules menu appears as follows:



Use

When selecting the first function of the additional menu, the following window appears. This window is used to enter the parameter of the function if required:

Page 1964

Warning: this parameter must be a number.

When this function is used in Teach-in mode, the following line is inserted into the program:

The result of the function appears in the Text/Value associated with the function (VAL1, in this example).

Page 1965

BASE PATH functionality

The BASE_PATH allows users to have a path shortcut usable in a program (Metrolog XG / Silma XG or DMIS) when exporting or saving datas, calling a CAD file, opening a probes file, etc. To configure the BASE_PATH variable, open the XG_CONFIG.ini file in a Notepad and enter the variable as bellow :

In the section [BASE_PATH], write the name of the variable with the path to associate to this variable. Save and close the XG_CONFIG.ini file. In teaching mode, it is possible to see how the BASE_PATH is used. In this example, the TEST variable (written in the XG_CONFIG file) is used to export data as *.txt file. In the Program window, the path export is like *TEST*\asc.txt instead of C:\TEMP\asc.txt :

So, with the same program, it is possible to export in different folders, regarding to the variable written in the file XG_CONFIG.ini.

Example : [BASE_PATH] TEST=C:\TEMP [BASE_PATH] TEST=C:\CAR

The file will be exported in the C:\TEMP\asc.txt file.

The file will be exported in the C:\CAR\asc.txt file.

The BASE_PATH functionality is usable for:

Page 1966

- saving working session - exporting working session - loading a probes file - loading a sub-program - printing a report - opening a configuration file - opening a CAD file - loading an alignment - using a picture in a user information - etc.

Page 1967

Automatic feature definition in program learning

When features are measured in program learning mode, the software automatically creates the feature definition line. In order to do this, a feature is required which has not been defined, only measured or which does not exist. The definition line is inserted just before the feature's measurement group.

*.GM2 programs: All features may be opened automatically. Opening the program

Measuring a feature in progress

End of measuring feature

The definition line is inserted just before the measurement group.

*.DMIS program: Only geometrical points can be automatically defined in DMIS programs.

Page 1968

Advanced use of DMIS programs

Page 1969

DMIS program in Twin mode

In order to use a DMIS program in Twin mode, it is necessary to name both machines. Select CNC settings in the CMM menu on each computer connected to the machines. The following window appears, in which the machine name have to be entered in the first field:

Example:

Page 1970

Warning: In the program, if a file like : DISPLY/Stor, dmis FILNAM/'name' is saved with a network address, in a section of the program read by both machines, it can cause some problems because both machine will try to save it in the same place, at the same time.

Page 1971

Updating coordinates in DMIS

This function recalculates coordinates of features following modifications to a line or group of lines containing an alignment activation. The modifications can be of the following types:     

disable/re-enable, cut/paste, delete/restore, insert (by learning), modify alignment.

Updating is applicable only to the features that depend on the alignment which has been modified and hence the new coordinates of the features of the alignment last activated. It is thus possible to modify the coordinates of the nominal and/or the feature probing coordinates.

Example: In the above program, the coordinates of point PNT2 (line 12) are (45;75;-10).

By disabling the activation line for alignment PCS2 (line 10), the software offers to: 

update feature nominals:

Page 1972



update feature probing coordinates:

Note: When the change is applied to several alignments, a single update message is displayed for the alignment concerned. If nominal and measured have been updated, the coordinates for point PNT2 will be (55;85;0):

Note: this function is not available for a best fit alignment.

Page 1973

Construct features in DMIS program

When features are constructed in DMIS program teach-in mode, the software automatically creates the feature definition line. To do this, the following conditions must hold true:  

The constructed feature must not be defined or only be measured or not exist, The features used for construction must all be defined.

Automatic creation of the definition line of a constructed feature can only be performed in the following cases:

Point

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Line

X

X

X

Circle

X

X

X

Arc

X

Plane Sphere

X

Cylinder

X

Cone

X

X

X

Torus Surface point Section Rectangle

X

Slot

X

Hexagon

X

Ellipse

X

Thus, when a feature is constructed, if the conditions allow, the definition line is automatically learned in the DMIS program:

Page 1974

Errors management Different types of error or warning messages may appear when running a program. A few examples are given below, but this list is not exhaustive.

Example: Probe activation error

Example: Error on running a measurement, for example maximum form fault exceeded

Example: Error on running a measurement, for example, error calculating a torus

Example: Error on a probe point command (probing not found)

Page 1975

Example: Error on a via point command (probing unexpected)

Example: Error on a construction command (for example, intersection error between two lines):

Example: Error when opening a CAD model (CAD model renamed or deleted):

Example: Error when opening an imported file (file renamed or deleted):

Page 1976

This type of message does not necessarily mean aborting the running of the program. There are different possible solutions: Click on this button to ignore the current error. Current instruction is aborted and program execution continues to next line. Warning : if error occurs when running a Via point instruction, be careful to the collision risks. Click on this button to restart current instruction (via point for example) and continue running program. Click on this button to probe again the error probing point automatically (probing not found) or to restart the whole measurement (calculation error during the measurement). In this case, the CMM moves to feature measurement beginning, at first probing point, and measure again the feature. Click on this button to probe again the error probing point manually. Once the point is probed, the software suggests returning to automatic mode. Click this button to search for the missing directory or file manually.

Important note: The corresponding program line is not modified after using the Browse button. Click this button to ignore the error and continue the program.

Click on this button to abort the running of the program.

Specific features of Twin mode: When programs (GM2 and DMIS) are running in Twin mode, when an error message is displayed on one of the stations and stops execution, the program on the second station does not stop running. The process may also be stopped on the second station by modifying an advanced parameter in the XG_CONFIG ini file, TWIN section: STOPALLIFERROR = 0 (default value): after an error on the first station, the program will continue to run on

Page 1977

the second station. STOPALLIFERROR = 1: both programs stop running when an error occurs.

When the parameter is equal to 1 and when an error such as Unexpected probing, Probing not found or Form fault exceeded is displayed on one of the stations and stops program running, the program on the second station is also stopped with the following warning message:

Once the message has been acknowledged on the second station, the following error message is displayed:

Click this button to resume running both programs on both stations at the point where the programs were stopped, retrieving the context. Click on this button to stop both programs running on both stations. For errors such as Probe stays open or an emergency shutdown, both processes stop but it is not possible to restart both processes simultaneously. They have to be restarted on both CMMs.

Page 1978

Modules

Page 1979

Assembly optimization This function is particularly suited to complex assembly problems. A complex assembly refers either to an assembly with more than two components, or to an assembly with constraints on dynamic tolerance areas, or a combination of the two. A dynamic tolerance area results in a graph imposing a connection between two constraints and their tolerance areas. The tolerance limits of one of the constraints depend on the deviation of the other constraint. From several groups of points measured, each group of points representing one of the components of the assembly, the software will calculate a movement matrix for each mobile component, used to bring the component to its optimum assembly position.

Notes on the algorithm used: The algorithm used is an original heuristic method, based on a sequence of several optimization steps in the least squares sense with weighting. Unlike for a single optimization calculation, the software recalculates in real time (on every micro-iteration) the optimum positions and the tolerance limits for each constraint according to the graphs of the dynamic tolerance areas. An upper level calculation loop monitors the out of tolerance constraints and adjusts the weights until a balanced position is reached in which all the constraints are within the tolerance.

Page 1980

Use

The Assembly optimization window is as shown below, and provides access to the parameters file:

Click this button to select the parameters file in the tree structure or enter the access path to this file in the field. Click this button to consult the file and modify it if necessary before running the calculation. Click this button to run the optimization calculation and close the window. The Optimization results window then opens. Click this button to exit the window without carrying out the optimization calculation.

In program: This function can be saved in a software control program to be run automatically.

Page 1981

Parameters file format

The parameters file is a text file used to specify the set of parameters required for the optimization calculation. However, the real values (normal vectors and positions) of the points measured on each component are read from the Browse database function at the start of the calculation. The structure of the parameters file is as follows:   

N component definition blocks (each starting with [name]). A constraints definition block (lines link=). A dynamic tolerance area definition block (lines linkt=). Example: the file specifies three components, a, b and c.

Any name at all can be given to the components. The names will merely be used to automatically group the software features into families. Component a contains four points, a.1, a.2, a.3 and a.4.

Warning: it is essential that the = symbol appears after the name of each point. Conventionally, the first component is always a fixed component, all the others are mobile. In this example, we therefore want to optimize the position of components b and c, with a remaining fixed. Degrees of freedom: Degrees of freedom can be assigned to each mobile component using the instruction degs=. If this instruction is omitted, the component will have the six degrees of freedom. Constraints: The example specifies six constraints (link=) with a single link (no tolerance) between points and does not specify a dynamic tolerance area. Depending on whether or not the software feature referenced first in the link= instruction has a normal vector, the constraint will be either a one-way constraint (the length of the vector) or a three-way constraint (in the space). [a] a.1= a.2= a.3= a.4= [b] degs=TxzRy b.1= b.2= b.3= b.4= [c] degs=Txz c.1= c.2= c.3= c.4= link=a.1,b.1 link=a.2,c.2 link=a.3,c.3 link=a.4,b.4 link=b.2,c.1

Page 1982

link=b.3,c.4

Constraints with single tolerances A link= constraint definition can include one of the following three single tolerance forms: a spherical tolerance, a parallelepipedic tolerance with regard to the axes of the alignment or a one-way tolerance the length of a vector. - to include a spherical tolerance, add the radius of the tolerance sphere after the name of the two features, - to include a parallelepipedic tolerance, add the three half widths for X, Y and Z after the name of the features, - to include a one-way tolerance, add the upper and lower limits after the name of the features. In the following example, the first constraint includes a spherical tolerance with a radius of 3 mm between a.1 and b.1. The second includes a tolerance of ±2 mm for X and ±4 mm for Z (nothing for Y) between a.2 and c.2. The third includes a one-way tolerance of [-1.5 mm, +2.5 mm] for c.3 compared to a.3. Obviously the first two tolerance forms can only apply to a three-dimensional constraint and the third can only apply to a one-way constraint (for which the first feature has a normal vector).

Example: ... link=a.1,b.1,3.0 link=a.2,c.2,2.0,0.0,4.0 link=a.3,c.3,-1.5,2.5 ...

Dynamic tolerance areas To specify a dynamic tolerance area, you must include a linkt= instruction for each pair of constraints linked by a dynamic tolerance area, after the constraints definition block (the link= instructions). In the following example, a dynamic area linking the constraint (a.1-b.1) and the constraint (a.4-b.4) has been specified by the graph below.

Example: ... link=a.1,b.1 link=a.2,c.2 link=a.3,c.3 link=a.4,b.4 linkt=b.1,b.4,9.2,3.8,6.5,6.5,-2.7,2.7,-9.2,-3.8,-6.5,-6.5,2.7,-2.7

Page 1983

The first parameter of the linkt= instruction specifies the constraint A (only the name of the second feature of the constraint is given). The second parameter specifies the constraint B (only the name of the second feature of the constraint is given). The following parameters form a list of pairs of values (ai, bi) describing the tolerance area as a pecked line in the two-dimensional space A-B. Reminder: During the optimization calculation, each dynamic area will automatically impose a one-way tolerance for which the limits are recalculated in real time upon its two constraints, A and B.

Page 1984

Optimization results

Following the calculation, the software displays a summary of the different steps of the optimization. A list traces the following information for each step: the step number (zero for the start position), the number of constraints out of tolerance, the mean deviation as an absolute value, the mean squared deviation. The optimization process stops at the first step, allowing all constraints to remain within the tolerances. If this is not possible (several constraints out of tolerance in opposite directions), the process will stop without any step displaying zero constraints out of tolerance. The user can then select the required step from the list:

This button is used to select the step from the list to use for repositioning components. It is also possible to select the required step by double-clicking on it. The selected step will be highlighted in yellow. This button is used to validate the step chosen. The optimization function is therefore authorized to end its working session, which involves physically repositioning the features associated with the mobile components, creating the repositioning alignments (matrices), updating the tolerances (constant and dynamic) and displaying in graph form the state of the constraints linked dynamically in their tolerance diagrams. This button is used to close the window without completing the optimization.

Notes: 



It may be the case that the start position already allows all the constraints to remain within the tolerances. The process will then carry out a single step to optimize (in the least squares sense) all the constraints to their optimal position (middle of the tolerance limits). The step zero can be selected. This means leaving the components in their start position while letting the optimization function calculate and display the state of the constraints.

Page 1985

Details of the results - For each component, the points which make up this component will be automatically grouped in a family bearing the name of the component. - For each mobile component, an alignment bearing the name of the component will be created. It contains the component positioning matrix to bring it to the optimal position.

- For each constraint, the function will assign only the new measured position (as opposed to the nominal position) to the primary point. It will assign the secondary point its new measured position, as well as a nominal position equal to the measured position of the primary point – this means that the deviation calculated on the secondary point directly gives the state of the constraint. If applicable, it also assigns the tolerance limits (constant or dynamic) to the secondary point. - For each dynamic tolerance area, a Text/Value feature will be created, the name of which is formed from the name of the two secondary features of the linked constraints, separated by a hyphen. The creation of a software sticker on this feature will be used to display in the graphical view the state of the constraint in the diagram of the dynamic tolerance area:

Note: Since the optimization function updates the positions and the tolerance limits of the features, the standard software functions will offer the user a wide range of analysis, result display, export and report creation functions, which can be directly applied to the optimization results.

Page 1986

Section tools

Page 1987

Transform section

This function is used to extend a measured section by adding another measured section, whether or not they overlap: this is known as concatenation. The window is shown below:

Select the section to be extended from the drop-down list.

Select the section to be used to extend the first section from the drop-down list, or from the Browse database function by clicking on the

button.

A section segment is calculated between the last point of section 1 and the first point of section 2 in order to extend section 1:

Page 1988

If the sections overlap, the idea is similar: the last point of section 1 is used, and is linked to the closest point of section 2, not taking into account the points of section 2 superimposed on section 1:

Check this box to close the section to be transformed. Check this box to reverse the sequence of the points.

Click this button to carry out the concatenation and close the window. Click this button to close the window without carrying out the section transformation.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is inserted:

Page 1989

Calculate construct section

This function is used to obtain a ball radius compensated scanning. The window is shown below:

Select the name of the section to construct from the drop-down list or enter it in the field.

Select the name of the scanned section from the drop-down list or from the Browse database function by clicking the

button.

Click this button to carry out the compensation in the compensated section plane, in this case the section SECT1:

Click this button to close the window without carrying out compensation.

Page 1990

This function is also used to recalculate a section (obtained by scanning) by compensating the points according to the form of the surrounding surface. The idea is to carry out at least two scans, and at most three, and to recalculate the first one using the probing points of the other sections, known as reference sections.

Example 1: one scan and one reference

Select the name of the section to construct from the drop-down list or enter it in the field.

Select the name of the scanned section to recalculate from the drop-down list or in the Browse database function by clicking the

button.

Select a scan carried out close to the first one. Click this button to carry out the compensation. A line is then drawn between the two ball center points and the compensation is carried out according to the normal for this line, taking into account the ball radius:

Page 1991

Example 2: one scan and two references

Select the name of the section to construct from the drop-down list or enter it in the field.

Select the name of the scanned section to recalculate from the drop-down list or in the Browse database function by clicking the

and carried out either side of the first one.

button.

complete the fields S1 and S2 with two scans,

Click this button to carry out the compensation. A Bezier curve is then calculated between the three ball center points and the compensation is carried out according to the normal for the curve at this

Page 1992

point:

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is inserted:

Page 1993

Trim sections

This function is used to trim the sections measured according to a precise position in the active alignment. The window is shown below:

Select the section(s) to be trimmed in the list. To make multiple selections, click on the required sections with the left mouse button whilst holding down Ctrl on the keyboard.

Select the axis and the direction in which to carry out the trimming. Select the position in which the trimming is to be carried out on this axis. Click this button to start the trimming and close the window. Click this button to close the window without carrying out the trimming.

Example:

Page 1994

The points located after the trimming are no longer taken into account in the calculation of the section, but are kept in the database. To calculate the trimming, a Bezier interpolation is carried out with the last points of the section and two points are calculated to limit the section (point 15a and point 23a in this example).

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is inserted:

Page 1995

Convert section to curve

One or more measured sections can be converted into curves. The window is shown below:

Select the section(s) to be trimmed in the list. To make multiple selections, click on the required sections with the left mouse button whilst holding down Ctrl on the keyboard. The access path to the active CAD model appears in this field, in order to add the curves. By clicking on this button you can modify the target file:

Page 1996

This field is used if required to display these curves in a group, choosing an existing group in the drop-down list or entering the name of the group to be created. Click this button to export the curves into the selected file. Click this button to close the window, regardless of whether or not the curves have been converted.

Page 1997

Quick distances/angles evaluation This function is used to quickly measure the distance between two points, the angle between two planes or the values of a curve, depending on the tab selected.

Warning: A CAD model needs to be open in order to use this function.

Measuring the distance between two points To measure the distance between two geometrical, edge or surface type points, select the first tab of the window:

Select the type of the first point to be used for the measurement by checking the corresponding box. The first field of the window displays the message Select first point, prompting the user to click on the CAD corresponding to the required point.

Page 1998

After clicking on the point on the CAD model, its name appears in the field, with its coordinates below it. The message Select second point appears in the second field:

Select the type of the second point to be used for the measurement by checking the corresponding box. Click on the second point on the CAD model. Its name then appears in the second field, with its coordinates below it:

Page 1999

Select the definition alignment from the drop-down list. Once the second point is selected, the distance calculated between the two points appears in the lower part of the window:

By clicking on this button, you can modify the corresponding point. The button is then shown as depressed and the message Select first/second point appears again, prompting the user to click on the CAD again. Click this button to close the window.

Page 2000

Measuring the angle between two planes To measure the angle between two planes, select the second tab of the window:

The first field displays the message Select first plane, prompting the user to click on the CAD on the required plane. After selecting the plane on the CAD model, its name appears in the field and the coordinates of the point clicked upon appear below it. The message Select second plane appears in the second field:

Page 2001

Click on the second plane on the CAD model. Its name then appears in the second field, and the coordinates of the point clicked upon appear below it:

Page 2002

Select the definition alignment from the drop-down list. Once the second plane is selected, the calculated angle from the first plane to the second appears in the lower part of the window:

Click this button to close the window.

Note: The angle is calculated as follows: Pnt1: First point clicked upon Norm1: Normal of Pnt1

Page 2003

Pnt2: Second point clicked upon Norm2: Normal of Pnt2 Angle = angle from Norm1 to Norm2 Therefore, if you click on points on surfaces (with different normals and locations), the angle is calculated based on the points selected rather than on the surfaces.

Measuring a curve To measure a curve, select the third tab of the window:

The first field displays the message Select a curve, prompting the user to click on the CAD on the required curve. After clicking on the curve on the CAD model, its name appears in the field and the coordinates of the point clicked upon appear below it:

Page 2004

Select the definition alignment from the drop-down list. The calculated curve appears in the lower part of the window:

Click this button to close the window.

Page 2005

Real time export This function enables the last feature measured to be exported on completing each measurement. The file is created in ASCII format. The window is shown below:

Select the target directory to which the export file is to be saved. A list of existing folders and files in this directory is displayed.

Enter a name for this file.

Select the type of file to be created. Click this button to activate the function. Click this button to exit the window without activating the function. While the function is active, checking to the left of the menu item displays it. Indicates the function is active.

Page 2006

For each successfully completed measurement, the data pertaining to the feature are exported to the file, as in the example below:

The file only contains the last feature measured. In order to disable the function it just needs to be selected again; the check mark to the left of the menu item will disappear.

Notes:   

This function applies to all features, except: distance, angle, geometrical tolerance, text/value and alignment info. The activation of this function is not saved on closing the software. Moreover, the New Working Session function does not affect the activation of the function. For surface points, enabling this function allows a point to be exported at each probing operation. The data file is thus overwritten each time a new point is measured.

Page 2007

Gear A set of functions is integrated in the Gear module. This set is available via the Modules > Gear menu. It allows to define a gear, to convert it into a CAD file and to evaluate it's characteristics. This module allows to:      

Create/Edit a gear Measure a gear via a wizard Evaluate the pitch deviation Evaluate the thickness deviation Evaluate the profile deviation Evaluate the helix deviation

Create / Edit a gear This function allows to define a gear. The window is shown below:

Four gear types are available: spur gearing (outside, inside) and helical gearing (outside, inside). Allows to indicate the gear name.

Page 2008

and These two fields allow to parameter the gearing. If one of them is completed, the second one is automatically updated. Allows to indicate the number of teeth. Allows to indicate the pressure angle. This parameter is only available for the helical gearing.

Allows to choose the gear characteristics. Allows to build the gear. The following window appears:

Page 2009

This window allows to choose the name of the CAD created from the gear definition. Click on Create to create the CAD, or on Cancel to close the window without applying changes.

Measure a gear via a wizard This function allows to measure each gear part. The following window appears:

Page 2010

Allows to choose the cad entity reference. Allows to choose the accuracy grade. Allows to choose the features prefix which will be created during the measure. By default, the prefix corresponds to the reference gear name. This value corresponds to the circle diameter on which the measurements are executed. By default, it's value corresponds to the pitch diameter value. This value corresponds to the height on which the measurement is executed. When the depth is 0, the measurement is executed on a diameter tangent with the gear. The Pitch tab allows to choose the flanks (left and/or right) on which the measurement will be executed. The Profile tab allows to choose the flanks (left and/or right) on which the profiles measurements will be executed. It is also possible to choose the offsets and the number of points of the measurement. The Helix tab allows to choose the flanks (left and/or right) on which the helixes measurements will be executed.

Page 2011

Allows to choose: - the Scanning option, allowing to scan a gear when using a continuous probe. - the number of reference teeth to measure. Allows to accept the measurement parameters and to measure the gear. Allows to visualize the measurement path in the 3D View.

Evaluate the pitch deviation This function allows to evaluate the pitch deviation of the gear. The window is shown below:

The * character allows to select automatically the points to make the calculation. In the Detailed View, the evaluation of the Pitch deviation is shown below:

Page 2012

Evaluate the thickness deviation This function allows to determinate the thickness deviation of the gear teeth. The window is shown below:

Page 2013

In the Detailed View, the evaluation of the Thickness deviation is shown below:

Page 2014

Evaluate the Profile deviation This function allows to evaluate the profiles deviation of the gear. The window is shown below:

Insert a $ after a string to select all the points which are starting by this string in the Features Database. In the Detailed View, the evaluation of the Profile deviation is shown below:

Page 2015

Evaluate the Helix deviation This function allows to evaluate the helix deviation. The window is shown below:

Page 2016

In the Detailed View, the evaluation of the Helix deviation is shown below:

Page 2017

3D View The 3D View allows you to view the workpiece, measurements, CAD file(s), features used in the work session and corresponding stickers, the probe and its movements, the active alignment and the CAD alignment, etc. The options available via this menu allow you to manage the various components of the 3D View. The window is shown below:

The 3D View contains a shortcut bar with the following functions:

Rendering

Page 2018

This shortcut allows access to the Rendering function, also available via the 3D View menu.

Predefined View

This shortcut allows access to the Predefined View function, also available via the 3D View menu.

Zoom This shortcut allows access to the Zoom function, also available via the 3D View menu.

Resize

This shortcut allows access to the Zoom function, also available via the 3D View menu.

Undo/Redo These buttons allow the last action performed in the 3D View to be cancelled or repeated.

Page 2019

Maximize/Restore View

This shortcut allows access to the Maximize or Restore Active Split View and Maximize/Restore View functions, also available via the 3D View menu.

Split

This shortcut allows access to the Split function, also available via the 3D View menu.

In program: Program execution may be temporarily suspended: - During a zoom, as long as the zoom buttons are held depressed in the toolbar of the 3D View or the left mouse button is held down, - During size adjustment, as long as the buttons are held depressed in the toolbar of the 3D View, - During a rotation or translation in the 3D View, as long as the mouse buttons are held down.

Page 2020

Using the mouse in the 3D view

Note: The use the mouse described here is that of the default mode. However, mouse operation will differ in line with the Mouse mode which has been activated.

Zoom The mouse may be used to zoom in on part of the workpiece: Position the mouse cursor on the area to be enlarged. Press and hold down the left mouse button and draw a selection rectangle around the area. Release the mouse button, the selected area will now be displayed over most of the screen.

For IntelliMouse mouses, the wheel is used to set zoom factor.

Rotation Workpiece orientation may be modified: Press and hold down the right mouse button and perform the desired move. Release the button.

Translation The workpiece may be translated as follows: First press and hold down the right mouse button, then press down the left button ansd perform the required workpiece translation. Release the buttons.

Notes: Certain keystrokes can be used for the following mouse operations: Keys

Effects /

Rotation around a central point on the screen

/

Left / Right Rotation

/

Up / Down Rotation

+

/

Left / Right Translation

+

/

Up / Down Translation

Page 2021

Selecting a feature A feature may be selected by clicking it. The selected feature is then displayed highlighted if this option is enabled. In the following example, the plane is selected by clicking one of its edges:

If several features may be the target of the click, a menu allowing the desired feature to be selected is displayed:

When a feature is selected, it is activated in the Results window and displayed highlighted in the Features Database. Double-clicking a feature opens the Modify window.

Page 2022

Creating stickers When sticker mode is enabled:

- The cursor takes the following form , this allows stickers to be created by clicking the features to be labelled in the 3D View. Double-clicking a sticker opens the Set-Up Type window. - Several stickers may be modified or deleted simultaneously by selecting them as a group. Select the stickers by clicking them or using the cursor to draw a selection rectangle around them while holding the key down.

Moving stickers Several stickers may be moved simultaneously by selecting them as a group. Select the stickers by clicking them or using the cursor to draw a selection rectangle around them while holding the selected stickers will be moved simultaneously.

key down. All

Note: The following tables summarize the various actions available for stickers using the mouse and keyboard: Stickers: Actions

Effects Left-click Select + left-click Multiple selection

Left-click and move mouse Moves + left-click Unselect Stickers displayed: Actions

Effects Left-click link Create an angle on a link

Left-click the point highlighted in white Select a point on the link + left-click the points highlighted in Select multiple points on a link white + left-click a point highlighted in yellow Unselect a point on a link Unselect a point on a link + left-click link Create a 90° link Left-click the point highlighted in yellow and Move a point move the mouse.

Page 2023

Display Options This menu is used to configure the graphical representation of measurements and probing points. Each type of representation has a meaning allowing visual interpretation of the operations performed. The window is shown below:

This window is divided into three tabs, described in the following pages: Families (Fam), Geometrical (Geo ), View.

Page 2024

View

Values allows the nominal and actual features to be displayed. The graphic representations of nominals and actuals are usually superimposed in the 3D View, unless there are major deviations between them. displays the defined (nominal) feature, or if the feature has not been defined, the actual feature. only the nominal feature is displayed.

Boundaries to display feature boundaries.

Page 2025

Example: Display with Boundaries

Display without Boundaries

Stickers displays all stickers created. If this checkbox is unchecked (deselected), stickers may still be created but no stickers will be displayed, not even out-of-tolerance stickers.

Example: Stickers displayed

Page 2026

Out-of-tolerance stickers allows only out-of-tolerance stickers to be displayed. To do this, the checkbox must also be selected.

Example: Out-of-tolerance stickers only displayed

Deviation Vectors

Page 2027

used to display the surface point and geometrical point features marker symbol. This is a square orientated according to the surface normal at this point. If this checkbox is not selected, the marker symbol is a triangle when the point is correct or a square when the point is out of tolerance.

Examples: Surface point with Deviation Vectors

Surface point without Deviation Vectors

Geometrical point with Deviation Vectors

Geometrical point without Deviation Vectors

Probed Points to show the probed points of the active feature. The circle represents the probe ball and the line the direction of approach.

Example: With Probed Points

Without Probed Points

Page 2028

Feature Names to display feature names.

Example: With Feature Names

Without Feature Names

Page 2029

Sizes This part of the window is used to configure the exaggeration for markers and feature names.

Enter the exaggeration value in the box or use the arrows to modify the value shown. This parameter is used to configure the size of the deviation vector. This vector shows the deviation and direction of deviation between the theoretical definition and the probed point. This is useful when observing surface points or other types of features with the

option in the Results window.

Example: In the following view, the inner circle indicates the theoretical value, the inner and outer circles respectively show the inner and outer theoretical envelopes. Each point has a vector showing defect direction. Joining the end of each vector with a line gives the approximate shape of the defect. The vector is the same color as its marker:

Page 2030

The exaggeration factor multiplies the defect. A deviation factor of 0.5 mm with an exaggeration factor of 10 gives a vector of 0.5*10 = 5mm in the workpiece alignment.

Enter marker size in the box or use the arrows to modify the value shown. Marker size is given in mm in the workpiece alignment:

Enter feature name font size in the box or use the arrows to modify the value shown. The size of the name remains the same, whatever the zoom value. As units differ according to screen type, it is advisable to carry out tests to find the most appropriate size for the screen used.

Page 2031

Click this button to close the window after applying changes.

Page 2032

Families

Families are sets of features created in the Feature Database or when they are defined or measured. You can select which families among the existing families are to be displayed or not in the 3D View.

Values displays the nominal and actual features. The graphic representations of the nominals and actuals are usually superimposed in the 3D View, unless there are major deviations between them. displays the defined (nominal) feature, or if the feature has not been defined, the actual feature. only the nominal feature is displayed.

Families The families selected for display in the 3D View are indicated by a lit lightbulb symbol. This is the case for the CIRCLES and AXIAL_FEATURES families in Example 1.

Page 2033

The families not selected for display in the 3D View are indicated by an unlit lightbulb symbol. This is the case of the AXIAL_FEATURES family in Example 2. activates the Automatic color function. A color is assigned automatically to each family created. These colors will be applied to all the features in these families in the 3D View:

Warning: for features to be shown in color, the Boundaries box in the View tab must be checked (selected). The selected colors are then displayed on the same line as the corresponding family and replace the cross symbol:

Page 2034

After selecting the desired family from the list, click this button to display it in the 3D View. After selecting the desired family from the list, click this button if you do not want it to be displayed in the 3D View.

Example 1: All families displayed

Page 2035

Page 2036

Example 2: Only one family displayed

Page 2037

Context (pop-up) menu Right-clicking the selected family in the list displays the following context menu:

Selecting Assign a color displays the following window:

For more information on this window, see Rendering > Colors. Select No color to cancel any color changes made to the selected family/families. Selecting Randomize color assigns a different randomized color to the selected families. Click this button to close the window after applying changes.

Page 2038

Geometry

Values allows the nominal and actual features to be displayed. The graphic representations of nominals and actuals are usually superimposed in the 3D View, unless there are major deviations between them. displays the defined (nominal) feature, or if the feature has not been defined, the actual feature. only the nominal feature is displayed.

Display The checkboxes may be checked or unchecked to select the features to be displayed or hidden in the 3D View. There is a third state for the Sphere, Cylinder, Cone, Torus and Plane features that forces display in

Page 2039

wireframe mode, whatever the current Rendering mode.

Example 1: The Plane feature checkbox in Display Options is grayed out (shaded):

Plane features are therefore rendered in wireframe mode in the 3D View, whereas the other features are rendered in solid mode:

Page 2040

Example 2: All types of features shown in the 3D View:

The Arc feature checkbox in Display Options is unchecked (deselected):

Page 2041

Arc features are not shown in the 3D View:

Page 2042

Smooth sections Sections are displayed differently depending on whether they are smoothed or not: With smoothing

Without smoothing

Click this button to close the window after applying changes.

Page 2043

Color mapping This function can be accessed: - Via the menu 3D View > Color Mapping, - Or the

icon in the toolbar.

Color mapping allows a color gradient showing feature deviation to be displayed.

The color mapping legend can be resized and moved. To do this, mouse over the legend that will then be displayed as follows:

It is then possible to:    

Click on one of the four legend corners to resize the legend. Click the upper part to move the legend. Double-click the upper part of the legend to display the color mapping window. Right-click the upper part or a corner of the legend to display the context menu.

It is possible to change the color mapping legend display settings via its context menu.

Notes:  

For surface point measurements, color mapping uses the normal deviation value of each point. For geometrical features (planes, cylinders, cones and spheres), color mapping uses the deviation of each probing point with respect to the calculated geometrical feature.

Page 2044

For Surface mapping features, color mapping uses the deviation between each point used for feature calculation with respect to the CAD surfaces used.



The functions common to both Standard and Advanced modes are as follows:

Mode

Used to select the mode: Geometric: Used to apply the color mapping to all the geometric features included in the work session. Surface: Used to apply the color mapping to all the surface features included in the work session. Cloud: Used to apply the color mapping to all the Surface Mapping features included in the work session. If surfaces are common to several Surfaces Mappings, color mapping is not possible in %Tol mode. The related surfaces will then be displayed in black in the 3D View. All: Used to apply the color mapping to all the features included in the work session.

Note: Color mapping is applied to the enabled feature(s), whatever the mode selected.

Page 2045

Scale

Used to change the scale settings: Absolute: used to define zone boundaries in mm. % Tol: used to define zone boundaries as a percentage of feature tolerance in the same way as feature Color coding. In this case, color mapping will only be applied to Surface mapping features. Red/Green: used to define only 2 colors for color mapping: green and red. Green is used for features in the tolerance and red for features out of tolerance. Green/Red/Blue: used to define only 3 colors for color mapping: green, red and blue. Red is used for features above the tolerance, green for features in the tolerance and blue for features under the tolerance.

When this option is checked, color merge (interpolation) is calculated. A merge gradient is calculated on the basis of the deviation of each point and its neighboring points.

"Merge colors" disabled

"Merge colors" enabled

Page 2046

Used to fill holes in textures to fill the entire surface.

"Extrapolate" disabled

"Extrapolate" enabled

Standard This tab is used to create a color scale automatically, by specifying a number of color segments, scale limits, and the limits of the green center area (tolerance zone) of the scale. Used to adjust the color mapping scale automatically. The 0 of the scale is calculated by averaging the standard deviation of the features measured. The scale length is twice this standard deviation. The scale can be automatically adjusted using another calculation. For this purpose, hold the

key

down and press . The calculation is performed as follows: the maximum and minimum probe deviations are recorded, from which 10% of their values are deducted. These values, thus reduced, then represent the

Page 2047

scale limits. The calculation also depends on the mode defined in the window. For example, in Surface mode, only surface features are used. In the detailed view, only the feature that is visible in the view is used, if it corresponds to the current Color Mapping mode. If the detailed view is enabled for a cone-type feature and the selected mode is Surface, the calculation is not performed.

Used to select the number of colors for color mapping. The number of color segments is an odd number, greater or equal to 5 only.

Used to select the maximum value of the scale and the smallest positive value. Hold the key pressed and change the values using the spin buttons or the mouse wheel to apply the values entered to the negative values. This will create a symmetric scale with respect to 0.

Used to select the minimum value of the scale and the smallest negative value.

Notes: 

By default, color mapping is updated in real time in Standard mode. To disable this option in this tab, modify the AUTOUPDATESTANDARD parameter in the COLORMAPPING section of advanced parameters (USER tab).

AUTOUPDATESTANDARD = 0 -> update in real time is not activated. AUTOUPDATESTANDARD = 1 (by default) -> update in real time is not activated. 

Any changes to the Standard tab scale will also impact the Advanced tab scale.

Advanced

When color mapping is enabled, the threshold values in the corresponding fields may be modified. The thresholds correspond to the values at which the different color mapping colors change. Threashold values and colors may be modified by double-clicking in the corresponding boxes. The scale in this window is used to modify the colors, their numbers and the deviation limits used for surface color mapping. This mode is identical to feature Color coding.

Page 2048

Used to add a color.

Used to delete an interval.

Note: Any changes made to the Advanced tab scale do not impact that of the Standard tab. These changes will be lost if changes are made in the Standard tab.

When this option is checked, color mapping for each point probed (surface points) is calculated, once each geometrical feature has been validated, and during each scan for point clouds.

Check this option to enable the color blur effect.

"Blur Effect" disabled

"Blur Effect" enabled

Used to calculate the optimum mean size of the color mapping applied at each point. If the option is not selected, this adjustment can be performed manually.

Page 2049

Important note: To validate the Blur effect and/or Auto sizing setting changes, it is mandatory to click Accept in this tab. Changes are discarded when clicking back on the Standard tab otherwise.

Click this button to apply the changes made. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Notes: 

For geometrical features, color mapping relates to form faults:

Page 2050



Once Surface Mapping has been calculated, color mapping is automatically set to cloud mode and it scale to Absolute. Moreover, CAD rendering is set to wireframe mode.

Page 2051

Legend context menu

A legend is displayed in the 3D View when Color Mapping is enabled.

Right-click this legend to obtain the following context menu:

Display Options This option is used to display the Color Mapping settings window.

Type

Used to display the associated scale and/or histogram. Scale and histogram

Scale only

Histogram only

Page 2052

Orientation

Used to select scale orientation. Auto: The orientation is automatically selected according to the scale position and size. Vertical: Scale orientation always vertical.

Horizontal: Scale orientation always horizontal.

Values position

Used to change the scale value position. Left/Bottom

Right/Top

Page 2053

Colors for values, frame,...

Used to display the values and frame in black or white.

Maximum font size

Used to select the maximum font size for the values displayed, according to the scale size.

Opacity

Used to select scale opacity.

Invert direction +/Used to change the scale direction.

Page 2054

With frame: Used to display or not a frame around the scale.

Histogram

The histogram is used to display:   

The number of surface points. The number of probings for cylinder, cone and plane features. The number of points of a cloud with a deviation within the selected intervals.

Each histogram interval is divided into 10 sub-intervals, except the 2 extreme ones. The histogram cannot be displayed in %Tol mode and is linked to the family and feature types visibility. In the detailed view, the histogram corresponds to the active feature.

Type: Used to select to display the histogram as bars or curves.

Page 2055

Linewidth (type curve): Used to change the line thickness when displaying a curve histogram.

With percentage: Used to display the percentage of values within an interval.

With probing statistics: Used to display statistic data for a feature when this feature is in detailed view mode.

Page 2056

Stickers Stickers are tables that can be displayed in a graphic view. Each sticker is linked to a work session feature. They contain all relevant information on the features to which they are attached. Sticker content and appearance can be fully configured.

Page 2057

Creating stickers

stickers are created via this icon, available in : - The Feature database - The Results window - The Toolbar Stickers can also be created via the 3D View menu, using the Create, Create All and Interactive Mode options.

Whatever the method used to access the sticker creation function, there are two possible procedures : - Create one sticker - Create several stickers

Page 2058

Creating one sticker

There are several methods of creating one individual sticker :

Via the Interactive Mode option in the 3D View menu This function allows stickers to be created by simply clicking the feature to be labeled.

the cursor is then displayed as shown and the feature to be labeled can be clicked in the 3D View :

The corresponding sticker is then displayed in the 3D view. Sticker content and appearance depend on the settings configured in the Set-Up Type window.

Page 2059

Notes: 

 

this icon is displayed depressed in the Toolbar to show that the function is enabled. Several stickers can then be created successively without having to reactivate the function. Once all the desired stickers have been created, the icon (or the Interactive Mode option in the 3D View menu) must be clicked to disable the function. Sticker configuration may be modified after stickers have been created. The stickers created are configured with the default sticker settings, accessible via the menu 3D View > Stickers > Set-Up Type.

From the toolbar (Stickers or Interactive mode) this icon, available in the Toolbar, allows the Interactive mode function in the 3D View menu to be accessed.

From the Results window

Page 2060

select the feature to be labeled from the drop-down list and click this icon. The corresponding sticker is displayed with the default configuration :

Notes:  

Sticker configuration may be modified after stickers have been created. The stickers created are configured with the default sticker settings, accessible via the menu 3D View > Stickers > Set-Up Type.

From the Feature database

Page 2061

select the feature(s) to be labelled in the database, then click this icon. The corresponding sticker is displayed with the default configuration:

Notes:

Page 2062

  

Sticker configuration may be modified after stickers have been created. The stickers created are configured with the default sticker settings, accessible via the menu 3D View > Stickers > Set-Up Type. The Create several stickers function may also be accessed from the Feature Database.

Page 2063

Creating several stickers

There are different methods for creating several stickers simultaneously :

From the Feature Database or 3D View This option allows the Feature Database to be accessed, and the features to be labelled to be selected from the list. To select several adjacent features, click the first feature, then hold the left mouse button down and click the last feature to be selected. To select several non-adjacent features, hold the key on the keyboard down while selecting the desired features from the list by left-clicking them with the mouse.

click this button to create stickers for the selected features. The sticker configuration window is then displayed. The appearance and content of the stickers to be created can be configured in this window. Once configuration is complete, the stickers are displayed in the 3D View:

Page 2064

Via the Create All option in the 3D View menu This function is used to create stickers for all the features in the Feature Database in one operation. The sticker configuration window is then displayed. The appearance and content of the stickers to be created can be configured in this window. If there is not sufficient space to create the required number of stickers, the software offers to automatically split the stickers into several views:

Enter the number of views in which the stickers are to be split in this box, or use the arrows to increase/decrease the number displayed. Enter the generic name to be assigned to the stickers. By default, the name offered is that of the

Page 2065

last view incremented by one. In the example, the last view in the list was named VIEW1. click this button to create the stickers, split over several views. click this button to create all the stickers in the same view. click this button to exit the window without creating any stickers.

Page 2066

Set-Up Type

This function can be accessed : - from the menu 3D View > Stickers > Set-Up type - by double-clicking the sticker to be modified - from the Pop-up menu

The set-up sticker type window has three tabs : Rows / Columns Appearance Positioning

Page 2067

Rows / Columns

This tab is used to configure sticker rows and columns.

Columns Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the values to be displayed in columns in the sticker and uncheck (deselect) the values that are not to be displayed. These values vary according to the mode used in the software:



Normal mode

Page 2068

Symbols (X, Y, Z, ND,...) : displays the symbols corresponding to the different values selected. Actual : displays the feature's measured values. Nominal : displays the feature's theoretical values, if it has been defined. ISO Tol. : displays the Iso tolerance selected when the feature was defined. Tol - : displays the lower tolerance selected when the feature was defined. Tol + : displays the upper tolerance selected when the feature was defined. Deviation : displays the deviation for each type of value, if the feature is defined and measured. Tendency : used to display the tendency of each of the feature's dimensions with respect to tolerance (see Results). This display is in graphic format when the dimensions are within tolerance and numeric format when they are out of tolerance.

Example : Sticker with Tendency

Graphical position deviation : used to display a symbol, in the right part of the sticker, representing the position deviation of a center. This deviation is a 2D deviation in the plane. This symbol is only valid for features with a center. It does not therefore apply to the following features: cylinder, cone, plane, section, line, geometrical tolerance, alignment information, text / value, distance and angle. the drop-down list is used to select the plane in which the center is located: AUTO (the plane is automatically selected according to the feature's normal), PLAN_XY, PLAN_YZ or PLAN_ZX, in the definition alignment.

Example: Sticker with Graphical position deviation

Page 2069

The arrows show position deviation sign with respect to the orientation of the feature definition alignment axes. The type of feature referred to by the sticker is shown between (in the center of) the arrows: circle, slot, hexagon, ellipse, point, rectangle. If the feature is a sphere or hole, it is shown by a point. As these two features are not defined in a plane, AUTO mode is not available.



Statistics mode

In addition to the values common to normal mode, the following values are available in Statistics mode : Range Std. Dev. : standard deviation or Variance (according to the option in the menu Preferences > Units > Statistical Units) Cp: capability CpK: machine capability

Page 2070

Sticker color may vary according to these values. They are displayed: - In green : If CpK > 1.33 (default value). This value can be modified in the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters . - In red : If CpK < 1.33 (default value). This value can be modified in the menu Preferences > Advanced Parameters . - In white : If CpK cannot be calculated.

Tendency: used to display a graph showing the changes in the last statistical values. All: the graph shows all measurements. Last N: the graph shows the last N measurements only.

Example :

The red lines above and below the tendency graph correspond to the maximum and minimum tolerances. The black line correspond to the X axis. The graph scale is automatically calculated according to the tolerances and maximum deviations.

Rows

Page 2071

Check (select) the boxes corresponding to the values to be displayed in lines in the sticker and uncheck (deselect) the values that are not to be displayed.

Note: The boxes for the values displayed in the Results window (Dim1, Dim2, X, Y, Z -Coordinate, Fault Form) can be grayed out (shaded) by clicking them. The grayed out (shaded) boxes are only displayed in the sticker if they are selected as printable in the Results window. All boxes corresponding to values displayed in the Results window are grayed out:

In the Results window, the values X and F.F. must not be selected to be printable:

Page 2072

In the sticker created, only the values selected as printable in the Results window are displayed:

Feature Name : used to display feature names as sticker titles. Comment : used to display the comment associated with the feature when it was defined, measured or constructed. See Results. Tol. title block : selects the associated title block when creating a sticker on a tolerance.

Example: Positioning tolerance on a circle:

Legend : used to display column titles. Dim1 : used to display true magnitude, diameter or deviation, according to the type of feature. Dim2 : used to display radius, width or half-angle, according to the type of feature. Coordinate (X, Y, Z) : used to display the corresponding coordinate. Fault Form : used to display form fault or standard deviation (according to the option selected in the menu

Page 2073

Preferences > Units).

Note : A preview allows an example sticker to be displayed in real time, according to the selected settings.

Tolerance color if this box is checked (selected), a colored line showing tolerance is displayed: - Green : the feature is in the tolerance zone - Yellow : the feature exceeds the critical tolerance zone configured in Feature Properties, accessible via the Feature Database. - Red : the feature is out of tolerance. - White : feature tolerance cannot be calculated.

Example :

Example: Tolerances displayed with Color Coding enabled

Page 2074

Page 2075

Boxes to be checked (selected) when this box is checked (selected), all existing stickers in the graphical view are modified to match the selected settings. The following button is then available: this button allows all boxes to be grayed out (shaded) with a single click. The advantage of this is to be able to apply parameters common to all stickers while conserving certain individual settings. All boxes grayed out allows the individual settings of each sticker to be conserved. Then, simply uncheck the boxes (i.e. boxes not grayed out) corresponding to the values to be applied to all stickers. Once the desired boxes have been unchecked, check or uncheck them to display them or not in all stickers. The other two buttons are always available: this button allows all boxes to be checked (selected) with a single click. You can then uncheck the value(s) that are not to be displayed. For example, if you want to display all values except Graphical position deviation, you can easily check all the values and simply uncheck the corresponding box. this button allows all boxes to be unchecked (deselected) with a single click. You can then check the value(s) that are to be displayed. For example, if you want to display only Graphical position deviation, you simply uncheck all the values and simply check the corresponding box.

click this button to apply the changes made in the different tabs in the window and to close the window. click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Note: When creating stickers on features used to construct a marker by reference features, the symbol representing the contribution of the feature in terms of degrees of freedom can be displayed in the sticker:

These symbols are only linked to the features used when creating the last marker created per reference features. To display this symbol, the following advanced parameter in tab USER, section XGSTICKERS should be activated: m_iRPSSymbolDisplay.

Example:

Page 2076

The different symbols come from a bitmap file, RPS_Symbol.bmp, found in the root of the application. The image contains all the symbols concerned:

This image can be customized along certain criteria:   

all symbols should have the same size and shoule be square. the image should contain the 10 symbols X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, ZX, XYZ, XXX, YYY and ZZZ placed next to each other and in this order. the image size can be modified. The size of the symbol displayed in the sticker adapts automatically to the size of the sticker. Note: The application must be restarted to take the image change into account.

- When a sticker is created for a Surface feature, the sticker is linked to the feature by two links on the two extreme probe points.

Page 2077

Page 2078

Appearance

The second tab is used to configure sticker appearance (color, border, etc.).

This button allows sticker border, link, and background color to be selected in the following window :

Page 2079

For more details, see Rendering > Couleurs

check this box to display sticker borders.

allows border type to be selected.

allows border thickness to be selected.

allows the sticker link to be displayed or hidden.

allows link type to be selected.

allows link thickness to be selected.

Page 2080

Note: Sticker link angles can be set in the 3D View : This function can be accessed :

-

Via this icon in the Toolbar

- Via the menu 3D View > Stickers > Interactive Mode.

the cursor is then displayed as shown, and the link to be modified can be clicked in the 3D View. Drag the link to the desired location while holding the left mouse button down. Repeat this operation as many times as there are link angles to be set :

To set link angle to 90°, left-click the link while holding the Shift key on the keyboard down.

To delete an angle, place the cursor on the angle to be deleted (it is displayed highlighted) and use the Del key on the keyboard.

Page 2081

The sticker arrow may also be moved (away from the feature, for example). To do this, hold down the key on the keyboard and left-click the end of the link. Move the end of the link to the desired location. To cancel the operation, select the end of the link with the cursor and press the Del key on the keyboard.

check (select) this box to apply a color gradient to the background color selected for the sticker.

check this box if no background color is to be applied to the sticker.

allows sticker display font and display font size to be selected.

click this button to restore the default colors. This action does not cancel any other changes made.

Note: A preview allows an example sticker to be displayed in real time, according to the selected settings.

when this box is checked (selected), all existing stickers in the graphical view are modified to match the selected settings.

click this button to apply the changes made in the different tabs in the window and to close the window.

Page 2082

click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Page 2083

Positioning

There are two methods of positioning stickers :

The first method consists in using the automatic position settings, accessed via the Positioning tab in the Set-Up Sticker Type window. The second method consists in using the Magnetic grid, accessed via the menu 3D View > Stickers > Snap to Grid.

Page 2084

Automatic Positioning

The third tab allows sticker positioning to be configured.

Checking this box allows stickers to be moved to follow work session features. The sticker will always be at the same distance from the feature.

When multiple stickers are created, they can be positioned in three ways in relation to features in the 3D View.

All around the 3D view's borders

Page 2085

When this option is selected, the stickers created are arranged around the 3D View so that the links (if any) do not cross:

checking (selecting) this box when new stickers are created means that the stickers are "glued" together :

Page 2086

Near features When this option is selected, the stickers created are arranged near the features so that any links do not cross: This field is used to select minimum sticker link length (in pixels). Links may be made longer to avoid links crossing or stickers overlapping.

Page 2087

Note: When the above type of positioning is selected, the Dynamic Positioning option is automatically enabled. This means that when features are moved in the 3D View, the corresponding stickers follow these movements to remain near the feature. However, this option may be disabled if required.

On the deviation's vectors of the surface points When this option is selected, the stickers created are arranged on the surface point deviation vector markers. There are no links between the features and the stickers.

Page 2088

Note: The ways in which surface point deviation is represented may be modified as follows:

Page 2089

by changing the value of the following variable via Preferences > Advanced Parameters, Config tab: iArrowType = 1 (0 by default).

Note: When the above type of positioning is selected, the Dynamic Positioning option is automatically enabled. This means that when features are moved in the 3D View, the corresponding stickers follow these movements to remain near the feature. However, this option may be disabled if required.

The example sticker displayed does not change to reflect the selected settings as, in this case, these are positioning settings. When this box is checked (selected), all existing stickers in the graphical view are modified to match the selected settings.

Click this button to apply the changes made in the different tabs in the window and to close the window. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Page 2090

Magnetic grid

This function allows stickers to be automatically positioned on the screen. The window is displayed as follows :

check (select) this box to enable the sticker "Snap to grid" feature. Step value (corresponding to screen pixels) determines the size of the cells forming the magnetic grid. select step size for the X axis by entering a value in the field or using the arrows to increase/reduce the step size displayed. select step size for the Y axis by entering a value in the field or using the arrows to increase/reduce the step size displayed.

click this button to apply the changes. When you move stickers by dragging them with the mouse, the stickers will be automatically positioned to align with the specified grid. click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Note: This function can be temporarily disabled for a sticker be pressing the ALT key on the keyboard while moving the sticker.

Page 2091

Modifying / Deleting stickers

Modifying / Deleting a sticker A sticker may be modified or deleted by two methods : - Right-click the sticker to be modified or deleted to open the Pop-up menu - Double-click the sticker to be modified or deleted in the 3D View. The Set-Up Sticker Type window, with the settings for the sticker, is then displayed:

Modify the desired settings in the various tabs (Rows / Columns, Appearance, Positioning) in the window. Check this box to setup select settings as default settings. These settings will be applied to whole stickers created after.

Page 2092

click this button to delete the sticker.

Modifying / Deleting several stickers Several stickers may be modified or deleted simultaneously by selecting them as a group.

Enable sticker mode by clicking this button in the Toolbar. Hold the key down and select the desired stickers by clicking them or dragging the cursor to draw a selection rectangle around them. The selected stickers are highlighted, as is the case for ELLI1 and HEXA1 in the following example:

The highlighted stickers may be modified via the menu 3D View > Stickers > Set-Up Type or via the Pop-up menu. The highlighted stickers may be deleted via the Pop-up menu.

Modifying / Deleting all the stickers All the stickers may be modified simultaneously: - Via the menu 3D View > Stickers > Set-Up type in this case, this checkbox must be checked (selected). - Via the Pop-up menu.

Page 2093

You can delete (remove) all the stickers simultaneously via the menu 3D View > Stickers > Remove All.

Pop-up menu The pop-up menu allows one or more stickers to be modified/removed via the following functions:

It is opened by right-clicking one of the highlighted stickers:

Appearance: Used to modify the Appearance (colors, lines, font, etc.) of the selected sticker(s), via the following window:

Page 2094

Check this box to setup select settings as default settings. These settings will be applied to whole stickers created after.

Rows / Columns: Used to modify the Rows / Columns of the selected sticker(s), via the following window:

Page 2095

Check this box to setup select settings as default settings. These settings will be applied to whole stickers created after.

Dynamic / Static: Used to select Static positioning (the stickers conserve the assigned Positioning) or Dynamic (the stickers are moved in correlation with work session features).

Remove: Used to delete (remove) the selected sticker(s).

Page 2096

Grids This function is used to display grids in the 3D View. This window contains four tabs allowing grids to be configured in the different planes.

The dialog box for the XY, YZ and ZX tabs is shown below:

Check (select) this box to display the grid in the 3D View.

The first axis shown varies according to the plane selected. For the XY plane, the field allows the grid to be positioned on the Z axis, either by entering a value in the field or by using the arrows to increase/reduce the value shown.

Start

Page 2097

This part of the dialog box is used to select where the grid is to start on the other two axes. For the XY plane, enter the grid start value on the X and Y axes or use the arrows to increase/reduce the value shown.

End This part of the dialog box is used to select where the grid is to end on the other two axes. For the XY plane, enter the grid end value on the X and Y axes or use the arrows to increase/reduce the value shown.

Spacing This part of the dialog box is used to set grid mesh size. For the XY plane, enter the spacing value for the X and Y axes or use the arrows to increase/reduce the value shown.

Click this button to close the window after applying changes.

Example: Without grid

Display grid

Page 2098

The dialog box window is displayed as follows when the Auto tab is selected:

Page 2099

Auto mode allows the plane to be automatically selected according to the Predefined View used.

Check (select) this box to display the grid in the 3D View.

The following fields are used to set grid mesh size by entering the spacing value for the X, Y and Z axes.

Click this button to close the window after applying changes.

Page 2100

View

Page 2101

Recall

This function is used to recall a user-defined view. The window is shown below:

Select the desired view from the drop-down list containing all the views created. Click this button to activate the selected view and close the window. Click this button to exit the window without changing the current view.

Note: A user-defined view may also be recalled via the list of views available in the toolbar.

In program: When this function is learned in a program (Teach-in), the following line is added:

Page 2102

Create

This function is used to create personalized views. It may be accessed: - Via the menu 3D View > View > Create -

Via this icon in the toolbar

The window is shown below:

Once you have organized and configured the 3D View, enter a name for this personalized view. You may replace an existing personalized view by selecting it from the drop-down list.

Examples: Personalized view VIEW1:

Page 2103

Personalized view VIEW2:

Page 2104

Click this button to create the view and close the window. Click this button to exit the window without creating a view.

A view allows all the display option settings selected in the 3D View to be saved: - zoom factors - the types of features displayed - exaggeration factors - shown or hidden families - sticker display - manual probing assistance

Notes: 

As many personalized views as required may be created.

Page 2105



For the views created to be saved in the work session, you must save the working session.

Warning: Feature data is not saved.

In program: When this function is learned in a program (Teach-in), the following line is added:

Page 2106

Delete

This function is used to delete one or more personalized views. The window is shown below:

Select the view(s) to be deleted in the list. Several views may be selected by holding the while selecting them.

key down

Click this button to delete the selected views and close the window. Click this button to exit the window without deleting any views.

Page 2107

Delete All

This function is used to delete all the personalized views available in the working session. The following confirmation message is displayed:

Click this button to delete all the views. If you click this button, the message disappears and the views are not deleted.

Page 2108

Predefined View This function is used to: - Select one of the predefined views available in the software, - Select the desired standard for views: Mechanical Standard or Bodywork Standard.

Notes:  

The 3D View shortcut bar also allows the selection of predefined views to be accessed. If the mechanical standard is selected, the icons in the 3D View shortcut bar representing the automobile are displayed in orange, if the bodywork standard is selected, the icons are displayed in yellow.

The following table shows the alignment orientations corresponding to the predefined views, both for the mechanical and bodywork standards: View name

Bodywork Standard

Orientation

Mechanical Standard

Orientatio n

Isometric View Left View Rear View Bottom View Top View Front View Right View

Page 2109

Zoom

Note: The use the zoom function described here is that of the default mode. However, zoom operation will differ in line with the Mouse mode which has been activated.

Different Zoom options are available via the 3D View menu:

Zoom In to enlarge the drawing displayed in the 3D View.

This icon in the 3D View toolbar is a shortcut to this function.

Zoom Out to reduce the drawing displayed in the 3D View.

This icon in the 3D View toolbar is a shortcut to this function.

Zoom Full View to adjust view size to show all features. This icon in the 3D View toolbar is a shortcut to this function.

Zoom On Probe to center the image on the current probe position. This icon in the 3D View toolbar is a shortcut to this function.

Define New Center of Rotation to center the image on the next point clicked in the 3D View and set the center of rotation of the view for movements made using the mouse. This icon in the 3D View is a shortcut to this function.

Scroll View on Current Probe Position to center the view on the probe, even when the probe is moved.

Page 2110

The probe is then always at the center of the view. This icon in the 3D View is a shortcut to this function. There are two special modes for this function when an optical sensor is connected: - Option disabled: no automatic zoom and no automatic orientation. - Option enabled: this function centers the 3D View on the sensor during scan acquisition. When the acquisition button is released, the entire work environment is displayed again in the 3D View. See Manual probing assistance for more information.

Notes: 

The mouse may also be used to zoom in on part of the workpiece: - position the mouse cursor on the area to be enlarged, - press and hold down the left mouse button and draw a selection rectangle around the area, - release the mouse button, the selected area will now be displayed over most of the screen.

For IntelliMouse mouses, the wheel is used to set zoom factor. 

Certain keystrokes can be used for the following zoom operations: Keys Operation + Zoom in Zoom out Zoom all

Page 2111

Mouse mode This function enables settings for actions associated with mouse buttons to be changed. There are four mouse modes available in the submenu:  

 

Default mode: This is the default mode for the software. For further details, please refer to the Using the mouse in the 3D view page. Fixed Z axis mode: This is a mode available in Metrolog XG which enables rotation movements to be changed. While it is active, the Z axis will always remain vertical and can never be reversed, thus avoiding any confusion when rotating. CimStation mode: This is the default mode for CimStation software. CAD mode: This mode is the default software mode with rotational movements reversed.

The table below summarizes the functions associated with mouse buttons, depending on the mouse mode which has been activated: Fixed Z axis CimStation mode mode - Left-click + - Left-click + right-click + moving right-click + moving Left-click + moving Translation the mouse the mouse the mouse - Center-click + - Center-click + moving the mouse moving the mouse - Right-click + moving the mouse towards the right Right-click + Right-click + Rotation moving the mouse moving the mouse - Left-click + to the left right-click + moving towards the right towards the right the mouse towards the right Default mode

CAD mode - Left-click + right-click + moving the mouse - Center-click + moving the mouse

Right-click + moving the mouse towards the left

- Right-click + moving the mouse Right-click + Right-click + towards the left Right-click + moving Rotation moving the mouse moving the mouse - Left-click + the mouse towards to the right towards the left towards the left right-click + moving the right the mouse towards the left Right-click + Right-click + moving Right-click + Right-click + moving Rotation moving the mouse the mouse upwards moving the mouse the mouse downwards upwards (limited (limited rotation) upwards downwards rotation) Right-click + Right-click + moving Right-click + Rotation moving the mouse the mouse Right-click + moving moving the mouse upwards downwards (limited downwards (limited the mouse upwards downwards rotation) rotation) - Mouse wheel - Mouse wheel - Mouse wheel downwards downwards downwards Mouse wheel Zoom out - Right-click without - Right-click without - Right-click without downwards moving the mouse moving the mouse moving the mouse Zoom in

Mouse wheel upwards

Mouse wheel upwards

Mouse wheel upwards

Mouse wheel upwards

Page 2112

Left-click + moving Left-click + moving Zoom the mouse the mouse with border

Left-click + moving the mouse

Left-click + Left-click + - Left-click + right-click + release right-click + release right-click + moving right-click + moving right-click + moving mouse up/down. - Center-click + mouse up/down. Dynamic mouse up/down. moving mouse Zoom up/down. Up = Zoom in Down = Zoom out

Up = Zoom in Down = Zoom out

Up = Zoom out Down = Zoom in

Left-click + right-click + release right-click + moving mouse up/down.

Up = Zoom in Down = Zoom out

Note: For a fixed Z axis view (Fixed Z axis or CimStation mode), if the view loaded is improperly oriented, it will be re-oriented at the first rotation of view (switch to ISO view).

Page 2113

Rendering Different Rendering options are available from the 3D View menu:

Solid rendering This function is used to calculate object facets in order to cover the different visible surfaces of the CAD file with a "skin". If one or more of the CAD file surfaces are placed in a group that renders them invisible, the software does not include them in the solid rendering calculation. The solid rendering calculation is only performed once, when initially requested.

Warning: If the CAD file in the 3D View is a large file, the calculation may take some time (several tens of seconds).

Example: Display in solid rendering mode:

This icon in the 3D View is a shortcut to this function.

Page 2114

Wireframe rendering Only surface boundaries are shown displayed as "wires". Wireframe mode allows faster display of large CAD files.

Example: Display in wireframe mode:

This icon in the 3D View is a shortcut to this function.

Solid / Wireframe (solid rendering with moves in wireframe mode) In this case, the workpiece is rendered in solid mode and switches to wireframe mode when rotation and translation movements are performed using the mouse in the 3D View. This renders movements in the 3D View more fluid. This icon in the 3D View is a shortcut to this function.

Hidden Lines Removal rendering Surface boundaries are shown in wireframe rendering but without transparency. Thus, boundaries located on the back of the part are not represented.

Example: Display in Hidden Lines Removal rendering mode:

Page 2115

This icon in the 3D View is a shortcut to this function.

Colors This function is used to modify colors in the 3D View (background, feature names, highlighting, inactive CAD features, links, sticker borders and backgrounds). This icon in the 3D View is a shortcut to this function.

The window is shown below:

Page 2116

allows one of the Basic colors available to be selected by clicking in the desired box.

allows the color to be personalized if the desired color is not available in the Basic colors. Move the cursor until the desired hue is obtained.

Page 2117

used to lighten or darken the selected hue by moving the cursor.

the Personalized colors are displayed in these boxes.

preview allowing the selected color to be viewed.

these fields allow the parameters for the desired color to be entered.

to restore the default color settings. to apply the selected color without closing the window. to apply the selected color and close the window. closes the window without applying any changes made. to add the color displayed in the preview to the Personalized colors.

Light Settings This function is used to set lighting in the 3D View.

This icon in the 3D View is a shortcut to this function.

The window is shown below:

Page 2118

Move the different cursors to obtain the desired lighting.

to select whether surfaces are rendered with a metallic or plastic aspect, if solid rendering is selected. Click this button to restore the default light settings. Click this button to apply the changes made and close the window. Click this button to close the window without applying changes.

Example 1: Default Light settings

Page 2119

Example 2: Modified Light settings

Page 2120

Alignments This function is used to configure display of the trihedron displayed in the 3D View. The window is shown below:

By default, the alignment is displayed in wireframe mode. To activate 3D rendering, check the box. The field is used to enter a dimension for axes, in number of pixels on screen. Only values between 10 and 200 are allowed. The value is applied when entering it in the field or when clicking the

arrows.

Wireframe rendering

3D rendering

Page 2121

This display mode affects all alignments displayed in the 3D View. and

checkboxes are used to hide or view

these alignments.

Note: The rendering mode does not affect the alignment displayed in the Alignment view. Click this button to confirm the configuration. Click this button to close the window without applying any changes made.

Probe / head This function configures the display of the measurement head in the 3D View if it was modeled. The window is shown below:

Select this field in order not to display the probe or the measurement head in the 3D View. Select this field to display either the probe, or the red cross as a function of the zoom applied. Select this field to display either the measurement head, if there is one present in the probes file, or if a head was created beforehand, or the probe if this is not the case (or the red cross as a function of the zoom applied).

Note: When T-Scan is connected to the software, its graphic representation is displayed in t he 3D View :

Page 2122

Page 2123

Maximize/Restore View Maximizing or restoring the 3D view This function is used to: - Maximize the 3D View vertically, by hiding any windows docked on top. - Restore the 3D View, by displaying any windows docked on top. This icon in the 3D View is a shortcut to this function.

Example: 3D View maximized

Example: 3D View restored

Page 2124

Maximize or Restore Active Split View This function is used to switch from the active split view to the maximized 3D view and vice versa. This icon in the 3D View is a shortcut to this function.

Example: Active split view maximized

Page 2125

Example: Active split view restored

Page 2126

Page 2127

Split This function allows you to work with several different views in the 3D View window. The 3D View window may be divided into two or four views. Several types of split are available from the 3D View menu:

These functions may also be accessed via the 3D View shortcut buttons: Delete Split Split Horizontally Split Vertically Split Automatically Apply Display Options to All Views

Split: To split the 3D View into four sub-views while using the mouse to size them. Split Automatically: to automatically split the 3D View into four sub-views of equal size. Split Vertically: to vertically split the 3D View into two sub-views of equal size. Split Horizontally: to horizontally split the 3D View into two sub-views of equal size. Delete Split: to cancel the split by displaying a single view (the active sub-view). Apply Display Options to All Views: to apply the options selected for the active sub-view to all sub-views. This icon shows that the option is enabled, subsequent changes will be applied to all views.

Example: Color mapping will be enabled in all views:

Page 2128

This icon shows that the option is disabled, subsequent changes will only be applied to the active sub-view. This latter option applies to:

- display options - grids - stickers - view rendering mode (wireframe/solid) - zoom in/out - image size adjustment - image centering on the probe - permanent image centering on the probe - detailed/global view mode.

Example: Color mapping is only disabled in the active sub-view:

Page 2129

Note: Sticker management This option applies to: - Deleting all stickers. - Creating stickers by clicking or from the Results window. This option does not apply to: - Creating several stickers - Creating stickers from the Feature Database.

Notes:    



The active sub-view has a yellow border. When a split is performed, the new sub-views have the same settings as the active sub-view. Functions related to view creation (via the camera) handle split views. The print function handles sub-views. If the view to be printed is configured in Auto sticker mode (in the *.def file), this parameter is ignored, the existing stickers in the split views are printed (the stickers are not re-calculated). If several stickers are created simultaneously, this is done in the active sub-view.

Page 2130

Manual Probing Assistance On a manual CMM, Manual Probing Assistance is used to guide the user on the feature to be inspected (controlled). The window is shown below:

Check (select) this box to select the minimum zoom value for the 3D View window in mm (centered on the probe). This means the software will permanently calculate the zoom factor in order to display: - At least the distance entered between the two sides of the 3D View window - The probe in the center of the 3D View This field may then be edited and a value can be entered manually or by using the arrows to increase/reduce the value shown.

Check this box so the 3D View automatically adapts to the probe orientation. This function can only be used with optical sensors. When the Min. View Field or Automatic Orientation boxes are enabled, the Scroll View on Current Probe Position function, represented by the icon is automatically enabled. When an optical sensor is connected, the following changes are applied:  

This function centers the 3D View on the sensor during scan acquisition. When the acquisition button is released, the entire work environment is displayed again in the 3D View. If the Min. View Field box is enabled, the value entered is no longer complied with. The zoom is performed as follows: - On the scanline being acquired, if the m_bZoomOnAllScans parameter in the USER tab

Page 2131



in Advanced parameters is set to 0. - On all the present scanlines, if the m_bZoomOnAllScans parameter in the USER tab in Advanced parameters is set to 1. If Automatic Orientation is enabled, the view takes the sensor orientation into account during the acquisition process.

Check (select) this box to enable Arrow Along Probing direction. This gives information on the probing direction to be used for this feature. Arrow size can be configured via the Markers option in Display Options > View.

Example:

This mode is used to apply the arrow along probing direction to each point to be measured. This mode can be used only when a program is running.

Example: On Probing Point checked

On Probing Point unchecked

Page 2132

Check (select) this box to enable Red Helper Line. This provides graphic assistance by displaying a line between the center of the feature to be measured and the ball center (current probe position):

Note: The DRO window in position mode also allows the distance between the center of the feature and ball center to be displayed in progress bar format. This mode is used to apply the red helper line to each point to be measured. This mode can be used only when a program is running.

Example: On Probing Point checked

On Probing Point unchecked

Page 2133

Check (select) this box to render the probe shown in the 3D View transparent. This is particularly useful when using laser systems, in which the probes shown are, in fact, laser targets, and often have large diameters that prevent the workpiece being viewed in the 3D View :

Transparent Probe function disabled

Transparent Probe function enabled

Check (select) this box to enable audio probing assistance. Audio assistance (probing sound) signal frequency varies according to the distance between the probe and measuring point. When an optical sensor is active and an acquisition or a calibration is in progress, a modulated sound is played as a function of the sensor/part distance. This function is available on the arm and manual CMM.

Important note: In order for this option to run correctly, Windriver.exe should be installed, available in the software installation directory Drivers > Me53x-Speaker. Moreover, two sounds are played during loss (Metrolog - Beam not ready) and during resumption of the beam (Metrolog - Beam ready) on a laser/optotrack, or when the optical probe picks up a scanline or not. They may be configured in Windows task bar, Start > Settings > Control panel.

Click this button. The following window is then displayed:

Page 2134

It is then possible to associate the Metrolog - Beam not ready and Metrolog - Beam ready sounds with a sound to Wav format.

Click this button to apply the changes made and close the window. Click this button to exit the window without applying the changes made.

Page 2135

Detail Feature This function is used to display the details of the current feature in the 3D View. It may be accessed: - Via the menu 3D View > Detail Feature

-

By clicking this item in the Result window.

When this function is selected, the current feature is displayed alone in the view to allow it to be clearly seen. The Histogram window also opens, thus allowing the positioning of the probing points of the feature and their deviations to be viewed.

Page 2136

All desired operations can then be performed in the the 3D View. To return to the global view, simply select this function via the 3D View menu or in the Results window.

Detailed view of geometrical tolerances If the detailed view is activated on one of the following geometrical tolerances: roundness (circularity) tolerance, flatness tolerance, straightness tolerance, cylindricality tolerance, information on the toleranced feature is displayed:

           

Tolerance name Tolerance family name Tolerance comment Criterion used to calculate the tolerance Form fault of the feature, equivalent to the measured (actual) value of the tolerance Diameter and position of the feature recalculated using the Tchebychev criterion Feature name Feature family name Feature definition alignment Any filter on the feature Number of probing points used to calculate the feature 3D View exaggeration factor

The following color coding scheme is used in the 3D View: - Red lines represent the minimum and maximum tolerances. - Violet lines represent the minimum and maximum form faults. - White arrows indicate probing points with extreme form faults. If the criterion used for feature measurement is the Tchebychev criterion, two max. points and two min. points are calculated.

Note: For files created using earlier versions than version XG 8.001, when information is missing, the note To be re-evaluated is shown in the title block. Once the tolerance has been re-evaluated, the information is displayed. For a cylindricality tolerance, the cylinder must be re-evaluated to obtain all the information. The display may be configured in the file "user_name.ini": [VIEW3D] DETAILED_DRAW_AXIS_GRID=1 : axes, grids and legends displayed DETAILED_DRAW_AXIS_GRID=0 : axes, grids and legends not displayed

Roundness tolerance

Page 2137

Flatness tolerance

Page 2138

Straightness tolerance

Page 2139

Cylindricality tolerance

Page 2140

The 3D View is divided into three parts:   

Cone distance display Display by circle The title block

Display order is modified according to the measurement:  

If the cylinder was measured by cone distances, the n cone distances are displayed along with the 4 circles. If the cylinder was measured by circles, the n circles are displayed along with the 4 generator (distance/pitch length).

The display may be configured in the file "user_name.ini": [VIEW3D] DETAILED_CYLINDRICITY_NB_COL_MAX=maximum number of columns for the first line. The default value of this parameter is 0, the cylinder cone distances are then all displayed. DETAILED_CYLINDRICITY_NB_SECONDARY_ELT=maximum number of columns for the second line. The default value of this parameter is 4.

Detailed view of the Surface feature When the detailed view is activated for a Surface feature, two white arrows appear in the 3D View to indicate the extreme points. Points out of tolerance are then displayed in read.

Page 2141

When the sticker mode is activated for a Surface feature, the sticker links point to the two extreme points.

When Color Coding is activated, the form faults, represented by two lines having the direction of the points measured and a length proportional to their value, are displayed in the 3D View. Their color corresponds to their deviation in the color coding.

Page 2142

Creating BMP, WMF, JPEG, or PNG files This function allows an image of the current 3D View to be saved as a *.bmp, *.wmf, *.Jpeg, or *.png format graphic file for future use (insertion in a report, for example).

The window is shown below:

Select the target (destination) directory to which the graphic file is to be saved. A list of the existing folders and files in this directory is displayed. Enter a name for the file. From the drop-down list, select the type of graphic file to be created (*.bmp, *.wmf, *.Jpeg, or *.png). - click this button to save the graphic file to the selected location and close the window. - click this button to exit the window without creating a file. - clicking this button displays this help page.

Example: Creating a file, Example.bmp, of the current 3D View:

Page 2143

Current 3D View:

Graphic file Example.bmp of the current 3D View:

Note: For improved print quality, colors may be printed slightly differently to those shown in the graphic file on screen, particularly sticker background colors.

Page 2144

Windows This menu is used to select the windows and bars to be displayed on the screen and to configure their display. When a window or bar is open, the symbol in front of the menu option is depressed, as shown in the image below:

Note: A second selection cannot be used to disable active windows or bars. They must be closed directly on the software screen.

The different types of windows For ease of use, the windows have been grouped into 5 categories. All windows from the same category act in exactly the same way. Temporary windows: In general, these windows are linked to isolated actions. For example: Reverse orientation of a feature, Automated calibration, Activate probing realignment, etc. These windows are of a fixed size. Action windows: In general, these windows are linked to more or less repetitive actions. For example: the definition, measurement, build, distance, tolerance, etc. windows. These windows are of a fixed size. Status windows: These windows are used to modify the presentation of a working session. For example: the Unified database, the Histogram, the Position CMM window and the software and DMIS program windows. These windows can be resized. Display windows: These windows are used to display the application context. For example: the Results window and the DRO. These windows can be resized.  Bars:

Page 2145

These windows contain controls allowing actions to be run. For example, the Feature bar, etc.

Resizable windows When a window is resizable, the appearance of the cursor changes when it is placed over one of the edges of the window. Simply stretch or shrink the window in either direction to the required size. To resize the window in both directions simultaneously, place the cursor on one of the corners and stretch or shrink the window to the required size. In the program windows as well as in the DRO window, the positions stored in the software memory.

button is used to switch between two window

Window format The following buttons can be found at the top of the windows: closes the window, whether or not it is docked. moves from one window to another when several dialogs are docked one on top of the other. An undocked window cannot use this feature.

Page 2146

3D View The 3D view window can be opened from the Windows menu, and can then be viewed on the software screen. The window is shown below:

The 3D View allows you to view the part, the measurements, the CAD file(s), the features used in the working session and the corresponding stickers, the probe and its movements, the active alignment and the CAD alignment, etc. This window can be configured using the 3D view menu.

Page 2147

Alignment view In the Windows menu, the 3D alignment and scale displayed in the lower part of the 3D View may be "shown"/"hidden" (displayed/masked). It is possible to view the orientation of the alignment associated with the CAD, even if it does not appear in the 3D view, due to a zoom or to part orientation. This alignment allows different options to be accessed: Each colored angle represents a shortcut to a preset view. The corresponding icon is displayed when the cursor is rolled over it.

Example: If the violet angle is selected, it is highlighted and the view that will be displayed if it is clicked shown (in this example, the top view).

The alignment is then displayed as shown below and the features in the 3D View are displayed accordingly:

Below the representation of the alignment, the scale at which the part appears in the 3D view is shown.

In the above example, the scale indicates that the length of the line shown corresponds to 20mm (or inches, depending on the unit used) in the 3D view. The larger the zoom in the 3D view, the lower the value will be for the length of the line. Conversely, the smaller the zoom, the greater the value given in mm. Note: The appearance of the alignment may be modified in the menu 3D View > Rendering > Alignments.

Page 2148

DRO window The DRO window can be opened from the Windows menu, and can then be viewed on the software screen. The display of this window varies according to the mode selected in the DRO settings, but it is used to view: the position of the machine, the results of the measured feature, the adjustable head angle used, etc.:

Position Mode Displays the current position of the machine (and by extension, of the probe) in the machine alignment or in the part alignment. In position mode, you can choose whether or not to display the progress bar. This choice is made in the DRO settings.

With progress bar

Without progress bar

Results Mode Displays the values of the last feature measured.

Page 2149

Sensor Mode Displays the deflection value of the probe on each axis, when using a scanning probe.

Automatic Mode Displays the result of the last measurement (Results Mode) or the current position of the probe (Position Mode), according to the deviation of the probe with regard to the last feature measured.

In program: this window tells the user the distance from the probing to be reached.

Page 2150

Histogram This window is used to display the distribution of the measurements of one or more features, with respect to the required tolerances.

Multi-features The Histogram window can be opened from the Windows menu, and can then be viewed on the software screen. The window is shown below:

Select this mode for the histogram to take into account all the dimensions for all features with tolerances.

Select this mode for the histogram to take into account only the selected features with tolerances.

Page 2151

Opens the Browse database option so as to select the features for which the histogram is to be calculated. The field corresponding to the selection of the Histogram window features is displayed as follows:

Features can be deselected by unchecking them from this list. The histogram is then automatically recalculated.

Right-clicking on the histogram shows the different options for displaying the histogram:

Histogram displayed in the form of a 3D bar:

Histogram displayed in the form of a 3D curve:

Histogram displayed in the form of a Bar:

Page 2152

Histogram displayed in the form of a Curve:

Regardless of the display mode chosen, the height of the histogram represents the number of lines of results which can be printed and the width represents the tolerance range. The lower part of the window gives the name of the features which have the largest minimum and maximum deviations (between the nominal and measured values):

The first line shows that the feature LOCA has the highest maximum deviation encountered among the features on which the deviation analysis is based. The value of this deviation is 0.048 mm. The lack of any sign indicates that this is a positive deviation. The second line shows that the feature INCL_CIR has the lowest maximum deviation encountered among the features on which the deviation analysis is based. The value of this deviation is -0.049 mm. The - sign indicates that this is a negative deviation.

Closes the window, retaining the changes made.

Note: The deviations are only given on the results with a tolerance. If the value of a deviation is more than 10 times the tolerance, it is not indicated. The real value of this deviation is replaced by the information > 10T

Page 2153

Single feature Pressing this button in the Results window will provide access to the Histogram window. This will relate only to the selected feature, for which additional analysis options are available. The window is shown below:

In the upper part of the window, select the type of deviation to be represented in the histogram, from the following options:

Note: The operation of the histogram varies depending on the type of deviation chosen. For further details, see the example. Enter the lower and upper tolerance values in the following fields:

Page 2154

Then click on this button for the deviations to be recalculated based on the tolerances entered. The histogram is as follows:

The display can be modified the same as for the Multi-features histogram. The height of the bars represents the number of probing points for the feature contained in a tolerance range. The tolerance ranges appear along the bottom.

The list of the probing points and their deviations appears in the field above. When one of the points is selected, the corresponding line of the list and the bar of the histogram are highlighted:

Note:

Page 2155

In the case of a section, the list contains all the component points. It is not possible to remove a point from the section by unchecking it.

The following field shows the statistical information concerning all the probing points of the measured feature:

- Convexity The convexity provides information on the vertical/horizontal proportion of the probing distribution curve:

- Standard deviation The standard deviation indicates how, on average, the values of the variable are grouped around the nominal value (arithmetic value).

For further details, see the Statistical results page.

- Form fault This is the sum of the distances of the two most separated points of the calculated feature. For further details, see the Measure feature page.

- Moments of order 1, 2, 3, 4

- Obliquity The obliquity gives information on the symmetry of the probing distribution curve:

Page 2156

Closes the window, retaining the changes made.

Note: The information on the size deviation, the position deviation and the global deviation can only be accessed for the circle feature.

Page 2157

Example: Operation of the Histogram and the detailed view in the case of a circle

There are four possible types of operation depending on the type of deviation chosen from the drop-down list of the Histogram window:

Form fault The fault corresponds to the distance between the probing points and the calculated diameter circle is centered on the measured position:

Page 2158

Position deviation The deviation corresponds to the distance between the probing points and the calculated diameter circle is centered on the nominal position:

Page 2159

Size deviation The deviation corresponds to the distance between the probing points and the nominal diameter circle is centered on the measured position:

Page 2160

Global deviation The deviation corresponds to the distance between the probing points and the nominal diameter circle is centered on the nominal position:

Page 2161

Page 2162

Results This window displays the measurement results or the statistical results for a feature and provides the possibility to modify certain parameters. The information contained in this window varies according to the mode used:

Standard mode

The lines show: - the dimensions of the feature. This may involve: diameter and radius, length and width, distance or tolerance value, depending on the type of feature. - the coordinates. This may involve X, Y, Z in the case of features with a center, or angles XoY, YoZ, ZoX for plane, cone and cylinder type features. - the form fault.

Note: It is possible to enable or disable the printing of these parameters by checking or unchecking the box at the start of the line.

The columns show: - the values measured - the nominal values - the selected Iso tolerance - the upper and lower tolerance values - the deviation between the nominal and measured values - the tendency of each dimension of the feature compared to the tolerance: the feature is in the tolerance zone the feature exceeds the critical tolerance zone configured in Feature Properties, accessible via the Browse Database option. the feature is out of tolerance.

Page 2163

- the out of tolerance value In the example above, it is the upper tolerance which is exceeded by 0.164mm.

Statistical mode

The lines show: - the dimensions of the feature. This may involve: diameter and radius, length and width, distance or tolerance value, depending on the type of feature. - the coordinates. This may involve X, Y, Z in the case of features with a center, or angles XoY, YoZ, ZoX for plane, cone and cylinder type features. - the form fault.

Note: It is possible to enable or disable the printing of these parameters by checking or unchecking the box at the start of the line.

The columns show: - the values measured - the nominal values - the upper and lower tolerance values - the range - the standard deviation - the capability - the machine capability

This box is used to enable or disable the printing of the feature.

Page 2164

Only the printable features will appear in a report or in an exported results file.

The icon corresponding to the type of feature appears to the left of its reference.

Name of the current feature. Its graphical representation is highlighted in the 3D view. Another feature can be selected from the drop-down list of the measured features.

is used to access the Browse database.

Name of the definition alignment of the feature, which cannot be modified here.

Family to which the feature belongs, which cannot be modified here.

This icon appears to show that the statistical mode is active. To return to standard mode, you need to disable the statistical mode in the Toolbar.

deletes the current feature in the Browse database.

consult and/or modify the comment associated by default with the feature at the time of its measurement, its construction or its evaluation. It contains: - for a measured feature: the number of points scanned, the projection feature and the calculation criteria - for a built or geometrical tolerance type feature: the method and the features used - for a distance or angle type feature: the two features used and the evaluation alignment. Clicking on this button displays the following window:

Page 2165

Click on this button once the new comment is entered. This then appears in the sticker assigned to the feature.

modifies the nominal values, the tolerance values, or the definition alignment of the current feature. Clicking on this button will cause the definition window to appear, with the nominal values of the feature.

creates a tolerance feature with a form appropriate for the current feature. For example, if the current feature is a circle, the circularity tolerance evaluation window appears.

displays a sticker for the current feature.

displays the details of the feature in the 3D view. The Histogram window opens, thus allowing the positioning of the probing points of the current feature and their deviations to be viewed.

re-projects a surface point type feature, on the surface where the normal deviation will be minimum.

displays the previous feature in the list of measured features.

displays the next feature in the list of measured features.

Page 2166

Notes: 

-

For surface point type features, additional information appears in the window:

the normal vector

-

the name of the projection surface

-

the material thickness 

The results window for the Surface and Surface Mapping features slightly differs from other features:



  

MAX: maximum deviation beween a point and the CAD surface(s) used for Surface Mapping or Surface. MIN: nimimum deviation beween a point and the CAD surface(s) used for Surface Mapping or Surface. %TOL: percentage of points in the tolerance %HT: percentage of points out of the tolerance F.F.: Form Fault



The results window for the Section feature differs slightly from the other features:



Page 2167

Two lines concerning the averages are specific to the Section feature: These averages are calculated using the following formulae, ei being the deviation of point i and n the number of points of the section: - SAvg: signed average

- UAvg: absolute average

Note: This information can only be exported using the ASCII and HTML formats.

Page 2168

Toolbar The Windows menu is used to choose whether or not to display the toolbar. This contains all the data relating to the work context, as well as the shortcuts to the standard functions. It is shown below:

Each button can be used to obtain information on the current software status and to modify it.

opens a working session. This function can also be accessed via the File > Open working session menu. saves a working session. This function can also be accessed via the File > Save working session menu. provides access to the Browse database option. This function can also be accessed via the Features menu. provides access to the printing configuration of a report. This function can also be accessed via the File menu.

creates stickers by clicking directly on the features in the 3D view. Used to enable or disable the manual measure assistance. This button is depressed when assistance is enabled. in program Teach-in mode, used to insert a via point in the current probe position. This function can also be accessed using the INSER shortcut key on the keyboard. provides access to the Position CMM window, which can also be accessed using the F12 shortcut key on the keyboard. opens a probe file. This function can also be accessed via the Probes> Open probe file menu.

saves a calibrated probes configuration. This function can also be accessed via the Probes > Save menu. indicates that the current probe is not calibrated and that no measurement is possible. This button is used to access the definition window, which can also be accessed via the Probes > Define probe menu. indicates that the current probe is defined and calibrated.

Page 2169

activates a probe by opening the activation window, in which all the data relating to the probes appears. This function can also be accessed via the Probes> Activate menu. indicates the name of the current probe and is used to activate another by selecting its name in the drop-down list. associates or releases the current alignment to/from the CAD alignment. This function can also be accessed via the Alignment > Associate to CAD alignment menu. indicates the name of the current alignment and is used to activate another by selecting its name in the drop-down list. The name of the alignment associated with the CAD appears in italics. This function can also be accessed via the Alignment > Activate menu. creates a view by saving the current 3D view under the required name. This function can also be accessed via the 3D view > View > Create view menu. indicates the name of the current view and is used to activate another by selecting its name in the drop-down list. This function can also be accessed via the 3D view > View > Recall menu. Used to enable or disable color mapping. This button is depressed when color mapping is displayed.

selects the measurement station for multi-station operation with a laser tracker. In this case the various station states are as follows: Shows the status of a station that has been created but not yet used and thus not orientated. Shows the status of the station used (at least one feature measurement has been made on the station) Shows the status of a used and locked station (measurements have been made on this station and the user has moved to the following station) Shows the status of a used and orientated station (measurements have been made on this station, these measurements have been used for orientation of the stations, and this station is still the current station) Shows the status of a used, locked and orientated station (measurements have been made on this station, these measurements have been used for orientation of the stations, and the user has moved to the following station) This drop-down list also enables the connection to be activated in the event of multi-connection operation.

Note: The toolbar can be docked. For further details, see the Docking parameters page.

Page 2170

Cloud of points toolbar The Windows menu allows the Cloud of points toolbar to be "shown" or "hidden". It is displayed as follows:

Display scanlines This function is used to display the scanlines of the cloud of points. Click this button to activate the function.

Example:

Display single points This function is used to display the points in the cloud of points. Click this button to activate the function.

Example:

Page 2171

Display shaded points This function is used to display the shaded points in the cloud of points. Click this button to activate the function.

Example:

Point size Select point size in pixels.

Example: Point size = 2

Point size = 5

Page 2172

Display Mesh Click this button to activate the function. This function is used to display a mesh according to points in the cloud of points. For this function to have an effect, the mesh must have been previously built.

Example: Without mesh

With mesh

Display point information

Page 2173

Click this button to activate the function. To use it, it is necessary to have evaluated a surface mapping. This function is used to know the true magnitude and position of points on the cloud in the active alignment, upon passage of the mouse in the 3D View. A surface point can be retrieved upon each click on the CAD when this button is enabled. In this case, the retrieval parameters of the surface point are used. Further, if the sticker mode is enabled, a sticker is created automatically upon each click on the CAD.

Example:

Note: The text size can be modified via the menu 3D View > Display Options menu and its color in 3D View > Rendering > Colors.

Page 2174

Selection Point Cloud toolbar The Windows menu allows the Cloud of points selection toolbar to be "shown" or "hidden". The window is shown below:

Multi-selection mode Click this button to activate the selection mode. This function is used to select one or more scanlines using different modes: - Scanline mode (only in the filtering window): a single click to select a single scanline - Click selection mode (only in the retrieval window): the points must be clicked following the probing strategies of the selected features. - Rectangle mode: click and drag with the mouse to select the scanlines required.

Examples: Scanline mode:

Click selection mode:

Page 2175

Rectangle mode:

Lasso mode This function is used to select scanlines through a point by point or continuous selection mode. Click this button to activate the selection mode. Right-click to validate.

Examples: Point by point mode: click at the required angles, then right-click to validate the selection.

Page 2176

Continuous mode: click and drag with the mouse over the boundary of the selection required, then right-click to validate.

Select all mode This function is used to select all the scanlines of the cloud. Click this button to activate the selection mode, or press

+ A.

Example:

Page 2177

Invert selection mode This function is used to invert the selection of the scanlines. Click this button to activate the selection mode, or press

+ R.

Example: Before activating the mode

After activating the mode

Notes: 

Keep the

key of the keyboard pressed to deselect the scanlines using the active mode, or



press + C to deselect all. The cursor takes different forms depending on the activation of the modes: Lasso mode, selection / deselection Other modes, selection / deselection

Page 2178

Create a new toolbar In the software, customizable toolbars can be created which are different for each user. The window is shown below:

There are two tabs in this window:

Toolbars tab The list displayed on the left contains the existing toolbars and their display status. creates a new toolbar. The following window then appears, requesting the name of the toolbar to be created:

Enter its name, then use this button to validate.

Page 2179

or click this button to exit the window without creating the new toolbar.

The newly-created toolbar, still empty, then appears on the software screen:

Its name appears in the list:

To insert commands in this new bar, see the paragraph on the Commands tab. deletes the selected toolbar, which is highlighted in the window. renames the selected toolbar, which is highlighted in the window. closes the window, retaining the changes made.

Notes:  

It is possible to choose not to display a toolbar, without needing to delete it. To do this, uncheck the box in front of its name. It is not possible to change the toolbars of the actual software, the Toolbar and the Feature Bar.

Commands tab This tab contains all the software commands which can be inserted into a toolbar.

Page 2180

The various commands are grouped according to the software menus, as follows:

To add a shortcut icon to a toolbar: - select the category to which the function belongs in the left-hand part of the window,

- in the right-hand part of the window, select the required command and drag it to the toolbar created, then release it. The command icon will then be visible in the toolbar. The following is an example of a customized toolbar:

If the required command does not have an associated icon, when it is selected the following window appears:

Page 2181

Select the icon to be associated with the command, then click on this button to validate.

To delete a shortcut icon from a customized toolbar: - Open the Create a new toolbar window - click on the Commands tab - drag the icon from the bar to the list of commands and release it.

Notes:  

Customized toolbars can be docked. For further details, see the Docking parameters page. Each user has his or her own toolbar(s). These are automatically recalled when the user logs on using their user name and password.

Page 2182

Feature bar The feature bar is used to define, measure, build or evaluate the represented features. These functions are also accessible from the Features menu. It is shown below: Define

Build

Measure

The icon located at the top of the bar shows the active status (Define, Measure or Build), and clicking on the icon moves from one status to another.

The bar can be moved or resized:

Page 2183

Features which are grayed out are not accessible. This is the case, for example, for surface point type features, if no CAD file is open. The same applies if no probe is calibrated: the measurement bar is then entirely grayed out.

Note: This bar can be docked:

See also:

Docking parameters.

Page 2184

Status bar The Windows menu is used to choose whether or not to display the status bar. This contains shortcuts to display the windows, as well as information relating to the current Configuration. It is shown below:

In the example above, the following information can be seen from left to right in the status bar: - a tool changer is used, it is assigned the slot PR1, - a stylus changer is used, it is assigned the slot S1, - the user connected to the software is metropass, - the 23-parameter compensations are active in the Setup assistant, - a rotary table is enabled, - the Expansion/shrinking function is active, - the Workpiece temperature compensation function is active and the temperature unit used is degrees Celsius, - the measurement unit used is millimeters, - the angle measurement unit used is decimal degrees, - the 3D view, DRO, Histogram and Results windows are open, - a program is running.

Notes:  

The Program icon appears when the Program window is reduced. In the case of compensation of the machine to be measured, an icon indicates the type of compensation enabled: linear compensation 7-parameter compensation 23-parameter compensation

Page 2185



The rotary table icon varies according to its status: rotary table active rotary table inactive

Page 2186

DRO settings The Windows menu provides access to the DRO settings, used to configure the DRO window. The DRO settings window can also be accessed by double-clicking in the DRO window. The window is shown below:

Mode

There are 4 display modes for the DRO window:



Position

This mode displays the current position of the active probe, in the machine alignment or in the part alignment. This display can be configured in the Position field.

Page 2187

When the software is taking a measurement, the display relates to the feature to be measured:



Results

This mode displays the values of the last feature measured:



Auto

This mode displays the result of the last feature measured (Results mode) or the current positon of the probe (Position mode), when the probe moves further away from the measured feature than the distance entered. This field, available only in Auto mode, is used to configure the distance determining the alternation between Results mode and Position mode.

Example: The CERC1 circle has just been measured. The probe is closer than the configured limit D (from its ball center to the center of the feature). The DRO window is displayed in Results mode.

Page 2188

The probe moves, for example to measure another feature. It is no longer in the sphere with diameter D. The display of the DRO window then changes to Position mode.



Sensor

This mode displays the deflection value of the probe on each of its axes, when using a scanning probe.

Page 2189

When this box is checked, it allows the deflection value of the sensor to be displayed, in the form of a progress bar, when using a scanning probe. The drop-down list to the right of the check box is used to show the value of this deflection according to the axis X, Y, Z or XYZ. The deviation progress bar is as follows, shown here in Position mode:

Note: This feature is above all used for the Auto, Position or Results mode, since it allows the display of the results or the position to be combined with the display of the sensor deviation. In Sensor mode, it is used simply to display this data in a different way.

When this box is checked, it allows the progress bar to be displayed, particularly useful when using manual machines. When measuring a feature, it represents the distance to be covered, from the center of the probe to the center of this feature (which should have been previously defined). The greater the distance to be covered, the longer the green bar and the more intense its color.

Note: This feature is only of use in Position or Auto mode.

Page 2190

Alignment

This field is used to choose to display the coordinates, either in the Machine alignment, or in the Part alignment. In this case, the alignment is the current alignment of the working session.

Resolution

This field is used to choose the resolution of the values displayed, in other words the number of digits after the decimal point. This display only applies for this window. To modify the number of digits of the Results window, and therefore of the working session, see Precision.

Position The following display modes are available from the drop-down list and are used to select the type of coordinates in which to give the position of the probe:

The check boxes are used to select the coordinates to be displayed in the DRO window, among the 3 coordinates systems (X, Y, Z or R, A, I or R, Y, A), and the rotation angle of the rotary table (Rot). For further information on the coordinates systems, see Define and set tolerance for a feature. In order not to display a data item, simply uncheck the corresponding box:

Page 2191

Result

This field can only be accessed in Results and Auto modes. It is used to display either the measured results, or the deviations with regard to the nominal values (the feature must have been defined). The check boxes are used to select the coordinates to be displayed in the DRO window, from X, Y, Z and Dim. In order not to display a coordinate, simply uncheck the corresponding box.

Color

This field is used to modify the text or background color for the DRO window. Click on the corresponding radio button, then select the required color from the palette. A preview area allows you to view the association between the selected text and background colors.

Offset

Check this box to enable the offset. By default, it is the last stored value which will be enabled. Check this box to change the stored value.

Page 2192

The following fields then become accessible and are used to enter the required coordinates. It is also possible to use the button 0 to initialize the offset value, without creating a new alignment. This is used to control one probing position with regard to another.

Note: By then disabling the offset, the coordinates will again be given in the active alignment.

Validates the changes made. Closes the DRO settings window, without taking into account the changes made.

Page 2193

Show-hide windows In the Windows menu, the Show-hide windows option concerns the DRO, Results and 3D view windows.

In program: used to force one or more of these windows to be shown or hidden, without having to open a configuration file.

The window is shown below:

To show a window, simply check the corresponding box. Conversely, to hide a window, simply uncheck the corresponding box. validates the changes made. closes the window without applying any changes made.

In program: When this function is learned in a program, the following line is added:

Page 2194

Arrange windows This function is used to reposition all open windows, so as to make them all visible on the screen. This is particularly useful when the user no longer has access to a window, since it has moved outside the field of the screen.

Page 2195

Docking Parameter Preferences The window operation mode can be chosen using the Docking Parameter Preferences option of the Windows menu. The window is shown below:

This part of the window is used to determine the side on which the action windows are docked. As a result, the status windows will be docked on the opposite side. In the example, the measurement, definition, etc. windows are docked on the left and the Database window is docked on the right. Modifying this parameter means switching the sides on which the action and status windows are docked.

To limit the changes to the size of the graphics view, it is possible to keep null docked windows on the screen. This avoids the need to recalculate the 3D view every time a window is opened or closed. Checking this box, however, allows you to automatically hide null windows. applies the window parameters. closes the window without applying any changes made.

The following table summarizes the operation of the windows in the software:

Temporary

Floating

Docked on the left

Docked on the right

Docked at the top

Always

No

No

No

Docked at the bottom No

Page 2196

Action

Yes

Status

Yes

Display Tools

Yes Yes

Depends on context Depends on context No Yes

Depends on context Depends on context No Yes

No

No

No

No

No Yes

Yes Yes

Note: The GM2 and DMIS program windows act as both action and display windows.

Page 2197

Switch the 3D view from/to Metrolog XG (Silma XG) This function is used to set the 3D view window to floating, in other words to remove it from the software screen, in order to display it in full screen mode. This can be useful in the case of a multi-screen configuration.

Page 2198

? This menu is used to access the online help for the software, to directly address product information or technical requests to Metrologic Group and to obtain detailed information on the software version installed.

Page 2199

Index This function is used to access the content of the online help. The online help window opens on the Contents tab:

The left-hand part of the window contains the chapters, sub-chapters and documentation pages. The right-hand part of the window shows the content of the selected page. A text search can be carried out using the Search tab of the online help window or selecting the Search function from the ? menu of the software.

Page 2200

Search This function is used to search the online help by key-word. The online help window opens on the Search tab:

Enter the word or words to search for in the field or use the drop-down list to display the results of a prior search. Click this button to specify the search conditions. The following menu is then displayed:

AND: Select this condition to search for pages containing all the key-words entered.

Example: Display the pages containing both "archive" and "control". Enter "archive" in the search field, then click

and select the condition AND. Then enter "control".

Page 2201

The search field then appears as follows:

OR: Select this condition to search for pages containing at least one of the words entered.

Example: Display the pages containing either "archive" or "control" or both. Enter "archive" in the search field, then click

and select the condition OR. Then enter "control".

The search field then appears as follows:

NEAR: Select this condition to search for pages containing the entered term near to another term.

Example: Display the pages containing the term "archive" near to the term "control". Enter "archive" in the search field, then click

and select the condition NEAR. Then enter "control".

The search field then appears as follows:

NOT: Select this condition to search for pages containing the entered term without another term.

Example: Display the pages containing the term "archive" without the term "control". Enter "archive" in the search field, then click

and select the condition NOT. Then enter "control".

The search field then appears as follows:

Note: If no search condition is set, the AND condition will be applied by default.

When this box is checked, the search will only be carried out in the results of the previous search. This can be used to fine-tune a search.

Page 2202

When this box is checked, the search will be for terms exactly as they appear in the search field. For example, if the word "control" is entered, pages containing the plural "controls" will be ignored. When this box is checked, the search for terms will only be carried out in page titles.

Click this button to run a search corresponding to the terms entered and the configured conditions. A list of results will then be given. Click this button to display the content of the selected page in the right-hand part of the window. This can also be done by double-clicking on the required page in the list.

Note: When a page is displayed, you can see where it is located in the contents of the online help by clicking on the Contents tab.

Page 2203

Receive all product informations This function is used to sign up online (see Installation) in order to receive regular information on updates.

Page 2204

Report a software problem This function is used to send an e-mail to the Metrologic Group Hotline to report a problem encountered with the software.

Page 2205

About this program This function is used to obtain information about the software: version, serial number, configuration, etc. The following window is then displayed:

Click this button to close the window. Click this button to access the Metrologic Group website. Click this button to send an e-mail to Metrologic Group. Click this button to obtain information on the software version installed (installation directory, initialization files, etc.). The window is then as shown below:

Page 2206

The following information is available: Directories: Access path to the software installation directory. INI files: Access path for the initialization files. These files contain the software parameters. CMM: Type of machine and protocol used. CN: Firmware version number for Metrologic CNCs. On connection to a CMM, the serial number of the controller is also shown. Error mapping: Type of machine compensations selected in the Setup assistant. Graphical engine: Information on the graphical engine used. Options: Software subscription options. Hardware: Parameters of the network board installed.

Page 2207

Specific functions

Page 2208

Possible calibration as a function of configuration Without modelling the head Probe

TP

Straight

Manual or semi-automatic calibration with probing on top Semi-automatic calibration of sphere

Calibration

L

Manual calibration mandatory

Straight

Probing along direction of shaft to be calibrated

Head qualification required

SP80

Semi-automatic ca with probing along of shaft to be calib

Not available

Not available

Requires head qualificaiton using the mandatory positions at least (4 or 5 positions as a function of the head Not available used) with the same ball and, if necessary, by adding at least one position with other balls.

TP

SP25 / SP600

Auto calibration L

SP25 / SP600

With modelling the head Probe

SP80

Straight Manual or semi-automatic calibration with probing on top Semi-automatic calibration of sphere

Semi-automatic ca with probing along of shaft to be calib

Straight

Qualification not required. The first callibration amounts to a quick qualification.

Not available

L

Possibility of automatically calibrating any branch without pre-qualification. The branch to be calibrated is selected from the calibration parameters window.

Not available

Calibration

L

Auto calibration

Page 2209

Continuous head

Page 2210

Overview When using a continuous head, certain rules must be followed to increase measurement accuracy: 

At qualification, it is advisable that at least 5 different positions be calibrated: A= 0° B= 0° A= 0° B= E1° A= 0° B= B2° with B1 different to B2 and both other than 0° A= A1° B= 0° A= A2° B= 0° with A1 different to A2 and both other than 0°

For increased measurement accuracy, it is advisable to use more positions than the 5 previous positions. To interpolate all of the positions in satisfactory manner, the following 9 positions may be used: A= 0° B= 0° A= 90° B= 0° A= 90° B= 120° A= 0° B= 120° A= -90° B= 120° A= -90° B= 0° A= -90° B= -120° A= 0° B= -120° A= 90° B= -120°  

In general, the more calibrated positions there are, the more accurate the qualification and, consequently, the interpolations also. When the measurement to be made with the continuous head is limited to a particular zone, it is advisable to calibrate the position around this zone.

Page 2211

PHS1

Page 2212

Introduction The Renishaw servo positioning head (PHS1) is a two-axis motorized head with continuous 360° servo drive enabling the probe configuration to be positioned at almost any angle. This makes the head ideal for use in restricted spaces and enables stylus to be angled normal to a surface or aligned to the axis of a hole.

The head can carry multiple probing types and very long extensions, making it highly suitable for measurement of large complex parts. Movement and positioning of the head is coordinated directly by the CMM controller, allowing the motion of the head to be synchronized with the motion of the machine’s axes for maximum component accessibility and minimum cycle time. Please carefully read and respect the following instructions to setup and use a PHS1 in the best possible way.

Page 2213

Setup There are different steps to configure the PHS1 with the software.

PHS1 selection in the set up assistant Open the software set up assistant. Select Renishaw PHS1 as shown in the picture below.

Set-up the head orientation in MCS alignment Setup the head orientation according to the machine axis direction.

Page 2214

MCS axis orientation

PHS1 Orientation

Warning: the MCS orientation and the head orientation have to be set according to the PHS1 green LED. The green LED indicates power is being supplied to the PHS1 probe head. The red LEDs are positioned on each face of the over travel cap and indicate when the probe has being triggered.

Page 2215

Software start-up Possible error messages If the configuration is not correct in the setup assistant, the following message will appear on the software startup:

It is possible that an option is not activated on the dongle, in this case, the following message appears:

The reference marks 

Taking reference marks in CNC mode

Page 2216

The PHS1 is also automatically initialized right after the machine is homed. As the machine takes the reference marks, the axis boxes get grayed out. This window is still activated with the axis boxes grayed as long as the PHS1 didn’t taken its reference marks. As soon as the PHS1 is initialized, the dialog box Resetting Scales is closed.

Warning: Each axis has a reference mark to enable its zero position to be set. This zero position is nominally at the mid-travel point of the axis – the absolute position of the mark is within ±1.5º. That is why it is necessary to locate the file of probes you want to work with after any reset of the head scales.



Taking reference marks in manual mode

It’s not possible to take PHS1 reference marks in manual mode.

Page 2217

Probes definition and probes calibration Probes definition The software has two possibilities to define the probe orientation. 

Either double click in the edit box in order to enter the exact value of the angle:



Or use the buttons D+, D-, E+, E-

Then when the angles are chosen, the name of the probe is updated such as follows:

Page 2218

The angle step can be set in XG_CONFIG.ini file : [HEAD_ANGLES] A_STEP=1.000000000 : Increment step for the D angle A_MIN=-180.000000000 : Minimal authorized value for the D angle A_MAX=180.000000000 : Maximal authorized value for the D angle B_STEP=1.000000000 : Increment step for the E angle B_MIN=-180.000000000 : Minimal authorized value for the E angle B_MAX=180.000000000 : Maximal authorized value for the E angle

The head "correction" As the PHS1 is a continuous head, it is necessary to compensate the head for good probe positions accuracy. The accurate compensation of the head requires two steps: Qualify Probe Head and perform the Automatic calibration. Since the head is "corrected", it’s not necessary to calibrate the defined probe because all probe offsets are calculated thanks to the head correction. These probes are "interpolated".

Warning: Important notice to reach the best PHS1 accuracy: 



Before starting calibration, the PHS1 head must be at a stable temperature. From experience, if the cool air pipe as been well connected with the required air flow, a stable temperature is reached 30 to 40 minutes after power on the head. The calibration requires particular attention. A low probing speed needs to be selected for a good calibration accuracy.

The head qualification The head qualification have to be done with the following positions calibrated: D= 0° E= 0° D= 0° E= E1° D= 0° E= E2° with E1 different from E2 and differents from 0° D= D1° E= 0° D= D2° E= 0° with D1 different from D2 and differents from 0° As it can be seen in the Qualify Probe Head window as follows:

Page 2219

For example, positions such as follows can be suggested for the probe head qualification: D= 0° E= 0° D= 0° E= 120° D= 0° E= -120° D= -120° E= 0° D= 120° E= 0°

Warning: When the PHS1 rotates, it takes a few seconds for its servo-control to stabilize. Consequently, it is necessary to wait a little before probing a point. It is ready when the top of the DRO window displays stable angle values (PHS1 D and E angles).

Note: When a head is modeled, a real calibration should be performed in a single position D= 0° E= 0°. The head is then virtually qualified. Automatic calibration is then accessible and should be performed along the 5 positions stated above. It is then recommended to perform a real qualification of the head. Lastly, it is then possible to extrapolate the positions.

The automated calibration The automated calibration is an important step to adjust the head, and then be able to select an interpolated angle position.

Page 2220

Once the head is qualified, select Automated calibration in Probes menu. The standard calibration is accessible. Choose needed positions belong to the ones available with this kind of calibration.

The probes may be interpolated. Thus, a probe for angles D and E, not calibrated beforehand, could be used for measurements, by using positions that are automatically calibrated beforehand Method for interpolating a probe      

Perform a semi-automatic calibration (5 positions) Quality the head (access to automatic calibration window). Check the boxes that will serve for interpolation. Automatically callibrate the checked positions. The greater the number of reference positions, the positions interpolated will be more accurate. Re-qualify the head. Probe interpolation is then possible.

On the diagram, the 5 positions in red are the positions that are calibrated automatically, the 2 positions in blue are interpolated.

Page 2221

But it is also possible to choose the advanced calibration by clicking on window will be displayed:

and then the following

Page 2222

In this window, add to the calibration the needed positions. It is possible to save those position into a txt or ini file in which the parameters will be displayed such as follow:

Warning: As soon as the automated calibration has been done, it is not possible to manually calibrate probes anymore. If you try to do so, the following message will be displayed:

Page 2223

Locate probe file Each time the reference marks are taken (each time the probe head is switched off), the use of an existing probe file requires to locate it. Because in fact, when the probe head takes its zero, the absolute position of the mark is within ±1.5º. To do so, in the following window, select the position wanted and click on the

button.

Note: In this window, there is already a filter on the head angles, in order to see only the positions available for the Locate Probes function.

Activate a probe All probes defined from the keyboard appear with blue color in the window Activate a probe (See next page). This way, the user can make the difference between : - probes used for the head qualification (red color),

Page 2224

- probes calibrated through the automated calibration (white color), - interpolated probes (blue color).

The probes interpolated accuracy will depend on the number of probes calibrated and their positions.

Page 2225

Work with keyboard It’s possible to use a Metrologic keyboard (ME4700 or ME670 for example) to rotate the head and to define a probe.

ME4700 Keyboard 

Rotate the head on ME4700

To rotate the head, push one of the buttons for the rotation angle (A+, B+, A-, B-), A and B correspond respectively to D and E.

The red led of the button is activated. Now, the head can be moved with the left joystick.



Probe definition on ME4700

It is also possible to define a probe with a Metrologic keyboard.

Rotate the PHS1 head to the desired position as explained above, and press probe.

to define the

The led will go out and the left-hand joystick will revert to its normal function.

ME470 console  Modify the rotation speed of angles The rotation speed of angles D and E can be modified by means of the potentiometer used for setting the MMT displacement speed (left joystick).  Interpolate a probe To interpolate a probe, switch to the head mode (head button), then change orientation using buttons A+, B+, A-, B-, A and B corresponding to D and E. Validate by pressing the Via Point button. The probe is then interpolated. The desired angles can also be selected in the probe definiton window, validate, the probe is then interpolated.

Page 2226

ME670 Keyboard 

Rotate the head on ME670

The probe head can be moved with the keyboard’s left-hand joystick.

To do this, the probe head movement mode need to be activated using the key. The LED associated with this key will be lit green. The left-hand joystick therefore allows to move the probe head. The LED will be lit red, if there is a probe head error.



Probe definition on ME670

It is also possible to define a probe with a Metrologic keyboard.

Rotate the PHS1 head to the desired position as explained above, and press

to define the probe.

The LED will go out and the left-hand joystick will revert to its normal function.

Page 2227

Example Let’s say the qualification was made using following positions (the red points on the graphic bellow): D= 0° E= 0° D= 0° E= 90° D= 0° E= - 90° D= - 90° E= 0° D= 90° E= 0° Then the following positions are calibrated (white points on the graphic): D= 45° E= 0° D= 0° E= 45° Now, if the following positions are defined (blue points on the graphic): D= 30° E= 30° D= - 45° E= - 45

The following position * D= 30° E= 30° is interpolated on D from the 2 following positions : * D= 0° E= 0° * D= 45° E= 0° and on E from the 2 following positions :

Page 2228

* D= 0° E= 0° * D= 0° E= 45°

and the position * D= 45° E= - 45° is interpolated on D from the 2 following positions : * D= 0° E= 0° * D= -90° E= 0° and on E from the 2 following positions : * D= 0° E= 0° * D= 0° E= -90°

Warning: The interpolated probe accuracy for the position D= 30°E= 30° is better than for the position D= 45°E= - 45°, because the positions used to do the calculation are closer to the selected position in the first case than in the second. So it is highly recommended to calibrate automatically some positions in the area where the positions to interpolate will be selected.

Page 2229

Error messages All error messages with a number between 800 and 849 are specific to the PHS1.

Example:

Some possible error messages: 800/801 802/803 804/805 806/807 808/809/810/811 814

Tracking error Axis (D or E) Over current on Axis Positioning timeout on Axis Over speed on axis Soft Limits (+ or -) on Axis No air on the probe head.....

Page 2230

Poly-articulated arms and laser systems

Page 2231

One Point Measurement When the software is connected to a laser tracker or a multi-articulated arm, the Circle, Rectangle and Slot feature measurement windows are displayed as shown below:

The fields common to all manual measurement windows are described on the Measure Feature page. There is a specific button for measurement of this type of feature with a laser tracker or multi-articulated arm: This button enables a quick measurement mode that allows a circle to be measured with only one probing point and a rectangle (or a slot) to be measured with only two points on each side of the feature to be measured. When this mode is selected, the measurement window is displayed with the Nbr of Points field grayed out and the Cyl. Probe, Constraints and Edge Probing Assistance options unavailable, as shown below:

Page 2232

The number of probing points will be automatically updated according to the selected projection plane.

The measurement procedure to be followed when this mode is enabled is as follows:    

Open the measurement window and select this probing mode by clicking . Select the desired projection plane. Position the probe (or reflector) in the feature to be measured and start probing. The feature is calculated with the minimum number of probing points.

The following illustration shows this procedure being used with a laser tracker:

Page 2233

Page 2234

Measurement with shaft If the measurement system allows shaft orientation to be recovered, this type of measurement may be performed. No specific shaft orientation is required for measurement, but the shaft must be calibrated to make measurements. In the Probes menu, select Calibrate Cylindrical. The following window is displayed:

Enter shaft diameter and confirm by clicking Calibrate.

Notes: 



When using a Tprobe on a Leica laser tracket connected via Emscon, prior cylindrical probe calibration (internal to the Emscon controller) means the shaft diameter entry procedure does not need to be performed. Orientation and diameter data is then directly retrieved from the laser tracker controller. However, if this specific calibration has not been performed, shaft diameter must be entered to be able to make a measurement. When measuring with a cylindrical probe (shaft), the Cyl. Probe box must be checked in the feature measurement window.

Page 2235

Continuous measurement mode This function is used to set a specific continuous measurement mode when using a laser or arm. The window is shown below:

Used to defined the number of limit points for the continuous measurement of a scan block. To use the standard (basic) continuous measurement mode. Used to initialise probing point measurement as a sphère. This mode requires a radius pin called Joplug:

The center of the sphere is then measured at each scan block measurement on the relevant spherical Joplug.

Example: Measuring a plane from three points. Three spheres are measured by scan block. The three sphere centers are then used to calculate the plane.

Page 2236

Used to enter the maximum form fault tolerated for the sphere calculation.

Used to specify a diameter value for the sphere used.

When measuring in sphere mode, this counter displays the number of points probed to measure each sphere. When the measurement is complete, the counter is reset to zero. These buttons are used to apply the changes made in this window. When Modify is selected, only the line concerned by the change is displayed in the program. When Apply is selected, the two lines above will be displayed. Closes the window without saving any changes made.

In program mode: This function can be used in a program. The following lines are then added:

Page 2237

Measurement in continuous mode Measurement in continuous (contouring) mode This function is valid for geometrical and surface features. Contouring mode measurement may be used with the ball and shaft. To perform continuous measurements: 



For a poly-articulated arm, hold the measurement button depressed (button 1 or 2 for Romer arms, the front button for Faro arms). The delay (wait time) before switchover to continuous meaurement mode may be configured via the Advanced Parameters menu, Config tab, [ARM] section. The variable to be modified is DELAY_SINGLE_CONTINUOUS (default setting: 500 ms). Similarly, second arm button (cancellation or validation in measurement windows) use time may be modified via the variable DELAY_CONT_CANCEL. For a laser tracker, activate continuous measurement mode with the F7 key,

and move the probe while remaining in contact with the workpiece to be measured.

Note: To configure the measurement, select the following function:  

For an arm: CMM > CMM Utilities menu For a laser tracker: CMM > Tracker Parameters menu

Continuous measurement applications 

Automatic validation of point selection (cylindrical point measurement)

Requirements: the points must have been previously defined (i.e. be nominal points). Operating procedure: If several points have been defined, by default the measurements are performed in the order (sequence) in which they are defined.

Note: For surface points, the button allows the surface point nearest to the probe to be measured, thus avoiding longer moves and thus allowing them to be measured in an order other than the order defined. The principle of automatic point measurement validation is: Top View:

a) Trajectory 1: the point is validated b) The zone in which the measurement is validated is cylindrical. Radius is defined by the proximity tolerance (of the surface point), cylinder height is infinite. c) Surface point defined. d) Trajectory 2: the point is not measured, it is outside the surface point proximity tolerance zone (default parameters).

3D view of the validation zone:

Page 2238



Measuring geometrical features in continuous mode

For geometrical features, continuous probing may be performed with either the ball (or reflector):

or with the shaft:

Page 2239

. In this case, check the Cyl. Probe box in the feature measurement window.



Measuring edge points with the shaft in continuous mode

The measurement procedure is as follows:

For this type of measurement, a previously measured feature (a) (surface point or plane, for example) is required as a reference so that the shaft edge type surface point calculation (b) is correctly executed. If the shaft edge type surface point has been defined, validation of this point is performed when the probing trajectory (c) traverses a virtual plane (d) perpendicular to the theoretical edge type surface point.

In program: Use continuous measurement in Teach-in mode. A Scan block (multiple probing operation) program line is added to the program as shown in the example below:

Page 2240

In addition, combinations of single and multiple probing operations may be used (as is the case for "Measure Circle" in the above example). A Scan block line corresponds to continuous probing of an indeterminate number of points (for example, 25 points may be used to learn the process program and 30 when the process program is run).

Page 2241

Section measurement Section measurement without a CAD file Several compensation modes for measured points are available in the measurement window:



Scanning Ball (probe) center By scanning: this method consists in using an alternate probing/measurement step so that the measured points are compensated. The points are calculated by triangulation between the different probing points. The probing points are then compensated and corrected using the plane formed by triangulation:

Page 2242



By ball (probe) center: the measured section will pass through all ball center measured points. The section is therefore not compensated.

Measuring sections in continuous mode Requirements: the section must be defined. Operating procedure: The probing trajectory must traverse the section plane to validate a measurement point. The software conserves the nearest point of the section defined each time probe trajectory traverses the section plane.

a) Cutting plane of the theoretical section. b) Theoretical section. c) Probing trajectory. d) Points sent by the arm. e) Points conserved to calculate the measured section. Notes:  

For section measurement using a Leica Laser Tracker, the operating procedure is identical, but the points are acquired on the cutting plane (section definition plane). If the variable bInterSegPlane in the file XG_USER.ini is 1, when sections defined with no CAD file are measured, the operating procedure is the same, but the calculated points will be ball center

Page 2243

geometrical points determined by intersection of the measurement trajectory with the cutting plane (section definition plane).

Page 2244

Scan points This function measures geometrical points or surface points in continuous mode:

Measuring geometrical points When measuring geometrical points, the points acquired will be points known as ball center, i.e. there will be no correction associated with ball radius applied during measurement.

Measuring surface points The fields specific to this measurement are as follows:

Type Select the type of surface point to be measured from the drop-down list, Surface in this example.

Page 2245

Disable Projection If this box is checked, surface points will not be projected on CAD. In this case the projects can be projected at a later time. To do this, select the Reproject Auto. All Surface Points function from the Features menu.

(Material) Thickness Checking this box allows you to apply a thickness to the surface point. If the surface point to be measured has been previously defined with a thickness, the field allowing you to specify thickness will be automatically completed in the measurement window.

Search Distance used to modify the Search Distance that will be applied to the measured surface point.

Notes:  

With this type of measurement, whether for geometrical points or for surface points, the calculation will not be performed until after the OK button in the measurement window has been clicked. When measuring surface points it may happen that some points are not projected during the calculation. If this is the case, the following message will be displayed:

In program mode: When this function is learned in a program, the following lines are added:

The benefit is not having a constraint on the number of points to be measured.

Page 2246

Determining part orientation This function allows part orientation compensation mode to be selected when probing features. This function is accessed via the CMM menu, Probe radius compensation option. The compensation mode dialog box is then displayed:

With a Faro arm

With a Leica laser

Different operating modes are then available:

Shaft orientation For arms, this operating mode corresponds to the operating mode used in previous versions of the software, that is to say the information given by the last axis which gives the probing direction. For laser trackers, it corresponds to a shaft orientation, if the laser can supply one (T-Probe), or to laser beam orientation, as appropriate.

$ point For arms, a $ point can be learned (as is the case for laser trackers), i.e. a point selected by pressing the F5 key defining probing orientation. This point must be selected before starting to measure a feature. The $ point saved then corresponds to the ball center position of the probe used. For laser trackers, this is standard $ point operating mode. $ point

Poly-articulated arms Leica Laser Tracker Faro Laser Tracker F5 F3 F2

Api Laser Tracker F2

Notes:  

It is possible to show $ points in the 3D View, through the 3D View menu > Manual probing Assistance. A $ symbol is displayed while acquiring this point. The time this symbol is displayed can be set by changing the value of the following variable in: Preferences > Advanced Parameters, User tab iDollarPointVisuTime (default value is 600).

Page 2247

Retract point The probing point is validated when the ball or reflector moves to more than X mm from the point to be measured.

Button action (Faro arms only) This mode allows compensation direction to be defined by pressing the measurement validation button once the measure is done (the red button on Faro Platinum arms).

Automatic (Leica laser trackers only) This mode allows ball radius compensation mode to be determined according to the reflector used. If a T-probe is selected, compensation mode is Shaft orientation. Otherwise, $ point mode is enabled.

Click this button to validate the parameters entered and leave the window. Click on this button to close the window. Your changes will not be saved.

Note: For the latter two modes, if the protocol does not allow them to be used, they will not be

Page 2248

displayed in the probing compensation orientation configuration dialog box.

A change in the mode used to determine part orientation can be saved in a program:

The mode selected to determine part orientation is displayed in the software status bar by the following icons: Shaft orientation $ point Retract point Button action

Page 2249

Manual Probing Assistance Manual probing assistance is used to guide the user with respect to the feature to be inspected. If an arm or laser tracker is connected, the window is displayed as shown below:

The functions that can also be accessed on a manual CMM are described on the Manual Probing Assistance page.

When an arm or laser tracker is connected, the manual probing assistance page includes an additional checkbox: If this box is checked (selected), the $ points configured via the Probe radius compensation window will be displayed in the 3D View.

Example: surface points must be measured on the highlighted plane. Before the measurement, an $ point is inserted allowing probing orientation to be specified.

Page 2250

Note: The size of the $ point marker and the size of the $ may be configured via the menu 3D View > Display Options > View.

This box appears only when a photogrammetry system is used. When this box is checked and a measurement or acquisition window is opened, the measured volume is displayed in the 3D View. In red: the probe is not recognized.

In green: the probe is recognised

Page 2251

Page 2252

Build / Inspect This function allows real-time display of the distance between the probe and: - a list of features (geometrical points, surface points, 2D features, axial features) and/or - a list of CAD entities (points, curves and surfaces). Information for this function, in particular configuration information, can be accessed via the CMM > Build / Inspect menu, and is displayed in the following window:

Once all the parameter settings have been entered, additional information is displayed when this function is launched: - The results are shown in the display window:

Page 2253

, - In the software 3D View:

Note: This function is used as a general "on the fly" measurement window. Depending on the type of feature or CAD entity that is active, a geometrical or surface point measurement window is automatically activated.

Page 2254

Settings

All Build / Inspect function parameters are located in 3 tabs: Measurement, Options and Scene. The following buttons are available in the common part of these two tabs: - used to start Build / Inspect. - used to stop Build / Inspect. - closes the window.

Measurement tab When this tab is selected, the dialog box is displayed as shown below:

Page 2255

used to specify measurement mode: Build or Inspect.

used to select (for a comparison with respect to surfaces) whether the solutions will only be offered when the probe is over a surface (in this case, surface point measurement), or close to a surface (in this case, edge type surface point measurement).

used to select whether or not the values displayed in the DRO window include probe radius compensation. If Yes is selected, the values displayed in the window include probe radius compensation. If No is selected, the values displayed in the window do not include probe radius compensation. If Automatic is selected, the values displayed in the DRO window only include probe radius compensation if the entities to be processed are surfaces or curves.

used to select display mode for the help arrows displayed in the 3D View during the Build or Inspect procedure, i.e. a single arrow symbolizing the minimum distance between the probe and entity to be processed, or a trihedron showing the distances in the current coordinate system.

- used to define a feature name prefix, family name and default thickness. Notes: 







When a feature is not defined, its name and/or its family can be changed in the current measurement window. The new parameters are then taken into account in the default parameters of the Build / Inspect window. For the definition of a geometrical point linked with a feature (circle, line, etc.), its name is composed of the prefix followed by "_", then the name of the feature it is linked with. Example: for a circle feature named CIRC1, the geometrical point representing the center of the circle will be named _CIRC1. If the feature measured during the Build & Inspect operation requires a geometrical point or surface point to be created, the family name for this new feature will then be this default family name. If the feature already exists, the default family name will not be assigned to it. In similar manner to family name, the default thickness will only be assigned if the measured (actual) feature is a new feature. Otherwise, the thickness value remains unchanged.

allows selection between the current alignment and the nominal alignment: 

Current: the results are expressed in the active alignment.

Page 2256



Nominal: the results are expressed in the alignment defining the feature under construction / inspection, or the CAD alignment if the object under construction / inspection is a CAD entity. When the feature is not defined in a particular alignment, the results are expressed in the CMM alignment.

used to display the following window. In this window the user can select the different probing help parameters:

Option When this tab is selected, the dialog box is displayed as shown below:

Page 2257

Geometrical point The box of the Probe Center column may be checked or unchecked. If it is checked, the feature is measured at the probe center, otherwise the correction is made based on the probe radius. Surface point and Edge point The box of the Projection column may be checked or unchecked. If it is checked, the surface points are projected. Otherwise, the Probe Center box is automatically checked, and the measurement is then taken at the probe center. 3D curve point If the box of the Projection column is checked, the 3D curve type surface points are projected. Furthermore, the Probe Center box becomes accessible: - if it is checked, the measurement is made at the probe center. The measurement is then of the 3D curve without probe compensation type. - if it is unchecked, the compensation applied is that of the probe radius. The measurement is then of the 3D curve type. If the box of the Projection column is unchecked, the Probe Center box is automatically checked, and the measurement is taken at the probe center. The measurement is then of the 3D curve without probe compensation type.

Page 2258

Scene When this tab is selected, the dialog box is displayed as shown below:

A list of the entities to be processed can then be added. An entity may be a point, curve or surface CAD entity or a geometrical feature equivalent to a point. used to add geometrical entities to the list. Clicking this icon opens the Feature Database in selection mode to allow the desired features to be added to the scene:

Page 2259

used to add CAD entities to the list. Clicking this icon opens the CAD Database in selection mode and expands the CAD tree structure as shown below. The desired CAD entities can then be added to the scene, either by clicking the CAD entity, or from the CAD Database. The scene is then displayed as shown below:

Page 2260

Notes:  

A combination of geometrical entities and CAD entities can be used in a scene. When a work session is saved, the entities constituting the scene are also saved.

used to select entity processing mode. Insequence processing mode means that the entities are measured in the order shown. Nearest processing mode means that the entity nearest to the probe is measured (minimum distance between the probe and entities listed). Nearest mode is the most commonly used mode. this button is only active if Insequence mode is selected and is used to force transition to the following entity.

used to modify the order of scene entities (useful when Insequence processing mode is selected).

Page 2261

- if this checkbox is checked, this means that the comparison will be made with the envelope (shape) of the axial feature rather than its axis. Notes:  In the case of a comparison with the shape of an axial feature, a CAD feature representing the shape of the feature will be created in a new CAD model of which the key will be "B&I"

used to delete selected entities from the list.

Page 2262

Measurement and display rules 

Measurement dialog boxes

A measurement dialog box is automatically displayed when a CAD entity or geometrical feature is active. This dialog box is displayed whatever the mode (Build or Inspect). The dialog box displayed depends on the type of feature that is active (surface point measurement for a CAD entity and geometrical point measurement for a geometrical feature). For example, when a circle is one of the scene features to be processed, when the probe is near the circle, a geometrical point with the same coordinates as the circle is automatically defined and the comparison is made with respect to this point.

The is then displayed as follows:

feature is created from

and the measurement dialog box

Page 2263

When the feature selected in the Scene is an axial feature, the Build / Inspect feature behaves as follows: The function is used to express the deviation of a hole position, for example. The hole is modeled in the form of an axial feature (this axial feature is assumed to be parallel to one of the axes of the active coordinate system). When the Build / inspect procedure is started and the reflector is located near the axis of the feature, a geometrical point is partially defined (as, in this case, only two coordinates are used to analyze the deviations), and the comparison is made with respect to this point.

Notes: 

When the feature selected in the Scene is an axial feature, the Build / Inspect feature behaves as follows: Feature axis

Parallel to the axes

Not parallel to the axes



Axial mode

Envelope (shape) mode

Feature axis is used. No CAD object is created. A geometrical point is created

A surface-type CAD object representing the feature envelope (shape) is created. A surface-type surface point is then created

A curve-type CAD object representing the feature axis is created. A curve-type surface point is then created

A surface-type CAD object representing the feature envelope is created. A curve-type surface point is then created

If the list of features to be compared contains at least one feature with its axis not parallel to one of the alignment axes, and if the axes of axial feature are being compared and not their envelopes, then

Page 2264



all the axial features will be considered in this way. As a result, a CAD object representing a feature axis will be created for each of the features. If a feature axis parallel to the alignment axes is used (to express the position deviation of a hole, for example) when the Build/Inspect procedure is launched and the reflector is located close to the feature axis, a geometrical point is then partially defined (as, in this case, only two coordinates are needed to analyze the deviations), and thela comparison is made with respect to this point.



DRO window

During the Build / inspect procedure, it displays the deviation between the probe ball and the nominal feature (geometrical point or CAD entity). The deviation components are expressed in the current alignment. The five lines displayed are: - Current CAD entity (key + reference) or feature name. - Deviation according to X. - Deviation according to Y. - Deviation according to Z. - Deviation in true magnitude.

The deviation components are signed according to the current measurement mode (configured in the parameters): - Build mode: nominal point – probe position. - Inspect mode: probe position - nominal point. Deviation includes probe ball radius but does not depend on the part orientation determined from the parameter configuration (color coding depends on part orientation). Color coding shows whether the probe is within the tolerance zone (of the defined feature): Red = out of tolerance on the positive side of the CAD entity, Green = within tolerance, Blue = out of tolerance on the negative side of the CAD entity.

Page 2265

Note: When the user measures a point, their name is displayed in the upper part of the DRO window as follows: . If the user decides to measure the same point again, two symbols are displayed on each side of the name to inform the user of this.



3D View

During the Build / inspect procedure, this also allows you to view the deviations between probe position and the Scene features.

There are then two possible cases, depending on the options selected in

- If is selected, the 3D View displays a link between the probe and the nominal point along with a numerical value corresponding to the 3D distance. Linker color depends on the probe position with respect to the tolerances. Red = at least one X, Y or Z component out of tolerance and probe on the positive side of the CAD entity, Green = the three X, Y and Z components are within the tolerances, Blue = at least one X, Y or Z component out of tolerance and probe on the negative side of the CAD entity. The linker has an arrow termination.

Page 2266

In Build mode it points from the probe to the nominal entity, and in Inspect mode it points from the nominal entity to the probe. Arrow size depends on marker size, whereas value size depends on feature reference size.

- If is selected, the 3D View displays a trihedron showing the deviations in the current coordinate system. The color of these lines depends on probe position with respect to the tolerances. Red = the X, Y or Z component is out of tolerance and the probe is located on the positive side of the CAD entity, Green = the X, Y or Z component is within the tolerances, Blue = the X, Y or Z component is out of tolerance and the probe is located on the negative side of the CAD entity.

Page 2267

The size of this arrow and the size of the value depend on the size of the markers.

Page 2268

Laser systems

Page 2269

Laser tracker functions When the software is connected to a laser tracker, the various specific functions are available in: 

the CMM menu, that includes a number of specific tracker functions, displayed as follows:



the Tracker Parameters dialog box (accessed via the CMM menu):

Page 2270



The Tracker Status Bar (accessed via the Windows menu):



The Tracker Camera window (only available with a Leica laser tracker), also accessed via the Windows menu:

Page 2271

Note: 

The Leica tracker may be manually moved using the

key + keyboard arrow keys.



In the case of tracker lasers, when a surface or geometric point is defined (or measured), it is possible to automatically measure, via the measurement window, via the context menu of the Feature Database or via the button . The automatic measurement window then opens and is automatically validated, without requiring any external action.

Page 2272

CMM menu

When the software is connected to a laser tracker, the CMM menu is displayed as follows:

Tracker Parameters This function is used to open the following laser tracker configuration window:

Page 2273

This allows tracker parameters to be entered in the different tabs: for measurement settings (measurement time, RMS tolerance, etc.) for reset points (create, modify, etc.) for sensor configuration (search parameters, ADM parameters, etc.) for environmental parameters (temperature, pressure, etc.) for probe information (reflectors, stylus assemblies, etc.) for miscellaneous tracker information (IP address, tracker type, etc.).

Advanced Functions This function (only available with the Faro laser tracker interface) opens the advanced functions window.

Initialize

Page 2274

This function starts the laser tracker initialization procedure. This procedure is automatically launched when you first connect to to the laser tracker, once the tracker warmup period is complete. However, this procedure may be requested by the user after changing tracker position (station), for example.

Go Birdbath This function is used to return the laser tracker to the "Home" position in order to change reflector or to work using laser tracker interferometry.

Go to position 0 6DoF This function (only available with the Leica laser tracker interface) is used to return the laser tracker to the zero position for the T-Probe in order to use it as active probe in the software.

Move to Active Feature This function points the laser beam towards the active feature. When this feature is defined and measured, the beam is pointed towards the defined part of the feature.

In program mode: When this command is learnt in a program, the following line is added:

Find Reflector This function is used to launch the reflector search procedure when the laser beam is pointing near a reflector. The search parameters used are the parameters entered in the Tracker Parameters dialog box.

Switch to Face 2 / Switch to Face 1 This function is used to switch the laser tracker from face 1 (or front) to face 2 (or back) position by rotating the head 180° in order to make measurements in both positions and to compare the results - that should be the same.

Switch to Continuous T-Probe Mode / Switch to Stationary T-Probe Mode This function is used to switch the T-Probe from stationary mode to continuous mode and vice versa. - When stationary mode is enabled, pressing one of the T-Probe buttons triggers measurement of a point. - When continuous mode is enabled, pressing one of the T-Probe buttons triggers measurement of a group of points (according to the measurement step selected in the Tracker Parameters window) and pressing the button again stops the measurement. (This function is only available with the Leica laser tracker interface).

Note: While the Continuous T-Probe Mode is active, opening an Aligning on 6 Surface Points, Aligning Model 3-2-1 or Aligning One Point creation window will disable this mode to return to its initial

Page 2275

state on closing these dialogs.

In program: When this function is learned into a program, the following line can be edited by double-clicking on it. The following window appears, allowing to select the desired measurement mode:

Activate / Unactivate stable probing This option is used to switch measurement mode to "stable probing" (when features are measured with this mode enabled, the parameters entered in the Tracker Parameters window will be applied). This function is accessible for any type of Laser Tracker, in teach-in and automatic program mode.

Note: Continuous measurement can be used simultaneously with stable probing. For this purpose, apply the following method: Enable stable probing. Switch to continuous measurement mode: the counter is displayed yellow and no point is taken. Move the reflector to the desired location and stabilize the position. Continuous measurement starts. Maintain continuous measurement until the position of the reflector re-stabilizes. Start continuous measurement until the position of the reflector re-stabilizes. Continuous measurement is then paused. Move the reflector to the second desired location and stabilize the position. Continuous measurement restarts. Continue continuous measurement in the same scan block as before. 

Take $ point This function acquires a $ point that is used when measuring for the probe radius calculation.

Measure Stationary Point This function is used to trigger measurement of a point in stationary mode.

Start Continuous Measurement/ Stop Continuous Measurement Start Continuous Measurement: used to start measurement in continuous mode in order to acknowledge measurement of a group of points (according to the measurement step selected in the Tracker Parameters window). Stop Continuous Measurement: used to stop this measurement.

Page 2276

Note: Continuous measurement can be used simultaneously with stable probing.

Switch Laser On / Switch Laser Off Switch Laser Off: used to switch the laser beam off (only available with the Leica laser tracker interface). When this function is used, the following message is displayed:

Switch Laser On: used to switch the laser beam on (only available with the Leica laser tracker interface). When this function is used, the following message is displayed:

Release Motors This function (only available with the Leica laser tracker interface) is used to switch off the tracker servo motors. This then allows a reflector to be manually selected (if the system has no display camera). The motors cannot be manually reactivated. They are automatically reactivated at the next movement of the laser tracker.

Tracker Level Measure Gravity Plane: used to launch a plane measurement procedure that allows the following measurements to be linked with gravity. When this function is selected, the following message is displayed:

Page 2277

Note: The procedure described below is for the Leica laser tracker. Depending on the laser tracker to which the software is connected, some steps may not appear.

Clicking the Start button moves the Tracker to its process initialization position and the following window is then displayed:

Once the level is in position, the operator can click the Next button. The laser tracker then performs a gravity plane measurement procedure in several positions. The following window is displayed while the measurement is being made.

Page 2278

When the measurement is complete, the following window is displayed:

When the level is in position, click Next to display the last step in the Gravity Plane Measurement Wizard:

When this message is confirmed, the procedure is complete and monitoring enabled.

Notes: 

For Leica and API lasers: the calculated gravity plane is reinjected into the software. A plane is created in the Feature Database. This plane can act as a reference for a geometrical alignment.

Page 2279



For the API III laser: the laser compensates internally and returns the corrected values to the software. This plane is not displayed in the Feature Database.

If a problem occurs during this procedure, the Gravity Plane Measurement Wizard closes and a message of the following type may be displayed:

The procedure must then be repeated from the start. A procedure may fail due to, for example, laser tracker instability during the measurement or an incorrect connection of the level. Reset Tracker Level: allows the current level values to be used as new reference values for monitoring. Level Monitoring: allows monitoring of the values reported by the level to be enabled/disabled.

Probings Radius Compensation Positioning Expansion/Shrinking Activate Probing Realignment Workpiece temperature compensation Build / Inspect Station Management

Notes: 

These functions may be displayed in a customized toolbar for faster access to frequently used options. In this case, the tool bar can be displayed as follows with shortcuts to the Tracker Parameters, Initialize, Birdbath, Find Reflector and Measure Stationary Point functions:



Some of these functions (and some other functions) are not available in the CMM menu and can be used via a corresponding keyboard shortcut.

Page 2280

The following table summarizes these functions and the corresponding keyboard shortcuts, according to the laser tracker used: Leica Laser Tracker F3

Faro Laser Tracker F2

Api Laser Tracker F2

Measure Stationary Point.

F2

F3

F3

Create the RP0 reset point.

F9

F4

F4

Delete the last point measured.

F10

F5

F5

Find Reflector.

F6

F6

F6

Functions "$" point giving probing direction.

Start Continuous Measurement. Stop Continuous Measurement. Cancel the current command.

F7

F7

F7

F11

F8

F8

Go Birdbath.

F8

F9

F9

Go to the RP0 reset point

F4

F10

F10

Advanced functions.

F5

F11

F11

In program: When some of these functions are learned into a program, the following lines are added :

Page 2281

Tracker Parameters

This window is accessed via the CMM menu:

. The laser tracker parameters can then be entered in the following different tabs: for measurement settings for reset points for sensor configuration for environmental parameters for probe information for miscellaneous tracker information

Parameter changes are applied by clicking in another edit zone, changing tabs, or closing the window.

Page 2282

In addition, some values must be between two maximum and minimum values (corresponding to the laser tracker characteristics). If an incorrect value is entered, an error message of the following type is displayed:

The value must then be modified.

Measurement Settings The following dialog box is displayed:

corresponds to measurement sampling time at point acquisition. corresponds to the tolerance value applied to display the RMS value in the

Page 2283

laser tracker status bar: -

on a green background (within tolerance)

-

on a red background (out of tolerance).

The Validation drop-down list allows the user to select: - To accept all measured points (even points out of RMS tolerance). - To accept only the measured points for which the RMS value is within tolerance. - To display the following warning message, if a measurement is out of RMS tolerance. In this case, the user can accept the measurement or refuse it and repeat the procedure:

used to enter the parameters to be applied in Stable probing mode. The measurement procedure when this probing mode is enabled is as follows:    

The tracker is locked in a reflector and the operator opens a feature measurement window. The operator moves the reflector by a distance greater than the spatial tolerance and positions it at the location where he wants to make the measurement. If the reflector remains stable for a time greater than the temporal tolerance, point measurement is automatically triggered. The operator then repeats this procedure as many times as required.

The following illustration shows this procedure being used:

Page 2284

used to enter the parameters to be applied for continuous measurement and to choose between Distance and Time mode. If Distance is selected, the operator can enter a Spatial Step in mm. If Time is selected, the Time Step between two measurement points is expressed in ms:

Note: When using a Leica laser, a continuous measurement parameter is added: Grid type. The window is then displayed as shown below:

Page 2285

This mode is used to superimpose a grid over the CAD. The start of the grid is configured along the axes of the active alignment. A point is measured at each crossing of an axis of the grid.

Used to select the grid type.

Used to select the grid pitch.

Important note: The grid is not displayed in 3D View.

Reset Points The following dialog box is displayed:

Page 2286

It allows reset points to be created, modified, activated and deleted. These points are used if the laser beam is cut off and allow the laser tracker to point to pre-stored target positions.

The top part of the window displays a list of existing reset points.

The coordinates of the selected point are displayed in the lower part of the window.

- used to create a new reset point. This function is only available is the laser tracker is pointing at a reflector (ready status:

)

Page 2287

- used to modify the coordinates of the selected reset point. This function is only available is the laser tracker is pointing at a reflector (ready status:

)

- used to send the laser to point at the selected reset point.

- used to delete the selected reset point.

The Auto Reset drop-down list allows the user to select a type of behavior if the laser beam is cut off: - Home allows the laser tracker to be returned to the home position when the laser beam is cut off. - Selected allows, at cutoff , the laser tracker to be automatically sent to point at the previously selected reset point. - Nearest allows the laser tracker to be automatically sent to point at the reset point nearest to the position in which the reflector was located at cutoff. - Disabled means no laser tracker movement command is sent and the tracker remains in the position in which it was located when the laser beam was cut off. used to set a timer that will be applied before the action selected from the drop-down list is performed.

Sensor configuration The following dialog box is displayed:

Page 2288

This window includes the Search Parameters, ADM Parameters, and the return home procedure. - The Search Parameters are: corresponds to the approximate distance between the laser tracker and the reflector when a search is performed (used to retrieve laser beam ADM). corresponds to the maximum radius value used for the search. If the target is not found when this value is reached, the search stops. corresponds to the maximum time used for the search. If the target is not found when this value is reached, the search stops.

- The ADM Parameters (only available with the Leica laser tracker interface) used after a successful search are: ,

and

.

When the measurement environment does not allow target stability within the desired tolerance to be obtained (according to the number and time of tests configured), the laser tracker does not switch to ready status (

).

Page 2289

- The return home procedure can be accessed via the Home drop-down list. This avoids entering the mechanical stops of the laser tracker when the user takes the reflector to move it from home.

Environmental Parameters (these parameters are only available with the Leica laser tracker interface). The following dialog box is displayed:

When measurements are made with a laser system, this automatically adjusts (compensates) the values returned according to the measurement environment, i.e. according to the Temperature, Pressure and Humidity values, in which the system is operating.

Note: If no weather station is active, this window opens when the software is started, with the following additional box: This box may display or not display this window each time the software is opened.

Page 2290

The user can manually enter these values in the fields. When this box is checked, these values are automatically entered by the weather station and the fields are displayed grayed out (shaded):

If the weather station is not detected (not connected or failed, for example), the following message is displayed:

This box is automatically deselected and the Temperature, Pressure and Humidity fields are available.

The Laser Temperature Range drop-down list is used to select one of three operating ranges (an operating range should normally correspond to the temperature during measurement). When the user modifies the operating range, the following message is displayed, to inform the user that the laser tracker needs a certain warmup time before becoming operational again in the selected temperature range:

Probe Information (This tab is only available with the Leica laser tracker interface). The following dialog box is displayed:

Page 2291

Reflector information supplied by the laser controller.

Page 2292

but also for accessories that may be used for measurement. When a reflector is activated as active probe in the software, the information in this window is refreshed and the selected reflector is highlighted. The other reflectors are not highlighted.

The same principle applies when the T-Probe is the active probe, the information displayed in the window is refreshed as follows:

Page 2293

Miscellaneous tracker information This information is displayed in the following window:

Page 2294

Laser tracker IP address, type and serial number are shown, along with fields to enter the tolerances to be applied for level monitoring:

Other additional information may be displayed, depending on the type of laser tracker connected.

Page 2295

Tracker status bar The Tracker Status Bar is accessed via the Windows menu and is displayed as follows (example):

This status bar allows real-time monitoring of all changes in the status of the laser tracker connected to the software and displays the various parameters in the software's current unit setting. The status bar is divided into several fields corresponding to the different types of laser tracker information. The user can hide or show certain of these fields via the following pop-up menu, accessed by right-clicking the status bar:

Status This allows current laser tracker status to be displayed, this may be: Status displayed when the laser beam has been switched off (only available with the Leica laser tracker interface). Status displayed at initial laser tracker connection if the tracker is not ready, or after switching it back on. Status displayed during the laser tracker initialization phase. Status displayed when the software connects to the laser tracker and the tracker is already initialized. Status displayed when the laser tracker is ready for measurement. Status displayed when the laser is correctly secured to the base. Status displayed when the laser tracker is not ready to measure (laser tracker pointing outside a reflector, for example). Status displayed during measurement (in stationary and continuous mode). Status displayed when the T-Probe is the active probe but measurement cannot be performed (not enough LEDs visible, for example) (only available with the Leica tracker interface). Status displayed during the reflector search phase. Status displayed when the software receives no information from the laser tracker (laser tracker not connected, for example). indicates to the user whether the Tracker is at Face 1 or Face 2.

Page 2296

Level This allows current level status to be displayed, this may be: Status displayed when the level has not yet been used or detected, for example. Status displayed when level value has been stored but the user has decided not to enable monitoring. Status displayed when monitoring is enabled but laser status is other than or (in continuous measurement mode, for example). Status displayed when the values returned by the level are within the tolerances set in the Tracker Parameters window Status displayed when the values returned by the level are outside the tolerances set in the Tracker Parameters window.

RMS This field displays the RMS value corresponding to the last measurement made. The value is displayed in the current units selected by the user (millimeters or inches). the green background indicates that the value displayed is less than the tolerance specified in the Tracker Parameters window. the red background indicates that the value displayed is greater than the tolerance specified in the Tracker Parameters window.

Note: If the user is measuring in continuous mode, the field displays no value and the background is gray as there is no RMS check in continuous measurement mode. RMS (Root Mean Square) calculation When a point is measured, N points are measured in a time T (Measurement Time). The mean of the coordinates of all the points measured gives the coordinates of the measured point, P.

With N=4 The RMS deviation is calculated as follows: RMS =

Meteo (weather) This field displays the environmental parameters, temperature, pressure and humidity, as shown below:

Page 2297

. These parameters are displayed in the units currently selected by the user. In the following example, the user has selected Inches of mercury as the unit of pressure in the Preferences menu:

The icon displayed to the left of the field has two states:

Meteo (weather) data entered manually.

Meteo (weather) data from the meteo station.

Note: Some laser trackers allow data to be entered either manually or automatically (Leica laser tracker). Other trackers have a built-in weather station (Faro laser tracker). Certain laser trackers do not give pressure information (API laser tracker). In this case, the information displayed may vary from one laser tracker to another.

Active probe This field, only available with the Leica laser tracker interface, is used to display information on the measurement and the active probe and its characteristics, for example:

Display of active measurement type for a measurement with a reflector.

or with a T-Probe.

Display with T-Probe of active measurement mode in stationary mode.

or in continuous mode. Display of active probe characteristics in the current units in use in the software for a reflector, for example.

or for an active T-Probe. This information corresponds to that displayed in the Tracker Parameters window, and is refreshed at each change-over (of probe or measurement mode).

Page 2298

Overview Camera

The Overview Camera window (only available with a Leica laser tracker) is accessed via the Windows menu. The window is shown below:

. The window may be resized. Clicking window to be enabled:

allows video mode and the different functions available in the

.

Page 2299

These functions are:

Brightness and contrast adjustment by sliding cursors.

Laser tracker movement control with a joystick. Drag to move the laser tracker in the desired direction. The larger the movement, the faster the speed of travel. Hold the Shift key on the keyboard down for slower laser tracker movement.

used to click directly in the video window in order to: - Position the laser tracker at the location selected by clicking in the video window. - Launch a reflector search at the location selected by clicking. - Make a measurement. Click to search for a target, then to automatically trigger a measurement (this can only be done if a measurement window has been previously opened, otherwise the measurement will fail). Closes the window automatically as soon as the laser is ready again

.

Notes:  

When an action such as Search or Measure is selected, video mode is automatically cancelled when you click to switch back to laser mode. If the laser tracker is not equipped for video, the motors can be switched off to perform a manual target search. The laser tracker can also be moved by holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard (pressing Ctrl + the Space bar stops the move).

Page 2300

Detail Feature This function is used to display the details of the current feature in the 3D View. It may be accessed: - Via the menu 3D View > Detail Feature.

-

By clicking this icon in the Results window.

When this function is selected, the current feature is displayed alone in the view to allow it to be seen in greater detail. The Histogram window also opens. When the working session was created with a connection to a Leica laser tracker and the variable Use_Extended_Infos=1 (Advanced Parameters, DME tab, [Tracker] section), this window displays the following additional information: - The reflector used for measurement, - Total RMS (except in scanning mode), - Temperature, - Pressure, - Humidity, - The date and time each point was measured.

Example 1: Histogram with detailed view of a point

Page 2301

Example 2: Histogram with detailed view of an ellipse

Page 2302

Example 3: Histogram with detailed view of a plane measured in scanning mode: in this case, the RMS value is not calculated

Page 2303

Note: This data may be exported.

Page 2304

Multi-stations The multi-station procedure allows all the measurements made on the different stations to be combined in a common coordinate system:

To do this, the different stations must be managed in the following window, accessed via the menu CMM > Station Management:

Page 2305

Station orientation must also be calculated in the following window, accessed via the menu Alignment > Station Orientation:

Page 2306

.

The calculation then matches the measurements made on the different stations in order to express them in the same reference system, by using measurement information for common points measured on at least two different stations.

Page 2307

Station Management

This function is used to manage (create, modify, activate, delete) the different stations used in a software work session. When this function is selected, via the menu CMM > Station Management, the following window is displayed:

Note: When a new work session is opened, the software creates and activates a default station.

The following operations may be performed in this window: used to add a station to the list of existing stations. The following window is then displayed:

By default, the software offers to name the station with the same name as the previous station incremented by one. Comments on the station created may be added. The station may be automatically activated at creation by checking the

box.

If this box is checked, the following message is displayed when the station is activated to inform the user that

Page 2308

initialization is recommended after moving the laser tracker:

Note: The DisplayWarningInit variable can be modified in the [StationOrientation] section of the XG_USER.ini file. This variable (default value 1) determines whether or not a tracker initialization warning message is displayed when a station is activated (if the variable is set to 1, the message is displayed; if set to 0, the message is not displayed).

used to modify a station. In this case, the following window is displayed, allowing a station to be renamed and any comments to be modified:

Note: A station that has been re-orientated cannot be renamed. It you attempt to do this, the following message is displayed:

used to activate a station. To do this, select a station from the list of available stations and click the button. The tracker initialization warning message or an error message may be displayed (a previously used station cannot be activated).

Page 2309

Note: A station may also be activated by double-clicking the station selection line.

used to delete the selected station. A confirmation message is then displayed. This may be followed by an error message if the user attempts to delete a previously used station or the active station (this is not allowed):

.

used to display or hide stations orientated in the software 3D View. The graphical representation of such stations may be of two types, according to the Tracker3D parameter in the [StationOrientation] section of the XG_USER.ini file. If Tracker3D = 0 (default value), the stations are symbolized by a blue wireframe representation:

Page 2310

If Tracker3D = 1, the stations are represented by an assembly of cylinders and cones:

Note: 

The stations may be in different states, as shown in the following table:

Page 2311

Shows the status of a station that has been created but not yet used, and thus not orientated. Shows the status of the station used (at least one feature measurement has been made on the station). Shows the status of a used and locked station (measurements have been made on this station, and the user has moved to the following station). Shows the status of a used and orientated station (measurements have been made on this station, these measurements have been used for orientation of the stations, and this station is still the current station). Shows the status of a used, locked and orientated station (measurements have been made on this station, these measurements have been used for orientation of the stations, and the user has moved to the following station).



When a line corresponding to a station is selected, right-clicking displays a pop-up menu containing the main functions available in the Station Management window.



When the user moves the mouse cursor in the Station Management window, if the user stops on a station, a tooltip (bubble help) is displayed showing station information (name, comments, translation and rotation position with respect to the reference alignment).



The create, modify and delete station functions can be saved in a program (creation and modification are displayed in the Add Station command line).

Page 2312

Station Orientation

This function, accessed via the menu Alignment > Station Orientation, is used to: - Calculate station orientation with respect to the other stations - Express the positions of the different stations with respect to the reference alignment (to the reference station) - Move all features and alignments, created on the different stations that have been orientated, to match the stations with which they are linked once the calculation has been validated. All measurements performed after orientation calculation will be directly converted to and expressed in the reference alignment.

The Station Orientation window is shown below:

The top part of the window is used to select the features (geometrical points measured in ball center mode) to be used for the calculation. The features allowing the calculation to be performed must be assimilated to points (geometrical points measured at ball center, circle, spheres).

Page 2313

Note: There are two algorithms allowing station orientation to be calculated:  

Leica bundle: available for users possessing the Metrolog XG for Leica option. Metrologic bundle: available by default.

When the Metrologic bundle is used, the Variance factor and Details options are not available.

Note: For a feature to be able to be used for the station orientation calculation, it must be a member of an "orientation point" type family (see Modify family/Alignment/Proj. feature). To do this, when measuring a feature, the user must select the displayed as follows:

icon. In this case, the geometrical point measurement window is

Family name is automatically generated and, when a geometrical point is

measured, the compensation feature automatically switches to When the

.

icon is selected, each time a new point is probed, feature and family name are incremented.

If, after different measurements, the user opens the feature measurement window and re-selects the icon, the window displays the name of the first "orientation point" family created. The user has probably changed stations and is re-measuring the common points to be used to calculate station orientation in the same order.

Page 2314

However, users may select the "orientation point" family they want to use to make their measurement, from the drop-down list. It should also be noted that only geometrical points, circles and spheres may be members of this type of family and that, if the user gives the name of an incorrect type of family by mistake, the following message is displayed:

.



The top part of the window is used to select the points to be used in the station orientation calculation. By default, when this window is opened, if no orientation has been created, all the points are selected:

Clicking a station name deselects the station from the orientation calculation (the station may be re-selected if required). The names of the points belonging to this station are then displayed grayed out (shaded):

Clicking the name of a family of orientation points deselects all the points from the orientation calculation (the points may be re-selected if required):

Page 2315

Clicking a point name means the point is not used for the orientation calculation (the point may be re-selected if required).

This button is used to re-select all the points for use in the station orientation calculation:

Right-clicking a station name displays this pop-up menu, allowing the station to be defined as reference station. This means that, once the calculation has been performed, all movements (translations, rotations) will be expressed with respect to this station.



Clicking this button updates the lower part of the window with the results of the station orientation calculation, as shown below:

Page 2316

The X, Y, Z, positions and RotX, RotY and RotZ rotations relative to the reference coordinate system are shown for each station:

For the common orientation points and for each family of points, the following are shown in the table: - The X, Y, Z coordinates of the optimized point obtained by the orientation calculation (for more information, see the note), - The pointing error, that is the maximum distance between the optimized point and the common point measured at the greatest distance from this point, - The RMS error calculated on all common measured points in the same family, - The observation angle, that is the largest calculated angle between two observations made from the different stations used for the orientation calculation:

are calculated on all measured common points. Clicking this button automatically displays an *.rtf format document with the detailed results and the different iterations used to obtain them. By default, this document is saved in the software directory and is named Orientation Information.rtf.

Page 2317



When the user validates a station orientation calculation, and if the box in the Station Management window is checked, then the user can view the different stations and features measured, expressed in the reference alignment:



Lastly, the user can, if desired, cancel station orientation by selecting the Delete Station Orientation option from the Alignment menu. The following confirmation message is then displayed:

Notes: 

When the calculation is validated by the user, points are added to the Feature Database. These points correspond to the mean positions of the different points in the same "orientation point" family.

Page 2318

They are named after this family. By default, these points are members of the OP_RESULT family, as shown in the following example:

Family name may be changed. The OrientationPointResultFamName variable may be modified in the [StationOrientation] section of the XG_USER.ini file. This variable contains the name that will be given to the family of optimized points. These points do not have to be created at calculation. The CreateBestfittedPoints variable (default value 1) may be modified in the [StationOrientation] section of the XG_USER.ini file. This variable determines whether or not points are created (if the variable is set to 1, the points are created; if set to 0, points are not created).



Two type of messages may be displayed during the calculation. Certain messages are warning messages and do not prevent the user validating the orientation calculation, for example:

, Other messages are error messages and prevent the user validating the calculation. It is then necessary to modify the selection or review the procedure followed:

.



The Station Orientation and Delete Station Orientation functions may be saved in a program, and are then displayed as follows. These command lines may be modified (as is the case for any gm2 program command line) and the user may thus modify the points selected the next time the program is run.

Page 2319

Page 2320

Example of a multi-station measurement procedure

A description of a standard case is given below. The user has a measurement system, but needs to move it as all the features to be measured are not visible from one position.

Step 1 The user positions the measurement system at position 1 (Station1). If a new work session is required, the software creates and activates a default station, as shown in the following example:

Step 2 The user measures all features visible from Station 1, these may be: - Complete features (planes, circles, points...), - Points that will be used to create the alignment used to express the results (it is frequently the case that the points used to create the alignment are not all visible from Station 1. In this case, the alignment will only be created once station orientation has been calculated), - Parts of features, by means of geometrical points (a cylinder, for example, will be built by best fit of the points measured on the different stations).

Step 3 The user measures at least 3 points (usually between 4 and 8) that will be common to the different measurement positions and used to calculate station orientation. To do this, the user selects the the geometrical point measurement window. The window is then displayed as follows:

icon in

Page 2321

Family name is automatically generated and the compensation feature

automatically switches to When the

.

icon is selected, each time a new point is probed, the point and family name are incremented.

Step 4 When all measurement on Station 1 have been performed, the user creates a new station in the work session. The following window is then displayed:

Page 2322

The user moves the measurement system. When the system is in position, the user activates Station 2. After system initialization, the station management window is displayed:

Step 5 The user measures all features visible from Station 2, these may be: - Complete features (planes, circles, points, etc.), - Additional points that will be used to create the alignment used to express the results and that were not visible from Station 1, - Parts of features, by means of geometrical points (a cylinder, for example, for which certain points have already been measured on Station 1).

Step 6 The user measures points common with Station 1 and, possibly, other points that will be visible from other positions. If the user opens the geometrical point measurement window and re-selects the the name of the first "orientation point" family created.

icon, the window displays

Step 7 When all measurements on this station have been made, the user repeats steps 4 to 6 for each new station.

Page 2323

Step 8 The user can then open the station orientation calculation window and, once they have selected the points, launch the calculation:

Finally, the different features measured and different stations are displayed in the 3D View and shown in the reference alignment:

Page 2324

Step 9 The user can now perform the different constructions and analyses that can only be performed when the stations have been orientated. The procedure is now complete.

Page 2325

Optical Sensors

Page 2326

Setup

Page 2327

One Start/Stop button

This function can be accessed using the MMT > One Start/Stop button menu. It is used to start and stop the acquisition of a point cloud with a single press on the measurement system acquisition button. If this function is not enabled, it is necessary to keep this button pressed during all the acquisition time. This function is only valid when an optical sensor is connected:   

with multi-articulated arms used with the Kreon optical sensor, with Romer Cimcore WinRDS arms used with an optical sensor, with FARO arms used with the ScanArm optical sensor,

Note: To use this function with the Romer Cimcore WinRDS arms + Perceptron optical sensor, the direct interface must be used. In fact, this function cannot be used with the Scanworks interface. See also the following pages: Zoom, Manual probing assistance and Set-up CNC parameters.

Page 2328

Optical profile editor

This function can be accessed using the CMM > Optical profile editor menu. It enables optical profiles to be edited and modified, these can be retrieved manually in the course of a working session or in a program. Its window varies according to the type of optical sensor connected. The following sensors include profile management:    

Datapixel Kreon Metris Perceptron

Window overview Part of the window is common to all types of sensor:

is the name of the current profile. Click this button to add a profile after entering its name in the field. Click this button to remove the selected profile from the drop-down list. closes the Optical profile editor window.

Notes: 



The Optical profile editor does not feature for the Kreon sensor. In actual fact, a window with the name Video Parameter Setting will be displayed on selecting the CMM > Optical profile editor function. Its operation is described in the Kreon sensor section. There will always be a profile that uses the Default name which is reserved and cannot be deleted.

The second part of the window refers to the sensor set-up as such and is dependent on the connected sensor.

Datapixel probe

Page 2329

Common fields are described in the Window overview section. sets optical sensor intensity.

Kreon probe

This dialog box is used to select:   

laser power using the radio buttons located in the Laser (mW) section, integration time using the radio buttons located in the Integration (s) section, Lut (Look Up Table) value using the vertical scale cursor located in the Lut section. enables a saved profile to be selected.

Metris probe

Page 2330

Common fields are described in the Window overview section. sets optical sensor power. sets optical sensor black value. sets optical sensor white value.

Perceptron probe

Common fields are described in the Window overview section.

Page 2331

sets the exposure value (from 0 to 600) automatically determines the exposure value to be used. sets the threshold value (from 0 to 100) The beam display will be automatically refreshed each time settings are modified.

Page 2332

Activate optical profile

This function, which can be accessed from the CMM > Activate optical profile menu, is used to select a profile from the list of existing profiles. Existing profiles are created using the Optical profile editor. The following window is displayed:

selects the desired optical profile from the drop-down list. confirms the choice of profile. closes the window without activating any optical profile.

In program: This function can be used in a program. The following line is then displayed:

Page 2333

Calibration Each probe has its own calibration sequence, the laser just needs to be placed above the sphere to run this sequence.

DRO / Optical Sensor Once a laser probe has been defined, click on F2 to switch the DRO into the laser visualization mode. A green target represents the range of view of the optical sensor. If an object is in the viewing range of the sensor then a red line representing the laser will appear in the target area defined by the green lines. .

Optical Center Once the probe is calibrated, its optical centre, i.e. the intersection point between the laser beam and the camera is shown in the 3D View by a red cross. This is the point that is used by the software to locate the probe in space.

Page 2334

Choice of probe If both types of probes are available (optical sensor and hard probe), the choice between the probes is differentiated by their name:

Example: For the position A0-B0: Optical sensor name: A0.0_B0.0 Hard probe name: 1#A0.0_B0.0 For hard probes, the figure preceding the "#" character represents the ball number. For a star probe, each probe will be differentiated by its number.

Automated calibration Optical sensors may be automatically calibrated via the Probes > Automated calibration menu when:  

a measurement head has been previously created in the 3D View. the measurement head has been qualified with 4 positions.

Page 2335

End of calibration Once the optical sensor calibration is completed, a validation message is displayed. It indicates the form fault, thus confirming or not calibration validation:

To validate the calibration. To run the calibration again using the same parameters.

Page 2336

Datapixel and Perceptron Calibration

The method for calibrating the optical sensors Datapixel and Perceptron is the same. Steps to calibrate these optical sensors: 

Define a probe as having Laser as ball number, from the Probes > Define probe menu.



Open the calibration window by clicking the button



Place the sensor so as to see the surface of the calibration sphere as follows. To do this, use the laser visualization window of the DRO. This visualization window is accessible by pressing the key F2. Once F2 is pressed the window will change modes, switching to the laser visualization window.

.

Page 2337

Wi nd ow for Dat api xel

Wi nd ow for Per ce ptr on



Click on . Calibration is then performed automatically. The machine will automatically take the necessary points for the calibration (6 points for Datapixel and 8 for Perceptron). It is possible to manually calibrate a LAS or RAW probe by manually recording points using the F3 button (minimum of 5 points). Only the points on the sphere will be used for the calculation. Points that were taken on the stem of the sphere or on the marble of the machine will not be taken into account.

Page 2338

Kreon Calibration

Steps to calibrate the Kreon sensor: 

Define a probe as having Laser as ball number, from the menu Probes > Define probe.



Open the calibration window by clicking the button



Place the sensor so as to see the surface of the calibration sphere as follows. To do this, follow the display of the laser available in the DRO window, accessed by using the F2 key.

.

Note: An additional window is displayed, showing a display of the beam at 90° and giving a possibility to set the optical parameters.

Page 2339



Click on the automatic calibration button in the define probe window. The calibration window is then displayed:



Click on

. Calibration is then performed automatically.

Page 2340

Note: The Kreon sensor is particular because not only is it an optical sensor but it also has a touch trigger probe. This thus allows measurement points to be taken by contact in order to facilitate creation of an alignment or to locate a calibration sphere, for example. This probe may be calibrated in exactly the same way as any other touch trigger probe.

Page 2341

Metris Calibration

To calibrate this sensor, you must: 

Define a probe as having Laser as ball number, from the Probes > Define probe menu.



Open the calibration window by clicking the button



Place the sensor so as to see the surface of the calibration sphere as follows. To do this, follow the display of the laser available in the DRO window. This display type is accessed by using the F2 key. The window will then change modes, from DRO to laser beam display.

.

Page 2342



Then click the calibration button in the probe definition window. The calibration window is then displayed:



Click on

. Calibration is then performed automatically.

Page 2343

XC Type Metris Calibration

To calibrate this sensor, you must: 

Define a probe as having Laser as ball number, from the Probes > Define probe menu.



Open the calibration window by clicking the button



Place the sensor so as to see the surface of the calibration sphere as follows. To do this, follow the display of the laser available in the DRO window. This display type is accessed by using the F2 key. The window will then change modes, from DRO to laser beam display.

.

Page 2344



Then click the calibration button in the probe definition window. The calibration window is then displayed:



Three types of calibration can be performed: static calibration, speed calibration and mapping calibration.

Static calibration It is used to locate the sphere and to perform measurements in static mode. Speed calibration It should be conducted once a week with one of the probes. The latter will enable acquisitiions to be performed automatically. The calibration pattern conducted is then along ABC. Mapping calibration Laser mapping can be calibrated in step by step mode or in continuous mode. One of the two methods should be conducted every month. The calibration pattern conducted is then along 123.  

Step by Step (3): this method gives more precise values on the measurements made in step by step mode. Continuous (3b) : this method gives more precise values on the measurements made in continuous mode.

Page 2345

After a mapping calibration, the speed calibration should be re-conducted.

Page 2346

Continuous probes

Page 2347

SP25 continuous probe calibration This function can only be used with a Renishaw SP25 continuous probe mounted on the head. The calibration method uses circle contourings for sphere measurement. Final calculation of the calibration is performed using a Renishaw dll. SP25 continuous probe calibration is performed with Order 3 calibration. The path followed is:

At least 4 points on the sphere must be probed before contouring paths can be performed.

Notes:  

During calibration, some paths are measured at two different deflection values. A Point calibration may also be performed. Probes thus calibrated cannot be used to measure features.

Calibration in manual mode The calibration window is shown below: Order 3 calibration

Point calibration

Page 2348

This button is used to access the Calibration Parameters window:

Page 2349

Warning: An excessive offset of the equator can downgrade the calibration. A warning message is then displayed. used to calibrate an L/star type probe:

To enter stylus direction, the first point in the direction of the shaft must be probed:

BP must be in the same direction as PC.

Note: When using an L/star type probe, two precautions must be taken:  

length AB must be greater than the diameter of the calibration sphere length BP must be greater than the radius of the calibration sphere

used to select calibration type. If Point mode is selected, the following message is displayed:

Page 2350

Order 3 calibration Probe the sphere manually. The first three points should be probed according to the three CMM axes if calibrating a straight probe. When the minimum number of probed points is reached (four points), click OK. The following message is displayed:

Once the message has been confirmed, the circular contouring paths are performed in automatic mode. The number of points in the calibration window increments on completion of each circular trajectory. Once all the paths have been performed, the calibration calculation is run and the following message is displayed:

Point calibration Point calibration is performed in the same way as calibration with a standard probe.

Probe head qualification It is possible to Qualify the probe head with probes calibrated in Point mode.

Note: The head may be qualified with a star probe. To do this, the probes must be calibrated with the same ball number. The Qualify button is then available (no longer grayed out). As multi-qualification is not handled, the qualification operation must be repeated for each ball in the configuration.

Page 2351

Quick probe head qualification Quick qualification may be performed with a continuous (scanning) probe of straight or star type.

used to enter ball number for star probes.

Automated calibration The table below summarizes the various methods that can be used for automated calibration: Uncalibrated position

Already calibrated position Point calibration.

SP25

Order3 calibration.

Order3 calibration.

For each probe, calibrated as order 3, the sphere is first measured at N points (defined in the calibration options), then the circular contouring paths are performed. Renishaw considers that Order 3 calibration (using circular contouring) must be performed once per month (or each time that the probe is replaced). In automated calibration mode, the probes calibrated in Point mode, that were used for qualification, must be calibrated in Order 3 mode if they are to be used for measurements.

Page 2352

used to select calibration type. When L type probes are used, the Use probing direction checkbox is automatically checked.

Notes: 

In automated calibration mode, if standard calibration is selected, probes that have been already calibrated are calibrated in this way. However, probes that have not yet been calibrated will be calibrated with Order 3 calibration, thus, when calibration is requested, the following window is displayed:



Circular paths are calculated so as to avoid any collision with the shaft supporting the sphere. The Locate calibration sphere window allows users to specify this additional value. If this value is set to 0, then when calibration is requested the following window allowing this value to be entered is displayed:



When continuous probes are calibrated, information on the measurement characteristics is stored such as, for example, the selected probing mode. The diameters and form faults for the two types of calibration , continuous or static, are displayed. If these two values are identical, this means that only one type of calibration has been performed. Consequently, the probe activation window is displayed as follows:

Page 2353

Thus, when a measurement is made, the corresponding calibration information is used.



When using an SP25 with an L probe, the head must be qualified by using the mandatory positions at least (4 or 5 positions as a function of the head used) with the same ball and, if necessary, by adding at least one position with other balls for an automatic calibration. For example, to automatically calibrate balls 1 and 2, the head may be qualified with 4 positions for ball 1 and another position for ball 2. Thus, in the automatica calibration window, automatic calibration for ball 1 and ball 2 can be selected. In program mode: The calibration of a continuous probe can be used in a program.

The following lines are then added:

Page 2354

SP80 continuous probe calibration This function can only be used with a Renishaw SP80 continuous probe mounted on the head. The calibration method uses circle contourings for sphere measurement. Final calculation of the calibration is performed using a Renishaw dll. SP80 continuous probe calibration is performed with Order 1 calibration. The path followed is:

At least 4 points on the sphere must be probed before contouring paths can be performed.

Note: During calibration, some paths are measured at two different deflection values.

Calibration in manual mode The calibration window is shown below: Order 1 and Points calibration

Page 2355

This button is used to access the Calibration Parameters window:

Page 2356

Warning: An excessive offset of the equator can downgrade the calibration. A warning message is then displayed.

used to select calibration type. If Linear points or Linear points reprobing mode is selected, the following message is displayed:

Order 1 calibration Probe the sphere manually. The first point must be probed in the direction of the shaft, then the last 3 in the 3 axes of the machine. When the minimum number of probed points is reached (4 points), click OK. The following message is displayed:

Once the message has been confirmed, the circular contouring paths are performed in automatic mode. The number of points in the calibration window increments on completion of each circular path. Once all the paths have been performed, the calibration calculation is run and the following message is displayed:

Linear points calibration After taking the first 4 points required, including the first in the shaft direction, to generate the paths, the software probes the number of points indicated in the Options window while distributing them automatically. Note that for probes that are not rectilinear (i.e. "L" or "U" shaped, for example), collisions may occur. In this

Page 2357

case, it is preferable to use Linear points reprobing mode.

Linear points reprobing calibration this mode allows automated calibration to be performed in which probing point distribution is not determined by the software but by the user. To do this, three points must be taken (there must be one in each CMM axis) and at least five other points on the calibration sphere (positioned as desired by the user) must then be probed. The resulting automated calibration re-probes the same points by generating the appropriate paths. The points are probed in the same way as in linear points mode (points selected using probe deflection).

Note: 



Circular paths are calculated so as to avoid any collision with the shaft supporting the sphere. The Locate calibration sphere window allows users to specify this additional value. If this value is set to 0, then, when calibration is requested, the following window allowing this value to be entered is

displayed: Virtual qualification with head modeling makes it possible to automatically calibrate the balls of the star configuration of SP80. In program mode: The calibration of a continuous probe can be used in a program.

The following lines are then added:

Page 2358

SP600 continuous probe calibration This function can only be used with a Renishaw SP600 continuous probe mounted on the head. The calibration method uses circle contourings for sphere measurement. Final calculation of the calibration is performed using a Renishaw dll. SP600 continuous probe calibration is performed with Order 1 calibration. The path followed is:

At least 4 points on the sphere must be probed before contouring paths can be performed.

Notes:  

During calibration, some paths are measured at two different deflection values. A Point calibration may also be performed. Probes thus calibrated cannot be used to measure features.

Calibration in manual mode The calibration window is shown below: Order 1 calibration

Point calibration

Page 2359

This button is used to access the Calibration Parameters window:

Page 2360

Warning: An excessive offset of the equator can downgrade the calibration. A warning message is then displayed. used to calibrate an L/star type probe:

To enter stylus direction, the first point in the direction of the shaft must be probed:

BP must be in the same direction as PC.

Note: When using an L/star type probe, two precautions must be taken:  

length AB must be greater than the diameter of the calibration sphere length BP must be greater than the radius of the calibration sphere

Page 2361

used to select calibration type. If Point mode is selected, the following message is displayed:

Order 1 calibration Probe the sphere manually. The first three points should be probed according to the three CMM axes if calibrating a straight probe. When the minimum number of probed points is reached (4 points), click OK. The following message is displayed:

Once the message has been confirmed, the circular contouring paths are performed in automatic mode. The number of points in the calibration window increments on completion of each circular path. Once all the paths have been performed, the calibration calculation is run and the following message is displayed:

Point calibration Point calibration is performed in the same way as calibration with a standard probe.

Linear points calibration

Page 2362

After taking the first 4 points required to generate the paths, the software firstly probes 3 points along the CMM axes, then the number of points indicated in the Options window while distributing them automatically. Note that for probes that are not rectilinear (i.e. "L" or "U" shaped, for example), collisions may occur. In this case, it is preferable to use Linear points reprobing mode.

Linear points reprobing calibration this mode allows automated calibration to be performed in which probing point distribution is not determined by the software but by the user. To do this, three points must be taken (there must be one in each CMM axis) and at least five other points on the calibration sphere (positioned as desired by the user) must then be probed. The resulting automated calibration re-probes the same points by generating the appropriate paths. The points are probed in the same way as in linear points mode (points selected using probe deflection).

Probe head qualification It is possible to Qualify the probe head with probes calibrated in Point mode.

Note: The head may be qualified with a star probe. To do this, the probes must be calibrated with the same ball number. The Qualify button is then available (no longer grayed out). As multi-qualification is not handled, the qualification operation must be repeated for each ball in the configuration.

Quick probe head qualification Quick qualification may be performed with a continuous (scanning) probe of straight or star type.

Page 2363

used to enter ball number for star probes.

Automated calibration The table below summarizes the various methods that can be used for automated calibration: Uncalibrated position

Already calibrated position

Calibration by Linear points. SP600

Point calibration. Calibration by Linear points reprobing Calibration by Linear points. . Order1 calibration.

Order1 calibration.

For each probe, calibrated as order 1, the sphere is first measured at N points (defined in the calibration options), then the circular contouring paths are performed. Renishaw considers that Order 1 calibration (using circular contouring) must be performed once per month (or each time that the probe is replaced). In automated calibration mode, the probes calibrated in Point mode, that were used for qualification, must be calibrated in Order 1 mode if they are to be used for measurements.

Page 2364

used to select calibration type. When L type probes are used, the Use probing direction checkbox is automatically checked.

Notes: 

In automated calibration mode, if standard calibration is selected, probes that have been already calibrated are calibrated in this way. However, probes that have not yet been calibrated will be calibrated with Order 1 calibration, thus, when calibration is requested, the following window is displayed:



Circular paths are calculated so as to avoid any collision with the shaft supporting the sphere. The Locate calibration sphere window allows users to specify this additional value. If this value is set to 0, then when calibration is requested the following window allowing this value to be entered is displayed:



When continuous probes are calibrated, information on the measurement characteristics is stored such as, for example, the selected probing mode. The diameters and form faults for the two types of calibration , continuous or static, are displayed. If these two values are identical, this means that only one type of calibration has been performed. Consequently, the probe activation window is displayed as follows:

Page 2365

Thus, when a measurement is made, the corresponding calibration information is used.



When using an SP600 with an L probe, the head must be qualified by using the mandatory positions at least (4 or 5 positions as a function of the head used) with the same ball and, if necessary, by adding at least one position with other balls for an automatic calibration. For example, to automatically calibrate balls 1 and 2, the head may be qualified with 4 positions for ball 1 and another position for ball 2. Thus, in the automatica calibration window, automatic calibration for ball 1 and ball 2 can be selected. In program mode: The calibration of a continuous probe can be used in a program.

The following lines are then added:

Page 2366

Appendixes

Page 2367

Pocket PC In order to use Pocket PC in the best conditions, the following set-up is advised : - Windows Mobile 2003 (preferably second edition), - a 320 X 240 screen resolution, - a Wi-Fi connection (both on the Pocket PC and the computer on which the software is installed).

Page 2368

Connecting to the Pocket PC 

Create a shortcut to the software executable (MTXG.exe) on the desktop.

Add the following command line to the shortcut properties (in the Target field): TCPSERV:192.168.0.198:7777.

Example : If the software is installed in the default directory: C:\Program Files\Metrologic Group\Metrolog XG\MTXG.exe TCPSERV:192.168.0.198:7777

- TCPSERV: in capital letters - 192.168.0.198  TCP/IP address of the station running TwinServer - 7777: port number

    

Connect the Pocket PC to the computer on which the software is installed. Run the executable XGPocket.exe (located in the Pocket PC directory created at the software installation).Installation on the Pocket PC is performed automatically. Then, run the executable TwinServer.exe (located in the software installation directory). Using the shortcut created previously, launch the software. The TwinServer window shows that there is an active connection. Launch XG Pocket, the XG Pocket launch window is displayed:

Page 2369

In the Welcom windowConnection Settings, window, enter the IP address and number of the port on which TwinServer is running (as entered in the desktop shortcut):

The following screen allows you to choose the display settings of XGPocket (this functionnality can be only used for Pocket PC equiped with Windows 2003 Second Edition or later).

The following icons represent the different settings, portrait mode and the 2 landscape modes:

The other buttons give access to the following functions:

allows to open the About window in order to display the XG Pocket version numbers,

establishes the connection between the software and XG Pocket,

Page 2370

cancels Pocket PC connection to the software,

switches to the XG Pocket application if it is running in the background.



The look of the button Pocket:

indicates the status of the link between the software and XG

the link is up and running,

there has been an error during the connection, check that the software is running and correctly configured and that the IP address and the port are correct,

the connection is in progress.

The XG Pocket main window appears:

Page 2371

Pocket PC display The main XG Pocket window is shown below:

The first part of the above window shows the relative position of the probe. The display, with the following settings: position, result, probe and auto, is directly modified in the software by double-clicking the DRO window.

Clicking the window with the stylus opens the display settings window.

The second part of the screen allows to display the measure window of the different features available in the software or to send the shortcuts to the software

Page 2372

These 2 buttons allow to browse from one part of the dialog box to another. Allows to display the DRO in full screen. Allows to display the part of the window containing the buttons in full screen. Allows to cancel the full screen mode.

This button is used to access the program window.

The status bar shows: - the diameter of the probe used (if a probe is used). - laser status and the RMS value of the measurement (if a laser is used).

This tab also allows Select probe and Select alignment to be accessed by clicking the with the stylus.

and

icons

Page 2373

Configuring the display The display settings window is accessed by clicking the DRO window with the stylus. The window is shown below:

The first 2 tabs of the window Key and Feats allow to assign either the F1 to F12 keys, or the feature measurement to a specific button. In order to assign a function to a button, click on the button to modify; a listbox will then appear. Select the function out of the available choices.

The last tab Pocket allows to assign an action to one or more of the 4 buttons available on the Pocket PC. To confirm your changes, click

.

Page 2374

Program window The Pocket PC Program window is shown below :

The name of the program current line is displayed here. It is possible to scroll this line in order to read it in entirety thanks to the scroll bar below :

Used to display the program. The following window is displayed:

Page 2375

Click the

button to return to the previous window.

The window is in single selection mode, clicking the button changes the mode. The window is in multiple selection mode, clicking the button changes the mode.

Used to insert or remove a breakpoint.

Used to show/hide the selected line(s).

Used to move the run cursor.

Example:

Page 2376

The first part of the window

is used to access the following functions:

Move the execution pointer to the line on which the cursor is located.

Launch program Teach-in mode.

Run a program in continuous or step

read mode.

Terminate a program or stop program teach-in.

These 2 buttons allow to browse from one part of the dialog box to another.

The second part of the window allows the shortcuts corresponding to the eight keys available in the display settings to be used.

Allows to display the DRO in full screen. Allows to display the part of the window containing the buttons in full screen. Allows to cancel the full screen mode.

Page 2377

Finally, the

icon allows the laser-specific functions window to be accessed. If the software version

doesn't support these functions, the button will automatically change to main window.

, which allow to switch to the

Page 2378

Measurement window To access this window, the type of feature to be measured must first have been selected in the selection window:

The feature measurement window is then displayed :

The feature to be measured is selected from the drop-down menu :

The following part, is used to stop or confirm feature measurement (as in the software). It also allows one or more incorrect points to be deleted:

The eight keyboard shortcuts (configured in the display settings window) are also available.

Page 2379

It also allows to setup the parameters of the measurement using the following pages

or These 2 parts of the window depend, of course, on the type of the chosen feature. It is possible to choose the family in which the feature will belong, or the family in which the feature already belongs if it has been defined previously, to choose the number of probing points for that feature, to validate the parameters : Repeat, Auto Stop, Tangent Outside Material and Cylinder Probe.

These 2 buttons allow to browse from one part of the dialog box to another. Allows to display the DRO in full screen. Allows to display the measure window in full screen and thus to visualise the complete fields of the windows on only one page. Allows to cancel the full screen mode.

This button is used to access the program window.

Page 2380

Active probe selection window

This window, that may be accessed at any time by clicking the

icon, is used to activate a probe.

Select the desired probe and click this button

Click on this button to cancel the changes made. Click on this button to validate the changes made and exit the window.

Page 2381

Active alignment selection window

This window, that may be accessed at any time by clicking the

icon, is used to activate an alignment.

Select the desired alignment in the list and click on this button to activate it.

Select the desired alignment in the list and click on this button to associate it to CAD.

Click on this button to cancel the changes made. Click on this button to validate the changes made and exit the window.

Page 2382

Laser camera display window This window shows the laser camera display. It automatically launches the camera window on the Pocket PC and computer.

This window is accessed by clicking the

icon.

The first two keys allow to control the status of the software

allows to open (or close

allows to start (or to stop

) the camera window in Metrolgo XG.

) the laser camera.

These four keys allow the following functions to be accessed :

Go to. Used to move the laser in the direction selected by clicking in the camera display.

Go to * 5. Same function as the Go To key, but the camera is moved by a distance five times greater than with the Go To function.

Find and measure. Searches for the location selected by clicking on the screen and runs a measurement if the target is found.

Page 2383

Find. Searches for the location selected by clicking on the screen, but does not run a measurement.

These 2 buttons allow to browse from one part of the dialog box to another. The second part of the window allows to:

  

Define the quality used during the transfer of the camera pictures (a low quality will have a better transmission speed). Define a zoom factor for the visualisation on the XG Pocket. Choose the position of the zone visible on the Pocket PC. This position can be modified by using the pen (drag and drop) on the box representing the visible part.

Permet d'afficher l'image de la caméra en plein écran. Allows to display the part of the window containing the buttons in full screen. Allows to cancel the full screen mode.

The

icon allows you to return to the main window.

Page 2384

Details of angles calculation

Page 2385

General information The angles evaluated by the software can be divided into two categories:  

Homogeneous angles, which are angles measured between two geometric features of the same type: plane/plane and straight line/straight line Heterogeneous angles, which are angles measured between two different types of geometric features: straight line/plane and plane/straight line (in fact, straight lines and cylinders are considered to be axes).

These two categories can be further divided into two sub-categories:  

projected angles, for which the definition domain is [-180°; 180°], Space angles, for which the definition domain varies according to the angles concerned: [0° ; 180°] for homogeneous angles and [-90° ; 90°] for heterogeneous angles.

The angle is an orientated angle. It is calculated from the Reference Feature to the Feature. To obtain the angle of the Feature to the Reference Feature it is necessary to reverse these two names in the corresponding drop-down lists.

The reference point and the orientation of the projected planes are as follows:

For example, if we consider straight line D in space:

Page 2386

It must be projected on the ZoX plane to obtain the projected angle ZoX :

This enables the angle to be calculated with the orientation convention shown below:

The information stated at the beginning of each chapter is valid when the

button is in the

position.

The position then gives the supplementary angle by adding 180° to the calculated angle (whilst preserving the definition domains).

Page 2387

'Normal' refers to the vector representing the orientation of the plane.

Finally, the orientation of the features (plane or axis) is significant in the digital result (see following examples).

Page 2388

Homogeneous angles

Page 2389

Projected angles

Page 2390

Plane / Plane angles

Definition domain [-180° ;180°] The projected angle evaluated by the software is the angle formed by the two normals "brought back" to the point of intersection (the orientation going from the Reference Feature to the Feature).

Example 1 : Three-dimensional view:

Views projected on the ZoX Plane:

Feature

: Plan_E

Reference : Plan_C ZoX

: -130°

or (orientation of Plan_C changed in relation to the previous view):

Page 2391

Feature

: Plan_E

Reference : Plan_C ZoX

: 50°

or (orientation of Plan_C and Plan_E changed in relation to previous view):

Feature : Plan_E Reference : Plan_C ZoX

: 50°

or (orientation of Plan_C changed in relation to the previous view):

Page 2392

Feature

: Plan_E

Reference : Plan_C ZoX

: -130°

Example 2 : Three-dimensional view:

Views projected on the ZoX plane:

Page 2393

Feature

: Plan_E

Reference : Plan_I ZoX

: 140°

Feature

: Plan_E

or (orientation of Plan_I changed in relation to the previous view):

Reference : Plan_I ZoX

: -40°

or (orientation of Plan_I and Plan_E changed in relation to previous view):

Page 2394

Feature

: Plan_E

Reference : Plan_I ZoX

: -40°

or (orientation of Plan_I changed in relation to previous view):

Feature

: Plan_E

Reference : Plan_I ZoX

: 140°

Page 2395

Straight line / Straight line angles

Definition domain [-180 ; 180°] The projected angle evaluated by the software is the angle formed by the two straight lines at the level of their point of intersection (orientation going from Reference Feature to Feature).

Example 1 : Three-dimensional view:

View projected on the ZoX plane:

Feature

: Cyl2

Reference : Axe Z ZoX

: -63°30’

Page 2396

Example 2 : Three dimensional view:

View projected on the ZoX plane:

Feature Cyl2

:

Reference : Axe X ZoX -153°30’

:

Example 3 : Three-dimensional view:

Page 2397

View projected on the XoY plane:

Feature

: Cyl2

Reference : Axe X ZoX

: 164°

Example 4 : Three-dimensional view:

Page 2398

View projected on the XoY plane:

Feature

: Cyl2

Reference : Axe Y XoY

: 74°

Example 5 : Three-dimensional view:

Page 2399

View projected on the XoY plane:

Feature

: Axe Y

Reference : Cyl2 XoY

: -74°

Page 2400

Space angles

Page 2401

Plane / Plane angles

Definition domain [0° ; 180°] The same reasoning as for projected Plane / Plane angles is applied with the single difference that the angle cannot be negative, as its sign is in this case Dependent on the position of the observer in space.

Example 1 :

Space angle P1-P2 = space angle P2-P1 = 0° in position

.

Space angle P1-P2 = space angle P2-P1 = 180° in position

.

Example 2 :

Space angle P1-P2 = space angle P2-P1 = 0° in position Space angle P1-P2 = space angle P2-P1 = 180° in position

. .

Example 3 :

Page 2402

Space angle P1-P2 = space angle P2-P1 = 180° in position Space angle P1-P2 = space angle P2-P1 = 0° in position

. .

Example 4 :

Space angle P1-P2 = space angle P2-P1 = 180° in position Space angle P1-P2 = space angle P2-P1 = 0° in position

. .

Example 5 :

Page 2403

Space angle P1-P2 = space angle P2-P1 = 50° in position Space angle P1-P2 = space angle P2-P1 = 130° in position

. .

The view from the side is as follows:

Example 6 :

Page 2404

Space angle P1-P2 = space angle P2-P1 = 130° in position Space angle P1-P2 = space angle P2-P1 = 50° in position

. .

The view from the side is as follows:

Page 2405

Straight line / Straight line angles

Definition domain [0° ; 180°] The same reasoning as for Straight line / Straight line projected angles is applied, again with the convention the angle cannot be negative as its sign is in this case dependent on the position of the observer in space.

Example 1 :

Space angle D1-D2 = space angle D2-D1 = 0° in position

.

Space angle D1-D2 = space angle D2-D1 = 180° in position

.

Example 2 :

Space angle D1-D2 = space angle D2-D1 = 0° in position Space angle D1-D2 = space angle D2-D1 = 180° in position

. .

Example 3 :

Page 2406

Space angle D1-D2 = space angle D2-D1 = 180° in position Space angle D1-D2 = space angle D2-D1 = 0° in position

. .

Example 4 :

Space angle D1-D2 = space angle D2-D1 = 180° in position Space angle D1-D2 = space angle D2-D1 = 0° in position

. .

Example 5 :

Space angle D1-D2 = space angle D2-D1 = 60° in position Space angle D1-D2 = space angle D2-D1 = 120° in position

. .

Page 2407

Example 6 :

Space angle D1-D2 = space angle D2-D1 = 120° in position Space angle D1-D2 = space angle D2-D1 = 60° in position

. .

Page 2408

Heterogeneous angles

Page 2409

Projected angles

Page 2410

Straight line / Plane angles

Definition domain [-180° ; 180°] The projected angle evaluated by the software follows this principle: first, a rotation of P/2 is applied to the normal of the Reference Feature, and then, the angle formed by the two normals "brought back" to the point of intersection is measured.

Example 1 : Three-dimensional view:

Views projected on the ZoX:

Feature

: Cyl2

Reference : Plane_C XoY

: 74°

or (orientation of Plane_C changed in relation to the previous view):

Page 2411

Feature

: Cyl2

Reference : Plane_C XoY

: -106°

Example 2 : Three-dimensional view:

Views projected on the ZoX plane:

Page 2412

Feature

: Cyl2

Reference : Plane_C XoY

: 74°

or (orientation of Plane_C changed in relation to the previous view):

Feature

: Cyl2

Reference : Plane_C XoY

: -106°

Example 3 : Three-dimensional view:

Page 2413

Views projected on the ZoX plane:

Feature

: Cyl2

Reference : Plane_C ZoX

: -63°30’

or (orientation of Plane_C changed in relation to the previous view):

Page 2414

Feature

: Cyl2

Reference : Plane_C ZoX

: 116°30’

Example 4 : Three-dimensional view:

Views projected on the ZoX plane:

Page 2415

Feature

: Cyl2

Reference : Plane_C ZoX

: 116°30’

Feature

: Cyl2

or (orientation of Plane_C changed in relation to the previous view):

Reference : Plane_C ZoX

: -63°30’

Example 5 : Three-dimensional view:

Page 2416

Views projected on the ZoX plane:

Feature

: Cyl2

Reference : Plane_I ZoX

: -153°30’

or (orientation of Plane_I changed in relation to the previous view):

Page 2417

Reference : Plane_I Reference : Plane_I ZoX

: 26°30’

Page 2418

Plane / Straight line angles

Definition domain = [-180° ; 180°] The projected angle measured by the software follows the same principle as before: first, a rotation of P/2 is applied to the normal of the reference feature, and then, the angle formed by the two normals "brought back" to the point of intersection is measured.

Example 1 : Three-dimensional view:

Views projected on the ZoX plane:

Feature

: Plan_E

Reference : Axe Z ZoX

: -130°

or (orientation of Plane_E changed in relation to the previous view):

Page 2419

Feature

: Plan_E

Reference : Axe Z ZoX

: 50°

Example 2 : Three-dimensional view:

Views projected on the ZoX plane:

Page 2420

Feature Plan_E

:

Reference : Axe X ZoX 140°

:

or (orientation of Plane_E changed in relation to the previous view):

Feature Plan_E

:

Reference : Axe X ZoX -40°

:

Page 2421

Space angles

Page 2422

Straight line / Plane and Plane / Straight line angles

Definition domain [-90° ; 90°] The space angle evaluated by the software is the angle that exists between the plane and the straight line (or the straight line and the plane). The sign of the angle is positive if the directions are identical, and negative if they are opposing. It should be noted that in this case, the by the

position inverts the sign of the angle supplied

position.

Example 1 :

Space angle P-D1 = space angle P-D2 = space angle P-D3 = space angle P-D4 = 0° in the positions.

and

Example 2 :

Space Angle P-D1 = space angle P-D2 = space angle P-D3 = space angle P-D4 = 0° in the positions.

and

Page 2423

Example 3 :

Space angle P-D1 = 90° in position

. Space angle P-D1 = -90° in position

.

Space angle P-D2 = -90° in position

. Space angle P-D2 = 90° in position

.

Example 4 :

Page 2424

Space angle P-D1 = -90° in position

. Space angle P-D1 = 90° in position

.

Space angle P-D2 = 90° in position

. Space angle P-D2 = -90° in position

.

Example 5 :

Space angle P-D2 = 40° in position

.

Space angle P-D2 = -40° in position

.

Example 6 :

Space angle P-D2 = -40° in position Space angle P-D2 = 40° in position

. .

Page 2425

DMIS functions supported VARNAM=ASSIGN/expr BOUND/n{[F(),FA()]}...........................................n >= 1 CALL/M(),param,param... CALL/EXTERN,DMIS,M(),param,param... CALL/EXTERN,DMIS,’module_id’ CALL/EXTERN,SYS,’pathname’[WAIT, SPAWN],param,param... CASE/DOUBLE CLOSE/DID(),KEEP CLOSE/DID(),DELETE CONST/ARC,F(),BF,FA(),n{[F(),FA()]}........................n >= 2 CONST/ARC,F(),PROJCT,FA(),[F(),FA()] CONST/ARC,F(),TR,FA() CONST/CIRCLE,F(),BF,FA(),n{[F(),FA()]}.....................n >= 2 CONST/CIRCLE,F(),INTOF,FA(),[F(),FA()] CONST/CIRCLE,F(),PROJCT,FA(),[F(),FA()] CONST/CIRCLE,F(),TR,FA() CONST/CONE,F(),BF,FA(),n{[F(),FA()]}.......................n >= 5 CONST/CONE,F(),TR,FA() CONST/CPARLN,F(),TR,FA() CONST/CYLNDR,F(),BF,FA(),n{[F(),FA()]}.....................n >= 4 CONST/CYLNDR,F(),TR,FA() CONST/GSURF,F(),BF,FA(),n{[F(),FA()]}....................n >= 1 CONST/LINE,F(),BF,FA(),n{[F(),FA()]}...........................n >= 1 CONST/LINE,F(),INTOF,FA(),[F(),FA()] CONST/LINE,F(),MIDLI,FA(),[F(),FA()] CONST/LINE,F(),OFFSET,n{[F(),FA()]}..................... ....n >= 2 CONST/LINE,F(),PROJLI,FA(),[F(),FA()] CONST/LINE,F(),PROJLI,FA() CONST/LINE,F(),PARTO,FA(),THRU, [F(),FA()]

Page 2426

CONST/LINE,F(),PARTO,F(),THRU,FA() CONST/LINE,F(),PERPTO,FA(),THRU, [F(),FA()] CONST/LINE,F(),PERPTO,F(),THRU,FA() CONST/LINE,F(),TR,FA() CONST/PLANE,F(),BF,FA(),n{FA()}............................n >= 2 CONST/PLANE,F(),MIDPL,FA(),FA() CONST/PLANE,F(),OFFSET,n{[F(),FA()]}....................n >= 3 CONST/PLANE,F(),PARTO,FA(),THRU, [F(),FA()] CONST/PLANE,F(),PARTO,F(),THRU,FA() CONST/PLANE,F(),PERPTO,FA(),THRU, [F(),FA()] CONST/PLANE,F(),PERPTO,F(),THRU,FA() CONST/PLANE,F(),TR,FA() CONST/POINT,F(),EXTREM,[MIN,MAX],FA(),[XDIR,YDIR,ZDIR] CONST/POINT,F(),EXTREM,[MIN,MAX],FA(),[F(),FA()] CONST/POINT,F(),EXTREM,[MIN,MAX],VEC,REAL,REAL,REAL CONST/POINT,F(),MOVEPT,FA(),REAL,REAL,REAL CONST/POINT,F(),TR,FA() CONST/POINT,F(),INTOF,FA(),[F(),FA()] CONST/POINT,F(),MIDPT,FA(),[F(),FA()] CONST/POINT,F(),PROJPT,FA(),[F(),FA()] CONST/POINT,F(),PROJPT,FA() CONST/POINT,F(),VERTEX,FA() CONST/SPHERE,F(),BF,FA(),n{[F(),FA()]}.....................n >= 3 CONST/SPHERE,F(),TR,FA() CI()=CLMPID/'text' CS()=CLMPSN/'text' CR()=CRGDEF/LOCAL CR()=CRGDEF/REMOTE CR()=CRGDEF/n{REAL} CRSLCT/CR() CRSLCT/ALL DATDEF/FA(),DAT()

Page 2427

DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],[ XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XORI G,YORIG,ZORIG],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XORI G,YORIG,ZORIG],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XORI G,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YO RIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YO RIG,ZORIG],DAT(),[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],[XORIG,YORIG,YORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YO RIG,ZORIG],DAT(),[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR, ZDIR,-ZDIR] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR, ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],[XORIG,YORIG,YORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR, ZDIR,-ZDIR],DAT(),[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],DAT(),[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],[ XORIG,YORIG,YORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],DAT(),[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR, ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR,ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],DAT(),[XDIR,-XDIR,YDIR,-YDIR, ZDIR,-ZDIR],[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],DAT(),[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG] DATSET/MCS DECL/[LOCAL,GLOBAL],[BOOL,INTGR,LONG,REAL,DOUBLE],varname (and arrays are supported) DECL/[LOCAL,GLOBAL],CHAR,n,varname (and arrays are supported) DECPL/[ALL,ANGLE,DIST,DEV],[DEFALT,n] DELETE/[F(),FA(),D(),DA()]

Page 2428

DEVICE/COMM,’devicename’ DEVICE/TERM,’devicename’ DEVICE/STOR,’devicename’ DISPLY/STOR,[DMIS,V()] DISPLY/TERM,DMIS DISPLY/PRINT,V() DISPLY/COMM DI()=DMEID/'text' DS()=DMESWI/'text' DV()=DMESWV/'text' DMISMD,’module_id’ DMISMN/'text' DO/varname,DOUBLE,DOUBLE,DOUBLE ELSE ENDCAS ENDDO ENDFIL ENDIF ENDMAC ENDMES ENDSEL ENDXTN EQUATE/DA(),CADCS ERROR/(label),[INTEGER,ALL,ILTCH,NOTOUCH] ERROR/OFF ERROR/AUTO,[INTEGER,ALL,ILTCH,NOTOUCH] EXTFIL/DMIS,’filename’ EVAL/FA(),n{T()} EVAL/FA(),FA(),T() FEAT/ARC,[INNER,OUTER],[CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL FEAT/ARC,4POINT,[INNER,OUTER],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,,REAL,REAL,REAL FEAT/CIRCLE,[INNER,OUTER],[CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL

Page 2429

FEAT/CONE,[INNER,OUTER],[CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL FEAT/CPARLN,[INNER,OUTER],[ROUND,FLAT], [CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL FEAT/CYLNDR,[INNER,OUTER],[CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL FEAT/EDGEPT FEAT/ELLIPS,[INNER,OUTER], [CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,[MINOR,MAJOR] ,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL FEAT/GCURVE,CART,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL FEAT/GSURF FEAT/LINE,BND, [CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL FEAT/LINE,UNBND, [CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL FEAT/PLANE, [CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL FEAT/POINT, [CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL FEAT/SPHERE,[INNER,OUTER], [CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL FEDRAT/[MESVEL,POSVEL],[MPM,PCENT,IPS,IPM],REAL FEDRAT/POSVEL,[HIGH,LOW] FILNAM/'text' FI()=FIXTID/'text' FS()=FIXTSN/'text' FROM/[Ø,CART,POL,]REAL,REAL,REAL GEOALG/[LINE,PLANE],[LSTSQR,MINMAX,MAXINS,DEFALT] GEOALG/[ARC,CONE,CPARLN,ELLIPS,SPHERE],[LSTSQR,MINMAX,DEFALT] GEOALG/[CIRCLE,CYLNDR],[LSTSQR,MINMAX,MINCIR,MAXINS,DEFALT] G()=GEOM/MODEL,'cad file path' GOHOME GET/CR(),FA() GET/CR(),D() GOTO/REAL,REAL,REAL GOTO/INCR,REAL,REAL,REAL GOTO/POL,REAL,REAL,REAL IF/(formula) ITERAT/(label1),(label2),REAL,[ABSL,INCR],REAL,[XAXIS,YAXIS,ZAXIS],n{FA()}................................n >= 1 ITERAT/(label1),(label2),REAL,[ABSL,INCR],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,n{FA()}.....................................n >= 1

Page 2430

JUMPTO/(label) LOCATE/[XDIR,YDIR,ZDIR,XYDIR,YZDIR,ZXDIR,XYZDIR,NOTRAN],[XAXIS,YAXIS,ZAXIS,XYAXIS,YZAXIS,ZXA XIS,XYZAXI,NOROT],n{[DAT(),FA()]}............................................n >= 1 LOCATE/[XAXIS,YAXIS,ZAXIS,XYAXIS,YZAXIS,ZXAXIS,XYZAXI,NOROT],n{[DAT(),FA()]}............................... .............n >= 1 LOCATE/[XDIR,YDIR,ZDIR,XYDIR,YZDIR,ZXDIR,XYZDIR,NOTRAN],n{[DAT(),FA()]}....................................... .....n >= 1 LI()=LOTID/'text' M()=MACRO/param,param… MEAS/ARC,F(),INTGR,VECBLD,REAL,INTGR MEAS/CIRCLE,F(),INTGR,VECBLD,REAL,INTGR MEAS/CONE,F(),INTGR MEAS/CPARLN,F(),INTGR,VECBLD,REAL,INTGR MEAS/CYLNDR,F(),INTGR MEAS/ELLIPS,F(),INTGR,VECBLD,REAL,INTGR MEAS/GCURVE, F(), n MEAS/GSURF,F(),INTGR MEAS/LINE,F(),INTGR MEAS/PLANE,F(),INTGR MEAS/POINT,F(),INTGR MEAS/POINT,F(),0 MEAS/SPHERE,F(),INTGR MD()=MFGDEV/'text' MODE/MAN MODE/PROG,MAN MODE/AUTO,PROG,MAN MODE/AUTO,MAN Varname=OBTAIN/[F(),FA(),TA(),Q(),S(),SA()],n OPEN/DID(),DIRECT,INPUT OPEN/DID(),DIRECT,OUPUT OPEN/DID(),DIRECT,OUPUT,APPEND OPEN/DID(),DIRECT,OUPUT,OVERWR OPEN/DID(),SNS,

Page 2431

OPEN/DID(),DAT, OP()=OPERID/'text' OUTPUT/FA() OUTPUT/FA(),FA(),TA() OUTPUT/FA(),n{TA()}........................................n >= 1 OUTPUT/R() OUTPUT/F(),R() OUTPUT/FA(),R() OUTPUT/FA(),FA(),n{TA()},R() n >= 1 OUTPUT/FA(),n{TA()},R() n >= 1 PAMEAS/P() PAMEAS/P(),REMOVE,COUNT,INTGR,INTGR PAMEAS/P(),REMOVE,DIST,REAL,REAL PATH/ARC,[CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL PATH/ARC,[CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL PATH/LINE,BND,[CART,POL],REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL PATH/CURVE,n{REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL}.................n >= 2 PAUSE PN()=PARTID/'text' PR()=PARTRV/'text' PS()=PARTSN/'text' PL()=PLANID/'text' PRCOMP/[ON,OFF] PV()=PREVOP/'text' PC()=PROCID/'text' PTBUFF/[ON,OFF] PTMEAS/CART,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL PTMEAS/POL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL PUT/CR(),FA() PUT/CR(),D() Q()=QISDEF/'text' Q()=QISDEF/'text', 'text'

Page 2432

RECALL/[D(),DA()] R()=REPORT/n{[CI(),CS(),DI(),DS(),DV(),FI(),FS(),LI(),MD(),OP(),PN(),PR(),PS(),PL(),PV(),PC(),Q(),DATE,TIM E]} n >= 1 RESUME/[(label),CURENT,END,NEXT,START,STOP] RMEAS/ARC,F(),INTGR,FA() RMEAS/CIRCLE,F(),INTGR,FA() RMEAS/CPARLN,F(),INTGR,FA() RMEAS/ELLIPS,F(),INTGR,FA() RMEAS/GSURF,F(),INTGR,FA() RMEAS/LINE,F(),INTGR,FA() RMEAS/POINT,F(),INTGR,FA() RMEAS/ARC,F(),INTGR,VECBLD,REAL,INTGR RMEAS/CIRCLE,F(),INTGR,VECBLD,REAL,INTGR RMEAS/CPARLN,F(),INTGR,VECBLD,REAL,INTGR RMEAS/ELLIPS,F(),INTGR,VECBLD,REAL,INTGR ROTATE/[XAXIS,YAXIS,ZAXIS],REAL ROTATE/[XAXIS,YAXIS,ZAXIS],[ F(),FA(),DAT()],[-XDIR,XDIR,-YDIR,YDIR,-ZDIR,ZDIR] ROTAB/RT(),[INCR,ABSL],[CCW,CW,XSHORT],[ROTNUL,ROTTOT],REAL ROTDEF ROTSET SAVE/D() SAVE/D(),DID() SAVE/DA() SAVE/DA(),DID() SCAN/CONTIN SCAN/PAUSE SCNMOD/ON SCNMOD/OFF SCNPLN/VEC, PLN.X, PLN.Y, PLN.Z SCNSET SELECT/DOUBLE SELECT/varname

Page 2433

SNSDEF/PROBE,[INDEX,FIXED],CART,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL SNSDEF/PROBE,[INDEX,FIXED],POL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL SNSDEF/PROBE,[INDEX,FIXED],VEC,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL SNSET/[APPRCH,RETRCT,SEARCH],REAL SNSET/DEPTH,[REAL,OFF] SNSLCT/S() TEXT/[OPER,MAN,OUTFIL,QUERY],'text' TOL/ANGL,REAL,REAL,REAL TOL/ANGLB,REAL,REAL,REAL TOL/ANGLR,REAL,REAL,[MMC,RFS],[DAT(), FA()] TOL/CIRLTY,REAL TOL/CONCEN,REAL,[DAT(),FA()] TOL/CORTOL,[XAXIS,YAXIS,ZAXIS,RADIUS,ANGLE],REAL,REAL TOL/CRNOUT,REAL,[DAT(),FA()] TOL/CYLCTY,REAL TOL/DIAM,REAL,REAL TOL/DISTB,NOMINL,REAL,REAL,REAL,[XAXIS,YAXIS,ZAXIS,PT2PT] TOL/FLAT,REAL TOL/[PARLEL,PERP],REAL,RFS,[FA(),DAT()] TOL/POS,[2D,3D],REAL,RFS TOL/PROFS,REAL,REAL TOL/PROFL,REAL,REAL TOL/PROFP,REAL,REAL TOL/RAD,REAL,REAL TOL/STRGHT,REAL TOL/SYM,REAL,[FA(),DAT()] TOL/TRNOUT,REAL,[FA(),DAT()] TOL/WIDTH,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL,REAL TRANS/ n{[XORIG,YORIG,ZORIG],REAL}.........................n Advanced Parameters, Config tab, DMIS section: CORTOL_ON_PLANES = 0 (default value): the instruction TOL/CORTOL applied to a plane generates an error when the OUTPUT or EVAL instructions are executed. CORTOL_ON_PLANES = 1: the instruction TOL/CORTOL applied to a plane is ignored when the OUTPUT or EVAL instructions are executed.

Page 2436

Accepted entities by the CAD standard The goal of this appendix is to present an exhaustive list of the entities (and their name) accepted by the software in the standards IGES, SET, UNISURF, VDA and CATIA.

According to the standards IGES 4.0 and IGES 5.2. Name

Entities

@100

Circular arc

@102

Composite curve

@104

Conic arc

@106

Copious data, form 1,2,3, 11,12,13

@108

Plane, form +1 et -1 form 0

@110

Line

@112

Parametric spline curve

@114

Parametric spline surface

@116

Point

@118

Ruled Surface

@120

Revolution Surface

@122

Tabulated Cylinder

@123

@124

Direction - Pointed by a @190 entity

@126

- Independent and not pointed entity : alignment - Pointed by an entity : transformation matrix Rational B-Spline Curve

@128

Rational B-Spline Surface

@141

Boundary Entity

@142

Curve On a Parametric Surface

@143

Bounded Surface

@144

Trimmed Parametric Surface

@154

Right Circular Cylinder

@156

Right Circular Cone Frustrum

@158

Sphere

@160

Torus

Page 2437

@190

@402

Plane surface - Pointed by @108, @143 or @144 entities - Pointed on a @116 and a @123 entities Associativity instance form 9 (single parent) - Pointed on @108 entities

SET Converter According to the standard SET Z68-300 of june 89 Name

Entities

@1

Point

@2

Line segment

@3

Polyline

@5

Set of points

@10

Arc of circle

@11

Elliptic arc

@20

Parametric polynomial composite curve

21

Curve defined by poles

@31

Plane

@32

Cylinder

@33

Cone

@34

Sphere

@35

Torus

@36

Revolution surface

@37

Tabulated cylinder

@38

Ruled surface

@40

Parametric polynomial composite surface

@41

Surface defined by poles

@102

Composite face

@103

Simple face

@104

Plane facet

@120

Composit curve

UNISURF converter Name K

Entities Bézier patch

Page 2438

KR

Restraint Bézier patch

C

Parametric curve

F

Group of Features (= Layers)

VDAFS 2.0 converter Name

Entities

POINT

Point coordinates

PSET

Sequence of « n » points

MDI

Point-vector sequence

CURVE

Parametric curve

SURF

Parametric surface

CONS

Curve on a Surface

FACE

Bounded surface

GROUP

Group of Features (= Layers)

CATIA V4 converter Type

Name

Converted entity

1

Point

Point

2

Line

Curve

3

Curve

Curve

5

Surface

Surface

6

Face

Surface

7

Volume

Several surfaces

8

3 axis system

Alignment

12

Compound curve

Curve

13

Skin

Several surfaces

16-17

Solid

Several surfaces

28

Ditto Space

Point, Curve, Surface

2D entities (greater than 80) are not supported. Description of conversion options for the Catia V4 converter for the software. By default if there is no parameter in the INI file, the parameters are set to zero.

Page 2439

These parameters are to be modified in the Cat.ini file, located in the software installation main folder. If it doesn't exist yet, it should be created. [TOLERANCE] NB_DECIMALE=7 Number of decimals. [CATIA CONF] CHOIX_MODEL=1 / 0 Dialog for choice of CAD model to convert / Convert all CAD models. LAYER_COURANT=1 / 0 Conversion of current layer entities only / Conversion of entities of all layers. READ_MOKUP= 1 / 0 Process MOKUP (1) or not (0) CHOIX_AXIS=1 / 0 Select alignment in the model / work in the initial alignment FILTRE_LAYER=1 / 0 Choose the layer fillter in the model if exists/ or not. READ_ANALYTIQUE_SURF=1 / 0 Try to find analytic surface like plane, cylinder... / read only the Bspline descrition of CATIA surface. MOKUP_AS_POLYLINE=1 / 0 convert SOLID MOK-UP facets to Polylines – wireframe representation / convert SOLID MOK-UP facets to restreint surface (can be used only if READ_MOKUP=1). FACE_ATT=1 / 0 faces of SOLID keep layer and color / layer and color are the same of the CATIA solid. SOLID_TO_BOUNDED=1 Must be equal to 1 for CATIA. [FILTRAGE DE DOMAINE] COURBE_LIM_3D=1 / 0 Write boundaries curves with (u, v) parameters (like in the read Catia file)/ or not. SOLID=0 / 1 Translate solids / or not. DRAW=0 / 1 Translate drawing / or not. FACES=0 / 1 Translate trimmed surfaces / or not. SURFACES=0 / 1 Translate independant surfaces / or not. FILAIRE=0 / 1 Convert independent 1D entities (circle, line, spline curve, etc.) / Do not convert independent 1D entities. [MODIFICATION D'ATTRIBUT] VISIBILITY= -1 / 0 / 1 Do not convert invisible entities / Convert invisible entities into coded invisible entities / Convert invisible entities into coded visible entities. FILS_DE_402=0 / 1 Take the attributes of each of the entities in a group / Apply the color and the layer of a group to each of its entities [SUPPRESSION ENTITES] CATIA_SKIN=1 / 0 Manage SKIN of CATIA / or not. CATIA_VOLUME=1 / 0 Manage VOLUMES of CATIA / or not. [TRANSFORMATION ENTITES] FRONTIERE_CATIA=1 / 0 The face boundaries are closed by adding a segment / The boundaries of Catia model faces are not modified. PARAMC_TO_BSPLINE=0

Page 2440

Required. Convert parametric curves to b-spline curves. ELLIPSE_TO_POLYLINE=1 / 0 Convert ellipse to polyline / or not. CURVE_TO_POLYLINE=1 / 0 Convert ellipse to polyline / or not. DISCRETISATION=50 Number of points for segmentation of curves. EXPLOSE_GROUP=1 / 0 Convert the entities in a group as independent entities / Convert the group entity. [LAYER PER SOLID] FIRST_LAYER_SOLID=256 Number of layer of the 1rst SOLID.

CATIA V5 converter Catégorie

Entité CATIA V5 3D

Point

Point

Curve

Line Spline Circle Ellipse Parabola Hyperbola Parametric Curve

Attributs

Color Layer

Surface

Plane Cylindre Cone Sphere Torus Surface of Linear Extrusion Surface of Revolution Offset Surface Blend Surface Fillet Surface Bspline Surface Ruled Surface

Face

Face

Functional Dimensional and Tolerancing Entities

FD & T

Alignment

Axis placement

Page 2441

List of the functions that can be configured with variables Function

Parameter

Save Working Session Import Export Print Report Archive Current Control

File name File name File name PDF file name File name

Move Rotary Table Set-up Rotary Table

Via Point

Angle Speed X, Y, Z Position Approach Distance Search Distance Retraction Distance X, Y, Z Position

Save a probes file

File name

All definition windows Measure Surface Point

All coordinates (Material) Thickness (Material) Thickness Search Distance Approach Distance Search Distance Retraction Distance Approach Distance Search Distance Retraction Distance Approach Distance Search Distance Retraction Distance

Probing Point

Measure Cloud of Points Measure circle by contouring

Measure line by contouring

All automated measurement windows

Construct geometrical point using coordinates Construct geometrical point using the CAO model Construct surface point by projection Construct surface point by intersection Construct a point-axis-cone Construct by extreme point Construct point by offset Construct line by offset Construct parallel line Construct a plane by offset Construct a plane parallel to Construct section

X, Y, Z coordinates Offset Offset Offset Diameter Free direction Offset Offset distance Distance Offset distance Distance Maximum tolerance Minimum tolerance

Page 2442

Evaluate a distance Evaluate an angle Evaluate an alignment information All geometrical tolerance evaluation windows

Save alignment file Model 3-2-1 Geometrical alignment On 3 Center Points On Reference Features

Nominal distances Nominal angles X, Y, Z translation X, Y, Z rotation Tolerance values Unilateral criterion value File name X, Y, Z Position X, Y, Z translation X, Y, Z rotation All coordinates All coordinates

Page 2443

CAD formats Formats VDAFS

Options V

UNISURF

U

IGES

I

SET

S

Catia V4 old

K

Catia V4

K

Catia V5 UNIGRAPHICS

M20 Y01

IDEAS old

Y02

IDEAS

Y02

ProE type 1 ProE type 2

Y04 + ProE via ToolKit G44 + license file

STEP

Y05 + license file

Notes

Used when in the USER.ini file [CatiaV4] ConverterVersion=1 Imports geometrical tolerances Used when in the USER.ini file [Ideas] ConverterVersion=1 Imports geometrical tolerances but does not display them in the 3D View Imports geometrical tolerances

For a detailed list of the versions supported by the software, see the file ReadMe.htm in the software's installation directory.

Converting a CAD file to PRO-Engineer type 1 format To convert a CAD file to PRO-Engineer format, the PRO-Engineer (Pro-Engineer Wildfire2 or 3) and the software programs must be installed on the same workstation. To install the PRO-Engineer software, contact the PTC company. Configuring the software: Before converting the first CAD file to PRO-E format, certain software parameter settings must be checked. In the Preferences menu, Advanced Parameters option, XG_USER tab, [PROENGINEER] section: PRO_COMM_MSG = "C:\Program Files\PRO-EWildfire\i486_nt\obj\pro_comm_msg.exe" STARTCOMMAND = "C:\Program Files\PRO-EWildfire\bin\proewildfire.bat" Check that these parameter settings have the correct access path to the PRO-Engineer installation directory.

Converting CAD files to STEP and PRO-Engineer type 2 formats To convert a CAD file to STEP or PRO-Engineer format, an additional license is required. To obtain this license, first note the physical address of the Ethernet board. To do this, launch the software.

Page 2444

In the ? menu, About this program, in the Hardware section, read the line for the network board (card) and note the number shown at the end of the line:

Send this number to the hotline: [email protected].

When you receive the license from Metrologic Group, save the license file on your hard drive. Launch the software, open the CAD file conversion window, select the STEP or Pro-E file to be converted and click Convert. The software displays the following window:

Select Specify the License File and click Next.

Page 2445

Click Browse and specify the path to the location in which you saved the license file, then click Next.

The license is recognized. Click Finish. The conversion starts.

This procedure only needs to be performed once for the first conversion. If the license is not valid, the following message is displayed:

Please request a new license.

Page 2446

CSV work import Format General remarks       

The 11 first lines are ignored by the parser. Every line that begin by ‘$$’ is ignored because considered as a comment. The accepted field delimiters are ‘;’ and ‘,’. In numbers ‘,’ and ‘.’ are accepted as decimal value separators. If the current working session contains one or more open CAD files, the generated point features will be surface points. Otherwise, they are considered as geometrical points. The material thickness is used only if the parameter THICKNESS of the section IMPORT of the file XG_USER is different of 0. If the parameter SLOTAXIS of the section IMPORT of the file XG_USER is different of 0, then the given orientation of rectangles and round slots is the “small axis” (and not the “large axis”).

Recognized features The following table indicates the different columns of each feature. Colum n/ 1 Featur e Sectio SET n Point PT

4

5

6

7

8

Pos X

Pos Y

Pos Z

Nor X

Nor Y

Nor Z

Name

Pos X

Pos Y

Pos Z

Nor X

Nor Y

Nor Z

Name

Pos X

Pos Y

Pos Z

Nor X

Nor Y

Nor Z

Name

Pos X

Pos Y

Pos Z

Nor X

Nor Y

Nor Z

Name

Pos X

Pos Y

Pos Z

Nor X

Nor Y

Nor Z

SPH

Name

Pos X

Pos Y

Pos Z

Cylinde CYL r

Name

Pos X

Pos Y

Pos Z

Edge BPT Point Circle CIR Rectan SLT gle Slot SLT Sphere

2

3

Name

Num. points

Name

9

10

11

12

13

FLAT

Width

Height

Ori X

Ori Y

Width

Height

Ori X

Ori Y

ROUND

Diam Ori X

Ori Y

Ori Z

Diam

Height

Page 2447

Operators and functions for the calculator All the following functions can be used in GM2 program mode. However, only those marked DMIS are compatible with the standard DMIS language.

Operators .FALSE.

DMIS

Constant used to determine whether a condition is false

.TRUE.

DMIS

Constant used to determine whether a condition is true

.EQ.

DMIS

"Equals" operator

.NE.

DMIS

"Not Equal to" operator

.LT.

DMIS

"Less Than" operator

.LE.

DMIS

"Less than or Equal to" operator

.GT.

DMIS

"Greater Than" operator

.GE.

DMIS

"Greater than or Equal to" operator

.AND.

DMIS

"And" operator

.OR.

DMIS

"Or" operator

.NOT.

DMIS

"Not" operator

()

DMIS

Parenthesis/Brackets

[]

DMIS

Access to a table cell (double tables only)

/

DMIS

Division

%

Modulo

PI

PI (3.14) constant

*

DMIS

Multiplication

**

DMIS

Exponent

+

DMIS

Addition

-

DMIS

Subtraction (digital or binary)

^

Exponent

=

"Equals" operator

&

"And" operator

|

"Or" operator

!=

"Not equal to" operator

!

"Not" operator




"Greater than" operator

=

"Greater than or equal to" operator

Page 2448

Functions ABS(x) ACOS(x) ASIN(x) ATAN(x) ATAN2(x,y)

DMIS DMIS DMIS DMIS DMIS

CHR(x)

DMIS

CONCAT(s1,s2,...) COS(x)

DMIS DMIS

DEVICE_INFO (x)

DTOR(x)

DMIS

ELEMNT(x,c,s)

DMIS

EOF(s) EXIST(s) EXP(x)

DMIS

EXP_INFO('SCALE_TYPE')

EXP_INFO('SCALE_VALUE') EXP_INFO('SCALE_ALIGNMENT') EXP_INFO('SCALE_FORMULA') EXP_INFO('SCALE_VALUE_X')

EXP_INFO('SCALE_VALUE_Y')

EXP_INFO('SCALE_VALUE_Z') EXP_INFO('SCALE_FORMULA_X' ) EXP_INFO('SCALE_FORMULA_Y' ) EXP_INFO('SCALE_FORMULA_Z'

DMIS

Absolute value of a number Arc cos Arc sin Arc tan Arc tan second Transforms a number (representing an ASCII character) into a string Concatenates strings Cosine Only available with Laser Tracker. Returns some machine information (if available): - 1: Protocol (IP address, etc.) - 2: Brand - 3: Device type - 4: Controller version - 5: Laser Serial number - 6 : Humidity - 7 : Pressure - 8 : Temperature Converts degrees to radians Returns the field "x" of a string "s" with the separator "c" Indicates if file end has been reached Indicates if the file with path "s" exists Exponential Returns : - "NONE" if Expansion/ Shrinking is not activated - "XYZ" if an Expansion/ Shrinking coefficient is applied on XYZ -"COEFFICIENT" if a single Expansion/ Shrinking coefficient is applied - "DISTANCE" if a distance coefficient is applied. Returns the coefficient numerical value (only available for single coefficient or distance coefficient). Returns the alignment name used for the Expansion/ Shrinking (not available if Expansion/Shrinking is not activated). Returns the coefficient literal formula (only available for single coefficient or distance coefficient). Returns the X Expansion/Shrinking coefficient numerical value (only available if a XYZ coefficient is applied). Returns the Y Expansion/Shrinking coefficient numerical value (only available if a XYZ coefficient is applied). Returns the Z Expansion/Shrinking coefficient numerical value (only available if a XYZ coefficient is applied). Returns the X Expansion/Shrinking coefficient literal formula (only available if a XYZ coefficient is applied). Returns the Y Expansion/Shrinking coefficient literal formula (only available if a XYZ coefficient is applied). Returns the Z Expansion/Shrinking coefficient literal

Page 2449

) INDIX(s1,s2)

DMIS

INT(x)

DMIS

IT() IT(p) IT(x1,x2...) IT(p,x1,x2...) LEN(s) LN(x) LOG(x) LWC(s)

DMIS DMIS DMIS

MN(x1,x2, ...)

DMIS

MOD(x,y)

DMIS

MX(x1,x2, ...)

DMIS

NINT(x)

DMIS

PATHEXPAND(x) PTDATA('x')

DMIS

RMS(s) RPT(s,x) RTOD(x)

DMIS

SCALE ('ALG') SDATE() SIGN(x,y) SIN(x)

DMIS DMIS DMIS

SPAWN('s') SQRT(x) STIME()( STR(x)

DMIS DMIS DMIS

SUBSTR(s,x,y)

DMIS

TAN(x) TEMPC(x) TEMPC(x) TEMPC(0) TEMPF(x) TEMPC(0)

DMIS

formula (only available if a XYZ coefficient is applied). Searches for the position of the string "s2" in the string "s1" Converts a double to an integer by rounding down Returns the percentage of features in the tolerance interval. p represents the percentage of the tolerance interval. Returns the percentage of features in the tolerance interval. Returns the percentage of features, from among those indicated, in the tolerance interval. p represents the percentage of the tolerance interval. Returns the percentage of features, from among those indicated, in the tolerance interval. Length of the string "s" Naperian logarithm Base 10 logarithm Returns the string "s" converted into lower case Returns the smallest number passed by the parameters Modulus of "x" with respect to "y" Returns the largest number passed by the parameters Converts a double to an integer by rounding to the nearest Returns the complete path of the text/value feature x using a BASE_PATH variable. Returns the number of points used for the x feature's measurement or construction. Returns the Root Mean Square deviation of a 3 center point alignment or a best-fit alignment Returns a string composed of "x" times string "s" Converts radians to degrees Returns the scale factory calculated when creating the ALG alignment by Bestfit. Returns date in the form of a string Returns "x" if "y" is positive and "-x" otherwise Sine s represents a command line. Returns the return code of the program. Square root Returns time in the form of a string Converts a number "x" into a string Returns the sub-string "s", starting at the character number "x" and ending with the character number "y" Tangent Temperature in degrees Celsius of the "x" sensor. Temperature in degrees Celsius of the "x" sensor. Reference temperature in degrees Celsius Temperature in degrees Fahrenheit of "x" sensor. Reference temperature in degrees Celsius

TEMPC()

Temperature in degrees Celsius

TEMPF()

Temperature in degrees Fahrenheit

TIME()

Returns time (in seconds) in the form of an integer

Page 2450

TRIM(s) UPC(s) VAL(s) WAITIL(x) WORKINFO('x')

DMIS

Returns the string with no spaces at the start and end Returns the string "s" converted into upper case (capital) letters Transforms a string representing a number into a number Wait until the specified time (in seconds) Returns x as value or string (visible in the feature commentary), x being a working session information variable.

Page 2451

Visual Basic command for user rules



Application :

FeatList

Get : return FeatList

INT MsgBox BSTR Text BSTR Title BSTR NotUsed INT NotUsed //DISP_PROPERTY_PARAM("Value", GetValue, SetValue, VT_VARIANT, VTS_BSTR) BOOL ValueExists BSTR BSTR LocalizeName BSTR



FeatList :

ActivFeat

Get : return activ feat

Feat FindFeat BSTR : return feat



Feat :

Generic

Get : return Generic part of feat

//Type

Get :

Dim

Get (VTS_I2, VTS_I2) : return Dim

Dir

Get (VTS_I2, VTS_I2) : return Dir

Pos

Get (VTS_I2, VTS_I2) : return Pos

Boundaries

Get(VTS_I2)



Generic :

Page 2452

Name

Get & Set

LayerName

Get & Set

CAOAlgnUsed

Get & Set

AlgnName

Get & Set

//CoordType

GetCoordType, SetCoordType, VT_I2)

Copy2Actual

Get & Set



Define : the feat to define

Generic

Get : return Generic part of feat

Dim1 Dim2 Dim3 Pos1 Pos2 Pos3 Vec1 Vec2 /*Angle1 Value1 Value2 Used1 Used2 Used3 Used4 SurfPt

 NrPts

Get : return Dim : Diameter (arc, circle, cylinder, hexagon, sphere), Angle (cone), Diam A (ellipse, torus), Length (rectangle, slot) Get : return Dim : Diameter (cone), Height (cylinder), Diam B (ellipse, torus), Width (rectangle, slot) Get : return Dim : Height (cone) Get : return Pos : Center (arc, circle, ellipse, hexagon, rectangle, slot, sphere, torus), Base (cone, cylinder), Position (point, plane), Point1 (line) Get : return Pos : Start point (arc), Point2 (line) Get : return Pos : End point (arc) Get : return Vec : Normal (arc, circle, ellipse, point, hexagon, plane, rectangle, slot, torus), Axis (cone, cylinder) Get : return Vec : Orientation (ellipse, hexagon, rectangle, slot) GetAngle1, SetAngle1, VT_R8) GetValue1, SetValue1, VT_R8) GetValue2, SetValue2, VT_R8) GetUsed1, SetUsed1, VT_BOOL) GetUsed2, SetUsed2, VT_BOOL) GetUsed3, SetUsed3, VT_BOOL) GetUsed4, SetUsed4, VT_BOOL)*/ Get : return SurfPt

Meas : the feat to measure Get & Set : Number of points

TgOutMatUsed

Get & Set

CylProbeUsed

Get & Set

ProbAssist

Get & Set : ProbAssistParams

Generic

Get : return Generic part of feat



AutoMeas : the feat to measure in automatic mode

Get & Set : Type NrPts Depth1 Depth2 Value1

Type of measure method Total Pnts Nbr(arc, circle, ellipse, hexa, rect, slot, point, line) or Nbr Pnts/Path (cone, cylinder, sphere) arc, circle, cone, cylinder, ellipse, hexa, rect, slot, line cone, cylinder Nbr of Paths (cone, cylinder, sphere) ; Grid Step (plane method 1) ; Step 1 (plane method 2) ; Int Diameter (plane method 3) ; Cst step (section method 1) ; Max err (section method 2), Radius (point)

Page 2453

Value2 Value3 Value4 Value5 Value6 Angle1 Angle2 Used1 Used2 Used3 CNC ProbingMode Get GridData Offset Generic //DefineValid GetDefineValid, SetDefineValid, VT_BOOL) //Define



Get

Y

Get

Z

Get

IsValid

Get

Get & Set Get & Set

TolPlus

Get & Set

TolMinus

Get & Set

TolUsed

Get & Set

IsValid

Get

Vec :

I

Get & Set

J

Get & Set

K

Get & Set

IsValid

Get

 Count

Get : return Define part of feat

Dim :

TolIso



Get : return CNCParams return ProbingMode Get : return GridData Get : return Offset Get : return Generic part of feat

Pos :

X

 Value

Step2 (plane method 1 and 2) ; Ext Diameter (plane method 3) ; Max Step (section method 2) Offset (plane method 1) ; Density (plane method 2) ; Nbr of Paths (plane method 3) Offset (plane method 2) ; Nbr Pnts/Paths (plane method 3) Rotation (plane method 2) ; Dx (plane method 3) Dy (plane method 3) Starting angle (circle, cone, cylinder, ellipse, hexa, rect, slot, plane method 3) Total angle (circle, cone, cylinder, ellipse, hexa, rect, slot, plane method 3) Invert Direction (arc) ; Nbr pnts or step (plane method 1) ; Step or density (plane method 2) ; Normal orientation (section) Direction of path (section)

VecList : Get

Page 2454

First

Get

Next

Get

 ProbingMode : StaticUsed Get & Set NominalUsed

Get & Set

Direction

Get & Set

Used

Get & Set

Relative

Get & Set

AutoProjPlane

Get : return AutoProjPlane

 Used

AutoProjPlane : Get & Set

NrPts

Get & Set

Offset

Get & Set

ThMat

Get & Set

 CNCParams : Approach Get & Set Search

Get & Set

Retract

Get & Set

ClearUsed

Get & Set

ClearValue

Get & Set

ClearReverse

Get & Set

 Start

Offset : Get & Set

Middle

Get & Set

End

Get & Set

 Used

ProbAssistParams : Get & Set

Value

Get & Set

 Surface

SurfPt : Get & Set

Page 2455

Type

Get & Set

RefFeat

Get & Set

Value

Get & Set

 Origin

GridData : Get

Normal

Get

AxisType

Get & Set

AxisValue

Get & Set

Axis1

Get

Axis2

Get

Intersection

Get

Length1

Get & Set

Length2

Get & Set

Offset

Get & Set

Direction1

Get & Set

Direction2

Get & Set

ClearancePlane

Get & Set

Page 2456

Summary of the errors Error Number [0

, 1000 [

Significance Counters errors

[1000 , 5000 [

Software errors

[2000 , 2500 [

Johansson errors

[2500 , 3000 [

SIP errors

[3000 , 3500 [

Mitutoyo errors

[3500 , 3700 [

Zeiss errors

[3700 , 3800 [

Romer errors

[3800 , 4000 [

LK errors

[4000 , 4100 [

API errors

[4100 , 4200 [

John Deere errors

[4200 , 4300 [

Faro errors

[4300 , 4400 [

Brown & Sharp errors

[4500 , 4600 [

Driver errors DLL vanille

[4700 , 4800 [

Driver errors Mora

[4700 , 4800 [

DLL Lima errors

[4800 , 4900 [

Wenzel errors

[5000 , 9000 [

Metrolog XG errors

[6000 , 8000 [

DLL Lima errors (continued)

[9000 , 10000[

Errors already formatted as strings

[10000, 20000[

Counter system errors

[10000, 11000[

System Errors of Metrologic counter

[12000, 13000[

System errors of Johansson counter

[13000, 14000[

System errors of SIP counter

[20000, 30000[

System errors Desk

[30000, ...[

DLL system errors

Page 2457

-

Metroset errors

Counters errors 1

Metrodial Protocol Protected

2

Metrodia protocol unlocking attempt

9

Fuse 24V defective

10

Fuse -12 1st card ME531

11

Fuse +12 1st card ME531

12

Fuse +5 1st card ME531

13

Fuse -12 2nd card ME531

14

Fuse +12 2nd card ME531

15

Fusible +5 2nd carte ME531

16

Hard End Stop axis + X

17

Hard End Stop axis + Y

18

Hard End Stop axis + Z

19

Hard End Stop axis + R

32

Hard End Stop axis - X

33

Hard End Stop axis - Y

34

Hard End Stop axis - Z

35

Hard End Stop axis - R

36

Hard End Stop reached

48

Urgent Stop

49

Inhibited CN

50

CN in disconnected mode

51

Missing compressed air

64

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 0

65

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 1

66

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 2

67

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 3

68

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 4

69

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 5

Page 2458

70

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 6

71

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 7

72

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 8

73

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 9

74

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 10

75

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 11

76

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 12

77

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 13

78

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 14

79

Temperature : maxi threshold exceeded sensor 15

80

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 0

81

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 1

82

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 2

83

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 3

84

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 4

85

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 5

86

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 6

87

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 7

88

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 8

89

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 9

90

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 10

91

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 11

92

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 12

93

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 13

94

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 14

95

Temperature : mini threshold exceeded sensor 15

96

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 0

97

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 1

98

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 2

99

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 3

100

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 4

101

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 5

Page 2459

102

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 6

103

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 7

104

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 8

105

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 9

106

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 10

107

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 11

108

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 12

109

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 13

110

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 14

111

Temperature : maxi gradient exceeded sensor 15

255

CMM References not initialize

256

Reference not found on axis X

257

Reference not found on axis Y

258

Reference not found on axis Z

259

Reference not found on axis R

272

Amplitude scale signal axis X

273

Amplitude scale signal axis Y

274

Amplitude scale signal axis Z

275

Amplitude scale signal axis R

287

Amplitude count circuit

288

Amplitude count circuit axis X

289

Amplitude count circuit axis Y

290

Amplitude count circuit axis Z

291

Amplitude count circuit axis R

303

Too High Speed

304

Too High Speed axis X

305

Too High Speed axis Y

306

Too High Speed axis Z

307

Too High Speed axis R

319

Pursuit Error axis

320

Pursuit Error axis X

321

Pursuit Error axis Y

Page 2460

322

Pursuit Error axis Z

323

Pursuit Error axis R

335

CMM Limit reached

336

Soft End Stop axis + X

337

Soft End Stop axis + Y

338

Soft End Stop axis + Z

339

Soft End Stop axis + R

352

Soft End Stop axis - X

353

Soft End Stop axis - Y

354

Soft End Stop axis - Z

355

Soft End Stop axis - R

368

Check Error MDR axis X

369

Check Error MDR axis Y

370

Check Error MDR axis Z

371

Check Error MDR axis R

384

PH9 : Overload

385

PH9 : Datum

386

PH9 : Obstruct

387

PH9 : disconnected head

388

PHD9 disconnected

389

Motorized Head Initialization necessary

399

Defect general tension

400

General Overpressure

401

General Over-temperature

402

General Over-Current

403

Security Trigger

404

Clock lost

405

General Sub-Voltage

406

Ballast Power Exceeded

407

Urgent Stop defect : voltage test

408

Urgent Stop defect : blockade test

410

Over-current axis X

Page 2461

411

Over-current axis Y

412

Over-current axis Z

413

Motor Power Supply Defect

419

Defect on an axis

420

Defect axis X

421

Defect axis X

422

Defect axis X

423

Defect axis X

512

Unexpected Probing

513

XLib detected a collision

528

Probing not reached

560

Opened probe

570

Incorrect Probing

580

Opened Probe after the retraction

Errors SP600 600

SP600 Probe not calibrated

601

SP600 Probe incorrect command

602

Calibration SP600 lost

Speed broomstick error 603

Speed Broomstick Error X

604

Speed Broomstick Error Y

605

Speed Broomstick Error Z

606

Speed Broomstick Error R

700

Twin Security (simultaneous incoming in the passage)

Errors PHS1 800

Pursuit Error axis D

801

Pursuit Error axis E

802

Over-Current axis D

803

Over-Current axis E

Page 2462

804

Time-out positioning axis D

805

Time-out positioning axis E

806

Over Speed axis D

807

Over Speed axis E

808

Soft End Stop axis - D

809

Soft End Stop axis - E

810

Soft End Stop axis + D

811

Soft End Stop axis + E

812

Arm Security

813

Collision

814

No air

Software errors 1001

Opening link Error

1002

DLL creation Error

1003

No Console

1004

No CN

1005

Machine not motorized

1006

Table not motorized

1007

No Rotary Table

1008

No Motorized Head

1009

Status Control impossible

1010

Local control mode impossible

1011

No control mode 1/10 micron

1012

Read Error file INI

1013

Protection Error: volume correction

1014

Protection Error: probe changer

1015

Protection Error: stylus changer

1016

Protection Error

1017

Connection Problem ME57

1018

Max Volume of measurement (Light)

1019

No Error / CN updated

Page 2463

1020

CN has to be updated

1021

CN not recognize, or communication error

1022

CN has to be updated but impossible with this DLL

1023

Intern Error before loading

1024

Updated impossible

1025

Intern Error before loading

1026

Intern Error before the end of parameters loading

1027

Missing Probe

1028

Incorrect Parameter

Johansson errors 2001

Command suspended by RESET

2002

Incorrect Command Parameters

2003

Command unknown

2004

Probing failed

2005

Unexpected Probing

2006

Scale Error

2007

Motorized Head Error

2008

Tool Changer Error

2009

Opened Probe

2010

Error motor

2011

End Stop activated

2012

Air Pressure too low

2013

Urgent Stop

2014

CMM out of limits

2015

Probe Error TP12

2016

Time-out console

2017

CMM Out of order (Idle)

2018

Communication Error with the CMM

2019

Count Intern Error

2020

Probe Error (damped)

2021

Time-out linear compensation card

Page 2464

2022

Over Speed probe

2023

Pursuit Error

2024

Submissiveness Error

2025

Count Time-out

2026

Programming Error

SIP errors 2501

Incorrect Command

2502

CMM out of run

2503

Sinking sensor too high

2504

Rotary table Problem

2505

Sensor in touch with the changer

2506

Urgent Stop

2507

Stop console move

2508

Problem with the weight balancing of the probe

2509

CMM in blockade move mode

2510

CMM in CNC mode

2511

CMM in initializing phase

2512

Problem during the probe change (no contact, sensor not crashed)

2513

Problem during the probe change (no contact, sensor crashed)

2514

Problem during the probe change (contact, sensor not crashed)

2515

Problem during the probe change (motor problem)

2518

Speed calculation Problem

2519

Smoothing Error

2520

Suspended Calculation

2521

Number of points of profile incorrect

2523

Problem with the realization of table move

2524

Speed Smoothing Error

2525

Problem with average speed determination

2526

Number of max points reached

2527

Problem with start angle determination

2528

Command not allowed

Page 2465

2529

Dimension not reached

2530

Sensor is vibrating

2540

Material not found

2541

Material not found in search of material

2542

Measurement out of tolerance sensor

2543

Rotary table activated

Johansson (error send to proto) 2600

The runner variables are invalid

2601

No runner variables

2602

Assembly optimization impossible

2603

Violation Protection

2604

Error: construction impossible or not allowed

2605

The print file doesn't exits

2606

Printer unable

2607

Impression Error

2608

Impression Error

2609

The receipted feature name in Twin is incorrect

2610

The receipted feature name in Twin is a predefined feature name

2611

The directions of 3 points alignments are incorrect

2612

Wrong tolerances

2613

Alignments name incorrect

2614

Calibration Fault Form too high

2615

Error conditional statement

2616

Error conditional statement on the operator

2617

Warning on a head move

2618

Projection of surface point impossible

2619

Numerical definition incoherent

2620

Surface point out of closeness tolerance

Mitutoyo errors 3000

Geopack3 Macro has been re-initialized

Page 2466

Zeiss errors 3501

Driver not installed

3502

Communication Error

3503

Time-out on contact point generation

3504

General Time-out

3505

Incorrect Value

3508

CMM type incorrect

3509

Function forbidden

3510

Reference unknown

3513

Urgent Stop

3514

Collision

3515

Collision at the startup

3516

Positioning out of limits

3517

Measurement Error

3519

Probing failed

3520

Controller off

3521

Impossible move

3530

Break user

Romer errors

6 Axis Card Error code Metrolog XG 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 37010 37011 37012

Error code Romer 0x25145100 0x25145101 0x25145102 0x25145103 0x25145104 0x25145105 0x25145106 0x25145107 0x25145108 0x25145109 0x25145110A 0x25145110B 0x25145110C

Description Communication already established Error memory assignment CTS OFF Communication already cut Error of weft reception Time Out reached in reception Error weft emission Time out reached in emission Communication not established System disconnected Start of weft incorrect Weft length incorrect Weft CheckSum incorrect

Page 2467

37013 37014

0x25145110D 0x25145110E

GDS Driver Error code Metrolog XG 3740 3716 3717 3718 3719 3745 3746 3747 3748 3749 3750 3751 3752 3753 3754 3755 3756 3757 3758 3759 3760 3761 3762 3763 3764 3765 3766 3767 3768

Error code Romer 0x25145800 0x25145801 0x25145802 0x25145803 0x25145804 0x25145805 0x25145806 0x25145807 0x25145808 0x25145809 0x2514580A 0x2514580B 0x2514580C 0x2514580D 0x2514580E 0x2514580F 0x25145810 0x25145811 0x25145812 0x25145813 0x25145814 0x25145815 0x25145816 0x25145817 0x25145818 0x25145819 0x2514581A 0x2514581B 0x2514581C

8 Axis Card Error code Metrolog XG 3770 3771 3772 3773 3774 3775 3776 3777 3778 3779 3780

Error code Romer 0x25145001 0x25145002 0x25145003 0x25145004 0x25145005 0x25145006 0x25145007 0x25145008 0x25145009 0x2514500A 0x2514500B

Weft unknown Coding device not activated

Description Communication not established Sensor File not found Sensor File Format incorrect Armspecs file not found Armspecs file format incorrect Reset canceled by the user Mouse Stop Reset Not made Impossible to establish the communication Communication already established Error of coder index Sensor index incorrect Authorization Code invalidate Mechanic End Stop Incorrect Key Key not found Protection file not found Protection file incorrect End of authorization Check the system date UserID Incorrect Option Invalid Protection Error Use limits reached Interpolation File too high Interpolation file not found Reference indice incorrect Card type used is incorrect The action on the references is incorrect

Description Can not open the serial port Script Error on the serial port Error with the mask configuration Error with the Time-Out configuration Error à la configuration des états des signaux Time out reached in reception Time out reached in emission Read Error on serial port Incorrect received frame CRC The command returned in the received frame is incorrect Incorrect frame character number

Page 2468

3781 3782 3783 3784 3785 3786 3787 3788 3789 3790

0x2514500C 0x2514500D 0x2514500E 0x2514500F 0x25145010 0x25145011 0x25145012 0x25145013 0x25145014 0x25145015

Incorrect coder index Incorrect button index The event returned by the frame is different to that requested The beam1 and beam2 events arrived simultaneously Incorrect sound frequency value Incorrect sound duration value Incorrect sound volume value Incorrect frame returned The event requested is incorrect Error in the number of coder points

LK errors 3800 : LK miscellaneous errors (switch default) 3801

LkCMM : Time out on reception

3802

LkCMM : Incorrect Message

3803

LkCMM : CheckSum incorrect

3804

LkCMM : Send Message incorrect

3805

LkCMM : Received Message incorrect

3806

LkCMM : Driver closed

3807

LkCMM : Message canceled by cancel

3808

LkCMM : Unexpected Probing

3809

LkCMM : CMM out of limits

3810

LkCMM : Communication Error

3811

LkCMM : Fatal Error Driver

3812

LkCMM : No Changer

3813

LkCMM : Overflow

3901

End Stop axis - X

3902

End Stop axis + X

3903

End Stop axis -Y

3904

End Stop axis + Y

3905

End Stop axis - Z

3906

End Stop axis + Z

3907

End Stop angle - A

3908

End Stop angle + A

3909

End Stop angle - B

Page 2469

3910

End Stop angle + B

3911

Incorrect Command

3912

Manual Command Incorrect

3914

Servo Error axis X

3915

Servo Error axis Y

3916

Servo Error axis Z

3917

Servo Error plateau

3918

Servo Error en scanning

3919

Servo Error axis A

3920

Servo Error axis B

3921

Pursuit Error axis X

3922

Pursuit Error axis Y

3923

Pursuit Error axis Z

3924

Pursuit Error plateau

3925

Pursuit Error en scanning

3926

Pursuit Error axis A

3927

Pursuit Error axis B

3929

Read Error counter axis X

3930

Read Error counter axis Y

3931

Read Error counter axis Z

3932

Read Error table counter

3933

Read Error counter in scanning

3934

Read Error counter axis A

3935

Read Error counter axis B

3936

Error during initialization

3937

CMM not initialized

3938

CMM already installed

3939

Scanning : probing failed

3940

Scanning : probe opened

3941

Probe opened

3942

Scanning : Soft Error

3943

Scanning : probing incorrect

Page 2470

3944

Error during the axis initialization

3945

Changer : Time-out

3946

Changer : error status

3947

No active correction

3948

Incorrect correction data

3949

Error during correction

3950

Error already corrected

3951

Cannot reach the asked position

3959

Error CN

3960

Motorized Head : incorrect code

3961

Motorized Head : datum error

3962

Motorized Head : transmission error

3963

Motorized Head : disengaging

3964

Motorized Head : PHD9 not connected

3965

Motorized Head : incorrect data

3966

Motorized Head not connected

3967

Error manual head

3968

Motorized Head : obstruct error

3969

Motorized Head : PH9_TEACH_CODE

3970

Motorized Head : PH9_DATA_VALID

3971

Motorized Head : rotation problem

3972

Motorized Head : XOFF blocked

3973

Motorized Head : time out

3974

'Master start button' not validated

3975

Motorized Head Position Incorrect

3976

Error unknown

3977

Unexpected Probing

3978

Serial link error

3979

Thread re-entry error

3980

Thread re-entry error

API errors

Page 2471

4002 Collision 4003 CMM error 4004 Out of limits 4005 Error of park 4006 Invalidate Command 4007 Material Error 4008 Error probe 4009 Error mab

John Deere errors 4100

// ERR_JD_PROBE_NOT_ARMED

4101

// ERR_JD_SERVO_NOT_ACTIVE

4102

// ERR_JD_LIMIT_SWITCH

4103

// ERR_JD_CONTACT

4104

// ERR_JD_DATA_CHAR

4105

// ERR_JD_END_CHAR

4106

// ERR_JD_REDO_CHAR

4107

// ERR_JD_NONCONTACT

4108

// ERR_JD_BACKSPACE_CHAR

Brown & Sharp errors 4300

// ERR_BC_TIMEOUT_PALPAGE

4301

// ERR_BC_TIMEOUT_DEPLACEMENT

4302

// ERR_BC_COLLISION

4303

// ERR_BC_LIMIT_SWITCH

4304

// ERR_BC_LIMIT_PROBE_NOT_ARMED

4305

// ERR_BC_AIR_OFF

4306

// ERR_BC_UNKNOWN

4307

// ERR_BC_TIMEOUT_PH9

DLL Lima Errors

Page 2472

4701

The machine is in movement

4702

Machine limit

4703

Machine references were not taken

4704

Axis error

4705

Retraction axis incorrect

4706

Point incorrect, opening of probe

4707

Software limit

4708

'Light protection' error

4709

Emergency stop

4710

Point incorrect or without vector

4711

Tools not initialized

4712

Machine first level error

4799

Error not documented

Wenzel errors 4800

Transmission Error

4801

Stop operator

4802

Servo Error

4803

Intern Error

4804

Soft End Stop

4805

Probe opened

4806

Software Error

4807

Power supply Problem

4808

Problem servo motor

4807

Error PICS

4808

Air pressure Problem

4809

Error WPC2000

Metrolog XG errors 5000

Activation of an undefined probe

5001

Calibration of an undefined probe

5002

Use of an undefined probe

Page 2473

5003

Activation of an undefined alignment

5004

Use of an inexistent circle

5005

Use of an incompletely defined circle

5006

Use of an inexistent plane

5007

Use of an incompletely defined plane

5008

Use of an inexistent alignment

5009

Use of an inexistent projection feature

5010

Insertion of a process line forbidden

5011

Number of probings insufficient for calculation

5012

Use of an uncalibrated probe

5013

Use of a non activated probe

5014

Motorized mode forbidden

5015

Incomplete probing information

5016

Geometrical Alignment: the main and secondary directions are not enough differentiated.

5017 Geometrical Alignment: one of the feature can not furnish the asked information (direction or positioning) 5018

3 points Alignment: features too close

5019

3 points Alignment: bad repartition of features

5020

3 points Alignment: calculation algorithm of the alignment failed

5021

3 points Alignment: one of the features can not furnish the asked information (direction or positioning)

5022

Using a missing feature

5023

Using a feature not defined enough

5024

Feature not found

5025

Feature incorrect

5026

Circles not coplanar (for concentricity)

5027

One of the features cannot provide the requested information

5028

Insufficient number of features for construction

5029

The view used does not exist

5030

One of the features has not been evaluated

5031

One of the features has not been defined

5032

No probing when probing read is attempted

5033

One of the features with maximum material has not been defined

Page 2474

5034

A predefined feature has maximum material

5035

One of the features is a type that does not accept maximum material

5036

One of the features with maximum material has not been evaluated

5037

Location of an axial according to the direction of the axis

5038

Print setup file cannot be found

5039

Incorrect number of probings

5040

Use of an inexistent correction feature

5041

File access problem

5042

Use of an unauthorized projection feature

5043

The calculation has not reached (align, join or coplanar points)

5044

The calculation has not reached (align, join or coplanar points)

5045

The calculation has not reached (align, join or coplanar points)

5046

The calculation has not reached (align, join or coplanar points)

5047

The calculation has not reached (align, join or coplanar points)

5048

The calculation has not reached (align, join or coplanar points)

5049

File name cannot be incremented

5050

File cannot be opened

5051

File access error

5052

Dimension tolerance cannot be calculated

5053

The calculation has not reached (align, join or coplanar points)

5054

Use of an inexistent Arc

5055

Use of an incompletely defined Arc

5056

Calculation cannot be performed in feature construction mode

5057

Calculation cannot be performed in feature measurement mode

5058

Calibration calculation error

5059

Error at probe file opening

5060

Error, the probing points used for scanning initialization are too close

5061

The probing points are not in the scanning plane

5062

Protocol closed

5063

Write error on link to send process name

5064

Process file remote control cannot be found

5065

Feature calculation cannot be performed due to a probing error

Page 2475

5066

Source feature type is not correct

5067

The destination feature already exists and is not the same type as the source feature.

5068

No CAD model open in first probing measurement mode.

5069

Projection on the CAD model cannot be performed

5070

Auto planes cannot be calculated

5071

Nominal missing

5072

DMIS interpreter syntax error

5073

CMM manual mode

5074

Probe file write error

5075

Error due to impossible geometrical tolerance combinations

5076

Geometrical tolerance calculation error

5077

Geometrical tolerance calculation not yet implemented

5078

Geometrical tolerance calculation not yet implemented

5079

Feature boundary not defined

5080

No probings associated with the feature

5081

Tolerance Zone incorrect for this tolerance

5082

Tolerance: alignment not defined

5083

Use a feature with a wrong type

5084

Use a feature with a wrong type

5085

Export folder does not exist

5086

Archive folder does not exist

5087

Incorrect slot reference

5088

Motorized Head Position Incorrect

5089

No tool change or active stylus

5090

Error during the tool pickup/drop sequence

5091

Wrong path

5092

Too many files opened

5093

Access denied

5094

Full directory

5095

Full disk

5096

Run error in program mode

5097

Work session file save error

Page 2476

5098

Auto calibration in process not authorized

5099

No table

5100

Table not calibrated

5101

Error in probe pickup/unloading definition: the via points are incorrect

5102

Error in changer file coding

5103

No probings associated with the feature for filtering

5104

Feature not probed in contouring -> filtering cannot be performed

5105

Cut-off wavelength too high

5106

Ball diameter calculated after negative calibration

5107

Probe shaft not calibrated

5108

The calculation has not reached (align, join or coplanar points)

5109

The calculation has not reached (align, join or coplanar points)

5110

On Plane and 2 points: alignment calculation algorithm failed.

5111

The calibration sphere does not exist in file mtdllv2.ini

5112

You do not have the right to locate the sphere named MASTER

5113

The optimization parameters are incorrect or incomplete (feature list empty...)

5114

The feature list used for optimization contains features that are not used for calculation

5115

There are not enough features to perform correct optimization (too many degrees of freedom free)

5116

The optimization calculation was unsuccessful

5117

The rotary table calibration calculation was unsuccessful

5118

The configuration file does not exist

5119

Multiple position: Number of features 0

5136

The length has to be > 0

5137

The width has to be > 0

5138

The width has to be lower than the length

5139

The positive and negative tolerances must be defined.

5140

The upper tolerance must be higher than the lower tolerance.

5141

Measurement with a shaft is not possible in automatic projection mode.

5142

The number of loops must be between 1 and 1000.

5143

Distance D1 is less than distance D2.

5144 The alignment to be optimized cannot be determined. The selected features are not defined in the alignment to be optimized. 5145

SP600 calibration was incorrectly performed.

5146 The alignment to be optimized is not correct. The selected features are not defined in the alignment to be optimized. 5147

The name of the created object is blank or longer than 80 characters.

5148

Impossible Operation

5149

The distance has to be positive

5150

The group of points from which a probing is to be extracted does not exist

5151

The entire head calibration failed

5152

The directions of the 3-point alignment are incorrect

5153

The software does not support multiple views

5154

Process conversion algorithm problem

5155

Process activity not known by the conversion

5156

Problem on process activity conversion

5157

Link to the geometry cannot be found

5158

ACIS CAD file import option disabled.

5159

Catia V4 CAD file import option disabled.

Page 2478

5160

Catia V5 CAD file import option disabled.

5161

CimStation CAD file import option disabled.

5162

IDEAS CAD file import option disabled.

5163

IGES CAD file import option disabled.

5164

Parasolid CAD file import option disabled.

5165

Pro/Engineer CAD file import option disabled (version 1).

5166

Pro/Engineer CAD file import option disabled (version 2).

5167

SET CAD file import option disabled.

5168

STEP CAD file import option disabled.

5169

Unigraphics CAD file import option disabled.

5170

Unisurf CAD file import option disabled.

5171

VDAFS CAD file import option disabled.

5172

Print to PDF : Not install

5173

Print to PDF : PDF995 not install

5174

Print to PDF : PDF995 bad install of exe PS2PDF

5175

Print to PDF : PDF995 bad install of PDF995 ini file

5176

Print to PDF : PDF995 bad install of PDF995 printer

5177

Print to PDF : PDF acrobat not install

5178

Print to PDF : PDF file name invalid

5179

CAD file import option(s) disabled.

5180

This feature cannot be bounded

5181

The calibration date is too old

5182

Cannot delete active alignment

5183

Cannot delete CAD alignment

5184

Cannot delete MCS alignment

5185

Impossible to associate multiple true positioning alignment to CAD

5186

The bound command gives an infinite feature

5187

Missing dll

5188

Wrong probe orientation

5189

Incorrect Family Name

5190

Incorrect datum reference system

5191

Features not defined in the same alignment

Page 2479

5192

Cannot delete the default station

5193

Cannot delete the active station

5194

Cannot delete a station already used

5195

Cannot found this station

5196

Cannot load orientation dll

5197

Cannot initialize function(s) from orientation dll

5198

Cannot initialize orientation

5199

Cannot add all the stations the orientation network

5200

Cannot add all the orientation points to the orientation network

5201

Cannot calculate orientation

5202

No collimation measurements found

5203

Possible blunder on one or more point

5204

Mean Error is too high

5205

Divergent iteration

5206

Inversion error in main matrix

5207

Less Equations than unknowns

5208

Less than 3 good control points found

5209

Unable to orient station

5210

Unable to calculate index errors for station

5211

Not enough points with FACE I and II measurements

5212

No initial approximation method found for given measurement data

5213

Unable to calculate scale bar point

5214

Unable to calculate point

5215

System is not scaled

5216

Solution aborted

5217

Control point measurements with local orientation

5218

Axis measurement found with no distance

5219

Control point measurements found but could not orient to controls

5220

Scale bar measurements found but could not calculate scale

5221

Scale or distance measurements found but system could not be scaled

5222

Local fixed station with control point measurements

5223

Unscaled fixed station with scaled measurements

Page 2480

5224

Solution aborted

5225

Collimation measurement out of tolerance

5226

Could not find 3 points not on a line

5227

Pointing error exceeded

5228

Control point solution! Zero standard deviations found

5229

Zero scale bar standard deviation, may cause inversion error

5230

No stations selected for index error calculation

5231

Not oriented to controls! No control measurements found

5232

Control point solution! Balanced station not used

5233

Cannot add this station

5234

Cannot activate this station

5235

High Mean Error

5236

DML export option missing !

5237

Warning : Init Tracker after station activation

5238

No sufficient rights to orient stations

5239

Error calculating tolerance : you must measure elements with one ball diameter

5240

Reference feature cannot be a toleranced feature

5241

Export to QStat file failed!

5242

Cannot Calculate Alignment!

5243

Cannot Open Working Session File!

5244

Cannot Initialize Tracker, Tracker is already Warming or Initializing!

5246

Cannot Switch Tracker Face!

5247

Cannot Measure Gravity Plane!

5248

Cannot Take Dummy Point!

5249

Cannot create the orientation point family : some of the elements are not geometrical point

5250

Cannot create the orientation point family : some of geometrical point are not evaluated

5253

Section Contouring is not supported by this cnc !

5254

Feature does not exist in the file !

5255

Trajectory is not accurate enough, try to change parameters.

5256

XlStarter.exe not found!

5257

XlStarter.ini not found!

5258

XlStarter.ini: Xls Pattern not found!

Page 2481

5259

XgOffice is not installed!

5260

Bad IP address

5261

Bad port number

5262

Stable probing is activated

5263

Incorrect scale value!

5264

Export cloud failed

5265

Cannot Initialize Tracker!

5266

Cannot Switch Tracker to Face 2 while executing Program in CNC Mode!

5268

BMW-MESS export option missing !

5269

MM3 export option missing !

5270

Cannot duplicate the probe

5271

The probe to duplicate is unknown

5272

Program name empty

5273

Program doesn't exist

5274

No data for the program

5275

Impossible to export

5276

No points in the document

5277

No feature to be evaluatedr

5278

Incorrect slot reference

5279

Cannot delete active expansion/shrinking alignment

5280

Cannot delete active workpiece temperature compensation alignment

5281

Cannot delete active leapfrog realignment alignment

5282

Initialize Tracker before activating a probe

5283

The value is less than the min. value, or greater than the max. value

5284

File format not recognized

5285

Cannot destruct the current work

5286

The evaluation mode is not coherent with the creation mode

5287

The Connected Tracker is not able to use this parameter

5288

The Advanced GD&T option is not available

5289

Tolerance evaluation with Advanced GD&T failed

5290

Measurement with a shaft cannot be performed

5291

Too many probing points: the calculation cannot be completed

Page 2482

5292

Compensation mode not supported

5293

Point projection on the CAD model failed

5295

Head qualification failed. The different head positions do not meet the conditions.

5296

Distance cannot be calculated

5297

Program not sent

DLL Lima Errors (continued) 6200

MSG_ERREUR

6201

CODE_ERREUR_COMMUNICATION

6203

CODE_ERREUR_OUVERTURE_PORT

6203

CODE_ERREUR_COLLISION

6204

CODE_ERREUR_ABSENCE_MATIERE

6205

CODE_ERREUR_COMMUNICATION_FICHIER

6206

CODE_ERREUR_COMMANDE_EN_COURS

6207

CODE_ERREUR_COMMANDE_INCOMPATIBLE

6208

CODE_ERREUR_CARTE_DEVICE. Impossible to open device.

6209

CODE_ERREUR_CARTE_BUFFER. Error on buffer or size of buffer.

6210

CODE_ERREUR_CARTE_ADRESSE. Address not defined for driver.

6211

CODE_ERREUR_CARTE_DATA. Size error for Read / Write.

6212

CODE_ERREUR_CARTE_IDENTIFICATEUR_DEVICE. Device identifier incorrect.

6213

CODE_ERREUR_CARTE_GENERAL. General error

6214

CODE_ERREUR_CARTE_DRIVER. Driver uploading / downloading error.

6253

CODE_ERREUR_ARRET_URGENCE

6254

CODE_ERREUR_LIMITE_MACHINE

6255

CODE_ERREUR_PH910

6259

CODE_ERREUR_PALPEUR_OUVERT

6262

CODE_ERREUR_LECTURE_FICHIER_METROCON_DAT

6263

CODE_ERREUR_EXISTENCE_METROCON_DAT

6264

CODE_ERREUR_EXISTENCE_METROCOUNT_DAT

6265

CODE_ERREUR_ACTIVATION_PALPEUR

6266

CODE_ERREUR_PENDANT_PALPAGE

6267

CODE_ERREUR_DEMANDE_REFUSE

Page 2483

6268

CODE_ERREUR_DEJA_EXECUTE

6269

CODE_ERREUR_ANNULATION

6270

CODE_ERREUR_TIMEOUT

6271

CODE_ERREUR_FICHIER_INCORRECTE

6273

CODE_ERREUR_ACTIVATION_G80

6274

CODE_ERREUR_RESET_MACHINE

6276

CODE_ERREUR_TETE_NON_CONNECTE

6277

CODE_ERREUR_EXISTENCE_METROCON_DAT1

6278

CODE_ERREUR_EXISTENCE_METROCON_DAT2

6279

CODE_ERREUR_EXISTENCE_METROCOUNT_DAT1

6280

CODE_ERREUR_EXISTENCE_METROCOUNT_DAT2

6281

CODE_ERREUR_PRESSION_AIR

6282

CODE_ERREUR_SERVO_ERREUR

6283

CODE_ERREUR_POURSUITE

6291

CODE_ERREUR_OPTION_MACHINE

7200

erreur_machine_inconnue

7201

erreur_communication

7202

erreur_verification_incorrect

7203

erreur_verification_non_recu

7204

erreur_retour_pv

7205

erreur_retour_mv

7206

erreur_retour_pa

7207

erreur_retour_ma

7208

erreur_retour_ad

7209

erreur_retour_rd

7210

erreur_retour_sd

7211

erreur_timeout_man

7212

erreur_activation_joysticks

7213

erreur_desactivation_joysticks

7214

erreur_set_ph_position

7215

erreur_timeout_cn

7216

erreur_retour_ask_ph_pos

Page 2484

7217

erreur_retour_annul_cmd

7218

erreur_retour_close_omni

7219

erreur_decodage_erreur

7220

erreur_timeout_homing

7221

erreur_timeout_ph

7247

erreur_retour_pt_deg

7248

erreur_retour_pt_palp

System errors of Johansson counter 12001 Command aborted by reset 12002 Invalid command data 12003 Illegal or unknown command 12004 Probe hit never occurred in CNC 12005 Unexpected probe hit 12006 Scale error 12007 MPH error. MPH status must be read 12008 APC error. APC status must be read 12009 Probe stuck at cnc measuring point 12010 Torque error (older machines) 12011 Limit switch activated 12012 Too low air pressure 12013 Emergency stop pressed 12014 Co-ordinates out of CMM area 12015 Piezo error. Only if TP12 is used 12016 Time-out from the hand terminal 12017 CMM in idle mode 12018 Protocol error from CMM 12019 Internal error from CMM 12020 Manual measuring point with damped probe 12021 Time-out from linear compensation board 12022 Too high measuring speed at manual probe hit 12023 Following error from CMM

Page 2485

12024

Internal servo error from CMM

12025

Time-out from CMM

12026 Programming error 12027

Scales not initialized

System error of SIP counter 13000

Incorrect command syntax

13001

NC buffer saturated

13002

Command unknown

13003

End of command extension unknown

DLL system errors 30001

Character before header

30002

Character after terminator

30003

Header character expected

30004

Terminator character expected

30005

Non hexa digit during decoding

30006

Header already encoded

30007

Terminator already encoded

30008

Read after end of string

30009

Serial link write error

30010

Serial link read error

List of 30010 errors //

0x0001 // Receive Queue overflow

//

0x0002 // Receive Overrun Error

//

0x0004 // Receive Parity Error

//

0x0008 // Receive Framing error

//

0x0010 // Break Detected

//

0x0100 // TX Queue is full

//

0x0200 // LPTx Timeout

//

0x0400 // LPTx I/O Error

//

0x0800 // LPTx Device not selected

Page 2486

//

0x1000 // LPTx Out-Of-Paper

//

0x8000 // Requested mode unsupported

30011

Driver link write error

30012

Driver link read error

30013

Driver link initialization error

30014

Log error on a link

30015

Use of a link without being logged on

30016

Write error on a link

30017

The serial link is not open

30018

Message size is greater than the max. size

30019

Message size is less than the min. size

30020

Character received outside a frame

30021

Frame read error

30022

Transmitted frame list overflow

30023

Reception frame list overflow

30024

Use of a closed driver link

30025

Unknown console response

30026

Error during console response decoding

30027

Incorrect console version number

30028

Unknown console with this driver

30029

Unknown CN response

30030

Error during console response decoding

30031

Unauthorized character in decoding

30032

Unknown counter with this driver

30033

Incorrect counter version number

30034

Incorrect Serial Number

30035

MTIDLER cannot be found

30036

Communication channel with MT2 saturated

30037

Command parameter error

30038

Channel data size too large

30039

Use of a closed Windows DDE link

30040

Connection error to a DDE server

Page 2487

30041

Write error to a DDE server

30042

Read error from a DDE client

30043

Alpha string decoding error (Johansson)

30044

Correction : Deviation(s) outside authorized limits

30045

Correction: segment size is null or negative

30046

Correction: segment number is < 0 or < original segment

30047

Correction : MTCorr.ini : angle Alpha 100°

30048

Correction : MTCorr.ini : angle Phi 100°

30049

Correction : MTCorr.ini : angle Teta 100°

30050

Correction : file opening error

30051

Correction : file creation error

30052

Correction : file cannot be read

30053

Correction: file cannot be written

30054

Correction: file pointer lost

30055

Correction : file close error

30056

Correction : Overflow detected

30057

Correction : Underflow detected

30058

Correction : Unknown correction type

30059

Correction :Memory allocation problem

30060

Correction: Angle out of limits

30061

Correction: Translation out of limits

30062

Correction : 2 axes have the same degree of stacking

30063

Correction: the degrees of stacking are greater than 2

30064

Communication break

30065

Incorrect frame separator

30066

Correction :Compensation file format incompliant error

30067

Correction :bincor.res. file syntax error

30068

Correction :MT23.dat. file syntax error.

Metroset errors Error Message

Help

Page 2488

0

undefined error. Please contact Metrologic Group.

5000 Invalid password.

5001 Permission denied.

Metro Set is on read only mode. Please, unlock Metro set ("Protection" menu, "Unlock" item)

Invalid CNC serial number. Some Metroset 5002 functions will not work.

The CNC firmware can not be updated without a valid serial number. Please contact Metrologic Group for more information.

This Metroset is no more compatible with your 5003 CNC. Some troubles may occur by using this Metroset version. The keyboard firmware can not be Invalid keyboard serial number. Some Metroset updated without a valid serial number. 5004 functions will not work. Please contact Metrologic Group for more information. 5300 Invalid parameters file.

One or more parameters have a bad format.

5301 Empty file.

This file has no parameter used by CNC.

5302 Missing parameters.

Metroset need some parameters to convert form old format to new format. One or more of these parameters is missing.

5303 Invalid file type.

Please choose a file with the good extension.

5304 Invalid parameters.

Can't save invalid parameters.

5305 Unknown header. 5306 Invalid parameter size. 5307 Invalid data.

Non hexa character found.

5308 Invalid address mapping.

Invalid file.

5309 Flash memory writing error.

An error happened during writing operation.

5310 Invalid file name. 5311 Reading error. 5312 File writing error. 5320

Can't open "Backup" directory. No backup file will be create.

Metroset can't open the "Backup" directory (in Metroset install directory).

Page 2489

Please check if there is no file named "Backup" in Metroset install directory, or no write protection. Metroset can't open the "Mesure" directory (in Metroset install directory). Can't open "Mesure" directory. No measure file 5321 Please check if there is no file named will be create. "Mesure" in Metroset install directory, or no write protection.

5400 Serial port failure: No connection.

The CNC doesn't respond to Metroset. Please check: - The CNC must be ON, - the serial port configuration (speed and port number), - the cable between the CNC and the PC.

5401 Serial port failure: Sending failure.

Metroset couldn't send a message to the CNC. Please check: - The CNC must be ON, - the serial port configuration (speed and port number), - the cable between the CNC and the PC.

5402 Serial port failure: Can't open serial port.

This serial port is locked by Windows. This serial port may be already used by another program (Metrolog, MTPAR, mouse, modem...): close these programs. - This port may not exist or is no correctly installed on your system: please use another serial port. - Under Windows NT or 2000, current user must have sufficient rights to use serial ports.

5403 Serial port reading error. 5404 Time out

5450 No Hardware detected.

Metroset can't found any hardware. Please, check your serial port parameters, be sure that your hardware is power ON and connected to the computer.

5451 Invalid message header. 5452 Empty message. 5453 channel 0 full. 5454 Unknown status. 5455 Serial port failure: Invalid probing frame.. 5500 Invalid parameter type. 5501 This parameter is too short.

Page 2490

5502 Invalid parameter length. 5503 Invalid parameter header. 5504 In valid parameter value. 5505 Invalid parameter size. 5506 Invalid parameter count. 5507 unknown parameter. 5510 Unknown parameter. 5511 Unused parameter. 5550 Invalid calibration array.

A rotary array can not be null.

5600 Function not found.

Page 2491

Functions available on ME670 ME470 consoles, T-Probes, Krypton and arms To assign functions to console keys, modify the file ME670.cfg (including for the ME470 console) or the file TProbe.cfg (for the T-Probe) or the Krypton.cfg file (for the Krypton) or the arms.cfg file (for the arms) located in the Device Config software installation directory.

Examples:  For the ME670 and ME470 consoles F1 "PU_POINT" "Measure Point" F2 "PU_DROITE" "Measure Line" F3 "PU_SPHERE" "Measure Sphere" F4 "PU_CONE" "Measure Cone" F5 "PU_PLAN" "Measure Plane" F6 "PU_CERCLE" "Measure Circle" F7 "PU_CYLIND" "Measure Cylinder" F8 "PU_DEGAU" "CAD Alignment" F9 "PU_RAPPDG" "Load previous Alignment" F10 "PU_DIST" "Evaluate Distance"

not available with ME470

The first column defines the key, the second column defines the command, and the third column defines the text displayed on the console screen.

Note: The characters supported by the console display are figures (digits) and unaccented letters. 

For the T-Probe, Krypton and arms

OPT1 "PU_F2" "Mesure" OPT2 "PU_VISUE" "ViewAll" OPT3 "PU_F7" "cont" OPT4 "PU_F10" "Delete last measured Point"

Notes (parameters button on arms): 

 

The OPT1 and OPT2 buttons are linked with the actions outside measure/acquisition and the OPT3 and OPT4 buttons are linked with the actions during a measure/acquisition. Moreover, the OPT1 and OPT3 buttons correspond to a short press and OPT2 and OPT3 to a long press. If the user is not measuring or acquering points, a press on the second button launch an action depending on the use probe. If the user is already in a context of measure/acquisition, a press on the second button validate the current window.

ME470 console The ME470 console has 5 buttons that can be customized: F1 à F5

Page 2492

ME670 console The ME470 console has 10 buttons that can be customized: F1 à F10

ME470 and ME670 consoles screen

T-Probe The T-Probe has 4 customizable keys: OPT1 to OPT4.

Page 2493

Buttons to setup

Krypton (SpaceProbe) This probe has 2 customizable keys: OPT3 and OPT4.

Buttons to setup

Functions that may be used to customize ME670, T-Probe, Krypton and arms keys Co Te mm xt and

Description

Features PU _C ON ST R PU _M ES UR E PU _P OIN T PU _D ROI TE

Co nst Construction Mode ruc t Me as Measurement Mode ure

Poi Measure, Construct, Define Point nt

Lin Measure, Construct, Define Line e

PU Sp _S her Measure, Construct, Define Sphere PH e ER

Page 2494

E PU _C Co Measure, Construct, Define Cone ON ne E PU Pla Measure, Construct, Define Plane _PL ne AN PU _C Cir Measure, Construct, Define Circle ER cle CL E PU Cyl _C ind Measure, Construct, Define Cylinder YLI er ND PU _R Re EC cta Measure, Construct, Define Rectangle TA ngl NG e LE PU _O Slo Measure, Construct, Define Slot BL t ON G PU _S Se EC cti Measure, Construct, Define Section TIO on N PU _A Arc Measure, Construct, Define Arc RC PU He _H xa Measure, Construct, Define Hexagon EX go AG n PU Elli _EL ps Measure, Construct, Define Ellipse IPS e PU Tor Measure, Construct, Define Torus _TO us RE PU Sur _S fac UR e Measure, Construct, Define Surface Point FA Poi CE nt PU _A An Evaluate Angle NG gle L PU Dis Evaluate Distance _DI tan

Page 2495

ST ce Ge om PU etri _TO cal Evaluate Geometrical Tolerance LG Tol EO era nc e Re PU ver _IN se VE Ori Reverse feature orientation RSI ent ON ati on Mo PU dify _TO Fe Modify feature L atu re Te PU xt/ _TE Modify text Val XTE ue Bro ws PU e _S Dat Open database GB ab D as e

Alignment PU _D EG AU

CA D Ali Associate To CAD Alignment gn me nt

PU _D SQ Lo Load an alignment _LO ad AD DG

Probes Sel PU ect _PL Select a probe Pro PN be PU Def _M ine Define a probe OD Pro

Page 2496

be Cal PU ibr _C ate Calibrate a probe AL Pro be Pro PU be _M Po Retrieve probe position AN siti U on PU _D SQ Sa _S ve Save a Probe File AV Pro EP be AL P PU _D Lo SQ ad Load a Probe File _LO Pro AD be PA LP

CMM Hig PU h _C Sp Switch between low/high speed NVI ee T d Set -up PU CN _C C NT CNC parameters Par OO am LS ete rs PU Po _C siti Position machine NP oni OSI ng T Cle PU ara _C nc ND e Clearance Planes EG Pla AG ne s

Program

Page 2497

PU _C NA UT O

Aut om ati Switch to automatic mode c Mo de Ma nu al Switch to manual mode Mo de Ne w Pro New software program gra m

PU _C NM AN U PU _G AM _A PP PU _D Op SQ en _LO Pro Open existing program AD gra GA m M PU Ru _G n AM Pro Run program _ST gra AR m T PU Ru _G n Run program in step by step mode AM Ste _P p AS Pri PU nt _E Gr Print graphic report DIT ap h PU Pri _P nt Print text report RIN Te T xt

3D View PU _3D _D ROI TE PU _3D _A VA NT PU _3D

Rig Right View ht

Fro Front View nt To Top View p

Page 2498

_D ES SU S PU _3D Bot _D to Bottom View ES m SO US PU _3D _A Re Rear View RRI ar ER E PU _3D _G Lef Left View AU t CH E PU _3D Iso Isometric View _3D PU _3D Zo _ZO om Zoom in OM In P PU Zo _3D om Zoom out _ZO Ou OM t M PU Zo _3D om _C Ful Center the view EN l TR Vie ER w PU Co _VI ord Maximize/Restore View SU ina E tes PU _PL Zo P_ om CE on Center the view on the probe NT Pro RE be R PU Det _G ail RA Fe Enables detailed view mode PH atu 3D re

Page 2499

PU _D Sa SQ ve Save the view _S Vie AV w EV UE PU _D Lo SQ ad Load a view _LO Vie AD w VU E

Keys PU Hel Help (F1) _AI p DE Fil PU e File Menu _F1 Me nu Pre fer en PU ce Preferences Menu _F2 s Me nu CM PU M CMM Menu _F3 Me nu Pro be PU s Probes Menu _F4 Me nu Fe atu PU res Features Menu _F5 Me nu Ali gn PU me Alignment Menu _F6 nt Me nu Pro gra PU m Program Menu _F7 Me nu PU 3D 3D View Menu _F8 Vie

Page 2500

PU _F9

PU _F1 0 PU _F1 1 PU _F1 2 PU _S HIF T PU _C AP SL OC K PU _CT RL PU _AL T

w Me nu Wi nd ow Window Menu Me nu Hel p Help Menu Me nu F1 F11 key 1 F1 F12 key 2 Shi Shift (Caps) key ft

Ca ps Caps Lock key Lo ck CT Control key RL AL Alt key T

Es ES ca Escape key C pe Del BS Delete key ete Ent CR Enter (Return) key er Ta HT Tabs key b KB En End key _E d ND KB _D Do Down key OW wn N KB Pa _P ge PageDown key GD Do N wn KB Lef Left key _LE t FT

Page 2501

KB _RI GH T KB _H OM E KB _U P KB _P GU P KB _IN SE RT KB _D EL PU _S WA PW ND

Rig Right key ht

Ho Home key me

Up Up key Pa ge PageUp key Up Ins Insert key ert Del Delete key ete CT RL CTRL + Tab key Ta b

Other functions PU Co _C nti Continue (OK) ON nu T e PU _R Sto Stop (Cancel) ES p ET PU _U Un Undo probing ND do O PU _C Par N_ t Part Align DE Ali PR gn EP PU Co _C nte ON xtu Open Contextual Measure : opens the Point Cloud Acquisition window if the Active TEX al Probe is Optical, else opens the Measure window. T_ Me ME as AS ure

Page 2502

Warning: The ME670 and ME470 F1 to Fn keys have no connection with the computer keyboards F1 to Fn keys. The last ones cannot be configured.

Note: For further details and explanations on how to use ME670 and ME470, please refer to the documentation provided with each keyboard.

Page 2503

ME 450 corresponding keyboard keys

Page 2504

Note: For further details and explanations on how to use ME670 and ME470, please refer to the documentation provided with each keyboard.

Page 2505

Corresponding ME 4700 keyboard keys General keys

increase or decrease sound volume.

take control if there are two keyboards. If the key is held down for several seconds, it disengages the machine axes.

cancel the current action.

confirm the current action.

display the position window with different sizes.

Keys for probes and motorized heads

calibrate the current probe.

load a calibration file.

save a calibration file.

manual probing, takes the current probe center location.

define a probe.

Page 2506

activate a probe.

Each time these keys are pressed the probe head will move by an increment (7.5° for a PH10 probe head).

indicates a motorized head when the LED is switched on.

Database keys

request measuring a feature accessible by one of the feature keys.

request the construction of a feature accessible by one of the feature keys. List of accessible features:

Point

Sphere

Surface points

Circle

Oblong

Line

Plane

Cylinder

Cone

Section

Arc of circle

Rectangle

Hexagon

Ellipse

Torus

change feature orientation.

create geometrical tolerances.

Page 2507

create toleranced distances.

create angular tolerances.

view distribution of probed points on a feature.

put a comment on a feature.

access the Features database.

define a feature.

delete feature from the database, delete the last probed point.

Keys for 3D view

right view,

front view.

top view,

bottom view.

rear view,

left view.

isometric view.

zoom in,

zoom out.

show all features.

see the area around the cursor.

Page 2508

create and save a view,

to a saved view.

Keys for alignments

activate / disactivate the CAD alignment.

load a saved alignment.

Programming keys

load a program.

start / stop execution.

go to a line.

run step by step.

CNC keys

break the axes if they have been unclutched by the On/Off key. On the ME 450 keyboard, these keys have the same functions as the keys below.

inhibit movements along the corresponding axis (when the LED is switched on, it indicates that the axis is inhibited).

rotate the joystick around the Z axis by increments of 45°.

follow CAD alignment axes.

Page 2509

toggle to low or high speed (when lit, the led indicates high speed).

switch to manual mode.

activate automated measure during the measurement of a feature or switch to CNC mode in a program if you are not in a measurement section.

move the machine to a position.

create a via point (back-off point).

set up machine speeds.

clutch the indicated axis.

Page 2510

Corresponding ME 6700 keyboard keys

General keys setting the sound volume. Press and hold this key and adjust the volume using the potentiometer.

validate the CNC (at start-up or following an error) or select the active keyboard while using a 2 keyboards configuration.

Keys for motorized heads Each time these keys are pressed the probe head will move by an increment (7.5° for a PH10 probe head).

When using a continuous probe head, this key allows to activate the movement mode of the probe head. The left-hand joystick therefore allows you to move the probe head. To confirm the position of the probe head, press this key again. The LED will switch off and the left-hand joystick will revert to its normal function.

Note: During the probe head movement, the LED associated with this key will be green. The LED will be red, if there is a probe head error.

Page 2511

CNC keys To enable or disable disengaging, hold down this key for at least 2 seconds.

enable or disable each of the CNC’s lock outputs.

disable horizontal or vertical axis movements (resp. left). The corresponding LED will be red showing when a movement along an axis is disabled. To re-enable this joystick axis, simply press the key again. The corresponding LED will be switched off and movement along the axis will be re-enabled.

This key allows to apply a rotation to the axes of the right-hand joystick. The angle of rotation can be adjusted by increments of 45°. To select an angle, press this key as many as times as required. The four LEDs associated with the key show the angle of rotation: Angle

LED

0° (no rotation) 45° 90° 135° 180° 225° 270° 315°

By default, joysticks enable you to work in the machine alignment. However, an alignment change may be made in order to work in the part alignment by pressing this key. Simply press this key again to revert to the machine alignment. The LED associated with this key will be red when the joysticks’ alignment is the part alignment.

put the machine in "high-speed" or "low-speed" mode. When the CNC is in high-speed mode, the LED associated with the key is green. When the CNC is in low-speed mode, the LED associated with the key is switched off.

Page 2512

Metrolog XG5 release notes           

Geometrical Features Free Form Features Reporting Probes management Alignment GM2 and DMIS Part Programs Import - Export Laser Tracker and Portable CMM CAD file Functionalities Optic sensors Miscellaneous

Geometrical Features 

Possibility to measure a projection plane on the fly when manually measuring a 2D feature (circle,

Page 2513

   

arc, rectangle, slot,...). Option to automatically measure a feature by clicking on CAD model improved. Clearance Planes algorithms improved. Measurement of Gasket scan, using point to point or scanning mode, specific method for programming scanning path. GD&T: Support of Composite Tolerances.

Free Form Features      

Possibility to define sections by clicking on CAD model curves. Measuring sections in continuous mode. Surface points new projection mode: Scribe Line. Possibility to modify the projection surface for a group of selected surface points from the features database. Probe radius automatically taken into account in the search distance for surface points projection. New rules for surface points Normal Deviation calculation (can be based on probing direction, or on CAD normal or on definition alignment).

Reporting     

Edit views in report editor (modify zoom, stickers, display options, etc. and save modifications in view or in program). Wizard for creating reports. News modes for positioning stickers: sticker can be automatically created from a selection of feature and positioned close to the feature. Use the active sticker's parameters to define the default parameters for all stickers. Stickers features symbols can be customized.

Probes management   

Error management during probe calibration is improved. Scanning speed and probing speed in scanning mode are two separate parameters. Zeiss DSE probe head is supported.

Alignment   

New degree of freedom for Best-Fit Alignment function: Scale Factor. Best-Fit's Scale Factor is supported in Expansion/Shrinking function. Possibility to define alignments by selecting imported alignment entities in the CAD database.

GM2 and D.M.I.S. Part Programs      

DMIS engine: Extreme Point Construction function is implemented (CONST/EXTREM). Use variables in the construction of planes by offset. Open Working Session command supported into a part program. DMIS engine: when constructing features, nominal values are automatically recorded into program. DMIS engine: program is generated based on default Precision Parameters. Following DMIS commands are supported: - OBTAIN/SA(MyProbe),10 - DMESW/COMAND,'SAVEWORKSESSION,MyWorkingSession' - DMESW/COMAND,'FAMILY',MyNewFamilyName,Feat1,Feat2,Feat3.

Import - Export     

Import DMIS 4.x to DMIS 5.0 (mainly for scanning instructions). IDP (Intelligent Data parser) to import any generic ASCII files. Possibility to choose features to export, different from those to be printed. Export points with detailed information (Metrolog for Leica only). Export working session results to MM3 file format improvement.

Laser Tracker and Portable CMM  

Circles and arcs can be measured with 1 point and rectangles and slot with 2 points. More detailed information in the feature's Detailed View about probing, when using a Laser Tracker (reflector used, temperature, humidity, etc.).

Page 2514

       

Assistant for measuring gravity plane (Metrolog for Leica only). Function "take a $ point" is implemented, $ point is now displayed in 3D view. Commands Initialize, Go Birdbath, Switch to Face1/Face2 supported in program. Spatial or Temporal modes are implemented when scanning points using a Laser Tracker. "Stable measurement" mode is implemented. Point is automatically taken as soon as reflector is in a stable position, using a Laser Tracker. New mode to detect probing direction on Faro arms. Probes changes are automatically detected on Romer Sigma arms. Lasers Trackers are virtually displayed in 3D view (Metrolog for Leica only).

CAD file Functionalities       

Import of CAD files assembly by created separated (*.su3) files for both Catia V5 and ProE via toolkit files. Import of CatProduct including both Catia V4 and Catia V5 files. Possibility to visualize surfaces direction of a CAD model using colors and can invert this direction directly on 3D view. Create layers in a CAD file containing entities all of which have the same color. Catia v5 "Datum Targets" are supported. IDEAS (SDRC) dimensional tolerances are supported (displayed in 3D view). Alignments data imported and supported in CAD database (IGES, Catia V4 and V5 formats).

Optical sensors        

Optical laser scanner sensors are supported (definition, calibration,...). Cloud of points acquisition by scanning. Geometrical features extraction from cloud of points. Cloud of points are displayed in the 3D view. Cloud of points can be exported/imported. Beam is displayed in the DRO window. Datapixel (Optiscan), Kreon (KZ25, KZ50, KZ100), Perceptron and Metris (LC et XC) sensors supported. Parameter set-up in Setup Assistant.

Miscellaneous      

On line help and documentation completely updated. New setting in 3d View to change Color Mapping display. Comma decimal separator is supported in features definition windows. Expansion/Shrinking function improved (scale factor, distance, etc.). Default name incrementing can be modified. DMIS Script Engine improvement.

Page 2515

Metrolog XG6 release notes        

Features Programs Import / Export Program Engines GM2 and DMIS 3D View Standardization Lasers Trackers Optical Sensors Miscellaneous

Features   

New projection methods for surface points when importing a *.PNT file. New selection mode (according to the probing direction) for eligible surfaces when projecting a surface point. New projection mode for 3-D Curves without Probe Radius compensation.

Page 2516



Export Working Session to Howmet format.

Programs Import / Export    

Export DMIS programs to Sheffield formats (MeasureMax et FLB). New dialog window to configure the options for Umess/UX exports. PcDMIS and Umess program imports improved. Import Programs in Holos format.

Program Engines GM2 and DMIS       

Updates the measurement statements when an alignment has been inserted or modified in a program. Possibility to automatically generate program lines containing geometrical point definition and measurement statements of the probing points of a feature. Undo function to reverse the deletion of lines in DMIS and GM2 programs. Improved verification tool to check the syntax of DMIS programs. Allow to copy/paste between DMIS text editor and other text editors. Duplicate lines by translating or rotating a group of selected lines in a DMIS program. Use of a source feature, that has been defined and measured, to create DMIS program lines that contain the same characteristics as the feature used but have different positions.

3D View  

New control methods for the mouse in the 3-D view. Geometrical Alignment: Preview of the alignment in the 3-D view.

Standardization   

Font menus linked to Windows Configuration. Script Engine : supports Unicode characters. Report Editor : supports Unicode characters.

Lasers Trackers     

Improved Status Toolbar for Tracker (addition of an image showing the active face, precision management). Option to automatically close the Camera window once the Laser is ready. Option to take a $ point if the machine protocol supports it. $ point shown in 3-D view when taken. T-Probe continuous mode automatically deactivated when a window is opened for the 6 Surface Point alignment, Model 3-2-1 Alignment or the 1 Point alignment.

Optical Sensors   

A cloud of points obtained by scanning can automatically be assigned to a family. New dialog window for Optical Sensors setup. Supports Leica T-Scan.

Miscellaneous   

Connect simultaneously with several machines, configure set-up in the Setup Assistant. New button that allows the selection of a list of expired probes to be calibrated automatically. Windows XP64 architecture integrated.

Page 2517

Metrolog XG7 release notes            

Features Geometrical tolerances Import / Export GM2 Program Engine DMIS Program Engine CAD Report printing 3D View Probes Laser Trackers Optical Sensors Miscellaneous

Features

Page 2518

      

The default parameters of the different types of surface points may be selected independently. Management of the default parameters linked with the automatic projection plane for 2D features (circle, rectangle, etc.). You may choose not to delete the features already acquired during measurement of N surface points when closing the measurement window. Improved parameter management when performing a sequence of several automatic feature measurements by multiple selection in the database. New point construction method added: point construction from two points and an offset. Feature filtering: section features supported, high-pass and band-pass filters added. Measurement of a cone constrained and reduced to a circular path supported.

Geometrical tolerances  

Directional runout for cone type features supported (total runout). ISO tolerances for distance type features supported.

Import / Export   

The result lines to be exported may be selected when selecting advanced mode features for file export. Polar coordinates supported in DMO file import. Asian fonts supported in DMO files.

GM2 program engine    

The nominal and tolerances associated with a feature may be sent in Twin mode. Enhanced safety in Twin mode: if program execution is interrupted on a CMM, execution of the other program is immediately interrupted. Restart may be performed from any station. Automatic adjustment of approach and retract distances to the center during 2D feature measurement (circle, etc.). Feature names may be iterated with '$' in "While" type loops.

DMIS program engine         

Functions not supported by the DMIS language can no longer be accessed (menu items grayed out). Teach-in of the TOL/PROFP tolerance for geometrical points now supported. In Teach-in mode, automatic grouping of the OUTPUT lines as a single instruction. Support of polar coordinates for the GOTO and PTMEAS instruction. The PTMEAS, FEAT, MEAS, GOTO, CONST, DEVICE/STOR and GEOM/MODEL instructions are now modified via a dialog box. Inserting commands via the Script Engine triggers execution of these commands. The GCURVE feature is supported (choice of method between DMIS 4.0 or DMIS 5.0). CODEPAGE-related coding supported. For controllers that do not manage approach and retract automatically, via points corresponding to the approach point and retract point may be generated.

CAO   

ProE WildFire3. Unigraphics NX4. CAD entities may be created form ellipse, rectangle, hexagon, slot, geometrical point and surface point type features.

Report printing   

A Comment instruction has been created, allowing comments (titles) to be inserted in the printed results table. This instruction is also used for comments in the program. Definition alignment column added in the report results table. In the report editor, alignment of the size of resizable objects on the magnetic grid.

3D View   

A Group of points type feature may be clicked to define it as the center of rotation in the 3D View. Creation of a specific detailed view for the roundness tolerance. Multiple selection in the 3D View by drag-and-drop (elements selected in a selection box).

Page 2519

Probes    

Enhanced scanning probe management according to calibration type. Linear/circular paths may be used without taking the safety margin for probe diameter into account. Unsupported functions are deactivated on connection with a DME/I++ or CMM/OS CMM. Enhanced Probe definition window with the selected head displayed in the Setup Assistant.

Lasers Trackers     

Build & Inspect : surface points and geometrical points supported.. Build & Inspect : scene objects memorized in the working session. Continuous scanning grids for measurement of planes, geometrical points and surface points supported (Leica Tracker only). Improved automatic measurement performance in program mode (Leica Tracker only). T-Probe Leica : shaft probe measurement supported..

Optical sensors    

Surface point projection time optimized. Points in a cloud of points may be deleted by selecting them in the 3D View. Improved feature extraction from a cloud of points. Rapid Color Mapping: a new calculation mode for a large number of points.

Miscellaneous     

Clearance Planes: it is now possible to work with a number of planes instead of the complete containing box. Polar coordinates supported in the Positioning/Probing window. I, J, K coordinates and polar coordinates supported in the calculation of mathematical expressions (Text-value feature, conditional instructions). Surface point projection time optimized. Working session and program information may be used in Text-Value features.

Page 2520

Metrolog XG8 release notes          

Point Cloud Features Trackers and Arms functionalities Import / Export GM2 program engine DMIS Program Engine CAD 3D View Probes Miscellaneous

Point Cloud    

Full Metrolog optimization to be able to process millions of points. New database point cloud tab page. Possibility to acquire clouds in manual (using arms or laser) or automatic modes (using arms, T-Scan, CMMs). Three new alignment creation instructions point cloud oriented: Quick-fit Best-fit

Page 2521

      

Fit on retrieved features Improvement of feature retrieve functionality (circle, plane, flush and gap...). New "Surface Mapping feature for point cloud analysis on the complete CAD or on a part of the CAD. Ability to generate automatically a color mapping associated to this feature. New Flush & Gap feature. Point cloud meshing with optional smoothing included. Advanced point cloud filtering functionalities. AC, PSL, STL, MTL import / export file formats. Specific toolbar for point cloud 3D view visualization.

Features            

Better consistency between Surface Point and Geometrical Point : same display, same result window, same automatic measurement methods, same print report, same way to define coordinates. All feature construction fields can be set with calculated values. Ability to define circle on a cone surface with automatic diameter adjustment. Possibility to use CAD curves or sophisticated CAD projections to define surface points or geometrical points. New construction of a geometrical point : offset a point along a direction and a distance. Best-fit feature construction based on other features probing points. Construction of line based on other feature direction (main axis or normal). Automatic inner / outer property recognition in the feature definition dialogs, according to the click or the CAD. It is now possible to evaluate a circularity on a cone (ISO 1101:2004). Feature naming rule improvement. Warning during definition if the shape does not fit the feature. (if a user try to define a circle on elliptic shape). Single and total runout improvement.

Trackers and Arms functionalities   

 

Possibility to use a Metrologic Bundle available to all types of trackers and arms. Sphere and circle features can now be used as orientation points. Improvements in the Build & Inspect: a control points prefix name and a family name can be set, possibility to compare axial feature to cylinder parallel or not to the current alignment axes, possibility to compare cylinders and cones features to reference shapes. Ability to combine automatic mode and manual probing. Support point temperature compensation for Leica, API, Faro tracker.

Import / Export   

Support of the GSURF statement in the DMO import. Possibility to import basic point files in working sessions (position, position with normal, point name and position, etc.). Features (including 3D features shape) can be exported as IGES file.

GM2 program engine     





Improvements in path display (ability to display path on part program selection or on all program, and possibility to display only probing points). Direct jump from active feature to its definition instruction in a part program. New Find and Replace dialog. New program import format: DAT. Improvements in the PNT program converter: define and/or measurement instructions, automatic normal calculation by projection on CAD, selection of the features of the file. Improvement of the POLAR coordinates management : teach probing points in the coordinates system of the definition feature, teach constructions in the coordinates system based on the coordinates system of the features, support polar coordinates in the Convert Hit Points dialog. New security position management instructions.

Page 2522

 

Possibility to force a part program to be run in automatic mode. Manual probing assistant can now be based on probing points during a part program execution.

DMIS program engine    



  

New dialog to generate easily OUTPUT instructions. Approach and Retract distances automatically adapted to feature size. And these instructions are now learned in the part program. Automatic recovery of head position and execution mode in a DMIS part program. Improvements in the PNT program converter: define and/or measurement instructions, automatic normal calculation by projection on CAD, selection of the features of the file. Improvement of the POLAR coordinates management : teach probing points in the coordinates system of the definition feature, teach constructions in the coordinates system based on the coordinates system of the features, support polar coordinates in the Convert Hit Points dialog. Possibility to run an external program via the ScriptEngine. Ability to set a prefix feature name in the Convert Hit Points to Geometrical Points dialog. Ability to update feature/alignment databases when editing DMIS alignment statements.

CAD      

CAD entities orientation visualization in the 3D view. Possibility to reverse the entity orientation. When defining a geometrical feature from a CAD entity, automatic inner / outer property initialization based on the surface orientation. Possibility to create a CAD surface by extension with one click on a circle. Catia V5 R17 supported. Automatic CAD surfaces re-orientation with one click.

3D View      

Ability to show / hide alignment representation in 3D view for current or CAD alignments. It is now possible to modify the alignments axes sizes. New statistic histogram column that can be added in stickers. New detailed 3D view for form tolerances (flatness, straightness, circularity and cylindricity). The feature names are now displayed in transparency in the 3D view. Stickers: feature icon depends of the font size.

Probes   

Faster continuous probes qualification process based on simple points calibration. Optimized SP600 and SP25 probes calibration. Support of "L" continuous probes calibration (manual and automatic).

Miscellaneous      

It is now possible to define the translation values of a geometrical alignment directly by clicking in the 3D view. Possible to auto-detect CMM parameters in the Setup Assistant. New possibility to choose between nominal and actual values in calculated values. New setting to define the delay between continuous mode and standard mode (portable CMM). When using the Operator mode, the starting program folder is always reinitialized to its right value after a program execution. Advanced settings panel can be resized.

Page 2523

Metrolog XG9 release notes             

Geometrical Tolerances Point Cloud Measurements Features GM2 Program Engine DMIS Program Engine CAD Alignments Probes Laser tracker DMIS Script Engine Miscellaneous Functions available since XG 9.002

Geometrical Tolerances   

Advanced GD&T engine for geometrical tolerances computation based on new mathematical models. Some modules or complex cases are optional. New user interface to define tolerances and datum features in few clicks. Automatic computation of the tolerances based on datum features with an automatic optimization

Page 2524

      

and a automatic creation of the Gage Alignment. There are no more manual operations. Ability to display in the stickers the tolerance symbol. Support of profiles of surfaces and positions with any datum features, support of composite profiles and positions. Support of 3D computations. Ability to compute datum features alignments based on the ASME criteria or on the Least Square criteria. Ability to choose between ASME or ISO standards. Ability to check and set the degrees of freedom after optimization. Ability to define and measure or retrieve automatically features from a selection of tolerances (from features or CAD database).

Point Cloud               

Improve performance of Point Cloud handling. Allow selection of points by lasso mode. Surface Mapping: projection on the nearest surface from the sensor. New filtering method to remove isolated clusters. Ability to project cloud of point onto a mesh (Surface Mapping). New fully automatic Auto Fit Alignment for point clouds. Simplified Retrieve using single clicks. Ability to Define and retrieve features or tolerances automatically from CAD database. Retrieve algorithm improvement: better distribution of points along hole boundaries. Max depth parameter in the Retrieve panels for holes. Remove unused parameters in the acquisition panel with Leica TScan connection. Retrieve Plane: support free form boundary and restrictions. Sound assistant in order to know if the optical probe can take scans. Metris 3 laser planes display in the 3D View. Flush and Gap improvement.

Measurements 

Automatic update of the search/approach/retract distances for circles, arcs, cylinders and spheres, depending on the diameter of the features, the diameter of the ball and the Inner/Outer type.

Features  

Ability to use planes with Point by offset construction. Ability to use Mesh for surface points projection.

GM2 Program Engine  

Option to inactivate Twin errors management (stop/start automatically or not the second machine in case of error on the first machine). New command Run to in order to execute the part program until the selected line.

DMIS Program Engine    

Improvement in handling polar coordinates (WKPLAN management). OBTAIN and OUTPUT support for defined lines with BND or UNBND. OBTAIN can support strings. New command Run to in order to execute the part program until the selected line. New user interface for APTSource and Quindos import.

Page 2525

CAD  

Improvements of the Catia V5, UGS NX5 and STEP converters. New Mesh node in the CAD database. A mesh can be created from a cloud of point with facets.

Alignments  

Improvement of the One Point Alignment: ability to set 1 to 3 offsets to define the origin from current probe positions. Full alignment name visible in the Result window thanks to a tool tip.

Probes     

Ability to define heads and probes from libraries or from an graphical editor. This instruction can be saved in a GM2 part program. Ability to display head and probe in the 3D View. The user can choose to display full head and probes, only the ball or nothing in the 3D View. Automatic calibration can be done without qualification based on the nominal definition of the head/probe. The user can still qualify the head by measurements. Automatic calibration: ability to select the tip the user wants to calibrate. Ability to define a probe validity date lower than a day.

Laser Tracker      

New function Move to Active Feaure in order to send the beam to the current feature. Point automatic measurement optimization (Leica only). Station management: a station memorize now the radius compensation mode. New panel to enter the environmental parameters when the user start the application if the laser tracker doesn't have a meteo station (Leica only). Build & Inspect: new mode to see the deviation in the active alignment. Sound assistant in order to inform user when beam is lost.

DMIS Script Engine           

Ability to get and set definition alignment, Inner/Outer, and coordinates type from a feature. Ability to get the alignments list. Ability to display picture. Variables declaration improvement. Array management improvement. Improvement of the Search and Replace command. Ability to define statement like DO...UNTIL. Ability to define radio buttons. Ability to define filter on features. Support new commands SDATE, STIME, TRIM, GET_INFO... Ability to get the probes list and to get data from probes.

Miscellaneous   

Ability to get Metrologic controller serial number in the About box. Ability to center the 3D View on the feature selected in the features database. Ability to start the software with a GM2 or DMIS program as argument: the program will be

Page 2526

       

automatically executed. Resizable Open/Save dialogs. Gear module. Relative record of the CAD files in a working session if the CAD files are in the same directory or in a subdirectory of the working session. Feature database: quick access to measure manually or automatically a features selection. Feature database: ability to define feature from the actual data. Feature database: improvement of the panel to delete feature(s). Warning when importing points already existing. Automatic display of the Browse panel during execution of a program when it does not find the file to import.

Functions available since XG 9.002   

  

DMIS: RMEAS command is now supported for slot measurement. Automatic measurement: depth of paths can be defined from any reference plane. Add new Unlock/Lock Head command (in order to reset the head after a collision). This command can be added in the stylus/tools changer procedures. This command is only available with Metrologic ME5008 controller. Automatic surface point measurement: ability to measure surface points to inspect the edge of a surface with relative probing point management (relative to point, line or plane). Scanning measurement (SP25, SP600...): add a warning if number of probing points is less than a percentage of the required number of points. Ability to reset scales on the reference marks with an offset (which can be different on each axis).

Page 2527

Metrolog XG10 release notes             

Color Mapping Setup Assistant Features Measurement Alignment Point Cloud Export and Report Editor Geometrical Tolerances GM2 Program Engine DMIS Program Engine Optical sensors Miscellaneous Functions available since XG 10.002

Color Mapping  

Automatic scale values according to deviations for color mapping scale. New color scale configuration and parameters.

Page 2528

Setup Assistant  

Possibility to setup the temperature sensor and to set a rotary table inside the setup assistant. Modification of the 21-parameters compensation into 23-parameters compensation.

Features       

Support of multi-selection in one construction activity. New probe radius compensation mode depending on the CAD direction. New Surface feature. Algorithm optimization for the feature computing performance. Automatic surface point measurement: ability to measure surface points to inspect the edge of a surface with relative probing point management (relative to point, line or plane). Ability to use planes with Point by offset construction. New method to define a line (by position, direction, length and possibly a normal to the projection plane).

Measurement     

New probing strategy for geometrical point (space, angle, corner). Ball center automatic compensation during geometric point measurement. Global Magic Stick: find the nearest feature to measure / to extract from the current probe position. New measurement mode: possibility to measure a point as a sphere fit with or without limit point in scan block. Start a scan block from a stable probing to avoid the press F7 key.

Alignment     

Possibility to use axial features in the origin setup for the Geometrical alignment. New alignment based on features with measurement wizard for quick fit alignment. Best fit alignment enhancement: based on tolerance feature only for point. Best fit alignment enhancement: use tolerances values with same sign inside constraint criteria. Possibility to associate a picture in the stickers of the features used in the last RPS Alignment.

Point Cloud  

Point cloud import: Rasterized-AC files are now supported. When moving the mouse on a point cloud, visualization of point coordinates and possibility to extract it as a surface point.

Export and Report Editor   

Advanced print activity with filter / order / assign alignment capacity. Possibility to change alignment expression when exporting files. Improvement of the QDAS export.

Geometrical Tolerances 

Evaluate tolerance user interface improvement.

Page 2529



Support of datum target with offset with the advanced tolerance function.

GM2 Program Engine   

Print the probes file during part program activity. Display in the error message the value of the feature form fault when it exceeds maximum value. Possibility to modify the measurement mode of a surface points group: point to point or continuous mode (only with SIP and ME5008).

DMIS Program Engine    

Support of the ROTSET command. Support of the TRANS command. Improvement of the RMEAS command for 2D feature measurement. Support of the CONSTBF command.

Optical sensors     

Automatic calibration of an optical sensor on a probe head if this configuration has been previously created or if the head has been qualified with 4 positions. Improvement of the optical sensor positioning on sphere before calibration. Auto scrolling of the 3D view on the current scan. Possibility to adapt the optical sensor movement during an acquisition (only with ME5008). On portable measuring device with optical sensor, one touch on the acquisition button starts the scan and another touch on this same button stops it.

Miscellaneous    

Add new Unlock/Lock Head command. This command can be added in the stylus/tools changer procedures (only with ME5008). Ability to reset scales on the reference marks with an offset (which can be different on each axis). Catia V5 import improvement : best tolerances management. Possibility to define the angles A and B of a probe head orientation by clicking directly on a CAD surface or on a feature.

Functions available since XG 10.002        

Improvement of PRD import. Improvement of EMB import: management of design variants. Improvement of CATIA V5 file import: taking account of the unilateral criterion ofor geometric tolerances of the line and surface profiles. New export format: TSV export. Addition of t he Offset according to normal function in the geometric point definition window. Addition of alignment creation date in their properties window. Addition of preview of translation and rotation values during creation of an alignment information. Support of new romer NCA arm via driver RDS.

Page 2530

Metrolog XG11 Release Notes         

Geometrical Tolerances Point Cloud Measurements Features GM2 Program Engine DMIS Program Engine CAD Alignments Miscellaneous

Geometrical Tolerances 

Ability to measure or extract a surface feature when evaluating a GD&T profile.

Point Cloud 

Improvement of the surface mapping sticker now showing two links to the min and max extracted

Page 2531

       

points. Ability to teach an acquisition command line into the program without being connected. Ability to teach an extraction command line into a program, without point cloud in the session. Ability to record in a GM2 program the point cloud database attributes (visibility and color). Ability to acquire several scan groups without closing the acquisition window, thanks to the new repeat function. New point cloud selection toolbar for filtering and extracting functions. Ability to merge scan paths within the point cloud database. Improvement of the quick fit split graphic views, one is only displaying the point cloud and the other only the CAD file. Ability to define an exclusion area during scanning by selecting a plane.

Measurements   

Improvement of the measurement mode function, when probing using spherical artifacts, by adding an additional hit point counter. Improvement of the Built&Inspect function : ability to measure 3D curve points with or without projection and probe compensation. Improvement of the Built&Inspect function : new feature name and family management, ability to change the feature name while measuring.

Features      

Ability to duplicate a multi-selection of features. Ability to force CAD alignment as defining alignment when defining a feature with a specific setting. Ability to set a material thickness on a surface feature. Ability to retrieve I, J, K values from 2D features when using variables. New values calculated on section : average deviations (signed and unsigned). Ability to change the type of coordinates (Cartesian, Cylindrical, ...) on a multi-selection of features from the feature database.

GM2 Program Engine  

Ability to force probe center correction when importing PNT files from the program menu. Ability to change the type of coordinates (Cartesian, Cylindrical, ...) on a multi-selection of feature statements in a program.

DMIS Program Engine   

Improvement of the search and replace function. Ability to modify the name of the features, alignments and probes by adding a prefix, suffix,... when doing a mirror program. Ability to manage surface features in DMIS.

CAD 

Improvement of the Unigraphics CAD file import with NX6 format now supported.

Alignments 

Ability to select families in the best fit alignment inputs.

Miscellaneous  

T-Probe stylus mount is now displayed in the tracker toolbar. New "Connecting..." status display during Leica laser tracker connection.

Page 2532

 

Ability to display a multi-lines comment on a text value sticker. Improvement of the temperature monitor with ability to set a maximum range and display a warning when the temperature is out of range.

Page 2533